IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-l)
;**^
jy
'i ■'*• .
»*■■-
»
;
1.0
I.I
til
-T/-^
1.25
Its'
■tt liiii 12.2
.DM
' 1.4 ■ 1.6
,6"
?
»
X.
Photographic*
-Sciences --:
Corporation
'^r^^^v ^
at WMT MAM STtir
yVIMTIt.N.Y. I4SI0
^
■f
,•*
(7U) •73-4S09
* ♦
*.
*
"
■-*'■■'
CIHM/ICMH
* -
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Collection de
k
Series.
microfiches. >
>
*
Is
W _' _ ^
r
.v-_. _ —
-;'
'•«*
>
•^T
•"S^
-.^v
Canadian Institute for Historicai IVIicroreproductions / Inatitut Canadian da microraproductions hiatoriquaa
' *.
M
Technical and Bibliographic Notaa/Notas tachniquaa at bibliographiquca
Tha Inttituta haa aRamptad to obtain tha baat
original copy availabia for filming, ^aaturaa of thia
copy which may ba bibiiographieaHy uniqua.
which may aitar any of tha imagaa in tha
raproduction, or Which may significantly changa
tha uaual mathod of filming, ara chackad balow.
D
Colourad covara/
Couvartura da coulaur
r~n Covara damagad/
D
D
Couvactura andommagAa
Covara raatorad and/or laminatad/
Couvartura raatauria at/ou pallicul^
Covar titia missing/
ta titra da couvortur* manqua
r~~l Colourad mapa/
Cartaa gAograpMquaa an coulaur
Colourad ihk (i.a. othar than blua or black)/
Encra da coulaur (i.a; autra qua blaua ou noira)
□ ColouradTplataa and/or illuatrationa/
Planchaa at/ou illuatrationa an coulaur
□ Bound with otfiar matarial/
Rali4 avac d'autraa documants • -
D
Tight binding may.cauaa shadowa or distortion
along intarior margin/
Laroliura sarria paut eauaar da I'ombra ou da la
diatoraion la long da la marga int4riaur»
□ B(ank laavaa addad during rastoration may
appaar within tho ta|(t. Whanovar possibla. thaaa
hava baan omittad from filming/
II sa paut qua eartainss pagas bianchss ajoutiaa
lors d'una raatauration apparaiaaant dans la taxta.
mala, lorsqua cala «tait poaaibia, caa pagaa n'ont
paa iti fitmaaa.
4»
□ Additional eommanta:/
Commantairaa supplAmantairaa:
L'Inatitut a microfilm* 1« maillaur axamplaira
qu'il iui a ataj>ossibia da sa procurer. Las datails
da cat axamplaira qui sont paut-«tr« uniquas du ,
point da vua bibliographiqua. qui pouvont modifier
una image raproduite. ou qiii pauvent exiger une
modification dans la mathoda normale de fiimage
sont indiquta ci-dessous.
r~| Coloured pages/
Pagae da coulaur
Pagaa damagad/
Pagaa endommegaes
D
El
Pagaa reatored and/or laminatad/ ,
Pagaa reatauraea at/ou pellicuiaea
Pagaa discoloured, staiffad or foxed/
Pagas dacoloraes. tadhtt^as ou piquAas
r~~\ Pagaa detached/
Pagaa datachaes
Showthrough>
Tranaparanca
Quality of prir
Qualiti in^gaia da ('impression
includes supplementary matarii
Comprend du metariel suppi^mentaira
Only edition availabia/
Sauie adition disponibia
rri Showthrough/
rn Quality of print varies/
|~n includea supplementary material/ a»
I — j Only edition availabia/
□ Pages wholly or psrtially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc.. hava been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Lea pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuilletd 'errata, une peiure.
etc.. ont ata filmaes A nouveau de fapon a
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
This item is filmed at tha reduction ratio i:hecked below/
Ce document est filma au taux de raduction indiqua ci-daaaoua.
10X UX ItX 22X
%
7
12X
IfX
2^
mtm
XX
aox
UX
mx
«X
«tails
M du ^
nodifier
>r una
ilmaga
IS
Th« copy f1lin«d hcraluw bmtm raproducsd thanks
to th« g«n«ro«ity of:
D.B.WeldonUiir8ry ' *
Univsnity of Wsftmm Ontario
(Rsgional Hiitory Room)
Tho imagoo appoaring hora ara tha baat quality
poaaibia eonaidaring tha eoiMlition and iagibility
of tha original copy and in Icaaping with tha
filming contraat apadficationa.
Original copiaa in printad papar eovara ara fllmad
baginning with tha front eovar and andlng on
tha laat pi^ga with a printad or illuatratad impraa-
tion, or tha bacic eovar whan appropriata. All
othar original copiaa ara filmad baginning on tha
first paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa-
sion, and anding on tha Iwt paga with a printad .
or ilhistratad impraaalon.^
L'axamplaira filmA fut raproduit grica i la
g^niroaiti da:
D. B. Waldon Library
Uoivarsity of Wattsrn Ontario
(Rsgional History Room) ^
Laa imagaa suivantaa ont 4t4 raproduitaa avac la
plua grand aoin, compta tanu da la condition at
da la nattat* da I'axamplaira fllmA, at an
OonformitA avac laa conditiona du contrat da
fUmaga.
Laa axamplairaa orlginaux dont la couvartura an
papiar aat impHm4a sont film4a an commandant
par la pramiar plat at an tarminant soit par la
damlAralMKia qui comporta una amprainta
d'impraaaion ou d'liluatration, soit par la sacond
plat, salon la cas. Tous las autras axamplairas
orlginaux sont fUmia an commandant par la
prami4ra paga 'qui comporta una amprainta
dimpraaalon ou dllluatration at mn tarminant par
la damlAra paga qui comporta una talla
amprainta.
Tha laat racordad frama on aach microficha
shall contain ttia symbol ««>> (maaning "'COJN-
tlfriUED"). or tha symbol ▼ (maaning "END"),
whichavar appiiaa. .
Un"daa symbolaa sulvants apparaltra sur la
damlAra imaga da chaqua microficha. salon la
caa: la symbola — »> signifia "A SUIVRE". la
symbola ▼ signifia "FIN".
irrata
to
Mapa, piataa. chf rt», ate., may ba fllmad at
diffarant raduetion ratioa* Thoaa too larga to ba
antiraiy ineludad in ona axpoaura ara filmad
baginning in ttia uppar laft hand«eomar. laft to
right and top to bottom, aa many framaa aa
raquirad. Tha following diagrama iUuatrata tha
mathod:
psiura.
V
%
1
2
3
Laa oartaa. planchas. tablaaux. ate., pauvant Atra
filmAa i daa taux da rMUction diffiranta.
Loraqua la documant aat trop grand pour 4tra
raproduit 9n un saul clich4. 11 aat filmA i partir
da I'angla supAriaur gaucha, da gaucha k droita.
at da haut an Imm, an pranant la nombra
d'Imagas n4caasaira. Las dla^rammas 'suivsnts
illustrant la mAthoda.
D
«x
1
4
S
6
^
f ' ' ' . « ' ■ ■ '
"i
-
■ . ■ ■ V
V
^
.*»
'■■
. . ■ ■ .• -. ■ -'^-
- •
•
.
m
■^i..
-^»4^.
<
1
V ■ - . ,- ■ ■■'■' -■■"." 4 ..:■'-■■■-,.■..■ , - ■■
¥ »
': '-4- *''■ ' '■-■'•'-■
■■■-.■ ■■■!-■.
/^
*, c^^
THE NEW
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK
FIOR
ELEMENTARY AND- ADVANCED CLASSES
'>v IN HIGH SCHOOLS, *^ : -
CONTAINING
INTRODUCTORY LESSONS, AUTHORS, AND
,PROSE COMPOSITION.
BY
ADAM CARrVthE^^s! M.A.;
Lecturer mt Greek.yUniversUy College, TormUo, '
T^l:nc? ROBERTSON, B.A.,
Amnnate Pn^femtr cif Greek, Kirtorio College, TormUo.
V
TORONTO:
WILLIAM BRIQQs,
/
' -'^ fc.
9
^-
r
' *
Entered accordlnR to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the y^ one
thousand nine hundred, by William Brioos. at the Department of
Agriculture.
N
,^■1 \
<&f i ■
~^^-s.""
V
■tv
vt
<>.^
.*'
■■■l-' ■-•'■"
S/
«t .
■*■««
y
« «
'
•
ft
-.:^^. :
-T*/ - " -:
■ •
-,. ■: .-, ■ /:
-
*
•
(
\
'
/
.
•
o.
.*
/•
PRERACE.
\
Thb present edition of the Primary Latih B6ok appears in
response to instructions from the Edncation Department of
Ontario, which desires that the authorized text-books in
Latm shsjl retain, unchanged and unrevised, thp Introductorv, -j^
Lemons of the former text-books, and shall also include the
selections from Nepos and C»sar prescribed tor matriculation ^
. by the University of Toronto, together w«h amiotations)
vocabularies and exercises in prpse composition and si '
translation based on these-selections".^ ■ '
. The authors regret that it has proved impossible for ™ ■
present to secure permission to revise, the Introductory ti
sops also. One .«suit is a diffe«,n«e- between the old and the"
new portion of the book in the marking of the "hidden
quantities » of certain words-a matter on which much new
hght has been thrown since th« -Brst appearance of the
Primaht Latin Book in .1892. The chief differences are in
the words c&sl, clfasis and jdasi; ftrmus, mrlHmmia, «JlFctu^
quirtus, vallum and vSstO, which, it is now Wriyeatat
lished, are to be marked as above.
ToBOHTO, j4«ju««, 1900; v.
¥
.;:i:-
>/
«i.1
«%•-
. . . . '
• -
:r['
-
t
I
«
. * ■
*
-* * ■ ',
^^
•
■;
w
'
:N .. - "^ . ■ -
■ - V -
:.■-- .1 .■..,. .
'.^
'
[
f ■■ ■ -■
If ,
• , ■
"V ■'-■■
.♦.
'
•
•
Mi'
\
/
■f
f
.
^'."^
■■:;;■:;
■' ^ '':'. '■
c •
' -'¥-;-' '^.-''-
' ' f
. ■ • ■
'■'' ■ I
■p
K
cont;ents.
PAST
te.
I. Introductory Lessons and Exermsed
II. Preparatory Lessons in Continuous Readinff *
m. Inflection- ™»aing .
I. Paradigms of Inflation , .
_ 11. Epitome of Rules and Peculiarities .* .* *
IV. Selections from Nepos and Caesar, with Annotations- '
Nepos : Themistocles, Aristides, Hannibal
;^ Caesar : De Bello Gallico, Bk, IV., Bk. V. 1-2.3
Annotations on the Selections .
V. Latin Prose Composition and Translation at Sightl *
I. Rules of Syntax and Exercises in Prose Composit
11. iixercises in Translation at Sight
VI. Vocabularies and Index—
; I. Latin-English Vocabulary
: IL English-Latin Vocabulary n~\ ■ ' \ °!
III. Index . . ' ' '\
PAOV
. 1
. 115
.170
. 185
..201
.229
ion. 285
. 448
. 466
. 528
. 559
■■■;g:;PART L
■%-* ■■'■■■ '-- - ':",>*^'' o
I.B80H ^*^^^^°»Y I^«8SON8 AND Exercises.
Introductory.-Pronunciation. Syllabication, Accent
I. Present Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and II. \ '
II. Nominative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and 11
III. Accusative Singular and Plural of Declensions L and II '
IV. Genitive Singular and Plural of Declensions L and II '
V. Dative Singular and Plural of Declensions i. and H
_ ■«» with Accusative .
vTf' i^n':^«°* J.'»^»«»«ve Active of Conjugations' L and II ' *
VIL Ablative Singular and Plnn.1 of I^donoiuuH *
i:> tod IL
1
8
6
6
8
10
CttOT, iM, d, aft, with Ablative
v
11
VI
->■■
coirrENTs.
•#■
unsoir
VIIL
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIIL
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
XIX.
XX.
/ XXI.
XXII.
xxm.
XXIV.
XXV.
^ XXVI.
I XXVII.
XXVIII.
XXIX.
XXX.
XXXI.
^ XXXII.
XXXIII.
XXXIV.
XXXV.
XXXVI.
XXXVII.
XXXVIII.
XXXIX.
PAOB
Vocative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II.
Kouns in er and ir of Declension II. Use of -que .
Nouns in um of Declension II. Gender .
Adjectives of Declensions I. and II, . . /
Future Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and II. .
Masculine and Ferflinine Nouns of Declension II f.
Perfect Indicative Active of all Conjugations
Neuter Nouns of Declension III. . . . . .
Pluperfect Indicative Active of all Conjugations .
Prepositions a, oft, ad, cum, de, ex, in, inter, per,. post,
propter, sine, trdna 25
Future Perfect Indicative Active of all-^onjugations . 26
Adjectives of Declension III
Complementary Infinitive (Active Voice) . i
Nouns of Declension IV. . . , , .
Perfect Indicative Passive of all Conjugations . ,
Ablativ^ of Agent with a, ab . : ' . . .34
Pluperfect and Future Perfect Indicative Passive of
all Conjugations . . J ♦ ."' , .
Nouns of Declension V. Ordinal Numerals . .
Ablative of Point of Time. Accusative of Duration of
Time . . . . ... ...
Nouns of Declension III. with /-stems ' . ,, .
4*resent, Imperfect and Future Indicative Passive of
Conjugations I. and II. . :» ■, {*" , .
Regular Comparison, of Adjiectives . ^ . .»
Indicative and Present Infinitive of num. Predicate
Adjectives . . . ... . .
Dative with Adjectives , > . ,i , . " .
Irregular Comparison of Adjectives - , - r-%^
Present^dicative Active and Passive of Conjugations
Iir and IV ...
Adjectives with Genitive in -ius ... . ■.
Imperfect and Future Indicative Active and Passive
of Conjugations III. and IV. . » .
Cardinal Numerals . ...
Active Periphrastic Conjugation . . . , .62
Use of MUle. Accusative of Extent of Space . . 53
Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs . . . 56
Relative Pronoun. i. . ' . ... . . C8
J3
15
16
18
19
20
22
24
28
29
.30
32
36
38
39
40
42
43
■ »
44
45^
46
48
49
60
61
PAOB
ue .
13
15
16
18
19
20
22
24
>ost.
25 -
IS .
26
28
29
30
32
34
of
■"•
m::-:^^
* ■
■^i»-.:::. ■
1 of
t
39
■ • ,
40
1 of
.. T . :
■ ■-•-
m ■■-^r
,
43
!ate
•
•
44
»
43^
■-■*■">
46
ons
•
48
■
49
jive
50
fll
62 .
53
66
C6
CONTENTS. ,
»■'■■■-.■
UB80K
^L. Passive Periphniatic Conjugation . . / V *
• XLII. Personal Pronouns^^o, tii is ' * * *
yJ^S* ^''a''^ ""* ^«^"* ^^ Gerundives .' .*' V . ' *
^LV ?^"i':^r°''^'- Po««-BiveProhoun;' ' '
XLV. Perfect Participle Passive % ' *
iyj?^''°*^"'^''P^"^°«^«- I^resent Infinitive* Passive -
XLIX. Demonstrative Pronouns, ipse, idem . ^'''^ V
U Ablative Absolute . . °. - ' *
• > LI. Interrogative Pronouns * ' * ' °" "
LIII. Deponent Verbs . ' * ' '
- ^V f^^'7«^8P««ifi«ation: Ommwith ^ompirative *
LV. Accusative and Infinitive ^"pawne .
m. Genitive and Ablative of eha;acte;istic* * ^* '
Present and Perfect Infinitive Passive. Infiniti;es oi
LVnr AufT'^T'- I>*«^« «^-Purpose . "'*^*^«« °^
LX. Pltjperfect Subjunctive Active. Subj;ncti;e of' sum'
Cum with Subjunctive . """'
LXI. Po8s^m . . jm£ ,. ! ; • •
LXII. Perfect Subjuncti jPtive: : Subjuictiv; P^v;
■ IXTTT ^f."^J"^°*^^««^M«ct Question . ^'^"•
LJLIII. Volo, nold, maid . 4»» * • • .
^^ ^"^'"^*" ^^^" ^ ^"^^^* N«^won ; t :
LXVI. Subjunctive of Purpose '* * * * *
LXVIH. Gerund . ' * ;
LXIX. Gerundive Construction V
LXX. Indefinite Pronouns
Supplementary Exercises ' .
I^view Exercises in AociJeiioe
Vii
PAea
68, j
69
. 61
. ^2
. 63
. 65
. 67
. 68
'. 69
72
.74 ;
76
78
79
81
84
*
J55
87- ,
88_
«9;
91
■x ^"•.-
lamic
92
94
96
97
98
100
101
102
104 f
106
^
Vlll
,j
CONTENTS.
PART V.
I. Rules of Syntax and Exercises in Prose Composition.
c
PAO«
[!oncor<J
s .
.'385'
• '
•
. 291
.•■■>-
. •
: 293
- ■.>.!.
•
/<298
/•
' •
.302
'•
' • .
. 305
."■'■ ,-■• /
•
. . 309
). 313
•
■
•
CHAFTItl
Introduotory.-^Order of Words, Order of Clauses, Conconjs .
J I. The Accusative and Inftnitlve
II. "Complementary Infinitive . . ! .
* -» III. Final Clauses (dlauses of Pur jJose) .
IV. Consecutive Clauses (Clauses of Result) .
'V. Questibns, Direct and Indirect . «^ .
yi. The Present and Perfect .Participles' .
VII. The^ Ablative Absolute . ,. , .
• Vm. Verbs Completed by the Dativ^, the Genitive or the
.' ' Al>la|bive. *The Impersonal Passive . . - . , 316
IX.. Conditional Sentei;ices . .' . . **. . . ^20
X. Clauses of Concession. Clauses of Proviso. • Conditional
Clauses of Comparison 324
XL. Uses of the Acbusativo * • •. . . . . . 327
XII. Uses of the Dative . . . . . . ^ .,331
XIII. Use^ of the Genitive . . ., . . . . 336
XIV. Usesof the Ablative . . . , I . .341
^ XV. Vef-bal Nouns — Infinitive, Gerund, Supine .♦ ". . , . 848
-* ^VJ. Verbal Adjectives — Gerundive, Participles . . ,3S52
XVJIi- Expressions of Place and Time . . ; . . 355
XVIII. Imperative. Independent 'Uses of the Subjunctive . 359
XIX. Verbs of Fearing. Uses of Quln and Quominm . . 363
XX: Dirty, Necessity, Possibility, Pei-mission .^ . . .36^
^XXI. Causal Sentences. Uses "of Cum -. : ^^ ^^-^^^ ^^^ —
XXII. . Temporal Clauses . - .' . . 373
XXIII. Personal, Demonstrative, Reflexive and Possessive Pro-
nouns« . . ' m' * • • • • 377
XliV. Indefinite Pronouns . » ' ^ ^- • '^^* •^82
iSv. The Relative Pronoun . «'.*.. ♦', •: '386
XXVL Subordinate Clauses in Indirect Narration . . .390
XXVIL Tenses of the 5jidieative. . . , - ; ^, .394
XXVIIL Indirecti^arration . ^ . .- ; . . , . 398
XXIX. Diflferent Forms of thp Noun X^ause . * * V 406
,■ •t-.
OSITION. '
PAQl
, . 281
• ' • «M«fO
^ ^ 298
7^ . 302
. .305
. . . 309
. / . 313
3r the
. . 316
. . feo
iiional
. 324
. .327
. .:33r
. .336
. 341
. . 348
. .>352
. .355
e . 359
. ms
. .36?
- i m
. . 373
B Pro
. 377
. 382
^186
. 390
.:394
. S0IS
. 406
T=-tiO=
1 .V ■;-
/•--•'
• •I
"'« •■
■:'*■
v..
■M"--^
/ ' V-
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK
\'
;/
I=fARX I,
• INTEODUCT^Y LESgoijS Ind EXERCISES.
.. ■.,>/ : - V"; ';.-»:■ ■ ■:'.■:■ •;:••:;■ ■ "■
, V- ^RONUlsrciATlON OF. LATIN-
^ ^ I. Sounds of- the Letters.» ' "
ft is ^wMied like the'first a in^oM, papa.
^ * " second /u'iV^ I. ^ «^-^
1,0^
#
&
^8
S
Jf
I
Q
6.
1i
tl
•I
II
If
II
II
^.*y.:
second aiiiafui, papai
'A
II
^
/
II
II
II
II
II
e in they. _• ' , ^
t irTat*^ • '. *- . ^ ♦ ■: ':
i inmachiig^. \\
o in obey, or the firatVin oho. ^'
• o in ^Zy, or the second o in oho.
It in^t*, or 00 in foot.
00 in hoot. • . ;
J
>*
,w
^--J
.^
m
I !
/
. ;
ll^-
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Dlphthonjfrs.
In diphthofigs both vowels phould be sounjiedan^ their
proper order.
"
f ■
ae is sounded much like the
at in padn.^
*tt -• II
ir"
II
<yu in our, houte.
06 M
M
It
wa in loade.^ j.
•i . H
11
II
ei in vein.
•U ij
11
II
ew in blew.
tti ' It
- 11'
II _
ttat in tveep.
'.W .
Consonants,
",. V
Consonants are for the most part pronounced i^ in English,
with the following exceptions : .- *
. " * . ■.■".'■■■.■•
0' is always i^unded as ip com«, liever as in cent..
g
II
II
m game, n
ii^^cri».
■ '
-' II
M
in this, II
II his.
M
•
If
iA native, ji ..
in axe, a
II naiion.
M exact
j
1»
II
yinyet.
.v\ ■ ■■
V
II
II
^ in vxint.
n before c, g, qu, x, is sounded as ng, or as n in an^. .
, 11. Syllabication. . -
■•; ' ■ ;^ ., -• . . . ■ ' \ . ' , •^
In the* following list the words in parentheses are EngligK
words to be contrasted with the Latin; in other cases ^ the
Latin and tl^e English words to be contrasted have the same
.'spelling, the quantity of the Latin words being marked."
Dii, salvS, miles, pares, mdne, cdre, honor, c<ymes, odnsUmis^ * ^
pahna {palm), aliinns {alien), resistd {resist), possiisiO {possess, pos^
iession), co||^fofillR?r-^«andemn), legiiinis {legion), festind {h(uten\ '
'' 4iHptidlii^iiptiaJ), a/nctid {auction), disertor {deserter), scSna {soen*)^ *
r9gnim\reigning).
_ *% .■•;"■ : ' " **
"^ vlr^ It la held by some that tu U apunded like ai in aMs, and Mliks ot in tain.
fc Thnwighpiit thlfc
aeoordl
y( ^ ^ |j i^ f^^ indiflataili a T t oa Pt in
Towsb not marked are
[ingljr to be regarded as abort.
PART L--INTRODUCTOKY LESSONS.
3
. inSt^tS ^ ^^ ^^^^-^- ^^ sounds .pres^l;.
;..:'■■ ,;- : ■^^^:.■-.;■;,,.•; .III. ACCENT.^ "',.r::f\-. ■', "^ ■
(a) mc^-vea
an'-nas
rf-pa
I'-ter
.t«'-ld
▼a da
Mr'-vo c6n'-.nl
Ob.ervatlon.-How are words of two syllables accent ?
(b) «pe-ra'-mns
▼eo-tl-s&'.ii
•a-lu'-tem
re-dux'-lt
po-ten'-t£s
l-do'-ne-us
i* -ne-ra
precedes two consonants • Z li! 1 !««* «jUable is long or
<^«
LESSON I.
(«) 0^P»,n4mn.. «» <«Ja<*. ,„Mm».. u^ order.
Valnerant, <^y iwund.
(c) Valnerat. he, she or iip\
- ivounda.
OoQvoo&a, 1/ou co/i together.
Bemovent, *^i/ renu>re.
Obtlnet, Ae, ghe or it, occupies.
Removes, i/ot* remove, ? Z
<^^ •peaking to one person.)
«'
Jfs.
PBIMARY LATIN BOOK.
! :'
!
Canvoe&tl», you call together. RemovHi», you remom,
(When speaking to more than one person.)
(d) Vulnero. I , wound. Jubeo. I order. \
Oppngno, I attack. Ohtlneo, I occupy.
Ob8ervatlon.-How does Latin express the persons we, they,
M she It, you and I, as subjects of thejerb ? What two classes
of verb are represented ? What irregularity is there in joining
the personal endings to the first part?! .
EXERCISE I.
"^ Vo<^bulary. .
(Are and «re are U8e*d to indicate -a and -§« verbs respectively.)
Adeqaito, Are, ride up.
Cdnvood, Are, summon, call
together. ^
Habed, 6re, have.
Impero, Are, give order»,
Jabed, fere, order.
^hvlgo, &re, sail.
Obtlneo, §re, occupy.
^■asfii
Oppugrno, Are, attack.
PAreo, §re, be obedient.
Faro,- &re,^prepare, procure.
Permoved, §re, alarm.
Proper©, Are, ^a«^«n.
Removed, ere, remove.
Teneo, 6re, hold.
Valnerd, Are, wound.
I.-1. PermovSs. 2. TenSmus. 3. Convocant. 4. Parfttis. 6
Imperfimus. 6. Jubet. 7. Pftr6mus. 8. Vuhierant. 9. HabeS.'
10. JubStis U. Tenet. 12. Adequitant. 13. Removet. 14.
Propero. 15. Oppttgnfttis. 16. ObtinSs.
i^"^' '^^}^^f 2. He sails. 3. I hold. 4. You (singu.
W)orfer. 6. Yon (plural) h^ye. 6. We prepare. 7. She has.
8^I«jccupy. 9^Hewounds. 10. It alarms. 11. They remove.
12. She as obed„nt. 13. We give orders. 14. You (plural)
alarm. 15. They attack. 16. You (singtUar) ride up.
ng is -amut or -ant, ^mu$
aded to forms fr«tirAw>ntir.«
or i»?*'i^«iIS"f h"""* "'^* J^ supposed that the endln»
7T". J *""***«. the same end iim, -mw». -nt etc ar» «HH
-INTKODUOTORT LBSSONa g
. . ' ■ *-^ '■
LESSON II. -'
(a) Vainerimu.. we wound or u^ are wounding.
^abent, . f^V order or th^y are <n-denZ.
Oppu«n»t. heattac)^ or he is attacking. '
Bominl, <Ae jRoman».
Nautae, fAe aaiiora.
• » lieutenant calls together
'('he lieutenants order.
tf>^ victory aiarms.
I
(6) Bdm&nna, a Bcyman
Naata, the sailor,
l-eg&tn» oonvooat,
lie^&tljubent,
Victoria pennovet.
- "« v^t^wry Oriart
Vlctorlae permovent, vict<mes alarm.
^ endings, -t .„d .r^tltd? ^T^ '" ^"° ' The person.!
whenfLglish d„::'^mTC" * """" '" "' ™'^"'' ""*
EXERCISE II.
Vocabulary,' '"I
Bapbarnfc I. m., barbarian. aalln. ■ ™ « , ,
B*lg* «e. m., Bd^n (one of th ^ ^ ^" "•"™ »'
» tribe in Gaul) " ^ , /""' '"""'^ "»"«1 G">1)-
• plural), /«^, ^""'' <'» ^"»"°- »7- «»»-'«0«.
«potn\TK:„t';^^^;^rcr:'- '■'^■^«-
nent 7. Barbart «leqS 8 OeJ^ T' *• **" "^
"PpOgnant. 10. Bel^eTbUnL iT^ "^*""- "• T"™«
.ent 10 'tt.Jt "^^ ^PpW. 15. Victariaa
movent. 16. JNTauta habet.
#
per-
6
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
n.— 1. We are awaiting. 2. They are removing. 3. He is
holding. 4. The ^uadrons ride up. 6. The victory alarms. 6.
The allies summon. 7. The lieutenant is sailing. 8. The sailor
removes. 9. You are prepariiM;^ 10. The Belgians have. 11.
The forces occupy. 12. The^man is ordering. 13. We are
obedient.' 14. The lieutenant is giving orders. 15. The Gauls
occupy. 16. The barbarians axe attacking. "^
;
n^
LESSON' III.
v^
Tlotdria R6m&nos permovet, the victory alarma the Bomans.
LSgr&tas vlotdrlam nuntiat, the lieutenant announces the victory.
€6piae legatom exspeotant, the forces are atvaiting the lieutenant.,
Bom&nX oopias exspeotant, the Somans are aivaiting the forces.
ObserT|itlon.->|What different forms have nouns in us and a» in
the singular and the plural, when they are .used as the subject, and
when they ar6 used as the object of ihe verb ?^ How does the
order of the Latin sentences differ from that of the English ?'' '
Animus, I, m., spirit^
heaH.
Captlvas, X, m., captive.
Comporto, Are.^rin^ tn.
€5nflrm6, Are, encourage
lishy arfuse.
Bqnas, I, m., horse.
Et, and.
EXERCISE III. -^, .
Tooabnlary.
«itnd, Nunttas, i, m.', messenger, met-
sage.
Pertarbo, Are, throw into con^
ftision, disturb,
estah- Praeda, ae, f., pkinder.
Provlnola, ae, f., provined
Puirno,, Are, fight.
Servna, X, m., slave.
Labl^nus, I, m., LaMemis (a Saper6, Are, conquer, prevail.
Roman's name).
Looas, I, m., place, .positionf
ground.
Trlbunns, I, m., tribune (a
military officer among the
Rouuins).
1. The form used itfth&tfbbjeot Ib called the Ifominative Com, that uaed M th«
object the Adcvsative Case.
S. It mtut n()t be euppoaed mat this ordir ia invariable in Latin, but it should b«
rfft a tnad by -the hffjfinnffir -until he ha i l e an e d ■ ompthl i m »1 Uw (*mtt<oratle— lc =
to all other nnenu
■ome of the cases) of vuiation from the general rule., Thia applies
rules of order, k) which attention may be directed.
.1
PABT L— INTBODUpTOBY ^JESSONa 7
I.— 1. CSpifis superat. 2. Praedam comportftmus. 3. Bominl
locum obtinent. 4. Labifinus equos removet. 6. Le^Udd et
tribunos convocfts. 6. Viadriae animos confirmant. 7.. I^rvl
pOgnant. 8. NOntiuniexspectkt. 9. Captives habstis. 10.^elgae
GaUos superant. 11. Barbari Romanos et sociSs perturbank 12
Belgaa permovet. 13. Oopiam habeo. 14. Tiinna cojias perturb
bat. 15. Victoriam nOntias. 16. Nautae ISgfttum exspeotant.
II.— 1. The slaves are wounding the messenger. 2. The forces
occupy the province. 3. The Germans conquer the Gauls. 4.
The lieutenant conquers the Germans and the Belgians. 5. The
tribunes await the aUies. 6. You' attack the place. 7.' It abuses
the spirit. 8. The flight akrms the barbarians. 9. The sailor
announces the flight. 10. I am summoning the lieutenants. 11.
The forces are awaiting the squadroiis. 12. They have plenty
13. It disturbs the heart». 14. You (plural) are fighting. 15.
The sailors prevail. 16. The captive is obedient.
LESSON iv.
Equo» I6g&t6nun removet, he remove» the horse» of the lieu-
tenant».
Soclds Belar&rnm exspeotat, ^e atoait» the aUie» of the Belgian»,
Puga tarmae anlmom i«ff&tl the flight of the »qtuuiron alarm»
permovet, the mind of the lieutenant. '
Xki^om Wgritl removet, he remove» the lieutenant'* horae. ■
Observation.— How is of expressed in Latin ? What is the
position of the word translated by means of o/, or by the Emrlish
possessive ?^ * ,
EXERCISE IV.
Tooabalarjr.
Aedurt^ I. m., on Aedxum; in Coiitlne6, «re, hem in, restrain.
plural, the Aedm (a tribe in Cotta, ae, m., Gotta (a Roman's
<**"!)• name).
Clbu., I, m., food. , B5, ,,,, ^^^ g,^;
Conetll 6,fcre, >i4nnow. Fiim^ t , m .^.
1. This form to known m the QtniHvt Com.
8
PniMARY LATIN BOOK.
■!i
'I .
«alba, ae, m., Oalbix (a Eo- Oooupfi, Are, «etee. > V
^ man's name). Porta, ae, f., ^ofe.
Inopla, ae, f., Joan*, «carc%. Probo, Are, /owr. ; ^
KAtura. ae. f., nflrfwre. Sententia, ae. f., opinio».
Obaideo, «re, blockade, beset. via, ae. f., road.
I.— I. RCmanl copias Germftnorum superant. 2. Sententiam
Cottae probamus. 3. Sententia LabiSnl superat. 4. Inopia cibi
Belgfts perturbat. 6. Equum Galbae vuhierat. 6. Socil Belgft,
rum locum oppflgnant. 7. NstOra loci Aeduos continet. 8. Aedui
portfia occupant. 9. VictSriae copiftrum animos sociorum cSnfir-
•Mrt. 10. Barbarl copiSs parant. 11. Copiae Belgarum locum
obwdent. 12. LabiSnus copiam captlvorum habet. 13. Fuga
turmftrum Belgfts permovet. 14. Equos l6gat6rum removet. 15.
Victoriam ISgfttl nOntiat. i
n.—l. We are removing the horse of the lieutenant. 2 The
allies of the Aeduf give food. 3. Galba's sons procure horses. 4.
The victory of Galba arouses the Belgians' spirit. 5. The forces
of the allies beset the roa48. 6. The tribune's son has plenty of
horses. 7. You are wounding the sons of Cotta and Labienus. ^
The heutenant wins over the Belgians. 9. The Belgians are
awaiting the forces of the Gauls. ,10. A squadron 'rides up 11
They favor the place. 12. The tribunes and the lieutenants
restrain the forces. 13. We favor the opinions of the lieutenants
and the tribunes. 14. Galba procures forces.
i>Um.
50N V.
tESSO
(a)L6g4t6vlot6ilamnuiitlat. he cmrmmces the victory to the
- lieutencmt.
Provlnoiae Imperat. ; h^ gives orders to m provmee.
CoplU imperat, ' he gives orders to the forces.
Sootl. praedam ddnat, hejntsentsthepiwndertotheaUiM.
^b.wvatlon.-How is to before a noun expressed in Latin?
mat IS the position of the wo rd transited by means of tofi
PABT I.~INTRODUCTORY LESSONa
9
(6) Ad pravtoolam properat. he hastens to the proving
Adcoplasadequltat. he rides up Uf the forces.
Ad egrato. adequHat. , he rides up to the lieutenants, .
Ad locum learatos oonvooat, he mmmms the lieutenants to the
place. ^
*^T'*"'!r*"' !« «0 ««fo" a noun expre^ed in Latin
-;>;- :: :: :-^';'-^ • ■ exercisjj v. "' /. ' ^ ^/ ^;- \ ' . '.
Vooabnlary.
Agrrlcultura. ae. f., agHoidtt^, Pertlneo. «re. e:«W
fa/i-ming.
Oono, are, present^*
Evooo, |kre. chaUenge. .
Fliia, ae, f., dari^hter. *
!talla, ae, f., Italy.
hegatns, I, m., arnbassad&r.
Praestd« l^re,^ ««perior.
Ffiarna,!^, f., mm, fighting.
Responded, *re, r^y,
Rhgnoi I. m., the Mine.
Blpa, ^, f., hank. ^ ■
Sllva^,^e, f., wood, forest.
VentMo, are, cowie o/fcn.
Cralll I^mShos ad pflgnan^svocant. 6. berma^ Belgis praestent'
7. I^SgStus ad copifts adeolkitaf ft H««;^t>- . - "^e"* P™®««"it-
Sa™ ad locum pertinTt T2 ^'l ^^^,^'?*» «dequittaui. 11.
II.— 1. Labienus hastens to W foreea 9 T™, ._
the forces of the Belirians 1 w! .. ^ supenor to
Theyg„.ntpartJr^th -^tivt TCrn*!?""™""- *'
the alUes of the Ge™a„srilX„ir « JT''''" ™ o™'
thewaUs. 7. The woods, extend t^rBh^elTS:!^"'"
to the provinofi Q w« V . -^n*"e- o. 1 giv&«orders
«nh»r.r °n ^r?_':° J.:'!!. ^;:!"' ^ °' "■- •^<- >- *^
^«.a^n, Hde up to the ha^ha^'. irSrnus'::piri^;„!^:
10
PAIMART LATIN BOOK.
ambassadors. 13. He cbaUenges the Gaul to battle. 14. The
forces of the Germans ride up to the banks of the Rhine. 15. He
summons the lieutenants to the province. ^
^■^
1 ,»
' |i
LESSON VI.
(a) Opp&irn&bat. he ims attacking, or^ iuied to attack.
Jabel»&inas, we were ordering, or toe tised to order. . ^
Convoo&bant, th^y were summoning, or they used to summon.
PermoTebatis, you (plur.) were <rf#rmtnsr, or ymi ^ised to alarm.
Talner&bAa, you (sing. ) v;ere wounding, or you used to vxmnd.
(6) Jnbebam, I was ordering; or I used to order.
^ ponTocAban^ Twa^ summoning, or I used to summon.
Observation.— ThjS new element in the Latin verbs. What
Idea does this neW element eiqaress ? What new personal ending
is used? What point of time is referred to ?^
■^■:-'^■-^^:v/ ■:.:.■:•;- EXERCISE VI. -' '■^\-:^;^ :,;. '■'y:::'.■
' "'" '" Voeabnlary* ^'
t OoiiipleA. ^vt>,jm up, fill. Hlemo, Are. pass fhs Winter,
^rmot hret strengthen. winter.
Fosaa, ae, f., trench, moat. • Impetrd, Are, (A>tain one's^ re-
Fanda, ae, f., «Ktn^. quest.
Gallia, ae, f., Qa^d (the country Prdvooo, Are, call <mt, challenge,
now called France). Remaned, £re, remain.
Qladinn, I, m., sword. Revood, Are, recall.
I.— 1. Exspectabftmus. 2. OppOgnabant. 3. ComplSbat. 4.
Habetis. 5. StudSbam. 6. Perturbant. 7. RemovSbat. 8.
Hiemabant. 9. Fossfis complsbaiit. 10. Gladium Hautae da-
batis. 11. Ad Galliam ventitabatis. 12. RemanSmus. 13. Ro-
manos ad pflgnam Svocabant. 14. Impetratis. 15. Fundam
hal^. 16. Locum firmabant.
1. No«oe th^ where wo» or were are uaed to translate these forms, containing the
letters -6a, the English verb will end in -inq. (The translation by the simple i>a«t
tenae of English ihould not even be referred to until the student is much furtom
•dyancea.)
%. Pbi A^«,A<r« t***», »iy, ow, your, in place qf im^», as the context migxests.
PART L— INTRODUCTORT LESSONa H
« w! ^*" *r^'"^«- ,4- I ^*« obedient. 5. We used to have.
6. We are fiUmg up the trench. 7. You (pi^er.) were ordering
8 You (^n^.) are superior. 9. They were attacking the wall
10. I was hastenmg to Itely. 11. ^, was occupying 12. He
used to favor. 13. They used to have. 14. I remain 16 She
obtams her request. 16. They were strengthening the ^alls.
. .. , ■ 'f- ■ ■ ■
LESSON VII.
(a) Warfttum fand& vulnerat, he wounds tJu lievienm^ with a
tiling.
Cum tnrm& prop*rot, h^ hmtens wUh a squadron.*
I-egatum ariadlo vianerat. t^ wotmds th^ lieuiemmt wUh a
sword.
Cum ooptl. hlemat. ^ inters tmth the forces.
Locum murl. et fo«X. ilrmat. A« stren^hens thepla^ with waHs
and trenches.
Cum Gain, puffuant. they Ji^M wUh the Gavls.
Ob-rvatlon.--In what t^o ways is with expressed in Latin f
Wha^correspondxng different is there in the meaning of «^^
, (6) In GalllA hiemat.
In food remanent»
Copias & pug^n4 revoeat,
Ab It&llA properat.
he winters in Qaid.^
they remain in the plaee.
he recoils the forces from battle.
.... - he hastens fr&m Italy.
e*r** ** ^6«»Anl., Im- he obtains his request frmn the
***'**• ^^^wmtand the Bmnans.
1. These forms are known m the Al>laHve Case. ' "
ynents, mSJer^SS^'^; Sn^^idiS %; "'^* *»?« R,„,„h y^th, !s used of one'.
w»
;
t
r 1
12
PRIMARY LATIN BQOK.
EXERCISE VII.
1):
Tooabnlary. .
Clroanido, «re, mMTownd. Peoutito, ae. f, nu>fUiy. ^
Colloc6.are. station, place. Permaned, §re.i>er*M*.
Compare, are, raise, coUect. Prohlbeo, ere, restram,
Contlneo, ere, keep, hem in. Ramu». l, m., branch.
■ "Vfurta,ae,f., iwongr-^foinatn- Sa«ltta,ae,f., arrow.
Insldlae, arum, f. (used in plu- Submoveo, ere. drive off.
raljonly), ambush. \
Italia hiemabamus. 3. Galli milros copiis complfi^ 4 Bel«ae
Wmoroet fossa firmant. 5. Silva ab AeduisTBelg«s peS-
net. 6. Labi6nu» copiSs m Insidiis coUocabat. 7. Barbari fossfts
ramls complent. 8. Cum tu^ma ad locum properabam. 9. Triba-
num sagitta vulnerS^. 10. Captivi in sententia permanent. 11.
Copias a pagna revocabanius. 12. Sagittis et fundis A^duos a
maro submovebant. 13. Cum fflio Iggati ad Iteliam navigabatis.
14. Barbari m loco remanebant. 15, LSgatI Aeduorum a sociTs
Gemanorum impetrant. 16. GermanI cum Belgb pflgnabant.
17. Animos copiarum pecOnia sollicitatis.
II.- 1. Forests 'used to extend from Gaul to Italy. 2 The
tribunes were keeping the forces in the woods. 3. He was re-
straining the allies from battle. 4. The barbarians used to fight
with shngs. 6. They reriiain with the lieutenant. 6. The aUies
were raising forces in Gaul, 7. We were surrounding the place
with trenches. 8. t^bienus\used to winter with the aMes 9
\ye were^sadmg from Itely to the province with the lieutenant.
lU. Ihe barbarians used to station ambushes in the wood^ '^ H
You were wounding the tribune's son with a sKng. 12. W
obtains her request from Labienus. 13. You are driving off the
Gauls from the place. 14. I was passing the winter ^th the
heutenant and tribunes m the province. 15. They were tiyina to
)
4
PART I.— INTBODUGTORY LESSOlNa
18
A..i>.
. •-- - LESSON VIII.
'"^ '" ZZT "^'X- ""■ '^'"V'^^(y^) opinion. La.
' rti- .. T,r, - ( opinion. ' ,
Observatlon.-What forms of the nouns endini. in ^ ^
used in speaking to a nfir«nn 2 t , . .^^^ ^ "' ^***^ * «^e '^
order m which the case, are us^Sy ariZ^ ^ ^? ?, ,'?''
- forjns ofV noun in this order is cauld Z^' ^' "^ **
aiff^ntsoriesofendings^«.Z'^,,t*:"**»<'"»' '"' *^
«.ita^d 'r""' "^' '°^°" ^' «« ?«««»-' %-rfs ^,„. "
ded,ension of „1, and th^f „» »''«">» Jhe<Jiff^„ce between the
by always gi^ Te^I^tetinr a ^f" '°J- *"" ^""""^'
-un endin, in t is leolin'e™ Z pit TS:.^^^ "•"*« »
Muram et f..^. or n.armn ^ ,^ „^ j„^
fogsamqne, .... ^
-^^'!!li*!!!^rf^^^ of .q„e.*
iirinfnT f— "-A""' -"" «ntil ExercL XMV o^V^T "^l"**^ have often to
I? into Utm. Per several exerS ?o comlt h?«**' bere^''arly omitted in
omission. *° ^*""® ***«8« word? are put in paren-
I'g g'S^^^ kS; »^y'!;„"o^ giv^n. and a, no 1^. .. ... ,,,
^^^yi j-g!i mt .||. thn Mn^H. u> fadtarte to what deolerisSn 5S
^-^■•MsZXtV^^X" "'"^' *'*•' ^*^"* ^« *'"«d to the aynable before' -,„.;
y
rBIMART LATIN BOOK,
EXERCISE VIII.
VoMibalary.
mgnfm.ylandjfieldytem Need, &re, ibtZI.
tory.
Amloitla, ae, f., friendship,
. Amicus, i, m.,ym7Mi.
Arbiter, t^;!, m., ar6i(rerfor.
Faber, bri, m., toorkmcm.
Non, not.
Ooioialtd, &re, concecU, ,.
Puer, eri, m., hoy.
Sooer, erI, m.y father-in-Uiw.^ ^
TAoo, &re, be iinoccupiedy' 2m
wade. , •
/n
Oener, erI, m., son-in-law^
Uberl, drum, m. (in plural Va«td, Are, lay loowtc.
. GBly), children. Vlou», i, m., vOfce^.
MArons, 1, m., Marcu» (a maii|s Vlr, w^iri, m., mem.
name). ^ *
I.r-1. Agros ^lffodsqple^ Aedul, habStis. 2. LabiSnus fabrte
nautasque ad GaUi«p oonvocat. »* Cum llberis ad RhSnum pro-
perant. 4. GaUls, so^il, arbitros dant. 5. X Iggftto, Belgae, nSn
impetrftmus. 6. ~€tormAnI agrj;||^el^um vastftbant. 7. Cum
Aeduls, Labis Jte, amloitiam confirmfis. ' 8. In agriis Aeduoriim
liiemftbftmus. 9. Pueros tn sUvte txjoultant. 10. Socenun ISgfttl
llberoBque necant. 11. Virum gladio vulnerant. 12. Cumgenerto
ad copifis adequitat.
n.— 1. He grants lands to tHe ton-in-law ojf the tribune. 2.
^^r?uits pardon to the boys. 3. The workmen used, to come
oSmt to tjie wall. 4. You u6ed to have friends, Marcus.' 6. The
lands. of the Belgians are unoccupied. 6. ^e ^a^i^gre estab
lishing friendship with the Belgi^Mu 7. The forc^8 B^i£h ting
in the land. of the Belgians. J. The father-in-law j||^B^pnant
was giwg iftoney to the children of (his) ^end. 9. They are
giving landi^ to the Germans, lieutenant. 10. The men were fight-
ing M^words, the bbys with slings and arrows. 11. The forces
oTtheTMiilMia are laying waste the land of the Gauls. 12. They
^mnilibush.-
were
'i$<
* PART L— INTBODUOTOKV LB8S0II& - > IJ
LESSON' IX. ~
(») In part Ili., section 3, « given the dedenrion of ..„p,„
ifc^Zrlir^T^"''' ^'^ ** ^l^on of noun, ,„dln» in am
ifljr %om th»t of nouns ending in a. ? "ifuiam
olelditll'"* •"'"r'* '"""^ ""^ *• ««"bol"!" of thfa «,d
JSS"""' *" "'"*" - *• «*■«>« <" «•» noun. Zt
^ ObaerTatlon.— Of what Bender are all >k^ T«*i
»efer to males? to fetoales ? t« wLT^' -^ ^ "**"^ *^*
>: EXERCISE IX.
I «I ^ Vocabulary. ^
vascra, cram, n. (plural form nr.n^A a / -
_ «thsn,gjj„„,e.^),,^. -«*.*'•."«««. '"^"^
L.= w.tU^„e.n.g),^^e_*..„.^
icompknt r^ * P«»lio rerocat. 7. MOrum oppidTvi^
vent' 10. ^r^;«L offlr'"*!**^:- «• ^"*- -•" -^
teM»»». 12 BeUmn ^ """**"*• "• PnwudiS locum
y~l .
*
•a
M
PRIMiilY i^ATIN BOOK.
■ -s^
'v
n.r-il. They are 'stationing 'igaitisons in the towns. 2. Wft
were bringing in plenty of com. 3. The forces of the Belgiails
^, were renewing war with Labienus. 4. The Germans continue in
(their) allegiance.; 5. The allies of the Romans kill the garrison»
of the toWTis. 6. He was arousing the spirit of the boy with
examples «nd rewards. 7. The children have an example. 8i
The Helvetians were laying waste the lands of the Aedui, and
taking by storm (their) towns and villages. 9. The forces were
renewing the battle. 10. They are attacking the camp. 11.
He was stationing a garrison in the town. 12.- They used to
come often with the barbarians to the winter quarters of the forces."
-13. You were surrounding the camp with a trench. 14. He gives
orders to the gafrison. 15. The Gauls attack the camp and fill up
the trench.
LESSON X.
(a) 1. Jj^gktxiH el&TXks, a fwmous liexdenant.
2. Tiotorla olara^ a/amot(^ incforj/.
'3. J^^eta'plvivct elhvxirnt a fammia exg/mpU. *
4. Leg&tl ol&rl, of afa/mous lieutenant. '
6. Yletdri&e ol&rae, fa/nums victoriea.
(b) 6. ¥lr Claras, a /xmous man.
7. BelgaB clarlf the famovs Belgians.
8. Ager pikhlleua, puMic land.
9. Jjoena anper, a rough place.
10. Vanta perltn»f a akUful aaUor.
11. Vantarum perltornm, of skilftd aaUort,
(c) 12. J/Lalta exempla, many examples^ V *
13. Cum panel» BelglBf uHth a feio Belgians.
14. RellquI Belfirae, the remaining. Belgians.
15. M&gnae coplaet large forces. * . ,
Ob8«rvatlon.— (a) Does the Latin adjective remain unchanged^
like the English ? Is there a change in the gepder, the number,
or the case of the nouns accompanying the adjectives, comparing
(i.) 1, 2 and 3 ; (ii.) 2 and 5 ; (iii.) 1 and 4 ?
(6) Are the endinjgs of nouns and aajectives always alike ? Hnw
PART L— INTBODUCTORY LESSONa |7
(c) What is the position of the adjective in 1 to 11 ? in 12 tol6?
When 18 the adjective placed before its noun ?i '
In Part III., section 10, is given the declensibn of adjectires
whose mascuhne nominative singular ends in us or «r.
-Ob«ervatlon.-Is there any difference between the declension
ofi^these adjectives (bonus, liber and ae^er) and the declension
of the nouns given in sections 1, 2 and 3 ? How does the vocabu-
lary indicate whether an adjective ending in er is declined like
Ilber 6r hke aeger ?
•;."'■' EXERCISE X.
- Vooabulapy,
Advepgus. a. urn, urmiccessful. Latus. a, urn. broad, wide
Altnn, a, ,nm. high, deep, Mber. era, erum./ree.
A«per, era. erum. r^i^ged, rmt^h. Maipnus. a, um. great, large.
Commoveo, ere. disturb, alarm, Marltimn., a. um, mariHme, of
«^^*«*^;, or on the sea. ' "^
^'*^rtte'"' ^'^*"*' ''^^^oiis, Numeru., I, m., ntmftef . ; ; ,
w M^- . "^ * ii , .-^-^^ ^'^* **• ^*' «hore, coast; dra
Ezolto, are, stttnidate. WW «.y,WK«.^ *i. > «'^
„,• ., ' inarxtxma, the ^a coast.
Flnmmus. a, um. neighlnmng, PaucI, ae. a (plural), /eii;.
HeivJiT''* TTf .. >*»P«'«». I. m., nation, jacopfe.
the Helvettam. ^ Saxum. I. n., ,ton«. ^
Idoneus. a. um. s^ntahle. soUlolto. Are. <m^«, 6n6e, «rj,
Inclto. are, aroiMe, ,<tV rep. to tvin oven. .
J'~^' ^""* ^*'^'* ^*^ ^* '"^^'^ »'*^ firmant. 2. 5ram mari-
ctum BeTl '""^*^«"*- «• S«>.«Hu«i adversum animos ^
rjum num """^°"*- «' ^"^^^ -P^^ ^nsidifta coUoTnt.
8 T t¥ ""r"""" "^"^^™"^ "* ''^"^i"»"» Praedam copils dJnat
(c) when^he nonn is inodifl^d Tv k * h ;«^en»expre8BinK number or quantity:
_ 2. The best wavVfinonili« «# *^_-i-.. .. . ' ^**»" °-
s
'(,-■/ •
1«
■•^
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
X
10. Ad provinciam finitimam ren-
locum idoneum convocant.
titabafc. ' .
II.— 1. A few tribunes were stirring up the allies by frequent
messag^es. 2. They are wintering in the provinces on the sea with
the remaining forces. 3. You were stimulating a few Gauls with
large rewards. 4. Rugged forests extend from the sea coast to the
neighboring proVinces. . 6. The Helvetians are superior to the rest
of the (literally, remaining) §auls. 6. We are laying waste the
Helvetian territory with large forces. 7. They used to strengthen
the camp with wide trenshes. 8. The neighboring province is
unoccupied. 9. He was raising large forces in the Helvetian
territory. 10. The defeats (literally, un^iccess/ul battles) alarm
the rest of the Belgians. -
(p) Impetrabis,.
Snperabitia,
Removeblt»
LESSON XL •
you will gain youj request,
you uHll conquer.
he will remove. , *■ . ^'..
Cioxn^\i:\iimvkei, we shall Jill up. ♦
Observation.— What new element is found in the Latin verbs ?
What idea does it express ? What point of time is referred to ?
(6) Imp«t;rabo, I shall gain my request.
Saperabnnt, they will conquer.
Removebo, / shall remove.
Oomplebunt, th^y u)ill Jill up.
Observation.— What variations occur in that part of the Latin
verb which expresses shall or unll f
EXERCISE XI.
Vocabulary,
Oattellam. I, n., fort. Laorlma, ao. f., tear. -
Corttas,a,uin,cereain,yi.ced, spe- Maltas. a, urn, miu^h, iyn plu".
^iM^- ral) many.
«onddnd. Are, overlook. Obiieord, Are, 6c«MK*rfe^p^^^~
Flrniaa, a, am. potmrful, strong. Peoiknia, ae, f., sum of money.
Impero. ftre. require, demand. Pcrlcnlam, I, n.. danger.
iaM|r«r» irra» grnm, fresh.
PrlvAtvs» a, mn, priv(Ue.
initimam yen-
PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 19
^ I.~l. Multe oppida expugnabimus. 2. MSgnS» cum '^ul6
bellumrenovabitis. 3. L.gatos et tribunes ad cTrtum locu'Trn^
vocabit ^ Injunas privatas condonabo. 5. Locum praesidio
firmo ten.b.t. 6. Copiae integrae bellum renovabunt. Tm^
nam frmnenti copiam comportabamus. 8. Multis^ cum lacrini
legatunaobseorat. 9. Cert.m numerum fabr5rum imperubi~
Copias to insidiis collooabis. f »"ii. j.u,
IL-l He will winter with thj rest of the forces in the'
ne,ghbormgprovmce. 2. Many Belgians wUl continue in (theW
allegumoe 3. We shaU surround the place with a wai aid
numerous forts. 4. Powerful nations wiU conquer Gaul T You
w, 1 conquer a powerful nation. 6. The rest of the Gennans d<^
STl, V t '*"*". «"""^ of*" to ">« cmp with a laise number
o^ the barbanans. 9. They will strengthen the test of the ^
^mpZiT '"■ "" °P™°" "' "" -»' »' "•» «bun«
Ofc
of the Latin
LESSON XII.
(a) The student should examine and learn the endin™ nf rt«
«oun, of the thirf declension, given in Part IIL.LSon T
n m,^tre";othr/v""''r """"«' ^' *"« «>■'"«'' '"»» tJ"
formed ) * ° vocabulary are the other cases
(fc) Consul Rom&ntf,. a i?oman comitl.
Con«uii« Romanl. o/a iioman comiti.
Resrlo f Inltima, a neighboring district
Ab reglpne f Inltln.ft, /rom a neighboring district.
i' . _^ • • —'"" — I - 11 ■ ^p*'
-iuctlon. In the .»„e way dM ,^ often to ttsc^^^rjffi, TL\rTJ''' **' '" »
20
PRIMART LATIN BOOK,
-^
k
,' . . „ EXERCISE, XII. '•■■__ ' l
. Vocabulary. , ' ■ ^r
Oaes-ar, -arls, m., Oatsar. Jk^les, mlllMg, m., addier.
Centari-6, -^onls, m., centurion. ]fli^titu-dd, -dlnis,f.,muJ^tYt«fe,
Clvl-t&Hf -thtlSf f., state, greaJt number.
Co-bors, -liortls, f., cohort, com- Obses, obsidls, m., hostage.
pany (one-tenth of a legion). Or-do, -dinls. m., rank. ^
Eqnes, equitig, m., horse soldjer. Pax, paois, t, peace.
I (in plural) cawfn/. ; ,- | VedeBf pedltls, m., foot soldiefflJ:
f t^gl-b,-6nla,t, legion. ^ - (in phiraX) infa/ntry. ^^
I Moroa-tor, -toHs, m., trader» , Serxb, are,' keep. ii li
1. — 1. ObsidSs Caesarl dabimus. 2. Mercfttor^ ad legiSheiit^
ventitabant. 3. Pacem et amicitiam cum Caesare confirmUbit. 4.
MllitgaordinesnonjServabant.^ 5. Pauci peditSs mftgnam multi-
tadinem equitura superant* 6. Cum reliquls legionibus in Qallift'
hieipabS. 7. Caesar magnum obsidum numerum' imp^t. 8.
TribiinSs mllitum et cenfcurionSs convocabat. 9. Mililes reli-
quarum legionum civitfttem in oflBlcio cortt^Sbunt. 10. PaucS^ ;
cohort§8 in insidils coUocat. i '
II. — 1. He rides up to Csesar. 2. Csesar will hasten with the
rest of the* legion to tl^ town. 3. You Wi^ grant pardon to the
centurion. 4. The rest laf the cohorts will lay waste the neighbor-
ing territory. 5. tVe were restraining the legions from battle. '•§-..
The opinion of the centurion w^U prevail. 7. He fills thq,,camp
llith a multitude of soldiers. 8. paesar establishes peace with the
^Neighboring stated. 9. He will \»jinter in Gaul with the rest of the
legion and the c^Valry. 10. Thejj try to win over the rest of ihe
states. 11. With a few soldi vs we shall hasten to the camp. .
f\
)b(
I 1 !
.. .. LESSON XIII.
, (o) Bxpugrn&vl, -^ - J have taken by storm, or I took by storm. ~
Bxpuffn&vlatl, you (sing.) have taken by starm, or you took
by stoitn.
--^ A
I. S«e footooU 2, pay* 10>
,»,-■ v'^ V i
I. SMfOOtQOttltPl^ir
A
Y^^^T ^.—INTRODUCTORY LESSON& 21
; Expugn^Tlt. , he has takeii by stam, or he took by storm ■
. Expugnavlnms. ' we have taken by stoi-m, or we Jook by stoi^
: Expufirpavl«tl8. yott (plural) ;ta,,e ^«A^n by storm, or yow ^oofc
* ' ' by storm.' ' - .
Expu«na,verunt, they have, taken by stcrrm^ov they took by st<yrm.
ObsePvatlon.-What changes occur in the verb forms, compar-'
^cZi^f::^ ^^ ^^-blance to regular personal endi^s.
.inS.r::^r^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^" ^ eoniugaa as given^
^^b«ervatl^.-Are.theendii;^"&und in «xp^^navl, etc.,
found in all these verbs ? .
(c) First Conjugation.
Present Tense. Perfe6t Tense.
amo
do
8td
adjuvo
atnavl
dedl
Btetl *•
adJuvX
Second Conjugation.
Present Tense. Perfect Tense. "
Third Conjugation.
Present Tense. Perfefct Tense.
inoneo
Tided
Jabed
remaned
monuX
vidl
JussX
re mans!
pegro
lego
sumo
mltto
pared
rfixl .
Mgl
sfiimpgl
migl
Fourth Conjugation.
Present Tense. Perfect Tense.
andio
venlo
vlnold
sentlo
ooinperlo
andlvl
venl
vlnxl
sens!
OQinperX
peperol
m^ril?"''"'""^' '•! '^*''»" ^^"^ *^" present t^ttie'perfect
re IcrorSvrilT:"^ f "*^"'^ '^^' conjugation? In what one
Notice that m tjievocabularies t^iat foUow, the perfect tei^e is
always clearly indftSted.». .- . .- |f«^ecii wnae w
»* oonluptlon i «rniLtom^LTiKw 'iVl "• '"".'1 ■»•« '" "•« pSi™
i
'/ '
22
'■
r--
I
\
* • ^
PRIMARY LATIlf BOOK.
V
M'
EXERCISE XIII.v K ; r
si ■ V'/.. . ■ '•;..■>' '■.Vocabulary* ■ ■"■^,- /■ - - .7'''.' '^r.':;.' " \ _
Aoolpld, aocepi, receu'e. • Munid, munlviv fortify^ protect,
Arma, armdrum, n. (in plural Per-maned, 6re, -mansi, retnam.
only), arms.
Do, dare, dedl, give.
Facio, fed, do, make.
Faoul-tas, -tatis, f., opportunity.
Gero, greggT, carry on, whge.
Jnvd, are, iuvl, aid; assist.-^
Peto, petXvI^ ask, seek.
Pond, poanlt place, pitch (c&mp),
lay dmon.
Tra-do, -dldf, give up.
Vallum, 1, n,, wall, rampart (of
— "r^ camp). . ^- ^^ -^^^^_
Moved, ere, movl, move. Venlo, veni, come. ^
I.— 1. Gessimus. 2. AccSpSrunt. .3. Tradidit. 4. Caesar,
castra movit. ,5. JB[elv§tiI paceiri a Caesare petiveruni 6. Facul-
tatem' fugae c^ptivis dedistl. 7. Magna praesidia in oppidis posui.
8. ReliqUae Qphort§p castra vallo fossaque miiniverunt. 9. Caesar
magnam injuriam fgcit. 10. Socil legiones frumentS juverunt.
11. Caesar legionibus veniam dedit. 12. In officio permansimus.
13. Cum multis equitibus ad castra vSnit. 14. Arma po^ui^tis et
obsidSs dedistis. 15. Agros habemus. '^ / j
II.— 1. He has aided. 2. We gat«.- 3. She has sought. 4.
You have moved. 5. We came. ^. We received the hostages.
7. The Gauls waged war with Csesar. 8. They gave up, (their)
arms, cai)tive8 (and) hostages to Ceesar. 9. You' fortified the camp-
with high walls. 10. tJessar has made peace with the neighboring -
states. 11. The Gauls gave lands to the Germans. 12. I have
received many injuries from thfe Romans. ' 13. He placed a garri-
son in the camp. 14. You gave the legion to the lieutenant. 15.-
They came with a few horsemen to Ceesar. 16. The} rest of the
legion pitched the camp. 17. The soldiers* move th<J camp. 18.
You received great injury fijom Ccesar. 19. They have villages.
LESSON- XIV.
^^e student should turn to the nouns of the third declension,
given in Part III., secti^ 5.
oi»i»vfttfSn.— uompafe the endings oi the nouna in wotioiTr
1
PART L— INTRODUCTORY JJISSONa
23
with those of the nouns in section 4. What differences are there
in the endings? What is i the gender of the* nouns in section 5?
in section 4 ? In what rerfpect do neuter nouns of the second and
third declensions agree ? \
EXERCISE XIV,
• Vooabalalry. " '
Ag-nien,-mlnU,n.y line of inarch, Imped-ld, -IvI, obstruct.
army (on the march).
Amltto, diinlsl, Jose.
i[vert-6» -I^ turn asideJ
Contend-o, -I, liasten.
Dlg-«edd, -cessi, depart,
draw.^
Flu-men, -mliilg, n., fiver.
with-
Iter, Itinerls, n., march, road,
I4at-a8, -erlg, n., side, Jtank.
Op-US, -erls, n., work, fortijicar
tion.
Per-floid, -teel, Jinish.
SIgrnum, I,, n., standard, signal.^
Tnln-us, -erls, n., wound.
I.~l. Iter a. flamine avertimus. 2. Mflitgs opus perfScSrunt.
3.- PaucI equitSs yulnera acc6p6runt. 4. Magnis itineribus Caesar
ad fltimen contendit. 5. Signum proelil cohortibus dedit. 6.
Multi pedites ab agmine discgsserunt. 7. MllitSs ab opere revo-
cavit. 8. Silva pertinet a fltlmine ad castra. 9. LegatI ad Caesa-
rem in^ itinere vgnSrunt. 10. Cohort6s signa fimlsgrunt. 11.
Iter agminis impedlverunt. 12. HelvStii iter fScSrunt,*
^^;~1- You have received a wound. 2. Csesar recalled the
soldiers from work. 3. Broad ^^ivers hem in the Helvetii. 4. We
have finished the fortification of the camp, 5. They have marched
(literally, ntade a march) from the province. 6. By a forced
{literally, great) march I came to the camp. 7. Csesar has turned
aside (his) march from the Helvetii. 8. ,We have lost a standard.
9. A few soldiers have left (literally, depaHed from) the standards.
10. The river has protected the sides of the camp. 11. We came
to the river with the rest of the cohorts. 12. We received a few
wounds.
-S
^' ^eedoab^Ilmm, MUinWy, I depatt from.
S. A genitive depending on signum (=»igtMl) BhooM b« tmiuUtad byibr.
8. In ii In t^ls phraae to be tnndated on.
\
r
u
PRIMARY LATIN BOOE:.
LESSON XV.
Dederam; I had given.
Miseras, you (sing.) had sent.
Jusserat, /w had orde^r^.
Teneramns, xve had come.
Jusseratls, yon (plural) had
ordered.
Dederant, they had given.
Observation.— Personal endings. What letters are found in
each Latin word ? What word occurs in the translation of each of
these Latin words? Referring to Lesson XIII. (c), aj-e these
forms obtained from the present or the perfect tense ? ^ _
EXERCISE XV. ^ ;
Yooabulary-.
OdgnosoS. oogrnoifl, learn, find Mittd, mlsl, «enc{.
*"**• Ob-tlneo, ere, -tlnul, ^oW, IKW-
Con-fagld, -fugl,/ee. » »ess. '
Oon-sldo, -sedl, encamp. Ooonp-o, are, -hvl, seize.
Con-venid, -veni, ifome together, Be-duoot -duxl, lead back.
assemble. IReganm, h n., royal potver.
I&ruptl 6, -onla, t, sally. Rhenus. 1, m., ij/iine.
Bxplora-tor, -tdrls, m., scout. Tlm-eo, 6re, -ul, /car, be afraid.
Impedimenta, dram, n. (in plu- Trans-duoo, -duxl, lead across.
ral), baggage, baggagyi^ani- • i ' "^
mals.
I.— 1. CSpias reduxeras. 2. Ad RhSnum contenderat. 3.
LSgatSs misimus. 4. ExplSratorSs iter cognoverant. 5. Barbaras
fciment. 6, Eruptionem fgcerant. 7. CSpiae ,c6ns§deranfc. 8.
RSgnum obtinuerat. 9. AccSperSmus. 10. DiscSsserant.
GessSrunt. 12. PSceram. • 13. Vulnerant. 14. Dedimus.
Javistis. 16. Posueratis. 17. Petlvimu^. 18. DiscSssit.
ConfQgeramus. 20. Properat. 21. Imperftverat,
n.— 1. He had led the soldiers across. 2. They came together
to CfiBsar. 3. I shall seize the royal power. 4. We had sent
*S scouts. 6. They had fled to the baggage. 6. Ctesar encamped
with the rest of the forces. 7. Ambassadors had nnmft' f^
11.
15.
19.
PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
25
The forces had encamped. 10. They received a few bounds 11
He has sought peace. 12. We had given. 13. You had led back
the legion. 14. I had finished. 15. We encamped. 16. She had
sent. 17. We were hastening. 18. You sent. 19. They wiU
wound. 20. I received. . .
LESSON XVI.
~Ab Italia pertlnet,
Ad Caesarem venerant.
Cum Gallls pacem fecit,
De pace legratos mlserunt.
^ extends from Italy.
they came to Ckesar.
he made peace with the Gauls.
they sent ambassadors concerning
{oT about) peace,
they hrin^ in com out of (or from)
the fields,
he winters in the province,
he sent the forces into (or to) Gaul.
sllvas Iter he marched between the river and
; the woods.
he is influential among the Bel-
gians,
they marched through the province,
he found md through (or by means
of) the Hehetians.
he found oiit by means of letters.
^ he found out aftef the battle.
Oer- they are^afraid on account of the
grmt number of Germans.
-, . they fear without cause.
1 rans Bhgnum oonsederunt. thsy encamped across the RhiAU.
c.rr.'?*/?,"'"'^^ meaning of the prepositions used, and the
case which follows each of them. The difference between m with
accusative and In With ablative; »b and ex, «d and m with
accusative ; the ablative of means and per with accusative.
^xiPgrrls frumentam compor-
tant.
In provlnola hlemat, 1;
Coplas In Galllam mlslt.
Inter flumen et
fecit,
Inter Belgas valet, . -
Per prorlnolam Iter feoernnt,
Per Helvetlos oofl^novit,
liltterlg c5gnovlt,
Post pugnam odgnovlti*
Propter mnltltudlnem
nianornm tlment.
Sine oanga tlment.
i^
\
26
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Ky
Vocabulliry.
Auotorl-tas, -t&tts, f., influence. Morg, mortis, f., death'.
Dedltl-o, -onis, f., surrender .^
Inool-d, -ill, dwell, inhabit.
Inopla, ae, f., want, scarcity.
Judlo-d« are, -^xt, decide. »
..<.* «
y.
AV K.
Pater, patrls, va.., father.
Tlm-or, -oris, xa.^fear.-^
V»f-ed, ere, -ul^ 6« influential.
Vlp-tus, -tutls, ^, valw, bravery:
I. —1. Sine injOria per provinciam iter f ecimus. 2. FrOmentupi
ex agrls^in^castra comportabant. 3. Post proelium legati ad
Caesarem d§ deditione venenmt. 4. Trans Rhenum in locd" idoneo
consedmt, 5. Magnam inter Belgas auctoritatem prpfeer vir-
tutem habebat. 6. Militgs ex hibemis et a Caesare co^^^erant. \
7. J^x captms cognoverat. 8. In certum locum conventramus.
9 Arbitros inter civitates dedit. 10, Germanos sine causa timent.
11. Cum rehquls^gionibus in GaUi4m contendit. 12. Ex castris
discessistis. 13. Iter in provinciam averterant. 14 Ariha ex
oppido tradiderunt. 15.; Sine causa bellum gejaseratis. A..
II. -1. He had sent the forces across the^yer into G^uf. 2.
^^^'^^?*^ ^^"""""^^ '''^"*'- ^- After the a^aiii' of (his) fathir
he had held the royal power. 4. They had made numerous sallies
l^out of the woods. 5. the rest of the Belgians had sent ambassa-
dors concerning peace. 6. He used to.be influential among the
Irauls. 7. They remain in the camp not without great danger" on
account of the scarcity of corn. 8. They had plac\d the baggage
between the river and the cavalry. 9. He led back' tL, forces into
winter quarters. 10. We shall not decide about the road H
They had dwelt across the Rhine. 12. On account of (their)" fear
> they had fled into the woods. 13. ' Caesar had led across the forces
without" baggage. 14. We used to have lands across the Rhine in
the province. 15. Out of a large number few received wounds
(a) Dederls, you (sing.) wUl have VenerlWus, we\hall have come. ,
^*^^^* . Jttsserlrts, yoM (plur.) ttn« /taiJC
Mlserlt, he will have sent, ordered. '
tfferlt . he inU have ordered. -Pwtwtartr^A^!.!/ wt7; haw giviti.
^ili£^x^Sk
.- VI
^ PART I.— I^RODUCTORY ikisSONS. 27
• Ob8ePvatIon.-Peraond endings. What letter are found in
^h I^tm word in the translation of which are Wnd the words
Ml hnvetv w^l Uve f Axe these f qrms obtained from the present
or the perfect tense ? / ^
(6) Dedero. I MX liav^given, MUero, I shaU have sent. -\
Ob8ePvatlon.-What variation occurs in that part of the Latin
verb which expresses «/loZZ /laue?
(c) In Part III sectiop 27, may be found the names by tehich
the tenses of ^e Latin verb are known. ~^^^^— --- r ^ ^
V» '■■■'_: '■-■::■■-'--■■".■/:■■■■.:.-.' i]'-: ^''y'c-:":' :■} \ - ' ■" ■
/ EXERCISE XVII. * '
Tooabalary. >"
D6-ll«6, -legrl. chooser ' j„„e6, ere, Jussl. order: - .
De-ppno, -posul, layd^. Memorla. Ae, f., memcyry. - '
'' dLiT""; ""' '*"T'' ^*''- '•«-**"««' -<*«-!. carry, bnn^.
DabIt-o,.^e. -avi, /t.a^tofe, Have l^egl-o. -onls. f., reW district.
«„„ . ^ . ««-"n«o, ere, -tlnul, /jreservc;
•^*^>' Video, ere, vidl, see. • '
3 ^TI J-'^'°' «.^ legione delegerat. 2. Murum perdtlxeriJ^T
3. Arma deposuennt. 4. Regionem vastaverunt. 5. Legio mon-
^ non tengbit. 6. VidStis. 7. Renovabam. 8. DiscS^t^ 9
Judicavera 10. Dubit^ba^ius. 11. D.terret. 12. ^^Lil
13. Gesseramus. 14. Discgsserit. 15. Compl§bunt. 16. Expu^
^:
bered rtt™H ^*' f'^" *" '"«'"'"y- ^- You had remem-
i ITsLtTi"' r^™," '** '"^™^)- ^- 'TW «"' have routed.
7 I ^n r o™f • ®- ^" ^^ ^^*^*^- «• They chose.
7. I shall order. 8. We have come. 9. We were holding w
Kti^'^t'Th"- ^Tr^ --'»««■•«• 12- Sheuslto'be
Urif^e 1^^ ^™ ":■'• ■"■ ^« »•«•" have sent.
ijIuS^. "'^y°"^"- ^?- You are deciding, 18 Tn,.
r-
28
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
'7.
W'
M^
LESSON XVXII.
.\
Turn to the adjectives of the third declension, as given in Part
III., section 11.
V Ob8ervaMon.-How far do the^endmgs of the adjective agree
with those of the noun, 'as given in sections 4 ^nd & (cWparing
forms of thfe same gender always)? Is there always a separate
form for the feminine nominative? fpr the neuter nominative?
Examine the vocabulary, to see how 'the genitive ease and the
different genders of adjectives of the third declension are marked.*
'■* " ''•/'.'■'. .:;. ■■' '~- • '"■
;, EXERCISE XVIII. ^
:' ■-" ■ " ;■/ ■ -' -'■ ■ ■ , .
Vooabulary.
Beollvis, e, doping. " Levis, e. dight, trifling.
Duplex, dapiiols, dmibh. Omnia, e, all.
Eques^ter, -trig, -tre, o/carc^ri/, pQt-ens, -entis, powerful.
• Prae-oeps, -oipitis, steep.
■ Beo-ens, -entis, recent, tmeas-
hausted.
cavalry- (adjective).
Fertilis, e,/er«t/e.
Port lg, e, brave.
Humilis, e, loWj lowly.
Inoead-o, -I, burn.
Sllvesiris, e, wooded.
Vel-6x, -dels, swift^ active.
I.— 1. Praesidia in omnibus oppidis collocabit. 2.' Proelium
equestre fScimus.» 3. F«iam Iggato, viro forti et poten^, dedit.
4. In loco silvestri consederant. 5. Copiae recentSs et integrae
proehum reiiovabant. 6. AnimSs omnium sociSrum confirmat.
7. PeditSs v6l6cSs et fortSs d§l6geram. 8. Duplicem fossam ft
castris ad flttmen perdQxit. 9. Omnia arma trfididSrunt. 10.
Levia equestria proelia fScerant.» 11. Per regionem fertilem iter
fScerant.^ 12. Ex humill loco ad magnam auctoritatem MSrcum
perdaxerat.
AdLnlL^^l^t^? ?°* f"***"^ *" «* ^R' «•)) «' «»». are of thTthird deolension.
i the Zi«v?<S o!Sh k' ?" *?^ generally in (a) masculine and feminine, -ft. neuter
■«.the genitive of each being the same as the mascul ne nominative: (b) masculine
;^;,&'"®V?*' ""H^'- -**••-**»« »«""*^« 0' each being thHame m «if Sine
«* «'f ?/L\* ' ^"^ n?"»»»»»; 'eminine and neuter, -m, the ^nitivehavinj Intw taplaS
fMliumfaeio^ljlgM a batO», literally, Imakta battle.'
PART I.-
j -
INTKODUCTDBY LESSONS.
29
H.— 1. They had fortified the camp with a double wall. 2:
Cffisar removed the horses of all thd lieutenants. 3. They were
laying Waste all the lands. 4.- The Helvetians had burned aU the
towns, all the rest of the viUages; (and) all the com. 5. He had
not laid aside the memory of the recent wrongs. 6. He has
granted pardon to all thecaptives. 7. You have pitched the camp
in a. sloping and steep place. 8. He wiU have sent fresh and
unexhausted cavalry. 9. I hastened witTi aU the cavalry to the
river. 10. We njarched through fertile lands. 11. We shaU
deter. the Gawls by (our) recent victoiy. 12. He summons the-
centuriona of all ranks.
t
'fM'
LESSON XIX.
3ellnm''reno^re dabltant,
Coplas in provinoia Jusslt
hl^^are«,
Labiejiam locum tenere Jus-
/serat, ' .■
Legratos dlsoddere vetnlt*
/■ - 'J
/ ■- -
Lablenam Jnbet oastra mu-
Hire,
Venire dubitat.
they hesitate to renew the wa/r,
he ordered the forces to winter in
the province,
he had ordered Lahienus to hold
the place. . . : '
he forbade the lieviendnts to de-
part.
he orders Lahienus to fortify the
camp.
he hesitates to come.
Observation.— In each sentence notice how one verb <Sompletes
the meaning of the other. Formation of the ii^nitive in^ach
conjugation. What is generaUy the position^ of the infinitive?
Notice that m the vocabularies that foUow, the infinitive is always
given, as a means of indicating the conjugation to Which a verb
belongs.^ '
EXERCISE Xli -^
\ ' .-■-■>..■; ■; . ^
Vocabulary,
Aude6,^e. venh^re. Cogo. ere. oo6»l. collect, compel.
Ooepi (used m the perfect tenses Constltu-o. ere, -i, determine.
oruy) began. Desll-ld, ire. -ul. leap down. '
I ■ ^" '° *^® general vocabulary, at the end <rf the book.
<K
"^1
l' *
ao
>i
PRIMABY LATIN BOOK.
^^\f^' ^®^"™ ^^^ Germanis gerere constituit. 2. . Mfliigs
yetuiVab signia discedere. 3. Ex finitimls regionibus mllitas
jubet convenire. 4. Oppidum oppugnare et portaa incendere
coeperunt. 5. LggatI ad castra venire dubitaverant. 6. Magna
praesidia in omnibus oppidis constituit. collocare, et cum reliquls
copiis in vico Aeduorum hiemare. 7. Copias in»hTbema rediicere
constituerat. 8. Omngs ISgatos coggit equos removSre. 9. Multls
cum lacrimls Caesarem obsec^Sre coepimus. 10. Proelium renovare
non audebunt. 11. Omnia oppida incendere constitueramus. 12.
Labignum cum omnibus equitibus locum tenere jussit. 13. Pa-
~ trem imperium dSponere coegit. ~
II.— 1. Ceesar had ordered all the Aedui to give up (their) arms.
2. They determined to send ambassadors to Cses^r concerning
peace. 3. They had begun to lay waste the. lands of the allies.
4. Ccesar forbade thp legions to leave (their) work; 5. They have
begun to collect forces. 6. He ordered all the soldiers to leap
down. 7. They began to fill up the trenches with branches. 8.
He had ordered the soldiers to fortify the camp with a double
trench. 9. We determined to collect forces and wage war with
Ceesar. 10. They do not venture to send ambassadors. , 11. He
had compelled the Aedui to give hostages. 12. They hesitate to
winter in Gaul. 13. The Gauls began to assemble out of all the
towns. -■•:
LESSON XX. • . '
Turij to the nouns of the fourth declension given in Part III.
section 7.
Obsepvatlon.— The case-ehdings of the declension. The geiiaer
of the nouns in us and in u.^ How does tl^e vocabulary indicate
that a noun is of the fourth declension ? .
--. ■ ■ ■ i ' ■-*■ ' EXfikciSE XX.- -■
■-■',• "■,-'•■.- . »'.-'"■*"".
JLdventns, us. m., arrival.
OoinmeAtns. fls, m., auppUea.'*
Oom-inlttA, «re, -mUl, mtrn$t;
(with proelium) jom, heffin.
1. S«» Part III., Motion W, t. _ t See footn^t* 1, page fSL
. -PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa ^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^
Conspectus» nn, m., sight, view. Lacus, us, m, lake. ' ^^
Cornu, u«. n wing (of an army). Ma^lstratus. u., m., mo^frafe.
Dexter, tra. trnm. WriTif \ - /y. ' y-vi'.wn?,.
o^ce.
Pedltatus, u^m., infatyJtnj.^
Sal-US, rjitis, f., safety.
Sus-tiqed, ere, -tinni, wiih^
stand, endure. .
Usus, us, m., experience^ >
Dexter, tra, trnm, right.
Dlscessns, us, tn.^ departure.
Equltatns, us, m., cavalry.^
Exercltus, us, m., army.
Homp, hominis, m., man, (in
plural) people.
linpetus, us, m., cUtack, fimj.
^^'^""^ adventum Caesaris obsides dare eori&titUM^^
^ Galh impetum m» equitfitum fecerunt. 3. Cum equitatfl Helvgti-
. orum proehum commlssrunt. 4. Helvgtil agros Aeduorum in con-
"«pectu exercitus RomanI vastabant. 5. A lacfl ad flUmen mOrum
duphcem perddxeramus. 6. Magistratum obtinObat.c 7. Salatem
magistratuum equit^tui commisit. 8. In» dextrS coma omnem
equitatum coUocavit. 9. Oppidum mSgno impetfl onpflrarT
coeperunt 10 EquitatOs in* cOnspectuT vSneL. Tm^!
«tratus multitadinem hominum ex agrls coSgerant. 12. Reliqu^
exercitum I^biSno dare constituit. 13. Exemtum sine miS
commeata cogere n6n audsbunt. . U. Legates ab omnibus eSr
citibus^convenlre jtlssit, , % ^
H« n,^^' 1\? r^ """"^ ""^^^'^"^ *^^ ^^^^' «f <^h« cavalry. 2.
He oi^ered the lieutenant to remove out of sight the horses of ail
tne cavalry. 4. After the departure of the Belgians they had
to present to the cavalry. 6. He hastened to the lake '7 We
have determmed to await Labienus' arrival. 8. He brdl™ M l!
rpXrio'Zr- '- ««^^^ ^-bidden the sol^Itoeet
nnlnJA^^l """'^ «"^rounding the forces with cavalrv
found nnfT u ^ '"''^^ experience in camps. 13. He
^u. d ou through scouts about the departure of the aUies ^4
H ^e.s,tates to entrust aM the plm^ ^eijt^^ '*'
thj^^.nSnr"'' *^ *o^ ""»<» '" Latin I n the dngular. not In th. plunJ. fa njJT^
"»• »,!»»• 17. , . 4. Tr»ii«l«t« in her* by in, not into. -
ft6ca:.
^■'
m
i
'III
9
I
I III
I'i'
!l
9»
z'
*'
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK
LESSON XXI.
(a) Mlssas sumt
Saperatas e%.
I have been sent, or I vxts sent.
you (sing.) have been conqitered, or you 'were
conquered,
he has been hea/rd, or he was heard,
toe have been recalled, or we were recalled,
you (plural) have been ordered, or you were
■■■■. ordered. ■^„,.'- •■•;-.-.■...--■;■-■,..
___ Oo&otI ainnt, ' they have been compelled, or they were compelletj^
Observation. — Twofold translation. Voice. Number of words
in each Latin phrase. Which indicates the person ? What does
the change Of ending in the other indicate ?
Andltns est,
BevooatI samnsn
JussX estis, p
«>
1
(6) Jussa est»
Aadltam est,
Liooas munXtus est,
Castra munlta sunt,
Liegion^s missae sunt.
she was ordered.
it has been heard.
the place was fortified.
the camp was fortified.
the legions have been sent.
the soldiers have been ordered.
Mllites J ussi sunt.
Observation. — What new endings are found in these verbs?
What^o the diflFerent endings indicate 1 '~ ,
^■^-
Prownt.
«mo
^vetA
moned
J abed
O4»mmove6
com pled
'*«^.
cdgndsco
First Conjugaxion.
Perfect Actjvtt
am&vl
dedl
Tetal
Secokd Conjugation.,
monnl
jussX
oomrndTl
«omplivl
'Third- Conjcoation.
. r«xl~-~ "^ - '"'■';
^^ cdgndvl
V
Perfect Passive.
am&tas sum
datus sum
vetltas sum
monltns sum .
Jassus sum
oommdtns sum
eompUtosjmni
oo&otas sum
cdynltns snm
mitt»
%iM
mlMiis tvm
•>t
or you -were
assiv».
1 sum
.-'■'■.
lam
'■ ■"*■• 't
1 sum
■•■*.:"■'
la Hum .
1*1= - ,
■am
'!;'.■
tos >am
'■":f ■'
tosaam
•>
•am
1 «am
»• •am
•am
■ ■ ■'---•- , ,^ \ ■
;{:>-'.-;
PART I.— INTBODUCTORY LESSONS.
33
Present.
aadld
sentlo '\
vinold
Fourth Conjugation.
Perfect Active.
audlTl
•ensl^
vlnzl '
"■ie!* ■
Perfect Paaeive.
andltns «am
sensas sum
vinotas som
"H
<
Y^«
Ob«erv«tioa.-l8 the relation between the forms of the perfect
nJl! % *"^ conjugation? In what respect do all the
. perfect passive forms agree ? i' «« wi cne
7^%otice how in the vocabularies SlSiow^^^fo^^ ^^
each verb, from which <^e perfect passive may easily be^Z,^
EXERCISE XXI.
I'
Vocabulary,
enti-mt, begin. — ; V ^^^^^.^' "• "• «om, «.
tum,<riaTm. . food 6,«*. "*
«A netu.
_««/:« fry^om. . tun., lead across.
Faelo, ere. «oi, faetun,. do, Va.t-o, Are -Avi. a*» /
r^i^T'^^'^'^rl^^^ ^ve. four form,, endlnir i„ ... .^.^
these have no constant reliUon oiie to .^mhpr i.. f iH" '"jf ««««Pt'on of the flnt tw^
Uon a-^-^Vrit^of ve beTwr chLS.T£^^J." 'r^ '^^^o^^^nt^:^ n^.'^Zi^
•*^ to -u,. -gum; and in ii.eTuTcS'ni^^l^.^'Jir\L'\!^- ■^'kI conjug^ag
^^
'41
%
u
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
■1
I
I._l, Agrl vastati sunt. 2. Copia© coactae sunt. 3. D5l6cti
aumus. 4. Cognitum est. 5: Oppida incensa sunt. 6. Equitatus
missus est. 7. Jussus sum. 8. Vetita es.^ 9. 'Locus est^ mflnituB.
10. Opus perfectum est. 11. Equi remot? sunt. 12. Fossa com-
pleta est. 13. Reducti sumus. 14. Coriyocati sunt. 15.' Pro-
hibita est. 16. Prohibitae sunt. 17. Vulnus acceptum est. 18.
Proelium factum est. 19. Exei^itus transductus est. 20. Caesar
commotus est. >
II. —1. The soldiers were ordered. 2. A large number of n(ien
has been collected. , 3. Wounds were received. 4. We have been
sent. 5. 3he has been wounded. 6. The camp was fortified. 7.
I was ordered. 8. The war was renewed. 9. The arms have been
given up. 10. The "forces were Jed back. 11. The cavalry has
been led across. -12. Garrisons were stationed. 13. A legion was
Stationed. 14. Hostages have been given. 15. We -have been
:•.•.. ■ - "alarmed. 16. You have been ordered. .17. The signal was given.
VV* .-i" *18i^The battle has been begun. ' Id. The camp was takeii by
*^.. \i;;> ;;r '»"• «t^^^puu 20. The magistrates were called together.
• v.. '„•■* '.*;**:»■ ^ - , ■ I ■'■■.">..-■*
\-<U'W''J \* ■ ^ -^ . v-'
••*.^'3^ li-
LESSON XXII.
Fand& valnfer&tns est,
Agrl a ooplls vastati sunt.
he tocM» iwwnci^ed by a sling,
the Jktda have been laid vxMte by
thefoi'Ceal,
Iiooas vallo fosfaque munXtus the pla^e iWM fortified by a loall
est, 4 clnd trench. .'
l^ui a Caesare remdtl s^nt, , the horses were removed by Chsar.
». Observation.— Two ways of translating by. Which is used in
connection with the passive voice to^ denote the person by whom
something is done ?' . v
I /
1. Est munituK haa the same meaning as munilut-eit. Not only may the order be
/iiuuige«l in'those perfect panive forma, but the two p«rt« are «oiuetime» separated by
other words.
-f t r-W th thp ftnt i lT B Tnlnfi n fttid nh will mittn /rm ■ w^h ihn |iMsiu , JV?» "f ^»
whichever the reel of Um sentenoe requires.
~ir^'
1»-^
I— »»«i »o« n-OtJtj(i-
''^T /•— INTftQBUCTORY LESSONS.
X
«5
EXERCISE XXII.
f^-
. ' ; -^ Vooftbulary.
Onus, oAerig, n., burden. Pertm-K - -
re, pregsi, -pres- • throw into confusion
sum, overwhelm. «,„„ .^,. ^'^"/'«^m^-
Prae-mltto, ere, -mui, -mlggum,
r . , . ' Y / ^ ^nd in advance.
. I.-1; Obsidgs ab Helvetiia Caesarl dati 'sunt ^ 2 TaaSfr »
remoti sunfc Q ta - , ^ omnium ex conspecta
barbarians 3^ '"k"."""'"*'"' ''^ "-e attack of the
trench t v!„ WeT" nT '"^'*<"* ^-^ " «""P"* and
fiUed with I» ^r ^» ■«»"-' fr»«>--k. 5. TheVdl™
remove the hoL r^^J'™/"*"™^ "^^ ">« "«"*«•«* ^
from every wT' 8 W ^""u"'" '"^^'^ *^ '«^»'»".-
f^j.ian..\T..«ei'::r5rBXr:.3tr.o^^4^''
" Autrjr.tirj'^rtnr'^"^^^^^^^^
been laid waate by, the GeZns V„b """^^•'' *""
"WO»- 16 Arm» w.,J ™*'"- , "■ She was wounded by an
fo^es we« ^T" «T "P > »« *» Belgians. 16. ^The "
'j*^ aiarmed by the scarcity of com it a n •
«ade out of the woods by the Gauls 18 T^' ^^^7 ^**
mtocamp. "^ "te v*auis.. 18. The army mtm led ^ok
\
I' 9m looteott I. pf nu
— u--
.f
FRIMART LATIN BOOK.
yC
^ . LESSON XXIIL • . . ;
(a) MiBBVLBer am, I had been sent. Bevo^atl eramnsi we had been
. recalled, '
Conimdtas er&i, you (sing.) JussX eratls, you (plural) had '
had been ala/rmed. ' ^een ordered.
AndXtas erat, he had been Cohetl eranU they had been com-
, - heard. * pelled. . • / .
\ Andltam erat, U had been ^astra munlta ejrant»^^ cam^
_^ _____ ^^^^^ _^________ _____ ________ ^^ ^^^^yj^^^^^ ____________
Jusga erat, she had been or- Copiae missae erant, the' forces
dered. . .^ j^ had been sent.
' Observation. — Compare these phrases with those given in Les-
son XXL (a) and (&)♦ What differences ,in form and meaning do
you find? , ' ^.
(6) Missus ero, I shall have be^ Bchr^iitl erlmws,, we dudl have
sent. y been recalled. •
' Comin5ta9 erls, you (sing.) Jussi eritls, ycm (plural)- will
i will have b&en alarmed. have been ordered. ' ^
.* AndXtam e«lt, it will have Castra munXta erant, t/ie camp
* been heard. v)ill have been fortified.
J&ssa erlt, she wUl ha/oe been Copiae missae ernn.t, the force»
ordered. will have been sent. ' ,.
"■';■'■*■ ' , ■■■'■;
Observation.— Compare these phrases with those ilv (a). What
differences in form and meaning do you find ? _ i A, , _i .
^ (c) MXseram, I had seiiti
Jusser&tls, yow (plural) /uid Of»
' " - dered.
Andlverat, he had htard. Co^gerant, they had. compelled.
MXsero, I shall have sent. MunXverlnt, they wiU have fot>
l';-^ - .-'■:^^-: .:. :. ' - ■ .; ;- ' ;' ■ tified. ■ - ■■'m^ V^V r -- -;■-/;;.
Obiervfttton.— Compare these forms with the phnwws in (o) aftA
(6). What is the difference between the corresponding active and
pmaivo foiTOB in Latin ? . —
..,*
^y-A^
'■^ •.■■■'
PABT L--INTBODUCTORY LESSONS.
we had hem
ad been eom-
ve aludl have
EXERCISE XXIII.
Vocabulary.
^r^
Ad-duoo.ere. -dftrf, -duotum. In-Btruo, ere/ -.truxl, -.trft-
-, - - I. turn, arato M». >
Compar-6, ^re. .&vl. -atum. Tollo, ere, ««tuH. .nblatum,
.«uiA^ ready, ^atm^ . takeaway. , ,
• I.~i: Copiae InBtructae erant. 1 AdductI erSmus. 3. Frtt-
r^SLT^fT ent. .t. Jtissus era: 5. Convocatl «i;nt.
6. GoUocfitI sunt 7. Cbggeramus. 8. IncendSrunt. 9. Oppida
. 13. Removit. ■ 14. Muniveratis. 15. Sustulimus. 16. Addtix-
eram 17. Instrficti «unt. 18. :fe'Q88a erat completa. 19. Vuln^
-K* o?^ "" ^«'^^«^^«««n» erat. 23. JubSbat. 24. Com-
movebit. 2o. SuBtinueramus. ^6. Dslggeras. 27. Delfectus erSa.
28. Cogmtum.ent. 29. Sublatum erat. 30. Vulneratis. '
•^IL-l. The war had been renewed, g. We had renewed. 3.
5 ThThTV"'"'^?^- '• ''^^ ^^«^^^ ^^<1 ^-^- drawn up
5. They had been made ready. 6. The battle wak^begun. 7
11 T^r ^ ^^y/^*^ "^ «advance. 10. It had be^n finS.
11. They used to favor.^ 12. We were caUing together.AlS
They wiU have found out., 14. ^t was found out. 15. Th^ h^
beencompeUed. 16. The legion was led back. 17. TheSo^
had been led across. 18. You were sent in advance.' 19 S^
rry"^^22 "iJ"'' THr^^? ^^'^^- ^^- ^ ^^«^ ^- ^^
away. ^ ii. The camp had been fortified. 23. They wiU 4ake the
rihtV'rr ^^•^«^^"— ve. 25. They VJld^^
given. 29, Ig»ye. 3| Iwasgiving. , _,: , , _
1»
. >4-
' t
■-■■f--
— ....
»
•
■ ■»
-jL.
■ ■ - ♦ . ■■
Jfcl
., v.;
-4—
-.■:fc.:#-:.^,^
'-*.,
88
PRIMABY LATIN BOOK.
V-,
i^
' LESSON XXIV. ■'
(a) Turn to the nouns bf the fifth declension, given in Part III.,
section 8. , '
Observation. — The case-elidings of the declension. How does
the vocabulary indicate that a noun is of the fifth declension ? Of
what gender are most nouns of this declension ?^ ' •
(6) Turn to the list, of ordinal numerals, given in Part HI.,
section 15. ^ _: . ';, -^^ — _^ . _ _„,_^ — _-i-^ ___.^^_
Observation. — Forms and translation. Notice the way in which
thirteenth, fourteenth, twenty-Jirst, etc., are expressed.
In the general Vocabulary all ordinal numerals are given as
follows : primus» a«. nm, Jirst ; sdoiindns, a, am, second ; deoi-
mas* a» ani, tenth. What is indicated by the letters a» am ?
"' ^ ' EXERCISE XXIV. " ''':':£-_/
J ... - . " ■ ' ■
fcv ^ .Vocabulary,
: '■'■<■"'■■■ ~f . ' " ■■ ■ -
^" Aoidst €1» f., line of battle, line. Ocoasus, us» m., setting.
/Dies, ei, m., day. Pars, partis, f., part.
MgreginHf a, am, remarkable. Res, rel, f., thing, matter, affair,
VlA&»,et,f.,h.on^, word, fidelity. Scientia, ae, i., knowledgei
Hora, ae,f., hour. , Sol, soils, m., sun.
Mllltarls, e, mtZitory. .-^ 1 " Spes, el, f., Tiope. .
t.^1. Spem fugae sustulerat. 2. MflitSs in aciS Instracti sunt.
3. Cum tertift legione in provincia hiemHre constituit. 4. Fidera
servftyit d5 numero diSrum. 5. Scientiam rei^ mllitSris habet.
6. Ab horft septimS. ad occS^stim solis pflgnSiverant^ 7. Multlis
rSbus adducti erant. 8. Egregiam fid^m lSg9.tI cognoverat. 9.
Tertia pars exercitfls interfecta est. 10. OmnSs centurionSs
quartfie cohortis irilerfecti erant. 11. DS fid6 GallSrum dubitft-
'•vw^nt. 12. Propter inopiam omnium rSrum mflitSs nOnae legionis
in pr5vinci»m redftcere constituerat. 13. Omuem Bpe^l saltltis in
virtate po8u'erS.mus. .
1. See Part III., BectTon 61, 6. 7
if 9t$ mUitari» <tbe ^gulu)mm,Uitary ajfitirt,th« art tifwurfar», '
^tf"
■■•S" ,.
. '
How does
ision? Of '
* ■.
Part m.,
:PAET L— INTBODUCTOBY LESSONS. - 09
n.-|. An atj»ck had beJmade by the soldiers of tlie fifth
legion p^ the first line. ^ 2. They had been influenced by the
hope of^plunder. 3. The forces had been led back to the camp
after^the^fourth day. 4. All things will h^ive been made ready.
5. m second Hne had been surrounded by the barbarians. 6. He
h^ |iad, great experience in military afiairs.» 7. He drew up the
Jin^ :of?battle. 8. They had inhabited a third part of Gaul. 9.
Thef will not withstand the first attack of the forces. 10 The
forces had been influenced by the want of everything (lUerally, aU
things). 11. The matter had been tom out through scouts. 12.
They had come into Gaul not without gi^t hope of plunder. 13.
'.He had atafcioned the tenth legion in ambuali.
. LESSON XXV.
..Tertlo dig ad" Caesairem ve- on the third day they came to
' nerunt, ' . ,,•*;•-.> • • Goum ••/■■
Hora septlma proeltttm com- hejoiri^baMU at the seventh
"»'»**• hour.
Ocoasu soils In oa«tra reductl they were led back mto camp at
■"***•;: «iwwe* (literally, at the s©t^
ting of the sun).
. • Multos dies Iter feoerant, they had ma/rched many day.
. Magnam partem dlel pugna^ thsy had fought a large part of
.. " ve'ant, v the day.
Panoas horag Impetus ansti- for a few hours they withstood the
naernnt, attacks^
ObserTation,— the two ideas connected with time found in
these sentences. The mode of expressing each in Latin. Is each
^ idea always expressed in the same way in English ? •
EXERCISE XXY :y^^- '■■''' Mi :■■--
(For this, and all subseqwnt exercises, no 8p<ic{dl>oe(Mary wOt
^ he given. The student m^ist depend entirely on. the general vocabu-
l<mes, at the end of the hook.)
l*J|WlootiK>toJ^ page 81.
2. See footnote 2, psgfe 88.
i
■
I.
!|40
'V.
P&IMAR7 LATIN BOOK.
I.^l. Posters diS castra LabiSnl opp%nSre dScrftverant. 2.
Complilr@s hoi^ ptlgnaverunt. 3. Nocte-a,d Bhenum contendit. ,v
4. Soils occastl copiae in castr^ reductae sunt. 6. Multds annos
rSgnum obtinuerat. • 6. HorS . cinciter decimS. diSI ntlntium ad
Labienum mlsimus. 7. 'Permultos di^ iter per pjovinciam fSce-
rant. 8. ^.Continues compftirSs dies (JJaesar aciem Instrtlxit. 9. '
Prima Idee res ab exploratoribus confirmata est. 10. Certo anni
tempore magistjeatfls a Caesare convenire jtlssi erant.' 11. Tertiam
partem Galliae paucos anno& incolueramus. 12. Advents Oaesans
barbar! constiterunt. '»
II.::— 1. The Helvetians moved their camp the next day at 4ay-
break. 2. In the third watch they .made a sally out of the town
with all their forces. 3. Frrr wn^miiQ ]|iiiii « they withstood the
attacks of the cavalry. 4. On the first arrival of the army numer-
ous sallies had beei\ made by the Gauls. 6. He decided to attack
the town on the seventh day. 6. They had for many days laid
waste the lands -of the Aedui. 7. Oil the . following day an attack
was made by the Gauls on the cavalry. 8. The camp was moved .
in the fourth" wateh with^ great noise and confusion. 9. AfterJiis
father's death he had possessed the royal powerfor several yewsL
10. At daybreak on the remaining days a double line of battle Tiaa^
been drawn up°by Caesar. 11. They had waged war with th^
Romaics for many years. 12. We reached the camp tlie third hour
of the day. ,
LESSON XXVI.
Turn to the nouns of the third declension, given in Part HI.,
section 6. *,
Observation. — How do the case-endings differ from those ^ven
in sections 4 and 5 (comparing always nouns of the same gender) 1
Do the same differences occur in all the' words?' Compare the
adjectives of the third declension given in Part III., section 11.
Notice also the irregular declension of the nouns given^n Part
III., section 9.
1. Uwout».
~S. Molt ntntiui luiying^ the
I eiiainf{B wiii iw niuuu to Doioiij^ to (
dMHes:
P^T L— INTKODUCTOKY LESSONS.
■ ^M' " "■ ' ■ ■"■-■.
EXERCISE XXVI.
41
I.-1. Equitgs impetum hostium sustinent. 2. FinSa AeduSrum
multos menses ferrS et Ignl vastati sunt. 3. Nfivium figOrft efc
.rSmorum mottl barbarl peWotI erant. 4. Culmina Alpium ab
hostibus oocupata erant 5. Animalia .t^ue mfignum Wrum
servorum.et clientmm GaUl lg„l cremabant. 6. Postero diS
Labienum cum omnI equitatfl montem tenere jtlssit. 7. In fInSs
hostm^ mcursionem fscerant. 8. HieRje nav6s constituit aedifi-
care. 9 E fimbus hostium HelvSti6rum in finSs AeduSrum iter
P^r vim fScSrunt. 10. In ftnibus hostium- hiemSverat. 11. Prop-
ter altitfldmem montium castra in valle posita sunt. 12. N5v6s
ex fimtmils regiSnibus jubet convenire. ^
/i'~^l'^^^^ ^^ ^""* * ^"^^ "'""'^^'^ «^ «hip« ^^ the third year
of the w^ 2. He demanded a Ikrge number of hostages. 3. An
attecWas made at ^aybreak by the enemy on the line of battle.
>4 All tlfe^wns of the enemy were buried. 5. They had marched
through the province hy iliterally, through) force. 6. They were
alarmed by the violence of the rivers. 7. For many years he used
to have a large iju^ber of retainers. 8. A forest used to extend
from the mountam to the territ.>ries of the Aedui, and restrain»
thejpnemy s cavahy from imroads. 8. On account of the depth of
the sea, the soldiers hesitated to leap down out of the ship, io
The forces of the enemy had been dismayed by the size of the
he fields with.fire and sword. 12. For several years he had
leased all the rest of.the revenues of the Aeduii
ge&?rgula"n^«^ *" *• *"■ "• «^"^ •^^» *-<> "yM'Wes in both nominative and
. (4) Neuter nouiM ending in e, al or ar. * /
^o^^Ztil^Z'l.^Zt'''^^^ •»>»«- -nHar. the
continent or mainland. ^**' "'* ' ^^> » »»»•? ; eonttnmt, the
a word, not a «epM»te wort. 'mdemtood are expre«ed io Latin by part S
42
PRIMAEY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XXVI]
^ Turn to the present, imperfect and future indicative (active and
|Mtssive) of the first and second conjugations, as given in Part III.»
sections 27 and 28.
I-';-,, 'l»
ObgerTatlon. — ^From which of the principal parts are these
tenses formed in the active voice ? in the passive voice ? How is
the difference between the voices indicated in Latin 1}
1;
EXERCISE XXVII.
« I. — 1. HelvStil loci nfttttrft cdntiiientar. 2. M9,gnae copiae ab
hostibus compar&bantur. 3. Tertia pars GaUiae S. Belgis obtinS-
tur. 4. A Gallls 8ollicitfi.b§jnur. 6. Mons S. LabiSnd tengbitur.
6. Fuga Gallorum comAiovSminf. 7. Magnam inter BelgSs aucto-
ritatem hab@re vidSris. 8, Vicus montibus continebatur. 9.
EquitSs peditum virtiite servantur. 10. In servitate tenSberis.
11. Numerus hostium augStur. 12. Naves tempestatibus dStine-
buntur. 13. HostSs & ptigna tempestatibus continSbantur. 14.
Adventtl Caesaris commovBbar. ' 15. Copiae hostium S castris
videntur. 16. Iter & flflmine averttere vidSbimur. 17. Provincia
ab hostibus incursiSnibus vastab&tur. 18. Multitfldine hominum
castra complebuntur. W«. *
n. — 1. The forces of the enemy are being increased. 2. Stones
were being placed on the wall. 3. The battle will be renewed.
4. You will be awaited by the consul. 5. The Helvetians are
inclosed by the river Rhine, the Jura mountains,^ and the river
Rhone. 6. We shall not be alarmed by the departure of the
allies. 7. The arrival of the forces was being awaited by the
citizens. 8. For several successive days the enemy's, forces are
kept in camp by storms. 9. The lands of the Aedui used to be
laid waste by the Germans. . 10. It is announced to Ceesar. 11. I
shall be held in subjection. 12. They seem to fear without cause.
1. Notice also that there is no change whatever in the part that precedes the
personal ending, except that { before s is changed €% 4 before rit (er having almost
the same Bouna M ir. but being earier topronounceV
2. Use the Btfl|^Iar of nums, which has the meaning of a mowUain e^titt't» wdl~
as of a single mamUain or hilL
...... ^ . "-^ ■■ ■ ;..
- PAKT t— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa ^ 43
13. They were removedr 14. We were removing. 15. They weri;
being removed. 16. He will recall 17 v^ ^". xney were
ift Tn,«„ ™n V. 1, , recaii. 17. jfou will be recalled
Fortls, brave;
Veldx, sioift ;
■I . ■ .- ^
LESSON XXVIII. 1 .^ :/
fortlop, hramr; fortinnlmuHMavest or very
■'- ■ '■: '■-■: • .brave. ■■ .'r •
veloclop, swy^er; veloolsslnms, «wn/^ or
_ very swift.
Potens. ^Knm:/^; poteriilor, more potentl«,„.„s.mo^ori^ry
i?oioer/tt;. pwjoerful.
ObsePvatlon.-Endings indicating the different degrees of com
panson. Formation of comparative and «uperla^ Lm the
positive.^ Twofold I«.li8li^aa^ji^«,p,ri,y^7^ *^" ^'««^ ^^^
(6) Vter «ttiitofa, o/ a braver man.
Flumen l&tla8. a broader Hver.
Fossae latldpes, broader trenches. '
Miutls foptlsslmi. of a very brave soldier.
Flumen latlsslmum, a very broad river.
■ Fowae latlssimae. very broad trenches, »
Observatlon.-How 40 the case-endinfes of the commrativP
tfZVr^' adMtives of the positfve de|ree beloS^
the same declension l (See section 11.) , ^'^^&^ to
yi:
Minrtm weO
"^^^«-^?^^S!5S1!7' °* *''' ^"^* ***«^*« «' ^*" adjectives is respectively
I^
44
PRII^RY LATIN B00&.
./;!
,' EXERCISE XXVIII.
I,_l. HelvStii fluimne IStissimS et altissim5 continentur. 2.
Oaesarem dS adventtt Labignl certioreiii fec6runt. 3. Urbs in
monte altissimo posita erat. 4. PeditSs vglocissimi et fortissimi
delect! sunt. 5. Humiliores & potentioribus ext)ul8l erant. 6.
LegionSs longiore itinere circumdOxit. 7. In dSnsissimas silvas
confugSrunt. 8. Castra Ifttioribus fossis rnOnlta sunt. 9. Ad
flOmen Ifitius venerant. 10. RSs opportunissima accidit. 11.
Crebri6r§8 exploratores in finSs hostium misit. 12. In novissi-
mum agmen impetum f ecerunt. / ,
II.— 1. The Helvetians had been informed of {literally, about)
the enemy's departure. 2. The enemy sought denser forests. 3.
He gives his daughter to the centurion, a very brave and.piowerful^
man. 4. He';^me at 8) most opportune time. 5. They had sent
the^ noblest (men) of the state. 6. They are alarmed by the
.Ttaipearance of the wider vessels. 7. He ordered Labienus to makQ
'*^e vessels -lower andtwider. 8. They used to pdiSsesB most fertile
lands. 9. The rear was being thrown into confusion. 10. They
encamped in a very fertile region. 11. Th^ used to be hemmed
in by higher mountains and a broader ri^. 12. A deeper river
hems in the Helvetians. 13. Ctesar hig^'Jbeen informed by more
frequent messages. 14. He had,^^,)55|iRisted the safety of the
hostages to the bravest soldiers, /f; '
: LESSON XXIXr-
4 (at^iman» est, he waa^ ipt has Bdmanus est* heua Moman»
'^''^^'^^^'^^^^^'- '*''^- ■■■■■ '■',,. •• '
.d:^'0: "if ugBi Hunt, they tvere ordered. FortiSs sunt, they are hratf.
\, Cd^nttani erat, it l^nd been Potens orat, he was powerful,
found out. ■ ■ fJ
Wt9Anctl fRrvintt thiy wUl have lAh^rl mww$* ^^V '^^ ^ f"^
^r-^—r—-^-, been led back: % ~:
i I
Obsefvatlon. — What difference in translation occurs when '•«•,
»ant, etc., are joined with a noun or adjective, pot with the part
t. i.*., vtry powerful. Sae footnote 1, psge 41. > ;
I..
:» ;
n
PART L—INTBODUCTORY LESSON&
werfui.
*
¥hen '«ti»
the put
.J
* '. "', ■-' ■' ' '■
M
45
of the verb used in forming the perfect tenses ? In what case is
the, noun of adjective in the predicate with the verb som ?
(&) Turn to the inflection of the verb
section 41. '
£f>
sum, given in Part III.,
Observation.— Formation and translation of the Mi tenses in
the indicative, and of the present infinitive.
__:.:„,::,_._.. __::;:.;: .;::.:: exercise xxix/:- ;■■: .: :-•'-,-::
I.— 1. OnmiumGaUorum fortissimi sunt Belgae. 2. Exercitus
^rat^ m conspectu. 3. Pwlculosum est. 4. In armis sumus: 5.
Tertia nocte Iflna erat pl6na. 6. Locus erat idoneus. 7.« OmnSs
rss comparatae erant. 8. NoctSs breviorgs sunt. ' 9. Castra angu-
stiSra erant. 10. Sp5s est sublflta. 11. Rsx fuerat. 12. Miserior
et ^vior esse fortOna SSquanorum vidstur. 13. MSns altissimus
est inter SSquanos et HelVstiSs. 14. In itinere erfttis. 15. Prop-
ter frigora frOmenta in agrls matilra non erant. 16. MfliWs mon-
temtenSbant. ,17. Adventua hostium cSgnitus erat. 18. Reliquae
navSs erunt infltiles. 19. Non audSbunt esse inimlcl. 20Vir
fortissimus et nSbHissimua fuit. 21. ReductI sunt. 22. Foaaa
erat ante oppidum. 23. HomS sum.
■ ■ s-
II.~1. All thei^est of the Belg^ns ftreTin arms. ^S^e^
through the province wUl be longer. 3. Ambassadors were^sent.
4. The adjacent regions are veiyfertUe. 5. They are aided. 6;
The Belgians seem to be very hostile^ 7. There» is scarcity of all
things 8. They were awaiting. 9. The night was very short.
10. The vessels are low ahd wide. 11. The forces were sent in
advance. 12. The allies used to be free. 13. They began to be
hostile. 14. There» had been great danger. 15. Nothing is
easier. 16. We shaU be thrown into confusion. 17. You are
useful friends. 18. They have been in Ccesar's army. 19. He
has been influenced. 20. They are making ready all things. 21.
It IS uncertain. *• -. ■ ■',■■■;.■■;■■ ■ -■■p---' '■■',^- ' T. ■
''Uunat7tt^J»j^\^I2i^t^^^"^ equivwent In Latin, wTiioli would «tpNii
wwrjora («n mm prMmt and " ten mm are presmt " by the Mine won!». *^
* 7%a« (the Introductory adverb) haa no equlvi^lent in Latin. Sea footnote 1. 1 '
■ 'l*' ■ taial ' ■ M. ■ ..■■■.. . ■ ^^ _
m
■M
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XXX.
Popnlo Bomand perlouldsam it was dangerous to the Bomcm
erat, ' people. '
Helvetlls erat Inimlons, he vxts hostile to the Helvetia/n».
Flnitiml sunt Oalliae, they are adja>cent to Oaul.
Observation.^ — Nature of the adjectives. Addition of a noun
defining their application. Case of the noun indicating the person
concerned or the thing to which the quality is directed. Does the ,
dative in these sentences generally precede or follow the adjective^
it refers to?'^ ,
^ /\ -EXERCISE XXX. ^ ' '/'t;:';' . ':>; /■
I. — 1. Amicus fuerat HelvStiis. 2. Caesai^ es fid§Iis. 3. In-
cursidnes hostium prov^nciae sunt perlculosae. 4. Fugae similia
erat discSssus. 5. Turpissimum ^ est reipublicae. 6. Nihil estr'
gr&tius dis immortSlibus. 7. Omnibus equitibus incognitum erat. '
8. Gain flnitiml Belgis erant. 9. Caesai^ erat inimlcus. 10.
C&ii fuSrunt dIs immort&libus. 11. Yulnera mllitl periculosa sunt.
12. Qa}ll non parSs erant Belgis. 13. Multls civibus erit grfttum.
n. — 1. We are not equal to the enemy's cavalry. 2. The
Aedui are adjacent to the provinces. 3. Nothing was more dis-
graceful to the Germans. 4. The road is dangerous to the army.
5. She is dear to aU. 6. We used to ba friendly to the Romans.
7. They are useiul friends to the hostages. 8. We had been
faithful to the Roman people. 9. The punishments are more
pleasing to the immortal gods. 10. He used t0 seem to be hostile
to the Roman people, ll. The war will b^ dangerous to the state.
12. The harbors were unknown to the Gauls. 13. It is siAiilar to
the GaUio war. ' ^ ' m '
'Mr
LESSON XXXL
^1...
Turn to the list of irregularities in the comparison of adjeotivesi
given in Part 111.« section 13 (parts ii., iii. and iv.).
1. For beglnnei» it ;
1. For beginnei» it nu»r be ■umole
iataa in tna omtnaiy w iyjaa i w nffinf
, S. 8m footnote 2, p«g« S.
be ■ulHolent to «Jl attention to tii> me of <l>tlTM (tnm»
" (mi " '" ""
< PART L— -INTRODUCTOEY LESSON& * 47
Ob.ervatlon^The difierence between the comparison of these
Bectwes and the regular comparison, given in Lesson XXVIII.
EXERCISE XXXI. >
PoriTtlsT^ ^! "^^^"""^ «"Ititadinem equitum ab.tllteri(^
Cl ^ « ^^*' P'^^' ""'^^ Germanis. 3. Ascgnsus est
facUlimus. 4 Supenore anno minore cum perlculo beUum gesse-
rant. 5. CrSbemma aedificia in GaUia sunt. 6. Proximft nocte
summa^erat difficultSs. 7. Ocelum est citerioris provinciae opp^
t?"' «f r«™u"^- 8. Spem celerrimae vict^riae habent. 9. MftxkL
ittneribuB m Galliam citeriorem contendit. 10. Iter per.prSvin-
ciam erat facilbmum. 11. Summam scientiam rel mili^\abet.
12. Supenora loca occupSverant. 13. In citeriore GaUia legiOnSs
conscrlps^ 14 Superi5re amio cum proximis clvitfitibus^em
wLTJH conWvSrunt. 15. Pn>pter smnmam virttitem ,
hZ WP- « Supenoribus disbus mftjorem motmn exspecta- ^
16 t ^P^"^''^™ P*"^^"* ^"^ dSnsissimls castrls coii-
rvft '"
"■~^' """«y '»^-J»Il«!ted veiy many sMpTavthe preoedin»
Sr'd .f " "^ r"" "^ "^ diffloult. 8. They had beef
rfaftoned in the upper line. 4. He h«l sent very /r^ueht me,-
ri#«iO tame of the year more Btotee were oonepiring. 6 For the
toger part of the summer they had.waged war in hither Gaol. 7
^ey made an attack from (ItUrMy, out of) thehigher griund. 8.
They were attacking the outer fortifications. 9. He had come on
-the preceding day to the smjler oamp with a Urger number of
foot-Boldiers.. 10. The depth of the river i, ve^ great 11
Geneva « the farthest town of the Allobroges, «id the nea^st ^
r^GaSr^ ^K n"T" *'^- "■ '^'^ 1»™«' 'he fin«,t city
!»• 1 hey bad collected vegr large forces.
\
48
PRD«ABY LATIN BOpK.
-*» «-
./ .^v *i LESSON XXXII. ; •
(a) Turn to tib present indicative active of tjj^e third conjuga- •
tion, given in iSrt III., section 27. '; ^'
Observation.— Personal endings. Manner of joining personal "
endings to the common part reg-.^ >; -' '* ^ |i
(6) In the same -way examine the present indicative ^tive of the
fourth conjugation, in the same section. ;i
" (c) Turn to the present indicative, passive of the third and fourth ~
conjugations, given in section 28. ,
^bgervatlon.— Is the diflerence between the active and th*
passive» in the present tense, the same as in the first and second
conjugations?» Y ; , * ' ; ' f ' %
. / ; EXERCISE XXXII.. • *
i— 1. A Caesare in Galliam praemittituV. ?. HostSs in silvSjaC
repelluntur,. 3. I,iSgatt ab omnibus civjtatibus veniunt. 4. Ter- ,
tiam partem Galliae incolitis. 5. Ad castra vSnit : ad castra venit.-
6. Ex castris discSdunt. 7. Ad Caesarem convenlmus. 8. Castra
,T*U6 altissimS mflmuntur. O.-Viticlminl: vinciminL, 10. Pontem
rescindunt. 11. Rhodanus provinciani ab HelvStiis dividit. 12.
Vicus flflmine dividitur. 13. A populo RSmftnS impedlmur. 14.
Exercitum in Olteriorem Galliam dtJcis. 16. Axjiem circumveniunt.
16. Vinclmus. 17. Castra in loc6 idflneS pSnimus. 18. Oppid»
omnia incendunt. 19. In fluCtOs dSsilit. 20. Cum equitatd Hel-
T6ti5rum proelium conimittunt. ^ ^ -^ , ^ J
n.— 1. They leap down out of the ship. 2. The line of battle
is drawn up. 3. You are enrolling a legion. 4. A, few foot-
soldiers fall. 5. We are being surrounded by the Gaujs. 6. We
aire waging war with the Romans. 7. They assemble on the
seventh day. 8. They send agjbassadors to Csesar about peace."
9. The legion is led. back /into wmter quarters. 10. You are
"binding. 11. We are conqiternig. 12. The bridge i» broken down.^
1. With, beginners It ii Bufflcient for all practical purpotwa to ooniMer the prwent
rtcm «a e nctin y In thw noMo nant preoedin y o. e.g., rag-, pon-, gtr-. To Introduce tb»
■o-oalled thematio vowel -«~wIiroiIy oauM oonnmoB. \ ~
% See footnote 1, page 41
■to.
Lve of the . '^'^
4 -fr^f
PART I.— .INtIiOPUCTORY LESSONS.
49
/l.'
13. THiey fortify the camp" with a wall and trehbh. 14. A meseagA
is sen£ to CfBsar. 15. They are assembling from all the camps.
16. The camp is pitched in a valley. 17. Lat)ienus id sent in
advance with the scouts. 18. I am hindered by the violence of
the river. 19. I am cut off from the army. 20. It is annoimced.
- Tiim to the adjectives whose declension ia.givep in Part UliV
section 14. ' .*r:. -,. ■ .'"Vft; ' " ■,. -^'^ ■ t ■--/■■..; • ■
. ObserTrftion.— Declension to which these adjectives in l^e main
b6long.^ Irregulanties in declension. % - .
The most peculiar of the common uses ©f the adjectives^ veil in
the list may be observed in the following sentences : '^
Alia loca foasis, alia vallls, Sotm places fw vxul fortifyina ioith
,«lla turrlbus muniebat.; . ^ ^^trencheSy others' tktit' waUSf
. '. " * " J others with Uywera:
Altera legi5 In OaUi& hlem^t, ,On<r iegum is ivinteriri^ in Oavl,
altera in ItalU. • > the other in Italy. ; s'....
1 . * \ . EXEBgiSE x:^xiii.
T.— 1. Alteram iter fafcilius erat. 2. LSgfttl totius G^iae ad
Caesarem veniunt.^ 3. Ciim sola decim& legidne proelium com-
mittit 4. Aliiditer habSmiis nt^Uum.^ 5. Belinquitur'» Ona per
* SSqlianSs. vi^. 6. In utram partem flflm^n 'fluit ?3 7. Nfllll acci-
derat. 8. Neuter proelium comhiittere aud^bit. 9. Un6 tempore
4^ »^v|^W equit&tfls et^& LatiSnl victSrift certior factus est. 10.
Alteram partem vicl Gallis concSdit, alteram cohortibus. 11. Ab
»lils audiunt. 12. Alia in^parte legiOnSs collocavit. 13: FactiS-
num alterius princi^tum tenent Aed^ui» alterius 86quanl. 14.
Sjne 0113 perlculS oastra miiuiunt.. I5i A^^er SSquanus optimus
-Test tStlus GalUae. ' -^ ^* ^ , ; ^^ 4 .
ii tm n | <
1. Kullum «ffreM with iter, and is placed where it in for emphasia* n^e.
■ .^•?L '!!l!!^°'°*^J!l ""*""'?/''? " ! !^ "^ ^*'" inf , md.int/.rv th^^ In Pnflhh, wh fi m
rwHTBtpoBdlag word la found 1b Xaffn, may Be ahown. 8m footnote I, page 46.
8. 9ee footaote S^ page 1». ""^
Tj-
60
PEIMAEY LATIN BOOK*
^--^ n.-tl. He gives orders to- the whole province. '2. An «ttack '
was made from all directions at one time. 3. Some Iflrthe
■ trenches, others attack "the Vails. 4.. It is pleasing to neither. 5.
They had marched through /the province without (doinfe) any
mischief. 6. The Sequani alone do^ riot venture to ask aid. 7.
He puts the baggage of the whole army in a suitable place. 8.
They assembled in (Uferally, to) one place. 9. They made a sally
from «other part of the town. 10. On the other bank of the
river a legion is left. 11. Neither line begins the battle. 12. ^e
, hastened to the oth~er< camp. '13. Some he. ordered to give up
tbeir arms, others to give hostages. 14. We shall aid neither/'
16. He will not be deterred by the iilfluence of anaSatate.
] , I i^EssoN xxxrv.
(a) Turn to the imperfects arid future indicative active of ^e
third and fourth cOnjugations\ given in Part HI., s*ection 27.
OliSBervatiloii.— Compare Ihei^ with ^he corresponding forms in
the first and second conjugati^s. Are they formed from thci
same principal part? Have they the same letters indicating "mjo^s,
ivere or used to? shall or toUlf^,
(b) The corresponding forms of
Part III., section 28. ,^^
Observation.— Are the changes from the active to the passive
made in the same way as in the first and Second conjugations ?» '
EXERCISE XXXIT. ' <^ =
[.— 1^ B^um gerebant. 2. AciSs InstruSbatur. 3. "DBsiliSmus. '
Commoventur. 5. LegiSnem cOnscrlbSbat. 6. Castra mOniS-
us. • t. MittSmur. 8. ConveniSbfttis. 9. IntercKldSminl. ^
10, ^Uum gerunt. 11. Veni6)t)at. 12. Oppida incendfibantur.
13- rraemittuntur. 14. Castra mflnisbantur. 15. Vinciar. 16. '
D6^j^ntu^. 17. Prohibetis. 18. Impedlris. 19. Vino«is. 20.
Trftdcttur.
passive voice are given in
1. SM ^(Ms^oU \ page 19. 2. Bee footnote 1, iM«e 45. 8. See footnot* 1, pag* 4«.
-ir-
1»ART I. — INTRODUCTOBt LESSONa
61
'9y
n.— 1. They were assembling. 2. We shall depart. 3. He
was leading back. 4. I shall be led back. 5. He was leaping
down. 6. The camp is bei^g fortified. 7. He will encamp. 8.
. They will move the camp. *'9. I. shall be restrained. 10. It used
to divide. H. It was being fortified. 12. We were waging war.
13. A legion will be enrolled. 14. You will be bound. 15. You
will be^coiiiquered. 16. Jou will have conquered. 17. Arms were
being got ready. 18. You shall b© hindered. 19. I used to come. '
; 20. We shall not begin battle. '
*
';-!*
7t '
'P
't
LESSON XXXV.
Turn» to the list of cardinal numerals given in Part III., sec-
,' tion,!©/" ,: '"...:; :: v ",■,,-..'.■,:■'■. ..'■
PbMrvation. — Notice the similarity in form of the cardinal and
ordinal numerals; the formation of the words from Eleven to
twenty ; the manner of ea^pressing twenty-one and similar num-
bers ; the Various expressions for eighteen and similar numbers..
. For the declension of the cardinal numerals,' -see piirt III., seo-
tipnie.» ' : ;
' * V , • EXEHCISE XlXXV. ,f ^
'. ■ ■. V» . »
I-— !• DuSs legionSs in citeriore Gallia conscribsbat, et tr6s ex
■ hibemis SdtbceKit. 2, Quingeiitis equitibus mfignam multittldinem
hostium propuleranti 3. I)i6s circitey quindecim iter f gcerSmus.
4. Ad, Caesarem cum duqentls obsidibus veniebat. 5. NftvSs
octodecim ex superiore porta solvent.> 6. Signa mllitftria quattuor
^ et jgeptuSginta ad Caesarem retulgrunt. 7. Centum viginti quln-
jaj^pftgos habent. 8. EquitSs circiter' triginta trftnsportftveratl
. 9. ^uattuordecim anhos bellum gesserant. 10. «Cum sescentis
, equitibus firuptionem fgeSrunt, 11. Digs decem et octp trftns
KhSnum consftcaemus. 12. NftvSs octogintft coactae erant. . 13.
Legi^nem quartam decimam in'provinoiam redacet. 14. Quadrft-
ginta oohortSs coactae sunt. 15. Digs continuos quinque d^pi&i
in acie Instrttxit. '' ■> >
1. The dMleiuion and um of miUe »re tokan up in LMton XXXYII.
62
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
_ > . ■ ■ , «
II.— 1. He drei^^up a triple line of four legions. 2. He was.
demanding -five hundred hostages. 3. In one summer two very
great tirars had been finished. 4. They had taken forty-three
towns and about two hundred villages. 6. An attack was made by
four hundred cavalry. 6. He ordered Labieijus with two legions
and one hundred and fifty cavalry to ascend the mountain. 7
They were collecting twenty-eight ships, a Thirty-five soldier^
will be chosen from the whole^army. 9. Twenty-three forts were
made. 10. The viUage is divided into two parts by a rive^- 11
There.were two parties ^ in Gaul. 12. Ab^t four hundred vilAges
wiU be bumM. 13. He left two legions in the camp, and with
. the remammg six marched for nine days through the territories of
the Belgians. 14.' Two legions, the eleventh and the sixteenth,
will be left on the other bank. 15. On the twenty-fifth day two
hundred and fifty horsemen had been coUected. 16. They wUi
give up the two sons of Galba, and three hundred and fifty
hostages. 17. They have three months' corn.
-4,. '■■ .: ^ ■:...■/,.. ,. .■.■■■■-' ,. .' . *
,, " . — - y^) :„„
V ...
-*^
/
if-'
./
LESSON XXXVI.
Mtssuras baii,
* " ■■ ■
he is going to send, he is about to send^
; he intends to send. ' ■]
^ve are going to lay vxisU, we a/re (mtliei
^ ' point of laying vxiste. . .«
**^*?v**:"*" -"""** *'*"*** ^ forces loere on the point of fortify.
- ' / '■-''' : i'lig, fvere about to fortify.'.
Jugsui^nfl eram, ^ " '. I was going to order. '
Legrld non ventura erlt, the legion toUl not be \iMy to come.
Pb8ervatipn.-Formation of iMi verbal phrases. Changes
tgnding u^ I, ae, a. From which of the principal paries are
Ii%ru8, JasRuras, etc., obtained? Various translations pos- ' '
for each form." To which voice do the verbs belong ? Difier-^^^" <
ence in meaning and formation between mlMus e.t and mlMuru. ^
est, etc. ,
He was- s
wo very
•ty-three
made by ,
) legions
ain. 7.
soldiers '^
rts were
er. 11..
villages
tid with
ories of
:teenth,'
lay twq
ey will *
id fifty
/
■V ..;.
PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
EXERCISE XXXVI.
53
/ •
I. — 1^. Buodecim cohortes coHcturi sumus. 2. Omnia aedificia
incensurl erant et iter per provinciam per vim temptattiri. 3.
Sine equitattl n6n est venttirus. 4. Bellum cum Romanis gestilri
ierant. 5. Ntlllo cimi periculo copiap ad proxima castra perventiirae
sunt. 6. Neque obsides repetituri, neque auxilium a populo
Rdmllnd imploratClri erant, 7. Centuriones et ^ribtinos militum
convocatiirus sum. 8. Proxima nocte quarta vigilia castra mota
"©rant.. 9. D5 itinere brevi teinpore jQdicattiri estis. 10. Omngs '
collgs et loca superiota occupatflri eramus. 11. Impedjmenta
relictOrl et gruptionem facturi sumus. 12. Injurias Aeduorum
non neglecttlrus erit. 13. Aeduls, obsides non rfeddittirus sum.
14. Amicitiam populi Roman! recHsat^us est. 16. Cflr ab officid
discessOrus es ?
11.-— 1. The enemy are going to send ambassadors and ^ve
hostages. 2. Reinforcements are likely to come from the nearest
winter quarters. 3. The forces are going to winter in hither Q&xjI.
4. The flight of the Gauls is likely to alarm the Romans. 5. We
are intending to aid the other army. 6. They were about to lead
across three-fourths (literally, ihre^ parts) of their forces. 7. She
is not likely to gain her request. 8. They had been on the point
of giving up their arms. 9. He was about to make an attack with
three hundred cavalry. 10. The army was led out of the camp the
next day. 11. We are likely to finish the war. without any danger.
12. They are not likely to refrain from wrong-doing and mischief. '
13. I intend to say nothing about Labienus' opinion. 14. Neither v
wrill be likely to begin battle. 15. We shall spend three disiys in ^
the province. • ., "
LESSON XXXVIl.
(a) Mills eqalt^H mlttentar,
Adventns mllle eqttltnm,
-Cm» a Btll«""«yittibw ■
t«iidlt* .
^«fr
JO, thousand koraemen wUl he sent,
the arrival of a thousand horsemen.
he haatened ioith a thofUiand horae
men.
i i-.i
-.':-*W
h
54
PKIMARY LATIN BOOK.
^ Tria mlUla equltnm mit- three thousand horsemen wUl he
*«"*"'• sent.
Cumdu6bu«mmibu«eqal. A« h^tened with two thousand
turn eontendlt, V horsemen.
;^b«ervatlon.-Diflference between singular and plural of mllle
m decWon, and in relation to other parts of the sentence, ^or
declension, see Part III., section 16.
(6) MUle passus pertlaet. i^4xtends a thtusa^wi paces, or a
"■ : - ' " ■ ■ mite.
~ ^ Trla mUlla Pawmmi abest.^ heisthrk thoxisand paces, or threT
' ' _ # , - miles, distant.
.TTr^'^'T^^ what case does Latin indicate distance or the
extent oi space ? . W:
»».'■
EXERCISE XXXVII.
Jl*'^^?? ™''"^^ consederant miUia passuum octo a
eastns Romanorum. 2. MiUia hominum octogint^ delecta sunt.
S. gumma ommum erat millia trecenta sexaginta octo. 4. Locus
sescentos passfls abest. 5. A lacu Lemanno ad flOmen Rhodanum
milha passuum decem novem murum perducit. ■ 6. NtUIam partem
noctis Iter mtermiserunt. 7. Millia sex convenerunt. 8. Ex
miUibus tngmta tertia pars interfecta erat 9. A Germanis iter
paucorum dierum aberant. 10. Milites aggerem latum pedes tre-
centos tngmte altum pedes octoginta exstruxerunt. 11. Spatium
fcnum mmium" patet. 12. Ex proelio «lillia hominum triginta
tna 8uperfusnint.3 13. Multa millia passuum agri vacant. 14.
bilva novem di§rum iter patet. 15. Sex miUia peditum reliquit;
\J^'~\ '"'^^ ^""^ ''"^ ""'^^' ^^^*^"*' 2. He restored about twenty
thousand captives to th. Aedui. 3. The camp was pitched thtee
mil^s from CaBsar's camp. 4. Out of a number of fifty-two thou-
sand scarce^, a fourth part is left. 5. At day-break he w«s a mile
and a half from tlie enemy's camp. 6 . The rest of the legions are
Of L^XosS a^'Inftt*"^^^^^^ ^ftmmisacompound
ift^ ncraUy omittoa wfaw the genitive of mUtta la lUW. '■
8. Prom mpersum; see footnote 1.
*
toUl be
hoiisand
f mlile
• For
?«, or a
or three
( or the
octo a
. sunt.
Locus
ianum
)artem
8. Ex
Is iter
is tre-
>atium
iginta
. 14.
uit;
venty
thtee
thou-
. mile
IS are
pound
ailarly
PART 1. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
55
a great distance away. 7. The Boil with fifteen thousand men.
were bringing up the line of march. 8. We were about a mile
away from the river. 9. Twenty-three thousand Gauls had come
to Cffisar.' 10. The territories of the Helvetians used to extend
two hundred and for|y miles. 11. He selected a suitable place
about six hundred paces from the Germans. 12. The Gauls will
send twenty-five thousand, the Belgians ten, the Germans three.
13. We shall advance a journey of ten miles. 14. Four thousand
men had been slain. 15. A town of th« Belgians was eight miles
-from the camp. J:^ _ _.„ _.
^
LESSON XXXVIIL
Caesarl p&rent, ^
EquitatuI Bomanp praegtant*
liOgidnl snbveniantt
Provlnoiae Iniperat, \ '^
Mllltl persaadet.
H they obey (or a/re obedient to) CcBsar.
they surpass (or a/re superior to)
the Boman cavalry,
they aid (or give aid to) the legion.
■1 he commands (or gives orders to)
the province.
, he persuades (literally, makes it
^ agreeable to) the soldier.
Observation»— What Case is used with these Latin verbs to
express the object of the English verbs? Notice that in all the
examples the word expressed by this case represents the person
indirectly aflFected (to, or for, or in connection with whom some-
thing is done). '
Notice how the general vocabulary indicates when if verb (e.gf.,
reslsto) belongs to the same class as those given above.
EXERCISE XXXVIII.
I.— 1. Alii eruptionibus resistunt, alfl equitibus subveniunt. 2.
Dumnorigi mSgnls praemils persuftdet. 3. Ex mSgno equitum
numero nSnntOlI Galliols rSbus favebant. 4. Aeduorum civit&tl
Caesar indulserat. 6. Caesar Dumnorigi IgnSvit. 6. Maritimis
rflyinnihiiH quattuor rBgSs praeerant.^ 7. Nflllft in r6 commtlnl
1. For prattum, Me footnote 1, petre 54.
y
56
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
salati deerat.» 8. Omnibus Gallls praestant. 9. NecessftriS tern-
.^ pore civifcftti subvenerat. 10. LegionI succurnmt et equitum
impetas sustinent. 11. Neque ad conciUa veniunt neque imperio
Caesans pftrent. 12. Omnia nSvibus deerant.i 13. ReUqiiae
legiSngs Caesari satisfScerant* L ; fe v .■
II. -1. They will aid the allies. 2. He was injuring C«sar and
the government. 3. They decided to give hostages and obey the ^
rule of the Roman people. 4. Dumnorix had command of the /
cavalry. 6. Dumnorix favors the Helvetians on account of the
relationship. 6. Caesar had indulged the tenth legion, and used"^^~^
to trust (it) on account of (its) valor. 7. In another direction two '
legions were resisting the enemy. 8. They spared neither women^
nor infants. 9. The Germans used to surpass the Belgians 10
They had given satisfaction to the Aedui about the injuries ll'
One thingj»^ was lacking fo Caesar. .12. He favors Labxenufl^a4
opinion. 13. The infantry was aiding the cavalry. /^ '' "
\-
LESSON XXXIX.
Legatus qui missus erat»
Leglo, quae mlssa erat,
Oppidnm quod erat expugna-
turn,
LSgatus quern inlserant, '^
Adyentus legatorum quos ml-
■erant.
thi ambassador who had been sew
the legion which ha^ hen sen^.
the town which hadlka£^en by
storm. ■ •F^^'tt-..
the ambassador' whom they^M
sent. \ * " "^^v
th^ arnval qf the ambdssadors
whom they had sent.
Ab oppldd quod erat expug- from the toton which had hem'
m&tum, \ ia^g^ j^ ^^.^^^
Oerm&nl qulbusoum bellum the Oerrmns With whom they had
gesserant. , ^ ■ ^aged war.
. Observation.— Change of form in the relative pronoun. (The
declension of qui is given in Part III., section 24.) Whatdeter-
1. For d4m,m, see footnote 1, page 64
JKitl
. .- "' """g ^1». tne worg tftiw fc w i th. <^n ftdittntlvf. /nr riV-«t- > ■
/
11.
.11
• /
/
PART L — INTEQDUCTOKY LESSONS.
67
mines the number, the gender, the case, of the pronoun? Cum
with the relative. The position of the clause introduced by the
.TOlative pronoun.^ ^ ..m.
EXERCISE XXXIX. - -
I. — 1. Ex altera parte vici, quam Gallis concSsserat, omnSs
discgdere uoepgruiit. ,2., Reliquum exercitum in^ Morinos, ab
quibus legati non vSn^^nt, dOxit. 3. Cum sola decima legiSne,
^6 qua non dubita
poster© die l§gatu
in^ Morinos, qui
Commium, ciljus vi:
fines Aedu6rum,'qirf
f^ndulserat, discessilrus erat. 4. Caesar
bus, quas ex Britannia redOxerat,
f ecerant, misit. 6. Cum l^atis
consilium probabat, mittit^6. In
xihii S§quanis erant, exercitum dtfifit. 7.
Ab oirijnibus natiSnJbus, quae trans RhSnum incolunt, IggatI ad
Caesarem missi sunt. " 8. Naves habent plOrimas, quibus in Bri-
tanniam navigant, 9. Ad oppidum, ' quod circiter mille passes
aberat, confugerunt. 10. Omnibus druidibus praeest Onus, qui
summam habet auctoritatem. ' ^ /
n.— 1. ^he Belgians are nearest to the Germans, who dwell
across Ihe Rhine, with whom they are coniinually waging war. 2.
,He ordered IJabienus with two legions which had wintered in the_
province to hasten to the river, which was ten miles distant. 3.
They did* what they had been ordered.. 4. He is likely to per-
suade Casticus, whose father has poss€S|^||royal power a.mong the
Sequani for many years. 5. He will collect idl his retainers, of
whom he has a great number. 6. He sends tl^e cavalry in advance
throuigh the forest (of) Ardennes,^ which is the largest in (literally ^
of) all Gaul. 7. Twenty-four thousand Germans came» to Ario-
vistus, who had settled in the country of the Sequani. 8. Two
legions, which he had enrolled in hither Gaul, brought up the
whole line of march. 9. The Sequani, through whose territories
1. The relative clause is regularly placed immediately after ihe word to which the
relative pronoun refers (the antecedent). The order in each of the Latin sentences in
the exercise should be observed.
2. Translate in by against.
"' Oaul, wh e re th e o ity N>=
"STin BUClTphraseB as ifie
/ '
Borne, etc., Latin does not use the g^enitive, but puts the wbAls in the same case.
S8
PjRIMART LATIN BOOK.
wtuT'^t'''/''' *°"« '""''""•' *« t»™ which hrf
Exspeotandns est,
Eqnng removendns est,
Legatus mlttendiis erat,
Looas munlendas erlC-^
Oastra m&nlenda erant,
Bellnm «rerendam est,
Le^atl mlttendl sunt,
l>egid exspeotanda erlt.
LESSON XL. .
h^ shoxUd he mvaiteff.
the horse mtist be removed.
an anfhassador orvght to have b^n sent.
tf^e place will have to be f&rtiful
the oampJiad to be/ortified.
war if tojiewaged^i
ambassadors oxight to be sent.
the legion will' have 4o be aimited\
r.- t "^ f'f^ywn wwnaveto be awaited
Cop.a.«,p.e.»nd«. .™,.. tKe force, ^uld ka« 6e»Z«l.
new'TX' a7/Tr"*" '" *" ""'"""' conjugations „f!the
various translations given for each tense ««"^"(Uve. The
" •
EXERCISE XL.
\
suir^ ^l^r «''"'*^"™ ^*- 2. Ugm ad Caesa^em mittendl
rLLfT7T "^''^ ^*""^ concsdenda est, altera cohort^us
4. InjOriae AeduSrum non negligendae erant fi Pw. r "^*
tempore «gen*, erant. 8. In hibema redaoendt suLa 9 «W
cendus atdue dsterrendus erlL, i/i ft- °°"' '""""• "• Ooer-
veferj«,ue refioienZeunt il '^ ™ "*"'" ««•'«««"»«».
12. L5gM. .udien7l«T' 13 H^ '^""P"'^''"'' *'• '
A J - , ""*«"ui erant. ij. HostCs sunt onnrimenHT tA
Aeduos ab fnjarift dSfendT 1K n^ • *" "PP"»nenaL 14.
«rant. ^ J^^"* <»«endl. 15., Copiae hostium submpvendae
2 ^^' ^"i**"! ^''"'^' «houldhave been removed out of siaht
4. The arrival of the odiferfja w1?h.K n ■^ uui, or signt.
__^_ ""0 ""fP'-te wfilbh Cieaar sent must be awaited.
^^Thl8 form ii "oalled the Otrundiv*
ft fli^ fniiliiiiti n ittii
'||«cprw,e«dutyorn«0Mdty, and t4lw.ys
-■'v:
;>■ #
T*
PART I. — INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
59
lich had
y which i^
3. The opportunity is hot to be lost. 4. The camp ought to be
fortified with a double wall. 5. The Ime of battle had to be
drawn up. 6. The hostages will have to be restored. 7. Two
cohorts should have been sent to the smaller camp, which was
three miles distant. 8. Peace must be estabUshed with the near-
est states. 9. The war ought to be renewed.' 10. The baggage
should have been stationed in one place. 11. Forces had to be
raised. 12. The rest of the army is to be led into the country
of the Morini. 13. The soldiers should be re|&led from work.
14. You should have been sent in advance. 16. The camp must)
be defended.
W
LESSON XLI.
w
0omni5tl «ant qnod magrna they were alarmed because a large
pars exeroitus interfeota paH of fhe army had been
^ erat, ; ;. ■ ' ;.: giain. : .
p>am Rom&nX oastra ponant, while the Bomans were pitching
^ hostes Impetam «ublto fe- their camp, the enemy inid-
ogrnnt. -^ denly made an attack,
Ubl parati Bunt» oppida^ omnia when they were ready, theybitmed
lnoend§rnnt, all their towns.
Postqaam pervenlt. «^bsidgs after (or when),he ai-rived, hejckf
poposolt, , manded hostages.
Sltnnl atque d6 adventu Cae- as soon as they were informed of
■arl» oertt6r«s fa«tl sant, Cvesar's arrival, they sent am-
i««&t5s mla^rnnt, bassadors^ - .
Obtldea, «t lmp«r&v«^at, nd- the hostages were brought, OB he
^ dttMlBunt, V • , . -hqdprdered,
Observalloii.— How are the ideas because, whUe, when, after, a»
soon a» and as expressed in Latin ? What pwbliarity in the tense
used wia dam ?» IVhat tense is used after abl, po«tqnam. «imal
fttqae ?* The position of the dependent clause in each sentence.
1. Utln
•xpeot«(L
the praMDt tenM with dum, where the imperfect miyht have beMi
fciSi^SSS^S^^S^it^^ .<Walr«. wl»«* w,i^
60
PKIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
#
' EXERCISE XLI. ' - :
* • , ' '' . ■
.b~^' S»'""'»««»*<Jiffl<'<J«« quod mlUtSs mSgno et giavl onere
«rmorum opppessl sunt. 2. Cbi ISgsa ad Caesarem rLrtSrunt
obsides quingento. p„p<«oit. 3. Postquam omnS, BelgL™
»pjae m „„um locum oolite, sunt, ad flomen AxonaiA, quod est ^
«rito ^Z""' <=°ntend5™„t. 4. Dum beUum ouL Venetis
gentur, Sablnus cum copils quSs 5 Caesare «coiperat, in fines
,^m„rum perytat. 6. Missrior et g^vior est Ir^ SSqua-
^tque m tado constiterunt, in hostSs impetum fScSrunt. 7. Ut
9 S^r r ' ™"»P««rtnt, impetum subito ftcSrunt.
1^ undf ir T " '°'''*""' '^'»' I5gatus«.teriectus est.
proehum non commlserant, novissimum agmen lacessere coepSrunt.
,% - - 7-«--- 7—
(n.-l. Wheri neither army begin» tlfe battle, Cwsar leads his
forces back to the camp. 2. Of aU the, Gauls ihe Belgi»"
thebravest, because they were the nearest to the G«„!ans, with
whom they were coHtmually waging war. 3. We are go m, to
march th«,ugh the p«.vince, because we have no other C^ 1
.When the Helvetwns were informed of (iiferoiiy, a*o«() QesarV
amval they _sent ambassadors. 6. He orde^d the HelveuZl
rebuild aU the towns which they had burned, because theTuce
r.leTb.l'w.'°'"'^"'''"»'^''P'««>- «• The forces haT^
7. While tl>o Bhip, were asserabUng, ambassadprs came from a
We part of the Morini to g«sar. 8. As s«.„ .s he leameTof
,(i,(era«v, «60UO Cesar's departure, he began to coUect fore» 9
he turned (his) march aside from the Helvetians. W. The bar-
banans were aUrmed because the town had been taken by storm.,
l|^n'^«Snn?;S^wiSVoo±SL^^ ^^ <>' -dependent*
. 8. C^ft» mewii wA«r« M well M u»A#n. «»«111» vero.
< 8— footaotol. pf 4g> \ '*^'
V.
.frr. J
I onere
tgrunt, -
Igarum ^
I est in
^enetia
1 fines
Sgqua- ,
^ simul -
7. Ut
s erat.
Srunt.
us est,
omani
eruni.
is his
i were
, with
ng to
i. 4.
Bsar'»
^ns to
place
ad to /jji
corn,
om a
Bd of
. 9.
edui, .
bar-
rm, .
;P 'Ik
ndent
hi* ia
f
PAKT X-^INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
LESSON XLII.
61.
/T
The declension of the pronouns egro (I), tu (you), ai^d !■« ea* Id
(/lej s/ie, it), is given in Part III., sections 18, 19 and 22.
Observation. — The translation of the various forms of the per^
sonal pronouns.^ " # ■ '
■ ^^^: ^■■■- '-^V'^^' '-'^ EXERCISE XIJI. -''-[mM::.
I. — 1. Pacem voblscum' fScerSmus. 2. Ab eis circumveniSmur.
3. Impetum in nos fecelPunt. 4* Magnam inter edis auctoritatem
hab@bat, 5. Nihil S. vobis postuli^ 6. Ubi legatos d§ deditione
ad 0um misSrunt, adventum .Caesaris eos exspectare jtissit. 7.
TScum^ remittendl sunt. * 8. Mirum mihl videtur. 9. Duo
f ratrel eis praeerant. 10. Jussit eos impedimenta in iinum locum
collocare et eum mfiiHre. 11. Ego vobis regna confciliabo. 12.
NOntius a te missus erat. 13. Id ab eo comperit. 14. NSbte
nocSbat. 15. Mihi, n^ tibi, indulgSbat. 16. Els satisfScimus
dS injflrils quas intuleramua^j 17. Tfi, LabiSne, mihi relque ptlb-
licae Qtilis fuistl. 18. Alteram partem ylcl'eis concessit,
II.— 1. They sent ambassadors to him. 2. They will not spare
you. 3.. Hostages will be ^ven up to us by youi 4. Peace must
be established with them. 5. \^ slew a large part of them. 6.
When we were informed of Ceesar'S arrival, we sent ambassadors
to him. 7. He ordered us to select a suitable place and fortify it
with a double wall. 8. They fafor us, not you. 9. The citizens
fear you. 10. J had not made war o^ the Gauls, but the Gauls
on me. 11. We do not oeliev© him. 12. They will come with
you. 13. We were eight milps from hiwiT' 14. He is not likely to
persuade her. 15. Hte strove with us f# many years about th«
leadership. 16. (His) son will have to be restored to him. j(.7. '
We shall aid the Gauls, who are wintering with uiS, neither wfth
com nor (any) other thing. 18. He sen^n army into the coilnfcry
of the Morini, because ambassadors had not come from them.
1. The nomiiifttive of these pronountf should be uaed only when the subject of tbc'
verb is to be emphauEed. .
2. With the ablative (both singular and pliiral>(»f «fj;o, tu, mii, and (generally of qui
d futs, the prepoa'"' ._ - . . -. ... . . ....
The aooent. In roofa i
and qu%4, the prepoiHtioD cum Is uIaccmI after th» nronoun, forming on6 word with'lt.
I. Is oifctne Hyllablc procedititf i
#
cum.
8. The phrMW f«r molw mtr on is Mlum if\ftro, with Um dftUvfl (wm t;
the idea of on. >.
-T^-
-,•»■
V%
62
PEIMARY LATIN BOo£
* :». . LESSON XLIII. "
^ *Bellum '&, RomanU gegtum- war hid hem waged by the Bo- '
,v erat, \ :/ , ^^^^ >
,,BeUum RSmahls «rerfendum tmf sluyuld have been waged by
**^ ■ *^ -Bowa»i5}, or </ie Brnnana
shoidd have waged vxtr.
Acles & Caesare Instruota eirt, the litie was draim up by Omr '
Aoles Cae«arl Instruenda «it., the line^ must be'^^rawti ^up by.
-^■-^~^^—'-.- ■ :_ ,.;; \,.,.. -;.-.- -^ ..■..^:^ •----—- Obso/t, or Ctesar mW dnwo
^ ^ ^ uptheline.
^ Ocoaslo ft mg n6«f amlttetur. i/te oppcyrtuiiUy wi^not be lo»t
' ^ -'-■■':-■■ : . ■/'- by me. ■ '*
I OooaslS mthi non ftmittenda ths opp<yrtunity r^mt not be l^ost
. **S **■ * ■ ^y '^y*'^^ I mu8t not lose the
' ' oppoHunity.
ObgerTatlon.-How is the pe>8ohal agent e-xpressed in Latin
. with ordinary passive forms ? with the gerundive ? Notice also the
free translation qf the gerundive by the active voice »
i
1
EXERCISE XLIir.
,1' f ^*"^ '''^'^' ^""^ tempore erant agenda ; vexiUum prO-
•pflnendum,»8%num tubft dandum, ab opere revocandl militfis qui
castra raunire coeperant, acigs Instruenda. 2. Allobrogibus vel
pers«sm-I sumus, vel vl coftctflrl. 3. COpiae' hostium Sablna
distinendae erunt. 4. Olflssis, quae ab els missa est, nSbfa est •
«xspectanda. 6. Loca superiSra occupfttOrl sunt. 6. Postquaii
-•quitfitus m cSnspectura v6nit, hostSs terga vertSrunt mtonusqX
•Orum numerus est occlsus. 7. NoUam partem nootia iter ysbfa
intermittendumest. 8. Mihi nOn ftm^tenda erat ocoftsiO. 9. Rsa
tibi cogitanda est. 10. Castra erant i^ngustiSra quod sine impedl-
mentis Caesar legiOnfis trftnsportftverat. 11. Dum reliqaae c^iae
•
i •
»a^'»-4assE^3»sfa
the Eo-
iged by
r.
,up by .
t draw
I '••
■f
f-l»
JP:ABT L—INTRODUCTOBY LESSONa
63
12?^^ ComplurSs/ # efe
(Jonvemunt, llgafcl ad eum venSfunt.
i, occiderunt^ ^ •' 1
- ■*-"^ ' ' , ■'"■ . . ."'■ ^" ' - , ■ ■ ' ■ '
IL-^1. Ambassadors fehould have feefen sent to him by us 2
r You must not lead a larger number of men across. 3. Caesar wUl
h^e to raise large forces. 4. When CjBsar found \^ out, he
o^ered them to hasten with us to the river. %. We are not going» ''
to make war on^ them, because the winters are very early in Oaul
ft Opportunity had been given him.^ 7. Labienus must seize the
heights. 8. The army will have to be led across without baggage
on account of the scarcity of ships. 9. Some had to fiU up the
trencher others to tear down the waUs. m 1' mW not neglect
the wrongs of the Aedui. .11. He was going to bre^ uj, «tmp
.Ihe next night in the fourth wateh. 12. They must await the
^mval of the forces. 13. As soon as they made an attack on us,
Cs^sar had to remove all the horses out of siglit. 14. The Morini
from whom ambassadors have not come, are going to coUect verJ
iarge.forces and renew the war.
•r" .
, . ' LESSON XLIV.
* t
(a) SS abdldlt. , hehidhimsdf.
86 abdlderunt, they hid thsmselvM. f /.
Oua. Iegl6ii§s s6oam «diizlt, he led mit tm legions with him.
Diias legrion^s oum eo mlait, he sent tvw legions/mth him.
^Ob.ervatloil.-Th^,^clension ^f4he' word fro^ M)h .* comes
CPart III section 20r kow art '«tps^gular and plural to be
distinguished? Two transla^ns (e.g., him and hUself) given,
l^ifference between n6 and is. Kftsition when used irith oiim.» •*'
ival.
(h) Menm adventam exapeo- he awaited
■-: '. , Uylt,
■ tunm adventam. Caesar, he awaited youJarriml, GoBtar, /
-^;.- ezspeot&vtt, „ >" *
Nostrum ad vi^atam exspeo- h^ ttioaited our arrivcU.
tAvIt.
^a. See footnot. 8. p.ge 61. 2. Lite rally, (o A**, : * |^ footnof 2, pi«. «L ' r
--^f, . ...
'&'
^.
m
■^w
64
% PRIMARY EITIN BOOK.
"^««tikmMflayentam exspeo- ^ awaited ymw arrival
vlfo^ «4dv«intam annm elk; he ordered tts to await
., 8iieot$reJu88lt,r i:!|^
Nps ad|v:entam ^tigiS:gpeo|' they orderM w^'a
A-
** , ■' " .;. *^A^ J.tt8«€rini|,
nt
us tm^fl^iiW , their ^
iitam eornm ^erm:M,oriSkrei wjiUJ^m^
•A-.1
»eotare Juf
proiioi ^ _ ^^
of t^0^'ripi'||
ice bewsC
sea
'i y',:"^?^
I|l'«^:|
pinft'^ Part III., section 21. piffef-
#11118 and eja8f sana a|i|| ei&ramj
(c),||j|i»^'ei^^^<ii4^^- . l^ '¥^% ;.«wy ^aw wp ^/leir ar^^
In offlof 5 l^i^ik^l'bimag, tw sWi' remain in owiffiejiance.
^FXlttink ^8lt, >; i^»* ;, ^ ^ aen* hi» sonl,^ •
-i^tflllam itp|||n mlslt» %^»K he sent his own son.
^l?^'vation^ When -are the English possessive pronouns not
^VesseA in Latin ?i What », the effect if they are e4>re88ed
"whett liot needed for clearness' sak© ? » . •
A
^ ^ -■ ■ ' ■^'-' ' ■V:':'--\ ^:"^ ■ ;■■
'^^, tI'^1- In conspecta exercitOs nostrl, agri eorum vastati erant.
'2. ESrum fugft ndstrl» erant perterritl. 3. COr d5 tua virtate aut
dS m«^ dfligentia dSspSrSa? 4: ^5 suaque» omnia sine mora eJ
dSdid&nint. 5. Eos suum adventuni exspectare jilssit. 6. Ubi d6
. ejus adventa HelvStil certiorSs facti sunt, Iggatos ad eum misgrunt.
7.^trem tuum ad 's6 vocat. ^. Helvetil qui vos non solum
in sUta sed etiam in vestrto finibus superavgrunt, nostro^&rcitul
non pargs sunt. 9. Ego mels copils itieSque exercitfl vjHlfegna
conciliabS. -^, Legio, qi^ sgcum habgbat, in ncjg^sj
ffioit. 11. Sequknis, qui ^^ ftngs suos eum reci
I
A
.,' tl
' si
■% .a
':.'-w
se
o\
12
it
wl
go
. th
\ 1. Bee footnote 2, pagre 18
^H mml wiihotitittronn^
^ruTidt, peopU, and $ua
inc$. ^ .,
not
ssed
ant.
I aut^
a eiV
ad»r
unt. .,
lura
jitui
igna
bum
fura
t.
PAUt r.--:INTRODUCTORr LESSONS.
66
fZ^dlT^'l!'^ ^"^"^"^ '^"' '"'^*' «°^«S« «-"«iStis sunt' per-
terend . 12. Regnum m civitate sua occupatOrus est. 13. Ves-
Srul" "if T"" ^''''"'"" neglexerunt. I4. S.sS in silv^s
-abdaderunt. 15. Caesar primum suum deinde omnium eqids ex
• ■■ ■ • ; «1 ■" '■ ," -: ■;■■.■ ■■-'*'"" -^ 'j ■- - J. *
*) - ii . - .' ** . . ,
S^ had now led their forces into the te.Storie» of the
AMui, and were laying waste their fields. 3. Hergayft the sienal
" stllC T. ."^ ']" ""^"""^ ^^""^ ^^- «• Th«y '^ »00 with-
^he attacks of our men.. 7. On his arriv/they withdrew
.^Ives and all theV possessions' in», the town 8. They
seh^e». to hun. 10 For the sake of their safety I neglected my
o™ 4anger. 11. They are going to join battle with^ur men.^
■f ih I r° "«tn«nmg his Aen' from battle. 13. We learAed' '
wl^".? ^"^ ."'?*f"8«'^- "■ C«»»' ought to lead the legion»
which he has with hun across. into our province. 15. We are ^
"■%• ..;>-
■%
j LESSON XLV.
^VBntu Caesar^ oomm6« 't?mf,we^e alcmmi by C<^9ar'sa^
JdirentuCae.«^,.:c<^«5tI.le. alarmed "(or being alam^d) by
^^ «Ato.ml.erunt, . ,^ Ccesar^, ^^^ ^^ 'J^^
' ' hostage».
06plaeln4n^IoopBioo4otae e^/orce. /u«« bem gathered to
Odplae in unum loouA, ooftol^e. «Ae/orce., after being gathered (or
„^,.^ prfivlnoliim '^teutul^^.^^^^^^
. *,.
66
PRIMAK^ LATIN BOOK.
Obgervatlon. — The use and force of oommdtl/coaotae» d61eota»
when no longer joined vMh parts of the verb 8^m.^ The diflPerent
translatigns given. The voice. The relation in point of time of
th4 participle and the principal verb. The formation and declen-
_j aion of the participle. v )
' V ^EXERCISE XLV. ' '
' . ; ' ■ ■ .■■■.-■■■ ' -■- '•■^- ■" ■ ^ '•' '-■
I. — X' Nostro adventu commotus, Caesar duas legionSs in citeri-
ore Gallia conscribit. , 2. NSnnulli pudore adducti remanebunt.
3. Vulneribus confecti, barbari s§ in fugam contulerunt." 4.
Bepentino 6jus advents prohibitus, copia^ in fines suos' reduxit.
5. In nostros disjectos impetum fgcerunt. 6; In omnibus coUibus
expositas hostium copies armatas conspexit. 7. Spe praedae
adducti," in Galliam contendefunt.' 8. Hostes vulneribus confectos
ex loco superiore in fltimen compulimus. 9. Barbari commoti
^uod oppidum, ef natura loci et manu munitum, expHgnatum
erat, mSjorSs copifis parare coepSrunt. 10. OmnSs Belgarum
cdpiae,''in Onum locum coactae, ad eum veniSbant. 11. Impulsi
a principibus, a nobis defecttiri erant. 12. Hostes undique cir-
'- cumventi, fuga salflteni petierunt. 13. Celeritate Romanorum
commoti, ISgatos ad eum dS dSditidne mittunt. «14. Alteram
partem vici Gallis conoSssit, alteram vacuam ab eis relictam cohor-
tibus attribuit. ' 15. 5elvetii omnium rSrum ihopia adducti ||%at6s
ad eum misSrunt. < , ^ .
. ■ ■ ■■ -ija: ■•■ '■■ :.■ ■ ■; , ' .'• ■' -.;-■ ■.'
• n. — ^^1. After beihg driven back into the town they made a sally.
2. They withdrew themselves and all their possessions into ^place
excellently fortified by nature. 3.\ Alarhied by the want of^sup-
plies, he hastened the next day to the province. 4. Th^ ^edui,
after being called brothers by the senate, are held in bond^e by
him. 5. Being defeated by the first attack of our men, \ they
betook themselves to the camp. 6. Dumnorix on ,being recalled
had resisted^the cavalry. 7. The Aedui, being defeated by him,
hacl suffered great loss. 8. The soldiers, weighed down iSjr th^
heavy burden of their armor, had to join battle with the enenSy
—————— — — r ' ' ' ' vi " II "; ■
1. This part of thcr Verb ia know^ as tbe JPer/ect FartieipU, Poiiivt.
^^
i. O pt ilufa i' um la hum tmjtfn vr
Ik JR # * • . #( here, as often, means both .... and.
^^
.,• t
• 'if
^
;W
PART I.-.-INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
*f'
6lr
at an unfavorable time., 9. Caesar, on jbe)w«^ormed of their
approac^j, leads out with him all the cavafr£aS-^astens to them.
10. Led by his influence, they detained the^inbassadors sent by
him. . 11. Dismayed by the appearance' of the ships, t^e bar-
barians halted. 12. The Aedui, having been crushed by the v
battles and disasters, had giyjin hostages Ix) him. 13. The Hel-
vetians, alarmed by his sudden approach, are going to send an^bas-
sadors to him. 14. He has led his forces across into Gaul, liftKing.^^.
been ask^d and invited by the Gauls. 15. Driven by madness and
folly, they have made war 1 on us. - ii- \ ; .
^^ ^LESSON XLVI.
Turning to Part III., section 39, examme the inflection of the
verb oaplo, in the indicative (active and passive), the present
. infinitive active, and the gerundive passive. . , A .
Obsepvatloii.— The pec,uliarities of inflection in v^s like
oaplo.^ • -^ ^t! _, — '
EXERCISE XLVI,
I.— 1. Accipiet. 2. S6 recipiunt. 3. Facieudfim est. 4.
conjicisbant. 5. Niintiat. 6. Res est suscipienda. 7. Ss in
oppidum «recipere coeperunt. 8. Suscipietur. 9. Superi6ra loca
multitfldinehostium compl§ta conspicigbantur. 10. I^erfacile est
conata perficere. 11. Munltiones perficientur. 12. Legates inter-
ficiunt. 13. Ex oppido profugere non audebunt. 14. CondicionSs
pacis accipiendae erant. 15. Ab amicitia populi RomanI dSficiS
^ bant. 16. Non^olum vIrSs sed etiam tela nostros dedcii^ '
II.— 1. Thi Roman people makes. peace with themvAWrhey
undertake the wj^r. 3. They w;ere marching through the province.
4. The war should not have been undertaken. 5. We fortify. 6i>
» Supplies will fail us. 7. He will be put to death by them. 8.
&^ T^^^- ^^""^ °^<l«red to hurl their darts. 9. The fortifications must
; 12. Thjjfflpil announce. 13. They hesitate to revolt from the
Ae^ui. 14. He undertakes tlie matter. 15. They perceive him.
16. They were fleeing.
t
See footnote 3, pag^e 61.
. » 2. S^e Part III., eeotion 67.
3
%*.
jpl
68
-^=*=
ir
i
.'!■
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(a) Turn to PartJ^„4^pl!^P^3.
Obgervation.-^lme declension of iilo and Hie,*
*-^\
'^^*
«;
4
(6) ProTinoia i^ea haeo est. Ilia this 'i^nmrnjovince, that (is) yowr^i,
vestra, . ;,, -'/ ..j^K^P^^^ ■ lH:, '%-,
- Eiim loihdlili munXvernnt, theyforUjied that place. - '^ ' -'^
In ed8^.i3|tl haeo faciebant they rtiMde an attack. on those who
^~----p--.ym^jxmteceruntf^-^ were doing this (literally,
' '^^W these things).^
■ -^e^^TR^o®"» a Caesare pe- the awhassadors asked peace o/
^^fernnt. Hie baeo re- Ccesar. He answered as fol-
'^^1 Jf^^^^^^* .* ioM?s (literally, these things).
Ot)8cJrvation.-2^he various translations of Wc, Hie and is.
What word is u^H for that (those) wten emphatii» (by contngt) ?
when the antecedent o£ a relative ? When is liie, not is, us^for
he (thc^ etc.) ?''r*\%
%XERCISE XLVII,
^p
k
;■'„-■• _ ,-1.
I.— 1. Haec omnia ^Gallfe era^ incognita, 2. Gallos, qul*«^
loca incoluerant, expulerunt. ^oS/^os GerniMjSs Helvetii, iM
solum in suis, sed etiam in.^ill6rurti finibus, '$uperaverant. 4;
Haec consuetudo vietifcumfjla noi^mparanka est. 5. Hi in
armis sunt, illi domi reiSEienfc. 6. Ad eam sentehtiam haec ratiS
4|duxit. .7. Dumhas^cinWlocisgeruntur, adma^ikasregionSs,
qiiibus^attuor reges p^iint, nuntill milb. m. Nostri pila
in hostes conjiciunt. Illi prin^ocohculfsu ti^t^m ppnjortf pr^i-
mSs ja^vafl petierunt. 9: Hoc iktus msui|||^inet circiter J|illia
pa88uti|^ quingenta. 10. At its, «^Amiserat, «xplorittoribus haec
cSgnoviir. IL Hunq iUi compreh^irg|;. .12. Hujus loci haec
erat natl|r| #13. Uni ei dmnibi^SSpani nihil eauum rerum
fac^nt, quSs cgtert fecerant. 14. "Ilium pro amicd, te pro hoste
■; - ' ' I nl I III in l iar I ^ I It^y ^ i,
l.«^Ser footnote 2, page 56. --. . •
A^iii^^-ES^'ii??^^ an emphtttle if; hepce when he or they is emphiaired, Uh
«
example.
^' *■
t
yuA's,* '
who
*k
e o/
igs).
l8.
,t)?
for
7^-
non
4.
I in
atio
iSs,
pila
Ilia
aec
aec
um
«te
UU
PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 69
from^tJll^t'n'^K "'^ '^' ^"""^^'^^ ^^ ^«^^ their camp
from that place. 2. On being informed of these things, he orders
this armt /It ^.T '""^ ^*^^" *^^^*^"^« ^^««r ^as sent
toir'^S L?r^ 'f '" '"'^^ ''"^««' *^^y «-^ ambassador.
ore^r;xtL?r- ^ "' "^''' "^*^ '^"^^- ^- The width of this
arrfL ? 7 r' ^^^' J"""^^^- ^- ^^ ^ th^«« the Belgians
this 1 Tt ' '''"!r *'^^ ^^^ "^^^^«* *« *^« »-"---• 8 %
o e S: thr P^'^^^-/;;-- »• On their arrival he leads h^
forces into the country of 'the Morini. They flee into the woods
tTmeZTld .f I'^^i^-^^^^'^" ^^"' ^^^ -^"^g«^- 11 At ha^
time he held the le^i^ng place in this state. 12. They hasten
Tott::Tnt ''"^ "'^ "^^^ '^^«^-^ ^^« fortilcatfons
13 Our men drove them into the woods, but lost a few of (liter.
border of hese woods, they betook themselves k, their friends
and Caesay led his forces iAto winter quarters. '
's approach
ces.
WE
-- ' LESSON XLVIIL. •
Turn to Part III., section 33.
(6) AdventurtiCaesarlsexgpec- while aiwitin^>
t&ns mhgnf ooplas he raised.
ooegrlt, ^
AdventnmCae8«rl,ex«pec. whUe awadfi^^cr^s approach
^ tante. castra munle- we sh^l fortify the camp.
Wiritum fortlter re-lgten- Mey wounded the lieutenant wkUe
tem vnlnePaviPunt. • A« ,^a, fe^^^,;^ remtvag.
Xlm*^*****^" «"«Petum t^ mode an a^^ocfc on them as
"***"' (or MJ^i7e or when) they totre
Aeeinn.
1. See footnote 2, page 19.
70
PBIMABY LATIN BOOK.
Observation,— Declension and agreement of present participle
active. The different translations^given. The voice. The reli-
tion in point of time of the participle and of the principal verb.
(c) Eqult§gpevooarIJjg8it/ he ordered the cavalry to be re-
Po88a8oompl6rlJu88lt, he ordered the trenches to he Jilled:
, Nave» ojg^ J U88lt. •; he wdered ships to he collated.
Oastra ihunlrX Ju88lt, he ordered a camp tb be fcyrtified.
.;Ob8epvatloii.— The formation in each conjugation arid the
translation of the present infinitive passive. . ,
* EXERCISE XLVIII.
'U I-
I.— 1. DiscedSns ab hlberJils in Italiam, jflssit plarimSs hieme
nfivgs aedificSri. 2. LegSs Aeduonim duo ex QnS familia magi-
strfitOs creftrl vetant. 3. iMagnum numerum eorum fugientium
conciderunt. 4. Haec flgns a Caesare petivit. 5. Nav6s paulum
removSrf et rSmIs incitan et ad^ latua apertum hostium constitui
jOssit. 6. SuccurritilllVorgnusetlaborantlsubvenit. 7. Equites
cSdere sSque in castra recipere, simul castra altiore vallo munirl
jlissit. 8. Caesar petentibus Aeduis concSssit. 9. Scaphas mili-
Jibus complSri jubet, et subsidia eis quos laborantes , conspicit
submittl. 10. Hunc f\igientem silvae tSxSrunt. 11. Obsides in
continentemaddttcl jussit...l2. Fortiter pflgnans interfectus est.
- 13. Hostgs, his rebus permoti, LutStiam incendl, pontgsque Sjus/ /
oppidi rescindl jubent. :^ '
II.— 1. He orders the ambassadors to be called to him. 2.
C*sar, while expecting a larger uprising of Gaul, began to hold a * •
le^. 3. Weeping they besought him. 4. He ordered the camp
to be fortified by a wall. 5. We made an attack on theenemy as
- they were betaking themselves to the camp. 6. Our men, while
resisting bravely, were surrounded by the enemy's cavalry. 7.
He ordered the enemy to be dislodged and driven off with slings
^and arrows. 8. Lucius Cotta while fighting is slain with a very
large portion of the soldiers, the rest betake themselves to the
camp. 9. On departing they order cavalry to bo procured. 10.
1. Translate ad here by on.
X
. ' '■■■.'. '.' '■■'.'
«
y\ f«
■'■';■ p
.-..'.' ai
A P
a(
si
1
^^
■"— T
Ik
i^
■
j^ •
1/
PART I.-— INTBODUCTORY LESSONS.
71
Influenced by their statements, he ordered the battle to be begun.
11. The enemy, because they had a larger number of men, sur-
rounded our men as they wei» fighting. 12. We seized him as
he was fleeing. / '
"I
' , LESSON XLIX. ,
' <a) Turn to Part III., section 23.
ObserTatlon. — The declension of lp«e and idem.
(6) Labie^am cum daabag le- h^ wclers Labiemis with two te-
Srionlbnsoastramtihlre gions to fortify the camp^ he
\ Jubet, Ipse in Galliam himself fuxMem tit ^kijd.
■ oontendlt, ;/. r'- -, ;„ _•..;, -■■ .._ ;
Ab Aednls ipsis certlor foo- he was informed by the Aedui
tus est, 7, ;/ ' themselves.
B6 ad oastra reogpernnt, they betook them^lvfs to the camp.
Easdem oopias relXqnit, he left the same forces.
Obgervation.— The translation of Ipse and Idem. The differ-
ence between se and ipse.^
"/:::^•'■^;■■• ■■■•7-^/ ■/■:;/■ • ^ -^ - EXERCISE -XLIX. '-^ ■'■■^:-\" '/--'' i . .
'■■/,','■'■'"' ■ ■ ■ ■ ' " ■ ,
,, l.—l. Eodem tempore Caesarem certiorem faciunt d6 6jus
# adventa. 2. Omnibus Gallls idem^ est faciendum, quod HelvStil
fScSrunt. 3. Aquilam intra vallum projScit, ipse pro castris
pflgnans occiditur. 4. Postulat eadem.^ 5. Haec. ipsi ab alils
audiverant. 6. Eodem die ho^tSs sub i^onte consederant millia
passuum ab Cae^aris castris octo. 7. Neque Caesaris ipslus
adventus neque Labi&ii cognitus erat.' 8. Ab eisdem nostra con-
fiilia hostibus 6nun%ritur. 9. Constituit cohortgs duas in pi-Svincift
collocare, et ip^c&^reliqias Sjiis legionis cohortibSs hiemare.
10. Horuni aucta&^tte adducti, eadem de causa legates retinent.
^ 11. Eadem nocte sg interficiunt. 12. Eidem piincipes qui? ante
' ^vSnerant tA eum revertgrunt. 13. Ipse in Aeduos, quae oivitftai
- — — — — ^ — . "
1. Se is the reflexive pronoun of the third pehK>n ; ipse is used purely for emiptauia.
il may be used of any person. ' . _^ . ''
and may]
■.*
3ee footnote 2, page 56.
Notice that, after idem, qui may be translated a», instead of who.
*.^
' •
f
m
X-
PKIMARY LATIN BOOK.
propmqua his locis erat, contendit. 14. His dS rSbus Caesar'
certior factus, quod ipse l<mge aberat, naves aedifican, rgmiges ex
provincia institUI, nautas gubematoresque eompararl jubet.
n.^1. On the same day ambassadots sent by. the enemy came
to Csesar, 2. He himself drew up a triple line of four legionS. 3. '
He hastens to them by the same route and sendt all the cavalry
before him. 4. He had leamedthis from th6' Itomans themselves
through the same messengers. 5. He ordered them to be sent to
higi. 6, The eame night the camp was moved. 7. These are tK& ^
same enemies with whom the . Helvetians have waged war -8*-"
They themselves sought denser forests. 9. The enemy heto«3k ^
themselves to the camp. 10. The next day they moVethe camp ' *
• from that place ; Csesar does the same. 11. Supplies began to fail " '
the enemy . themselves. 12. Hostages were given up, %d the ^ '.
two sons, of the king himself. 13. They were ordered to give*' '
themselves up to him. 14. The. Sequani remained silent in the^ •. '
.^ine- dejection. 16. He himself began the battle on {Uteraliy'.^:
Jxm^) the» right wing. 16.^The town was protected by the very
natUfe {hterally, the nocture itself) of the place. • . «^ ' '
•^
i^.s'
i f^
■4^
LESSON«L. ' i ^
<*») 0aBtrts.«>muiiItl8, oopla» Inl the camp hamiig bean f(yrt\fiedy ht
Htruxit, . drewuphi^fdrces/
Obgldlbu. «ooeptl.. p&cem (litgraljy, hostigeft hatdng been
feolt, .^^ ^ . " received) h^ng received
' -* T'v " ■ '^^^^^9^' {or 'hfter receiving
. r,:^ *^ . ' hostages), he made peace.
ArmtatradltL/pacem feolt, (litorally, arms haying been given
*" up) WJ/WJM (or «w) the arms
^t>ere given up^ he rhade peace.
Itoptotu fa«t6. nostra* per- , (literally,, an attack Jiaving been
turbaverunt. made) rmki7ig an attack, Uief
* threw our men tntocanfusim
Cognito Cae^rt^ adventu. (Utorally, Crosar's arrival havmg
:»
^fl^.
* l'. OJ*' •
IftgrAtd* mlitant/
4l
been learned) on letfi/iyiing of
Ccuak't arrival, ■'i^»y i^ U y/ ■_
amhassadoin, ■ • i \ ?r .,
>■.' i,-
. r "
i'»
^ y^--
ipl' ' *■ • '
-t-L.
' •
k
\
'
1 *
w'~
J
■I
•
!
*■
Caesar
ges ex
came
S. 3.
avalry
selves
snt^to
?e th\
:. -8.
ieto(j(]k:
camp
io fail
1 the
give*
ti the^
rally, '
very
>ART I.— INTJlODyCTORY LESSONS.
.j'tSf-
■^■...
d,hM
I
4
been
eived
iving
iven
ifm»
ioce.
3een ,
M'
1 »■ '
73
^ . Observation.— The nature of the ablative abspWte.* ThdVari-
. ^ ous translations for the ablative absolute, in the .perfect participle
passive. The abstnce of a perfect participle active in Latin.
(b) ^ostrXs onstra oppugrnanti- while (or as) our men were assart-
bus, eraptionem boste* ing. the camp, theetiemy made
/eoernnt, . * a sally. ; ,
t ■ .■ ? ■ ■*■ ■""■'.
* yP ■ !i •'■."■
Obgervation. — The translation of the' ablativW absolute in the
■ prfisent participle Active. The position of the ablative absolute
■clause.. ^ . , ■J^ '• ■ *__ "■ . ' ■
"""7-^ ■""''"*■ r"::^":''^'" " EXERCISE l:'"""^"-
\.-
..*.
l'-.Wi
.>!!*'.
»
V
1,7^1, Hoc proeljo facto, exercitum tradflcit. 2. Data signS ex-
•- castris 6rumpunt. ' 3. Vjcis aedificiisque, eorum incSnsIs, Caesar •>'.
% exercitum redOxit.'. 4..dis rebus ^xpositis, Bignum dkt. 4, His
ntintils acceptis, eonsiliumconvocavit. 6. GqUo occupSto^ inille
.. passiis ab nostrls mun^tiolllfcus cOnsIdunt. 7-. Germftnl clftmSre
^' ,,' ,.' audits, armis abj^ctis sg ex castris ej6cgrunt. 8. H6c facts, '
/*• "' duabus tegiOnibus quas in Ita|lia conscripSerat in ciSstrls relictlsi^^
* '. '■■relic[ua8 sex legiones pro castris in acigconstitujt. 9. His ntlntili • .
,;• ^Mf V Ijtterisque commotus, r§ frftmentaria comijarftta, castra movet. 10.
^i;.; «IfalJo hoste-prohibente, legionem in provinciam perdftxit, ibiqt»
^" "S-*!, W*"nav<t. 11. His cSnstitutls rebus, paulum suprft eum locttmil^
W ,. pontem fec^runt. 12. Dsditione facta obsidibusque acceptis, prao*
, vw» ^ , ®^^^* dsddcent. 13. itinere conversS, hovissimum agmen lacesser^ *^ ' «
:^^^^i ^'^^P^^**^*'* Multa, ipso praesente^ in concilia Qajl^rum dicta *
' V *i»^®^***^' ^^' P^^^i^go <ii8Jecta equitibua^ue repulsia, impetuni in
eosfScSrunt. 16. Impedimentis relictis firuptione facta, elsdeni; >
^ itineribus 'quibus perv6nerant,-ad flQmen EhSnum contendfirunt» r ^
17. Celeritate nostrdrum permStl, ICgatQs ad Caesarpm d6 dSJiti6n« ,
' "' mittunt, et p6tentibu« Rgmis impotrant. 18. Itaque r6 frtlmen*|,,
taria pr6*l8& equitatllque co^paratfl, in hostlum flpSs exercituna *
' ititrodOxit. 19. N^hil tjmentibua nostrls, hostes impetum ffiijlSrunb. a, «f
^> , -^. InstrAetS exercitjtt ufc loci natflra postulabat, proelium com* - a
,. f mlBiftl* 21; Helv6j;il impedimenta in tinum locum cpritulSrunt,' ipil-'
-r . 7^ 1-6 jjBCtfl ndittp eqiiitatfl, phalange facta, »ub prlinam postri^ abiem
, ■iicc63sSrunt. 22. Caesar, primup* BuS deinde omnium' ex iXJn--i' a..
' ■ ipectfljremSCIs e(:|[ul8, proelium comrtilsit. • ^ ^
im
^
fe-1
nt
M
- il
P
'. *
i.'
^
t I
b» •<.
f
i<
'I
74
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
r
I
II.— 1. After receiving many wounds, they betook themselves
%> the woods. 2. Having pitched the camp, they determined to
await his arrival. 3. Collecting large forces, he drives hiiH «mt of
th^ state. 4. When several towns had been takeii by storm
-■ Cosiar determined to await the fleet. 5. Havirig procured silp*
V phes and selected the cavahy, he began to march into that c^^tiy.
. ' 6. Drawing their swords,, they seized the gates. 7. Havai'g sent
ambassadors, they had sought peace from him., .8. As a l^Me
number had been slairl, the- rest cast themselves into the riyer.
9. After capturing a large number of men and cattle and laying
. ^*«*e the fields, he compelled them to give hostages.* 10. As.
our men were in distress, he ordered the third line to make an
attack on the enemy's forces. 11. When several battles had been
fought, they sent ambassadors to Caesar and surrendered them-
selves to him. 12.. On learning thw (literaily, these things), he
sends Labienus in advance with three legions ; he himself with the
remaining two hastened to the river. 13. While these were
fighting, a few fled to the pamp. 14. Having slain a third part
of them, our men began to attack the town. 16.1 On learning of
his arrival, the enemy, coUecting large forces, began a cavalry
battle with our men on the march ; then on their cavalry bein^ '
■ defeated, they suddenly disclosed the infantry which the^iad
stationed in ambush. 16. As (but) a few are defending (it), they
are likely to take the town by storm. 17. Having thus routed all -
the forces of the enemy, they withdrew themselves to their own
,oamp. 18. He himself, after drawing up a triple line of battle,
advanced to the enemy^s camp, m The signal being given, our '
men, made an attack on the enem><e line. 20. Having in one'
«ummer finished two v6ry important {literally, great) wars, Ccesar^
withdrew the army into winter quarters ; he himself wintered m,
hither Gaul. 21. As these were resisting bravely, he ordered tl» '
•hips to be removed.
i^te ssoN Li: :
Quern aanm belli habent ?
QnldvflnUUM?
vko Art* p^rt^inded ymt f
whit experience qfivarhave thiyf
V.
i.
why havi^fmrmmr
...^
\
'- ->
■^
t ,, ,
)lves
d to
it of ,
)rm,
sUp-^
itry.
arge.
ver.
i^ing
) an
een
em-
he ,
the".'
ere
)art
;of
Jry
ill
M
iey
aU
wn
Je,
)ur
>ne
sar
in
he
ifr
PAET ^«r-IlfTBODUCTORY LESSONS.
m-
Quanta est Insula ?
IJter est oelerlor ?
€ur me acousas?
. /'
-^
howlarge is the island?.
which (of the two) is the swifter?
why do yoxi accuse me ? i^
> , ' ■ '
Observation.— The difference between the English and the
Latin verb in asking a question, i The declension of \he interroga-
tive pronouns. (For quls and qui, see Part III., section 26 ; for
nter, section 14.) _^ '
I.— 1. Quanta est Insulae raagnittidd? 2. In u^ram partem ^"
fliimen fluit ? 3. Quia Sjus consllil auctor fuit ? 4. Qua de eausa^
disc6dunt ? 5. Cognito Caesaris adventu, bellum parSre coepSrtint,
6. Quae et quantae nationfis Britanniam incolunt ? 7. Quid mihi
faciendum est? 8. Prima luce productis omnibus copils, dupUcI
aciS InstrQcta, hostes exspectabat. 9. «His ygbus cognitis, eura
ad s6 vocari jubet. 10. Cflr ab officio discessarus es? 11,. Qui^
bus ^x regionibus^ vSnistis, quasque ibi uSs cognovistis ? H.
Quiddubitfia? 13. Quid petunt aUud Roman!? 14. Quid ill6
beU6 simile fuit ? 15. Cur dS vestra virtilte aut dg mea dlUgentia
' despSratIs ? 16. Hac oratione habita, concilium, dimlsit,
II.— 1. What states are in arms ? 2. Why have they led their
forces across into our territories?" 3. What* was. s&id ift tH'
councU of the Gauls about him? 4. Afermed by i?h© scarcity of
com and supplies, he hastened the ije^t day into the proving»
after burning all the buildings of that village., 6.' What* is beiig
done in the enemy's camp ? 6. In whj^fc^ phwe have the forces of
the- enemy encamped? 7. How lar^e^ number of men are they .
'likely to send to that war? 8. The enemy, after losing.all their
W^ge, fled. 9. What (littralhj, of what soH) is the nature of
th^ mountain? 10. On giving this answer he withdrew. 11. In
J^K th-T!i . '***[' ^i"® 5nl«,rroKat.ve, pronoun) cominR after either the whole or
Pltin «2! J ', ?" ^'!^ *'^*' '"^* '^" '""""' No nuoh difference is found irt
.7^;: 2. In.... jAarfem- <n , . . .'dirtetion, Htefally, ««to , . . . qu»rt«r (or part).
■luL^n"ni^!vn«ur°'^*'''*ii"'"°"" **''■•'** *'*^ * """" **''"»' depend, on a preno-
Si h ♦h« ,^r H -^ ^'*' ^^" ?'^" '" P"""»"". prejKMiition, noun; Oji». owieDig usual
Wth the relative pronoun» alno, and is often found with ei^phatic adJeolivM
See f oS ^ot^tlpi^eMf' ^^^*''*"^'"''*^ ^*^' ''^ ^^^ *^^ W »*•*
'4- .
r
'■, '
■1^'
<!'"'
*•
76
PniMAKT LATIN BOOK.
^
-0
whati place is Caesar? 12. In whafci direction are the enemy
marching ? 13. With whom are they waging war ? 14. What»
have you heard or learned about this matter? 1^. On receiving
hostages he leaves Labienus with the cavalry in the^me village ;
^ he himself hastens to the nearest town. 16. What is more dis-
* graceful? 17. Which is the more disgraceful deed ?
. tt\
** "
LESSON LII;
<# Longre. fa/r ; longlus. faHhef ; longlMlme^faHhest, or very
hlhet*, freely i Ilberins, *nore llberrlmg, most, or very
freehj.
SAirlter, Jiercely ; acrlas, more
. fiercely.
Fortiter, bravely; fortlnei, more
bravely. .
frailgrenter, care- dUlgrentlus,
/idly;
freely.
aoQrrlme. m^at, or very
fiercely.
fortlssime, rkont^' or very
bravely.
dlllgrentlsRime, mod, or
more carefully. vei-y carefully.
--^ -w."-^
^ Observation.— The regular formation of adverbs from adjectives
in the positive, comparative and superlative degrees.» *
(6) Turn to Part III., section 17. '^ #
Ob.6rvatUn.— Irregular formation and comparison of adverbs. ■
(c) Qaam m&xlm&B oopla» coe- lie coUected ftyrce» as large as jm-
Qttam longrlsMlme,
.-i
as far asjiossibU.
< Obsepvation.— The translation of a superlative modified by
quam.^ . ^^,, , ;•■■.■-■.,■ ■ ■; ;*
■■''■■ EXERGISE^ LII. :y;, -;;■;. ^..^ -v-Vi:/" /
^^.^i^' Hdrum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propt»wi*qw»d 1
^a l^t aomanitate pfSvinciae longissimfi abaunt 2. Intw-
j
■
•^^z
emy
Tiat»
ving
age;
dis-
•AET t-^INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
7^
- ■TSiB'
very
oery
}ery
m-y
or
ves
s.'
o$-
by
jt:
9-
pretibus remotls, dicit llberius atque audacius. 3. Ss in cuyrfls
citissimg recipiunt. ' 4. Ea res legionl feliciter evenit. 5. Novo
genere pugnae perterritls nostris, illi per medios kudacissimg per-
raperunt. 6. Quato maximia itineribu» in (Jalliam ulteriorem
-contendifc. 7. Id quod ipsi aegei^ime confecerant, ille tino die
fgcit. 8. Cupidissime populi RomanI amicitiam appetunt.' 9.
Mflites legionis decimae, cui (juam maxipig confidebat, acriter
pugnaverunt. 10. Qua minimg arduus ascensus erab, ex oppido
gruptionera subito fgcerunt. 11. FaciUimS impettis hostium difl-
tius sustinebimus. 12. Haec civitas longe plOrimum totius GaUiae
valet, ta Hj^ec civitas diaplurimum totius GaUiae valebat.
14. His rebus quam maturrime accuyrere constituit. 15. Huic
^ legionl Caesar indulserat praecipue, et propter virttitem confide-
bat maxims. 16. OmnSs acerrimS fortissimgque ptlgnaverunt.
17. Quam aequissimum locum delegit, at4ife castra quam mSximS
contjiixit. '
n.—r. They will resist us less easily. 2. Tliey are approaching
nearer. 3. After procuring supplies as quickly ^s possible, he
* hastens by forced marches towards Ar|pvistus. 4. Our men were
greatly alarmed. 6. They began to resist more boldly and fight
more bravely. 6. He, persuades them more easily because th« '
Helvetians are hemmed in oh aU sides by the nature of the coun-
try. 7. Our meh hesitated to leap down, chiefly on adcount of the
4epth of the sea. 8. He forbade the soldier» to depart too far»
from the line of march. 9. Our men, quickly making an attack 6n
them, fought lohg and vigorously. 10. He ordered as many ships
as possible to be crtll^ted in that winter. 11. The right of Ambas-
sadors must be more carefully -upheld. 12. Many ships were most
senously shattered. 13. He demanded as largo a number of
soldiers as possible. 14. He stationed the army in wintej- quarterti
in th98e states which had last matle war. 1^, H^ himself is slain
while fighting bravely. 16. He determined to have an escort as
feiendly as ijossiblo. 17. He has ^i^aged many wars with thd
Oeighfeoring states most succesulwlly^w^
1. '^'^*'^»^^ too/or by ihMiiomfmt^irtiMtmBy,^
.-•■■a.i
4 .
--«.■■ '-■.■,■
'^'^- ^
.-:1-':
■ ■■.■:■;,.' 1^'^'''
'%.
-,:-■- 1 >
-..(7
r
W' .^?. .
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
, LESSON LIII.
■ . V ■ '■* •• ■ ■ ■" \
(a) Mor&bantar. theyi were cte- SeoutI erant*. they hadfoUowed.
laying. Seqnl eoeplt, lie began to follow. ^
Moratno, after delaying. . Potltnr, he gains. '-*"'
Veretur, he fears. \ Potltus, having gained. •
"*^*'^^*'***-^**^'*fl'* \' Progvedltnr, he advances.^
Cservatlon.— To what voice do these verb-forms belong (a)
respect to their form, (W with respect to the^traaslatiqn ?^ -_
quens, while ffMotoing.
^ Seouturl sant, they are going tofdloxo.
n.
*■ f?
Ob«ervatlon.— To which voice (Jo these forms belong
For a synopsis of the deponent Verb in all^cinjugations, s^e'
Part III., section 40. "*
1 ' <
■\
EXERCISE Llil.
i'— 1- I^um in his locis Caesar moratur, tempestSs subitS coorta
est. 2. HelvStil, oppidls^suls viclsque exflstis, cum eis proficiscen-
tur; & Lggatos conantes dicere «prohibuit. 4. Hostes impeditoJi
nostrl cSnsecatI, mftgnum numerum eorum concIdSrunt. 5. Ino-
piam frtlmenti veritus, cSnstituit non progredl longius. S. Nostris
mllitibus cunctantibus, centurib deos contestfttus desiKt. 7. Id
conspicati, Selvetil, itinere converse, nostros Insequi' ac lacessere
coepSrunt. 8. Dum civitas jus suum exsequi conatur, Orgetorix
mortuus est. 9. Germanos cSdentes insequi ausi efrant. • 10.
Cohortatus suos, hostfis aggressus est. 11. NS in locia quidem
superiSribus hostSs consistere patiuntu». 12. Repulsl »b equitattl
86 in siivas abdidSrunt, locuiix, nacti Sgregig et natQrft et o^&m»
mtlnltum. 13. Hi nostrds adortl proelium rfnovant. ' 14. His
constitntla yebus, nactus idoneara tempestatem, tertia vigilifi solvit,
equitgs<iue in dlteriferera |wr^um progredl et s« kequi jflssit. mL
1..^' 5)1?*'^®^*'* *"■" ''*"*"' DemitsittH. The priwipal purtm, m given in the vooabo»
«ry, differ, of wmrae, from thou», of the remJlar active verb; «.a., mmrr. ari.
the ii i fln i ti v» HiBTkiim ^lu) ooujuui ^ro"
^ »nd
'i
■. »
perfect lndk»tiv»i
i \.
•■«.■- 1
--.-■- ■. ^
vV';'-
:£: 1
rwedX
■* '
Uow. ^
■ '^:^ V'';
'■■* ■ .^ .
» ,:
.;. : ■•-
V ■■ .
r(a)
■•■^:>.
I .V...V ^
■ .V. 1*.
.'>-•:;/
■* ■ ■■
"■. ' j
see'
)orta
icen-
iito^ .
Ino-
strls
.Id
isere
onx ,
10. ~^^
dem
tatft-.--
per»,
Hto
Ivit, . -, , ,M
If
15, if'
»bu-
v
• P-^K'T I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa 7»
Equi^ttl' 8U5 pulso atque Insequentibus nostris, subito pedestrSs
copias^ ostendenmfc. „ .
ti^^TV -fT' *^^^ encouraging his men, gives the signal. 2.
Ihe Aedui had promised corn. 3. He did not aUow the soldiera
to go outside of the fortifications. 4. On the fnterpreters being
removed he converses with him more freely. 5. After advancing
sev^n miles from that place,, he drew up the line of battle, el
sudden war arose-in Gaul. 7. When this battle had been reported,
those who had come to the Rhine began to return'; he himself se
out for hither Gaul. 8. He ordered the Helvetians to return to
their own territories, from which they had set out. 9. They have
_ ^ot_ventured^to attack us. 10. They wiU attempt to seie the
higher ground. 11. He' himself sets out with all his forces. 12
theSr ' ^7;:;^ **^^^^"^R «^ ^^e Helvetians, they^hastened to
the territories of the Germans. 13. A great storm having arisen,
^^''^'^'''^'^^^^^^ 14. Suddenly attack:
mg them, they slew a large number. 15. With whom Wai)
does he hold converse ? ,, ' • , »^ ^i*ra*}
. LESSON LIV. ^ . -
(a) Vlrtute prae«t«nt. ' 'they are superior in vaior.
, . Celerltate omne» praeofe- th^y excel all in speed,
* . dunt, ,,, , /' ■■;■ ■
Opiilda numerd dnodeoim, t<»mis twelve in mm
Oppldum ^mlne Bibra», ^ a tomi Bihravc byname.
sgeci^ what respect a statement or term is to be ^pM. ^
(5) Fo|.tl6re. qaam Galll .unt. they are hAver than tk. Ga^dn
Hlberai» e«t mlni^r ,„a™ Irehnd i, maUer than Britain
Britannia» '
^.Awplln. octl„«re«t.e nAv#. mmr thm, eight hundred vemU
MTMfi^H mlnti i ■By
W taw ihun nevm kunand uddiera
rmr
^i
MM'
oonv0nliuiit
aaaembU,
■* ■;
m
PBIMARY LATIN BOOK. '
IX '■'■>
ObserTation. — The force of quam after a comparative.^ The
omission of quam with numerals.^
i ■ .- . ■*■ . ■ . ■ -■■<-.■
: V EXERCISE LIV.
I.-r-l. Haec civitas hominum multitudine praestabat. 2. Magis
virtute quam Violo contendimus. 3. Veneti scientia atque usu
nauticS,rum rerum reliquos Gallos antecedunt. 4. Virtute omiii-
bus^praestatis. 5. Uno die^amplius vigintl- urbes incenduntur.
6. Praestat omnia a populo Romano pati quam ab G«,llis interfici.
-7. Flumen ab castrls non amplius millia passuum decern aberat.
8, Germanos Galli virtute superabant. 9. Pliirimum inter eos
Bellovaci et^ virtiite et aiictoritate et hominum numero valent.
10. Haec res Caesari non mfnorem quam ipsa victoria voluptatem
attulit.* 11. Aquitania et^ regionum latitudine et multitudine
homintim tertia pars Galliae est aestimanda. 12. Gallos disperses
adortu^, magiS ratione et consilio quam virtute vicit. 13. Plils
tertia parte interfecta, reliquos in fugam con jiciunt.
II. — 1. The Helvetians surpass in valor all: the rest of the Gauls.
2. They are strong in infantry. 3. He himself was not farther
than a mile And a. half\ from the enemy's camp. 4. Our fleet was
superior in swiftness. \5. They themselves have not more thali
three hundred cavalry. 6- They are going to burn all their own
towns, twelve in nufnberi 7. The Gauls do not compare them-
selves with t^jem in valor. 8. The lot of the Sequani is more
wretched and bitter than (that) of the others. ^. Our men wem
equal to tljg[ enemy botih in valor ano^in number. 10. The nightiT^
are shorter than in Gaul. 11. Labienus has coUecte^^^ the ships, /
two hundred in number. 12; It is better to be slain in battle (urn
aci^e) than not to regain our liberty. * v
I. So also after words implying comparison, e.g., praettat, it is better. The use of
th^ ablative of comparison is omitted here because of it« rarity in Oasar.
. 2. So oAly after amplius, plus, minus and longiu». , „
I. S^ footnote 3, page '66. \ -^ *:,», M:^.
4. From aih-o. - ■ - -■^.--.:.,— .^,--.^-^^^, -^. .v ; "-^;^V;,
\
W-
^-r-
!►•
agis
iisu
iiiii-
tur. *
ficl.
rat. ::r ''
eos ,
ent. .-'■;•■.
kem
line
rsos
^108
PART X — INTRODUCTORY LESSONJS.
^81
''W
LESSON. LV.»
(a) Bespondent Bdmands ve- they ansimr that the Romans are
nXre, coming.
Exlstimat Gallon esse in- he thinks that the Chnds a/re hos-
Imlods, tile.
Certior faotas est Helvetios he has been informed that the Hd-
iter facere, vetians are m,arching.
^ Intellegrit nostros castra he perceives that our men are
movere, breaking up camp.
Observation. — The Latin equivalent for English clauses intro-
duced by ^/la^ after «verbs of saying, thiiiking, knowing, perceiving.
Mood. Case of subject. Translation pf ^?ia^.
(&) Respondent Romanos vg- they arisfioer that the BomM/ns have
nisse, come.
Existlmat Gallos falsse in- he thinks that the Gavis /latfe been
Imlcds* hostile.
Intellegrit nostros oastra he perceives that mir men are'
moturos ^esse), . ' . 9oi'n'9 to wu)t?c the camp»
Respondet se non vent&ram he dnsu^ers thad he wHl not fiorM.
> (esse), / ife;
Respondent enm ndil ven- they answer that he wUl not come*
t&rnin (esse), * "
> Observation,— The formatidn .of the various tens0sof the infini-
tive active, and their translation after \|^rbs of saying, thinkihg^
etc. (See Part III., section 31, and for tlie verb sum, section 41.)
The changes of form in the future infinitive.^ Use of sd and earn
as subject of an infinitive.' ,
' i III " I |i I. I ill I I I I f au^ — ■ I I ■ I V i i i i ' ■ . — ^ • m i l 1 , 11 II • ihf iii Ti'^' i iTl i t' i III ^
1. On account of the length and difflcullj^of this lesson, the exercisl^fti so arnuifrad
' jbhat sections (a). (^) and (<^) m&y be taken os've^rate lessons.' See nioreiul^ Part II.»
iections 12 and 16, and Part III., section 101, h. >
Itt subject.
UiBMltlvecb|idil<U. AstJI^l
should, always be expressed bv a
ft ° A
n.to the Bubjeot of th» verb on i»Bfait tha
liar
ronoun
V
. ■— -..A... J
endihgi with in« lilfl^lUV*, tbf inii>j^r
loun in the aoousitive case. f.
a2
>
PRIMARY LATIN BOQK.
UfH^ertlor f&otw
face re*
1 t>
mtt0-hi/had been informed that they
JRomans
^ * * were coming.
Be.p«nd«runtR6m&^v;6, «iet/ amtwrerf ki< the Bomans
Exl.tlm&bttt oopia. ventu- h^ thm^ht that the farces would
r&«(eg8e). ;. ame. 1 *
^ Ob.erv«tlon.-The transition of the varjoirleZs of the
infinitive, when the Verb of saying, thinking, et..., is in ^ pa^t
tense, ».6., imperfect, perfect («English past) or pluperfect. ^ ^*^^
EXERCISE liVf
^S?i
'^'~^'')'^'^^^^y^rit GallSs ex vico discSdere.j#2. InteUdgit
Ne^ios belluin parftre. • 3. Nostros ex nfivl dgsilrrfcSnspiciun?»
4. Hostem intrft portfts esse existimant.^ 5. Dicit cSpifts hostium
fossas complfire vaUumque sciiidere, ^ 6. VidStis nihil esse arduun^.
J^^ \' ^^^Wik ^^^^*<^«n» existimat. 8. CSgnoscit nftvSs
m oontin en^Mi rtisse, 9. DuSs, v^nisse legionSs videt. 10.
!I 1^ ■^mm^^^'''^' 11. Copifis temperatarfis ab injOrift
et maldicio^l^iPat. 12. Eis sgsS vel persu5sure>«?vel vl cofto
\fi^ existimant. 13. Omnem bxercituin disc6ssisse
:(e) I4f Respondit mfignam tJaesarem injOriVW
nOntiftverant Gallos adventum Romanorum exspec^
16. Negavit Aedufe 86 obsid6s redditurum esse. 17. HelvStil
angustos s5 fthSs habere arbitrabantur.»* 18. :HelvSti6s tempera-
tOr^b injmoa existimabat.3 ^9. Ex captlvis cognovit flflm^ ab
castrts suls non.amphus miUia passuum duodecim- abess^, trans
Id flflnien omnSs Nervios cGnsSdisse,. adventumque ibi RoinanCrum
exspectare 20. HostSs simul .a^ue s6 ex fuga recSperunr^^
Caesarem d6 pace -legates misgrunt, atque obsidSs s5 datOi^
polhcitl sunt. 21.- Caesarl renttntiatur Helv6ti6s iter in Aeduorum
I» i^t:S^£.^;!Srj\!!^tl^r^ '^"o^^g. th, Unp^rteot ten„ i. .renenOlv t.
bnQntiant.
e. 16. Re<
constituisse.
17. HelvStir
#
»
\
"^
^:
I
-■>#
#
they
matis , ^
■'
1
V
PART I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
83
ftn68 facere. 22. Caesar postquam per expMWrSs comperit
hostSs 8^86 in 8ilvfi8 recepisse, inopiam frtlmenti veritus, constituit .
nsn progredl longius. 23. Helv6til timore. perterritSs RomSnCs
. discSdere & 86 existiraabant.i 24. BreviSrSs esse quam in Gallifi
noctSs vidgbamus.^ > . "*: :
IL-Ca) 1. He learns that the Belgians are assembling. 2.
Ihey think that Ceesar is waging war without suppUes. 3. He
sees that the German» dd not Venture to begin battle. 4. ThW y
bring back word that the enejg| cavalry are riding up and hur^"'^^'^
ing stones and weapons, 5.^ understand that cavaliy, ships
(and) provisions are waijtiifg. 6. He says that the com is now
npe m the fields. -
(6) 7. They perceive that Ceesar lias led across the foJt5e8 with
out baggage. 8. He thinks that Labienus will order the Aedui to "
send ambassado^B. 9. He learns that the Britons have seized the
ambassador an4 put (him) in chains. 10. He says that they have
rested all hope of safety in valor alone. 11. They bring back word
that C«sar, after leading his army across, has bn)ken down the
L"X.^ges '""^^^^ "^ ""' ^^''"'*^'^' ^^* '"^y ^
niai^^^VT'^"^^ *^** ^^ ^^"^*^ ^'^^^ up camp the next
mght. 14 On the same day Caesar was informed by scouts that
the enemy had encamped at the foot of the mountain, eight miles .
from his camp 15. He promised not to neglect^» the wrongs of
the Aedui 16. He was informed that all the neighboring sLes
were revolting. 17. They promised not to revolt.^ 18 The^ ,
declare hat they will neither send ambassadors nor surrender the^
^8. m He said that for this reason he had been silent. 20. V
Fi^i these he learns that a town, protected by woods and marshes,
« iK)t far distant from that place. 21. They said that, influenced
by him, they had revolted from the Aedui. 22. He declares that
they have always been hostUe to him. 23. C^sar, thinking (it*.,-
^ly, hanng thought) that this had happened quite opportunely
demands hostages. 24. He promised to finish^ the wTwithou
any danger to,them (itferoiiy, o/^/iAem). * -
1. See footnote 8, page 82. y
■«^
P«^.iS^"*^ P"***^./^ ■«» md vuUng ate' premu infinitive .fter verb. (^
y
<
: •■
4
n
. »,
»
•
>
' " •
. I* »
■ ■ '
*
- '
'■ ■ 1
1^ *
• .■ -
... ^
,1
w-J
iT- ■
A
•
■«
■ ,
■■
'. ;
■V .
: f-
[-^1, -I-,— 1.. I,,.., ,11 —
■•
.
1
..„:,^._.:j
■. : ;' . ■
. ''■"
1
■■'.■: ..■■■/ ■"■.
'; ■: ■''■■-'
'.:Yv^ '■, '
'•' ■ ''■:■'--
' -■ " ^
^ .
■•
' JL *'
•■■
- 'p.1
-m
m.
4
■'. "
■ , *o\':. - ;: ...;;
, .-. ■ ■■--■■ ■' -'■f ..- •
■ - -"• -.'^S^'- '
-~,- - ^'v-- •--
-
"■ --'-^^r.— ,: —
--■■■■--^: ■- - - ■
-1, ■ - J- ■ --- •»--■-■
— •-
.-, „■ ,«.--_
:,. ..,■_»* ■ i .
■;//..; ■ ■'■ •■
.'/.-■
1
t
*
* ■ k ■
■''■/■', ■;:i/
. «
1 r-—- ' -
- "*- ^
**
'•■•r"""
•
■ ■ ■■-■>■
';;/■•; ^
^■■'^*".l*-./
"-. - ' . ■.'
, * '
». . V;-
■■'■■■•■
■"■.'•■ ■>.-■ "V
*"■ '
■■■■■
HH
MMMH
i\ :W*-
«
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
'<l
s"*»**.
■A
«^
^>'
> >
9
1.0 *ia la
-**-
I.I
ly
lU
IK
w
w
■tt 1^ ■2.2
12.0
1.8
IL25 i 1.4
I
1.6
\
^.
"W.
m
i
V
Photographic
Sdences
Corporation
7M
* <*
i ^Jts.^'
^y^
v^^
w
IS wKt «MM tTmr
WnSTN.N.Y. USM «
(7l*)t7a^503
^7"^
^
. ' -
"' "^ :■•' '**< ■
■ .N.J " ■ •■ ■
. ■ ■ ■:'%-■■ - ^.v ■ ...■.;■ : ■ :■<
*■■■ ' .
1. ■'■■■■;■ ■. ■ , ,
>'
. .■ ■ '
• ' ' ' ■• • ', .:.'.■
. ■*
, "-■ -»-■■'■,_"■■
'■■■'■'-../■-.
■ # ,
f V,,.
•
^ ■ "''■■ .',/■. . . ......
' '■■.■■
/ ■
'-■'■., ^ ■ ., . ■■• ..■'.«
\, ' ■ ,.
'I
* . . ■ \
.,,. ;^^ .. ■■.■•♦ . " .- - . .. "
•
'^ •
^
s^
•
-f .
■ ■ * * ■ • ■ . " "
. " ' - ■ • • , ■ ■ ■
p""
■'^. ■ ' ■ ■ -v "
# *
*" . "■
1 . . ■ 1, ' "
ftT "
^
•
f
y
84
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
ii:
LESaON LVI.
Vlr m&xlmae virtutUi
Ol&aslfl navlnm vlglntl,
Novem dterum Iter,
\
I
^Mdn« m&srn& altttudine,
Vir m&x1m& vlrtute,
Immftnl corpornm m&gnltu-
dlAe homines.
x^a man of the greatest bravery,
, a fleet of twenty ships,
a nine days' march (literally, a
march of nine days).
a mountain of great height,
a man of the gmatest bravery,
men of hiige si& (of bodies).
_Ob.ervatlon^The cases used to describe the qualities or char-
a^tenstics of objects Which case is used when the descripdon
refers to number? which case is preferred when physical char^
tenstics are described?» *'"j'«c»i cnarac-
^
EXERCISE LVI.
^.~1. Repent NerviSs esse hominSs mfi«nae virtHtis. 2. Qtiod
«a^ civitts mftgnke inter Belgfts auct6rit4tis, atque hom^um
miUhttldme praestabat, sescentos obsid.s poposcit. 3. Vol! nus
^bonus mHitum, vir et cOnsUil ma«nl et summae vix^aTb ad
Galbam accumt, at^ue anam esse spem salatis docet. 4. M^rcft-
TNeXl'??''''"^ ^^'^^"^ ^^""^^^« esse praedicaW.
6. Nemi vails pedum novem et fossft quindecim» hibema cingunt.
6. Erat mter Labisnum atque hostem difflcill trftnsita fltoien
LS:; sir? 8%''""'i.'^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ **"« oneris't^r„;
Tnfrtr^ « -.«J- «^P^«^«5r6s certior factus est silvam esse
toflnl«mfi«n.tadme. 9 Vei^iagetorix, summae potentiae adul^
convocat. 10. CSteri Cjusdem generis sunt hamftniSrSs. ,
II.--1. Re |<ras distant a f;w days' journey from him 2 A
mountem of great height takes up the rest of the space. T It wat
stretches from the river Rhine to their territories. 5.
t See more fully Part III., .eotloin 81, e, and 86, e.
JgJ"!^"' »*'^ o^ the y^-aU »nd th» hntdth at thm *..^ ,^u .-> 4w. . . .
i
■W_
%
Mu-'^jm;.
%
rM^i^^ti.
PART l—INTRCm^^ g5
brought Wk word that the Germans wwe (mm) of incredible
bravery. B. They- are going to fortify the toyn with a rampart
twelve feet high (lUerally, of twelve feet). 7. He found that Dum- '
nonx was (a man) of the utmost boldness, and of great influence
with the Gauls on account 6f his Uberality.. 8. He sends to them
.Valerius, a young man of the highest valor and accompihments.
9 He did not think that men of an unfHendly disposition would
refram from wrong-doing and mischief. 10. This state was power-
ful, and was of great weight among them. * . '
* LESSON LVII^
(a)Certlor faotas est asros he vxu informed that the fielda
vastftrlr ; were being laid wcuste.
Responderunt il«r6» vastft- they armoe^ thtU' their fielda had
; to. ©t opplda lno6n.i| - been laid waste and their
*■■*• towns lyumed.
Pollloltl sunt s6 seout&rds they prmnised to follow QiteTaXlj,
(esse), • . ; that they would follow).
mxlteosloquIcfiiiAtdsosse, he said they had attempted to
■ ., -■■;•,. speak. ' ■ * ^
Obse'rvatlon.- Formation of present and perfect infinitive pas-
sive (see Part III., section 32). Changes in form of the perfect
mfimtive passive. Infinitive of Deponents (see Part: Hi., section
40). Compare Lesson LV. .. "^* ■
(6) I»ri|e«ldi4««trt.i^ 't% «^ a proMton (Utermlly^
i- for a protection) to t^ccw»».'
pnml» quae erant &sul aU thirds which were of service
i nostril V . y Giterally, for an advantage)
^''•- vC ■ to our men.
JVostrls erat Impediments, it irns a hindrance (LitenXlj, for
K^ • » hindrance) to <mr nwn.
Eqult«. au«lli6 uostrls ml- they sent the cavalry as aid Qiter.
' '*""'*' >Uy. fo r an «id^ to mi^ «>^,
otto mid itwr men.
M
PAHURY LATIN BOOK.
* ^!!!"'**!?**""^^ "^ ^^ ** • J)redicate to state th. purDo«
a person, or thing serves.» 7 P«rpow
■^ -v' EXERCISE LTlI.
f«cieSn 7 i^ iiJ' ^"l"""™' «'«™ »'»»ibu. Galfi, esse
mlsit' 9 CM, """'P"*'"^ «leommm-jjegionem subsidia nostris
mtat. 9. GaHls ttSgno erat impediments. 10. ArbitrtUI eum
nan loi^pus pragredl canStOrum, in flnta sues revZ^^f T
^c^"'s s»rr """^ -««nitfldinrr^:
impedtae^ ^ ««ntCaeswem, praesidia quinque cohortium
Zrr^ . ; ^^ '*'">"'' "«P"» P«™» lope profe<*um
«8«. 13. ■ Hac msgna sibi asm fore arbitrSbantiur.» *™'°n?"
enlm^^^'a^H'"""'' *!!." *"' "^™' "as being a^ted fcy iie
h«i be» .„t endued weJl leftr^^^'^r^^r •
S^' 7 O^Av" """"^ *^" .' «•">'^''° ""-W «risen Z
"•Wi. 7. One thmg was a great advantage to our Jen R ThZ
-^ Its- z urpufto^dZh'-'Tin'z.r ^'" -
waning which were M „«. L (itS ihei .^""IT
«aid that he would set out for the province the neitTv 13 h! ,
Perceived that our men were being surrounded b yte enemy ^-
/
^
<-"
;.A
q>okea
— - — - ■■■j»*«j
- ^
.. ^c-
PABT L—INTBODUCTOET LESSONa
m
«V
r/
LESSON LVIII. ,
MftgnAoeleritftted«oarr«rant, it^rcm dotim^wi^ great 9wift-
nessT^
Alia ratidQe bellom «erjint/ ih^y carry oti tht war in cmotJur
' manner.
Sommdatadlooaatramuniaiit, th^y fortify the camp wiih the.
• greatest zeal.
Wnk eSmanetAdlne diaUnimnt, they leaped down, accorcling to
their ctutom.
Oaesarla volnntftlii profeoti they set out with Gamfs consent.^
•lUlt,
Observation. — The use and translation of the ablative ejfpress-
ing the nuuiner in which, or that in accordance with wjiich, some-
thing is done. ~ .
.}■''■■':■' EXERCISE Lvinf'f:^-""— '"^ ■ '
1.— 1. Equitibus noHrls pulsis, incrSdibill C^leritfttead flOmen
' dScurrunt. 2. .Gallls mfign6 erat impediments quod nfldflcorpore
pagnftvSrunt. 3. Ab els cCghOvit GallOs m6re su5 conciliS habittJ,
ntlntiSs in omnSs partSs dimlsisse. 4. HostSs mftximS clftmSre
sciOls vallum ascendere coepBtunt. 5. COnsuSttldine suft Caesax
cohortSs complOrSs praesidiO castrls rellquerat. 6. Repperit id
flamen per flnfis Aedupmm in Rhodanum Influere incrSdibill
lenitftte. 7. Ad castra mftgnC curstl contendSrunt. 8. CSnsSnsfl
omnium GallSrum, pftce facta, Germftnl hunc sibi domiciliC locum
d6l6g6runt. 9. Ad haec Caesar respondit sS nunquam alift ratidne
bellum gesttlrum. 10. Summ6 studi« mllit«s nftvCs aedificftre
veterSsque refibere cpepSrunt.
/ n.— -1. He ordered the camp to be moved with greater noise and
rSjOnfusion. 2. He said this i^ a loud voice. 3. They reported
■ that all the Gauls with loud weeping began to ask aid from Caesar.
.4i. Having with incredible speed covered a great distance, they
reached the camp on the eighth day. 6. According to their cus-
tom , they leap dawn and fight «t^loofe.
i
word that the camp had^been fortified with the same care on
^
;f WMABT I'ATIN BOOK > A :
(t«e ex).all 8id««. \ He answered &t he would not come on any
other condition. 8. Wi£h the same speed they hastened towaiZ
Zr/' '• '^ff^.^^^^o^^^ theysLt ambassado't
hm^and promised to give hostages. 10. He found out through
soouts that, according to the practice of tJie Roman people S
enemy were fortifying a camp. >^"^ "«"* peopie^e
' , . - '^'^. ,,:: ■■ ■- '''■*■'"..' ■•.■'A '"
A^
tESSON LIX.
Impotnm tam aul,lt6 faoluat they rmke an attack «, ^uJuLrdy
ut nemo re.l.t»t, thai ^ ^ ,^^^ "^
Impetum tam «ablto f#c#rnnt they made an attack so siidderdv
ut nenBo re«l«teret, . that no one resisted.
Tant«.tlmoriioste,occupWlt fuch a panic seized th^ erunnyM
.ut proellum oommlttere they did notdc^e to join
non aud§rent, 1 battle. "^ "
Acoldlt^nt cartra mUlte. mu- it happened that th. soldiers ^re
n ren , „ ,, , fortifying the camp.
ObierTatlon.-Formati6n of ge subjunctive in the pres^ht and *
ZTIT r^" '' f --i-«*tions. (See Part III.,. sSn 2^)1
The translation and use of these tenses of the subjunctivf ki
dependent sentences of result> l>osition.of the clause^^^^^
■^■■^■■■." ':■ ■■-- EXERcisK LIX.. ::.'". ;:-v:. '^ ■•. ':;;■.:
i ^"T^V"^'*^ i™P«*"n^;f5cSrunt ut hostSs tei^ vertei^nt.
t f,^„^,**™ ^»»»'-"^ «"«» ut haec non sbiam. 3.Tta flelvS^l^
tostitatl sunt ut obsidSs accipere non dare soleant. 4 Tantri u^
^^mor ut discdere ab signis n5n audSrSmus. 5. Accirut G^
capita compa^ent. 6. Ita currfls collodant ut. expeditum ^^
««jii^tton'" ^'^ "'•• "^"^" »»• '^' »•>« -ubjunctiv of the verb. In ^ of the thii»
Indicative. thB Jmi«rf««f ist» *"; iZL . «naicative ig; the nresent like the preeent
hjdi«aive:tTein;^^^^^^^ the prea... „.« tne .._..
truulation than the
>nlng (the remit olj
f'.
PABT |,*-T|NTBQDticTORY LESSONa"
B9
GaUiae tStlus principStum obtinSrent. 8. Tarn celeriter 6rup^
tionem faciimt ut nSmo resistat. 9. Tantam sibi auctsritfttem;
comparfiyerafc ut undique ad eum ISgfttiongs concurrerent. 10
Tantum exercitatione efficiu^t .ut in praecipitl loc6 equSs brevi
mbderSri soleant. 11. Sic nostros contempsSrunt ut fossSa com-
plere audSrent! 12. HostSs tantam virtatem, praestitSrunt ut
altissimas ripas ascendQj^ audlrent.
II.-1. The enemy yTefe^ terrified that they fled to the woodsr
2. So great was the v^or*f the soldiers that aU fought' fiercely
*id bravely. 3. On their arrival such a change occurred (lUeraily,
wa^ made) that our men at once renewed the battle. 4. It hap-
pened that the soldiers were leaving the standards^ 5. Such wm
the swiftness of the Germans that they equaUed tl^e speed of
their horses. 6. So great is the panic that we do not venture tq^
engage battle with them. 7. So great a storm arose that very feiT
Qf aU the ships reached land. 8. The enemy have been so aUmned
by his arrival that they are sending ambass^ors about peace. 9
They fought so fiercely that no onff dared lejive the standards. 10
They display such viilor that the neighboring states eagetly seek
their friendship. 11. They have such influence among the Bei-
gians that no one dares to lay waste their fields. 12. So quicl^^
yere they (UteraUy, so great wm tKeir quickness) that he with
«iifliculty saved himself from the enemy's hands. ' •
€um frumentam nostrl «om- when our men ioere bringing in
port&rent. oertior faotaa «om, Ae tocw m/o»wd . . . .
est . .
Cum haeo YldlM«»l. eqiilt«. when he iwm (literally, had seen)
mlslt, ^ ^^j^^ ^ gg^ ^^ cavalry.
Cum «gro. v«.tAvlswnt, oppl- when (or after, or since) they had
da oppuffn&vdrunt. laid waste the fields (or aftw
, laying waste the fields), they
* - ' attacked the Jtowns.
t)ttmmm»pap,tt»ab»Met,«f>r. t< ^ ftm h^ twfff g mi7e distanL ho r
«•rftiotutpn,,,^^^
u>as iiiformed . i , ,.
do
PRIKARY LATIN BOOK.
introduced by oBBi. poMtion <rf a»e cUmim,.
c
EXERCISE tX.
■ ^ J; Cuu. «pp„p„.^^„, Bri,^.^ temper* *ubT«
TSnisset. Rsml, out Dro,™7?X iV " f* * """" <>« "nprtvlso
8. Kc«t;. cu;'?f,rrL^±t„:«'^'^'*"''»^»'-
Cae«ai.4 «.,«, „ i.- "^"^» "Jciperent^ l^ostibus occurrunt 9
P«<ls «int. ""* ~' *«""*'™ ^«« »' 1«««« no»
m;il(»w(th.tlJ,™*^T''°"'°"»P'^- 2. When our
oom to be brought in hT • 7* , '"'*' ''*' "^ ordered
G.ule W dew^ : « '"« •nformed by «,oute that .Jl the
_^^ -41,. 1. See footnote 1, ptee 88 «eZT"/ " "^ ~
! i?.."*"^ ^"1'"'' than that of the princiS verb. ""'^ '"''•'" **>« Plup«<«o»
^
V4V.
U
■tri:;
** B * a i o etnete ti^
See footnote 1, pa^ 8«. '
—•% i-T^:-
PABTX — ^INTBODUCTORT LESSON&^
91
approached nearer, he was oidered to tlirow ai^ay hu arm^. 8. So
*«reat ia the scarcity of aU tl^ngs that we are in veiy great danger.;
9. When he was a few day^^' march from their territories, ambas-
sadors came to him. 10. When the Gauk(saw that our legions
were being hard pre88ed,Uhey hastened towards the camp. 11.
On learning that Ceesar/Was going to set out that night, they
stationed an ambush in the woo^. 1^ 1% happened that the
camp was smaller. ' ^
LESSON LXI.
Haeo faoere poniun«
||<Oam haeo faoere non possent.
Dixit f£ haeo faoere posse,
iMxlt se haeo faoere potaisse,
■ ... ■ "■
Haeo faoere ndm pota^ront»
SnbmoTirl ndn possont.
I am t^le to do thisy or I can do
this. ■ rt
wJuin they tvere not aUe to do thisy
or when they could not do'
thit. .
he said that he cotUd do this,
he said that he cotdd have done
this (literally, had been able
to do). *
they were unable to do this, or
they could not do^is,
they cannot be driven^
ObservatIon.-Tran8lation of the varioiis forms oJF possmn with
the present infinitive of anothei^ yerb. (For the conjugation of
possam. see Part Dtt., section 42.) Position of the infinitive.^
EXERCISE LXI.
I.— 1. Ntllll civitftti GermanSrum persuAdSre potestis. 2 Vsbia
po8s«mus.fltilSs esse amid. 3. Ab his sS dSfendere, trftditis armls
non possunt. 4. Minus facile eam rem cSnsequI poterunt.' 5^
Cmn oppidum exptlgnftre n5n potuissent, agros pop^JfitI sunt.
e. N-e ipse quidem spSrat nostrum exercitum superftrl posse. 7
9uid sine reHquIs legiSnibus eflScere potestis? 8. Id efficeri .
92
PEIMABT LATIJ» BOOK.
«, .mpedimenta, quae ,5cum porttre n6n poterant, cto flamed
Khenrnn deposuSrunt. .10. T,nU ert GermSnSrum virttla uTnS
4[ quidem immortSlfe parSs esse possint. n. Cum ab proximis
Germajib .mpetrire non possent, tUteriores temptant. 12 NS
«dio venire non poterSmua. 14. Oppidum oppflgnSre o6naM
S"'lf r "^ '"°^''"' -^titadiaenT'ex^^rS
potuerunt, 15. %ecqmspati potest?
thf?T« ? .r" v^"** ^^^^^ ^"^ territottes. 2. He thinks
rellthle .H ''f'^i^^-^' 3- When they could not"
IhTS^'Z' :V"'"^T^'^^'''''^'^' *• He was informed
that they had. not been able to hold out (any) longer. 5 Thev
could not withstand the attecks of our men. 6.^He has iZ
Ze' fht ""^* ^^' "P *'"^' ^"^^^^y- »• S"ch a storm
arose that we were not a^le to finish the work. 10. They did)
Lt Il'^L uT ^'"T"^'' theym^^ht that not e^n) their/
ttL 12 rs ! "'"^^ T'- ''• "^' -jL^«r^ily prevent
couWh. ^ r. .r *^" "^"^"^^ ^^ ^«^^^ *h«t nothing
^o^dbeaccomphshed; 13. You cannot be seen from the enemy's
c^mp. 14. We have been so alarmed by these things, that we L
le^ easUy resist the enemy. 15. They could nft pursue Z
enemy, becaiise the cavalry had been unable to set out ^ ^
■;^::v,X. y^^'-"". :.:■ LESSON' LXII. :. :\ A' ./:/■.' .,. . \
/a) Study the ^formation of the perfect subjunctive active of
■^conjugations (Part III., section 29),» and of the subjunctive
passive, aU tenses (Part III., section 30).» uojunctiye
<6) Bosrat qui» tlbl persuaserlt, Ae asks who has permaded ym
Bogavlt qul8 tlbl persua- he asked who had pervaded you.
peri;c?Tuttre'oa^^^^^^^^ *<> ^-^ "I- B-tion. 41 and 42. ,or th.
in k^^t^:^J'J^^ ««' -^^ ->-^ alio the ,hbJUBotlve-of the A^..., ,,^
i':'M
■r^t
■iWiM&tfdiiH^
-'ft I
PART L^iNTRODUCTOBY 'LESSONS.
1
9a
*- ; Qnem asnm belli habeant he iiiquires tcfca* experience cf
qnaerit, war they ham. . ' ;
Qnem usam belli ^abSrent he learned what ekperitnce ofwar
I cognovit, V they had.
: Quid Tgnisaetls nofa Intel- I did not •understand why yoxir
leg^bam, J^ad come. '
<|aanta faenlt&s daretnr they pointed out what an oppor-
demonstraverant» tunity was qfforded.
Obsei^atlon.— The mood used in dependent sentencef intro-
duced by an interrogative. ^ Contrast th» independent sentences
given in Lesson LI. The translation of the different tenses of !lhe
subjunctive.^ ^
EXERCISE LXII.
^'—1^' Ab his quaeslvit quae cTvitfitSs in arm& essent. 2. Rogat
quSs' in partes hostes iter faciant. 3. Ex loco superiore quae r6s
in nostris castris gererentur conspicatus, decimam legionem subsidiS
nostrls misit. 4. Rogftvit cCtf eos ab officio discessOros jtidicft-
rSraus. 5. Quibus' in locis sit Caesar ex captivis quaerunt. 6.
Ostendit quae* in concilio Gallorum de eo sint dicta. 7. Intefle-
gebat quanto^ cum periculo le'gionem ex hibernis gductOriis esset.
8. Ejus rei quae causa esSfet miiStus eraty 9: Caesar intellegSbat
qua» d5 causa ea dicerent. 10. Ibi ex captivis cognoscit quae* in
hostium castrls gerantur. 11. Flumen est incredibili ISnitate,
ita lit oculls, in utram n^em fluat, jildicarl nori possit. ^2.
Insidiafl verebStur quod <hBp de causa discSderent hostes nondum
perspexerat. ^| , ' ■ ^
n.^1. He asked him why they \rere coming to him. 2. They
asked in what' direction they were being led. 3. He could dis-
cover neither what (literaUy, how great) was the size of the island,
nor what nations inhabited (it). 4. They know what* he does,
with whom he converses. 5. *They ask the merchants from what»
districts they come, and what things they have l^rned there. 6;
Although Csesar understood for what» reason they had said this,
he yet ordered him to come to him with two hundred hostages.
_liThe_verb8 upon which theeemibjunctiveclftyuwii depenA
"TWrarajf, knowing, tellinjc, perceiving and deciding.
a. See footnote 2, page 88. 8. See footnote 3, page 76. 4. See footnote 4, pag^ TR
-/
'%
U'^
94
PBHIAKY LATIN BOOK.
being done, in Gaul. 10 He co-mT?^'- *; «« «ht-ws wh,f is
done in oui camp. 11 mlT^ "1 ^^™' "■>•*' ^» "«ii»»
«*." ^-),«...L^;.rzsrnX^ ieZ'r"f ^
as guard, for the shibs 12 Tl.o« _ P^' *® ^^t* ten cohDrts
* '*\ ■ , '.'■.■■■■■ ^ • .
f •
Hae^Wre^uIt. he toishes to do this. . t- ^ ^
Ha.e ,,oe,e «.,...,. ,, ,^ ^ ^^ ^ ^^ . ^ or Ae u«. ;^
ni..«cti«r4S : ' '^"^''«•'""' »'""»« verb,, «e p^
EXERCISE LXJII.
%,■<■
^ I.-4. Quas2inpart8svuItisproj5ci8cI? 2 0„«.i n 1 *
3. Servire quam pag„a.e n^lL^T q!«?Z7 ^"^^^^^^
nol€bat, posters die in r.^ • • Viuod JortQnam temptSre
. rr^.uZnltoT^':Zl"'Ti:^'^*- '■^'^^
•quod W f«=ere nauarf w'^,**^'^- ^" E5s intertciet
post ter^m hostem ^tq,e^„^"'j"L'' ™"*"'- "• <^
10. Praiidium qu«m «mSl h^)^ ^ »»««>»«« popoecit.
faoere vJUt . l|^Ce:tior 4«, est e^^Sd Jl^^S,."*"'"™',
ii^!J'^^!l:^:^l^^:^;^2^^ ^" did thia be-
, 1* S6e footnote 4, pare 75.' ^ p__ " ~ .>_
1
„ ' . P^B? I— INTBODUCTORy LESSONa. 96
«HBSB Kedid not ™K tlftt pUw to be unoccupied.'- a The^
«mwered tUt ftey UA been unwilling to co^-to him. 4 hJ
^ed wKy we were «(.ore wiUingto e'ubmit tb«n to fight. 6."ThI
f^r 1°/-'"";!'' '"■" '^* '^'»^- «• He »»id th.t he «rhed to '
^tW w.thhm .bout these thing,. 7. You wieh to «ttle in fte^
temtones. 8. "As-he^ wished the bueine» to be finished he „"
out at o^. «SThey i« so alsrmed by his .rn^ll^^
n Tk 7 .V* >»>««• 10. We h«l rather be ^iin-th^
betray th^le t» the enen»y. ' 11. He .deed why i^w^
WwUHngto hold the place.. 12. They sludtluit they^lT
lf2l r r* ''• "^^" '■^*"* ■«' »"'-'» Brit^ Z^
\
/■
LESSON LXIV.
f^
M:
Hoswi Mtatum, qui n,i„u.^ «^ en^y have detcmed ^ am-
erat, reMnuerunt, . 'basmdor who M been mU
• . V** * • . ^'^'^^*»^ fvham the^a/re detain-
C6irnom,tt 16gr4tum qtfem retl- /te Zearn* l^ they wUl put to
Tse"* ***' ^"^«'•'•«ta'*» \ death the ambasmdor whom
ip»io« -m.\.. > they am deiainina. ,
Exl«t,mabat legratum qfaem re.> «^.^AU^ta^ th^ wavld put to'
- «J^'««* eo. mterfecturo. death the arnbas^^ador whom
«oiiw • ' -. they ivere detaining.
. "^nI.o,I4...*,.^n.. - tt, fi,«„^ j^ ,^^
CerMo, WW. e.tO«U6.oom- ^.^t^ in/bnW «ia* «ie Qa^
^^^ia» co«irlf9#ttt,~
wana Aod collected forces: -
^z-*
-^J \
.^
$r
PBJMARY LATIN BOOK.
'^•
liJEuration.*
«b«r*,«l„„._The difference betwee/English and Latin nsaee
m^Uhve or other suboMinate sentences when put in indir^
tXERCISE LXI^. *
- ■-, ..... ^ , ^
' d'^i^^^^^ ^'^ '^^*^' *^ «™^^"« natlonibus, quae
tmns Rhfenum mcolerent, ad «6 venire. 2. Itespondet cum sola.
. decima legione, d6 qua non dubitet, se proeHum commissOrum.
3. Nmitiaverunt.omnes navgs affllctSs esse quod nautae vim tem-
pestatis pati «on potuissent. 4. ReSponderunt impulsos a sufe
^ principfeus, qui dicerenfc Aeduos ab Gaesare in s«irvitfltem redactoa «
' ^esse 86 ab AeduIs.dSfecisse. 5. BenantiSverunt GaUos proe'litim
^ diS non commissuros, quod ampflorgs copiSs, quae nori^um con-
JTT: ^^T'*^"-^"*- ^- ^^'^^^^^ Caesarem faciunt Venetoa
naves habere plQnma«,.quibua in Britanniam navigare soleant. 7.
Amm^ivertat Caesar Sequanos nihU eSrum rSrum facere quis
ceterl facerent. 8. Respondit miseriorem efc graviSr^ esse forta- '
nam Sequanorum quam=» reliquorum quod soli querl non audSrent.
a Ex captivis cognovit omnes Gallos ad oK>idum quod circiter
; miUia passuum quinque abesset confflgisse. \o. Per explfirfitorea
• tSdtoTle "^^*^ ''"'"^' '^^^ ^"^ '''^^''''* *"*"' ^*'^"*^
"'"~i '^?.® informed Caesar that the Germans who dwell
across the Rhine are in arms. 2. The> think that they will
recover the hostages which they have given to Crassus. 3. He
_ 1?^«^^^«^ *»»»*> «»r nien were being thrown into great confusion,
because they were unable to keep their ranks. 4. On the same ,
day Ceesar was infohned by scouts that the enemy had encamped
. at «le foot of a mountain, which was eight miles frgm his camp.
5. They promised to do what» he had commanded. 6. He was
informed that all the Belgians were conspiring, because they did
, not wish a Roman amy ttJ winter in Gaul. 7. He thought* that
■ JJ'f;:;""if ""***« ^^«*'*h«y, were promising. 8. He had learned '
that t|* Germans were awaiting the cavalry which had been sent
«. In tnwlrttng thUwatenoe wipply the word that. ^'
fc 6m hwt no f «, p^gr TOT
'i. See footnote 8, ptgt M.
■*;:
,■»■,=;-«,
^ ■*■-■-.
^J' I— INTBODUCTOHT lESSONa
aciyxss the Rhine fl tt,^ ;5-#-* •
had said this h^: iS^ t^^^-^ «^«t the leadjnf^ wli
should not be received From thoslwho f; "^' *^^"^^* «^-"^
voluntarily made v.ar. ' '^^^''' /^^^r seeking peace, had
LESSON LXV.
'y
- It " " °°"^"""'' ""■' ™"> -- ^ ni.; ^.o#
its co^^rr.""""' '-«^''?i««» i» the inflection of ,.,, ^,
EXEBCISE iXv. ■
one„. no,W .ubi^,™;^;-»,^'^^- propter eaq„«,fe«b.^
H«---l. He was informaH fl.o* « , -
1 An»!.* #-~^Z "^" *'**^ on them
9
C.:
98
PBIMABT LATIN BOOK.
or their aUies. 6. On this answer being brought back to Osesar,
he a second time sends ambassadors to him. 7. The report is
carried with, incredible speed to Labienus. 8. They found out
what he had said and reported (it) to Ctesar. 9. The ambassadors
denied that the Germans were making war on the allies of the
Roman people. 10. AU these differ f|^m on» another* in language
and laws, llj He explains how {literally, in what) these nations
differ from one another.^ 12. Galba is slain and his head brought
back to the camp. 13. He attacked them when the Helvetians
could not bring aid to their friends. ^- 14. Such was the strength
of the ships that they easily withstood the storm. 15. He
ordered the ba^age to be coUected to {literaUy, into) one place,
and that (place) to be foAified.
f
\t
>
jLESSON LXVI, \
(a) Profeotns est at oppldum he set out that (or in order that)
oppuirnaret, he might attack the totm, or
he set otit to atta^ik the toum.
Port&s olaadl Jnbet, ni in- he orders the gates to be closed^
Juria aooiplatnr; " that (or in order that) injury
' # may not he received, or leU
It-'
injury be received.
^ .Observation. — The mood used to express purpose. The differ-
ence between at and n£. The yarious translations. The tenses
used in sentences of purpose.^
purpose. _ ^
(6) Ldflr&tas mls^ipnt qal p&-
oem peterentt
The position of the clause of
they sent ambassadors to seek
peace (literally, who were to
seek peace, or who should
seek peace).
1,^ J'Vom on^ ano(A«r, literally, a»t<m^ (A«mM/«Mi - ,.
1 See footnote 2, i>Affe 04.
S. The preibent sublunbtive It used where English would use may, <.«., after th«
primary ten^ (see footnote 1, page 82), the lini)erfeot where Kngiish would use
might, <.«., ^ter the $eeondary tenses. Notice als« that in clauses of purpose the
Wbiunot i yo it not to b e franilat i urt, ■■ \ % ynnnrally th n nas ii , hy th s Wngliah indl o ativ i
(•M foolnot# S. pi^ 88X
:/-•
* V
p.— iirmCM>UCTORY LESSONS,
/ V ■■■■■•■■; '^ -;"V'-i-. ^Z-
^ perturbarentur. dismayed. ^
Petere^oep,t_nt li G^„ta he began to'ask to he left in CM
rellnqueretur, * »'» www.
„ EXERCISE LXVI. x /
» P„,. « r <'»«««'n vSnSrunt qui pScem netoren'
». EquitSs monit ut qu,m Uti^ims pery».ent,.r in "r*""*
gem f«sm„,r„t oel^riter perrumpere ^Zl 12 K^^"
praemittit qui Baios His o.,a j ^ ppssimus. 12. NOntiSa
et ntsgno „„me« St^ in b •.^"™' ""■" ^»»'"» '««iSnibus
bmvely te wip, out the ^i^ ™'tha fliS^t 3 "^ r,"" """"
S» Sm tootoote 8, frngt i
•/.
■ r-
\
100
PfilMARY LATIN BOOK.
might carry on the war in their own territories -7 TT.
to remain in his allegiance ' 8 ThTJ^ u n He urged him
C^or) to come to thfm 9 LI f T ^**' ^'''^'"^^^' -^^^^"
couialt be finishea^O. HeTea Te'irt TtlT ^'^ "^''
that he might pursue the Helvetians 11 H« w . T "'"^'^
the army across in order to ^un-h tie Oelr!:^'^'^^,^'^
may not be 'compelled to spend the summer^n Ganl K i ?
W to come to him with two hundred hoXges ' """ '"^T
LESSON LXVIL
Turn to the conjugation of the verbs eo and fi« P.rf ttt
sections 46 and 46. .' ^*^ ^^*
*t' ■ ■■ • ■■•■ ""■;
. EXERCISE LXVII.. ; .
JP-1. TrftnseuntRhgnumnavibusiatibusaue S Fvr.iA^.^ . ^
. Jflssit quid fieret cSgnoscere S TTa» «? «^^ , ^P^^^^tSrSs
ro^"^r..:iTALt;rr:^ r- rr rr '
16. R<«5vit„umh«,t8s.p.ifldem S;:»:" rMm^^T"'-
tu. „t fortiter pogntont, ,„id 6«« ^u^ .LL^ w r" ^
"BU decim» legiSne Ib«: ;, ■ »"■- «sreiioit. 18. Cum
/2. Notice that «o. while VBrv 1«.«™« /. <* *
/
:M
i'i
iy^r
PABT I.~INTB0DUCT0^ LESS0J!JS. 101.
II.--1. He orders a sally to be made 2 Tho* • ,
Helvetians were crossmc 3 W«^?i f^ That xiyer, the
tenth legion alonrT He ^d no. f*l'*^ "^ «^° ^ ^^^
-o^upied, lest the OerlL^o^ ci:::^ i^ th"^ "?• *^
territories. 6. Thev will n«f .11 .1 „ ""^ Helvetians'
their tenitories Tfa^orier^n ' "°'™"»°« 'o 8° «"«"gh
the e„e„, ,_ ^^i/^ ^. Z "he tril'^'" '^ "T» °»
with two legion .„d 11 the Tv'.W t^nr'w/'" ^T'T"*
.through whose territories tho* l,..r \ , "«^«"«d those
back. 8. HedecW^Zt!u^«°? *° ''"»8 'h/HelTCtians
done (UtenUly, to be dZe). U flt wf inf ""'I Tr^"" '^'"^
had crossed the river had „„! 1. ""f,"^»™*! that those who
friends.. 12 ThrL^- '" '"* ^ ""^ "d *» their
13. That was b^^'^trrthaT^r""!:^ m^ '"'' "^™^-
mer they are surrounded bv our »va^rv 16 H <.r"^ ""'
this coulj be done. 16 aLuT^... ^" *'"'"«''* *"«"
orossed the Bhine 17 tC ""'"'*"'* •^™»°« have
18. He is infom,^ that the Ge™ ""' T"" ""' "^ '""^ "™'-
h^v^been invited bX^^T^""' »" "^^ ^ ««-d
..%."■
LESSON LXVIIL ^ •
N
.>
J
. 102
I'-
PHIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
the gerundive m its forms ? NT;
EXERCISE LXVIIh . ' -^
I.-1. ReliqutonfivgsparatasadnftvigahdiiminvSnit. 2. Omni
spS impetrandl ade«ipta, prlncipfis GaUiae soUicitfire coepit. 3
CSgnoverat equitefcum praedandP causa trfins Rhgnum missum
esse. 4. Caesar^^oquendi^ finem facit. 5. Ulciscendl^^ RSmanos
oo^ionem dlmit^re nolebant. 6. Hunc ad egrediendum^ nequl
quam idoneum locum arbitratur. 7. Cum finem oppflgnandi
,.nox fscisset, IggfitI d6 pace ad eu^ v6n6runt. 8. Ea X ad
oppOgnandum flsul erant, comparSrS coepit. 9. Equitgs frOmen-
tandx ^usa praemittendl erant. 10. Nostrl, dgpositis armls,.in
mtimendS occupati sunt. ., . "»,»«*
JHZ^' '^*^/'^?^^ ^^" "^^"^«'« «d^ancing into unfavorable
ground m order to fight. 2. This was the reason for (literally, of)
rr' T%r^Z- '• ^' '*^ ««^ suitable weather for sJSi^
4 Tmie f or (^. Wiy, of) hurling their javelins at the enemy is not
Sr; A "" "^"^ r^ '^^' ^^' "^^^ ^*^ ^'^^^ *he river,
they left the camp in order to piUage. 6. They had made our men
more eager for fighting. 7. Suddenly making a sally, they leave
the enemy no opportunity of learning what was being done. 8.
.w7 ^ ^^^^]^rge forces for an atteck (literally, for aita^lc
tng). 9. They made an end of pursuing. JO. They made an
attack so suddenly, that time for (literaUy, of) taking up arms ^
was not given. •'/ •© r ~"«» ^
'^
LESSON LXIX.
Prae«ldium pontl. tuendl cau- he station, a garrison for the jtmr-
•4 ponlt,
pose of protecting the bridge,
or to protect the bridge (liter-
ally, for the sake of tb«
bridge totje defended).
^ ^«>y u,e, ad and the gerund to txy^ ^ ryi^ te^th«r than
MM.
Ife-
8. For the «MTUod of deponent verbe. lee Part m.. aeotion 06. e. ^
^-
PART, I.—INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
103
IMlBoaltas faolendl pontls.
th£ diffktdty of building a bridge
, (literally, of, or-ais regards,»
I ^ the bridge which is €6 be
built>
Legator mlserunt ad paeem th^y sent dmbasaddors to seek peace
patendton,; ^ ^ _ (literdly, for the peace which
' ^ . was to be sought).
II» petendft pace Kaeo dl- in asking peace, they spoke thu8,
xernnt,
\':: ' "..:±:-..[ ' . '• ./■/;:.:,:'::;:■_.:.;.■::,:-,.■. i/. _:::.. . .V.
Ob«ervation.-The use of the gerundive msteaH of the gerund
with an object.» How may purpose be expressed by the gerundive
construction? How is this gerundive construction to be distin-
guished from the usg^f the gerundive given in Le^n XL. ?
EXERCISE LXirf
Jh~~7 i" ^ ^^^^' ISgatos.ad eum pficis ^tendae cauaft
nnttunt^ 2 my^s Ifttiorgs facit ad multitfldiner jOmenterum
t^portandam. S. In agrls vastandis occupftti sunt. 4 Cae^
m5b^6ssunt 6 Sp6 expflgnandi oppidi adductus, mfij5r«s c5piite
c<«ere coepit. 7. Rediti5nis sps sublfttt,» parfitierSs ad om^
subeunda erilnt 8. Haec faciunt reciper^d^ suarum, ZT
mm ^^"^r'T *^ ««"^°i**«d^ AeduSs profectum esse.
fi ?^7^' "^t "f. •f""*"^ f"" •" «ides to defend thelUmi.
TumW „?T^ .' T""^- *• '^'>' P"""^ « sufficiently 1«™
t-»»» for the punK>ae of lending «id. . 8. He «nds . lieu tenant in
^
^
104>
PRIitARY LATIN BOOK.
^r ■•• ■ ■ ■■ . • , .
advance to ascertain these (things). 9. He answered that the
seventh legion had been sent to seek supplies. 10. Caasar runs
down to encourage the soldiers. -^
X-
•mr
^ . LESSON LXX:
Pontemresclndljusgitngquls he ordered the bridged be (ytU
Human tranrtrut, down, lest wny one should
- — <^o»» the river, or thai no one
might cross the river.
AUquos ex n&vl egredtent6s they saw seme leaving the skip.
oonspexernnt,
Qulsque 1« o6n«peotu Caesfcls each was Jighting in Coesar's sight.
pugrnabat,
CompreHendunt utrumque, they seize each (ot both).
Neque.turpluaquloquamhabe- nor is anything considered more
'*"'* disgraceful.
QuWam oentuHo ad e^m ac- a certain cefituTUHi mis vp to
*"•"•"• him. *
Ob-rTatIon.-U8e and translation of qui., allqul^ qulgque.
uterque. quLquam, quidam. For the declension of these pro-
nouns see Part IH., section 26. Which of the two words for any
^ used after ne ? Which of. the two word« fpr each implies e2
■'; -.:■:':■:-'-::■'■-' EXERCISE htx. "" .. V
I.-1. PrtocipSs cQjusque civitfttis ad sS vocat. 2. ProximS diS
Caesar ex castrls utrisque copifis dOxit. 3. AUquem d6 mottl •
GaUSrum ntotium sS acceptOrSs existimftbant. 4. IdSneum quen-
dwn hominem dSlSgit ex ils qu6s sgcum habSbat. S6. Cum R5-
mtols SS beUum gesttlros dixSrunt, neque cajusquam» imperiS
obtemperattlros. 6. MlHtSs ex oppidS exire jtlssit nS quam^in-
jdnam acciperent. 7. Ab Ariovisto postulftvit nS quSs RhSnum
«Jtog^^lKffi^ 'te'i^v^jyggA T^?!LTL!°gig?°^
^^»T L— INTRODUCTORY LESSONa 105
nave™, xo. sn.ptibtr:„Mtair Lrr:^'"^-
capere posset. *' ^ ^^"^ »"»*
2 nrnl^f ^"^ f ^'**'^^^^' '^ «/) these came to him by nkht
^. Me orders each to return q T»,o« k i , ^ "ignt.
(.« ad) e«h b«Jc of Cri^r f fc' 't^*',,'"? '"^ »»
1. Translate ad by /or.
a See footnote 1, page 104.
r
7
V
106
PRikARY LATIN BOOK.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
•' (J%ts exercise niay be introduced after Lesson XXIII.)
Ad initium dilv&rum Caesar pervSnit, et castra munire instituit.
Bdm&nl in opere dispersi suntr Subito ex omnibus partibus
silvae hostSs SvoUlvSrunt et in militSs impetum f§c6runt. Romani
celeriter anna cgpSrunt hostSsque in silvas repulSruntet multos
interfecgrunt. OmnSs hostium agri S, Romanis vastati sunt,
ylclque incSnsI. Caesar exercitum redOxit et in finitimis civita-
tibus in hibernls coUocavit. ^^
-^Adapted from CcBsdr, B. Q., 111^28, 29^.)
(This exercise may he introduced after Lesmi XXXII.)
Britanniae interior pars ab ils^ incolitur, qui^ nftti' sunt in
Insula, maritima pars ab iis, qui praedae causa ex BelgiS trans-
iSrunt* et ibi permansSrunt atque agros colere coeperunt. Homi-
num est Infinlta multittldo, creberrimaque^ aedificja. Loca** sunt
temperatidra quam' in Gallia. Insula natOra* est triquetra, cujus»
Unum latus est contra Galliam. Ex his^" omnibus longg sunt
hOmamssiml qui" Cantmm incolunt. InteriSrSs frttmenta non
serunt, sed lacte^^ et "^me vivunt, pellibusque sunt vestl^i.^
Omngs sS" BritannI vitr6 inficiunt, quod^^ caeruleum efficit colo-
rem,j«tque hSc** horridiorgs sunt in pugna. Una" ex parte est
Hibemia, minor quam^ Britannia, et complurgs ramorgs subjectae*
sunt Insulae. Breviorgs sunt quam^ in continent! noctgs.
— {Adapted from Gasar, E.G., v., 12-14.)
1. '='Thfm. 2. =Who. 8. Natt gutU = have been bom. 4. From transeo. 6.
BupplyHhereare. 6. ^The ^hmate, literally, the regiona. 7. =,Than. 8. ''^Tn
«*«*?• »:. = Ofj^hieh. 10. = Theee. 11. = Those who. 12. Translate ablative b
Y, b i fmeaiu _sf. 13. , = Clothed. U. ^Themativea. is. rnr Which.
1
1
PART L— INTRODUCfrOBY LBSSONS.
i'>
107
i
r
s.d.mn «x. oohortium imp^taentls<> reSnquit «to^TaTw^S
IV.,
V. \
1
. {Thi, exercm may U intjodwed <ffl«-J^emn Xiri^ '
p^^." ™"^ 'ai^S" .^r.-'ex'^rirt" .K
C«.8.«ml5g4tasd8pSce„S5rupt. ^ '^PSnmt, stotun ad
/^
<j'
m
■■f
^
V
"3
raiMAR? LATIN BOOK.
"V. . ..
(Thi9 exereise rmij be introduced after Lesson LIIL) '
Wmihrn gestis, Labi5n6 in cottfinentl cum tribus legionibus
efc equitum iniUibus duobus reUcto, ipse cum quinque legionibus
^t eodem.numerS equitum,. quern in continent! rellquerat, solis
occasu hftygs solvit. OmnSs naves ad Britanniam acc6ss6runt
circiter meridiem, neque in eo loco hostis est visus, ^ ut^ posteS
Caesar ex captlvis cognovit, magnae copiae, quae convgnerant, '
multitadme navium perterrit^e & b'tore discSsserant ac se in» I
supenora loca abdiderant. Caesar, exposito exercitii et loc6 cas- :
tris» idSneo capto, cohortibus decern ad* mare relictiset equitibus
trecentis, tertia vigilia ad hostSs contendit. MiUia passuum cir-
«Iter duodecim progressus, liostium c6pias conspicStus est:
, —(Ada0edfr(ymC(E9ar,B.G.,r.l8,9.)
M
■w
C'V
VJ-
(This exercise rmyhe introdu^ after Lisson LVII.)
Caesar AvariciS complutSs di€s commoratus, summamque ibi
«opiam frumenti et reUqui com'meg,tus^ nahctus, exercitum ex«
labore atque inopia reficit. Jam prope hieme confectft, legfitl ad>
«um i^orum yeniunt, qui, haec locflti sunt: dutf magisStum
gerer6,-et utrumque^ eflrum se ISgibus " crefitum essje; dicere;
horum esse alterum Convictolitavem, ilorentem et illi
lescentum, altj^rum Cotum, antiquiftha familia natj
ip^um hominem^summae potenti* et magnae c6gnatiG-»-^^x,.«^
tem esse on^nem in armis; divlsum» senatum, dMsum populum.
^»^8ar, e^^a *eU6 discgdere dgtrimentosum esse existimabat,
tamen ip^l^ .4edu6s proficisci statuit, senatumque omnem ad
■sg gvbcav^!^ Pfc&.^ ^ '^^^ .. %
iptedfr&m Ccesar, B. G.^y'IL, SS, S3.)
cum. 6. = _,-.
not mean andy:
4itn(nnn taae.
^Translate dffjve ^ for. 4. =By or at. 5. =^At Avari-
a ^v-^^^2/u*^u ^ ,.7=,^»«* (?«e ia part of the woid, and does
8. Ntttu» with the ablative = &orn c/Tdtiemded fiwk 9.U»
PART I.— yfTRODUCTORY tESSONa ^ IQ^
; i^ # (This exercise may he introduced aftir Lesson LXII.\
feStot "J^^ T*^ posset quanta '^^
,>t^,aestaco;pZ^^^ "' nannollae na.^, ancorls
- - • . -{Adapted froin CceSar] B.Q., IV., 20-29.)
■>,
■I „
BUIs,-ptignandI« temVus du^tteret ' "^ ^'^'^'^^ •
-{Adapted from Ossar, K^G., 11.^ 21.) ^
1.
II- -By. 12. From eonsisto. 13. = Bis cotnZ!u^^' with «^na. 10. = Each.
/i«.
IW
'fk
BOOK.
^|EW EXERGISES ON THE
■^ ..rW- "■■•■• -ACCIDENCE.^
I. Deditie th^ foUowin^ combinations of a nov>n with an adjective iti
^ ' Duplex fossa, commflne consilium, reliqua cohors, alia rSs, regia
finitima, omnis pars, longius iter, incrSdibilis virtfls (a.)," m&jor
pai^, manus dextra, tSta aciSs («j.), omnis annus, Belgae soli (p.),'
ihjOria vetus, Olla nftvis, pflgna superior, nftvis longa, exercitus
Hosier, vir fortis, r6s famili&ris, idoneus locus, omnis copia^ vfira
pars, ager ferax, locus superior, reliqui Belgae (p.), aciSs tpplex
(«.), vetus n&vis, tote prSvincia, omne genus, proelium equestre,
continSns impetus, primus 6rd6, complOrSs anni (p.), caput s5lum,
homS nSbilis, omnia arma (p.), nullus ager, omnis eqvdtfttus (a.),
tlnum proelium, castra m&j^ra (p.), nOllus commOnis magistratus,
primum agmen, altera pars, equit&tus noster (s.), omnis 6rd6, silva
' continSns, proxima nox, par bellum, t6te «Ivitfts, castra n&vftlia
^(p.), latus apertum, omne tempus, altius vallum, r5s opportOna,
Awmmtlne ^jlculum, silva dSnsior, alia pars, hnmilior nAvis,
eqUes ROmanus, reliqua legio, tlnum latus, ntlllus hostis, legiS-
n&rius miles, signum mllitftre, communis salOs («.), locus dSolIvis,
commflne perlculum, m&jor c5pia, aliud tempus, pedestre iter,
ingSns mfignitado («.), continul complOrSs diSs (p.), m&gnum iter,
'' oninis sp6s («..), tlllus di6s, c5piae pedestrSs (p.), superior diCs,
• fillies integer ac rec6ns, summa spSs (a.). '
II. Give the other degrees of comparison of the fMotoing adjectives^
in the same case, gender and number as the form given :
Facillimd, ftcrem, altiasiniae, breviOrom, mAjOribus, optimftriini,
- 1. ThcM «eipiMS »re intended to be suggestive merely, for whloh reason the
examples given to llluntrate many of the ri^iost valuable Itlnds of drill are few in
number, the teacher l>eing left to add, as he easily oan, further examples 'of the
same nature. 4
2. The letter» rrt and («\mm^l,^ th>t fh« »nml^t.TT* rtmUt It trfT ttt fllPtiltirl In t»W
ttoffuiiur or pluna only, as th« cm* may be. . ■ , ■>■ ~^ ^^
PART L—INTRODUCTORY LESSOKS.
\
m
y
fortis, crSbrb, vfeteris, multos, ditissimi, humUiorl, prima, difficilia
dSnsissima, superiore, gravium, proximuni, celemmas, magni»*
ferocissimam, potent§s, plSno, antlquam, parvum. *
ni. Chan^ the follmoing adjectives to agree with the mmm in
parentheses : .,
Omnis (rSrum), complOrSs (annorum), paucus (disbus), mSgnus
(copias), . plQs (loca), ingSns (magnitQdine), omnis (nobiUtfttis)
(faims (annos), novus (rSrum), mSgnus (aucWritftfcis), plorimus
vetusque (nSves), noster (mari), reliquua (ordinSs), mftximua (ihul-
titflOml), finitimus (partem), inlquior (locum), dexj^r (comtl)
alter (castra), summus (duce), omnis (hlbernis), singulfiria (atudifi)!
TV. Cfive^iJte Latin numerals for the following numbers, in agree-
m^nt with the nouns in parentheses:^
*
^3 (horfts), 200 (obsidibus), 2 (legiSnibus), 3rd (di6), 3 (diSrum)
20 (vltf«), 1000 (equitSs), 1000 (equitibus), 1500 (Belgfts), 1 (ryJl
lo). 1 (Qphorfcis). 10th GegiSnem), 10 (legiSnum), Ist (acie^ 12"
ann6s),.lst (mipet^,.4th (nocte), 3 (miUia), 2 (millibus), W
(Iegi6), 4th (diem), 1892nd (anno).
V. Decline the foUmving ambitKitions of a prommn and nmm in
agreement:
Nostra ^tra, utrumque latus, ilia pars, Kbc p^Uum, u^ue
castra, quidam miles, hic locus, is coUis, hoc ipsum fldmen, 3
que tempus {s.\ idem iUud consilium, qui dies, qu» legiO meus
films, haec clvitfts, eadem rSs. •• , ,4«» *«gio, meus
VI. Write thm forms of hic, is, 4Uu8, iUe, qui. Idem, ti^ibA wiU
<»Stree with the foUounng w<yrds : ,
an^S '''''^""' ^"^' ^^""^' '^"^' "^^^^"™' eohortl^'diSbus,
VII. ^^ the <dher degrees of c<nn}>cmson of the fM^
j nd too, oao pi iwim^ i, mul tum, minus, mfaime, fortiter, iorfi».
. nwhus. mWOr^ ||oi^ Ilberrims, diQ^ «r. »<««i,
112
■Nw
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
K:
1.
2.
r-:^:
VIII. Clrcumvenio, surround; colloco, station; do, give; inter-
&ii6,Ml; jubeo, arder; imtto,^ send ; accipio, receue; re-
linquS, leave; venio, come; video, see. ^ •
' Conor, attempt ; experior, try ; poUiceor, promise; proficiscor,
' set out; progredior, advance.
Write out the principal parts of these verbs. -, **-
Under each of the pMixipal parts (a) of mitto, (6) of conor,
wri^e out the names of the moods and tenses which are formed
from it.
3. Name and mrUe out in ftM the tenses qf:Vie indicative who, e
first person singular means :
I shaU send, I have given, I am coming, I had left, I shall
order, I receive, I was coming, I sbaU have seen, I station,.
, ' •■ I saw. , ■ :■ ■.* ■ " 4^-^: ,.
I was ordered, I shall be sent, I have been left, I used to be^'^^
sent, I am ordered, J had been ordered.
I had promised, I shaU attempt, I advance, I advanced, I
shall set out, I have tried. * . , '
4. TroAndate the following forms :
Circumvent! erant, interficit, accipistur, vSnertlmus, dabunt,
mittens, vidSris, collocantur, jOssae estis, relinquar.
PollicSbantur, prSgredimur, cSnfitus est, experigmini, pro.
ficiscitur. ^*
5. Tramdate the following forms :
Wo shaU leave, they will station, he had sent, they come,
they were kiUed, you shaU have seen, we were giving, it
has been received, you are being surrounded, I shall order.
We shaU attempt, he tried, she had promised, I was setting
oi|t, they advance.
a. Translate the following :
Cum vidisset, n6 interficerSmur, cum coUocftrent, ut venfret,
nS accipifttur, quod rellquerit", quia interfectus esset, cum
jubeat, nS detur. *^
^ Cum proficiscerStur, n6 cOnantur, quod pcllicitus sis, ut ©x-
periftmur, cum progress! essent.
?■• Wriiijmt (ft) the thir d aingnlar impaifi i x^l siiljum.live fmwiw,
#
|A»T I.— INTRODUCTORY LESSONS,
im
native whose
h
perfect s^junctive active and passive, of mitto, circumveniij. d(J
video arul interficio ; and (b) ths iMrd singrdar present and ph^.
feet s^d>juncttve and the third plural imperfect mbjunctim of%oZv
expenor, poUiceor, proficiscor and progredior. - " *
8. Write out and mime all th^ infinUives, active amd pamve, oJi
relinquo, accipio, coUojjo, video, circumvenio.
9. Translate: \ '"v:- : " . -:■ -■■;*,;■■-.-,.-;; -:■ V
(Dicit eos) mittere, reliquiae, interf ectos esse, coUocfirl, ve J
turos esse, profecttiros esse, progredl, conafcos'esse. 7
- (Dmt eos) venire, dedisse, cireumventos esse, mitti, acce^
turos esse, conaturos esse, cSnSn, poUicitos esse. -
(JOssus est) venire, interfici, proficiscl.
10 Write oi^t and nams all the participles, aci^ and pa^ve, of
jubeS, interficio, coUoco, mitto, circumvenio, c6nor, progred or!
expenor, polhceor, proficiscor.
11. Wnte out th^ participles meanimj while coming, after ad-
rnf f fr ^'^^ «""o^nded, wWle attempting, in a^eement
with thefollotmng words: militibus, Caesar^m. legione, legionis
equitum, exercitul. . » *«,
12. Write out the genUive of the gencnd of do, venio, prSgredior,
Video and relmquo ; and all cases of the gerxmd o/ proficiscor
"^^' Write md the following parts :
^irdHng^dar pluperfect mbjunctive active of do, mim.
Second plural present subjunctive active of venio, coUocd '
Third plural imperfect indicative passive of interficio re-
linquo. ^- ;
^irst pluraj future indicative active of d[6, venid, yid^
^^^MtinfinUive active of vide(i,yem6,.inter&cik
Present infinitive passive of accipio, do, mittO.
:Future paHiciple active feminine plural accuaative of rideS m
relinqufl. • ^ * I
^«rundive ablative singular neuter of acoipia, da, juhe6, ' ^-
14. Name fxdly the following forms : #^
. ViderSmur, accipifitis, rellquit, interficiendOs, cOnfttI sunt»
Pg>fifilHc T . progTftRHT, intorfficl , jubua lum, duU «weut. det .
8
videris.
^♦v
•/
PMMABir LATIN BOOK. \
'W^e f^ eorf^iaponding active or passive form (as the cas$
'-, vnay he) of hhe following : , ' .,. ■ ■ i
' Jilterfgcit, relinqu^m, reliquisset, datum est, videtur, diccipi-
/ Siis, accipere, daijuiu esse/ ,^^
I64 Write the corre^Hmding form in, thi indicative or stibjunctive
(as the case may be) of- the folloioing : '
Dabat) misisset, vSnerunt, circumveniatur, relict! essent,
jtisseram, jubied, interficitur.
17. Translate: He promises to come, he was ordered to come,
he was asked to come, so terrified as to come, it is difficult to
dome, he did this in order to come ; they said that he had come,
so important that he had conie, he did this that he might come ;
they attack the soldiers who are coming, he learns who are coming,
they attack those who are coming, he learns that they are attackr
ing the soldiers who are coming. , v
IX.— 1. Write out^ the principal parts of sum, possum, feto, e6,
vole, ?i5l6, mS.16, fio. , *
2. WrijffMit in ftdl the present indicative and stibjunctive of thes$
verbs. \ ^
3. Write out the following parts : / /
Fifrst singular imperfect and future indicative of sum, possutn,
e5. . ,
, Third singidar imperfect sijK>3unctive of sum, possum, fero^^S,
vols, fio. ,
Present participle^ nominative and genitive singular j o/ pos-
sum, absum, e5> • I ' ; /
Present invperaJiive of ferOf ^6, nolo. , / '
Oenitive of genind of ieffio, &5. /^^
Write out the principal par^s of the compounds of f er6 with in,
, ex, ab, «d, dis, sub, con,} ob ; of eo tvith pr5 dnd re ; and
of BVLta u)ith &h and pro. \ I*
,- — T- f ^ - V"
m
■-■i
\ r
t V
,\
PART II. — PREPARAtORYREADINd.
116
■'¥
' ' f
PREPARATORY LESSONS IN CONTINUOUS "
. / READING.
^ ^ ^^ "" — li A Bry^e GeneraTs Death; ^"^ ^ _-_-_^-:_._---
Dux quidam, proelio cutfi GaUls commisso, gravissimo vulnere
afflictus erat, et hurni moribqndus jacebat. Subito anus 6x ils qui
circumstabant mllitibtjs clamavitl "Ecce fugiunt." «'Qui fugi-
unt ?" rogat dux. '*GaMi," respondet miles. Turn dux, '^Jam
moriar/'inquit, " fgllx." /Quae cum dixisset, i^tatim exanimatus est. 5
Notes.-!, proelio oomUisso i abl. absolute ; render in English by the active
•voice- 2. ex its. " pf th||.j^ith militibus; ex is often used for the partitive gen
esi^ecially after numerals. ^/Quae ito indicate more clearly the connection with
the precedmg«word8, Latin cjinstantly uses qui for Ate or is, and places it before even
a conjunction ; so here quaejm used for haee " this " ; literally, "which things." •
8. /a Lesson from a Cockfight * > ;
Bello Persico, ouih Themistocles magno cum exercka iter in
hostgs faceret, duos/gallos vidit in via dimicantes. Turn militgs ad
spectaculum convodSVit, et banc orationem habuit : «' Hi galli n6n
pt5 patria dimicanl non pro dis, n6n pro glSria, n6n pro llbertate,
non pro llberis ; de^nulla re dimicant nisi dS victoria." Hac oril- 6
tiSne animos militum excitaVit, nee hostes eorum impetum sua-
tingre poterant.
«) ^'7^' ^®'*** persico I in which the Greeks were repelling a Pereian invasion
- flrallout this, nbtice, is not GaUbs. 2. dlnilcante» i present participle, agree-
ing wiOi gcUlos. l^ate " fighting," .n6t "while flghtlng." 3. hano. . . .habuit i
TJ^^iu'"^^!^ ^**'" " '''"°^'" '••"<»"'• ""°'" *• «"■! from deus (see
Part IH., secUo^^). 6. liberls i from liberi.
iIS'...^.: S. The NemQan Lion. ' - __ -;^. :^. .!___:
(The JFirtt of the Twelve Labors of Heteules.y. »
In valle Jffemeae leS ingSns vlv5bat, etpecora hominSpque cotldiS
iterncifib^ --_j:w!ysfelieu8y-r6x Tirynthisriferoutem ad IS^ advoT
cavit, elq^e dixit : «' JubeS tS huno leonem quam celerrimS inter*
V^'-.-,':'
.>- ■'■'
/••■ t
116
"PRIMARY latin" BOOK.
/
ficere." S^tim proficiscitur Jlercules. Clava sagittlsque frtistrS,
iisus, tandem impetu facto manibus interfecit. Turn ad Euty-
sthe.um reversus'est, mortuum leonera umerls impositum ferens.'
N.— 1. vivebat, Interflolebat t render the imperfect here by "used to." 5.
nsnis i perfect participle of utor ;. translate, "when he had used." 6. uinerls
imposltoint umeria is dative; literally, "placed-on with-reference-to-the-shoul-;
ders"; translate simply, "on his shoulders," omitting "placed."
4. The Happiest Man.
iia.
V
Olim Croesus SoloneAi, virum sapientissimum, percontatus est :
«t Quern jildicas omaitjip hominum beatissimum V\ Solon respondit ;
"Meo quidem judiciS, beatissimus fuit Tellus Atheniensis. Nam
florente civitate filios habuerat, bonos viros honestosque, eosque
omnes superstites ; idemque vltae finem habuit pra^larissimum ;
nam'in pugnfi, pro patria fortissimo ptignans, repulsis nostibus, in-
terfectus est ; turn Athenienses eum publice sepeliverunt^^t magno
y in honore semper habebant. " '
N.— 1. Croesus t king of Lydia in Asia Minor, and proverbial for his great riches.
1. Solonem t Solon was one of the " seven wis9 men 'i of Greece, who in his exten-
sive travels once came to Croesus' court. 3. quidem i best rendered by emphasid on
the wdrd "my." 4. florente civitate : abl. absolute; "while his country was
prosperous." ' ,4. eosque « English idiom would omit "those " ; eos refers to the
^ same persons as yi2tog and viros. 5, Idem i render, "he also"; literally, " he the
same man." 8. habebant t " held." ^
' * ■ • • »
6. The Death of Epaminondait
Epamlnondas non solum inter Thebanos, sed etiam inter omn§8
/ , Graecos ejus tempoTis praeclarissimus fuit, et fortiter pro patria
•^^ . animam deppsuit. Nam cufti oppidum Mantineam oppflgnaret,
hostes in eum impetu facto graviter vulneraverunt. Ppstea cuni
in castra reportatus esset, et moribundum se esse sensiss^t, rog^vit 5
■ . num sciltum salvum esset. Amid cum salvum esse respondissent,
ad seafferri jussit. Tum rogftvit num victi essent hostes. Accepto
response superatos esse pmnes et in fugam con jectos, "Jam satis
' est,*' inquit, "invictus enim:morior." Turn extrahl telum S vul-
nere jussit atque statim mortuus @st. m ^ 10
. -i - - - • • ■ ,
'' - ' N.— 2. te^porlst "age" or "period"; it was in 362 B.O.' that he ffell. S:
Mantineam t" in apposition with oppidtnn : English idiom is "the town ,q/' Man-
tinea." <}. Amlel i Bubjrot of rcsponfUssent ; translate after cum. 6. esse,
affe Jgi * widarrtaad td, that ia, leutum. 8. ontmi is n a vor thp'flwt wokL in
ita clMlie, tt ia the English " for.'
PART II.— *PREPARATORY READING.
m
6. 086881*8 Oallio Wan.
Jalius Caesar cum Lucio Bibulo consul factus est. ProximS
anno dScreta est ei Gallia cum legionibus decern. Is piimum vicit
Helvetios, deindeperbellagravissima QsqueadOceiinum processit.
Domuit amiis novem omnem Galliam, quae inter Alpes, flflmen-
Rhodamim, Rhenum et Oceanum est. Britannis mox bellum S
intulit, qui ante eum ne nomen quideln Romanorum cognoverant ;
et eos quoque, obsidibus acceptis, stlpendiarios fecit. Atque Ger-
manos trans Rhenum aggressus multis proelils vicit.
N.— 2. deoreta est i the governors of the Roman provinces were appointed by .
the Senate; the usual expression for this is provincia decretaest. 3. per» "by."
4. annis novem t 68 to 50 B.C. 6. est t "lies." 6. ne qnldemt note tha
position.
7. The Rival Painters. ;*
Zeuxis et Parrhasius pictores fuerunt nobilissimi. Hi quondam
inter se de arte contendebant. Zeuxis uvas pinxit ita callidS ut
aves ad tabulam advolarent, uvas comedere cupientes. Turn Par-
rhasius linteum pinxit. Hoc cum Zeuxis vidisset, existimans
verum esse linteum, quo tabula occultaretur, dixit : ** Remove 6
linteum, et ostende picturam." Mox cognito errore, victoriam
dedit Parrhasio, dixitque : " Victus sum ; nam ego aves fefelli, td
autem ipsum Zeuxim. " ^
'N.— 2. Inter se i "with one another." 2. avast English idiom would add
"some." 5. esse, occultaretur i in Zeuxis' own thoughts these would bee«« and
occultatur. 7. tu — Zeuxlm : understand /^6Ki«rt.
8. Not at Home.
' Scipio Nasica olim ad poetam Ennium venit. Sed cum eum ab
6stio quaesivisset, ancilla dixit eum donii non esse. Sensit autem
Scipio illam domini jiissu dixisse et ilium intus esse. Paucis post
diebus ad Nasicam venit Ennius et eum a janup, quaeslvit. Excla-
mat ipse Nasica se doml non esse. Tum Ennius, ♦' Quid ?" inquit,
"ego non cognosco vocem tuam?" Responditj autem NSsica :.
•'Homo es impudgns. Ego, cum te quaerereAi, ancillae tuae
crgdidi te domi non esse; t^ mihi non credis ipsi?"
N.— 1. eum.... quaes! vlsaett "asked fof him at the door"; so In line 4.
8. panels post dlebnsi literally, "afterwards (or later) by a few days." 7,
^^a<b i crM6~govern» the dative instead of the aocuaatiTe. ?. Ipsl: dati^^
emphasizing miJii.
r
/
1X8
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
»r, ■ ■
r
1 1
\
9. How Torquatus Beoeiyed his Name.
Galll conti^ Romanos ptignabant. Interim Gallus quidam,
torque decoratu8, qui et viribus et magnitadine ceteros praestkbat,
processit et voce magna fortissimum Romanorum ad pugnam pro-
vocavit. Nemo audebat prodlre, propter ejus magnitadinem.
Deinde Gallus irridere coepit Romanos. Turn indlgnatus Titus 5
: Manlius, nobilissimus juvenis, processit et contra Galium constitit.
: Diuet acriter, utroque exercitu inspectante, pugnaverunt. Tan-
dem Manlius Galium occidit, torquemque detraxit eamque in col-
^ lum suura imposuit. Itaque ipse posterique ejus Torquati sunt
appellati. 10
N.-l. Oalll t in the fourth century B.C., hordes of Gauls invaded Italy, burned
Rome, and only after years of fighting were driven back to the northern part of Italy
where they settled. 2. viribus t see Part III., section 9; abl. of specification^
defining "in what respect." 6. nobillssimns » referrihg to birth. 7. utroque t
from uterque; render freely by " both " ; abl. absolute.
' 10. Varus.
Quintilius Varus, dux Romanus, ab Arminio in Gfermania proe-
lio yictus est. Qui cum vidisset jam nQllam esse spem salutis,
gladio destricto, sese pccidit. Caput ejus postea a principe Qerma-
horum ad Augustum Romam missum est. Ea clades tanto dolore
Augustum aflPBcit, ut multos postea menses cotidie exclamaret :
'•Redde mihi, Vare, measlegiongs." ^
N.— 1. Arminio I the Latin form ot Hermann. It was Arminius who pre-
vented the Romans from adding Germany to their empire. 2. Qui j see note on
1, 5. 4. Bomam 1 with the names of cities and towns mption towards is expressed
by the accusative m^ttt a prepo«ttton.
i- . : ■
11. Union is Strength.
Agricola senex cum mortem sibi appropinquare "sentlret, flliSs
convocavit (quos interdum inter se discordare ^ie bat), et fascem
virgarum afferri jussit. Quibus allatis, flliSs hortabatur ut hunc
fascem frangerent. Quod cum facere non possent, distribuit sin-
gulls singulas virgas ; eisque celeriter fractis, docuit fllios quam
firma ygs esset concordia, quamque imbgcillis discordia.
N.-l. sibi « with appropinquare. English would omit the pronoun. 2. inter
•e I see note on 7. 2. 3. QuibuB and 4. Quod t see note on 1, 5. 3. ut . after
verbs of urgmg, asking, etc., Latin uses ut and the subjunctive where Engli* uses
the infinitive with "to." 4. singulis singulas t "one rod to each "; literally.
to single (sons) ijinglo rod H ." fi. qnnmi "h o w"} foUo w «l-fay-the rol^ mic
/
of indirect question.
y
V
^
PART II.— PREPARATORY READING.
12. Alexander's War^hone.
119
Alexander rex equum nomine Bticephalum habSbat. Hic equut,
ubi omatus erat armatusque ad proelium, nSminein se cSnscendere,
nisi regem, passus est. Bello Indico Alexander improvise in hos-
tium multitudinem incidit. Conjectisque undiqu^in regent tells,
equus vulneribus multls in cervice atque in latere perfossus est.
Moribundus tamen § mediis hostibus regem citissime rettulit;
atque cum eum exfra tela extulisset, statim concidit. Turn r8x
Alexander, parts, victoria, opp\dum in elsdem locis condidft, idque
Bticephalam appellavit. — ^^^^"^ -— --4-— ___^ — ^__^;._ „,^__
N.— 2. ad I " for." 6. Morlbnndns « add in the English " although." 6. e
mediis liostibng < "out Jf the midst of the enemy." To express " the middle of,"
Latin uses an adjective, medius, in agreement; compare our "mid-stream," "mid-
ocean." 8. parta: from ^rto. 8. loots t "spot."
•
13. ilhe Legend of Corviniis.
Copiae Gkdlorum magnae agrum Romanum insederant, c5nsul§s-
que Romani aciem instruebant. Dux interea Gallofum, vir ingenti
proceritate, venire jussit et congredi, si quis pugnare secum ex
omni Romano exercitu auderet. Turn' Marcus Valerius adulS-
scens, tribunus militum, se obtulit. Sed cum processisset armatus, 5
corvus repente advolat et supra, galeam insistit. Mox commisso
proelio, corvus in Gall! 6s atque oculos pugnaxe coepit ; manum
unguibus laniabat, atque revolabat in galeam triblim. Sic Valerius,
sua virtute nixus et opera corvi adj^tus, ducem hostium ferocissi-
mum vicit interf ecitque. Ita corvus non golum victoriam ei, sed 10
etiam nomen, dedit. Nam postea Corvinus est dictus.
N.— 1. Gallomm t see note on 9, 1. 2. Ingenti proceritate > abl. of '
characteristic; translate hy "of." 3. si qais't literally "if any one he bade
(him)," etc.; translate "bade any one who to come." 7. pngrnare in t "to
attack." 8. laniabat, revolabat t render the imperfect by "would."
14. The Battle of Thermopylae.
Cum XerxSs bellum Graeciae inferret, Graeci angustias, nomine
Thermopylfis, occupSre constituerunt. Itaque octo millia riilitura
ad ilium locum missa sunt. His copiis Leonidam, rggem Lacedae-
moniorum praefecerunt. Is trecentqs Lacedaemgnios contrS, Per- ^
-gas edflxiV^-euffl^^^teris^ oopiia Qraeoormii «t ^hermopylifr^
sarum, adventuni exspectavit. Xerxes autem cum comperisset
u*
120
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
--i::-
quantae cdpiae angusti3B defendei^nt, prlmo risit ; turn legatum ad
eos misit, et jusait arma ponere. Sed is redilt Infecta re. N^
cum Lacedaemoniis dixisset : " Sagittae nostras lucem soils obsciit
rftbunt," re8f)oil(ierunt illi : "Itaque in umbra dimicabimus." 10/
Quattuor dies Xerxes cum multls suis millibus hominum exspec-
tavit ; quints die, cum Leonidas copias non abduxisset, proelii^m
commisit. Sed magnus numerus Persarum aut vubleratus aut
interfectus est ; reliqui fugerunt. Turn decern mi^i^^ electprum
militutn a rege in angustias missa sunt. Sed etiam hi cesser unt. 15^
Cum rex jam de victoria desperaiet, proditor inventus est. Eghi-
altes enim, peciinia corruptus, Persas certiores fecit viam"^8Q
• qua transire possent, et a tergo impetum in Graecos f^e^se.
Cum Leonidas haec audivisset, magnam partem exe^cit^s refin^it:
Ipse cum exiguls copiis 'mansit. Acceperat enim hoc oraculum..: 20
" Aut delebitur Sparta, aut rex interficiStur." Trccenti igitur illi
Lacedaemonii et sdptingenti Thespienses Persarum impetum sus-
tinuerunt, et cum diti fortissimo ptignavjssent, multosque hostes
interfecissent, omnes ceciderunt. IV v * ;
N.— 1. bellamt the last attempt of Persia to conquer GflBW!jB,«in 480 B.C5(,; ^,; /i
qaantae i "what small" ; literally, "of what size," ^4 generally*, Irom the con-
text, meaning "how great." 10. itaque : "in that case." 17. esse i "that there
was."
'15. Pyrrhos and the Bomans. ' «
Bello indicto, TarentinI Pyrrhum, Epiri tegem, contra Rorhapos..
auxilium poposcerunt. Is mox- ad Italian! venit, tumq\e primum
Komani cum transmarine hoste dimicaverunt. PubliusN^alerius
Laevinus consul, qui contra eum missus est, cum exploratSres
Pyrrhl cepisset, jusait eos per castra duel. Cum omnem exercitum 5
vidissent, eos dimisit ut renuntiarent Pyrrho quae a Romanis
agerentur. Commissa mox pugna, Pyrrhus elephantorum auxilio
vicit, qui incogniti Romanis erant. Sed nox proelio finem dedit ;
Laevinus per noctem fugit, Pyrrhus Komanos mille octingentos
cepit et occisos sepeliyit. Hos cum adverso vulnere et truci vultu 10
etiam mortuos jace're vidisset, sustulit ad caelum manus et dixit :
"Totius orbis dominus esse potui, si tales nmites habuissem."- , _ -
N,— 1. Bello I an unsuccessful attempt from 282-27^ B.C., to prevent Rome
from becoming mistress of Southern Italy. 2. poposoorunt i takSs two accusa-
tives, of the person asked and the thjjng asked for. 10. adverso vnlnOT^,!^
" with thyir wounds In front." 11. mortuos i "in death.'* 12. esse potul, si
liablilMeni I " I might have been, if I had hod."
PART II. — i»REPARATORY «Leaping.
121
. , 16. The Story of Ctqbsus. <■•
Croesus, rSx Lydorum, magna» sibi dlvitias paraverat. Itaque -
fama divitiaxum ejus non solum Asiam sed eti^ Europam perva-
serat, multique venerunt ut regem'videreiit. filter eos fuit Solon
Atheniensis, qui inter, septem sapientes numerabatur. Turn ex eo
Croesus quaesivit nonne ipse omnium hominiim felicissimus esset. 5
Solon autem respondit : "Nemo ante mortem beatus est jtidican-'
dus." , Hoc ^ responsum regi turn displicuit ; sed posted sensit
quam verum eisset.
Illis enim temporibus Cyrus Medorunv et PersSrum rSgnum
^ obtinebat, et gentes propinquae victoriis ejus terreb'alitup. UtlO
hunc impedlret et coerceret, Croesus bellum contra eum pfiravit.
' Eodem tempore oraculum Delphicum per legatos d§ exitil ^elli
- interrogavit: Respondit deus : "Croesus transitu flumihis quod
interest inter Persas*et Lydos, magnum regnum delebit."- ,
Croesus, cum h3c responsum comperlsset, vietoriam c^rtliml^
sperabat, et copiis suls in Cyri rSgnum invasit. Is autem popiis >
magnigfasoactis Lydos superavit et Croesum ipsum cepit. '
Tum Croesus a'Cyro damnatus est ut igni crettiaretur. <Pum •
magna copia ilignorum coacervata esset, et Croesus, in rogum ^.
impositus, jam mortem exspeotaret, magna voce clamavit : "'O'20
Solon, Solon, Solon !" Cyrus autem, cum hoc audivisset, quaesivit
quid illis verbis significare^t. Tum Croesus narraVit quid Solon ' ■
Atheniensis de forttirta- humana docuisset. His verbis Cyrus itsi \
commotus est ut Croesum liberaret et amicum appellaret.
N.— 1. Croesus : see note jon 4, 1. 5. Ipse t that is, Crosus. 6. est Jiidl-
oandust "should be considered." 7. taint "at the time." 12. oraoolam.'
Delplilciini » at Delphi in Greece was the famous temple of Apollo, who through
his pr^stess was believed to foretell the future to those who came to consult the .-c
ora^. The answers were often, as' on this occasion, ambiguous. l8. ut ore>
lareturt "to be burned."
...at-.
wo acGjisa-,
17. The Story of Begolns.
^
Hoc proelio superati, Carthaginienses auxiliuni a Lacedaemoniis
petierunt. Xanthippus S. Lacedaemoniis missus est, et RomH-
norum dux Regulus victus est magna cum caede. Nam vix duo
millia ex omnI Romano exercitti refiigerunt ; quingenti cum im-
peratere Regttlo eaptt Mtttit ; t rtgT n ta m flKa^^?ccisa snnt^ et-Regnl
ipse in catenas conjectus est. Sed post quinque annos CarthSgini-
'^
: ill
J
122
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
m^ .^
enses, mS.gnIs calamitatibu^acceptis, a'Regulo petierunt ut Romam
proficisceretur, et. pacem a Eqmanis iitipetraret. Atque jureju- •
rando eum obstrinxerunfc, riisi reddit; essent Carthaginiensibus '
. captlvl nobiles quldam, sese ipsum Carthaginem rediturum. lUe 10
Bomam cum vemsset, senatuin hortatus est ne pacem cum Poenis
facerent. Dixit enim illos, tot vasibu» fractos, nullanTjgpem
habere ; neque debere tot millia capt^vorum reddi propter unum
se ' et paucos qui ex Romanis capti essent. Itaque Jegatl-C^tha-
ginienses dimissi sunt inf ecta pace. Regulum a^ci I^omae tenere 15
conati sunt. Sed ille uxorem a complexu i^emovit, dixitque se illo ,
die, quoin potestatem-Aftorum venisset, I^omanum esse desiisse ;
neque in ea urbe mansurura in qua, poStquaitt Afris serviisset,
dignitatem honesti civis habere hon posset. flegreiS'sus igitur ad
Africam, omnibus supplicils necatua est. Neque vero ign6rabat20
se ad crudeli&simum hostem et ad exquisita supplicia profioisci;
sed jusjurandum conservandum esse putabat.
' N.— I. proelio i this was in 255 B.C., in the first war between Rome and Car-
thage. 7. petierunt t "asked Regulus to proceed to Rome." 8. jure^nrandos
from jusjurandum (see Part III., section 9). 9. redditi essent t " should be (or
were) restored ;" literally, "should have been restored." Notice that rediturum, in
line 10, is from a different verb.' 11. hortatus est ne t "urged the senate jiot
to," etc. 14. ex Bomanls t see note on 1, 2 ; in translation connect it with "
pauoos, not with qui. 15, Bomae t the so-called locative case ; "at Rome." 17.
quot "when"; literally, "on which." 20. omnibus i "all manner of." 22.
oons^rTandnm esse i see note on 16. 6.
18. Roman Discipline. . ;
Discipllna mllitaris diu et acriter retenta principatum Italiae
Romano populo peperit ; inultas urbes, magnos reges, validissimas
gentes in dicionera redegit ; urbemque Romam, ortam e paryula
Romull casa, totlus terrarum orbis fecit dominam.
N.— 2. populo t dative; render by "for." 8. ortam t "which sprang.".
/ \ 19. Victory and Shipwreck. ." ■' ■
_Mart5us Aemilius Paulus, Servius Fulvius Nobilior consules ad
'Africam profecti sunt cum trecentarum navium class^ Primum
Poenos nSvall certamine superant. Aemilius consul centum et
quattuor naves hostium dSmersit, tnginta cum nautis cepit, quin-
decim millia hostium aut occidit aut cepit, exercitum suum ingenti 5
praeda dKavit.~^El su^b^ta Africa turn esset, nisi tanta" famgs
-..^-.
PART II.T-PRlftKlTORY READINQ. ' 123 •
fuisset ut diatius manSre exercitUs n6n posset. Consules cum
VictricI classe redeuntes circa Sicilian! naufragium passi sunt. Et
tanta tempestSa f uit, ut ex qiiadringentls sexaginta quattuor navi-;
bus, vix octoginta servarl possent ; neque 0115 tempore tanta lO
maritima tempestas audita est. ' RomanI tamen statim ducentas
nav§8 reparaverunt, neque animus infractus f uit.
If .— 1. consoles i in 25fi| B.C. (the year when ReguluB was taken prisoner),
during the First Punic war. 6. snbaota esset, nisi fuisset s "would have
been subdued had there nob been"; compare note on 15, 12.' 8. redeuntes |
present pwticiple of re(f«o, 10. ullo t that is, " any other."
' » ' 20. An Honorable Foe. ""~~"~" ■ '_ \ [y
Cum rex Pyrrhus populo Romano bellum intulisset, atque bis
prospers pugnavisset, tum medicus Pyrrhi ad Caium Fabricium
consulem clam nocte venit, eique est pollicitus, si praemium sibi
dedisset, se in Pyrrhi castra rediturum, et eum veneno necaturum.
Hunc Fabricius vinctum reduci jussit ad Pyrrhum, et monuit 5
regem ut insidias caveret. Tum r.ex,° admiratus eum, dixit : "Fa-
bricius difficilius ab honest^e, quam sol a cursa suo, avert! potest. "
N.— 1. bellum t see note on 15, 1. 4. dedisset » " gave " or " should give" ;
seenQteon 17,9. 5. viiiiDtumt "in chains." 7. dlffioillus t compar. adverb.
21. A Dishonorable Trick.
Post Cannensem pugnam Hannibal ex captivis decent Romam"
ad senatum misit ut permutatio captivorum fieret. Omnes, prius-
tiuata proficiscerentur, jurati sunt se^ in castra Poena redittiros, *
nisi de captivis impetravissent. Cum Romam venissen^ res sena-
tui non placuit. Tum ex decem illls novem statim ad Hanmbalem 5
reverterunt ; unus Ron?ae remanet. Nam pauft postquam egres- *
sus erat'e castris, tedierat, quasi aliquid esset oblltus. Itaque
reditu in castra liberatum se esse religione dixit. ' Haec fraus et
calliditas tam esse turpis existimata est, ut ab omnibus civibus
contemptus sit j atque senatus decrevit ut vinctus ad Hannibalem 10
reduceretur. r --a
WV-l- Cannensem pugrnam : in 216 B.C., the third year of Hannibal's inva-
sion of Italy, he inflicted on the Romans atCannse the most crushing defeat they ever
suffered. It was his last important success, however. 1. Romam t see note on •
10, 4. 4. Impetravissent i see note on 20, 4. 4. rest "the proposal." 6.
^<>'»%g UigJQte on JJ, 16 . . 9 . ,extattniat ft o s ti thn w ingiilar v e rb is oftou
used in Latin with two subjects which form one notion.
"-■^X
"•■•,E"
* .
124
^^_
•■"■i*^
m-
.—■ >
\*.
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
22. Haimibal's First Campaigns in Italy.
Bum haec geruntur, ntintius victoriae ad Cannas Carthaginem J
vSnerat M3>go I^amilcaris filius. Is res gestas in Italia a fratte
Hannibale exponit ; cum*8ex imperatoribus, quorum quattuor con-
sules, duo dictator ac magister equitum fuerint, eum conflixisse ;
occldii^se supra ducenta milliarhostium, supra quinquaginta miUia 5
cSpisse. Ex quattuor consulibus duos occidisse ; ex duobus reli- ,
quis saucium esse'alterum, alterum totS amisso exercitti vix cum
quinquaginta hominibus efFugisse. Magistrum equitum* filsum '
fugSitumque esse ; cdictatorem, quia se in aciem numquam commi-
serit, unicum haberi imperatorem. Bruttios Apulosque et partem 10
Samnitium ac Lucanorum defecisse ad Poenos ; Capuam, quod
caput non Campaniae modo sed post Cannensem pugnam Xtaliae
sit, Hannibal! se trSdidisse.
N. — 1. nnntlnst predicate nom., agreeing with Jlfojjo ; literally, "as messent^^er
or announcer" ; trahslale freely, "had coino with news." 1. Cannas: see note
on 2 1, 1. 2. res gfestas i before Canneo had come the victories at the Ticinus,
•Trebia and Lake Trosimenus. 5. oootdlsse t notice the difference in the quantity
of bccidiitse, line 6. 7. amisso i abl. absolute; render freely "after the loss."
10. haberi': "was considered." 10. IJruttios, etc. : these tribes comprised prac-
tically all southern Italy. 11. quod i, the relative, taking its gender from caput. .
23. Hannibal Defeated at ITola.
Eadem aestSte Marcellus, qui Nolam praesidio obtin€bat, crSbrSs
excursiones in agrum Samnitium f gcit, omniaque f erro atque Igni
vastavit. Itaque extemplo legatl ad Hannibalem missi sunt a
Samnltibus. Hannibal partem copiarum in agrum Nolan um misit.
Marcellus, ubi hoc animadvertit, extemplo in aciem copias Sdilxit ; 6
neque Hannibal certamen detrectavit. Mille fere passuum inter
urbem erant castraque*; eo spatio concurrerunt. Proelium ditlj-
erat anceps ; suntma vl et duces hortabantur et milites pagiiab«riL
, Tandem terga Poeni dederunt atque in castra oompulsl sunt. Hos-
tiuin quinque mlllia caesa eo die, vivl capti sescenti et sIgnalO
mllitaria OndSvIginti et duo elephantl ; Rdmanorum vix mllle
inter f ec^. * •
W,— 1. a6Mta€<ftt this Wft» in 216 B.C., the yeiir after Qannm, when the war
was beginning to turn in favor of the Romans. 6. Mllle passuum t for the more
usual mUl* pagatu. «. et. . . .et i " both. ■ . .>nd" ; but It la often more oonveniant,
y\
aa here, to omit " both " in translating,
with inUr/toti, line lit.
1
4.
10. oaesa, oaptlt fupply «tmt, as also
PART II.— PREPARATORY READING.
126
lint, M also
24. Babylon Taken by Cynu. .«^
" Erat autem Babylon urbs opulentissima et potentissima, ad
Euphratem flumen sita. Ante miiros proelio commisso, Cyrus/
BabylSnios primo impeta fugavifc. Sed qum urbem obsidere
coepisset, propter copiam ciborum quam incolae providerant et
propter ingentes muros, magna erat difficultaa. Itaque Cyrus 5
dolum adhibult. Fossam enim ab eo loco ubi flumen ad urbem
accedebat ad earn partem dflxit ubi flflmen ex urbe veniSbat. Id
fecit nocta ne Babylonii sentirent. Itaque cum fossa completa
esset, aqua in flumine ipsd deerat, et per alveum vacuum militibus —
Cyrl via in urbem parata est. Ita mllites in urbem nocte ingressi 10
sunt, et mtlros portasque occupaverunt. Tanta autem urbs erat,
ut, cum "jam partes miiris propinquae a Cyri militibus expOgnatae
essential qui in media urbe habitabant de ilia re nuntium nondum
acQ^issent. Cum urbem expflgnavisset Cyrus,, Jadaeos qui ft '
regibus Babyloniorum capti et abducti erant, in patriam remisit. is
N.— 1. antem j " now." 1. ad : "on." 8. ne sentirent t " that they might
not," etc.; subjunctive of purpose. 8. completa: does not mean "completed,"
which would be "confecta." 9. deerat i from desum. 9. milltlbas t dative;
render by " for." 13. media urbe « see note on 12, 6.
25. Soipio's Answer.
"^Marcus Naevius, tribilnus plsbis, accOsSvit Scipionem ad popu-
lum ; dixitque eum accepisse a rege Antiocho pecOniam ut condi-
ciOnibus moUibus pax cum eo fieret. Tum Scipio "Memorifi," '
inquit, ♦♦QdiritSs, repet5 diem esse hodiemum, quo Hannibalem
Poeuum magno proelio in Africa vIcL, pacemque et victoriam v6bls 5
peperi praeclaram. Non igitur debgmus in deos ingrati esse.
Rellcto igitur nebulSne h6o, Ire hino debemus ad deos gratulan-
dds." Id cum dixisset avertit, et Ire ad Capitolium coepit. Tum
contio ani versa, quae ad sententiam d6 Sclpione ferendam con-
venerat, rellctS tribano, Scipionem in Capitolium comitata est ; lO
atcjue inde ad aedfis ejus cum laetitia et gratulatiSne pi^Ssecflta est.
N.— 1, Scipionem i who ended the Second Punic war by defeating Hannibal at
Zama, in Africa, 202 B.C. 2. Antiocho i kinjf of Syria, who, after two years' wi%~^~
was conquered by the Romans In 190 B.C., and compelled to sue for peace. Scipio
was one of the oominissloners sent to fix the terms of peace. This accusation was 4
brouRht by his political enemies at Rome five years later. 4. diem, etc.: "that
rttrertay-rtttBWTy,"matTn8lo:aay7^7. nebulone^
t- «d gratulandos 1 the gerundive construction, expressing |id^pose : so list 9,
v; 25i-.-» ' • .' ' - .^
126
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
■?'
'\'
^T 86. The Defeat and Death of Fompey.
PompSius, cum equitatura suum pulsum vidisset, aliis quoque
diffisus, acie excessit, protinusque s& in castra contulit. Gastrs &*
cohortibus, quae ibi praesidio erant relictae, industriS d€fendSban-
tur. Neque did multitudinem telorum sustinere potuerunt, sed
c5nfecti vulneribus, in altissimos montes, qui ad castra pertinS- 5
bant, conftigerunt. Pompeius equum nactus decumana portS> bS ^
ex castrls Sjecit, protinusque equo citato Larissam contendit.
Neque ibi constitit, sed nocturno itinere ad mare pervSnit, n3,yem-
que friimentfixiam conscendit. — ^~~^ — " ^^?^~ - — ' ^-
Caesar omnibus rebus rellctis persequi PompSium constituit, 10
n§ rursus cdpi§,s comparS-re alias et bellum renovlLre posset. Pom-
peius biduum tempestate retentus, tandem in Aegyptum pervSnit.
Ibi ad regem Ptolemaeu^m misit ut AlexandriS, reciperStur atque
in calamitate tegergtur ; sed amlci regis, timore adducti, ils qui
erant S, Pomp€io mi^I palam llberSiiter respondSrunt, eumque ad 15
rSgem venire jussSrunt ; ipsi clam Achillam, singulfirl hominem
audSiCiS,, et Lilcium Septimium, tribdnum mllitum, ad interfici-
endum PompSium mls@runt. Ab his llberaliter appell&tus, nfiri-
culam parvulam conscendit cum paucis suls : ibi ab Achillft et
Septimid interficitur. 20
N.— 1. Pompeius t Osasar and Pompey were the two foremost men of their
day in Rdine. Each aimed at supreme power in the staWi and mutual Jealousy *
led to civil war in 49 B.C. The following year Pompey was defeated at Pharsalia^ in
. northern Greece. 1. allls i " the others," tha^ is, the infantry. 2. aole exoesslt i
"left the battle-fleld." 3. praesldtot "oh guard"; literally, "for a gruard," dative
case. 7. Littrissain f see note on 10, 4. 13. Ptolemaenm t it was largely
through Pom{iey's influence that Ptolemy's father, seven years before, had been
restored to the throne of Egypt, after, a rebellion. Pompey, therefore, confidently
appealed to the son for aid. IS. Alexandria i "in Alexandria." 17. aadaola i
see note on 13, 2. 17. ad interflflenduui t see note on 25,7.
«7. A Skirmiih for a HiU. '^
Inter oppidum Ilerdam et proximum collem, ubi castra Afrftnius
habSbat, tumulus erat. Hunc si super&viss^t Caesar, ab oppid5
•t oommeftta omnI se interolflsarum hostSs odnfldebat. Hde^
sp6r&ns legi^nSs trSs ex castrls Sddcit, et flnam Tegidnem prSour-
rere atque eum tumulum occupilre jubet. AirS,nI c6hort6s bre*
v iOr e tt in e r e ad o und o m oc c upa ndtmr Itwrntn nntttmtttrr
oommiitunt, et quod pi4||| in tumulum hostSs vSnerant, nostrl
*
PART II. — PREPARATORY READING.
m
repelluntur atque terga vertere sgque ad signa legionum recipere
coguntiKr. Caesar, cohortatua suos, legionem nonam subsidiS
ducit ; hostem supprimit seque ad oppidum Ilerdam recipere et 10
sub mfiro conaistere cogit.
N.— 1. Ilerdam i in Spain, wiiere Ctesar in 49 BO. defeated Pompey's lieuten-
ant, Afranius, before following Pompey himself to Qreece. 2. si superavlaset t
"if he could gain"; literally, "if he should have gained." See note on 17, 9.
3. Hoc sperans t " with this hope (or idea)." 6. Afranl t proper names in -ttM
have the genitive -ii contracted to -t. 7. quod i the conjunction. 9, anbsidio t
"to their support"; literally, "for a support"; compare 2 6, 8. '
28. How Horatius Kept the Bridge.
Tarquinius, ab Romania exSctus, ad Lartem Porsenam, Cltfel-
num regem, perfflgerart, Srftbatque nS aS in exsilio vivere paterStur.
Porsena igitur Romam magno cum exercitfl vgnit. Cum hoatSs
adessent, omnSs in urbem ex agria dSmigrSvSrunt ; urbem ipaam
praeaidiis flrmavSrunt. Pona Subliciua iter paene hostibua dedit ; 6
sed Onus vir, Horatiua Coclea, qui forte in atatione pontia poaitus
erat, cum Janiculum repentlnS impeta captum esae vidiaaet,
admonuit ut pontem ferro atque Ignl interriimperent. Promlait
8g, quantum vir tintls posset, hoatSa austentOrum eaae. Vadit inde
ad priraum aditum pontig^ duos tamen ex RSmanls pudor cum e6 10
tenuit, Spurium Lartium Sc Titum Herminium. Cum hia hoatSa
parumper auatinuit. Deinde eoa quoque ipaSs, exigua parte
pontia rellcta, ill tatum cSdere coSgit. CircumferSna inde oculfla
* ad procerea Etrascorum, nunc ainguloa prSvocabat, nunc omn6a
increpabat. Aliquamdia cunctati aunt; pudor deinde commovitW
aciem, ^et clamore aublatS undique in eum tela conjiciunt. Cum
nihilominua obstinatua ille pontem obtinSret, jam impeta factO
4 virum dfitrfldere cSnabantur cum fragor rupti pontia clamorque
Romanorum pavSre aubito impetum auatinuit. Tum Horatiua^
" Tiberlne pater, " inquit, * * tS precor ut haec arma et hunc mllitem 90
propitiS flfimine accipiaa." Inde annatua in Tiberim dSailuit,
. multls(iue auperinc5dentibu8 tella, incolumia ad auSa tranavit.
^^*~^' Torqnlnlu» « the last king of Rome, banished in 510 B.C., because .of
\ 1» tyranny and the cruel misdeeds of hii» fanjily. 2. lie puteretur i "not to
suffer." 6. forte i " as It happened." 8. admonuit ut i " advised them to," eta ^
0. qnantnmi "so far as." 12. exlffuai "only (or but) a small." 14. provo-
<^«l>ft*ti ll i!rgpalmt t B Boxiot i um-Xa^^--18. oonabaiitui'i^lHMiHliHe the Vttm
carefully. 20. pater i the Romans believed that each river had its god or guardlMI
^irit, 22. miatl*qia»,.«to. : Umnslata the abl. abw>lute by " although."
128
-. PRIMA.RY LATIN BOOK.
29. An Extraordinary .Diiaiter.
-AJr-
w^"*»" »». - 1
Cum eae res agerentur, nova clS<des ntlnti§,ta est, Lacium Postu-
* mium in Gallia ipsum atque exercitum dSlgtos esse. Silva brat
vasta, qua exercitum' traducttirus erat. Ejus silvae arbores circ§i'
viam Galli ita inclderunt ut immotae star^nt, momento levi^i-
. piiisae conciderent. Legioijes duas RomanS^s habebat Postumius i
et quindecim mlllia sociorum. Galll dram silvae circum^sedebaiit ; '
attjue ubi intra vit agmen saltum, turn extremSs arborum suc<ji-
sarum impellunt. Hae, alia in aliam incidentes, tanta strSge arma",
virSs, equd^Qbruerunt, ut vix decern homines pffugerent. Nam '
exanimati plerique sunt arborum truncis ramlsque ; et ceteros, 10 '
inopinato malo treprdos, Gdlll interfecerunt ; pauci qui pontem,
fluminis petebant, intercltisi captlque sunt. Ibi Postumius omnl^
vl, ne caper§tur, dimicans occubuit.
*•■■*.
-"^ _ -N.— 2. (Pallia I the northern part of Italy, having been settled by Gauls (sfee
" - note on 9, l),,wa8 <herefore called Gallia Cisalpima ("Gaul on this side o( the
.1" ttAliii"). Their descendants Joined Hannibal when he invaded Italy, and the incfdent
;l(>4 her0"ftported occurred in 215 B.C., a^ew months i^fter the defeat at Cannae. 3. qua,
, ^V tf^lMlnotaras erat t " through which he was intending to lead." 4. linmotae i,
vw^ifhile untouched." 4. Impulsae i " but if pushed." 7. Bucolsaruni i '"which
"§ hil been cut" 8. alia in allamr "one against another"; in apposition with
.' ''i Xoe. 11. trepldoB % " who were-pahic-stribken. 12. flnmluls i " over the river."
''!.. 12. «e oaperetur t " to avoid capture.
; ^;v.
80.
void cwture.
d tUe Stytbimup.
;.,..
Darius Persarum rex bellum Scythls'intUlitjfet cum omnibus
cSpils in Europam profectus est. Scythae autehi proelium com-
mittere nolebant,. Tandem Darius, misso l6gat6 ad Scytharum
regem, dixit debSre eum aut pilgnare aut tterram et aquam feren-
tem in colloquium venire. Ad haec Scythariim r6x respondit, 5
nSUe fee pilgnare, quod oppida non habSret quae dSfenderet;
pro autem terra et'aciua, quas Darius postulavisset, dona alia
missQrum. Posters diS Scythae ICgatum mls6runt qui dona ferS-
bat, avem et milrem et ranam et quinque sagittas. Dixitque
l^gatus Persas, si sapientCs essent, posse cognSscere, quid haecio
dona significarent. DSxIus quidem putabat Scythas sijse et terram
et aquam tradere ; quod mOs in terra viverot, rftna in aqua, avis
PART II. — PREPARATORY READING.
120
)ver the river.'*
sScum habebat Darius, putabat dona haec significare ; hisi avSslfi
facti Persae evolarent, aufc in mares conversi terram subirent, aut
ranarum modo in palades insilirent, sagittas Scytharum non effu- ^'
gere posse.
N.— I. Darius t becan»^ king of Persia eight years after the death 4|tf Cyrus the
Great. The unsuccessful invasion of Scjthia (now southern Russia) about 608 B.C.,
was a prelude to the invasion of Greece, which was repelled at Marathon, 490 B.O.'
4. terram et aqnani i these the Persians used tq demand as a token of submis-
sion. 6. oppida....defenderott "hehadno towns to defend." 11. qnidem t
" for his part." 13. equo i the Scythians, like the modern Cossacks, were aU expert
.Norsemen. ■_ ;^ '__ : , : ^ ■ ■ ■ ■ .
. 31. Borne Taken by the Gaols.
[Romanl a Brenno, rege Gallorum, ad flumen AUiam superfttf '
erant, et maxima pars exercifcfls Veios fugerat.]
- Gain haud multo ante solis occasum ad urbem Romam per-
veniunt. Equites praegressl nop portas clausas esse, non stati-
onem pVo portis excubare, non armStds esse in mtiro rettul§runt. ft
Itaque insidias veriti, extra Romain consedorunt, et exploratores
misecjijjt circa moenia. Roraanl interim totam paene urbem lamen-
tis complebant, et cum defendl urbs non posset, tam parvS relicts
mana, ciim conjugibus ac llberis in arcom concessgrunt. Galll,
ingress! postero die urbem, in forum perveniunt. Inde, modicoio
relicts praesidio, dilabuntur ad praedam. RomSni interim ex ' »
arce plSnam hostium urbem cemSbant. Galli, incensa urbe, impe-
tum facere in arcem statuunt. Prllna luce, signo dato, multitado
omnia in foro Instsruitur ; inde, clamore sublato ac testadine facta,
subeunt. Romanl, ad omnes aditus stationibus firmatft, scandere 16
sinunt hostem. Medio ferS cllvo restitCrunt, atque inde ex supe-
jriSre loco, impetti facto, Gallos magna strage fad6runt.
N.— 1. Oalloram I see note on 9, 1. 1. Alllam i the defeat at the Allia, ia
390 B.C., leading' to the capture of Rome, was always re^rd«<l as the blackest day
in Roman history. 4. non portas, etc. : the accusative and infinitive construction
depending on rettuierunt. 6. Instdla* i the real cause was the panic among the
survivor» in Rome. 9. aroem t on the Capitoline hill. 11. ad i "in quest of";
literally, "for." 15. adi "at.'.' 16. Medio olivoi "half way up the WU": «m
note on 12,4 -r— — ^^— — -^-^^c, ■ .■■r--:^ ~-~- — ^^^ ^^
82. The Capitdl Bayed l)y 066M. ,
Interim tkn Rgumo, Oapifcfllium, iit IngeiiU pwrloulo f uitrr^ Kam« ^
que GalB, qui arcem obsidfibant, yest^pium notftyerunt hamS&tti%
m ■
'■• r#
' !r
ii M
i30
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
qua nOniius a VSils perySnerat. Itaque nocte sublOs'trl inermem
Galium, qui tentSret viam, praemlserunt ; inde reli'qui tanto silentio
in summum evaserunt, ut non custodes solum fallereut, sed ne 5
canSs quidem excitarent.„ Ans^resnon fefellerunj;, qui Jflnoni
sacri erant. Namque clamore eorum alarumqud crepittL excitus
est Marcus Mftnlius, vir b^llo ggregius. Is, armis arreptls, Galium
qui jam in sjimmo constiterat, deturbat. Ejus casus, proxjmos
Gallorum stemit j trepidantes alios, qui,- omissis a^rmia, sjixa mHni- 10
bus amplecfcebantur, trucldat Manlius. Jamque alii congregati
tells saxisque proturbant hostSs. Luce oi^ta,. vocatls ad concilium • - "
mllititus,, Manlius prlmum ob virtutem laudatus est-; turn vigilSs
•citS-tl sunt. His omnibus culpam in ttnum vigilem conjicientibus, '
ilium Quintus Sulpicius, tribunus mtlitum, approbantibus cOnctis, is
d§ saxo dejecit. . -^ .
N.— 1. Interim t the Gauls, foiled in their first attempt (see 31), laid siege to
the citadel, while the greater number roamed about the country, pillaging it! 8.
nantias : he had come, from the Romans who had escaped after Allia to Veil, to
concert measures with the Romans in the citadel. 4. qui tentaret t "to make
trial of." 6. evaserunt t " made their way." 6. Junonl t whose temple was on
the Capitoline hill. 8. bellot see note on 9,^2.^10. omtssls armtst freely,
"had dropped their arms and." 14. His oonjloientlbus t " as tfiese lai4."- 16.
approbantibtis cnnotis i '^with the Approval of all."
" 83. A Tonng Roman Oirl. '>
, (Fropi a letter of -Pliny's.) •
TrKttssmius haec tibi scribo. Fundaril nostrl filia minor d§-
fOnota est. Qua puella pihil umquam erat festiyius, nihil amabiliuq
nee longa vita dignius. Nondum annos quattuordecim impl6verat, •
et jam pradeptiam matronalem gravitatemque piaestabat, et tamen
Buavitatein puellarem cum virgi/iali verecundia. Ut ilia patris 5
.TOrvTcI irihaerebat ! Ut nos amico» paternos et araanter et modestS
coihplectSbatur ! , Ut ndtricSs, ut praeceptores diliggbat ! Qua
ilia temperantia, qua , patientia, qilS etiam constantia novissimam '^
valStadinem tulit ! Medicis obsequ6batur, sororem patrem adhor-
tabatur. Dar4vit vigor animi illi flsqfie ad extrSmum, nee autio
spatiS.valStadinisaut meta mortis Infractus est. Itaque plOrimaa
gravissimasque nobis causas rellquit et dSsideril et dolSris. . 6
trlste acerbumtjue fQnus ! Jam dSstinata erat 6gregi5 juvefil, jam
Blectus nflptiarum di6s, jam nos vocatl. H5c gaudium maergre
iuuUluui BBi. NOn powum expnmere verbis quwt'umftSm^^
7W
10
:5
on anim5i5
^ /". / PART II.— PREPARATORY READIXa 131
vulnusacceperim. cum audlvl Fundanium ipsum praecipiente«,
ut quod in veste^, margarlta, gemma^ fuer^t erogatflrus, hoc in t^
et unguenta et Qdores impenderetur. .
' A ^' r'"J' ^^^ T^* *^*' "'^* th^following letter. liv^ from ei A.D. to about 113
Qua, "M-ith what." 10. Uli, "with her" ; lilerally "forher ° 14^
34. An Ezemplaiy Old Age.
' a^W ^??^"' "°"'" oontinetur, h8rf secunda cake™ poscit,-
. ^'"^ ";■"■» Pas'-;umtria,„eo minus aniraumquamcorpuaeter:
cet. Si adsunt «mici, honeBtissiml sermonSs explioantur ; si non
hber legituP. Dainde co„,Idit, et liber rfl«„, aut se^i ZxH
vehioulum a«,end.t, adsflmit «xorem vel aliquem «micorum. Pe" |
achs^septem mfllibus pas,„um, iterum «mbulat mlUe, iter™,
res.d,t, vel se oubioulo ac stas reddit. Scrlbit enim, et „uIZ
. utraque hngua, d<«tiaaime. Ubi W balinel nOntikto ^" («"
autem h,e„,e nona, aesMte octava), in sole, si caret vents^ ambuUt '
nudus Deu,de movetur pita vehementer et dia ; nam hCuo^u'
exerctationis genere pagnat cum senectQte. Lit™ iZ?"!
paulisper oibum differt ; intcHm audit logentem remLt atuM
et duteus. Apppnitu* c6na non-minus nitida quam frtlgl in alenM
poro et antique. Hanc r.gulam SpOrinna c' nstantis' ". C
Inde Ul. post septimum. et septuSgSsin.um annum a^itT ';
ooulorum v,gor integer, inde agile et vividum corpu" Tare^o
vnam u^r«i,ar avidissime ; interim mffle labBribus contemr q^
rtTfflL?'"'^"' ''.«"»P>-«» -' Spflrimu., „a™ i„e q;^,
h<>iie.li„iml, d.v„ld, th,t fe „ >^3;i\ , • """^ "1 «««cUon. l.
vl,orou, e,.„l„ .t fnni;" n. remlMU.. . th^l'^f' "•''•■»«"«•■• ■ " takM
10
u
" ■ nmmlm-M "itunr. *
wiU be the .ub,«,t fr^'d^rf^y "e^r-J^trl';' "''°' T*"^""^ "'^)
J, ue possesses. 17. quorum t "in which."
•4;
.
132
PRtMARY LATIN BOOK.
86. The Helvetian War.
Helvetii proximi. sunt Germanis, qui trans RhSnum incolunt ;
reliquos Gallos virttito praecedunt, quod fere cotidianls proelils
cum Germanis contendunt. Sed undique loci natura continentur :
Qna ex parte est flumen Rhenus altissimus et latissimus ; altera
ex parte mons Jura altissimus ; tertia ex parte flumen Rhodanus
nostram provinciam ab Helvetils dividit. His de causis Helvetii
non late vagari potuerunt, nee facile finitimis bcUum inferre.
Itaque, cum essent homines bellandi cupidi, angustos se fines
habere arbitrabantur. His, rebus adducti, de finibus suis cum
omnibus copiis exire c6iistitijtBrunt,et optimam partem totius Galliae
oocupare. Itineribus omnino duobus domo exire poterant ; quorum
tlnum erat per Sequanos, angustum et difficile ; alterum per pro-
vinciam nostram, multo facilius. Caesar, cui pi;6vincia Gallia e5
anno decreta erat, audivit Helvetios per provinciam nostram iter
facere conari. Statirti ab urbe proficiscitur et in Galliam pervenit.
Ubi.de ejus adventu Helvetii certiores facti sunt, legates ad eum
mittunt ; sed Caesar negat se posse iter ulH per provinciam dare.
Relinquebatur una per Sequanos via. Mox Cfaesari rentlntiatur
Helvetios per agrum Sequanorum iter in Santonum fines facere,
qui non longe a provincia nostra absunt. , Intellegebat periculo
sum provinciao fore,' si homines bellicosi, populi Romani inimici,
provinciae fiuitimi essent. Ob eas causas in Italiam contendit;
duas ibi legiones conscribit, et tres ex hiberais educit ; cum .his
quinque legionibus in Galliam per AlpSs ire contendit. Helvetii
jam per foies Sequanorum suas copias tradflxerant, et in Aedu-
orum fin§s perVenerant, eorumque agrSs populabantur. Itaque
n§ omnes fortiinae sociorum consdijierentur, Caesar a castris pro-
fectus ad HelvStios pervSni^ Tres jam partes Helvetiorum fltlmen
Ararim transierant ; reliquos aggressus, magnam partem eorum
concidit, reliqui sese in proximas silvas abdiderunt. Hoc proelio
facto', ut reliquas copias consequi posset, pontem facit, atque ita
exercitum jpradQcit." Tum per multos dies Caesar Helv6ti6s inse-
quitui', novissimuraque agmen lacessit. ^.^_...^._^.:^^.^^^.^.^l^^^^^.^^^
Tandem ut rei frilmentariae prospiceret^ iter Ab B[elv6ta& iter*
tit, atque ad bppidum Aeduorum maximum et cQpiosissimum Ire
-contendit. Helvetia Roman^a^ timoro p o rtorritoa^eaae efc '"
10
15
5-20
25
90
35
-ft sS' etistimabant.
Itaque, itinera converso, nostros Insequl fto
I •
HRf it.— iRfepARAtORY REAfeiNCJ.
i3§
laces^ro coeperunt. Post^pfei id animadvertit, Caesar copias
suas fei ;proxiinuni collem subducit, acieniquo instruit. Helvetii
iinped|tnl9iita in unum locum contulerunt ; ipsi sub primam nostram 10
aciem i?U6cesserunt. • Caesar, cohortatus suos, proeliuni commisit.
Bifli atqite acriter pugnaverunt. Sed cum diutius sustinere nds-
tro|um impetus non possent, 'Helvetii legates de deditione ad
CaepajF^m miserunt. Caesar Helvejliios in fines suos, unde profecti •
crirtti^ reverti jussit, et oppida vibSsque restituere. Helvetiorum 45
treeenta et sexaginta octo millia d«m6 exierant ; vix centuiu et
decern millia domum redierunt. ^/^^ — — — .-..-^^-..^:^-^-^--,-.^^-.:-..-^-::-,^^^-
N«— 1- Helvetii : Helvetia (the modem Switzerland) was reckoned part of GauL
'2. vlrtute t see note on 9, 2. 4. una ex parte t "on one side;" 4. altera t
"a second," but in line 12, alterum is " the othef;'' 6. provlnelam t since 118
B.C. the southern part of Gaul had been a Roman province. (Hence the modem name
Provense.) 8. cum esseilt i "being." 13, eo anx^ot 59 B.C. 14. deoreta
erat » see note on 6, 2. 15. urbe : that is, Rome. '%i. ulll t dative ; see Part
in., section 14. 18. rellnqnebatur : "there was left." 18. renuntlatur t
" word is brought" ; literally, "it is reported." 21. f ore i from mm; see Part HI ,
section 41. 22. elsent i "should (or were to) be." 2^ ne consntnerentur i
see note on 24, 8. 28. pervenlt ad i "came up with." 80. In: takes the
accus., because motion int(f is implied. English would say " in." Compare line 40.
45. restltuere ; for they had burnt them down on leaving home.
36. The Fox and the Grapes.
Fame coacta vulpes alta in vinea
Uvam appetebat, summis saliens viribus ; -
Quam tangere ut non potuit, discedens ait :
. ** Nondum matOra est, nolo acerbam sQmere." ■" r
N.-2. summU, "all its" ; literally, "its greatest." 3. Quam: see note on
1, 5. 3. ut I "when," in which sense it is followed by the indicative.'' 4. acer-
bam : understand uvam.
■/' -'
37. Sabstanoe and Shadow.
Per pontem frastum carnis, cum ferret canis,
Jjympharum in s|)ecul6 vidit simulacrum suum ;
Aliamque praedam ab altero ferri putans,
Eripere voluit ; verum docepta aviditas, "^ ^
^Et quern tenebat ore dimlsit cibum,
"Nee quem petSbat potuit ade5 attingere.
cedent cibum should be translated first ,' '«''■«• «» ««»•
/
.yjs
. .
I|4
r.\
;; PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
38. The Fox and the Goat.
Cujn decidisset vulpSs in puteum Inscia,
Et altibre clauderetur raargine,
" Devenit hircus sitiens in eiftidem lt)cum ;
Simul rogavit, esset an dulcis li<iuor
Efecopiosus? Ilia fraudem moJieiTs :
-Descende, amice; tanta bonitas est aquae
Volup^ ut satiari non possit mea.
Immisit se barbatus'. Turn vulpecula
— r EvSsit puteo, nixa celsiS^cornibus, — -
, Hircumque clause liquib haerentem vado.
"" «* a
N.— 9. altlore margine « "by the aides^wh'ich were too high for her." The
Latin comparative often means " too." irTTTTi \ "U Mil l. Understand reapony
dii or dixii, which are often omitted in Latin. 10. clausd vado t " the deep-
f|enced pool."
^ 39. Cupboard-Cove.
Donee eris felTx, multosnumerabis amicos ;
I Tempera si fuerint nubila, «olus eris. ,
I Aspicis, ut veniant ad cattdida tecta columbae,
. Accipiat nuUSs sordida turris aves ?
Horrea Cormicae tendunt ad inania numquam ;
Ntlllus ad amissas ibit amicus opes. 1.
N.— 1. erlsi "you are"; literally, "you shall be.'i JSo, /wcriMt, "are"; liter-
ally, "• shall have been." Latin is far more exact than English in indicating the
relation in time of a principal and a dependent clause. 3. ut t "how"; with
the subjunctive of indirect question. 6. Iblt i "will come"; from co (Part IIL,
section 45).
40. The Circle of the Tear.
i, DiffQgere nives, redeunt jam grftmina campis
■* . Arboribusque comag,
Frigora mitescijnfe-ZSphyris, y6r pr^rit aestas
Interitura, simul
Pomifer Autumnus frtlges effuderit, et mox
_^.^ „._ - gj.^jj^jj^ j.g(jm.j.it ijjers. ~r7-^"^*^^^ ^ ^
N.— 1. DllTugere I for diyMflf«run«. (See Part IIL, section 2V, footnote 1.) 2.
comae I aJao aubject of fwtoiinf. 8. ver t ocous. 4. Interitura i " itself
\
Jtf
doomed to perish"; literally, "about to perish." 4. slirtulT for «^ttf atq»*.
6. effuderit i futurt perfect; freely, " has," etc. ; see note on 39, 1.
M-
M^
■JtiEr-
\ •
■ < ^:
■ ,1»
er
.■• The
d
respon-
e"; liter-
ating the
n"; with
Part III.,
M^
)te 1.) 2.
t "itself
\ul atque.
PART II.— PREPARATORY RJEADINQ.
41. The Joys of Conntry life.
Beatus ille qui procul negotils,
Ufc prisca gens morfcalium,
Patema rura bSbus exercet suls,
, Solutus o^ni faenore,
Neque excitatur classico miles trucl
NequeHhorret iratum mare, •
Forumque vltat et superba civium
Potentiorum llniina.
136
?; lu u ' '^^^ ^°'"'"' P°*'« °"«" '^<'^ o' the early simple ages of the
world as the happiest. 4. faenore . he has nothingto do with the money-lenders •
arf we might say with the stock-market. 6. excitatur ,, the subject is still qui. with
which miles, "as a soldier," is in apposition. 6. horret, etc. : he is no trader by
sea in search of wealth. 7. Forum, etc. : he is no politician or office-seeker.
42. The Death of the Pet Sparrow.
»«.4
*^^.
Lflgete, 6 Venergs CupTdingsque ;
Passer niortuus est meae jjuellae,
Passer, deliciae meae puellae,
Quem pliis ilia oculls suis amabat.
Nam mellltus erat, suamque norat
Ipsam tarn bene quam puella matrem ;
Nee scse a gremio illius movebat.
Sed circumsiliens modo hue, modo illQc,
Ad solani dominam usque pipilabat ;
Qui nunc it. per iter ten'ebricosum
lUuc unde negant redire quemquam.
At vobls male sit, malae tenebrae
Orel, .quad omnia bella devoratis ;
Tam bellum niihi passerem absti^listis.
O factum male, io miselle passer,
Tua nunc opera, meae puellae
Flendo turgiduli rubent ocelli.
10
15
"US'
N.-2. meae pueUae i "my ladj's.» 4. 111« i "she." 4. oculls i abl of
6. puella t the reference is general, not to the puellae of line 2. Understand novU
fK,m „o^«e. 10 per. "along." 11. negant quemquam. "they sa^o
one. m Att now ; mtrkmg ft midden outburat^iHWHioB. Hh faellaT from"
5e«t«.adJ. 17. turgiduli rubent. "are swollen and red." Notice theTr^uZ
diminutives m the concluding lines, to indicate tender sympathy. . .
"-:■■■ .•■ ■ f/'" ... . .
/
136
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
e%..
PART III.
INFLECTION.
I. PARADIGMS OF INFLECTION.
(A) THE N(>UN.^
1. First
Declenglon.
SINGULAR.
PLUBAL.
Nominative.
mensa, r.
raensao
Genitive.
mensae
, mensarum
Dative.
mensae
Miensis
Acciisative.
mensanr
mSnsas
Vocative.
mensa
mensae
Ablative.
mensa
- Bxensis
2. Second Doolenslon.
f-i
1 •'-;;^
■^.
A
Nominative.
Genitive.
Dative.:
Accusative.
Vocative.
Ablative.
SINGULAR.
servus,- M.
servi
servo .
servuni"
serve
servo
PLURAL."
servi
servorum
servis
servos
servi
servis
1. Generally speakinfr, the nominative represents a noun as subject, the accusative
as direct object ; the Kcnitive denotes the relation expressed by of; the dative (the
cttse of the indirect object) denotes the relation expressed by to or for, and the abla-
' ' rt-tto"v t)oali»ii in «9edtn<t«peotftddreflgr- —
3.
SINGULAR.
Nora, puer, m.
Gen. piieii
Dat. puero
Ace. puerum
Voc. puer
-AM. puero
PLURAL. ^_1^ _
iV^w». puerl
Oen. puerorum
Dat. pueife
Ace. pueroa
Voc. puert
Ahl. pueris
PAHT IIL—PARADIOMS.
Seconi^ Dteolenslon {continued).
' ,i-^^^T#. .,
vir, M.
viri
" viro
virum
vir
. viro
ager, m.
agri
.Agro
agrum
ager
agro
templum, n.
templi
templd
templum ^
templum
templo ^
viri
virorum
viria
viroa
viil
viils
agil
agrorum
agrw
agroa
agrI
agria
templa
templorum
templia
templa
templa
templls
4. TliJrd
SINGULAR.
Nom. rex, m.
Gen. regia
Dot. regi
Ace. regem
Voc. rSx
. Ahl. rgge
PLURAL.
Nom. regSa
Gen. regum
Dat. regibua
Ace. regea
Voe. regea
AU. rSgibua
Declension-Masculine and Feminine Nonn^
ISUI, M.
consulia
conauli
conaulem
consul
consule
consulea
conaulum
consulibua
consulea
consulea
consulibua
'v
* '
milea, u.
militia
mllitl
militem
milea
milite
militia
militum
militibus
militea
militSa
rnilitibiuf
pater, m.
patris
patri
patrem
pater
patrti
patrSs
patrum
patribua ,
patrea /
patrSei
patribus
m.
&-'
^Hk
^*%,
%
tCi
138
■ ^ ■' \
SINOULAB. \
Nom. hom5, m.
Oen. hpminis
Da*.' homini
A(x. hominem
Vqc. homo
Abl. homine
PLURAL.
Nam. homines
Oen. homjinum
Dat. homhiibus
Ace. homines ,
Voc. homines
AU. hominibus
>
PKIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
hiems, f.
hiemis
\hieml,
liiemem
kiems
Hieme
1,;^" ■■■-..
f.
Memes
hiemum _
hiemibus
hiemes
hiemes
hiemibus
virttis, p.
virttltis
virtati
virtutem
virttis
virtute -
virtutes
virttitum
virtutibus
virtHbes
virtatSs
virtutibus
regie, V.'
regionis
regioni '
regioneoi
regis ■'
regione
regionSs
regionum
regionibus
regiones
regiones
regionibus
Thir^ Dieolenalon — Kenter Nouns.
I
SIITOULAB.
Nom. noihen, N.
(}en^ nominis
Dat^ nomini
Ae$. nomen
Voc. nSmen
Abl* nomine
PXURAL. •
Nom. ndmina
Oen. ndminum
nSminibus
cotpus, N.
corporis
eorpori
corpus
corpus
corpore
opus, N.
operis
operi ^
opus /*
opus V
^ z
^
Dot.
Ace; nomina
ndmina
nominibus
8IN0ULAB.
Nom. urbs, f i
Dat. urbl
Ace. urbem
Voc. uvhs
corpora i; opera
corpKru^ijir' • operum
corpori^us openbus
corpora opera
cof^ra opera
co'rporiBus operibus
6. ThljBd Deolenilon— I-K«ma.
!l^is, w.
Ign^ :„
Ignl
Ignem
Tgnin
ntlbSs, F.
nflbis |tl
ndbl
ndbem
nflbBa :.
iter, N,
Mneris
itinerl
iter
iter
itinere
itinera
itinerum
itineribus
itinera
itinera
itineribus
mare, N.
maris i__
marl
ihare
\ .
AU. urbe
Ignl«
nabe
mail
PLUHAJti.
Nmn. 1^68
Gen. urbium
I^' urbibus
Foe. urbgs
^Wv urbibus
: - __i, SINGULAR.
Nom: 'ftHctuByM.
e'en., J frflctas
-Oaf. frQctulS
^cCi frilctum
ypGf ;?fructu8
•4W. fracta
SINOUl^.
Nam. rgs, f.
Ccn. rel
Dat. rel :,>^
i-em
r6s «I
re
-4cc.
Toe.
PABT IIL— PAHADIQMS.
IgnS»
Ignium
ignibus
Ignes*
Ignes
ignibus
nabSs M
niibium >
nubibus
«Qbes^
nabgs
nubibus
7, Fourth Declension,
PLURAL.
frttctOs
frClctuum
frtictibus
frttcttla
frflctOs
fractibus
SINOULAB.
conja, N.
comus
cpriia
comti
co^Tia
coma
8. Fifth Declension,
PLURAL.
rSrum
rSbua
rSs
■res""^'
rebus
SINOULAB.
diss, M.
diSI
diSI
-0 diem
digs
maria '
marium
maribus
maria
maria
maribus
PLURAL.
comua
comuum
comibus
comua
cornua
comibus
PLURAL.
digs
digrum
digbus
dito
digs
digbus
9. Nouns Irregular In Declension.
139
'-vC<r^'»'>i-
(The form, in parentheses sh^dd be avoided in roriting Latin; the
fonns tn xtalics are scarcely cla'mcal.) '
SINGULAR. "
Norn, vis, F.
^en. , (vU)
Bat. (vi) '
^ce. viip
Voc. »
AH. n '
- PLURAL.
virgs
vlriuiu
vlribus ^
ylrfis v"
Mrgs
viribuH
1. Tht amiMtlvo plural of t^teni. i. alw wrltt.n urbU. nQbf,,
^nii.
fi
-^
•^-
» /:
m
8IN0ULAB.
Nom. deus, M. »
Oen. dei -^
Da*. de6 V v
^cc. deum
Voc. deuflt
^61. deft
PLURAL.
JSTowi. di (del, dil)
Otn, . deorum, detlm
Dot, dis (dels, diia)
Foe. dl (del, dil)
AU. dl8 (dels, dils)
SINGULAR.
Nom. domus, f. *
Oen. domtls {locative domi)
Dot. domul (domo)
Ace. domum
Voc. domus
Ahl. domo (domfl)
ftltMART LATIN BOOfc
-i'y
boves - > «f
bourn (bovuiri)
bubus (bobus)
boves
boves
bflbus (bobus)
Juppiter, M.
Jovis
, Jovl *
Jovem
Juppiter
Jove
.t?y
'^
r
PLTJRAL.
Nom. domtls
Oen. domuum (domSrum)
JJat. domibus
Jta* domos (domtls)
Voc. domtlB
AU. domibus
BispHUica, gen; reifrilhlicae, and jHsjHrwndum, gen. jfln*)flrcwuif,
are really compound words, consisting of a noun and an adjective
in agreement, both of which are declined. UeapfcUica is often,
and ju^urandiim sometimes, written as two words.
Pater/amiliaa or paterfamUitui, and mdteifamilids or mat&^
famUiae, (literally, the father, or mother, of a household), have
ftnly fh a fity». p arf., jwiIm- and mdter. declined. Oocaaionall»
famUuli^im Th found in the plural The form familiO» is an o
genitiyo singular.
^
PART HI.— PARADIGMS.
(B) THE ADJECTIVE.
10. First and Second Deolenalona.
141
f^
SINOULAK. aiASCULINB.
PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen.
Voei
Hber
llberl
llbero
llberum
liber
libera
llberi
llberorum
llberls
llberos
llberl
llberls
FBMININB.
b^na
I*
bonae
bonae
bonam
bona
bon& -
bonae
bonHnun
bonllB
bonfis
bonae
bonis
libera
llberae
llberae
llberam
z^ *
llberae
llberftrum
llberis
llberfts
llberae
libera
NEUTER.
bonum
boni >
boi^iS
bonui^
bonuii\
bond*'
bona
bonSrum
bonis
bona
bona
bonis
llberum
)ert
llbero
Uberum
llberum
llbero
libera
llberOrum
llberis
libera /
libera
llberls
■■"■■•'.■■."
t
142 • PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
#
■mi ""
PLURAL. ' , - • :;
^
, Nom. ae^ aegrae
aegra . . * ,
Qm. aegrCrum^" aegi-arum
aegrorum * \
iX»*. aegris #* _' . aegns
;* Aootf aegros ' " aegrSs -.
a^gris
aegra " • ;
:lrr -/.TodA ae^ri , aegrae
aegra " . •
' 4W* * aegris^ , ' aegns
■..■."■■,..-*■' .'■»■■-*■'
aegrls
^> ,11. TMrd Declension.'
■ SINQULA». MASCULINK. Jf'EMININB. ,
NEUTER.
'' 'AT'jn.MiA'" it.AA«t BiViHn
acre ', — - —
-jfici^ aoer «on»
? ^%n. :. ftcria ftcris V •
ficris
JDtt*.^ ftcri • fieri ^' ,.
fieri, ' >
• i4cc, ftcrem . ^ ficrem
ficre ; ' '
- ' ' Foe. acer ^ Sens
ficr^ . . |s. • ..■■''';
•AM. sm ' '' ' fieri ",
* • % - ' ■ -
fieri • ■'
* •
* ■■ PLURAL. ■'•;-''
^ Nom. Seres ficr§8 n
«• -. ■ . • . - "^
\ . WW. ftcrium ftcrium
ficria , r . >
&crium ._ -
>» f Dflrf. , ftcribus ficribus •*
ftcribus " ' ^ ,
i4cc» J ilcres^ - ftcresV .
ftcria ''^ , ^ ' f
Fbc»\ 'v ftcrgs » acres-*
acriar
ftcribus ^
^ ilfti. *^ ftcribus . ■ ficribus
• *BINO. MAS, AND FKM. NEUTER. MAS. AND PBM. NEOtBR.
Nom. fortis forte felix
fSlix . ■ ^■■,
* Citl.. fortis fortis 1 fglicis*
fSUcis . . ,, p. '
Da*, fortl iorti * ffillcl
■
fSl^cI , *
Jfoji fortem, forte ", ffillcend
i
i*
faix
lii» fQrtis * forte . fsllx"
-*f6ll» • .
Jik, lorH . ♦ fortt ffillcl
^fsnci
■;v.^.;'^:/ -PLURAL..
•
' Noni, fortSs fortia ' fellcBB
ftllcia • • , .
(Jen. fortium fortium ffilicilim
4. felicium >
Jh$, fortibua . fortibus felloibus
• fsllcibus J-
'-'V'^-r -ili^" idrtli^T ^ fortia' • ;■ ,_fSlloes ' .
-^J'^ ffillcia ■ ^ - ^ :^ • .
fellcia * .♦ *V
> AM. fortil^tw }. lortibuB ffillcibus
fellcibus
.1. The «oooMtive pluml ia »1m written deryi, /ortit, etc.,
(oompAre Motion 6).
. ^ ■ * , ■:--, y^ - -p . .■'^
-r-; i% ,. > ■ ---;
j - " -. . ,-. - "^ ^ f^ , _ ^
■ ' .\l-"" ' " i."'*''-'^'. ^* "" '''■"^""•
! ' ' ' — • ""T — "^ —
ii
1
PART IIL— PARADIGMS,
.12. Declension of «omparatlTes and Sape'riattve..
BOrO. MAS. AND FEM. NEUTER.
Norn, fortior fortius
Gen. f ortioris J fortioris
I>at. fortiori f fortiori
Ace. fortiorem t fortius v
Voc. fortior fortius
AU. fortiore
PLURAL.
fortior©
MAS. AND FBM. NEUTER.
^ r ^- pliis
*,|)luris . *
-■-■■' v • . '
pltls . ■
i ■ ■ ' ■ ^
(plUre)
143
■> 1
Norn. fortiSrSs' fortiora \ plOrSs
Gen. forti^ruiQ fortiorum ' pl|irium
Dat. fortioribus V fortioribus plttribus
'Ace.^ fdrtiofSs . fortiSra plflrS^
<•,
?
plOra
pltiriura
pliiribus
Fo., fortiar^ • forti^;; ^ ^, ^V ^
Abl. fortionbus fprtioribus plOriWSv -|laribl
<^Pi^res,^ compoiind of pirns, is dedined^^^ ^
(setSri^v'''" "' " "^' ?• ""' '^"^ ^*" decli,,ed like f^us
• *:
\. .
13. Comparison iof kiyeetlT^g.
1 »?
fi^;r*S'Z'"*r°*"'^^5'?'"»t»'«'~'>y «hanging the endiiur
rimus. ' *''9'f "*^^r,ac$rnmus ; miaer, mtaer-
rVV^me foUo^g adj^v« >« «^rteiguU, in their oom- 'l
■.V ■■■, t .'.r* ,•■■:♦ . , A . - ,
""•"^— * . : ■.,''■'.■.:■■, . ..' » .
parison
1. See further, section eo.
I * ' l ii g i I ■ » ■
T*-
•^'
«^'
^-
• < -
fw
sy*
■ f- '
144
PfelMARY LATIN BOOK.
■■•■ ■ ,■»
■ -.,1 (*„.'tk-*| ..
|x>nus
idlvea '
mSgnus
parvus
malus
multus
juvenis
fgnex .
mattirus
> a.
JLc^ extern»
- Am^t Inf^tus
'..l-r^^ posterns
<4^WiC superus*
melipp -
divitior, ditioc
major •
liiinop'
pejor
plus (neut.) '
jQnior
. senior
citerior /
deterior ♦
i^iterior
prior
propior
Glterior
exterior
Inferior
posterior
srfperior
optlnius * ~ jk
divitissimus, .dlti»lni
maximus
minimus * '
pessimus
pliirimus ( \
(minimus nattl)
' (maximus n^tu)
maturrimus i^ >
citimu9 ' '_ V
deterritj^sfi ^^
intunus 1 *
primus
proximus
ultimus
extremus, extimus
Infimiis, imus
postrSmHS, postumus
supremus, summus
lUS
14. Irregralar Declension.
SING. MASC.
Nom. unus
Otn, tlnlud
Dot. tfol
A^ Unum
1^ toe
and
FEM. NEUT. MA8C. FIM. NEUT.'
una linum neuter 'neutra neutrum
flnlus tlniiJis neutrfus neutrius neutrius,
tlnl tlnl neutrl neutri neutrl
anam flnum neutrum neutram neutrum
.to|k_ . , finum , -^ ■ ■- - . ■,■■■■ '—■-,■ -'
tlnft tlno neutrS neutrft ^il*^!^
JVom. tlnl ' flnae tlna neutrl neutrae neutra
flbn. dnarum flnftrum flnorum neutrorum neutrftrum neutrdrum
J^erf. Onls flnis tlnls neutris neutris neutrfa
—-Jim*-^-- toos ttnfts Una neutrSs neutrfis necrtsH , :
/;■ Vtt6. Onl ■ (Inae tlna ' \ ■/ ■■■M'-*^* '"
AUT Unfa tlnto tinfa neutris \ netttrli ifttrta
The following adjeotivee of the first and sei^ond deelensions have
■"*>"*.
L^
PART III.— PARADIGMS.
145
their genitive singular in -?t*»,i and their dative sinffular in f. in all
genders. „^Jj^*^ .
[«-tUt^«/*.4vtralius, a, ud r^^ tSftfs, a, um Mi^ alter, em, eni4 '^
y»drrU^ nOllus, a, um (^ alius, a, um.AW^^'neuter, tra, trum *
crvvi2^ solus, a, um (^-^.jl^ .tinus, a, um uter, tra, trum iX^ ^
(N.K—AUm has m the genitive singular, alhui; in the dative
singular,- oZm. The genitive alius is, however, seldom found
altering, ot m tl^e possessive sense, cUiemis, a, um, being used'-
instead.) ' > ***6 ""^^ ,
^ 15. lilst of Numerals. #
^
CARDINAIS.
1. tinus, a, Um, orie
2. du-o, -ae, -o, ttvo
3. tres, tria, three
' 4../<jtiattuor, /oifrr
.5: quinque, etc.-,
6. sex . •• ,
7;-septein \'
8. octo
9. noveh/ '.
10. decem-
11. undecim^ '
/ 1^. duodecim
13. tredecim
14. ijuattuordecim
15. qimidecim
16. sedecim ...)
17. septeWecim -1' '
18. duodevJtointI» "'
i^%. flndgviga^tl^
" 20. viginti
' „j f Onus et vlfehitl
•ivlgihtl ClnusX
,28. duodetrtgintft'
V 29. dndStrlgintft*
ORDINALS. ' .,
"primua, Jirst
secundus, second (also alter)
tertius, third . .
quartus, /oitrffe -.
quintus, etc.
s«
sextUa . '•
Septimus . fc
Qctavus , ;;v
nonus
decimus
"undecimus
duodocimus
tertius decimus '
_ quartus decimus '
quintus decimus
sextus decimus
7 septindus decimus
duodSvIcSsimUs * ^
tlndfivIcSeimuS" • ' •
,:' vlcSsimnfl -- ,
■ primus et vToisimjoia'
• vIcSsimus primus
' duodgtiicSsimus ■ -.
' tind6ti1c6simuai
'5
1. In poetry the grenitlve often ^ „
iuier thu seema to have beeiKthe rule in
With
mt in -ttM, not in -lut, with nUmy of these
*""""'" aswBll
WHJds.
r
^.
4f» »
» »
» ..
1*46
PRlMABY LATIN BOOK.
•-/"
» ^-— J*""
J^
30,
40,
50,
60.
70.
80.
90,
100,
401.
.200,
300,
400.
500.
600.
700.
. 800.
900.
nooo.
2000.
CARDINALS. J
ti^gintar
qutuk^gintS.
qulnquaginta
sexaginta
septuagintll •
octoginta
nonaginta J
centum 9
/centum tinus
I centum fet tinus
ducenti, ae, a
trecenti, ae,a .
quadringenti, ae, a"
quingentl, ae, a
sescenti, ae, a
septmgenti, ae, a
octingenti, ap, a
nongenti, ae, a
mllle
duo millia (milia)
ORDINALS.
tilcSsimus
quadragesimus
quinquagesimus
sexagesimuB
septuagesimus
octotfeshnus
^<l
''"\.
^nonagesimus
centesimus , •
centesimi^ primus
cenfesimus et piimiis
ducentesimuB
trecentesimus
quadringentesimus
quingentesimus
sescentesimus ' t
septingentesiniua
octingentesimus
nongentesimus
mlllesimus •>
bis mlllesimus
16. Deolenslon of Numerals.
.5:-. ■,--.,
s.
'»
MASO. ^
FEM»
NBU^.
Ml AND F.
NEW.
NEUT. '
N&m.
duo
duae
duo
trgs
tria'
miUia .
Gen.
duSrum
duarum
duorum
trium
trium
millium-
* Dat.
duobus
duabus
duobus
tribus
tribus
mlllibus
,« Ace.
duos, duo
duas
duo
tres
tria
milliii
Voo.
duo
tluao
duo
tres
tria
millia
.--Aih-
"^duobus
duabus
duobus
tribus
tribus
mlllibus
.6 declension of tlntt;}, see section 14.
e hundreds, from dticentl to ndngentl, are declined' like the
of bonua, section 10. ^ \
AH the other cardinal numerals afe indeclinable.
The ordinal numerals are all declined like> bonus, section 10,
%f
uxuuptTitfef, for wmon fiee s66tion 14,
y
■6S";
-'■ ''SS^,
:X-
,'?^
^
V
PART III. — PARADIGMS.
147
'■'' '■..■> •'■■ ■'•;■';:■; ■■:'.;' (O) the adverb. - - ''-'r/f\'yX---^-...
17. Formation from Adjjictlvos, and Comparison. ^
I. Adverbs are regularly formed from adjectives in the foUowinff
(a) In the positive, by changing the ending of the Renitive
Buigular of adjectives of the first anA second declensions to Tof
adjectives of the third declension to -iier (or, in a few «^es? to,
«/S ^" *^^ comparative, by taking the neuter accusative singular
of the comparative of the adjective, ihat is, by changing -(yr of the
comparative of th^ adjective to ^: ^ ^ ?
(c) In the superlative, by changing -m of the superlative of the
adjective to -e. ., <• - ,\
For examples, see Lesson JjII., page 76.
4,,.\-
"^^^^
«,«^J;,i? ^^'^y ,^^«^« the accusative singular neutor, or the ablative
singular, IS used .as an adverb ; e.^. ; *
ADJECTIVE.
' multus ,
facilis
subitum
cr§ber
ADVERB.
multuiji
facile 'U
subito
crebrS
ADJECTIVE.
plarimus
primus .-'
certus '
Gnus
ADVERB.
plurimum
pnmum
certo
tins,
,111. The following are irregular in formation or comparison : '
bene
parum •
[magnopere]
din
soepe
18. First Person.
SINOUIiAE.
N<ym,. ego
* Qen. mei
Z>a*. mihi
Vot.
V
melius
v\ minus
magis
diatius . V ?
saepius "'^ ^
(P) THE PRONOUN.
19. Second Porson*
"??•
^W. me
■\;:'
optimS
minime
maxime
diutissimS
saepissimg
20. Third
Person Befleicivo.
sibi
se (sSsS)
sS (s6s6)
ijgr
il
148
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
PLUBAL. . . - !.
. '^ - ■' ) ■ : ' r.
N\m- nos v6s
Oen. nostrdm, nostn vestrum, yestri- sui
'Dot. nobis vobis - ^ sibi
Ace. nos i ^ Mr®8i ^e (sese)
Abl. nobis , ^ ' vobis | sS (sese)
:-i:
i^
21. Possessive Pi^ononns.
:*:
._„meus, a, um, my, mine noster, nostra, nostrum, oiir, ours-.
tuus, a, um, your, yours vester, vestra, vestrum, your, yours
, suus, a, um, his, her, . suus, a, um, their^ tJieirs
' hers, its
Tliese are all declined like adjectives of the first and second
, declensions, section 10, except that the vocative singular masculine
of m£us is ml, rarely meus. ,
A-
22. Tlilrd Personal» and Oemonstrative Pronoan.
la, he, she, it, etc. ; that. "
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE.
FEMININE.
NEXTTER. Vl ^
Nom.
is
ea
id ;
Gen.
Dat.
ejus
ei
ejus
ei
ejus
ei ^ -
Ace. '
eum
earn
idf ■ ^'^:
Abl.
•
eo , •.
ea
eo
PLURAL.
Nam.
ei, ii
eae
ea '. - M
Gen.
eorum
earum *
eorum 1
Dat.
" eis, iis ;
eis, iis
eis, iis • 1
Ace:
Abl.
eos
eis, iis
eas *
■Mk
eis, lis '^•
e» ' •- - ii
eis, iis ; 1
c?
#-
%
^ ~-
-tl
''■ PART III. — PARADlGMa
23. Demongtratlve Pronouns.
Ulc, this, nie, that.
149
SING. MASC.
Norn, hic
Gen. . htijus
'Dat.^ huic
Ace. hunc
.AU. ||6c
FEM.
haec
hujus
huic
hanc
hac
NEUT.
Iioc
hujus
huic
hoc
h8o _
MASC.
ille
illiUs
illi
ilium
ma
FEM.
ilia
illlus
iUl
illani
ilia
f
na(
NEUT.
illud
illius
illi
illud
Old
PLUBAL.
Norn, hi , ^'' hae Haec illi fllfte ilia
Gen. horum harum horum illorum illarum illorum
Dat. his his his illis illis ilUs
Ace. hos . , ha» /haec illos illas ilia
Abl. his hisr ~'Yhia illis iUis illfc
^The pronoun iste, a, tid, that of yours, is declined exactly like
Ipse, -self.
Idem, the same.
SING. MASC.
Norn-, ipse
Cfen. ipsius
-Dorf. ipsi .
Ace. ipsum ipsam
Abl. ipso ipsa
FEM.
ipsa
ipsius
ipsi
NEUT. 1|asc.
ipsum idem
FEM. NEUT.
eadem idem
ipsius ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem
ipsi eidem , eidem eidem
ipsum eundem eandem idem
ipso modern eadem eodem
PLURAL.
Nom. ipsi
ipsae ipsa \^^^^ eaedem eadem
Gen. ipsSrum ipsSxum ipsorum eorundem earundem eorundem
Dat. ipsis
AMi ipsos
■^ Ahl. ipsJB
ipsis
ipsas^
ipsis '
ipsis |^^s<lem, eisdem, eisdem,
liisdem^ iisdem^ iisdem^
ip% eosdem easdem eadem
ipsis /®^8<iem, eisdem, eisdem,
1 For iiedem we often find Udem.
r<*\
150
f*i SINGULAR.
■ Nom.
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
PLURAL.
Nam.
Gen.
Dat.
Ape.
AU.
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
24. Relative Pronoun.
MASCULINE.
tfUl > 2
cujus
cui
quetn
quo
'■W>>"
quorum
quibus
quos
quibus
FEMININE.
quae
cujus
cui
quam
qua
quae
quarum
quibus
quas
quibus
NEUTER.
quod
cujus
cui
quod
quo
■' ^
quae
quorum
quibu%|L
quae
quibus
.1"
w
25. tlhterrogratlve Prononn.
The Interroga|)ive Pronoun diflfers from the relativ&> pronoun ^n
having quia in Nbm. Sing. Masc, and quid in Nom. and Ace. Sikg.
Neut. There is also the Interrogative Pronominal Adjective ^l,
qxiaey quod^ declined exactly like the Relative Pronoun.
20. Indefinite Prononns.
The Indefinite Pronouns are compounds of quis or quH and .are
for the most part declined like them."^ . ^ .-
j_>, MASCULINE. FEMININE.
'^/^^*^^*^»liqui8, aliqui aliqua
S*.*
v^y-
NEUTER.
aliqiiid, aliquod '
(The neuter pluraval^ well as the feminine singular, has -qua tot
quae.) ■. v , -
^*.
quis, qui,
qua
quid, quod
(The neuter plural, as well as the feminine singular, has gtta for
i^j^r "^*^' V^ quisque quaeque^ quicque or quidq^e, quodque
OijM^if'^'b /Quisquam "" quicquam or qiiidquam
i(The plural and the feminine singular are not used.) *"
" ■■-" — ' "— --— -M. .»--,-— ■ .;- ..^ .. - -.--. ^ .... » -, „. ..— -~-.p.., : .. . . ... ...- » . » ^ » ^ „ .. „ ,.,-^,^^.,. — ~,^^., V ^fSsISS
1. In this list where a word has both ^^^ and quiy or both quid and qwid^ the
forms in gut and quod are generally used aajectively» the others substantively.
/■
*■
\ :
PAUr III. — i»ARADiGMS.
151
MASODLINE. FEMININE. NEUTER.
quisquia (quaeque) quicquid or quidquid ;
(Only quisquis, quicquid or qmdquid and qudqud are in cpm^ion
US6. ^
^Qji^i^ ^ quidam quaedan^^ quiddam, quoddam V
'^^^^^"'"^ (Quidam changes w to n before -tZam.)
quicunquo quaecunque quodcunque^ ■ ■ ' 6 f
quivis . quaex& quidvis, quodvis (^^^. *^ tAjJ^*^^
- quispiartr -^^r~ Wp^!i^ q«idpi.«n or quippiam, quod-
> quiubet . ^ .MJIIfefcW quidlibet, quodlibet >
. uterque ', iitjjjp^'' utrumque louUiff^ ^^*^
Uterque has the first ^art declined' like w^er, section Mi?
,i> / - , 26a. Correlatives. ' ' >
Of the pron^ins which haye corresponding forms, the conK -
.monest are the following :. y '
INTERBOOAkvE. DEMONSTRATIVE. RELATIVE. INDEFINITE.
^
7
/
/■■ ■
quw, «^/"
IS
(hic, ille, iste)
^ "^:
qualis, *
» of what sort?
quantus, "■■■' ■■'-'■
hiftv grettj; ?
quofc, :
hoio'hnany?
uter, xohich
of the two?
■'•3
*^«>H>^ ■ . ^ quSlis^,
t^ntusa*^^ quantus
^P- &o'-Ai.x^ ; quot
ifcerque,2.ft«ii|t*^ ■•(">^
qui ,1 4? aliquis ^ i-^^'^Jj;^^*'^*-^
l^uis, quisquam,^^^ _-^
lulvis, quidam ^ ' "'^«* ,
-V
aliquantus i-trv>v^
', ■■ ^
aliquot <i.>*Jt.A/*^ V«sva-
■::.;6;
152
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
.ste
• . (^) THE verb:- ; " :
• ■ " '■■'-■■'.. '';■'* ■' ' ""^ ' -
27. IndloatiTe Mood, Active Voioe.
■ ■ ■ ■ . i .. ■■ ■■ , ■
) Present Tense. '
SlNaULAR. ^ / ,
» ,' . ■
^irst Conjttg. Secorvd Conjug. Third Conjng. FouHh Cmjug.
nioneo. rego audio
mones. ; regis audfe
monot/ "—"-regit t~^ -^^^j. - — ~-
1. amo
2. amas
3. amat
PLURAL.
l* amamus
2. amatis
3. amant
SINCHJLAR.
1. amabam
2. ama.bas
3. amflbat
PLURAL.
1. amfibftmuG
2. amabatis
3« ^mabant
sInoular.
. 1. amfibd
2. am^bis '
3. amkbit v
plural:
^ amAbimiui
2. aWbitis '
3. ainftbunt
7
ibonSmus
mongtis
monent
reginaus
regitis
regunt
-**j-
Imperfect Ten^e. \
monSbarfi- •
mongbas 1
monSbat
monSbftmus
mongbfitis
' monebant
regSbam
re^ebas
regebat
reggbamus
regebatis
regebanfc
audXmus
auditis
audiunt
audiSbam
andigbas
audiebat
audigbamu»
audigbatia
audigbant
i>
Future -Tense.
-V.
mbngbo-
monebis
inoi^bit
, regam
' reggs
reget
- nu^bimus reggmiv,
mongbiti» reggtis
inoilgbun| regent
audiam
" audiet' "* ' ^
audigmua
audigt»B
audieiA
^
-^
PART IIL— FABADIOM&
*■;»"',
153
28.
SINGUIiAE.
First Gonjug.
1. amor
2. anid,ris^
3. amatur t^
PLUEAL.
1. amS,inur
2. amamini
3. alnantur
SINGULAR.
'■/' 1. am&bar
• 2. aniabfiris^
3. amUbgitur
PLUEAL.
1. amab&mur
2. amabftmini
3. amftbantur
SINGULAB.
1. ate&bo^
2. ain&bfiris^
3. am&bilur
f .
PLUEAL. \
1. amftbimur"^
2. am&bimini
3. anx&buntur
{Ej THE VERB.
Indicative Mood, PasBlve Voice.
Peesent Tekse.
'^■
\ Second Oonjug. - Third GomiOf. FauHh Canjug.
ttioneor ■ i«egor w andinr
mongris^ \^ regeris^
monStur regitur
audior
audlria ^
auditur
monSmur
monemini
moijentur
regimur
regimini
reguntur
Imperpect Tense.
monSbar
monSbapis^
mbngbatur
monSbftmur
monebftmiiTl
inunebantur
regSbar
reggbaria*
regebfitur
regSbamur
reggbamini
regebantur
monSbor
monSberis*
monSbitu^
Future Tense.
regar
. regSris*
monfibimttr ~ regSmur
monfibiminl regBHIhil
monebuntur regdnTur
a udimu r
a udimin i
audiuntur
audiSbar
audiSbarisV
audiebatur
audiebamuv
audiebamini
audiebantur
audiar
audieris^
audietur .
audienntr
audieminl
L- For -rU, r$ tiK Is (muMl* MpwiAlIy in the Iminirfeot «nd future teneet.
~^fa>
l^^ PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
» ';■-■:■■■■ ■' *•
•T. Indicative Sfood, Active Voice (continued),
■ /'
* Peefect Tense. -
singular.
First Conjtig.
1. amavi
2. amavisti
3. amavit (
Second Conjug: Third Conjug. Fourth Conjug.
nionui
monuisti
mohuit*
rexi
rexisti
rexlt
audlvl
audivisti ^
audlvit
PLURAL. •
1. am9,vimus
2. amavistis
3. amaverunt*
singular'.
/1. amaveram
$ monuimuai
monuistis
monuerunt^
rSximus
rexistis
rexerunfc^
i->»*
Pluperfect Tense.
/2. amftveras
^ 3. ani&yerat
monueratrt
monueras
monuerat
PLURAL.V
1. amaveramua monueramus
2. amaveratis monueratis
inonuerant
3. amfivciraut
'r5*ram
rexeras
rgxerat
rSxeramus
rgxeratis
rSxerant
' SINGULAR.
1. amaverO
2. ainaveris
3. am&verit ^
PLURAL.
1. amaveriinus
2. aiiraveritia
*l- 3. MQAvorint"^
Future Perfect Tense.
monuel
moriueris
tf|onuerit
monueriinuB
momieriti^ '
monueiint
rfixerd
rCxeris
rexerifc
r6xerimQs
rSxeritifl
^iBxerint""
audlvimus
audlvistis
audivgrunt*
audlveram
audiver&s
audlverat
audlverainus
audlVeratis ;
audlverant
au4lver6~
audlveris
audlverifc
audlverimui
audlveritii >
audlverinl ,
v..
1. For Srunt, -{rt also i» found, MpaoUlly in pnoirv
A.
#
'«r-
i •
c
f
■S^
PART m.— PARADIGMS. f * 1-55
28. Indicative Mood, Passive Voice {continued)»
' r ■• < ■ ■ ■■
«' :,. -■'^, /". Pbefbot Tensb.. •'•■■■'. --vV^^-^v
Im-
First Gonjug. Second Conjug. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjiig.
1. aniatus^ sum monitusi sum rgctus^ sum auditus^ sum
2. II es n es n e0 ' n ^j
8. u est n est 4i est f^ ilfe^
PLURAL. ■ ■ ■' iB, ■ ' .■■■■'■ «". ■ ^"'•■-■"^'
1 v ■ . . .
1; amatl^ sumus monitl^ smmis recti* sumus audltl* sumus
2. II estis „ estir n estis i» estis
a
II sunt It * sunt
* - ' .
9.
sunt
sunt
Pluperfect TENSiE'.
; SINGULAR. ' .
1. amatus* eram nfemiitus* eram rectus* eram audltus* eram
2. 11 eras nff eras »n erfts m eras
3. II erat ti erat ' n erat n erafc
PLURAL. 'T"
.1. amatl^eramus moniti* er^pius rSctl* eramus audita* eramua
2.
3.
11 oratis
II erant
11 eratis
fi er^t
II eratis
II erant
II eratis
V ti erant
i
Future Per At Tense.
BINGULAB.
X' amatus* erS
2. « eria
3. M erit
mbnitus* erO
u eris
M erit
rSituB* erS
II eris
^1 erit ''
audltus* erS
II eris
M erit
• 1. amatl*erimu8 moniti' erimus rSotl* erimua audltJ* erimus
— -^ _j|__eriti8 — »_ — ^f^_^„^j„_^ eritis i—^ -ir eritia
•• M «runt lit: enint /*n* erunt- ,m erunt
«— .Ii»-.« j"^'" "■••♦•♦* «WW»*», ariMta or ainacuin «nr imn tit tlis tlniniiW And
il.
!
156
%
V
7 T
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
aft. Sabjunotlve Mood. Aiotive Voloe,^'
•i: .. f * Present, Tbnsb.^
^.
Mnt Gon^ugJ SecoiU (htijug. ThirdConjug: touHh Conjug.
1.; amem
2. amSs v^
3. amet^
PLURAL.
1. amSmtis
2. amStis
3. ament >
SINGULAR.
1. amarem
2. amfirSs
3. amftret
PLURAL.
1. amftrgmui
i. am&rStis
3. amSj'ent
'>
SINGlOiLR.
li am&verim
2. amftveris
^. aiQftv«ijrit
PLURAL.
1. am&verimuii
2. am&veritis
& unftverint
,-t. ; :.
moheam'
-^jliOneHs
moneat
jnoueSmus
moneHtis
moneant
regam
regas
regat
regSlmus
reg&tis
regant *
audiam
,' audiat'
audiamus ^-'
audiHtis
aiidiant
Imperfect T^nse.
moner6s
monSret
monerSmus
monSrStis
monSrent
regerem '
' regergs .
regeret '
. regerSmus
, regeretis
regerent
Perfect Tense.
monuerim
monueris
monuerit
raonuerimus
monueritis
japim«rint
rSxerim
rSxeris
rSxerit
rSxerimus
r6xeritis
_r6xerint
audlrem
aud|res
aildiret
audlrSmuS'
audicStis
audirent
audlverim
audTveris
au4lvent
^
pP'
¥
J-..*
\, . .-•
audlverimuB
audlteritis
audlverint ^
1«^
.^
«
f PART IIL-^PARADIGMS.
80. Sabjanotlve Mopd, PassWe Voice.
. SINGULAB.
First Conj-ug.
1. ainer
ja. ameria^
3. amStur ,
. PLURAL.
1. amemur
2. amSminI
■ . #^
3. amentur
MNGULAE.
1. aniarer '^
2. ^margris^
»3. aiMretilr
. PLtmAL.
1. an>ar6mur
' 2. amftrgmini
. 3. amarentur
SINQULAR.
1. amatus^Bun
2. II eSa
3. *ii ait
PLURAL. . •
1., amatl'^ slmus
2. H Bitis
Prbsent TbNBJBv
157
f .
Second Conjng. Thh-d Conjiuj. Fourth (hnjug.
nionear
'monearis^
moneatwfr
moneamur
monejamini
moneantur
regar
regaris*'
regSiuir ,
regamur
regamiril
regantup
aud^i^r
audiaris*
audiatuTili
^ audiamur
* audiamini
audiantur
i Imperfect Tens*. •
regerer ,
monSrer -^
monSreris*
monereitur
monarSmur
monSrgminI
monSrentur
regereris*
regerStur
regertmup
regerSmini
regerentur
Perfect Teitoe. '
^:0 ~^^'^^■-^,'^'^^
^us* sim \^ rectus" sitii ^
_ H ■ 8lB . -*^%i/ Bto- •
■ _.H . ; JHfe. ■ -.1 .'.ilt f
monitl' BimuB rSctl' iliHF
« Bltia " • (fltia ,
.* ♦
audlrer
audlrgris*
AudlrStur
audlrSmur
audii;6minl
audlrentur
idltuB^ sim
If iOm
II
■it
•uditt» 8lm
II tftis
•A#
*t -iart . ■ *"
t For JKi, ^« Also !• found, 2, Se^ footnote 1, PH« 156.
'1 '
^1 \
r
'primary lItin book.
'^
ao. SnigBlnotive Mo^, Acil^p Tol«so (contimted).
Ha
.V
*LUf*B3ttrEi|p Tense
SINGULAR. ' « • ' .
First Qmjug. ' Second ^ijiigj^ Third Con^^. :P^th
l.^amavissom " monuissem
/2. amavisses -^, ihonuissea
3- am^^set ^ moi|uisset
'^'%
■ i-f^s^t'V^audi^fe ^ ' "- .
^' / ■ ' ' « 4. ■ III ^ -^r ■" * g^'sm
|6^8B^nt ' ' aud!VissiJar*^^
\ ■>'^ '/ ' "■ " ■ ■■-^•. ■ ^ * »
♦ Active Voice.
reg^re ' 'audlram. ,
imSviase ^monuisse ^ - r^isse - audlvisse.
.m\
us e^e^ monitflrus ess^i' i^tOrus esseV audltttrus esse*
4'
9^*,^ Participle, 4<jtl ve Voice. \
aniililfi .<
ifion^ns
\
FtTTURB.
amatttrus . ' monitflrus
regSns
* - ■ '-
■I
rSctflrus
audiSns
auditflrus
t »
-4-
1. S«« footnote 2, panre'^t.
>
^^^:'^7-:x
*-%
'/<■'>>'
v
80. ^abjanotiye m6o4. Passive Volooj^onWnjied)»
PLUpiiRFBCT Tense.
SINGULAR. V
■:,.J^r.*Cbniw^. Secmd Conjng. Third Conjug. kttHh Conp^.
1. amatusiessem monitusi essem reptus^ essem auditusi essem
2. . „ .essgs „ essgs-; ,r esses A essSs
J. ^^ M esset . , „ esset „ esset „ \ ©ss^t
^^^atii essemus monitii essemUs rectli essemus auditli eLmus
^.w.essetis „ essetis „ essetis ,, es^tis
^. ,» essenfc „ essent „ essent „ «ssL^
32. Infinitive Mood. «Passive Voice.
PRESENT,
amari .
/i - 1
mbnerl
, : regl
audlrl
PERFECT. ' . * *
amatus esse" ' monitus esse" rectus esse" audL;us esse»
' <
PUTiTRB. "•.•■' ] ,,. . j
amatumW monitum ^1'' reetuin M audltum Irl
34. Participles, Passive Voice.
PERFECT.
amatus
t moniius
flRUNDiVE. ' ';
amaudua monendus
,:..i'l
"^4
rectus auditus
'.....■.■■ ■ ■■ ''^^
regendus audiendus
-[
1. See footnote 1, page 1,66
2. The perfect inflnrtive is
' I i' > « . 4
lnflnitSlT;;!mfwhSir^^^^^ participle «««.ive in .«.«nd t^e
gendw. numbeTC^ *'li^^l*!?'*! °'"J*-*!l-... The participfe wlTfTof coun.e, m^\1
» r
S
1»
\*'
^o
.n
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
35. Geriindt Aotlve Voloe.
.^^rst GonQ. ' Second Conj.. Third Gon^. Fourth Conj.^
Oert.. a-ipandi monendi regendl ' audiendl
Doit. ahiando Tnonendo regendo
« Ace. amandum monendum regendum
> AU. amando. monendo regendo -
36. Saplne. Active Voloe.
'Am^^ am^um
^W. . amatuv'
monitum tectum
monita rgctil
audiendd
audienduin
audiendo
auditum
auditu
C
y
«■ ■■'
r ..
«' '
37. Imperative Stood, Active Voice.
. • Present Tense.
Sing. 2. amS,
Flur. 2. amate
monS
monSte
rege
regite
I^utube Tense.
Sing. 2. amUto
3. amato
Flur. 2. amatot^
3. amanto
monSt5
moneto
monStote
monento
regitS
regito
regitote '
regunto
audi
audlte
Hudito
audlto
audltotfif^
audiuDtd
88. Imperative Mood, Passive Voloe*
Sing.2.amSire
PZttr.2. amftmini
^ing. 2. am&tor ~^-
3. am&tor f
Flur.3u amantor/
1 Present Tense.
monSre regere
monSminI regimini
' FuTullB Tense.
monStor fegitor
monitor regitor
monentor xB^ntor,
fe;
audire
audlxninl
auditor ;^,^^
Auditor » « :
i^udiunfcor
'Kr
'ta&
'
thCkmj.^
ndi
nd6
ndura
ndo '
PABT IIL— -PARADIGMS.
89. Verbs In Id of Third Co:
Indicative Mood. Su
iesbnt.Tensb. ' , I
16X
Siltg. 1. capid
2. capis
3. capit
Plur.l. ca^imus
2. capitis-^
3. capiunt
Active Voice. Passhe Voice. Active Voice. Passive Voke,
capior /
caperis
capitur
capimur
capimini ~
capiuntur
capiam
capias
capiat
capiamus
capiatis
capiant
Imperfect Tense.
capiebar caperem
capiebaris caperes
^bifeftpiebatur caperet
PZttr. 1, capiebamus capi§bamur caperemus
2. capiebatis capiebamini caperetis
capiebantur c^erent
Future Tense.
Sing. 1. capigbam
2. capiebas
3. capiebat
3. capiebant
capiar |
capiaris t
capiatur '
capilmur fi,.
capiamini T?'
capiantur /
caperer
capereids
caperetur
caperenmr
capergi^ll
caperentur
t>:
iSifiig. 1. capiam
2. eapies
3. capieb^
Plw.l. capiemus
2. capietis
3. capient
Sitig. 1. c5pl
'. 1. cSperam
Sing, i:
■^
capiar
capieris /
capietur
capiemur
capieminl
capientur /
Perfect Tense.'
captus sum ceperim
Pluperfect Tense.'
C|aptu8 eram oSpisapi
Future Perfect Tense.»
1^ captus er6
i^
captus G^m
Mptus essem
m-
ft
!' r**'*^'** '?*'""' ''-'^ belonging to thJB class, aee nt^Mnn ^ y, ^
^^^wp«t8« tenM, capiQ i, ftflected exactly Uke the verbs of the four
h
;♦■
162
A
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Infinitiye Mood.
AeU
Pre», capere
Pel/. cepiss^ *i
J^. capturii^^Qsse
- a>r
JPamve Fbice.
capl
captus eSse
^ captum iri
* ».*
'-V
Par^ici
Per/, captus
Gerun. capiendus
.* Gerund. "
.jHip-' ^ ".
* ►!
r-^t-
Gen. ; dapiendl
'Da<. capiendo
ilcc. ' ' capiendu:
-AU. capi6ndd|
» ..,
■.*>-
,_;-•,. Ji».
Supine.
iMPEfeATi^HSft Mood.
^*'-'
iSVn^. 2. cape
4i|glKr.2. capite
ra T;
*fe»
.•#'''
■-{^
capere
capimmi
'n «
. rf^
Sif^;:% capitd
%!ca;pito
Flv/r, S^ipip^te
Ecaun^r ^ >«
ar '^' ,
^ ■*. ^ • • ft ^
fW 'M
^
w
40.
PABT III. — PARADIGMS.
Synopsis of Deponent Verbs.
Indicative.
163
First Con.
Pres. hbrtor
Imp/, hortabar
Fut. hortabor
Ferf. hortatus
sum
Flup. hor|;atus
eram
Fttt. P. hortatus
• ero
Fres. ' horler
Imp/, l^prtarer
Ferf. htrtatus
aim -
^ Flup. horta'tus
essem
Fte8. hortari
^^Vff: hortatus
esse
Fut. hortaturus
esse
Second Con.
vereor
verebar
yerebor
veritus
sum
veritus
eram
verjiis
ero
Third Con.
loquor
loquebar
loquar
locatus
sum
locutus
eram
locfltus
ero
Foxwth Con. Verba in itf.
potior patior
potiebar
potiar
potitus
sum
potitus
eram ■
potitus
er6
Subjunctive.
verear
vererer
veritus
sim
veritus
essem
loquar
loquerer
locutus
sim
locutus
essem
potiar
potirer
potitus
sim
potitus
essem
patiebar
patiar
passus
sum
passus
eram
passus
"erS
patiar
paterer
passus
sim
passus
esseni
Infinitivb. -
vergrf loqul , potiri pati
veritus loctitu», . potitus passus
esse esse V^^l^ esse
veritQrus locutflrus poftiirul^passarus
A ■,r.,->.«c- -
Qssm£^i:r esse
esse . esse
y
Participle.
:*^
,^'
Pre».' hortans
Fut. ^. hortaturus
Ferf. hortatus
Qtr. hortandus
verSns loquSns potiSns patiSns
veritOrus locGtOrus potitOrus passOrus
veritus locfttus potitus passus
verendus loquendus potiendus patiendua
Gbeund.
Om^ hortandl verendt loquendl potiendl patiendl
d':
!l
164 ^ P&IMARY LATIN BOOK.
'^f''-'-f:''v->;,-#>:^"v:"-' ..: Supine. ■■ .t.:-,:.;'.-
rf'ii
::?.0:,--
^;.i^/;•
ly I
First Con., Second Con. Third Con. Fourth Con. terbs in iO^
Ace» hortatum veritum locutum • potltum passum
■-. ;'/■'/;.' '• ■ '.';-;;;^ ■ IMPEKATIVB. ^7
Pm. hortare verere loquere potlre patere
FiU. hortator veretot loquitor potitor patiWr
v: tRUEGULAB VERBS.I !
41. Sum. esse, ful. toJ>e.
■s
Sing. 1. sum
2. es
S. est
PZwr. 1. sumus
2. estis
^ff
-4*'
3. sunt
42. Possa)ii, posse^ potnl»
to he ableycan. If /-
Indicative. Subjunctive. Indicative. Sirfe;uNCTivE.
'Present. ',.^-^ / ■• ,, . ' ■-
possum possim
potes / possis
potest possit
possumus ( possimus
potestis :- ,possitis
possunt possint
it •« »
Sing. 1. eram
2. eras
„3. erat
Flur.l. eramus
2. eratis
3. erant •
Sing. 1. efd
2. eria
3. erifc .
Plw.l. erimus
■M. 2. eritis
• Imperfect.
essem poteram
esses pot eras
esset poterat
essemus
essetis
essent poterant
i /
possem
posses
posset
poteramus possSmus
poterSitis possetis ^
//
^possent
Future.
poter5
.poteris
poterit
poterimus
Indicative.
*»■■
.*,-;.
Siiig. 1. fill
2. fuistii
3. fuit
Plv/r. 1, fuiihus
• 2. fuistis
3. feigrunt
Sirig. 1. fueram' '
2. fuerSa
3. fuerat
Plur. 1. fueramus
2, flieratis
3.^erant
Sing. 1. fiiero
2. fueris
3. fuerit
Plur. 1. fuerirhtis
I 2. fueritis
3. fueriut
pART IIL-^PARADIGMS.
SuBjuNCTiv^, Indicative.
■\\ ■•/ •■ IPerfect.
V fuerim / y potui
/ Mfueris , pbtuistt
tX.^. iuerifc '■''/-/■ ;potuit" ''''^■■:'
fuerimus potuimus
' tfueritis potuistis
fuerint^ ; ; potu^runfc
•_■■ ■' ■ • 'Plupbrfect. .-, X .
16«^
SuBjyjJClTVE.
potuerim • ..
potueris V
potuerit
potuerimufl
t)otueritis ;
potuerint
'"fuissem / potueram
fuisses :j,..' potueras
fuisset / potuerat
fuiasemiis potueramus
^uissetis potueratis
fuissent potuerant
'■Future Perfect. —
:/ii/ potuero
potueris
, , potuerit
. potuerimus
potueritis
^ ^ ^potuerint
"INFINITIVE. . .
potuissem
potuisses
potuisset
potuissSmus
potuissetis
potuissent
A
Prei. esse
Per/. fuisse
Ptli* __ f uturus esse or
Pres.
^Vi» futtirus , *^
Pres. Sing. 2. es
Plur. 2. este
Put Sing. 2. esto '
3. esto*
Ttier. 2. o atote —
^ 3. sUnto
posse
, potuisse
-*
Participle.
yf potgns
MPERATIV^
^
\
166
PRIMARY LAXm BOOK.
43. Void, N5I5. Miild.^
Volo, ' velle, Volul,
Nolo, nolle, nolul.
Halo, malle, malal, '
, he toUling, wUl, vnsh. '•
he unwilling^ will not.
he move wiUing, prefer» .
J?w».
1^ -
j-.-C-
^- •
Imp/.
\' Fut.
Perf.
Fres.
volff"
■'▼**•■>,
vult
^volumus
vultis
• volunt
volebam
volam
volul
; volueram
• voluero
f.
Indicative.'
nolo '
non vis
non vult
nolumus >
n6n .vultis
nolunt
nolebam
nolam
nolul'
nolueram
noluero
.Imp/.
■■■■ ^'
•-■'it
I^erf:
Phip.
Prei.
Per/.
.velim
veils
velit
Vellmus
velTtis
velint
vellei»
vellei^»,
vellet .'
' vellenid^
vellSli&
. vellent
voluerim
voluissem
..■'Ml/.
▼eUe *•. .
voliticwe
Subjunctive.
n5lim ,
nolJs •
nSlit'
nolimus
nolltis
nSlint , ,
nollem
nollSs ■
nollet
nollSmus
ndllgtis
nollent
nQluerim
ndluissem '
Infinitive.
nOll^ :
nOluisse -
ihSrlo
mavis
rnavult
^ malumus
mavulti^
i m^lunt
-•• mS.l§bai]i^<
malam ,
• malui
"'toalueram
mSJuerO''
maljs
n\alit
^ ^i$,lftnus
mSlItis
'^^maliht ' '
. . n^lem
milles
mdJlet
mSllSmus
m&llQtis
. mfiJleftt,
mSrluerim
, mAJuissera
^•^»-.
s '
.^
\*
•#.,
.f'
m&lle
Jk;-
. , . J. ',"
^1. 8m footnote 8, p«|« M.
\
-s — ►
*'
,.■••*'■ .-
'Ap
f mi
ir
A
»" ..
PA&^^aitT^PARADIGMS.
Pre». volSns
Pres.
Fid.
^
Participlb.
nolens •
Impei;ativb.
noli jj
nolite f
nOlltd
nolitS
nolltote '
ndlunUS
mt
.^ k
^if
/
M-
* ' . ^ f 44. Pero.*
V .PerS, ferre, tiUI, latiiiu, bear, carry, endwr^
(<
v.r.
'' Pres.^ fero. . : ^ -f iB^l^lua '
r».' ^-- iers. .\ ■"■'
r- V ?: ftfrt
,Impf: fergbam
**'*y^wt. feram
^, •■ Plup. tuldrj5im
JT-ut. P. tulefo ^
.■■.'" ., ■ ' *
^^L. > „■ ; ■■
.. 'h^'^''^'- feram "
Imj^. ferrem
P&i'f. tulerim
Plup. tulissem'
Jktf. ferre" ,
\t^. tulissie
I * fk>,-;JV*.l:, ^li^tlrus esse *
„, .All. ^j IfttOruA
tetot ' ferimur
fertis feyria ferimini
feninfc . > fertur Igruntur
, ferebaij . *<
•■ .. ■; teru ":" s^ " .
\ ^(. Ifttussunt. •' . *■
Ifttus eftam "*-' '• .
l&tus er6 ^
Subjunctive, , ^ ^\
.ferv' ,; .
. . ferrer v •
• .* latus slra
, l&tus essem .
Infinitivi.
tent
'i 1ft tiis esse
■•av
: -*
v.? .
.1* >
->.,■■
^#s* .
f
n
lAtum III
.»•-
-*-A
,. 011». ferendiis
:;*■:
;»^^.^ ■%•
l«i
'Ti*'»-
. ;■♦■
1 : 11,
fi^* :ierend! ' ^
J5lo^. ferendo *
A^i^ ferendum
> il&Pi ferendo
iiil». , ' latum
Abl, lata
'^ .. '^ Active.
^J*rfs, Sing, 2. fer
I»Ri^tABY LATIN fipOi^
Gbeund. •
.-V
P?Mj?. 2. ferte a,
^tt*. 8ing.i2, fert§
3. ferto .
Blur. 2. fertote
3. ferunto \
45. Bo.i
Supine.
Imperative.'
Passive.
— ferre • —
f eriminl . - .,
' fertor
fertor
feruntor
. * ^
■J' ' t '
-•«^
:'^
»*
— ;*-"v
*
>
"?
':5--
:■■*
V^^t
Eo. Ire, II. (Ivl). Itum, go. FI6. fieri, r«otu. .«m. 6<J «uwy
become, happen. ^***^
Indicative.
Imu6 £16 flmus
, Itis ; fto fitis .
^»»?*^ . fit ««1^,
ftSbam ' .
faetus sum ^'
factus eram ■' t
\ factus erO . ' '
Pres. ei^
Is
V it
Ifnpf.^ Ibam
.FW. Ib6
Perf. il
PItip. ienuQ)^
-FW. P. ier6
./-
11
i*»w. earn, efis, etc.
Imp/. Irem
Per/. ierim^— "^ — r^-
I^p. iisBem
SUBJUNCTIVB.
-**-
flam
fiereoi
factus siSr*^
•r
: I
^,
' ^ faottis es^em^ '" *
1 flu f riii t iiii ii i B. pimxmi.
:-* *
\: S
l-V...
1':
^ Pres. Ire
- '^ Per/. iisse
Fut. ittirus esse
PAKT IIL — PARAI^IQMS, ,
^ I \fierl :'--/■
f actus esse
factum Irt
• ' - Participle.,
Pres. iens, GenMf^iMa Per/. factus
Fid. itflrus Ger, faciendus
GERfTND.
Oen. eundr ,
I^at. eundS ,
A .4<c. eundum ■
^ Abl. eundo
.'„ -Oi^cc. itiim
"^'y ^w. - ita ■ "%-.
,Prea. /Stn^. 2. I
^ Piitr. 2. Ite
FtU. Sing. 2. Ito
3. Its
Plur. 2. Itote
•^ 3. euntd
Supine.
Imperativb.
Pres. 8tng. 2. ft'
Pk»f. 2. ftte
^ 169
^*>.
\
f '•
\%
*<.'.■'" ^-
' /
.. ' /
• 1% *'
• ..
^ • o
• * .
' »
90^<
170
.ik
'pK
PRIMARY, LATIK BOOK.
M»
II. INFLECTION.: EPITOME OF RULES AND
PECULIAR ITIE:^
.'i ° '■
"W Raia^f'
pi: •
i:
47. General Bales for Gender. '
^^.(«) Names of males are masculine ; names of females, feminine.
(6) The gender of other words is to be determined not from
their meaning, but by the rules for gender (according to the end-
ing of the nominative singular) given under each declension.
(c) But as a rule, irrespective of endings, names of rivers, vnnds
and months are masculine ; names of cities, islands, countries, trees,
plants and abitract qualities are feminine ; and indeclinable nouns
are neuter.
48. Nouns of the First Declension. (See also section 1.)
, (a) The Stem' ends in a, and is like the nominative singular.
(6) IRREOULA.R Case Endings.—, . 1
Genitive singular in -al, archaic and found in poetry.
«Genitive singular in -as, in familias (see section 9),
Genitive plural in -um, in words of Greek origin and in poetry.
Dative and ablative plural in -&bus, often in dedbus and fllidhus.
(c) GBNDKR.r— Nouns of this declension are feminine. Excep
TiONs: nouns denoting males are masculine, e.g., nanta ;*' Belgae
(name of a tribe) ; Gotta (a man'srname) ; so, also, Hadria.
{d) Declension of Greek Notms.— These end in.# feminine
«« or es- masculine. In the plural the regular Latin endings are
used ; m the singqlar,. either the Latin' endings or the followina
borrowed from the Greel^ : ' . .
Nom. 6, Gen. es, Aoc. 6n, Voc. «, . Abl. «.
■'■/■"..*•?■;,. .■•, 'M. 1^ in't . M «, A, y ,,, *: -'-^
A :(«> llie liOOATiTE* case ends in -mm, e.g. , K6mm,mUmae; -^
•"■..' ' ' -: . -^ ^ -...'• -:^.^ • ,'■'. • ' 1 " , :
l^Thft Irftofttiyy ii ft a urvlvai fram wbtt wm gnc s a « B p
pUaa where.
deuuUiig -tfa»-
« ;•.
''^•"
'V* .
•*♦
^&.
*
PART HI.— INFLECTION.
.' .-1
171
49. Noun. aft^€leoond Declension. (See also sections 2,"3.)
dative^^uk/ Tht " • "' ^"^S,^^*^«Pt ^^ q»ah«ity, is like the
aative smgular. This o is generally either weakened to u or lost.
- (6) Irijegular Case Endings — N
in^l^^^- ' ^ " '^^y contracted to i {without affect-
Vocative singular of fUiiis and proper names in -ius regularly
contracted from -le to -i (without affecting the accent).^ ^ ^
. ^®^'i*^%Pj"^ '" :^'"' ^" words denoting money aid measures
in words of Greek origin, and in poetry. ««» aiBasures,
For the declension of dens see section 9,
(c) Gender. -Nouns ending in us, er, Ir, are masculine, in urn
neuter. ExcEprioNa : Feminine in us ate names of cities, islands,
trees, e.g., Lortrdhm, fagus; also dormis, humm, almm, carbarns:
neuter are vtdgus, pelag^is, virus. A
(d) Declension op Greek NouNa-These end in os or 6« mas
culine, on neuter. In the pluraPthe regular Latin endings are
used; m the singular either the Latiij endings or the foUowinar,
borrowed from the Greek : * .-' ' / .-"'"'
Nbm. 6., Gen. 6, Ace. on, 6, *Voc 6./
•• OS,
OD,
ron.
n pa^
Hi
OB.
{e) The LocATivn^cMe ends in -1,-etgf. , Oorinthl, huml,'dorm/
SO. Noun; of the Third DeolonsVon. (See also sections 4-6.)
; (a) The Stem ends either in a consonant or in l.» Ip most cases
it may be obtained hy dVopping -urn from the genitive plural.
(6) Irregular Cask ^dings.-No exceptional endings occur,
but a variation, m cerUincaseB is often found, due chiefly to con-
tusion between the conHona^it-atems and the i-stems." The latter
originally had in the singula^ accusative -l,«, ablative -i ; in the
plural, genitive -Inni, accusative -i», and, in neuter^, nbminative '
and accusative .,„. For -is in the" accusative, -e- may always he
used, and j8 generally printed in l^tin. books, the other endings
ot the t-stems (Hmr-U -Inm, -|W are regular in (a) vU, sitis,
/e6rw, pnppt,, semlns, tvrris* ; (b) neuters in. -e, -of, ar; (c) some
names of rivers. a?Mi towns, e,g., TatM^s, Tibdri^Nedj^ii,
~^~''\ '-■ ■' -. ■ • ; ■ ■ .-^--^r^^— r^^^- > Ar----^f , --- --;;; -■^^- r - --..«fc:^^ -
i# ih in»ny Utin texts -ii is retained except injdim atyl proper nunes In '-ittf.
2. There are tiao t^ro words whose stem endii in i#, #tM and ?/«!«
9
4. These. ox*i^»t rut and nHi^f «ouawooaUy tiavf •stu aIim
!
r^
%
'J
'jtK^
t ■
■1
i y
172
PRIMARY LATlIf B00K|
The following have -I and -lum only : Igiiis, navis and continem ^
(which also has -e).
The following have -inm only: (a) nouns in -is or -es^ not \
increasing in the genitive (except cawis, juvenis, arid often mensis) ;
(6) nouns in -s or -a;' preceded by a consonant (except parens and
nouns in -ps) ; (c) nox, card, imher, linter. - -^^^
For the declension of vis, bos and Jnppiter, see section 9. » ■ • ^
(c) fiENDBRv—TChe Gender endings and chief exceptions are as '^
follows; -".gf ''''*'■
MASCULINE.
FEMININE.
r
«I*
es increasing in gen.
pis, vas (vadis)
nouns in -ni*, also
edits, lapis, orbis,
mensis, pidvis, san-
gnit
^ns, fdns, mons, pdns
most nouns in -ex
j[«xcept lex, nex)
kpua, mm tellH»
$dl, s6l , ^ ^
hxr, vultuTtft^ \
card, and nouns in
: -do, -oo and -to
(except'^ordo)
arbor
dos < . ,, ■
linter ' *.
segre«
abies, quies, merces
OS, an
^8 not increasing in
gen.
Is . .
8 preceded by a con-
sonant
NM7ER. V
t^'
aegwor, cor
OS (or^\ also oa
(o«l») •
iter, also «er
aes
/<l*, nefds, vas
(Vasis)
M or as, with gen.
in -dis or -tls .
■r
us 6r As, with gen.
in.jl.
4H*% t» t, men
"v .."
,:-;i.,v:
^) Beolbnsion of Greek NorNS.- These fipwiuently have th« v
regular Latin endings ; of the endings borrowetl from the Greek»,
th<' commonest are Singular, Gon. os, Ace. n ; Phiral, Nom. •%
^fs4
■■r.
PART III. — INFLECTION.
173
\ '
i ■-
I'
Noung in is have Ace. in, as well as the Latin endinif im
, « y« II Ace. yn. *
" /' ? " ^«^^ »«. I>at.. Ace, Voc. ajid Abl. 6. ^
H «68 .1 Gen..i8orl, Ace. emoreni
_ ; ; ^"" '' ^^^- «««' I>«fc- el or I, Ace. eum, Voc. ou. but
these last more often take the endings of the second declension,
(e) The Locative case ends in -i, e.g., run, Oarthaqim.
5t. Nonn. of the Fourth Declension. (See also section 7.)
- -- (6) Irregular Case Endings.— '^^^~~^ — -^ — --
Dative singular in -ik, contracted for -ul
in >w^ *"1 ^H**^^^ ^^"""^^ "^ ■"*"«' found in dissyllabic words
m -ct« (e.gr iacu.), also in artus, trihm, partus, genu
if or the declension of doma«. see section 9. :
(c) GENDER.-Nouns ending in «« are masculiiie, in u neuter.
ExcEPTiON8.-Feminine in us are names of trees, e.g., luurm; also
aomus, manus, tribus, Idus (plural only).
62. Nouns of the Fifth pecliwiBion. (See also section 8)
(a) The Sti^m endl in -e, and is like the ablative singular.
(6) Irregular Case Endings.—
Genitive singular in -< or -e for -el.^ * ' 1 •
(c) Gender. -All nouns end in -es, and are regularly feminine
ExcEmoN8.-Maseuline are die..» and its compound mTrS
63. Nouns Defective OP Peoultar in Number.
. (a) The singrdm- only oi the following nouns is ordinarily found •
1. Proper names of places or persons,' e.g., BSma, JUppuT '
2. Single natural objects, e. g. , luna, telhls. . ^
r,'L *^"*^' ^"""^ ordinarily counted), e.g., aur^ -
4. Names of abstract qualities, e.g., ira, mcitds.
5. Collective nouns, e.g„ equUdtus, vulgm.
(b) The plural only of the following nouns is ordinarily found ■
1. CerUm names of places, e.g., Athmae, F^p^^ *_ '.
% Names of classes or groups, e.g. , liheri^ mdjdres, po$tm
■4. Names of certain parts oFthe body, e.^., fl^,\ '^^ia.
1. In the irenltive and d*tiye ■inirular tha mruUr »»«.» a. i u _ ^
«ftor ft Romwrnant. ■"■»"'■«• wia regular widlng ^i ig ahortaniid to la-
S^,%DU,i» «ometlme* feminine In the Blng ular, chlufl^ i« th« »eow o( a m *i^
■''- - . -.- -A . .. - ■ '
«B».M>lblt^iU
fi"
174
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
,K-
>■
5. Many other words, e.g., angxistiae, arma, castra, deliciae,
dlvitiae, indutiae, msidiae, moenia, nuptiae, reliquiae,
tenehrae. . • ' ^ ,
(c) Many nouns Jound ordinarily in the singular only are used
in a special sense in the, plural :
1. Names of persons, to denote the family or individuals of
the same type< e.g., Catoms, the Catos, or men like Cato.
2. Names of ^ngle natural objects, in a transferred sense,
e.g., soles, «ays. , ,;
3. Names of materials, to denote objects made of them, e.g.,
aera, bronzes, coppersi - »
4. Abstract nouns, to denote various manifestations of the
-^— quality, e.g., «rae, • bursts of passion; siccitdtes, droughts.^
{dj Some nouns have, a different meaning in the singular and
plural, e.g.;
\
SINGULAR.
aedes, temple ;
aiixilium, a.id ; "
copia, abundance %
finis, end ;
impedimentnm, hindrance
PLURAL. ,
hedes, house, palace.
auxilid, auxiliary troops.
copiae, troops, stores.
fines, territory.
impedimenta, baggage.
littera, letter (of the alphabet) ; litterae, letter (of correspond-
ence), literature,
mos, habit, custom ; more», character.
A- *
64. Nouns Defective lu Case. >
(o-) tfeed in but one case : Noctfi, jussii, injtissu, ndtU.
(b) Used in but two cases : Fors^ forte ; fas, nefds, instar, nilvSi,
opus (need), in nom. and ace. singular. , -■ v
{c) Used in but three cases : Nemo, nSminl, neminem .
(d) Defective in both singular and plural : Impettis (^und in
nom., ace. arid abl. singular, and nom. and ace. plural) ;
[diao] (lacking the nom. singular and all the plural); -
(e) Defective in singular, regular in plural : Vis (see section 9) ;
[ops] (lacking the nom. and dat. singular).
(/) Defective in plural, regular in singular : All words of the
y fifth declension except dies and res (many of these have
ncr plural ; acies, spes, and a few others have the nom.
and ace. plural); rws, jus hav« in the pluraj only nom.
__ 1 and ace. ; lUx, ds (Oris), pax, sOl, and many other morio-
. syllables of the third declension lack the gen. plural,
1. Sometimes the sin^ar of a concrete noun is used as a colleotire, chiefly in
poetry, c-g^ jato.^ the aoldiery. 'Agaiiu the poata oUiffl \im thff i plnral tor the
singulwr in order to heighten the effect (the ' p^uul of majesty ').
■^-
PART III.r-INFLECTION.
y- ^
176
.- 56. H^terogeneoiis/Nouns. '■'-,n ■':■■.;■■', .. :!■<;■ ^ ■ ''\^ ''^^vyr:,: '
Some nouns have^ same stem, but vary in genderf " - ^ 1
-JandTfrl!^''""/- ''^ the second declension have forms in feoth.
-^ B,na -um, e.g., chpeus, chpeum.
plural^^? "^r Z ?^ ^^^''""^ ^T^^^ ^" '^' «i"g"l*^ *»d the
ZocmV M ' T^' T^''"^-'^ N-; Plur- «Pttiae, «mm, F. ; sing.
J0CW8, «, M ; plur, ioca,,, onm, n.. (also loci, orum, m. chieflv in
the sense of passages or topics in a book). ' ^
56. Heteroolite /Nouns. , "
■ p.^tSi"'- ""*■''"" P*'*'^ °^ "- decleiaion and
(?) Maiiy nouns which foUow the first declension have a1»„
(6) Many names of trees, .generally of the second declensibn
have also forms of the fourth declension (chiefly the ablsnSulS'
and nom. and ace plural), e.g., laurus, pLus. For c^mu. also oj
both second and fourth declensions, see section 9.
(c) Fames and requies of the third declension kave 'resoectivelv
the^abl. smgular and the ace. and abl. singular of the SIS
(d) Jti^enm, 1, has in the plural geBBrallv* hiaera urn of n,. '
third declension ; while va,,J^, h^1%eyS^r^rwi.
^"J^t^Zl^oZi^LT"'""""' ""'•"■"• Oeclen,.o«.., (See •
ar^ec^^fe^'''^' ""^ ^ declension ending in -er, the riiajority
f^Lt ^! ''^^'*'' ^^^ exceptions are asperBadr, liber miser '^^
W compounds m-/er and -ger, and Bomethnes dexter ' ' :
Adjectives m -lus do not contract the genitive ending -u or f li« "
vocative ending -ie, as do the nouns. ^' ' *^®
': ■- •. ; '•■,-■' -■ :■-■''■'■. ■ .; .'•■ : ■' ■ ■-; .' ' :
ll'^a^dlfr"''^'' *»^ **« T*»*?"* »f«>«MiPn: (See also sec^ns *
(o.) T^e are commonly divided into adjectives of one («» or^ '
**m_teAilnat,om. according t^e numl J of forms uZ' frthe '
dinerenf ' ' ' "
cerminations^nd m ^r, -m,>-re; thige of two terminations in -is
•ty or.-ior, -txis (ef)mparative«) ; ^'™*-^ , ""«tions m ta,
(uinBily -ns), -I or -r. -
^^■■^■■^^'
(ino termination in- tp, -a
■4-
'\
4o)"'As ■ a rul6 all ac
176 > ", PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. v,/
. * ' , ,. ■ ■ ' " "' ■
Ivei^rof this declBTision haye ^ in the
ablatives singuiaff -iitm in the genitive plural, and -taJnaB^ nomi-
native an'd a«6tisative plural. The foUovjfing are except^^:
i. All comparatives ; these have -«, -um, -a (except |)i5Ms). Jfc.
ii. Many adjectives of one termination, viz. : • W '
With -um : all those which in the genitive singu]|^r hayig^ -w
preceded by a short vowel aiid a single consonant ; as Miopif,
veteris, but no^ ferocis or prildetltis.
With -e : veins, jpawjper, and adjectives iti -es, gen. -itis or -idi»t
e.g„ dives. ' ' {■• " '' •
With -a: vettis. • , ' ' .. '
(c) Present participles have -ta and -ittm ; when used as adje<v--
tives they have -» in the abl. sing. ; wh^n used as participles, -e.
59. Defective an» Indeollnajble Adjeetl^^ ^ ^'
lt« s
%^)ll^
Because of their meaning arnjid,^ compluresy paiicl and plerlque
are not in use in the singula?. PtureSj too, is found as air adjective
only in the' plural, plm, the singular^ being a substantive.
The following adjtectives are indeclinable : frugl, tieqiianiy necesse,
hotf quot, aliqvot, and most cardinal nuiherals. (See section 16.) '
\
* 60. Comparl
tions 13 and
To the insi ^
17 the followin
Adjeottves^ and Adverbs. (See also sec-
■■^f
rregular comparison' given in sections 13 and
be added : y .. -
(a) Cases where deficiencies are supplied from other adjectives :
- senex senior or major ndtfr Toidximtis ndtu^
juvenis
vetua
novus
junior or minor ndtu^
vetiistior
recentior
m^tmmiik natv?
vetertimus
noi)issim,us
(h) Comparison can be expressed with woAls not themselves com-
pared, by adding the adverbs magia (more) and maxitne {most).
• ^ ■ ' ■ '
(c) male »
prope
m,ultnm
maturW
nuper
'secus
pejus
propius
plus . ♦
maturiuls .,
potiiis
prius. '
secius or setiiis
pessvm^
proxims
plurim,um
.Mr i (* ^
(maturissims
\maturrim^
potissxmum
prlm,um
nup€rrim£
1. Ambo is declined like dtio, aection 16.
2. Niiiw (literally by birth) id also often omiftefjl,
-- »-
, ,,, — ■ „ - , m ill
PART III. — INFLECTION.
177
61. Numera^./ (See also sections 15 and 16.)
nr^?L^urS?'^^!i!'T numerala up to 100, either the ten without e^ ,
or the unit with e^ precedes.^ But the forms expressing subtrac-
tion, e.g duodevigmtt, are more common than those expressing
. ai'Z..t,\''T T^ numerals above 100, the order is thousand!
iiS^LS^S'"'^' "^^^^ -th three numerals, e^i.
(6) In compound ordinals alter is preferred^ta «ccwne^iw.
fe) The distributive numerals are : l^^||feuli. 2. bim, 3. term,
10. denl, 20 vioeni 100. oentenl. e^They are declined like
* Sth^e^nitive section 10), but often have -umior -drwni
The distributives are numeral adjectives used (1) to signify (.o
nmn^ each. or ap^e,e (2) in multiplication (bis septet, tv^e siven,
onL ? ''^ ' tfu^^ ^^\Poetry), (3) with nouns used in the plura
Zfj^ n/r^- .^^^.ri'^/'ll' (*^^°«Pt that tint is.used for oJ, and
trnu, not term ior three), (4) to express pairs or groups of objects;
(5) m poetry often for the cardinal/ ^? uv^t\ieccs,
U (d) The nunieral adverbs are: 1. semei. once, 2. bl«, <mc6,
d. ter, 4. quater. 5, quinqules, 6. sexles. 7. soptles, 8. ootle*
9. novtes. 10. dedes. 20. vXcle«,.^00. centles. 1000. mUlllg
For the forms m -es, -ens is also fou^ ' «^""es^
. ^1^"* i" ^ singular is regularly an indeclinable adjective
in agreement with its substantive; rarely (generally .in the nomi-
native or accusative) a neuter noun, followed by the genitiVe
Mlllla (or Mllla), the plural, is a neuter noun, followed by the
genitive If to mUlia is added some smaller number, a nounpre!
ceding the combination is in the genitive, but a noun following the
combination is m the same case. ""^*"», ^®
^ „ ^*^ ^"i^^- P'Vjitive sense, the genitives nostrum and vestrum
are used; in the objective sense, the genitives mel. t«l. «u^
Xo'^vt^^ ''*'*'^ '"^ *^^ possessive and subjective senses, the .
adjectives meus, tuu», sua», noster and v^ste^. ^ . t
^u^^^t^w*^ ^.^^» ^^' *^"» *^^® preposition cum is regularly suffixed to
the ablative It governs, the accent being on thelyllaWe^;S>
«nusS^SS;^'^^^
It
vigmti is g^ood prose Latin.
.'
■
^^^^^H
^^^^^pir .'.
1
^^^^r
[^^^MHIMH^H^M^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H
^^^
■'fi^J ' ■ ' ''^^i-'j ' ''■'.^■i '(
' ' , ' "'7'
1 . •
^^^^^^^^^^V
\
■ » ■,/, '- -, ' :5C :.'"-' ^
-"
^^HPP^':
* \
^ f
■■..-■ . ^, ".
1
"■'■■ '^^^,:.., -. - -' ,;"; ■ -..^ '■ ■ ; .
^^^^B!^''' ■ '
a
^^^^HP^'-?i'
1 - * - . ■ \ - ■
■ \:? ".:■ /• • ■
' ' .
'' " "
' - "■" • % »'■-,'..
Pf^'^^ , •■^'v.' ■■
♦
.-'»»''* ■ .', :; .- ■ - [
>j» ' .
"^ -
: "V ■"■'■'•■ ."":i - /
>
*
.*■■-■ - ■ ■ ;-'■ ■ ■' . v- .^
'
■ '--v " ■
t
■ ^^
- ' » . . . ■ .
*
■ - 4 ■
* ■ '■■■.■■ 1 ' . ' ■
-■■■-■ ' ,'■■)'"■
- *■ ,'. ■ " .'-■.,.*./. ■■- ",-
V,
■' •* ' ..- ■'■,-* „
■*p
■■ ; * ''. ■ ^ " ■ ^^ '
1 . .', ' ■ — .. '^
' \\ , ' '■ ' '. '.. _ • "\- ^ .
",'■•• ■ ■ .V .. ' ', V -
■■ »•• ^ '. . >
,^ * i^ ■ ''",-''-■.■■
' '*■" ^- i^- -
■" • ■ ■ ' ^ * « ■
■ ■>' ; ■;.'■, 5-» :.v~-'
■■.'-■ ' . " ' . ■'."-. -.. 'l ■
- {^'n --.--■■ ^ '' '^^^^- -^''■-"
;■'■ ""I ' ,
- ■ .^ ' » ,.■■ ■ ,
^
./ , ; ■■'" " ■' ^ ,. - -„,,-.■. ,. " -^
,,;■-/ .;(|^'^^"7v
^i:--:.' ,v '•,-'.--■
•;.: '■-" -•• „ ^<'-' "■•<-^'
-
."* "-.■' , \ .■ • ■ > . - ■ ;
'::.». ■' ■ -r-'^r '-^p,
'■:-„.. • 'f :■
.1 .^. ■ T ,,
' '"'^ '' wP':
. ■ ■ ■ - . i ^,-
"-, .---■.,.
• , -. ' " > <,'
' -■" " ■ ■■'■■. -■ ' i ' '■■ *
■«. ■.■-'"'(
L' "•',-■•
'..- '-. ' ■^- - ,*..■•'„ ■ ' .
::--■ , ■ •*
-'•-.■■*■,
■• " ^ ■ '\ \'lj. • ■■ *■ ■'■' "■■_ , , ' ■ '
"■ ■ -•
' r ' _ ' ' >, "
"3; ; ■'• - ' ■:!',' ■ - . '' ■■
-h . ■ " ■.." '' ■
\' * ■«'. u* ■ '
. ,1 ■* "■. ' .
* .' ■ " .'•■
•' 'j . " ".i' ' ', . '■ '"^
• • ' .'■ ".■-.'."
' . ■"*"■■;■ J'"' ' * ";■
' \ ' •• ■ * t
■ ^- .. ,V' •• •*.-.: ^^»
.■■_■-,.„'. f
y'/- " '''■-?;,":;;• ;
^'-■-'^-:-y>-—-^-'-
-
,. ' :.v' ■ ' ■ '"'K;'^- " ■
' ':■..■ • -s^ ■ ^' ' .. v^
' .' ■■ ' ■" ' ■ " ' " .
'•' •■ ■ ' ' I- .•.' ".;.'f-" - -"
-■" .
■ ■.-■ ■ ' -* . I ■
' '■'■' '■ ' ^r '" II. >i 1 III 1. .1 .. . .-
• ;-■ **
• *
■■■-■• ■ ■ .-,..
^* ' ...
* ' -r ^ ' i " ' ,
.1 . ' .. " '' " .'•" ■
f-,i ; ■ I- .
.«-.-- ,-- . .
I - '-.-■'*■"
* *
- 'j jc,.- . ■■ ,
»■.-"■-, -■ ' ' .
. ■ - . - " ' ^ .''■'■■ ""'">'■"■ ! ■
'■ . . ■ ■■ " --" ■ ■
■;.... , ^ .. - ,1 ;- ;.., .., *
■ ';. . ■• -, . -■ :> • . ••
' i, '■ ( ■,' ■•'"'
X- ■ --.v^^.^ ■■ .-■ \ ■■
, ■ ^v- '■-': - ■ '^ -,''
> ■■■ - > ., .,
'■■:■■■■ ;. ■",
■•■■-;. ■■■■',■-■.■■■■■ • ■■. *..
■■ -^ y ■ t- „
• "■' , - ■ ' ■ ''v*^'.
''- ■■ * . ."-^'^ *> ■ ,:|-v . *■ ,■■•■,"'■■ ^'
>.; , ' ri. .-■; ...
- . ■ . . ^ -.■■'■ _- ■ .',' ■
:■ ",.
'■ ,-■ ■"■.- , '*.- '^ : ^y./:. "'•^ ■ . . > ■ -, ■;. 1 ■
-' ■ '<«■''." "' *' "■""-'. l";*
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . . . .;' . ■• .
^V^f''^* -■'■:'-:^ '"■',: >. ' - / '■
J ■
. ■>■- :" •: '■'' ■ ' -,;■" ^ ■ ■ Ji^-; ;.•■
' "■-.' . ■ .■ '^ ■ .
■" -■■ '■■'-''■:.■ ■ : ■ ■-.'■'- .'■ NV"'
^,^* / ■■■ '..-^: :-' ."'^ . ■ ;■■;..•:, ■' . . ■. •: ,
" ■':'
,-'■■■*■■-' ■-,■■■ - ^ ■ \ ■■ ■
. ■ ^ ; -■
*" ' ' ■ ■, " . # Ml * ■
«
tw.1^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
\
■A-
1.0 ^vil^
■V lU 12.2
K 144 ■"
110 12.0
t.l
n
1^ 1^ ^
^T
t
/>
^ J^ii..
^^
/-
I..
4^
"■"^i^
-#!
Riotographic
Sdences
Corporation
^^<\T^^
' ^ r v^
M WMT MAM STMIt
WIMTM,N.Y. MSM
( n*) •73-4S03
^^^
^
-•«
«•^'
\
^,
. '**;.
' . „. . * ■ " ■ , '
J " *#■ '' ■*■■
«V
>• '' ' ■... ■ ■, -■'
. .,. .... .. .- ■ ... • , ■ ^ ■
f . # ■ '
■»
: •
# ■ ■;
:^ ■ ■. ■ V..- ' ' :
.,, ' v- "" "
■ . ir . ■ ■ ' \
4 " . , • '
. • ■ ■ ■ ■■'■ . . - -.vi^ .■ ■
\
ft
■ , " ■ • • ■ , .
1 ; '
■'■■ • ■""./ ■"'- ^ ■ ^
^ ■
* ■ ■
.... . - . ' ^
•
^''^' ;:.
*
. A
^.
* * . ■ *
a
•
^^w
• '""■" '. • ' ' • ■ ., ■ .
«
^
. ■ . ■ ■ ■■■>'■
^* .■■
■" ■■ • ^ ■'
f
\
178
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
k'
(c) For mifUf the contracted form nil also occurs. These
pronouns are emphasized by the addition of certain particles,
especially -met (added to all forms of ego, tU and sut, except ^2« and
the genitive plural)' and -pte (added to the ablative singular'of, the v
possessives). SesS in usage is intej^angeable with se ; reduplica-
tion in dthier pronouns indicates em^asis.
(d) In the first and second persons^ the personal pronouns mrve
also as the reflexive pronouns. i
(e), Thia reflexive pronouns with inter are equivalent to the
reciprocal each oilier or one another (including often the preposition
governing these words), e. 9., inter nd» amaimuy intil''' se pugnunt.
63. Demonstrative Pronoans. (See also sections 22 and 23. )
(a) Hie, Hie and iste are often emphasized by the addition of -ce
(sometimes shortened to -c) to the various cases. ^ Of these forms,
istuc is commoner than istud.
(6) For the dative singular and nominative plural of Ule, olll is
found (from an archaic ollus).
(c) Often in poetry the genitive singular of Ule and iste is illiiu
and istius, not ^liua and isti^M ; and the dative singular of ta, «i,
not e{. :;...- -,-•',;;■.>•. '■'■ -0
• ■_ .,: .• _ , -.,■■-- — _ .^ -r
. (d) Of the alternative forms given for the nominative, dative
and ablative plural of is and idem, those in ei are the rarer. Jidem
and iisdem are often, and with greater correctness, written idem
and iM^em. "H *
64. Relative. InterroiTAtive and Indefinite Prononna. (See
also sections 24-26.)
(a) An ablative singular - form qal occurs ; as a relative it is
used chiefly with cunt? ; as an ititerrogative it is an adverb, mean-
ing how f Qnla occurs for the dative and ablative plurat^ — 73?f;~
(h) With the relative and interrogative pronouns, the preposition
cum is (except very rarely) suffixed to the ablative it governs, the
accent being on the syllable preceding -cum.
1 (c) In the interrogative and indefinite pronotthi,- the distinction
. between adjective and substantive forms (sections 26 and 26) is
less carefully observed in the masculine than in the neuter. .
Quia indefinite lias sometimes qxiae in the feminine singular and
neuter plural. i
mmiitm>im
-L- Thcj;(U)f Afc» hunc^Miuhaecth awmnnni o f ttili !
♦
|. Otowo prilwt fitwmm to quoaum or ^ttoown,
ii^'''.y
^t
PART III. — INFLECTION.
179
The two parts of qulmmqiui are often divided by another word.
(d) The interrogative is often strengthened by the addition of
ec-^ or -ruim; ec^ts ^cqut), etc., and qti^nmn (quinam), etc. . I
65. 'V'erb Stems and Principal Parte.
_ The Principal Parts o{ a Latin verb are the present indica-
tive, pesent mfinitive. perfect indicative and (except in deponent'
verbs) the supine.' These give the main stems from which, as
starting points, aU parts of a verb aVe formed, according to a fixed
system. . , . ® "ao«,
The stems of an active verb may be found' by omittinir -re. -f
and -urn respectively in the present infinitive, perfect indicative
and supine of the principal parts. These stems are called respec-
tively the present, perfect and supine stems.
The stems of -a deponent verb may be found by omitting -rl of
tJie present infimtive (but in the third conjugatipn by cl^nginb
i to -e) for the present stem ; and by omitting -us mm of the
perfect indicative for the siipine stem. The perfect stem does not
OCCUf •
,.ip''-
66. Irregular Pbrm» 1^. t|e eonjugatlon of the Re^lar
Vero. ..--■Ir'" -
An^S^^S ^ w'' ■^^•'- *"^ ^^^"^ "^"^-^ ^""^ »«^* (f^m ^^
anr^sc5 often, before -m-, -er- or -er> drop v and contract the
'rZir^O^l '""^'^ ^^^^'^^ ^ ^' ^ .^respectively; e.,:
Perfects in -ivl also drop v before .«-, -er- or -ir- but the
vowels thus brought together are contracted (to I) only before -«-
before -er- and -gr-^ I is shortened to i.
a^^ !f .1""^^'^ compounds also vetd and deinnd, drop v «Isq ia the
first and third singular and first plural of the perfect indic5&3».
in^^^ fr^ "^*^"* ""^ ^^^ ^^^""^ indicative -fire is used, especially
For -ria of the second singular pa8«v« -w, is used, but tarely
m the present indicative. ^
The gerund and gerundive of the third and fourth conjugations
have sometimes, especially after t, -«ndl and -andn. for-endl
and -endns.
^iJ^ V^l imperative, second singular present active, of dted,dnci
^i(J,/er5, IS die. duo. fao. fer. These forms are retained in com'
poun^ except in those cftmpounds of/act«J, which change to -Jlcid
7^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^'^^^'i^
ISO
3
FBIHARY LATIN BOOK.
\
• ■
(d) The archaic
used by the poets.
•lor for -» of the present iii6nitive passive is
Someti^les in poetry -ia-, -tJte- or -«'«- is dropped in forms froi^
perfectain '8l or -xl; e.g., dixit ioT dixistl.
An archaic future perfect indicative in -go and perfect si^bjunc-
tive in -slm are found in poetry ', e.g., fancd (for /ac55), a^^-»
(e) In the \compound tenses of the regular verb, e«se is very
often omittecl'y especially in the future infinitive active ; so also eat
and *»mt, but \chiefly in poetry.
07. Verbs In -l5 of th6 Third Conjagration. (See also sec-
tion 39.) \ V -
In the teni^esl formed from the present stem> these verbs retain
-» of ^ the "stem ^wherever in the foiirth -conjugation we have two
successive vtfw^ls, -e.g., capiunt; in other cases (that is, before
- », I or er) they dVop'-i of the stem, e.g., capere.
The verbs so Conjugated are : capio, cnpi5. faolo. fodld, fagld,
Jaolot pario. qiiatld, sapid t morlor, t>atlor ; and compounds (of
rare or obsolete verbs) ending in •flrredlor,vliol6, -spioid.
Orlor also, though regiilarly of the fourth conjugation, has very
commonly i^^ theipreselit indicative and imperfect subjunctive the
forms of the third coiijugation. ^ ««^
lajjylie
m
6S*-^ D^poneiit Verbs.
*" A synopsis of the conjugation of deponent verbs (which m^
defined as verbs which no longer retain the active forms, bul
the passive forms with an active meai^ng), is given in sectioid^
(a) The Principal Parts of deponents necessarily differ from
those of the regular active verb. (See section 66.)
v' (h) The forms of the. ordinaiy deponent are nott^^U passive, nor
is the meaning of all ks parts alctive. The deponent verb has
^gularly from the active voice the present and future paHicipleSy
the future m^ntiw^r^ha^^jgrn^d alnd the supine ; while again the
gerundive is regularly passive in mcbaning.
• (c) Sbmi-deponbnits are certain verbs which are deponent in the-;
perfect tenses only, Wiz. : auded, fife, ansas sum s g^anded, fire»
, ipftvlsns sum t Hdo, ere, fisns sam (and compounds) ; soled,
ftre, solttns sum. 1 ^,,---.^,
Fid, fieri, factm aiirn (section 46) is practically a semi-deponent ;
while reverter, revertl, perfect revertl (not reterav^ sum) is tl
converse.
/^
- ^
assive IS
PART III.— IKFLECJTION. IgJ
Certain alslof the impersonal verba have iii the n«rf«A«t i^^u
In a very few other verbs both active and denonfinf f«i^o — „
69.
V
The t*J|riplira8tlo Coajngatlons.
AU compould forms of the verb might strictly be called n«r.-
phrastic. but tie term is usually limited to tw" sets of f^r^:^'":
cipri I^l^ll P«"P^^*?«c conjugation, viz,, the future parti-
(i.) The posaile periphrastic conjugation, viz., the Kerundive in
70. The Verl
41 and 42.)
SUM and its Compoanda.
(See also se^tioi|s
Sum 18 compoT|nded with many of the DreDositions in r»^.*.
sonal, It concerns)| obsum, I am against, hinder : «roeattm T am
nrrnHSv' t"""' V"^ ?>/ benefit ,^l;.^T^und:r™
near (no perf.) ; auhermm, I am left over, survive
^Prosum has prSM-, not pro-, before all forn^ of sum beginning
<^^n^^^^ -<» --' * of IK^^ being
fn^s^JZl^'t ^^'^'''T ^*;'" Z^'^y ^ **»« compounds ahs^m, and
praesum (ab.en.. prU-en.). Possum has poten. used adjeotively
71. (a) The Verb e5 and Its Compound..' (^ee also s^. 46.)
_lS^^ the compJL of e6 (e.g., ade&, cireumeO, ineO^rmd
a w^vTmmTX""^ ^r^ P««aiVe forms, formed ^Thi
Ss Jeor ^ti, tr ""?-^"««' *•?•' the Preeent indicative of
qoeo 18 odeor. gdirw, Mihi,r, adimnr, adiminl, adeuntur. Kn \tm^yi
I. Qwo, nLuM ami vfneo are conjugated Uk«
to.
r
'I
18^ / PJtlMARY .LATIN BOOK.
also has'fjassi/e fonns in the tliix;4 person used int^^i
itwr, fr*, iunawm.. / j • .1
"In the pisrfect tenses ii is far commoner^ than /^v», a?ld in tn^^
compound» is the almost invariable form. / ./ '
(6) Tl^ Verb FEBO and it» Compounds^ (See also sec. 44.)
. The/prepositioris with which ferd is compounded often undelreo
chapgfes.to harmonize their final sound with; the letters /, t and h
of ti^ three stems of fero
ex
In
Ob
re
mtb
&a-fer6
af-fert _
oon'-ferd
dif-ferd
ef-fero
In-fero
of- fero
re-fero^
8af-fep<>5
aa-ferre
af-ferre
o6n-ferre
dif-ferre
ef-ferre
In-ferro
of-ferre
re-ferro
Buf-ferre
aW-tolI
at-tiill
oon-tall
dis-tnll
ox-tall
in-tull
ob-tnlt
ret-tnll
sns-tull
ab-l&tnm
al-latain i. _
ool-latani «
dl-latum
e-latam
11-latam
ob-latnm ~
* re-latmm '
sab-Iatam^
(c) The Verb FI(5 and it» Compounds. (See also section 46.)
•JPW is compounded with isterbal stems or with adverbs, «.gf.,
paUjles-l (patefacid) ; aatisjierl (satisfacid) ; very rar.ely, and onlym*
isolat^i forms, with prepositions, as CQnfierl, dejit, infit The
passive of compounds of facid with prepositions is formed regu-
larly from the active, e.g., interficior, interjUl; cdnjuiior, cdnficl. /
72. Defective Vorbfi ^
i (a) CoEPi, I began, is used in the perfect, pluperfect and future
perfect tenses only. (The other tenses are supplied bytnctptS.)
A passive form, coepkis sum, is used with the same force as coepJ,
when a passive infinitive follows. There is also a future parti-
ciple, coepturu», ' ^ ^
(6) MBm»r, fremember, and odi, I hat^ are used in the perfect,
pluperfect and future perfect tenses only, Vith the meaning ^of the.
present, imperfect and future, respectively. Meminl has also the
imperative second singular mementd, plural mewWuigte; 5di has a
perfect participle 6sm, and a future participle dsUrua.
(c) Aio, I say, is scarcely found except in the forms, present
indicative, aid, aia, ait, dinnt; imperfect indicative, diibam, etc.
I. Sv^rdi, mUatum, however, on the «core M nManlaff, h« uilgnwl in tfaa
.vooaliiiliMiM to taUo. not to «H^ero.
o.
PART III.— INPLECTlON:
183
•{d) iNQtrAM, I say, is scarcely found excepfc iii'the forma first
person tn^wam, third pei:8on injiti*. ' ^ .^^?« lorms, nrst
»}^l^^^^' to speak, a deponent of the first conjugation, has in'
^^t.'^'T'^y '""^f^^fP^^ the future indicati^ fcMtn^Z
perfect and pluperfect dndicala?^. and subjunctive, the infinitive
/arz, the imperative yare, the^Srund fartil, etc/the paSlIS
fatvs,fandm &ndi{ faiis)Jantia.^ , "i« parucipiea
JP^^'^f^^' ^ ^^^' '® "^®*^ '"^ *^« firat/person singular quaeaO
and plural ^ttacswwMM. .^ ; ^ «»* ««»ew,
■'!:
73. Impersonal Verba.
(a) Many verba haymg no definite subject, and hence called
Impersorud, are found only in the third petin singular and in
the infinitive. Of these, some refer to the weather (C., Xt S
raim) and some express the- existence of certaiii feefcT^^ «
mxseretypam,itet, pndet, piget, taedet), ««*"^eeung8, {e.g.,
,J^ Manr other verbs are said to be xxaed impersonaUy in the
third singidar when a clause or phrase fumishefa subject (eT
licet haec facere, %t w permissiUe to do this). So licet OD^tet
mces^ est, accidifc (and other verbs of happen^), cSmtai.'fSZ'
reatat, superest, interest, rSfert, juvat " prwisim,
; (c) The passive of many intransitive verbs is used in the third
smgular impersonally, the Subject being contained in the veS
Lt!L:tJ.lTr;;/^^^^^^^^ '^"^ -'• ^^^'* <^^^
neute/" *^^ ^°"*^°"°^ ^^^^ **' impersonal verbs the participle is
k
Inoeptlvea, PreqaenilatWea and'Deslderativea.
(a) iNOKPTivBs or Inchoatives are verbs of the third conjuffa-
tion, ending in -ao6, which denote the beginning of an action, or
the entrance into a condition ; as, odn,u#aod, I become cJSLd
They are formed chiefly froin the present stem of verbs,TiXre
themselves used only in the present stem. ■ ^ •
(6) FRfcQUBNTATiVBS, Intb^sivbs or Itekativbs are verbs of the
first conjugation, endmg in Ho or -.6, which denote repeated or
wgon>m action j aa jaot6, I hrmviish, from Jaold, I hvH. Thev
are formed generally from the supine stem of verbs.
(c) Dbsidebat ivbs are verbs of the fourth Conjugation, ending
Jii-=w4«vwl»efr4enot« tkikmre ho do Bomething; o;^; knurioVT
deaire to eat, I am hungry. They are for^ned from the sipi^e'stem
_¥_,_..
<*?
V
\
.M
\
^'
u.
X
'0'
t\, »f ^
NEPOS,. tHEMlSTOCLES.
185
■ "t
PART IV.
SELECTIONS FROM'. NEP6s AND
WITH, ANNOTATIONa
CiESAR,
.^|> CORNELli NEPOTIS
• t » ' ' VFTAE.
I.
TffEMISTOCLES.
1 1. Themistoclss, Natelis fiii,,. in,- •. .
camassiam clven/daiit «i n„s «^ . ™ " uiorem Hali-
n«n fwgit earn, eed sriit K^TT ■} Q°« «""tumslia
diligent .„4 fto^Ztl^nsZ,;' ''''*■' ^
"'factum esFutbrowl^^^^^SS^^f*»^
186
|»RIMARY, LATIN BOOK.
k
By his advice the Athmia/ns buUd a fleet and became a naval jxnoef
To these 'wooden walla ' thej/ retire in the Persian war.
t 2. Primus autem gradus fuit capessendae rel pQblicae beUo Oo#-
cyra.e6: ad quod gerendum praetor a populo factu» non solum"
. praesenti beUo, sed etiam reliquo tempore ferocTorem reddidit
2cmtatem. Nam cum pecflnia ptiblica, quae ex metalUs redibat
largitione n^gistratuum quotannis interiret, ille persuaait popul^ 6
8ut ea figpOitiS^lassia centum navium aedificaretur. Qua celeriter
eflFecta prim^n^ Corc^raeos fregit, deinde^maritimos praedones con- ^
sectando mare^atum reddidit. In quo cum dlvitiis ornavit turn
4etiam peritissimOs bdH navalis fecit Athenienses. Id ^uLnta»
salati fuerit tiniversae Graeciae, beUo cognitum "est Porsico 10
Nam cum Xerxes |t mari" et terra beUum universae inferret '
Euyopae, cum tantis copils quantas neque ante nee postea habuit
Sqmsquam ; htljus enim classis mlUe et ducentarum navium longS-
rum fuit, quam duo miUia onerariarum sequebantur, terrestris
autem exercitus sepftngenta peditum, equitum quadringenta mfllia 16
6 fuerunt. Ctijus de adventu cum fama in Graeciam esset perlfita et
maxime Athgnienses peti dicerentur propter pugAam MarathS-
mam, n^Srunt Delphos consultura, quidnam facerent d5 rSbus
suis. D6h-berantibu8 Pythia respondit, ut moenibus Hgneis s5
7manirent. Id responsum quo valeret cum intellegeret nSmo, ao
Themistocles persuasit consiUum esse Apollinis, ut in navgs sS-
suaque conferrent : eum enin^ a deo significari murum Hgneum. ^
Slallconsihoprobatoaddunt ad superiores totidem naves triremes
.suaqud omnia, quae moveri poterant, partim Salamlna, partim
TroezSna deportant : arcem sacerdotibus paucisque majoribus natii 25
ad sacra procuranda tr^unt, reliquum oppidum relinquuut. )
Jr*e^e* Tani/brces are defeated at Thermopylce. The fleet engages
^ the enemy^al Artemisium, and then mthdraws to abetter position
at Stdamis.
1 3. Hiijus cSnsiKum plSrtequ© clvitatibns displicSbat et in terra
(^micari magis plaoSbat. Itaque missi sunt delecti cum LeSnida,
Lacedaemoniorum rege, qui Thermopylas oocuparent longiusque
barbaros progredi non paterentur. li vim hostium non sustinuS- 30
2 runt eoque loco omnSs interigrunt. At classis coramanis Graeciae
^geentarum naviu m , i n guA ducentaflflra^t Ath6ai§awii
PART IV.— NBPOS, THEMISTOCLES.
Ar
mum apud Artemisium inter Euboeam cohfcinentemque .terram'
^cumclassianlsregilsconflixit. Angustias enini ThemistoclSs quae.
Srgbat, ne multitGdine circumlretur. Hie etsi part-prdelio dia- '
cesserant, tamen eodem loco non sunt ausi manSre, quod ewt ■
penculum, ne, sT pars nayiunrddversariorum Euboeam superSaset 5
4ancipiti premerentur pericido. Quo factum est ut ab" Artemisis"
discederent et exadversum Athenaa apud Salamlna classem suam
Constituerent. • ^
-■:■'■■■.'■: ■■ • -:' ..'■■n.-y ...■ ■■•■ ' . , ■ ,
terxes takes Athens, themistocles, /euHng the other Cheeks rvqiUd
-- return to defend their oion cities, hy a stratagem brings onTm
immediate engagement, in which the Greeks -win. \ ^
%t 'l^l?^?! Thermopyto exp^gnatls protiiius acce^sit astu
2 nvL' 1 ^'^^i^^^f ^"«^ i^t^rfectls sacerdotibus, quoa in arcelO
2mvenerat, mcendio delevit. Caju^ flamma pe^rritJclassiaril
cum manere non auderent et plurimi hortarentur ut domos suaa
chscederent moenibusque se defenderent. Themistocles unus re-
stitit et muversos pares esse posse aiebat, disperses testabatur
penturos, idque Eurybiadi, regr I^ced^emoritSrumr^urisfiriu^ri^
3mae impenl praeerat, fore arirmabat. Quern cum minus quam /
veUet moveret, noctu de servis suls quern habuit fidelissimum ad '
regem mlsit, ut ei nuntiaret sufe" verbis, adversarios ejus in fuga '
4 esse : qui si discessissent, m^jore cum labore et longinquiore tem-
pore beUum confectOrum, x;um singulos consectart cSgeretur ; quosar
SI statim aggrederetur, brevi tiniversos oppressurum. ,Hoc eo
6valebat,ut^ingratilsaddepu^|Wumomnesc6gerentur. Hac re '
audita barbarus, nihil doll su^e credpns, postridiS alienissimo »
sibi loco, contra opportOnissimo hostibus adeo angusto mart con-
iiixit, ut ejus multitudo navium exph&i non potuerit. Victus25
ergp est magis etiam cSnsilio Themistoclis quam armis Graeciae.
ffe then by a second stratdgem induces Xerxes to retreat with his land
army to Asia, and. thus Themistodes saves Greece.
1 6. Hie etsi male rem gesserat, tameri tantSs habebat reliquifis
cSpiarum, ut etiamtum ils opprimere posset Koat6s. Iterum ab
eSdem gradii dSpulsus est., Nam ThemistoclSs, verSna nS bellfire
peraeverSret, certiorem eum fSeit id
? V
188^
tMMAinr LATIN. BOOK.
I
rt.
aidque el persuSsit. Itaque qu5 sex mSnsibus iter fScerat, eiSdem
minus diSbus trlginta in ^^^m revpraus est s§que S. Themistode
8n6n superStum; sed conservatum jildicavifc. Sic flnlutf viri prtt- v
dentia Graeci& liberata.est Europaeque succubuit Asia. Paec est
altera victoria, quae cum Marathonio possit comparari ttopaeS. 6
Nam parlmodo apud Salamina parvo numero navium maxima post
hominum «lemoriam classis est devicta. '^^':'cc^.-,
" • ■•; ■ - . ' '- /'■v;:-'V-'"/^^'.M •■'.'■' ■■:''''^--"":'^'- ■ T: ■
The jealous Spartam teek to prtevent ike rebuUding of the city xpalls.
^. , . Themistodes undertakes an embassy to Sparta.
- 1. 6. Magnus hoc bello Themistocles fuit neque minor in pkce.
Cum enira Phal§ric6 porta neque magno^^jfieque bono Athgnienses
titerentur, hQjjis consilio triplex Rraei portus constitutus est iisque 10
moenibu» circumdatus, .ut ipsara urbem dighitatfe aequiperaret,-
^ 2titmt^tesuperaret. Idem miiros AthSniensium restituit praepiptio
suo periculS. Namque Lacedae'monilcausam idSneam nacti prop-
; te* barbaroruto excursionSs, qua negarent oportere extra Pel6pon-
., nesum allam urbem miiros habere, "n§ essent loca mflnita,* quae 15
hostgs p6s8iderent, Athenienses aedificantes prohibere sunt conatl.
3 Hoc longs alio speotabatatqueviderivolebant. Athenignsgs enim ,
duabus vietorils, Marathonia et Sadamlnia, tantam gloriam apud
omngs gentgs erarit consecutl, ut intellegerent Lac^daemonii dg
4pnncipata sibi cum iis certamen fore. Quaxg eos quam mfin|iis- 20
siftos -esse volgbanfe. Postquam autem audierunt mOros strul,
Iggatos Athgnas misgrunt, qui id fieri vetarent. His praesentibus"
• 6 dg^igrunt ac sg de ea rg legates ad eqs missiiros dixgrunt. Hanc
legatipnem suscepit Tlxemistocles et solus prtmo profectus est:
■ ^ reliqul Iggati ut turn exirent, cum satis alti tuendo muri exstructl25
^ ' vidgrentur, praecgpit : interim omngs, servi atque- liberi, opus
facerenti. neque tilli loc5 parce¥6nt, sive sacer, sive privatus esset
^ sive publicus, et undiqiie, quod idoneum ad muniendum pu-
tSxent, congererent. Quo factum est ut AthSnignsium mflri ex
sacellis SQpulcr|j||ue constaijent. ' * 30
^ By playing a bold gdih^ he suQceedsin outwitting the Spartans.
, 1 7« Themistoclgs autem, utijLaceilaemonem vgnit, adire «d magi-
" BtrataiB noluit et dedit dperam, ut quam l^ngissiihg tempus dflceyet,
y
lei^-se-udiBgas exapiBCtSife. Cuih Lacedaemonii
1
t t
♦ PART. IV.— NEPOS, THEMIS-rOCLES." ' 189
: quererentu; opus^ mhilo miniis fieri eumgue in e5 r§ cSnSri faH^'
multum Buper^sse munitao^is, ad ephoroa LacedaemSrum accesl'
falpaii^esse delata : quare aequum esse iUos-yiros bonos n5bi- ^
' /;^*l-.t^^-«<JUibus fides hab.r.tur,q
^ ^sS obsidem retmerent. G^tus est el mos, tresqaie IggatI fun<^i
. Thenx^st^clgB jtiss.t proficiscl^iisque praedixit. ut ne prius Ledae- .
P^stqAanx Athena« pervemsse ratua^est, ad m^gistrSttis-^enatumque
Lacedaemomorum adyi^t apud eO, iTberrimg professus est : Athe-
mSnses suo consilio, quo^ commOnl jure gentium facer^possent,
deos pubhcos suosque patrios ac penates, quo faciUus ab hoste
. 5Graeciae fecxsse.. Nam illorum urbem ut p^opflguaculum opposi- ,
. tum esse barbaris,.apud quam jam bis classes regiaa fecisse naufra-
egium. Lacedaemonios autem male et injflste facere, qui id potii^ "
mtuSrentur, quod ipsorum domination! quam quod Oniversae Grae-
ciae Utile esset. Quare, si suos lelat^s recipere veDent, quosi»
Athena^ miserant, ^e remitterent, «urn ^Kter.iUos numquaih in
patnam essent recepturi. 3 -^
Thernistode» becomes unpiPpvlar and is ostracized and afUrward^ ron^
demnedfortreal^on. After many wanderii^a he comes to Ephesm, '
an Asia Mtnor. ^ . i» '
I 8: Tam^n non eflfiigit civium suorum invidiam. Namqueob- "
• eundem ti^orem, quo damnatus erat MUtiades, testularum suffra-
2gns e civitate gjectus Argos habitatum feoncgssit. Hic cuirf prop-25
ter multas virtates magna c«m>dignitate viver;t, Lacedaemonil
legatos Athenas miserunt, qui euik:^bsentem accOsarent,. quod
. societai^m cum Tgge Perse ad Gra^eciam opprimendam fecisset
3 Hoc crimme-abseri6pr6diti9ni8 damnatus est. Id ut audlvit quod •
non satis tatum sS Argis videjJat, Corcyram d§mlgravit. Ibi cumso
ejus pnncipes animadvertiss^t timere, ne propter se^bellum ils
'Latfedaemonii et ^Athenienses i^dIcerent, ad AdmStum, Moldssflm
Irlgem, cunf quo ei hospitium erat, coitfagit. gflo cnm van,,,-
y
^
-Wt.e.t in ppwsentia r§x abesset, quo majore religione s§ receptum
.. 4-
rj
j-y
190
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
1
tuSrSfcur, ffliam ejus parvulaiii arripuit et ^m ei se in sacrarium, .
quod summa colebatur caorimonia, cbnjgcit. Inde non prius
^r^sau^est, quart! rgx eum data dexkra in fidem rdciperct ; quan^ v
5 praestitit. Nam cum ab Atheniensibus ei Lacedaemoniis exposce- *
rStur pablice, suppliceta non prodidit monuitque ut cSnsuleret 5
sibi: difficile enim esse in tam ptopinquo loco tuto eum versarl.
Itaque Pydnam eum dSjJucI jussit eb quod satis esset praesidii
ededit. Hic in navem omnibus Ignotus ► nautis escendit. Quae
cum tempestate maxima Naxura ferretur, ubi tum AthjSniensium
erat exercjtus, s^sit Themistocles, si eo pervenisset, sibi esse 10
pcreundum. Hftc necessitate coactus domino navi8,''qui8 sit, aperit,,
7multa poUicSns, si se conservSsset. ^t ille clarissiml virl captus
misericordia diem nootemque procul ab Insula in salo navem ienuit
. ; in ancorls neque quemquam ex ea exire passus est. Inde Ephesum '
/ pervenit ibique Themistoclera exponit ; cui illo pro liieritls posteft 15
gratiam rottulit. - - , .
' . ... \y I V ^ . . . ■ ^ -•■ ■ ■.■^■0 - ^■--■-^. ■
-^* writes (o Artaxerxcs recounting hia services to his father, Xerxei,
v' and asking for the Persian king's friendship.
, «■ . ■"'■;.-, . ■ ■;;,., ./.-■; ..•■ .;,,.V' . '" .- ■■■■
* 0. Sci6 plSrOsque ita scrfpsisse/Themistoclem Xerxe rggnante '
"^ in Asiam tranalsse. Sed ego potissiwiura Thflcydidl credo, quod et
• ' aetate proximus de ils, qui illorum temporum historiam relique-
runt, et Sjusdem civitatis fuit. Is autem ait ad Artaxerxen eum 20
•S v§niase atque his verbis epistulam misisse : "Themistocles v6ni ad
te, qui plarima mala omnium Graiorum in domurri tuam intull,
quAmdia mihi necesse fuit adversunv-patrem tuum bellare patriam-
^ Ique raeam dgfendere. Idem multS pliira bona fScI, postquam in
tats ipse et ille in perlculo esse coepit. Nam cum in Asiam 28
^evertl vellet proeliS apud Salamlna facto, litterls eum certiorem
f6cl id agl, ut p6ns, quem in Hellosponto fecerat, dissolverStur
■ atque' ab hostibus circumlr6tur : qu6 nQntiS ille porlculS est
lllberatus. Nunc autem cSnfflgl ad t6 exagitatiis a cflncta Graecia,
tuam pj^Sna amicitiam : quam si cro adoptua, n6n minus m0 30
I. boni^m nmlcum habpbis, quam fortem inimlcum ille expertus esW-^
Te autem rogb, ut de»iis robus, quas tScum colloqui volo, annuum
ndihi tempua d$9 edque trans&otd ad te venire patiaris."
ry
'}:
•X
Tl
i tr
el
au
So6:
:a.4-
.■*:;a;i«.
3rarium,.
n prius
,; quarai^ '^
axposce-
nsuleret 6 .
versaxl.
jraesidii
. Quae»
^
iSnsiuin «
ibi esse 10 ' -
, aperit,.
I oaptus
a tenuit
phesuni ', ,_-ye
8 po8teftl5
, . "
PART IV.— -NEPOs" ARISTIDE&
191
■\-
Xerxei,
ggnante
quod et
relique-
en eum 20
v§nl ad
i iiitull,
latriam-
uam in *
Asiam2S
rtiorem
Iveretuf
uld est
jrraecia,
nus mSao
tus est,— -
bimuum
i
The king deceives him with kindness and grants him three cities for his
support. Jle die^ some say by lUs orvn hand. ^'-^^^^^^
1 10. Hajus r6x animl mSgnitudinem admlrfins cupiSnsque talem *
nrumsxbiconciliarlveniamdedit. Ille o^ne illud teZriitt^
emoxuque Person, dedidit : quibus adeS eruditus esfut ' uS'
commodxus dicatur a^ud regem verba fecisse, quam il po eint q^
2m Peraide erant nati. Hie cum multa rogi esset pom^citusTrfitr 5
- jBimumque mud, SI suls m c5„silils vellel mnrnZ^^r^'Zn6
^rtl^T i-"^^": Magnesiae sibi constituit. Namque hane
urbem ei rex dooarat, his quidem verbis, quae el panem praebgrei
(ex quftregiSne quInquagSna talenta quotannis redlbant), I^m-lO
ps^ autem, unde vlnu^. sOmeret^yunU, ex qua oblonium
HQjus ad.nostram meniiriam monument mansSrunt duo • se-
. ^"^;';"™ P:«P^«PPid"«^. ^n <l^o est sepultus, statua in for5 MSg-
sedT«« '''r'"T^"'^^^^«"-^^*P«dpl.r5squescnptume^,15
1 um^rMr/ "r '^^^«y^^^^- --^-m probLus, qu
lUum ait MSgnSsiae morbo mortuum neque negat fuisse fSi^am,
5oppnmenda^polhcitus esset, praestSre posse dgspgrftret. Ideia
ossa ejus clam in Attica ab amicis sepulte, quoniam l^gibus n6nl»
conc6der6tur, quod prSditionis esset damnfttus, memoriae prCdidit
II ^IS'ftDES.
I^^»piU o/Aristides' reptUationjor uprightness, his rival, Themis. '
tocles, succeeds in having him banished /or ten years.
1 ^' ^'i'^des, Lysimachi fllius, AtheniSnsis,' aequftlis ferS fuit
Themistoclr, atque cum e5 dS prMcipata contendit ; namque ob-
it ectirunt mter s8. In his autem cognitum est, quanta anLuret
eloquentia innocentiae. Quamquam enim ad«5excell6bat AristldSsas
>V abstinentzfi, ut llnus post hominum- memoriam, quern quidem not
audienmus, cCgmlnune Jastus sit appelUtus. Umen ft Themistocle
Scollabefactus testulft illft exsilifl decern annfirum multfttu. est. Qui
guidflT" ""•" .'-t~n ^ • - '«'"
cum
po«|^6dan8que anuuiKivertiawt ^i«md«« scrlbentem ut patrift»
1
.#•::
192
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
P»
V;
\
A'
pellerStur, quaesisse ab eo dicitur, quare id faceret aut quid Ari-
Istldes commisisset, cur tanta poena dlgnus dtlcerStur. Cui ille
respondit s§ ignorftre Aristiden, sed sibi non placere quod tam^
ficupide laborasset ut praeter cgteros Justus appellarStur. Hie
Tdecem annorum legitimam poenam non pertulit. Nam postquam 5
^ Xerxes in Graeciam dSscendit, sexto fere anno «quam erat expul-
8U8, populi scito in patriam restittitus est. ;
ffe returns to take part in the Persian tear, and ia instrumental in
having the leadership in naval matters trans/erred from Spwrta
to Athens. .
1 2. Interfuit autem pugnae nav32iapud Salamina, quae facta ost
prius quam poena liberaretur. Idem praetor fuit Ath3ni€nsiui]i
apud Plataeas in proelio, quo filsus barbarorum exercitus Mardo- 10
2niu8que interfectus est. Neque aliud est Ullum hfljus in r§
militari illustre factum quam hujus imperii memoria, jOstitiae v§r6
et aequitS.tis et ihnocentiae multa, in primis quod gjus aequitSte
' factum est, cum in commOnl classe esset Graeciae simul cum
PausaniS, (quo duce Mardonius erat fugatus), ut summa imperii 15
maritimi ab Lacedaemoniis transferretur ad AthenignsSs : namque
Sai^te id tempus et marl et terra duces erant Lacedaemoni!. Turn
autem et intemperantia Pausaniae et jiistitia factum est Aristldis,
ut omnSs ferS cIvitS,t@s Graeciae ad AthSniSnsium jpociet&tem b6
y applic&rent et adversus barbaros h5s duc§s deligerent sibi. 20
He Jiice» the amount of tribute to he paidJa^^tM several members of the
Ddian Confederacy, He dies poor» ., ..j^.
ri 8. Qu5b quo faciliua repellerent, si forte bellum renovSre o3nii»- -^
rentur, ad classSs aedificandS^ exercitilsqUe comparandSs quantum *
pecuniae quaeque civiIRs darot, Aristldes d@l6ctus est qui constitu-
eret, @j usque arbitrio quadringSna et sexligena talenta quotannis
•* D3lum sunt coU&ta : id enim commdne aerS.rium esse vblufirupt. 26
2 Quae omnia pecOnia postero tempore A thSnils tr&nslata est. Hlo
quft fuerit abstinentift, ntlllum est certius indicium quam quod,
cum tantis rSbus praefuisset, in tant& paupert&te dScessit, ut qui
lefferrStur vix rellqueiHt. Qu5 factum eat ut flliae 6jua pQblioS
alerentur et dS cdtnmOnl aer&riS d(3tibu8 datia collocftrentur. 80
Deceasit ^autem fere poat annum qu&rtum quam Th»tniii^oolftr
Ath^nla er»t expukua.
\
8c
c
n
d
IP
y-
quidAri-
Cui iUe
[uod tarn,
iur. Hie
3ostquam 5
Ekt expul-
'.mentcU in
m Sparta
facta est
niSnsiuiji
s Mardo-10
us in r@
itiae vero
aequit&te
mul cum
a imperil 15
: namque
il. Tum '
Aristldis,
st&tem bS
• 20
hers of tJie
• . ■ ■ :;;' ■ ■"tr;
'fire 65n&- -
quantum '
constitu-
quotannls
oluSrupt. 26
est. Hlo
%m quod,
ut, ut qui
8 publics
K?flrentur. 80
mustoolla
4:
t— NEPOS, HANNIBAL.
HI. HANNIBAL.
193
I ■•
n^'. Jealous, ^ ^mne^rJ^UtO,'" "'^•
i 1. Hannibal, HamilcarU filius, CarthaeiniSnsi» " «rl ,
quod nsma dubitat, ut doduI,,, p^™- SiTSrum Mt,
■ -«s imperSeBrts pradentia^™^- , ^ P^^estW^e oste- .
«ortitaine otoct£ n^^,^r^„P»P.".'"» ««"-Snus Vtecedat
, olnum suorum inyidis dsbUitstus esaet 1^ - -1^ T "*"""'
n«™,u«nd^ti..Hta^in,abeZelt^ "^™ »'^'"*'
Ramsm, ^u, d8 sjua voluntite e„la«rer" Z" ''"' '""^^
aUils clandeatrnla ut Hannihal.I ; . • ^"° °I*™° "«n-
.canaili. s.greg^'^^Mf^r^^rdaTlim'r'.'"''"'''''"'»
cum multa d5 fid5 suft Af «^.v; l^^« oaco adut ad rggem, elque
;.j«.....Arra;ir;r..t^rp=-jj^^
caat^profioiaol H cun. Ube^r^^JLrat^tT i^l"
ooepiaaem nS dubitiret dOoere turn mI^Tv- . • J***"
mKs^mamKmmmmmmi^^
IH
PRIltARY LATIN BOOK^
6 tern j1ir§xe jussit numquam m5 in amIcitiS cum RdmSi^ fore. Id
^go jtlfljiirandum patii datum tlsque ad hanc aetatem it» conser-
vftvl, ut nSminI dubium esse d§beat, quin reliquo tempore e3dem ^
emente sim futOrus. QuSrS si quid amice de Romanis cogitabis,
■ n6n imprfldenter f Sceris, si mS celaris ; cum quidem bellum par§r 5
bis, te ipsum frOstraberis, si n6n me in eo principem posueris."
■ Becoming commavder-in-ehie/ b^ore twerUyfivfb, he subdues ail Spain, ,
and marches through Oavl and over the- Alps into Italy.
1 3. Hftc igitur qua diximus aetate cum patre in Hispaniam pronr-r
fectus est; cajus post obitum, Hasdrubale imperatore suffectS,
equitatui omnI praefuit. Hoc quoque interfecto exercitus sum-
mam imperil ad eum dstnlit. Id Carthaginem delatum pablicSlO
2comprobatum est. . Sic Hannibal, minor quinque et viginti annis
~ natus imperator factus, proximo triennio omngs gentes Hispaniae.
bello BubSgit, Saguntum, foederatam civitatem, vl expOgnavit, trSs
SexeroitOs maximos comparavit. Ex his tlnum in Africam misit,
alteram cum Hasdrubale fratre in ^ispania rellquit, tertium in 16^
Italiam s6cum dOxit. Saltum • Pytenaeum transiit ; quacumque
iter fecit, cum omnibus incolis isonflixit ; neminem nisi victum
i dimlsit. Ad Alpes posteaquam vjenit^ quae Italiam ab Gallia sejun-
gunt, quaa nSmo umquam cum fexercita ante eum praeter Hercu-
lem Grton transierat(qu6 facts iahodiS saltus Grains appellatur), 20
AlpicSs cSnantSs prohibere transita concldit, loca patefecit, itinera
mflniit, eflfecit'ut ea elephantus Srnatiis Ire posset, qua antea tinus
hom6 inermis vix poterat rSpere. Hao copias tradOxit in Italiam-
■ que porvfinit. ,,: ; .,, ( :-.,- . ;:_.. .y, .- . . ■ :___^ _ ..; ,_;'_; ' , . ■'^j /■/;■■:-, jt: ^:''
'■'-'■< - Me d^mU the Romans in a aerie» qf baUU$t _
t 4. OSnfllxerat apud Rhodanum cum P. Comsli5 SclpiOne cfln-25
Bule eumque pepulerat.. Cum hoc eckiem Clastidil apud Padum
SdScemit sauciumque inde ac fugatum dimittit. Tertio Idem SoIpiS
cum collega Ti. LongS apud Trebianl adversus eum vSnit. Cum
ilB manum cOnserait, utrSsque prSfllgavit. Inde per LigurBs
SAppennlnum transiit, petens EtrQriam.f H6o itin«re »de6 gravlao
pinrV^ affifiitMT ^'.'l^rnm, ut posteft n um quam dextr5 aequ6 b ene
Hum Bit. Quft vatettldine cum etiamtum premerStur lectloaque
.y\
PART i.-~NEPOS, HAlAflBAL.
.v«f
I 196
L. AemiZi„, u^u^^ ;~ d"» ««-«I^ C. Te«„L et
Hu» Ge»i„„„., ,^ 3upS;f r^ter:^'^" " '^ <^- *-■
•ff. o«tman.^mre. the Bo„^„ oicKUor, a«d mm s^A „ ^ .
hab«ia<»t et Cap™™ „,™TSto SS '?,""''" *^ '»*™
«nguaMis nootfl sine tma dBtrlmenW „ \. '^'""' ^»"*™'
■ que, oalHdiaaim, impe^^tS XX"^*^.^^ o^^"' F.bi^
•amenta in eomibM juvencirum dIlT„«' • T^ °""""* ""*«
«extra vSUum nSmS sit ana„« *^*""'"' """toorum. ut Sgredl
diotSMrem imperii d„^rp^'r' "^''""» •'•^'"■» I»« «•
>-idi«s induotun. s„st^,^^M ^11^ ^n"*^ "^"' »■»
«c^neulem, ap„d Venuaia» V^f^l^^l^ZT'^i^T'"'"".
omnia Snumerare proelia OuHtr Ka. ^ "^*"®*^"- -Longum est
q-ein^Uegr poa.it «Ju^tu^T f'^Tritr^a^dr^ fe ''
n6m3 el in acis reHfif if ««^« j • quamma m Italift fuit.
■ . • '. ', ■"■'■■■ -■..:"■*■",■. ; ," . '
\»pud Rhodanum; iteruri^ anld pS." ^'P!"""^ "I"»™ ^P» Prtms
"' oonwownfi» n«B oonvfinSrunt. «Post id
r
196
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
factum paucis diSbus apud Zamam cum eodem confllxit ; pulsus
(incrSdibilJl dicta) biduo et duabus noctibus Hadram§tum pervS-
^nit, quod abest ab Zam3> circiter mlllia passuum trecenta. In hS« ^
f uga Numidae, qui simul cum eo ex acie excesserant, Insidi&tl sunt i
el ; quos non solum effugit, sed etiam ipsos oppressit. Hadrvlmeti 5
reliquds e fuga coUegit ; no vis delectibus paucis diSbus multos
contraxit. ;/ . >* ■■.'' ,'-:':'^ -■'-■- ':i- :'-,/'' ^-■:>-- y':" -[i- ■;'-'■-'■.-•'■-■
Soon, afier peace %a concluded, he is deposed from the military command
and made a chief ^rm^gistrate. .Some years later, fearing Roman
., designs, he flees to Aniiochus, king of Syria.
1 7. Cum in apparandd acerrime esset occupatus, CarthaginiensSs
beUum^cum Romanis composuSrunt. Ille nihilo sScius exepcitul ,
posted praefuit resque in Africa gessit tlsque ad P. Sulpicium 0. 10
2 Aur§lium consules. His enim magistratibus legati Carthaginienses
Romam venerunt, qui i^enatul populoque Romano gratias agerent,
quod cum ils pacem fecissent, ob eamque rem corona aurea eos
d5nSxent simulque peterent, ut 'obsides eorum Fregellls essent
3 captlvlque redderentur. His ex senatljs consulto responsum est : 15
mtlnus eorum gratum acceptumque esse ; obsides, quo loco rogarent, ]
futdiros ; captives non remissuros, quod Hannibalem, cfljus opera
susceptum bellum foret, inimicissimum nomini Romano, etiamnunc
cum imperio apud exercitum haberent itemque fratrem ejus Mago-
4 nem. Hoc responsS CarthSginignses cognito Hannibalem domum 20
et Magonem revocarunt. Hue ut rediit, rex f actus est, postquam
impetfttor fuerat, anno secundo et vicesimo ; ut enim Romae con- -^^
SsulSs, slo Carthagine quotannis annul bini rSges creabantur. In
e6 magistrate paij diligentia s5 Hannibal praebuit, ao fuerat in ■
bells. Namque eflEScit ex novis vectlgalibus jion solum ut esset 25
pectbiia, quae Romanis ex foedere penderStur, sed etiam super-
6 esset, quae in aerario reponeretur. Deinde ann5 post M. Claudi5
L. FOriS cSnsulibus' Roma legati Carthaginem vSnSrunt. Hos
Hannibal ratus sul exposcendj gratia missos, priusquam ils senatua^
darStur, Ihavem ascendit clam atque in Syriapi ad AntiochumSd]
7 profflgit. Hac rS palam facta PoenI navSs duas, quae eum compre-
henderent, sipossent consequi, mlsSrunt ; bona Sjus pablicftrunt,
^ ^|.r,»m g . fiindfimentT H dJHjeofirunt. jpsum ex sule» jadioftrunt.
./.,^„.
^
551
a
I
iel
ci
— fcj]
*•■■
PART IV.-
-NEPOS, HANNIBAL.
197
4-:
^e i^^ AnUocHus to ^^^ ^^^/^ _^^ ^^ ^
Lanhctge also. /
niTibuB, quSs ei Syria iu«„. .„* • . . , ' "««£«" paucb
g»«it, m «uperir^- " ™P«'^"'--. ipse, qua comfl „„
- i^r Me (^eat o/ Aniiochus he Aees to rr.f, % 1 ^. "
'dilf:;'':**,^s?'p:rr''r'''5"' '^'^ •^" ^-wa aooi.' -
»ibi. quas8oaZ:rr„aM^t ■''e.T «f ««''^^ ^^"C"'»
avaritiam CrsSum "»^1: '• """ ''""' P'"'"'"^'' P«>P'«'
»d. qua aoi^bat e.r fatS^'^:™ rrjerT '"'**'^''
phoras oomplarEs conmlefc nl,™l,- P ««n«ilium. Am-
Has p™e«,„' ibus S bu T.^^itT? "Tn""" ■=' '^™''- »
•S suss fortflnaa Ulflrum fide, o^d 1 H^ ^ '''^' ^"""»"
'e^utinp^^trdrijsr^rtrf r r"^ """-i"""
/
198
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
I-
i'!
i
He proceeds to the court o/Prusias, king of Bithynia. There he plans
to crmh E'fSmenea o/ Pergamum, an ally of Rome» .
1 10. Sic conservatis suis rgbus Poenus, illiisls (JretSnsibus omni-
bus, ad Priisiam in Pontum pervenit. Apud quem eodem animo
f uit ei^a Italiam neque aliud quicquam egii? quam regem arm&vit
2et exeircuit adversus Romanos. Quem cum vid§ret domesticls
opibus minus esse robust um, conciliabat ceteros reges, adjungebat 6
bellicosSs nStiones. Dissidebat ab eo PergahiSnus rex EumenSs, .
RomSnIS amicissimus, bellumque inter eos gerebatur et maif et
SterrS.. Sed utroblque Eumenes plus valebat propter Romanorum
Bocietfttem. Qu5 magis cupiebat eum Hannibal opprimi, quem si
removisset, faciliora sibi cetera fore arbitrabatur. Ad hunc inter- 10
1 ficiendum talem iniit rationem. Classe paucis diebus erant decrS-
tti;ri. Superabatur navium . m«J[titudine ; dolo erat pt^nandum,
cum par non esset armis. linperavit quam, pliirimas venenatSs
6 serpentSs vIvSs coUigl Basque in vasa ^ctilia conjicl. Hanun cum
efiiScisset mSgnam multittldinem, diS ips6 quo facturus erat nftvfile lo
proelium, classiSrios conyocat iisque praecipit, omnSs ut in Qnam
Eumenis rSgis concurrant navem, a ceteris tantum satis habeant sS
dSfendere. Id illoS facile serpentium multitHdine cSnseotitiiros. t
6R5x auteminqua liavi veheretur, ut sclrent, se facturum ; quem
bI aut cepis6ent aut iaterfecisaent, magno iis pollicetur praemio^
■ fore. '-"'-\ --/:'--
\ Hie stratagem results in the d^eat of Eumene^ fleet, though Eumenes
.> himself escapes. , . ,, ,
1 11. Tali cohortatione mllitum facta classis ab utrtsque in proe-
- lium dedacitur. Quarum aci§ constitflta, priusquam signum ptig- -"
nae dargtur, Hannibal, ut palam faceret suis quo loco EumenSs
2 esset, tabellarium in scapha cum cadttceo mittit. Qui ubi ad navSs 25
adversariorum pervSnit epistulamque ostendens sS rggem professus
est quaerere, statim ad Eumenem deductus est, quod nSmS dubita-
bat qiiln aliquid d§ pace esset scriptum. Tabellarius, ducis navl
■ SdSclaratS suis, eodem unde erat Sgressus sS recSpit. At EumenSs
soldta epistula nihU in ea repperit nisi quae ad iri^dendumSO
eum pertinSrent. Ciijus etsi causam mirabatur neque reperiSbat,
Ataman p roelium- statim iiommitt>er e n on d ub i tavlL- Hjorum in_
%■
ooncurstl Bithynii Hannibalis praecepto Oniversi navem Eumbnis
\
M-
'dana
-■' '" \
mn^
limo
lavib
iticis
Sbat 6
tnSs, .
rl et
irum
m bI
iter- 10
3cre-
lum,
latSs
cum
IvSle 1^
[nam
at s@
iros. ■
[uem
emio 20
nenea
aroei
lenSs
iS,vSb 25
3SSUS
bit».
nftvl
lenSs
idumSO
Sbat,
xL-in
PART IV.— NEPOS, HANNIBAL. I99
^salatem petit, quam Sonsecutus non esset, nisi intrS sua praesidia
5SS recepxsset, quae in proximo litore erLnt collocSta. LCe
Tnl (V ' ?' ^"'^"^ '"P^^ mentionem fScimus, conjici coepta 6
6n^,f- -^T ^f ' "'^'^' '"^""^ Pflgnantibus cone tSrui^ neque
6quare,d'fieretpoteratinteIlegI. Postquam autem nfivS, ^^
oppletas conspexerunt serpentibus, nova r, perterriti, cum, q^
7 ir"""'. vltarent, non viderent, puppea ve^runt s que ad sua
7castr.naut.carettul.runt. Sic Hamribal consilio arma'p^-lO
norum superavxt, neque tum solum, Bed saepe alifia pedeBtob^
copus pan prQdentia pepuUt adveWios. P««eBi3iDUfl
The Itomans demand his surrender from Prusias. Hannibai, Jibing
^^"^^f^urrounded hy an armed force, takes poism
1^12. Quae dum in Asia geruntur, accidit cSsQ ut ISgSti PrOsiae
i^rn' Z; '^"'"''"" ^^a^inmum cansularem c.nLntf^ue
^ ibi de Hamnbale mentione facta ex iis Gnus diceret eum inPr(S^ei5
2regno esse. Id posters die Flamininus senStui d.tulit ^'•
. ^^nscrxptl, qui Hannibale. VIVO numquam sS sine Insidils fuZ^ •
existimarent, legatos in Blth^iam miserunt, in ils Flami^mT
X^tji'^T'vT-^' inih^cissimum suums.cum hab.r.t sibiqu;
3dederet. His Prusaa^ negari ausus non est ; iUud recflsfivit, n§ id ao
a se fi^n postularent. quod adversus jOs hospitil esset : i^sl S
^ssen^, comprehenderent; locum ubi esset, Me in;eSS5^
Hamnbal enim tinS loco s§ tengbat in casteUS quod ellvL
.t! Ti^ Romanorum vSnissent ac multitadine domum Sjus
cu.cumdedxsBent, puer ab janua prospiciens Hamnball dixit plS^
Tnlrf "'^^'".'""''''"PP^^^^- Qui imperuvit ;i, ut
«rr T- '1-^'" '^''"""■'^' ac propers sibi ntotiaret, num
«eodem modo undique obsiderStur. Puer cum celeriter quid es^ao
renontiasset omnSsque exitOs occupEtSs bstendisset, '"11^
non fortuito factum, sod sS petl neque sibi diatius vltam ea^
retmendam. Quam ne aliSnS arbitriS rfimitteret, memor^^
ncttiiii'
nariim virttltum, vonBuum, quu^
aOmpsit. .
Wjjroei-iScum KabSre cSiSto^
-»-
m
V
/^'
200
PRiitARY LATlIf BOOK.
The date of his death is disputed. He had found time 'to devote
to literature.
1 13. Sic vir fortissimus, multls varilsque perftlnctus laboribus,
anno acquievit septuagSsimo. Quibus consulibus interierifc non
• convenit. Namque Atti(^ M. Claudio Marcello Q. Fabio Labeone
considibus mortuum in amfc^H^^uo scrlptum reliquit, at Polybius
L. Aemilio Paulo Cn? Baebio TamphilS, Sulpicius autem BlithS P. 6
2 GornSlio CethSg5 M. Baebio Tamphilo. Atque hlc tantus vir tan-
tisque b^Uis districtus nonnihil temporis tribuit litteris. Katnque'
aliquot Sjus libri sunt, Graeco sermone confecfci, in iis ad Rhodios
8d§ Cn. Manlii Volsonis in Asia rebus gestis. Htljus belli gesta .,
multi memoriae prodiderunt, sed ex his duo, qui cum e5 in castrls 10
fuSrunt simulque vlaorunt, quamditi fortuna passa est, Sllenus et
Sosilus Lacedaemonius. Atque hoc Sosilo Hannibal litt«OD^(!ram
Graec5xum tisus est doctore. . /^
&'
:sit
#.
/
.1**
=^
■.•^'
m--
PA&t IV.-CAESAR, DE BELLO GALmco; IV.
2(&
te
)US,
Qon
one
>ius
iP. 6
Cli-
que'
iios
3sta ..
trislO
i et
C. J
I CAESA^IS
COMMENTARII
' I^E BELLo GALLICO. '
J
LIBER QUARTUS*
T
-jif-
#
v \
r-J'
Certain German tribes, the Vsimt^- arul 7V«-/ • i .
. theK^v^, cross ir^a QcZ^ ! "^^"^' ^'"^ ^^«^ ^
-«AeX^ft^ -^ 7^ ^ orsramzo^ion and hardihood of
' ■ < *
I 1. ES, quae seoata eat, hieme, qui fnit annua fti P„« J- « "
. Cra«5 canauKbus, UaipeMs-GemL T^Z^:^-'^r^.' "•
6 anne p<it in amis a^nt, ilU do^ «^a^e^ ^ '^'" """"^ »•
i separSH agri apud eos nihil est, neque Ionriuaa„f.fl^ "
i^inlcK^incoleudloausSUoet. Neql^ZT^^ J«^
,; IjWtSt^ vltae, cum a puerts hallo offlcis aut disciplIna^SL» '
nihil omnlnS contra Toluntitem faciant «f ,t,- , i^ !^
.lOcoiporum mSgnit«di„e homincTJS \tri^«' L"™*»'
^^h^«^„.„ q„ „,, q„t.„.„ p.»pte..Bi ^gumt«nml ^^
««pons I«™ .porta, et lavareptur in flfllnibuf ^ ^
/
*
V
9
(
t
'202 * ItRImIrYLATIM BOOK. ,
T^mir iaeib o/ intei-course with other tr%$» mtd their aJeill in
' ■ -, . ' Jiorsemanship.
i Ht. IfiwcStoribus est ftditus magis e6, ut, quae bellS cSperint, ^
quibus v^^iril^ habeant, quam quo ulWuni rem ad se importSji
2 desiderent. (^ulu etiam jtimentis, quibus maxime Gall! delectan-
w tur, qiiaeque impenso parant pretio, GermanI import&tis non
Muntur, Bed quae sunt apud eos n&ta, parva atque dSformia, haec 5
3cotidi§.n§i exercitatione summl ut sint. l^boris effieiunt. Equestri-
bus proeliis saepe ex'equis dSsiliunt ac pedibus proeliantur, equos-
que eodem remaiigre vestigio assuefecSrunt, ad quos se celeriter,
4 c\im usus est, recipiunt; neque eoruni moribus turpius quicquam
6aut inertius habetur, quam' ephippiis titi. Itaque ad quemvis 10
nuiherum, ephippiatoruni equitum quamvis pauci adire audent.
6 Vinum ad sS omnino importarl non siQunt, quod'ea r§ ad lab5rem
•ferend]iim rejnollescere homines atque eflfeminan arbitrantur. ^ v
■■'..■ . --. . . -. .. , - - . . -, -. ■-' ■ ;^'-."
Tlieir suhjiigcUion of their more civilized mighhora, the Vhii. ' :-
1~ 3. Pilblice maximam putant esse lauden^^^am latissime & suis
finibus vacare agrgs : h5<j re significari n^gnum numerum civita- 15
2 turn suam vim sustinere non posse. Itaque una ex parte a Suebis
8 circiter millia passuum sescenti» agri vacare dicuntuf. Ad alteram *
.partem succedunt Ubii, quorum fuit civitas ampla atque florens, ut
est captus Germanorum, et. paulo sunt ^jusdem generis ceteris
humaniSres, propterea quod Rhenum attingunt, multumque ad'eos ao
mercatores^^en,titant^ et ipsi propter propinquitatengi Gallicis suiit\
4 moribus aswfefacti. Hoscum Siiebi multis saepe bellis expertl/
propter amplitjidinem gravitatemque civitatis tinibus expellc
potuissent, tamen vectlgales sibi fecerun^^c multo hur
infinniore^ue redegerunt. £ ' ' '■ ■
-•■'.. ' '> " „ •,
. Forced ontt «j/» Germany^ the JJ^petes and Tencteri attack the Menapii
"'''' ^ * ^Wt ftd seize their lands on the Bhine.
1 4. In eade^jP[JpH|uimtot tJsipetes et Tencteil, quos suprS.
2 diximus, qui <^^^Hm|iil^os ^eborum vim sustinu@runt ; ad
extr@mun^ tam^i^^|9K^l|>ulsI et raPl^ locis Germaniae triennium
vagS,ti ad RhSniM' pei'rSnerunt ; qu^s regiones Menapii incolebanfc
V >■
le ripam^nftminis agrds~,"ftedmctft^ vicoilqne
^<;5.'
- •!
2r
3c
li
u
I
,.' ' ! !
«J^ 9 !l
A
Pi|T IV.— CAESAK, DE BELLO GAILICO, IV. / 203
4 sea tanbw multltadin» adyenta pertMria ex il» Wi« •.
'pr««,idil, Germsnas tnlns^^SCt im ^ — "^P^'"*
'880 per eiploratores oertiSrSs fact! sine n,«t.i f,- ^.
«»iiDU8, quod sunt m consilns capiendis, mobile^ fif n/.^io ix
'L.^ cr h;^— xs«;L?' srr'- •"■*^^ ^
8«epe rtbu». cSnsilia ineunt, quorum 2Z T^- '- ^ ™"'™"
necesae est, cum mcortis rOmoribrTnZt Z. IS *'° 'T'",""' '
tStem eorum Acta respondeant ' P''""»"* "* "^'-f"
* war on the i^w-comers
enerant. Pnncipibus GaHiae Svocatis Caesuri^,,- - '^'/«^®-
.Jisdmulanda .jhf oTTntimavit ouir;! ^im^ If , ^^"^^"^^' '
1
r -
«««seq„iUt«quoi.per.«beU„™rjG:™ir^S«:l-
'*?
r
204
I
Primary latin book.
^^ .»
II t
10
, . ',-4« Cfemr' a forces. draw near, Ihe Qerma^ send envoys insolently
f^ , ' ' . , ' justifying themselves.
1 7. B§ ^lrumentari^ com|iarata equitibusque delectis iter in ea
. 2 loca facere coepit, qioibus in locis esse Germanos audiebat. A qui-
bus cum paucSrum (iierum iter abesset, legatl ab his venBrunt,
ai quorum liaec f uit oratio : Germ,an68 neque priorgs populo Romano
bellum inferre neque tamen recusare,'Sl lacessantujr, quin armis
contendant, quod Germfinorum consuebtido sit §. majoribus tradita,
- 4 quicumque bellum inferant, resistere neque deprecari. Hafec
tameji dicere, vSnisse invltos, gjectos domo; si suam gratiam
RomanI velint, pOsse iis utiles esse amicos ; Vel sibi agros attribu-
5 ant vel patiantur eos tenere, quos amlis possederint: sesS- tlnis
Sugbis concedere, quibus ne dil quidem immortSJgs pares esse
possint; reliquum quidem in terris esse neminem, quem n5n
' superax© possint. . " , ;
Ccesctr declines to cUldio them to remain in OaiU, hvi offers to settle
^ . them in the land of. the Uhii.
'i '8. Ad haeo quae visum est Caesar respondit ;-sed exitus fuifc
• ' 6r5,ti6£is : Sibi nilllam cum his amicitiam esse posse, si in Gallia 15
jir* 2 remaiMrent ; neque verum esse, qui suos fines tu§rl non potuerint,
ali§n6| occupSre ; i?eque Olios in Gallia vacare agros, qui dari tan-
3tae praesertim multilfldinl sine injarift possint ; sed lic6re, si
^Velint, in tJbiorum tinibus considere, quorum sint lega,tl apud sg,
et dS SuSborum injariis querantur et S. sg auxilium petant :,h6c20
' sS UbilB imperatOrum. "*
^ . <■ "• ■• . ■ .^ " - ' ^. . .
-^ _ ' r '_ • _ ■ , . ' _ ■ - ' ■ • _ _ - '
; '■.,'■ -^ i/ " "^ .^ ^. ^- - - -- .-.-^ ' ■ . ; ■ ■ ;■; *': "- ■ '
The Germans, expecting reinforcemenis, ash ttoo days to toimder
his proposed,' S'
_ 1 §. LSgatl haeo sS ad suSs relatOrSs dIxSrunt et rS dsllberata
post diem tertium ad Caesarem reversOrSs : interea ns' propius sS
. Scastra movBret, petifirunt. N5 id quidem Caesar ab sS impetrari.
8p088o dixit. CognOverat enim magnam partem e<iuitatfls ab iis 25
aliquot diSbus ante praedandl fnlmentandlque causa a<l Ambivari- *
tSs trans Mosam missam ; hos exspect&rl eqUltSs atque Sjus rel
*.;■<'
<ftuaa mor a» iutaip Gi ii Aibi U abalur.
2
3
,., ■'■,
i
' .*
«
6c
. * *
- ^-~-~~-r4
88
8
•
a<
pia^
m ■-; '. " .
I
"■"-i :
TU
ge
"a-«*
V
ea
ijui-
int,
and
mis 5
ita,
[atec
iam -
bu-
Inisio .
)sse
Q5n ';^;^^
tie
Fuit
Ilia 16
nt,
an-
al
86,
hoc 20
ftt&
83
"ftri.
iifl ar
ill- '^
ii^~
PAKT IV._CAESAE. DE BELLO OALLICO, IV. 206
q«I Alp., i„„o,„„t. Tt ol" ; J^'rr 'V"'" "^ ^P°"«^.
«oitatu, fertur et, ubi OceanTZ • ^*^"'-™- Trtveroram
Oceanum influit. ^ «^tupantur, multteque capitibus inio
, in itinera <J,ngreJ,r^o!^^'°'f ™.™ '^8«« revertunto, q«
anteceMiMeni. praeraittei^- eZ?,!' \ '^""*°' <••" «8™«" "
4 B.T>i trldm apatium daret Ha.rr • ^ • »d hfa re» oSnflciendta
«bit«bst„r ut tolT„,„S'°, f"°*'''^''■"'"«P«rti■>«^»
«n^ «verterentur- IZril'''^'^"''*''*''^"'-"' "!««>««-
~ d,S q„am frequentisaimi oonvenlrenT „t d= - ' ^'"> V^
^^^^^^^^^^^^ stmsront, quoad .pse cum oxercita p«pi„ ,
-jThe Otrrmm make An ^^nwarra^^d aUc^k ^ ri^
cavalry a,nd rout th,^ " ""'**^* <»» C4»wr»« orfmnce
r 1^ 1 I. considerable loss.
»«»ti, quod II, qui frttmentandl oausft ienm^
-^*it
■* f .
\"~i/
206
/
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
trSns Mosam, nondum rediersnt, nihil timentibus nostris, quod
ISg&tl eorum paulo ante S. Oaesare discesserant atque is diSs
indutiis erat ab his petltus, impetu facto celeriter ;iostrQ9 pertur- ^
2bllverunt; rursu|3 resistentibus consuetudine sua ad pedes d€silu-
erunt, subfossls equis complflribusque nostris dejectis reliquos in 6
fugam conjecerunt atque ita perterritos egerunt, ut non prius fuga
Sdesisterent, quam in conspectumagminis nostri venissent. In eo
proelio ex equitibus nostris interficiudfcr quattuor et septuaginta,
4 in his vir fortissimus, Piso Aquitanus, amplissimo geriere natus,
ciljus avus in civitate b\i5, regnum obtinuerat amicus ab senataiO
-8 nostrS appellatus. Hie cum frStrl intercluso ab hostibus auxUium
ferret, ilium ex perlculo eripuit, ipse equo vulnerato dejectus,
equoad potuit, fortissimS restitit : cum circumventus multls vulne-
ribus acceptis cecidisset, atque id frater, qui jam proelio excesserat,
procul animadvertisset, incitato equo s5 hostibus obtulit atque 15
interfectus est.
■ |- . -.■■;■ -■. ^ v-.- v.v :.;
CcBftar determines to show no further conaideration, and when the
* leading men of the Germans return to treat untk Atwi, he seizes
them all.
1 13. H5c facto proelid Caesar neque jam sibi legatos audiendos
neque condiciones accipiendas arbitrabatur ab iis, qui per dolum
2 atque Insidias petlta pace ultro bellum intulissent : exspectare
v5r6, dum hostium copiae augerentur equitatusque reverterStur, 20
ssummae dSmentiae esse jadicabat, et cognita Gallorum Inflrmitate,
quantum jam apud eos hostSs Und pr6eli5 auctoritatis essent con-
secHtJ, sentiSbat; quibus ad c5nsilia capienda nihil spatil dandum
I existimabat. His cdnatitdtls rSbus et consilio cum Iggatis et
quaestdre oommtlnicatd, nS quem diem pflgnae praetermitteret, 25
opportOnissima rgs accidit, quod postridiS Sjus diSI mane eadem et
perfidia et simulatiSne tLsI GermanI frequentSs omnibus principi-
6 bus majdribusque natd adhibitis ad eum in castra vSnSrunt, simul,
ut dlo6batur, sul pflcgandl causa, quod contra atque esset dictum
et ipsl petlssent, proelium pridiS commlsissent, simul ut, si quid SO
Q{K)ssefit, d6 inddtils fallendd impetrarent. Qu5s sibi Caesar
oblatds gftvlsus illSs retinSri jussit, ipse omnSs copias castrls
fidflxit equitfttumque, quod recentJ proeUS perterritum eaae exlati-
i
H
5]
^t
I
m
:■■:«
2et
et
BU
nibftt» aipoaeii tubftequ! juMit.
• 17
I
w^
■m':
PART ly.-CAESAR, DE BELLO OALLICO. IV.
207
^"^ '^ <^X^h, and c^ptur^ the Oerman ca«^
^Germtol, entire potent O^T """v"'' '»'""^' '»'"'' '«»'«'".
Spetere Draestarpf n.,;^„. i.- ^«^«"uere, an fuga saliitem
ic^^TS-n^rprrari'siT " >""""" ^''■
«irraperunt. Quo locfl am J! "J "^ mctSB. in cast™ ■
.» %e„ ccp. , ad ,n. relit cZT;sr:Lr
; ^ Oen«an. are .omp^e^ »-« «»<i ™.„j, p^i <„ «, ^^, "
wdtntar:aCXiiu:tmtr -r n --'^ '-'«*'
2,j5e5rnnt, et oun,'ad caJuXm Mole «"* Kh ? '' "' "'^'*"
quadringeatorumtngint».mlli„;fuLt s5 ,^ T™ **''"''"""'
s. ■ ' ■. ■ ■.- ',-.■- . ■ .a
t 16. Germanics bellS conffipf/j *vi.,i^t„ j«
«bi Rh5n„™ esae trtn«un^m ,X'"° 'f. H*, ?'^' """"
«um vid8«,t Ge™»nl tarn Me'iCm tt f'.^t'"'™' '""^•
»et aud,:: popn,, «««.^"eTeJi'-RhTHnrtrr' 1 ^
.tiam quod ma i»„ equitsto. UalhTret Te^ "" ''~'^"°
, """ "" " tn o rnvt r n . . d «. dl r. am„,.u>nd lque curt Mc«.m t^
I«o neque prCi» interf„i..e, p^t fugan. .uLrTS^
. ^
208
r^
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
8 in Tfros Sugambrorum receperat seque cum iis conjflnxehti. Ad
quds cum Caesar ntlntios misisset, qui postulSxent, eos, qui sibi
iGalliaeque bellum intulissent, sibi ^ederent, respondSrqtit ; Populi v
Komani imperium RhSnum finite : si se invito Gem^nSs in Gal-
liam transire non aequum existimaret, cilr sui qiiicquam esse 5
imperii aut potestafcis trans Rhenum postulaxet? Ubii autem,
■qui tini ex Transrhenai^ ad Caesafem leg£ltos miserant, amicitiam
Ifeceriant, obsides dederant, magnopere orabant, ut sibi auxilium
^ferret, quod graviter ab Suebis premerentur; vel, si id facere
occupStionibus rei pUblicae prohiberetur, 6xercitum modo Khenum 10
transportSxet : id sibi ad auxilium spemque reliqui temporis satis -
7futtlrum. Tantum esse nomen atque opinionem ejus exercittls
Ariovist5 pulso et hoc novissimo prbelio facto etiam ad ultimas '
Germ§.norum nationes, uti opinione eti amicitiS populi Rpmani
Sttiti! esse possint. Navium mSgnam cSpiam ad transportandum U
exercitum poUicebantur.
■■■■--- .■:.': ■ ■■■' , ■ '■■ ••';^'' ^ ■ • > ■
;- , ^JjTe igracfx.ds to build a bridge ov^r th§ 'Rhine.
1 [17. Oaa»r his dS causis, qijitls commemoravi, Bhgnum trSlnsIre
decreveratf sed navibus trariSIre neque satis tutum esse arbitrft-
b&tur, neque suae neque populi Romani dignitatis esse statuSbat.
2 Itaque, etsi summa difficultas faciendi pontis proponebatur propter 20
IfttitHdinera, rapiditatem altitjadinemque flaminis, ' tamen id sibi
contendendum aut aliter n6n trS^dilcendum exercitum existim9>bat.]
He then leads his army against the Sudambri, who at onc^ fitt
■ ',;■. .;'i^5n,;i|' :. ./ ' iitto the foTeatsA I
1 18. DiSbus decern, qiliblis materia coepta erat oomport&rl, omnI
2 opere eflfecto exercitus tradClcitur. vaeiar ad utramque partem
pontis firmd praesidio rellctd in fln€s Sugambrorum contendit. 25
3 Interim S. complOribus clvit&tibus ad eum ISg&tl veniunt ; quibus
p&cem atque amicitiam petentibus llberlUiter respondit obsidSsque
4 ad sS addilcl jubet. At SugambrI ex e5 tempore, qu5 pons InstituI
coeptus est, fug& compar9,t& hortantibus iis, qu5B ex Tenoteris
atque Usipetibus apud sS habSbant, flnibus suls e^ccesserant sua- ao
que omriia. «*pr>r«iaverant s6que in sglittldinem ftQ silvga abdiderant^^
T-\
— i
r I
I U'l- T _: '
H'
^
4
m-
3ri8 > ,
ua-90
At,
1
JETe leami
PARt\ IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, IV. 209
i tkdt
the Swhi aho have fled into the interior. Having
hieved hts end8, Cmar retttms to Oqul. " ;
^H^fi ..^*".P+^^« ^^^ ^ eorum finibus moratus omnibus vicis
•echficu^ue inc4nsi8 frOxnen^Isque succlsls sS in fings Ubiorum
rec6pit,^tquen8lauxilium>Buum pollicitufl, si ab Su6bis premeren-
W.rr^ ^«pgnSvit: Su§bos, posteaquam per eiplSratSrgs
ponteni fieri comUrissent, more suo concilia habito ntintSs in 6
omnes partes dlml^,sse, uti dS oppidls demigrSrent, liberos, uxorSS
snnVr* "^ n' <J^P-erent, atque omnSs, qui arma ferre
3 potent, anum m iocum convenient : hunc esse del6ctum medimh
fers regiSnum ^^m, quS« , Su§bl obtinSrent: hic RSmftnorum
iadventum exspectire atqt^e ibi decertSre constosse. Quod ubiio
Caesai^comperit, omnibus rebus iis confectls. qu^m rSrum causa
t^acere exercitur. cSnstituerat, ut Germanis metum injiceret,
ut Sugambros ulcu<5eretur, ut Ubios obsidione llberaret, di§bus
omnmo decem et ocno trans- Rhenum constimptis satis et ad laudem
et ad utihtatem prSfectum arbitratus se in Galliam recSpit pon- 15
temque rescidit. . ^ . r t- ^
Saving decided oiH'
"^ get i^formation
t 2d. Elxigua parte
onuiis Gallia ad sep
%n expedition to Britain, Ccemr tHes in vain to
— ahovi the island from Gallic traders.
aestStis reUqua Caesar, etsi in his locis, quod
_ ^ lentnpnes vergit, matOrae sunt hiemSs, tamen
'2l!l,if'u^'*"' P'T'^""^ contenait, quod omnibus ferg GalHcIs
ZbelHs hoshbus nostrks inde subministrata auxilia intelleggbat et. si 20
tempus annr ad behum. gerendum deficeret, tamen mSgnS sibi
asul fore arbitrabfttfc si ^odo Insulam adisset et genus lK,minum
perspexisset, Mca. ^a^; aditOs cognpvisset ; quae omnia fer6
3GallIs^erant mcSgrifte. • Neque enim temerS praeter merc&tor6s
lUo adit quisquam,Jneque.iIs ipsis quicquam praeter 6r4m mariti- 26
mam a^ue e|s3*e^i6n68, quae sunt contra Gallias, nStum est
^lal L7r:.H^ '' ""''^"' merca«5ribus neque quanta essei
toiUlae mSgriitfldS, neque quae aut quantee natifings incolerent
neque quem tlsum belllhabgrent aut quibus Institatis aterentur'
neque qui essent ad majSrum navium multitttdinem idSn^I portfla' ao
repertre poterat. ' portua, so
"... 4 . .1 ... ,. .. . - t , :
•»•,■■'. ' ■ - ■■"/, ■' ' ,
M- .. ''^ V ^ /.■:..;...:: ..Ixr^^ ■•■.,, ,:,.,• ,,■;.,.,
., -I. :.-,-,:-- .: - ^ H-t.- . .- ■- ;„^-. ^ A - ; •■■■■■ .-..- -.. "v; :,'■ . ," ^x.' : .;.*:- . .^fiv
:•■■■'/
,s.».
4
•I -,
210
PRIMARY LATIN BOOR.
^CiBmr sends Voluaenua to reconnoitre. Meanwhile he receives offers
of submission from several states qf BrUain. Voluaenus returns-
with hvi little infprmcUiin.
.-'■■' ■ V
1 21. Ad haec cSgnoscenda, priusquam periculum faceret, ido-
neum esse arbitratus C. Voluseniim cum nftvl longa praemittit.
2Huic mandat, ut exploratis omnibus rebus ad sS quam priinum
Srevertetur. Ipse cum omnibus copiis in' Morinos proficiscitur,
. 4 quod inde erat brevissimus in Britanniam trajectus. Hue navSs 5
undique ex flnifcimls regionibua et quam superiore aestate ad
SVeneticum beUum effecer^t classem jubet convenire. InteS^i .
cSnsiUo ejus cognito et per mercatores perlato ad Britannos, a comX '
p pltiribus Insulae civitfitibus ad eum ISgati veniunt, qui polliceantur \
6 <3bsid68 dare atque imperio populi Romani obten^perare. Quibus 10
• audltis llberaliter poUiqtus hortStusque, ut lA ea sententia per-
>-7manerent, eos domum j-emittit et cum iis tina Commium, quern'
ipse Atrebatibus suj)eratls regem ibi constituerat, oujus et virtu-
teih et consilium probabat et q«em sibi fidelem esse arbitrabatur,
cajusque auctoritas in his regionibus magni habebatur, mittit.'w
8 Huio imperat, quas possit, adeat civitates horteturque, ut populi
RomSnl fidem sequantur, seque celeriter eo venttirum nuntiet.
SVoIusgnus pprspeetis regionibus omnibus, (juantun^ ei facultatis
darl^tuit, qui navl egredi ac se barbaris committere non auderet,
quinto die ad Caesarem revertitur quaeque ibi perspexisset re- 20
ndntiat.
r--
4/ler receiving the svhmission of certain of {he Morini, Ccesar collects
, • his fleet and makes his fiit/al arrangements.
1 22. Dum in his locis Caesar nSvium parandarum causa moratur, -^
, ex magna parte Morinorum ad eum Iggati v6nerunt qui se^ct^ *
,»uperi6ris temporis consilio excOsarent, quod homines barbarl et
nostrae c5nsu6tadinis impertti bellum populo Romano fecissent, 25
2s6que ea, quae imperasset, factQros pollicerentur. Hoc sibi Caesar "
- , jstifl opporttlnS accidisse arbitratus^ quod neque post tergum
hostem reUnquere volSbat neque belli gerendi proper anni tempus
facultatem habSbat neque Bas tantolariini rgrum occupati6n6s Bri-
tanniae anteponenda* jfldicabat, magnum lis iiumerum obsidum»
irimperat. Quibus adductis eo^n fidem ^?ec5pit. Navibus circiter
lytgglnta nngrffriTfl-^oactlg contrftctlHquu, quofc aatis esse ad (lufl#
Ters
it.
bis
•e-20
ts
Is
Bt
t, 25
IT '
not
18
i-
tnso
PART m-CMESAK, DE BEIiO GALLIOO, IV. ' 211
acoedSbMt duodSTigmti oneririae naySs, ,„»« ei eO Ioc6 «b
oitum y. Tituno Sabino et L. Auruncul5i6 Cottae l5»stls in
Me„ap.oa .tq„e i„ e8s pSgg, Moriacirua., ab q„ib„s aT e™f L"
«non venerant, da«end»m dedit ; P. Sulpicium RofumTJS
. . ffe reaches Britain, hUhasdiffiadty in getting a mit^e
,, ^ io.nding-place.
y 23 His constitutis rebus nactus idoneam ad navigandum f^m
pestatem tertia fere vigilia solvit equitgsque in uS^^T 1
2pr6gredl et naves conscendere e^ se seTl iu Jj A u^ "*
paul5 t^^ius esset ad.inistr.tuLn;rKM It ^TrS
cum primis navibus Britanniam atHmf af«, vy- circiter qufirta
emt naWxa, atque ita montibus anguste ™a« eontoteto Ja ~
pore «act™ aeoundum, dW^Tet suiter '""""'^' '«>»- »
^^.sep^ab. :o.p.4:r^^;^x:s:^ - ■
1 84. At barbarloansUioRomtaorumcSmiiM ■>».„! -
obhfiaca viMfiBuniTn^r1tffin.,u^- . .^. »^^°^ P^^^^bebant. Erafc
s iimm a diffi euh
ni» in alts c6nsfif,,T«A/"'7°*^T^"*^^P^P^®'™^**^*^©m
m alto csnstituinon poterant, mlUtibus autom IgnStfa locto,
r'
^
il
212
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
impedltls manibus, magno et gravl onere armorum oppressis simul
et d§ nayibus desiliendum et in fluctibus consistendum et cum
Shostibus erat pflgnaAdum, cum illl aut ex ^do aut paulum in
aquam progressi omnibus membris expedltis, notissimis locis au-
4dacter tSla conjicerent et equos msuefactos incitarent. Quibus
rebus nostrl pertemji atque htijus omnino generis ptignae imperiti
n5n eadem alacritate ac studio, quo in pedestribus titi proelils
consuerant, atebantur.
f*. ' ' ■'■■ ■.,"■..■-..
■■.■■■■■ ■ ■ .-■■■' {'■■■''''[-:.: -■.{:■'-, , ^Hi • ■ ■ . -^ ■"■,./■,- ^
Coisar maticetivrea to didodge the enemy, while a brave standard-
bearer gallanUy heads a rush tdtmrds the sliore.
I 25. Quod ubi Caesar animadvertit, navgs longSs quSrum et
species erat barbarls iniisitatior et motus ad tisum expeditior, 10
paulum removeri ab onerariis nSvibus et remis inoitari et ad latus
apertum hostium congtitui atque inde fundls, sagittls, tormentis
hostes prSpelH ac-submovSrl jussit j quae res magno ilsul nostris
2fuit. ' Nam et navium figiira elt remorum motii et inusitato genere
» tormentorum permoti barbart constiterunt ac paulum modo pedem W
3 rettulerunt. Atque nostris mllitibus cunctantibus, maxime propter
altitadinem maris, qui decimae legionfs aquilam ferSbat, contes- '
tatus de6s, ut ea rSs.legioni f§liciter evenljet : "Des^llte," inquit,
, "mlUtSs, nisi vultis aquilam hostibus prodere : ego certe meum
i rel piiblicae atque imperatorl offieium praestitero. " Hoc cum voce 20
magna dixisset, sS ex navi projecit atque in hostSs aquilam ferre
* coepit Tum nostri cohortati inter se, ne tantum dgdecus admit-
IterStur, tiniversl ex navl desilueriint. Hos item ex proximis
navibus cum conspexissent subsecuti hostibus appropinquSrunt.
The Romans, afi^ much fighting, gain the shore and put the
, Britons to flight.
aS. PflgnStum est.ab utrlsque acriter. Nostrl tamen, quod 25
X.
C0
neque 6rdin$8 elervare neque firmiter insistere «eque sigMsubse
vJJ'fc^SteSlt^^ef/fe^i.?? navI,^qS*u8cur^5re ^^^o^cc^r'
.2"™!^» .8^. aggregabat, "^^^^pere^ nerturbabw^ J^
^!M.^^^A
,'- -t^
ijiciebantr t^od^imnr animadvertissefc OMsar, soaphas Ion-
:^
■C" *<-•< /
y^>jcx4^^
I
'\, ^
^X7
tap
=^
PART IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, IV. 213
garum nS^um, ^t^m^^diia^ria ifivigia miUtiW cpmplS^ ju^t
Set, qu5s laborantes cb^vexer^Khls suh^di^snhn^&^t. NoZ i
simul in ando constfterunt, aula omnibus consecQtIa in hoatSe -/ J^j'^
proa^55f«i,otu6runt. quod equitga cujsum tenure atque InauL 5 ^^'
capere non notuemnf its« «« j^„_,_^. . . _ _ .
" ^-,. — --~.>-~..« vv*u>AD abuuo uiauxam
canere non potuerant. gjc Jnum ad priatinam forfctoam Caeaart
-/
7
-/-
>JUCJt4'*'«'^i
' ^^ Britom sue for peace.
IMJ7. Hbst&s proeliS auperai^I, aimul atque ^e ex fuga rec§p5runt,
stetim ad tlaesarem legatoa de pice miaerunt; obaides datiirOs
2qaaeque "«pera^et facttiros polliciti aunt.. tJn^ cum his ISgattalO
^orato™ mods Caesaris mandftt. dsf arret, -comprehende.»nt ata™
« in vmou]» oonjscerant, turn proelia facto remlMrunt. In petendi
pace ejus rel culpam in multitadinem cofltulSruS, et V"PterI5
..mpradent«.m ut Ign«scer5tur petlvSmnt. Caesar questuaZT
cam ultro m continentem ISgStis misab pjcem ab s8 pei„„
Mum sme causS mtuBssent, !g„«scere imprfldentiae cLt oW-
edesque impertvit; quSrum illi partem atatim dedSrunt, partem
7dWrunt., IntereS 8u6s remigrtoe in agros juaaSrunt, prIncipCue
^ portion o/ C««ar'. sMps crossing laikr is dispersed by a storm
^ ^ «»»<^ «''^«'c»» ftac* <o^<Ae mainland.
• \^' ^^^ '«^"Jpjceconfirmata poat diem quartum nuAm ^h i«
nere posset, mT, aliae eSdem, unde erant Mo-
^^.l^Z^^'^:,!^!:^'' partem' rnsuiae,^*::»»
L-"-*!
' in dltom p]
wnenWmpetiSrunt.
leoee
'advei
■c
^.K^^'W^'^V^^',
i:^
-A
214
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
The same stohn does great damage t^\the vessels 'which had crossed
with C(Bsar, and causes mtich alarm in the-camp.
29. Eadem nocte accidit, ut esset liina*pl6na, qv^^il^^ariti-' yCL^
f
inos ^^stQs maiitnos in OceanQ effic
erab incognitum. Ita uno temp-^- -^*-
;atae. HemDestas^ affllcBsbatTnei
re
•e consuSjdt, nostr
Qos naV|s, ^
uasg«fe in^n
f^>
\ SaaminiStrail
,aut.
neque
_ iae, quibus reporfcarl poss^ tt omnia alerant, quae' aS J
reficiendSfl naves eraut u^^fi,^etqu6i 6mnibus conltattl'iemart"
in Gallia oportSre, fnlmentum his in locis in hiemem provisum
non erat. ^ o ^
Learning of these misfortunes, the Britons who 'had ^stSmited decide
}t€
,/o renew the war, and secretly gather forces:
1^^-*^
3f . Quibus rebus co^nitls principes Br;
ritanniae, qui p^t proe-
MJloqSkijr !cum'equil:es' eb
. 16 'Jt^
^
^lium ad Caes^krem convenerant, inter s§ «^IIqcSim/ icum eauii«H «d -^
"■^^efi frOmenium K^manlg ^e^gse^mteUsgereii-^lt^^auclt^Um ' ? Vv'
,tHx»tiam angustiora, quo^ sine imfuidlriientis Pac«ar legfenes vfa-ans- ■(>>^'^
/ 2portaverat. ojitiMiliai ictur esse duie^ ^-^-^
y^ '^mmeak^'ue nost^o^ ^r^iKeVe ef^epS ^ehhm, ^r^^ere,^ "'] '^'^^'^
his superatls aufc redita in'terclusTs nemili|in ' postea belli tn^ereridr'^''^^*^^"''^
1^*^^ 3"^ ■^if*^^^^'^ ^'^^f^*^^"]» «^n^JdSjtont. iea<|fte"rto^i3on^"*^^' ■^''"'
^rfitlSne facta ^aulatim 'ex castrS di^c6(iere ef su6& clam 'ex agiis'" ^ ^ ^
dedtlcere coeperunt. «s ''
<:
»1.
6(
J,-..
r7<e«ar, becoming suspicious, collects provisions in the camp, and
/^J{ aJW^''^ %,«Aa«ererf Jleet, '
AM^
w
/
PART IV.— CAteSAR, DE BELL(^ dALtlCO, IV.
amissis, rehqula ut naTig5n-&iMmod5 po^Jet; efiSoir*^ -^A-^-
materia atmie aere a<f rehqu'as reficiendas HtSl^m efc quae ad eSa
^I^.S'^^S^'^^^ I^-. cum
"■*•
.<^f;'
A legion oui foraging is surprised and mrrtmnded hy th^ BriUma. ^''
- I # : - :- Ofpsar goes to its relief.
1 32. Dum ea genintur, Jegione ex consuStfldme ' tlnS^ feS^n- 6
ta urn missa quae ap^ellabatur septima, neqiie klSa^'ldl^"^]^-^
.__. _ _ J,elll ^uspicxone iri^r^d^, cum pars.hominum inag^ remanS^
pa^btiam m castra ventitaret, ^I qui pro portly ' c^trorum i^ .
statione erant, Caesan ntintiaverunt pulvereiri majgrem, duam
^l««fi8et, Caesar id^ (^53 erat, s'u^cStus, al^quid Hovi S barbaris ^^
mitum consJifi^ cohortes, quae in stationibus erant, 'rig^iW in e«m
/partem pro^iacl. ex reliouis d^as in stationem cohortes succSdt^re, '
C-*rMiqua^ armari et conlSSlim sese subsequi ii^it. Cum baulS
iQXlglUS a castles nroofiHBiaaof oi,;;., »1. 1 i.'i-_ * ~ _ *^^
■(
I^gius a <»«fcn\P^oce88i88^^ ab hostibuTpS^i atque
sutoere et coSf^^^^eg^-ez omnibu3 ©JiBHB- t^
«n.re et c^ril^»~ez omnibu3^ ^a^ Sa ^M
' ?4^ ^C^^^ t^ reliJulrf-|,ar^U?'-'^
15
arm!
4 animad
in V ij^etei]
,_»»«*»filtoha^nrmuf^itttd ^de e^s^dla
circumdederant. ^^J-~. , v»iuo cssww
^ description of the British modeoffghti^.toith cilumots^ ' ^J\
. Genus hoc est ex esaedia nil ««« « ■D^iv^^^^^'i**-^' •fTf'^.*^ * -
a 30 ■/;
.^^C"*?re er
recipere
^
^
I-
^16
\ ■
PRIMARY LAM BOOK.
C
On CW... a,,^roach ,he Briton, mlhdrau,, dnd .p^ ,U «rt ,
few daya i» coUecting larger /orca.
1 ,34- QuilxM rSbus pertutbstls nostrts noyitsto pOgn«e temoore ''
3^^«^^ *rb.te»tus su5*5 Iocs contmUitfet brfiyf , l«&p„r; .
barban ijantios in omnes partes diriiiserunt paucitatemque nos 10
iTe'in ""I "'^ P-f csvsrunt, et quanta' ^r^eiri endae
atque m perpetutim sul liberandr facultaa daretur, bI Romfinos
t^^U'^r^'T' ^^"^-«^^^---t- HIS rebus ceieriteTT^n"
toultitadihe pedit^tOs *quitatusque coacta ad castra venerunt
• When the BrUcn. eon^ again» ku camp, C^sar meet, then, and
routs them with great slaughter.
\i^,:l?T'-^' *"'' '»"'"* «"P^riSribus tobus «oiderat, fore
vdSbat, ^t. el essent hosts, puto, celeriWte pertculum eCrlr
I quo ante dictum est, sScum trttosportaverat, legiobSs in J^^
3.mpet„m hostSsier^j^Sn potueAint So terga vem™"t 11™
tonto spatiasecotl, quantum cum et vWbus effl<^e potuSrunt
oimpteea ex IS oooIdSrunt, delude omnibus longS S^ue ^.^^
oils incenas SB in castra reccpBrunt.
Having received the enemj^^s submission, Cmar returns to Cfaul
Jne summer being now over. ' *
"Av
3 A.1V* ' \ «T
15 .
>VI*»
20
J
M^i™a*- . HlFCaesar numerum obsidnrrt n,,^ *- :_cx-uM7^
,4^'iA,i^»-»A-
( l^Br..«/^>Y. • *^ ^'''*'^"' "^^^ ^'l Caesarem dg pace
^^S^c.|S^!!S""™^^™ obsidum quem ante in$s|^S
»"^3pli^a^ eosquy^continentem ife^Shr^'^..,^ ?!zL^:^ ^ ,,
minoctil Ini^
aie aequmoctil li
fci-^-
I
«ore
\ct6
um '
ore 5
da-
'im
os-lo
lae
ios
na
»
■y^y
re IS .
is
5s 20
'^" '■ f
l**^
'25 ^
PART IV.-CAESART^E BELLO GALLICO, IV. 217
im^m;;^"» naves T^^uae.omnes incogs ^cpntinei,.
<i-ii*-^
^_ A defachme^ <ifihe Jfomans, after landing, is attacked by the
^onm, hut is rescued by Cmar. "
cen« aS!! "' ""^ f '' '"' '""^ '^""* ^^P^«^« «^'^^^^ <^ir<'iter tre-^
centi atque m castra dontenderent, Morinl, quos Caesar in Briten 5
liiam proficscgns pacatos rellquerat, spe pLdae adducti prlo
non ita m^n, s«5rum numera .ircu^s^tVun^^^^^^^
nollent, ar^a p5nere^jusseru^, ^u^li^e^YS^^t^^ ^ Y
derenB, celeriter «<t *m5^em h'^titum
-er a<^ crmorem ^^^^)^r%li^ sex con-
x-vrw, li4
itatum 10
sua-
mh^^
:'osteft
■^
armiat6J^vertenmtmag^u*quee6rumnumeruse8toS&.'^ 15^''^.
4/5!er crt«A.«^ this uprimig Caesar arranges his, tl'i^^^'^ps.
38. Caesar
quas ex Brii
2mii8it. (^i^'cum
T^--.:™!^ j?aladi^,^^ ^u^ reciperent, **^ ^
perfugiy fuerant Wmv^A^t^^'
reciperjent, **^ <7
UglQ
/P 7 'M v^xii»co lore (7
'tJ2!?S^«;» ^«n«^«f ma« silvas abdidemnfc, se ad Ca^sarem recg--
*P|^",^^c>m.^B-'g- omnium legiSnui-h'itt coK.
«Mkl" Wt^^'^'^ .^^ PA^f «b-^- mlser4t;^eliqua^25
6n6gI6xerfant. His rebus gesks ex ift&ris Caesans dierum vi^nti
supphcatio a senata decreta eflt» " /^ ^
t^ J^X^^r^^X^
^.
2J8
^RIMA
RY LATIN BOOK.
. '}'^t '■
1, , "i«
■*s--
V
XIBER QUINTUS.
<««««<.„, ,„ Me »/a.„ 0/ M, t^ otkerproviZ "^ *"
SRras^fi„lt.ma™ partem provinoiae incursisJabu, vSaMrt audt
. mifctunt, qui doceant nihil earum rerum DflbH^^l f '^
«noMer expedUion Id Brilain. then ■»«« (n ,l!^ <»<«'»'"« /or
. Tr.^. u,HoH loyaUy ^ ^IT^ *"" "' .'*' ""»'■'"* "T <*«
> 2. Hl8 oSnfectls rsbus conventibusque Deribtte ,„ „;» •
.GaUiam revertitur at<,„e indo a<f exeXm p,^ ^ie"/"^""""
V8n»~t, cimiitte „„,„ib„ hlbernl, sing J" nX^^"' .i™'" "^
summ. omnium return i„„pi. oi^iter .ea^nu^ s"u7g»eri" ai^^
»P« dsmanawvimus, n»v.s et longta vIgi„t/„orinv,m?r
.1 ■ ' **
6
.1
• s.
^ART IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, V.
219
♦
• quid fieri velit ost^ndifc, atque omnes ad portum Itiuni convenire
jubet, quo ex porta ^ommodisaimum in Britanniam trajectum'esse
cognoverat, circiter mlUium passuum t^ginta a continenti ;• huic
I rel quod satis esse visum est mllitum rellquit. Ipse cum legiSnibus
. expeditisquattuor et equitibus octingentis in fings TrSverSrum 5
• ' proficiscitur, quod hi neque ad concilia venigbant, neque imperio
parebant, GermanSsque Transrhenanos soUicitfire dic6bantur
V.-,-. .':. :y:yr':;-y\-:: ^ ,_ : ' '. * ' •
Two rival chiefs of the Trevei-i appeal to Cceaar.
5:^"^ 3. Haec civitas longe plOrimum totlus Galliae equitata valefc
magnasque habet copiaa peditum, Rhenumque, ut supra demon-
J Zstraviraus, tangit. In ea civitate duo dg principatil inter sg con- 10
3^«utebant, Indutiomarus et Cingetorix; g quibus alter, simul
atque de Caesaris legionumque adventfl cagnitum est, ad eum
venit; sg sudsque omnes in officiS futOros, neque ab amicitia
populi Romani defectiiros conflrmavit, quaeque in Trgveris gere- "*
4 f entur, ostendit. At Indutiomarus equitatum peditatumque cogere, 16
Usque, qui per aetatem in armis esse non poterant, in silvam
Arduennam abditis, quae ingenti magnitQdine per medios fings
Trgverorum a flftmine Rhgno ad initium RgmSrum pertinet, bellum
/-S parare Instituit. Sed posteaquam nSnnQlU prIncipSs ex ea civitate
tfc famUiaritate Cingetorigis adducti et adventfl nostri eiercitflsM
pertorriti ad Caesarem vgngrunt, et dg suls privatim rgbus ab e5
petere coepgrunt, quoniam olvitati consulere non possent, veritus '
ng ab omnibus dgserergtUr, Indutiomarus IggatSs ad Caesarem
6 mittit : sgsg idcircS ab suis discgdere atque ad eum venire nSluisse,
quo facilius civitatem in officio contingrot, ng omnia nobilitatis 25
7 discessfl plgbs propter imprfldentiam labergtur ; itaque esse civi.
tatem in sua i)ote8tate, 8g86(]|ue si Caesar permitteret, ad eum in
oaatra vontOrum, bu&h civitatisque fortOnas gjus fidel permissOrum.
Cassar decides in favor of Cingetorix, while requiring the
aubminsion of Indutiomarus.
-^ 4. Caesar, etsi intelleggbat quft dg causa ea dloerentur,- quaeque
eum rgg ab Institfltfl cGnsiliO dgterfgret, tamen, ng aestatem in»
Trgverl» ognsflmer» oSgergtur, omnibus ad Britannioum hAlhi,»
," . ° ' v^»».i»ug m* prirannioum rwilnwi
TgbuB comparatls, lii^litlomarum ad sg cum ducentis obsidibus
avenlra juaait. Htoadduott», a jit filia propinqufeque gjus omni-
^\
220
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
bus, quos nomihatim Svocaverat, consolatus Indutiomarum horta-
3tu8que est, uti in officio m^Heret : njm tamen ^m» principibua
TrSverorum ad se convocatls hos siiJmatmrcSgetorigi concili-
avit: quod cum merito ejus a s§ fieri intelleggbat, turn mStoil
interesse arbitrabatur ejus auctoritStem inter suos quam plQrimum
ivalere, cfljus trfm egregiam in sS voluntatem perspexisset. Id
tulit factum grayiter Indutiomarus, suam gratiam inter suSs minul,
et qui jam ante inimico in nos animS fuisset, multo gravius hoc
dolOre exarsit. '
Coming to the seaport Cwsar /nda the fleet and army ready,
t 6. His rebus constitatis Caesar ad portum Itium cum legiSnibuslO
Zpervenit. Ibi cognoscit sexaginta naves, quae in Meldls factae
erant, tempestate rejectSs cursum tenere non potuisse a^ue
eodem,. unde erant profectae, revertisse ; reliquSs paratas ad
snavigandum atque 'omnibus rebus instrtictas invenit. Eodem
equitatus totius Galliae convenit numerS miUium quattuor, prin-l*--
4cipgsque ex omnibus civitatibus ; ex quibus perpaucSs, quorum in
s§ fidem perspexerat, relinquere in Gallia, reliquos obsidum loc5
secum dacere deorevbrat, quod, cum ipse abesset, mStum Galliae
verebatur.
Dumnorix, a dimfected 'and ambitious Oavl, causes trouble.
1 e. Erat ana cum cgterts Dumnorix Aeduus, dS quo ante abao
nobis dictum- est. . Hunc s6cum liabSre in primis constituerat
quod eum cupidum r6rum novarum, cupidum imperil, magnl
^samral, magnae inter GallSs auctSritatis c<5gn6verat. AccSdSbat
hac, quod in concilio AeduSrum Dumnorix dixerat sibi a Caesare
, ^ rSgnum civitatis deferrl; quod dictum Aedul graviter ferSbant 28
-neque recilsandl aut dfiprecandl causa legatos ad Caesarem mittere *
SaudSbant. Id factum ex suls hospitibus Caesar cSgnSverat. Ill©
omnibus prtmo precibus peterecontendit, ut in Gallia relinquerS-
tur ; partim quod InsuStus navigandl mare timSret ; partim quod
Arehgionibus impedlrl s6b6 diceret. Posteaquam M obstinate sibi»
negarl vidit, omnI spS impetrandl adfimpta prlncipSs Galliae
soUicitare, sSvocare singulflg hortarique coepit, utI in continenti
5reman6rent ; mettt territare: nfin «inn
__„._..,___ _ lUIL, — —
€ftya&^
ndbUitate Bpolifafifcur ; id^se consilium Caesarii^ ut, quCw in
:-#
PART IV.— ?t!AESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, V. 221
cdnapecta Galliae interficere verSretur, hos omnes in Britanniam
etraductos necaret; fidem reliqula interponere, jOsjurandum pos-
cere, ut, quod esse ex tisu Galliae intellexissent, communi consilio
administrarent. Haec a compluribus ad Caesarem defergbantur.
Cxsar delays hia departure in order to check disaffection.
Dumnorix flees, btU is overtaken and slain.
1 7. Qua rS c6gnit(fi, Caesar, quod tantum civitati Aeduae dlgnita- 6
tis tribuebat, coercendum atque deterrendum, quibuscumque rgbus
1^,2 posset, Dumnorigem statuebafc; quod longius ejus amentiam prS-
gredl videbat prSspiciendum, nS quid sibi ac rei pilblicae nocgre
3 posset. Itaque digs circiter vigintl quinque in eo loco commo-
ratus, quod Corus ventus navigationem impedigbat, qui mggnamlO
partem omnia temporis in his locls flare consuevit, dabat operam,
ut in oflSdo Dumnorigem contineret, nihilC tamen secius omnia
*gju8 co^a cognosceret; tandem Moneam nactus tempestatem
SmllifcS^quitgsque conscendere in naves jubet. At omnium im-
I>eJ*fs animis, Dumnorix cum equitibus Aeduorum a castrlsis
6 Ini»6iente Caesare domum discgdere coepit. Qua rg nuntiata Caesar
irmissa profectione^atque omnibus rSbus postpositis mfignam
partem equitattls ad eum Insequendum mittit, retrahlque imperat ;
781 vim faciat neque pareat, interfici jubet, nihil hunc sg absente
pr6 sftnS factflrum arbitratus, qui praesentis imperium neglgxisset. 20
8llle enim wvocatus resistere ac sg mantl dgfendere suSrumque
fidem implSrftre coepit saepe clamitans llberum sg llberaeque esse
9clvitati8. Ell, ut erat imperatum, circumsistunt hominem atque
interficiunt ; at equitgs Aedul ad Caesarem onmgs revertuntur.
Cofsar crosses over to Britain and lands unopposed.
1 8. His rSbus ij^s Lab'iglis'm'continente cum tribus Iegi6nibu8 25
et equitum mlllibus duSbus relicts, ut porttls tugrgtur et rem
frttmentariam prSvidgret, quaeque in Gallia gererentur cSgnS-
«sceret, cSnwliuijique pr6 tempore et pr5 rg caperet, ippe cum quli-
que legiSnibus U part numero ecjuitum, quern in continent! rell-
querat, ad solis occftsum nftvgs solvit, et Ignl AfricS prfivectus»
media circiter nocte ventS intermissfi cursum n«n tenuit, et longius
delatufl ttogtaT4»rta4flw^mb8i i >iHfei-ft BAanniam relTgtam cOni|wut. ^
J Turn rarsua ftestOa commatfttiOnera secQtus rgmis contendit, ut
.'H*^:.%
222
^IMARY LATIN BOd
?OOK.
earn partem Insulae caperet, qua optimum esse egressum superioro '
iaestate cognoverat. Qua in re admodum fuifc miUfcum virtus
laucknda qxa vectpriis gravibusque navigils non intermisso remi.
5gandi kbore longSrum navium cursum adaequarunt. Accessum
est ad Britanniam omnibus navibus merldiano f^re tempore, neque 5
6in eo ,loc6 hostis est visua; sed. ut postea Caesar ex captLs
cSgnovit, cum mSgnae manus eo convenissent, multitQdine navium
perterritae quae cum annotinis privatlsque, quas sul quisque
commodi fecerat, amplius octingentae tlnS erant visaei tempore, a ^
ntore discesserant ao se in superiSra loca abdiderani \
'\
f*^ «■ y
f.i
'*:
\
J^ngTa^ons gnarcTunth ike ^h^e deuces W^]he inierior
and drives the cn^my from one of their atrongholdk
-*- 0. Caesar ^xposito exercita efe loco mstrls idoneo capj ubi ex '
^^^tivte cognovit, quo in loco hostium popiae consedissenfc, cohor-
.^tibjij decern ad mare reUctls et equitibus trecentls, qui presidio
..navibus essent, ^ i^rtia vigilia ad bosses contendit. eo minus '
^y^rilus j^vibus, quod in lltore molli a^ue' aperto .deligataa ad 15
, . _artcpram relmquebat; et praesidio navibuS^ue Q. Atrium prae.
.....^ieoit.- apse nocta progressus mlllia passuum circiter duodpcim
^.^^tHim c6pia« conspicatusest, im, «quitata atque essedls ad '
:'i^-i^T^J^'^' «^ loc^%i6re nostros pr^hibere et proelium
^ ^ ^^committere coepSrunt^ ^^jjij^quit^ta se in silvSs abdi-20
^;,.;d6runt locum nacti gg^eg^^ et JK et opere mOnltum, quem
. domesticI«belll, ut vidsti^ntur, W^ jam ante pra^paraverant ;
'.^nam crebrls arboribus succMs omn6s introitOs «rant praeclilsl.
elpsi ex Silvia ran propQgnabant nostrosque intra mtoltiSngs in- •
7 gredl prohibgbant. At mllitgs legionis septimae testadine facta et 25
aggere ad mOnltiSngs adjecto locum c§p6runt eOsque ex silvls
SexpulSrunt panels vulneribus acceptls. Sed eSs fugientSs longius
Caesar prSsequI vetuit, efc quod loci natOram IgnOrabat, et quod
To^U ^""^^ ^^^ constopta monition! castrOrum tompus jelinqul
A» trwjpa artmting out in purmfy, mm comes of serioJ damage
earned to the Jleet by a storm, s
1. 10. Postrldie ejus difil mftne tripertltc mllitSs equitfisque ^ '
T¥
.|^^,.,:
fi>iJ^
•: PART IV.— CAESAR, DE BELLO GALLICO, V. 223
2aliquantuin itineris progressis, cum jam extrgml e^enfc in pro-
spectu, equites a Q. Atrio ad Caesarem venerunt.qui nuntiarent
supenorenocte maxima coorta tempestate pr(^pe omnes naves
a^ctas atque m lltore gj^cta^ esse, quod neque ancorae fungsque
- ^subgisterent, neque nautae gubematoresque vim tempestatis patl.6
3 possent ; itaque e^^eo concursH navium magnum esse incommodum
acceptum.
Ca^aar returns, arranges for the repairing, of these losses, and again
. sets out against the enemy, now under Cassivdlaunus.
l-^ttr Bis rebus cognit^ Caesar legiones equitatumque revocarl
2atq_ue m itinere resistere jubet, ipse ad naves revertitur; eadem
fere, quae ex nuntils littensque c6gn6veratT>oram perspicit, sic ut 10
amissis circiter quadraginta navibus reliqua^stamen refici posse
amagno negotio viderentur. Itaque ex legionibiSWs d6lil
4ex contmenti^lios arcessi jubet; Labieno scrlbifc, utTmJairSia-
nmas posset, iis legiSnibus, quae sunt apud eum. nSv^s Instituat.
5 Ipse, etsi res erat multae operae ac laboris, tamen commodissimum 15
ess^stateuit omnes^naves subdflcl «t cum castris una mOnltione
econjungi, In his rebus circiter dies decem cSnsflMit, n§ noctumis
Tquidem temponbus ad laborem mllitum intermissls. Subductis
navibus castrlsque 6gregig mamtls easdem copiSs, quas ante, prae- "
sidio navibus rellquit: ipse eodem, unde redierat, proficiscitur;' aoV
8Eo cum vemsset, mSjorSs jam nndique in eum locum copiae ^
BntannSrum convgnerant, summa imperil belllque administrundl ,
cpmmflni c^nsiliS permissS Cassivellauno, cfljus fings a maritimis >
cIvUAtibus fltlmen dividit, quod appellntur Tamesis, ft marl circiter
jmlllia passuum octoginta. Huic superiore tempore cum reliquls26
-clvitatibus continentia bella intercesserant : seVnostro advent^
permoti Bjitonnl hunc toti bello imperiSque praefScerant.
A description of the people, product» and dimate qf Britain
L *?; ^^^^^^^i'^^ P'»" interior ab ils incolitur, qu5s nfttfls in
. ^P«I menioria proditum dipunt; maritima pars ab i^ qu^
ferlr^am V^'Tf ""^ ^^ ^''^«^^ tra„Bi.Lt(c^uIoL\ 30-
fere ifa nommibus clviWtum appeUtotur, quibus orti ex dvitA-
tibus eg pervsner unt) et bellC illat<^ jbi remftnB6runt at.„. ..1
»oulu ..u.peiunt . H omi iiumestlnftnltamamdaerelXL^^
■r%-"
I -■■".-■
.224
■•>(-
f
I
r-
' » "
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
tur [aut aere] aut numte «ireo aut talels ferrete ad certum pondua'
aere Otuntur importaW. MSteria ottjusque generis, ut in a£i» 5
..est praeter f^m a^ne abietem. ^ Leporem et g^mZT^.
au^ r*? '*»»«■' P-"»"'; l»e"=-tama.val„»ta^m,v„lupttS,
togoriU '^,«'"'''«■"1«««««' 1»^ in GaUis, remissiLbua '
■, •^.. "/;:,; T*e geography ij/^ &^tti»,;_ • ; ; , V
I 13. Ihsula natflrt {riquetra, cflju, flnum latus ert contr&Gal-M
bam Huju. kten» alter angvdus. qui est «1 Cantium, q„8 fert
. Jies ex. GalbS navss^appelluntur. ^. orientem soIe« , WeSr ■'
■ «d mendiem speotat. Hae pertinet eirciter mlUia passu™ qX-
jgenta. Alterum vergit ad Hisptaiam a^ue oocid^m .solem •
qus ez ^iarte est Hibemia, dimidio minor, ut aestimMur. "»»' «
Br. ann|a: aed pari spati« transmissfls atque oz Galli» est in
3B„tanmam. In hoc mediS "cur^ est Insula, quae appeUit"
Mona; oomplflrss pratorea minSres subjectae Insulae eZw
.!l'J^ T """""^ sortpstant dies continues trfcinti
bL ^'"»r°"""- ^"^ ""•" ^' -^ P'^oonationibus ^per^»
« menti noctes vidSbSmus. Hajua est longitada lateris, ut fert
eUlorum opmio, septingentorum mflliura. Tertiim, est eontrt sep-
tentnanss ; cul parti nfllla est. object» ten», sed Sjus angulus
Uteris mtams ad GermSniam speotat. Hoc mlllia passuum «,tia- 35
Jgenta in longitlldmem psse eastimitur. Ita omnia Insula oat ia
oircuita vIciSs centum mlllium passuum. T^T^^^v "^ ^ ' ■
S-
, ,> • ^t manner» and cudom» qf the Britant. "■'■'•"
1 14. Ex his omnibus longg stint hQm^ssiml, iur-Gantium incb^
lunt, quae regis, est maritima omnis, neque multum a GaUicft
^^ Sdifferunt c6nsu6tadine. InteriorSs plSrtque frflmonta n6n serunt ao
sed l«cte et came vivunt pellibusque sunt vestltl. Omnfis vSrC s6
Bntannl vitrO Inficiunt, quod caeruleum efficit colorem, atque h(5c
ahomdiarca ^t i« ptlpia a^peotfl ; oapin^qim nunt prSuuuug,
* ««-^''j-^liTtl^
-■awWaBisaicsi-i
T
riumerus. tJtun-
«i certum pondus
klbunji in medifcer-
3xigua, est copia ;
iris, ut in Gallia, 6
gallinam et fin-
animl voluptatia-;
lia, remissioribus '
I est contra Gal- 10
intium, quo fere .
soleni, inferior
' passuum quln-
identem .solem ;
sstimatur, quamis
X Gallia est in
luae appellatur
3ulae exlstiman-
ntinuos tiiginta
bionibus reperi-20
3e quam in con-
lateris, ut fert
est contra sep-
i §jus angulus
passuum octin- 25
a insula est ia
Cantium inobi
turn & Gallicft
» n6n serunt, 30
)mne8 vSrO s6
em, atque h(5c
■tot prgmiflBg^
"tt. ->
>» ■ X.*
»-"s
Ts-
*•*< {/
^
f,'--
'::J-^''K.
iCJ
j.:
' ls„ « •
•«
t -^
'"'^•si^'i.
■ ."'
■\>
4:
>
■'-J
*■
''^
»>i'>"«'v[''''m^f>wfmtmmmgffmmmii
■K
•
^.
'Vi;.
1^^ '^',
>■ •:■>:
«-i- A
'l^^Sfe-
,>• ■>/
«
»
a
V . . "flSI ';
, ^
\!
^
" •'■v„
-^;
m^f-'SM
( 4 ■ „
,
-' "1
JT—
. ■'<•• 1.
*
" ''■..■ ■!"■
' t-t
■ ' :h ^ ■ ^ -^
i.
• •' •" '
J ^
'
i
■ri
^^M&NtWlfMriMtax^
I
"V
PAST IV.— CAfiSAK, DE BELLO WlU^ICO, V. 225
atqueonui, parte corporis r»s« praeter caput et labrum superius
'Uxores habent dtol duod5mq,e inter s5 commllnSs. et .STi
«frntrea cum fratabus parente,q„e cum llbarls ; „d, a qui ^l
durl"'-"" "t"'" '"""' ■^"^ P''»- ^« q^ue d5-
\ The Hormm-are mrprmd wUU huUdmg a cwmp^hut'orive
off the enemy.
n^tro m .toere confllxSrunt, tomen ut nosW omnibus pLZ
supenores fuennt atque e«, in silvSs ooUSsque comp^erint
samlserunt At ,Ui intermisso spatio. imprfldentibus nostrts atque lo
occupat« m munltione castrBrum subito s5 ex sUvb SfeSnTt
^etflque in e3s facta, qui erai^t in sMSne p^ castrcru.:^^' .
^.ter pugnaverunt; duabusque missis subsidia cohortibua S
^esare, atque his. primis legianum duSrum, cam hae perexigu8
mt«rm«so loci spatia inter se constitissent, novo genere pS,,
perterr..s nostrts, per medios audScissime perrflp^r^nt .5quS
5 ncolunies recepsrunt. Ea die Q. Laberius DoL, tribflnu, S
tarn, .nteracitur. nil ploribus submissis coh<^bu; repelZtlT
Th^ disadvantages^ under which the Romans lay in fighting
' ' ' with the Briton». . -
1 16. Tota hoc in genere pognae, cum sub ocull. omnium So nra
armorum, quod neque msequi cMentes possent neque ab flgni.
d«cedere auderent, minus apWs esse ad hajus generis hosteT
requites autem magna cum perlcula p.«,lia dln^cSre, pZ^Zi
quod .UI et.am cansUlM plerumque oMerent et, cum pTZm "b
Jeg,„n.bus n<«tras remavissent, ex essedls desillrent, ^Tpe^busJS
l^tZ^r^ «on'ond-nt. Equestris autem proLlil imZ
AooS^bat hue, ut numquam conferti, sed rSrl mjgnlsque intorrUlIS
proelarentur statianiSsque dispositSs ha b;renr.taue ali^ am
m uAiJip..,«L, xxitegrtqud et wcoites defat^atia Buccederent. »
16
(Tf
226
PRIMARY LATIN b50K.
1 i
The JRoTnans are again attached, but inflict such a defeat on the
Britona that a large part of them disband.
'■'-." ' ■ * ' ^_^_ •■'^ '. '
1 17. Posters di§ procul S. castris hostes m collibus constitSrunt,
rSrlque se ostendere et lenius quam pndie nostros equites proeli5
2laoessere coeperunt. Sed meridie cum Caesar pabulandi causa
trSs legiones atque omnem equitatum cum C. Trebonio legato
misisset> repente ex omnibus partibus ad pabulatores advola-
3v§runt,_ SIC uti ab signis legionibusque non absistereht. Nostri
9<criter in eos impetil facto reppulerunt, neque finem sequendi
fecerunt, quoad subsidio confisi equites, cum post se legiones
4 vidSrent, praecipites hostes egerunt ; magnoque eorum numero in-
terfectd neque sul coUigendl neque consistendl aut ex essedis
6 dSsiliendl facultatem dederunt. Ex hac f uga protinus, quae undi-
que convenerant, auxilia discesserunt, neque post id tempus um-
quam summis nobisqum copiiji hostes contenderunt.
^ ■• -."-■'.. : ■^''V ---.■-"
^"■■,. ■ ' ■'-' ■'-■;. ■ . -»" .- ■ . .
v,,v,V, ,. Gcesar forces a passage across the Thames.
- ■ #
1 18. Caesar qognito consilio eorum ad fltimen Tamesim in Hnes
CassivellaunI exercitum duxit ; quod flumen uno omnino loco
2pedibus, atque hoc aegre, translrl potest. Ed cum veuiaset,
animum advertit ad alteram fltlminis ripam magnas esse copias
3 hostium instructas. Rlpa autem erat acutis sudibus praefixis
mtlnita, Sjusdemque generis sub aqua defixae..sudes flumiue tege-
4bantur. His rebus cognitis a captivis perfug^que Caesar prae-
6 misso equitatu confestim legiones subsequi jussit. Sed ea celeri-
tate atque eo impettl militgs ierunt, cum capite solo ex aqua
exstSrent, ut hostes impetum legion um atque ^quitum sustinere
nqin possent, i^pS^sque dimitterent ac se fugae mandarent.
10
15
20
' Cassivdlaunus, avoiding a pitched battle, harasses Caesar's
line of march.
1 19. Cassivellaunus, ut supra dSmonstrS<vimus, omni deposits. 25
sp§ contentiSnis, dimissis amplioribus copiis, mlllibus circiter quat-
tuor essedariorum relictis, itinera nostra servabat, paulumquo ex
vi& «zcSdebat loclsque impeditis &o silvestribus sese occultiLbat
atque ils regiSnibus, quibus nds iter facturds cognoverat, pecora
2 atque hoaifoes ex agrte in «TvSs coES^U^bftt 9t, cum equitfttusso
,-•/■■?■**
i PARp IV.— CAESAR^ DE BELLO QALLICO, V. ^27
noflter Ilberius pVaedandi vastandlque causa s5 in agrSs gigceiat
.^cum penculo noatrorum equitum cum iisconfligebat I^l^e
3 metu lat.us vagarl prohib.bat. Relinqu.batur, ut nequeXngl
ab agmine legxonum disced! Caesar pateretur. et tantum m3s 5
vastandxB zncendilsque faciendls hostibus noceretur, quanrum lab^
atque itmere legionaril milites efficere poterant
ijnit TrimharUes, a powerM British tribe, submit to Cc
'.r.
20. Intenm Trinobantes, prope tivmism^ earum re<ri6num
«vitas, ex qui Mandubracius ad„l5so5„s Caeaari. fidemS^Z
.ad eum m conh„e„t«m Galliari, vtoerat, cfljus pater in a ^«te.o
regnum „bt.nue«.t, interfeotu,q„e e^t a cLsivellauns.Tp^ W '"
mortem vIMveraUsgStas ad Oaesarem mittnnt pomoe„t„re ssS
3« dediturp^atque imperata facturos ; petunt. 'ut Mandub^^m
4,.raesrt.mpe„umqueobtineat. Hb "Caesar imperat obsidesouT „
ragmta,fr«ment«™j„e exeroitul Mandubraciumque ad ^^^^
45.
^ > ifa»y o^Aer «Wfie. «ou; submit, and Ccesar captures the Houm*
of Cassivellaunus. .
'hibif- '^™''.'»"«''U8 defense atque ab omnI mflitum inMri» nro-
ib.t«, Cenimsgia, Segontiaol, Ancalitta, Bibrool Q^M W^I^ »
.mbusm.ss,sa^, Caesar, dMunt. Ab h,; oagn^' , Z l^^:;, "
eo loco oppxdum CassiyeUaunI abessesUvIs palQdibusque mS™
squo safs magnus hominum pecorisque numeru. oTvLT S^'
pidum autem Britanm vocant, cum silv» impedllZ viHs' f
giS n»Z at„!l r*°'""*" '"'"' "S'™"'»^ ! '««^ "Perit Sgre-
£^ nan t^nt'^^s r-;^-!;;^^;^^^
^J>
,«?
A..
228
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
<•,
t-^iM»
■h
i-.
A avdden attack on the camp by the sea i3 repulsed, and Cassivellgkv^us-
i^ "'' sues /or peace. ^^^^^i^
1 22. Dum haec in his locis geruntur Cassivellaunus ad Cantium,
quod esse ad mare supra demonstravimus, (]tuibus regionibus quat-
tuor rSges praeerant, Cingetorix, Carvilius, Taximagulus, Segovax,
ntlntios mittit atque his imperat, uti coactis omnibus copiis castra
2 navalia d§ improvisS adoriantur atque opptignent. li cum ad 6
castra venissent, nostri eruptione facta multls eorum interf ectis,
•capto etiam hobili duce Lugofcorige, suos incolumes rediixerunt.
? Cassivellaunus hoc proelio ntintiato, tot detrimentis acceptis,
vastatis finibus, maxime etiam permStus defectione clvitS-tum,
llgatos per Atrebatem Oommium de deditione ad Caesarem mittit. lo
4 Caesar, cjim constituisset hifemare in continenti propter repentinos
Galliae'mottls, heque multum aestatis superesset, atque id facile
extrahl posse intellegeret, obsidSs imperat, et quid in annos sin-
gulds vectigalis • populo Romano Britannia penderet constituit ;
.5 interdlcit atque imperat Casaivellauno, ne jMai\dubracio neu Trino- 16
bantibus noceat. - * -t t ' ■"
'. f ' '
CcBsar retuma^Ao tf^' mainland.
1 23. Obsidibus acceptis exej^i'^m redflcit ad mare, navSs invenit
2refecta8. His deductis, quc^ et captivorum magnum numerum j
habSbat, et nonndllae ten)|pestate deperierant navSs, duSbus com-* '
3 meatibus exercitum reptirtare Instituit. Ac sic accidit, uti ex 20
tanto navium njjmero Jot navigatf^Btbus, neque hoc neque supe* ^
riSre anno alia omnino navis, quae milite^ portaret, dSsiderargtur ; .
t^x iis, quae ii^tUigs.ex continenti ad eum remitterentur, et
5pri5ris commeatils expositis mllitibus, et quas postoS, Labignus
faciendas oaraVerat numero sexaginta, porpaucae locum caperent ; 25
5 reliquae fer5 onii^Ss^rojicerentur. Quas cum aliquamdiQ Caesar
frOstra oxspect&sset, n5 anni tempore a navigatione exclflde-
rStur, quod aequinoctium suberat, necessario angustius militSs
eoollocarit, ac summa tranquilUtate oensecata, secunda initi cum
Bolvisset vigilia, prima iQce torrara aitigit omnSsque incolumSsao
n&v6B perddxit. t .
■ h.
-'%.
ri-
:Mk :•.-■•■:-
PART IV.— COKNELIUS NEPO&
229
/
ANNOTATIONS ON THE SELECTIONS.
CORNELIUS NEPOS.
Cornelius Nepos was born aWt the year 100 B.C., in Ci.:
alpme Gau^. north of the Po. His birthplace has been ^rioudy
pvon a, Verona and Tioinum (the modem Pavia). theSrty
he German h.sto„a„ Mommsen. There is also an old tradition
that names Hostilia, now OstigUa, as the favored place and he
Nepos probably removed to Rome in his youth, anfsLt the
■ Swerfl"' i*^ " """ ""^ «" ™ the^^XpL^
• ^atulir B r^/ '""°"''- ^"^ """"' CiceH. and the pZ
|: action,i,e took no part in military or poUtical aflairs. HU dltt
oceurrad probably about 26 B.C.. d«ru,g the reign of Anf-ti
He wrote several works, of which there still remain Lives of
Atticus and Cato the Censor, and a work entitled VUae eZTuZ
«mm In^^rat^m. or mo™ fully, D, B^ceUenf»^ D^^^^
«rum Oe„ .um, from which the three selectionT^ntaineTin thu
^.LXr' '? "" '"^ "«'""'^"P'»' '•— ". this ll work
«Throdits ^t"tr '." f "f "° *'">'""• *■>" «'«• '» "-0 time*
Iheodostus, at the end of the fourth century of the Christian em
But the ge„e™l opinion among the schola™ of the p«>sent davT. '
iiXlr&r ""'""'■'"^'^ "■o -""- '•'»!'*'-«::.':
imt^cUontT] ft"' """• '" "" V^^^^^y- to oonvey moral
«strucfon to his follow-Countrymen, not much reliance can be •
^aced upon h.m as an historian. Hi. biographies, howevercon!
tam a oondderable amount of human interest, although he sTt
^obetoo^e^s^dedi^^
■ ■_„,. _^^' ' ■ J ^ ,.
:l
Y
230
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
They are, as a rule, either models of excellence or examples of
unredeemed baseness. Th§ gray light of history seems to have
nothing to recommend it in his eyes.
In style he is generally simple, elegant and lively, and in con-
struction commonly pure; but sometimes lie grows careless, and
falls into anacolutha, that is, broken orj^inished constructions, or
into construfctions riot strictly classioelr At times, too, he indulges
in certain syntactical mannerisms, and in the disagreeable repe-.
tition of the same words, "where a change of expression would be
quite practicable without injury to the sense. In his choice of
single words, Nepbs is, in the main, classical, but occasionally we
th colloquial and archaic forms which are not found in the
prose writers of the Augustan age. > ' ; / ,
NOTES 01^ THEMISTOCLES.
CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE.
Themistocles is born .
Is Archon Eponymua
Takes part at Salamis
Is expelled from Athens
Flees to Asia
Dies' at Magnesia . .
B.C.
514 (?)
II
481
II
480 >
It
471
/|^
466
II
449 (?)
CHAP.vl.
I
m
1. Hnjna : governed by the phrtiBe vitia inemntis adtdescentiae,
trans. * his faults in early youth,' 'his youthful excesses.' tente-
feratnr : subjunctive of result, so putentur (V. 29). hulo : in-
direct object after anteferatur (V. 78, v. c). The hpiic is rather
awkward after hujiis. pares : for case se'e V. 12, 6. /.
'2. ab Initio eiit ordlendum : ' we nlust start a| thb beginning,'
lit. ? For impeirsonal use of gerundive see V. i20i ii. duxlt :
♦married,' lit. 'led home or into matrimony,' sc. aomum or in
matrimonium. Qui cum : * when ho ' ; to indicate more clearly
the connection with the preceding words, Latin constantly uses qui
fpr hie or is (V. 172). parentlbns : dat. of refei"ence, 'found
'approval in the eyes gf (V..80, 6, ii.). It is also explained as
dat. of the agent, 'was approved by ' (V. 80, d).
3. Qnae : 'this' ; see note on Qui citm, preceding section, jw
iHfUfPH^ t : "^ judicaviMMfit (TIT. 66. a), totnin : adj.. 'wholly.'
f.<., contiimeliftm, subject of jToAe. Mrvlen»: *deTOtiiig
PART IV.— NOTES ON THEMISTOCLES.
231
,h
himself Jndiolls prlvatls: either (a) * private arbitrations ' as
opposed to ordinary law-suits, or, perhaps better, (6) «law^suits.*
cases in the courts,' where private interests only are concerned
as opposed to contio populi, where affairs of state are discussed'
prodlbat: from prodeo.s major: "of unusual importance,' lit
of more consequence (than uSual)' (V. 98, vi.). opjig : pred.
rS^' Q • • \ ™°^^ "®"** construction would be quibtis (abl.) opus erat
(V. 99, 11.). . ■
4. In rebus grerendls : gerundive construction (V, 119), «x-
'oogrltandig : i.e. {inrehis) excogitandis. Instantibns : 'the pres-
ent.' Notice the imperfect teniSes in this sentence and the
preceding one, to describe the course of conduct pursued by
Theraistoclesfora series of years (V. 180, 6). quotaoinm est:
the result of this was,' lit. 'from which (or whereby) it was
brought about, abl. of cause, ut . . . Ulnstraretur : a substan-
wve dause of result, formmg the subject of factum est (V. 31).
CHAP. 2.
"^-ti- *^*"®?**® '«* pnblloae : ' in (lit of) the management of
public affairs, gerundive construction with gradus (V. 11«). bello
I? Coroyraeo : this is a mistake, the war was with ^gina. Bello is
abl. of time (V. 130). ferooloi;em : pred. ace, goes wj^h praesenti
bello a,nd rehqiio tempore; *more higb-spintGd, not only in the war
which was then being waged, but for all time to come.' For case
of tempore see V. 131, i.
2. mettfUls : the silver mines at LauriunT, in the south-eastern
part of Attica. They were very valuable and belonged to the
btate. redlbat: 'was derived,' «came in.' lar^itione ma«l-
stratuum: 'distribution made by the magistrates' out of the
public treasury, maslstrataam : subjective gen. (V. 84). at
• '• •.,»«**«««»•«*«»»• : substantive clause of purpose, object of per-
awutt{Y. «7), trans, by ac*tW infinitive with 'to.'
^l<u**°1^' ^** *"<^ecedent,is cioasw. marltlltios praedonea •
another historical error, oonsectando : see V. 114, d. In qi|o •
by this means,' lit. 'in which (proceeding).' cum . . . titm :
both . , . and.' belli-: for case see V. 90.
4. Id : what is the antecedent? saluti, Oraeolae : for those
datives see V. 81. fuerit : subjunctive in indirect question (V,
39). eoflrnltnm : with what does this word agree ? Persloo ; the
second Persian war, in which Salamis was fought, 480 B.C. Nam
cam, etc. : this sentence is never finished, a parenthetical clause
comes m at hnjm enim, and a fresh start is made at Cnjxis de
adventu, the author forgetting to complete his original conatruo-
trion > n a g| m t o fftt ! ut^ual ly ferrtr tmir w / w ; . For UiS WUmTr^
-\
1»7. Beqae . . . neo ... quUquum : ' no OM » . . either .
or.
232*
PRIMARY LATIK BOOK.
-''■*
■-'i .
6. Jbnjns : * his,' navlam : gen. of characteristic in pred. (V.
t- 87, iii:). fnlt : *was composed.' fuernnt : the subject is exer-
citus, bat the verb is attracted to the number of th6 pred. lioun
mUlia. M^- ' ' *' ' . '
■ W- . - " ^ - » • »■<
6. advenfte: 'advance/ * approach,' ^ not 'arrival.' peti : 'to-'
be tho»objects of attack.' dloerentar :" observe the personal con-
, struction, which is the -usual one. For mood see V. 151. con-
snltam : supine in um, denoting purpose (V. 116). faoerent :
'what they were to do.' For subjunctive see V. 186, 1, 6, i. ,
dollberantlt>ik'8 : 'to the inquirers,' the participle is here used>
, Bubsfeantively (V. 44, i, a), mnnlrent : '.thati they must (or
should) defend ' ; for mood see V. 186, 1, c, i. ' ^
7. quovaleret: 'what it meant,' lit. ' in what direction it had
_. force.' perhnaslt : sc. iis. esse: for the construction with per-
^sxiadeo, see V. 28, v., and note on section 2 above, ut . . . '
oonferrent : substantive clause of purpose in apposition with coii-
. silium (V. 196). enm enim, etc. : ,' for that was the wooden wall
which .4;he god meant,' lit. 'for that was meant by th^ god. as the
wooden wall.' eiini : has for its antecedent naves, but is.attracted'
from eas to gender and number of murvm (V. 13, i.). slgulfl'* ,
oarl : governedby notion of saying in permasit (V. 191).
8. Tall: TiGKlj = hoc. superl«;(s<»s : 'those which they had
before.' ^ sua omnia : 'all their belongings,' here including women
:.and children. Balamlna : a.Greek ace., bo Troezena (III. 50, d);'
^for case see Vr-iSS. majorllms natu : 'elders,^' lit. 'greater in
respect of birth.' rellqaam oppldnm : 'the rest of the town';
reliqnia, like mmihmy medius, etc., regularly agrees with its noun
(V»^86, iv. 6).
■..-,- -'-■ '-- -'■ ■ '■':-■■ ■ ':-fc-'' CHAP. 3; ■■^■■"-' -'■■ '■■..'"•^ '"- ' M--
"■* ' • ,' ■
1. sHuJ us: 'his,' i.e., Themistocles's. His plan was to make the
war a nav^l one. dlmloari : impersonal infin., Subject of placebat
.(V. 66), Trans, 'they were rather in favor of having^ the battle '
fought.' qui . . . ooouparent : 'to" seize' (V. 26). non pateren-^^
' — • *to puevent,' '-*■ '' -* '
l«ir
. . lit. ? non sustlnnernnt : trans. ^ could not
withstand. omnes : can refer only to the Spartans and Thes-
. V plans, the others having been sent away. ' ^
' 2. olassis: this word governs Oraeciae and nahnmn. 'frarm.
* the common fleet of Greece, consisting of three huhdred ships.'
ap«d: 'off".' oontlnentem terram: 'the mainland.' quaerebat:
_ notice the tense. . „. _ ' „ _i„_'
3. pari proello : 'after a drawn battle,* lit. Hhe battle being
equal' (V. 49). adversarlornm : here>=/t<>«tmm. Ad/versa/rius is
ptoperly * an opponent in a court of justioft.' .«ipe rw^^ ;
mtperax
opponent
•doubled/, ««ailed around? iThis is
a
1 Sjf-
m
.•^■
PABT IV.—^^OTES ON THEMtSTOCLES. 283
'"f&^" IS"'"^^' r^*%<^- "7)- »■"» "P'««n'«
» luture peri. mdic. of the dirnef fV la^r i. :\ ujL,.^ j|.
»-^j««vyiv« aa vircuai.mairect nArration (V. 1771 and ren™
'shouS^ha^'; iS""" "'^"^ '•''^' (I- 1«" *• "' ^^ Ht.
ciUum, an expression of ^eamig (V. 1^). '
*over1Sain8t''^r!;!.r^^* ' «^^?°.*«« «^ «»»• 1. 4: '^exadversum r^
over against, «n archaic and colloquial form found in cotoedy. '
; \V ■'CHAP. 4.- - ■ ■'■ ^ ■/•■, ■• ':'■'
•* ■ .. ' .■■,.,
1. Thermoprlh expngnatls: 'after- caityinir ThermoOTl»'
h^itoWi Sie ..r,! ° ''f' Pr<«.*ritef>. »nd should not "b,
iinic^tea Xhe usual construction is od with the aco. n-iifl
aetendentlbn. : 'since it had nodefenders7iiu!(Y 46). *•
«n^^ation when the' nts7aXr«h?rhl\.^^^^^^
^rr/.'^e^'rtrtt^^inTE':
position oftliis word see V. 1^3» c,iii. re,em
l^^^'' '^ memisScles-^ ^T"
See V. 177, i. de
fldellMtmnm : for
: the Persian king.
in tnga: *on the
»te Tnarted ■'°*'3;'"*'"' ^ l""* "' 'W departed,' lit. 'should
indicative in direct speech (V iw M "'P"««"« '«tuto
2,?. above, e. .'LTa^^-g .' l^^-^l^hrj CthT °" "-
6fe
Is
<.■
284
PitlMARY LATIN BOOK.
/ r~
ijfdll: partitive gen. with mM (V. 86, i.). opportunlsskno : goes
with Zoco.' aif irasto juiarl : 'narrow part of the sea.' ^I^nerlt :
we should look loif an 'imperfect here,^but Nepos is fond of ^e
perfect, as being more vivid (V. 33, iii.), oousilio : * clpvemess,!
•'sagacity.' .-.,.,. ,
.CHAP. 5. . '
1. Hio : adverb, 'her6,' *in this instance.' mftl^ . 'unsuccess-
ifully.' tantas I'eliqalas oopiartun : *so many tro^s left,* lit.?
uS^ * with them,' abl. of means (V. 99, i.). eodei9 : Themistocles.
grada depnlaus : 'compelled to give way,' 'forced from his posi-^
tion,' i.e., the position of «^vantage which his numbers gave" him.
ne : 'that,' ^lest' (V. 138). ^- oertlorem fecit: 'informeii,' followed
by Lnfin. o^ (V. 18, ii.). Id agl . .. . exoluderetur : trans, 'a
Elan was on foot* to destroy the bridge ^ . „ . and cut oflF his retreat, '
t. ? ut . . . disBolveretur : substantive clause of purpose in
apposition with id. feoerat : for mood see V. 17B, i. In A8iam :
the preposition here connects t^o substantives, a construction
seldom met with in Latin (Y. 85, v. fn.). Idque ei persnastt :
*and convinced h^m of the truth of this,' lit.? (V.'65, i.). id:
cognate ace. (V. 72). .J ' l
2. qua . . ', reversaa est : trans, 'in less* than thirty Jays he
reached Asia by^he same route 'by which it haii taken him six
months to make the march (into Greece)..' qua . . . «adem : as
often in Latin, the rel. comes first ; vm (abl. of means) m^y be
supplied with each of these words, dlebas : not governed by
mtnttj, but abl. of 'time within which ' ; gtwim is omitted (V. ^8,
iv.). i^e versus est: the perfect of this verb is usually reverti.
■e : subject of superatutn (esse) and comervatum (esse)* ,
3. Earopae : dat., governed by sitccttbwtt (V. 78, v. c). Mara A
thonlp:, 'of (or at) Marathon.* Latin regularly uses a proper
adjective where English has a preposition and a pro^r noun<-
posslt : subjunctive in a relative clause of characteristic (y. 32),
tropaeo : lit. ' trophy,' here tfsod poetically for xtictoria. ' It is an
example of the figure metonymy, the sign being used for the thing
signined. pari mode : abl. of manner (V. 103). . nam»ro : abl. of
meane(j(V. 99). post homlnt/m mempriam ' 'within the memory
of man,* or perhaps 'of which history has left any record.' The
comparison in this clause is somewhat defective. The sentence
might be completed thus : Nam, [quo modo apiid Marathoyia parvQ
numero militnm mouctmiM exercitus devictu$ eat], pari modo, etc.
^.^. . . ^ ^..... _ . ,;CHAP. e. - . ■::^- ■-^■
1. bello : for case see V. 130. minor : 'less greats Phalerloo :
the harbor of Phalerum was the one first used by the Athenians.
bora or basins, Pireeus proper, Munychia and Zea. Plrael :
.•ifi».
PART IV.—NOTES ON THEMISTOCLES.
235
^ ?^'^^^ (l^^^^^ ^-5-.'- perhaps loca-
in
■ delr,?rn^ by ^^^tj^ J/' "1 -•"">":«•.»«»«, their
special risk to him»wlf • .^? . '""""P"» ■<■« perionlo-: 'at
«0 see V 85 iii ^^' *"• "f.»™»" »■• oeoompaniment. For
.Z.Te~4w. '°n '"■<"? """^?' Y""" «the antecedent?
^Lus^TSi^t^ristio rT<19^°''*^'"«''^'.- • • "»•' Kel»«™
- wl^t Th^/wiskerraZUr''^^' m'A'J"? different object from-
.-i^quam Inflrmlggimos : • as weak as possible' (Y 174. n
stpul : note the tense rV ]5^ «.,! ^ i"™"^® vv. 174, i.).
that beihg done' ?V lfi\ W' ^ ' * "• V^**»»'*»»* •• 'to forbid
were^prefenV ab ab^ite v'^^fir*"^^^ '*' ^^"8 *« *h«««
Forfo?.seeni\ttlV?T;efL^^^^ ^^^ ^•-
186)- or iMtPRrl nf f jf^ ^ ^.^ *""*, ''^^^«^*^ respectively (V.
i'
': ■ CBAP. 7.
236
PRlMAtt¥ LATIN BOOK.
,2. Cum: *\^iler^^^qnererentur : for mood see V. 151. nlhllo
mliiiis : 'all the same,' lit. 'the less by nothing * (V. 101). non
maltnm : ' but little. ' , mnnltionis : ' of the work of fortifica-
tion' (V. 86). superesse : 'remained unfinished.' Imperlam :
here =potestas,A.ef^ /civil jurisdiction,' and not the military com^ .
mand, which belohged to the Spartan ' kings, falsa ils esse
delata : ' that false reports kad been brought to th^m ' (V. 203, d).
aequam esse^/for infinitive see V. 191. lllos : subject of mU-
terCf of which viroa is the object, qulbus : dative (V. 55, iv.).
haberettir* explcurarent, retinerent : what forms would these ^
verbs have respectively in direct speech ? (V. 32 ; 26; 186, 1, c).
obsldeip : ' as a hostage ' : pred. aitc. (Y. 1^, c). rotlnerent :
'let them detain.'
3.' Oestns est ei mos : 'his advice was followed.' el : dat. of
interest with force of possessive (V. 80, 6). praedlxit : ^prae-
ccpii, 'enjoined.' nt ne : 'not to,' 'that . . . not, ' for the usual
ti« (V. 28, vii. ). prlus : copnect closely with miam. esset re-
missus : for mood and tense see V. 156, a ; 187, o, i ,
4. sena^bm : the ^Senate at Sparta was called the 'GerusiaJ/
and was composed of thirty members, including the two kings.
They held office for life, but had no great influence, ilberrime
professus est : *mad(§!a clean breast of the matter,' 'avowed his
trickery with the Utmost frankness.' boo: 'his,' i.e., Themisto-
des's. quod: has for its antecedent the clause deos . . . saepsisse.
In the English translation of this sentence the antecedent clause
■ yrill come first ; 'they had enclosed, etc., a thing which, etc.' quo
faolllns: see V. 28, iii. In eo: 'therein,' 'in so doing'; eo is
not the antecedent of quod, esset : subjunctive in subordinate
clausenn indirect narration, shoeing that the clause is part of the
'speech of Themistocles (V. 175). ' ' » v .
5. Nam .' . . barbarls : either (a) ' their city was a rampart
thrown up in the way of the barbarians, ' or better, (6) ' their city
"was opposed to the barbarians as a bulwark.' If (b) is the proper
reisdering, then oppositum is attracted from the gender of whem
to that of propugnacidum. apud : 'in the neighborhood of.'
Jtfarathon was twenty-five miles from Athens, regias : ' of the
(Persian) king.' feclsse naufrasinm : 'had suffered defeat.'
The expression is used figuratively, as the battle of Marathon
as fought on land. Por infin. fecisse, see on aequum esse in sec-
n 2 above.
6. qui,.'. . Intuorentnr: 'inasmuch as' they were regarding,'
relative clause* expressing cause. The present subjunctive woiild
be used in the direct speech (V. 171). Ipsorum : indirect reflexive,
referring to a subject not that of the principal verb, universao :
*a8a whole.' miwsrant rTor iMicative see T. 175,17 soT JfefBT-
ring to the subject of the principal verb, i.e., Themistocles.
ktB
PART IV.—NOTES ON" THEMISTOCLES.
237
remttterent: * let them (or they must) send back, ' for mood see
^Jiop, 1, c. cum : for. essent reoepturi : ' would get (them)
'• *'■ CHAP. 8. -
feij*!*""* • ?;^f ^^*^^^ een. (V. 84). enndem timorem : they
IT^^, ! '"''"^'^ ^^''''™^ ^^'^ powerful, and establish himself as a
r!^Jt?'^f**x?rl"''*™ *."?'"«"*= 'by ostracism,' lit. «votes of the
poteherds When an Athenian citizen became so powerful that he
was considered a danger to the safety of the state, he might be
InTa'^?'^^ ' *?>* ^'' ^"^'^^^ ^«' * *«^"^ «^ <^ years wShou?
loss of citizenship or properf^y. The votes of the citizens were
given in on shells or small potsherds (ostraka), and six thousand
votes given against a nian ensured his banishment. Argo* : ace
of limit of motion (V. 125). babltatnm: «to reside,' the suprne '
expressing purpose (V. 116). _ , x ue, i;ne supine,
his^' XS^a '*'"" dl«nltate : < in gr^ honor. ' «bsentem : ' in'
nis absence. acousarent : subjunctive of purpose (V. 26).
feclgset : subjunctive in virtual indirect narration The accusa-
this oT^L '"^ ^'* f *^" ""^'^^^ (^- 177). Hoc crimlhe : 'on
gen see V 91, c *^^°™P^°^«^«^<^ (^' ^^)- Prodltlonls : for
«1,LJ*U ''^^®'*' *"*.?"! • P.'*®^' ^°' «**»• videbat : the indicative ,
shows the reason IS that given by Nepos (V. 146). Corovram • ^V
for case see V 125. propter nJ. «on hisamjunt.' li;7I= the
Corcyreans, indirect object ^of indicereni. MoTossam : = Molos-
aorum, see III. 49, b. e't : dat. of possessor (V. 80, e).
xyuJl fvTft^""V **^ *^^ *^"^' *»"«= introduces clause of
pu^SQ (V. 28, m.) majore rellglone : *by a stronger obliga-
tion. reoeptam: 'vrhenieoeived,' = cum receptus esset (V. 43).
. «««rlmonla: 'veneration.' m fldem : 'under his protection.'
translate freely « and he kept his word. ' y
r?ifi:.„*""™ • **l*^o"g5,v'i. ®^P®"*'«'**"= * «demand for hislstra-"
ditlon was made.' What is the subject of expo>^eretnr ? -^:
m^tv' /v'Vq^'*'^* • ' ™««d /f V. 27. «ibl : «for his own
' Tv 1 Qi ^ : ^' *"* * K^^e™^^ by notion of ♦ saying, ' in monuit
^ . ii* **"* P'?.P*»<1«»«: *f^ near (Athens).' tato earn ver-
ESli^^^^'fi^-? *^ ^" ^"u ^^^^*' . The introductory «for^Vthe
^nfehsh infinitive clause has no equivalent in Latin (Y. 110, fn.)
288
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
the ship, perrenlsset : Themisk>cles's thought would be ai eo
pervenero (V. 187, b, i.). slbl esse perenndnm : 'that he must
perish.' gibi:'dat. of apparent agent (V. 80, d). esse pere-
nndam : Used impersonally (Y. 120, ii.). quia sit aperlt :
'reveals his identity.' sit: subjunctive in indirect question (V.
35 ; 37). malta pollioens : ' making many promises. ' midta is
a cognate ace. (V. 72) ; see also V. 203, d. oonservasset : in virtual
indirect narration, representing fut. perf. indie, of direct (V. 177).
7. olarissiml virl : * for so distinguished a man,' objective gen.'
(V. 85). dienf nootemqne t 'a day and a night.' neqae . . .
qnemqaam : 'and ... no one.' ezponlt : historical present (Y.
179, c). oal : i.e., the captain, gratlam rettallt : 'bestowed a
''rewarded.' * /^ ,»•
recompense,
CHAP. 0.
1. Ita : 'as follows.' Xerxe regrnante : 'it was in the reign
of Xerxes that, ' see Y. 205, a. Xerxes reigned from 485 to 465 B.^.
et . . . et
102). de lig
'both . . .and.' aetate : 'in point of time' (Y.
' of those,' i.e.y he was nearest to the times of which
he wrote, .fult : ''belonged to.' antem : 'now,' indicating tran-
sition. Artaxerxen : surnamed Longimanus ; for form of ace. see
III. 48, d. atque : 'and also.' his verbis: 'couched in these
terms,' a peculiar example of the abl. of characteristic (Y. 105); it
modifies episttUam.
2) Themistooles : for case see Y. 10, ii. Oraioram : partitive
gen. vrith qui. domam : ' house '=' family.'
3. Idem: 'but I also,' 'I however,' introducing a. contrast.
mnlto pinra : ' many more,' lit ? (Y. 101). ipse : understand esse
coepi. in tuto : ' in a position of safety;' proelio . . . facto :
'after the battle,' lit. ? litteris : ' by a letter,' of. the meaning of
litteris in eh. 10, 1. littera in the sing, means a letter of the alpha-
bet, feoerat ; see on eh. 5, 1, above, oironmiretar : subject is
ipse, i.e. Xerxes, understood, qao nantio : 'and by this mes-
sage,' abl. of means, perioalo : abl. of separation (Y. 93).
4. a : 'from,' 'out of.' Qaam si ero adeptas : 'and if I win
it'; for tense see Y. 62. babebls : 'will find,' 'will have in.'
iii^ : Xerxes.- de : 'with regard to.' qnas: in the best writers
de quibusy and not the direct object, would be used with coUoq;tii.
annnom -tempns : 'a year's time.' des : from do, tor mood see
Y.'27. - eoqae transaoto : 'and when this time has elapsed.'
For future time denoted by perfect participle see Y. 41. venire :
subjeet is me, understood from mihi (Y. 18, x.).
CHAP. 10.
nUvdinem. Tirum ,
- Th e g e n. ig-go v o med b y mvimi mag-
oonciliari : for construction see Y, 21.
PART IV.— NOTES ON THEMISTOOLES.
239
venlam 4edlt : 'complied with his request/ 'granted the favor
sought' iitterl,: 'literature. ' c/. th7meani„| of^is woS in
en y, d. It here refers to reading, serm<mi to speaking, I*ersian.
qnlbiw: instrumental abl. (V. 99); translate 'In which.' adeo
erndltus est: 'he became so well versed.' dloatnr • nersonal
construction (V. 18, vii.). but trans, 'it is said that h"*eS The
present tenle indicates a result continuing to the writer's time
SrA^atic'*G?'k"* ' *" ^^"^'^^^^ exaggeration, unless he is referring
f»,!'* n "M®® °''''^- ^' ?• 8rr»«Mimumq„e lUud : 'and
the following the most acceptable,' more freely, 'of which the fol-
lowmg was the most welcome of all.' Uludis in the same con-
struction as mvlta^nd is explained by the infin. clause ilium
oppressururrpJfY. 195). utl : 'foUow,' 'adopt.' vellet «^pre^
' Z^Z^ ^^'^ra^ ^^""^ speech these verbs would be wZes and
I m^mea{Ye^ -Ulam : *.e., Artaxerxes. donatas : for con
structions with dmio see V. 78. vi. Aslam : Asia Minor. Ma«-
nerfae : for case see V. 127, i. slbi : dat. of reference here
nearly = possessive 'hi8'(V. 80, 6, i.). *
3. donarat : for the form see HI. 66, a. Wg quldem verbis •
m^t ?V Zl """0% "" 'T'^^ *H" *^"^«'' *^^- «f ^oom^nil
ment (V. 103) gmdem emphasizes the word it foUows. «uae •
the antecedent is urbem. praeberet : representing praebe<S in a
rel. clause of purpose; so mrmzt and hdeatCV.m redtbanf
indicative because in an explanatory note of the author. For force
of the tense see V. 180, 6. ad nostram memorlam : 'to our
«r- fhrL'i*''J5™ ; -^"^^f^y^ * ^""^•' «PPW«m: Magnesia.
quo . tne antecedent is sepulct-um. "^
4. cnjas: 'his.' sorlptam est: best turned by the active
many writers vary in their accounts' (V. 56). nos • 'I^the
^editorial we,' which is commoner in Utin than in EnSish
eundem: agrees mth JThtccydidem, trans, 'on this point also '
Seath""::'^'^^ ""?T.*^y; . ™"''»*» mortunm : 'died a natural
aeatn. neque negat : 'hut does not deny, "though he admits '
sumpslsse : fpr^ construction see V. 18. ii. ^„™ : '^because. '.e
... po88e. of Ijemg able.' quae :' what, ' for ea attoe ««l-
lloltus esset : would be pollicitus sum in the mind of TTSstodes"
%t^L^l%: ^"-*- ^-* --y ^ briefly tranrtet^hS
rJ^J***™; • • ?®™,**.'**„® prodidlt: «he also has left it on
record, 'informed us,' lit.? ossa . . . «epnlta (esse)- the direct
object of prodm. leglbus : 'by law/ abl. of accoi^niment^L
accordance with the kws.' rather than abl. of m^^ eokoe^
^^^^'l^^J^ «^««^a tMl mhj.! lH ctiveai i L virtual JndJgeot
nftj tq wt-
if"SrXe°ffi«*«? "^" • ' ^T.!? ^y Th»«y<iides. The subject
Pt eoneed^etur la ut ossa ejus tn Attica sepdirentm- understood.
240
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
I--.
NOTES ON ARISTIDES.
CHRONOLOGICAJi TABLE.
Aristides commands his tribe at Marathon. B.C. 490
Is Archon Eponymus
Is ostracized . . . , .
Returns to fight at Salamis it. ,
Is recalled from banishment ,
Acts as general at Plat{«a . . ,
Organizes the Athenian confederaoy^T
x-'ies • a -• •■• . .
It
If
II
II
M
M
11
'*
489
483
480
480
479
477
468 (?)
AlVl.
1. aeqnalis : 'contemporary.' Thenilstooll : gen. or dat.,
according &skiequalis is noun or adjective. For form see III. 60,
d. obtreotarant inter se : 'proved (or became) rivals.' For the
fprm of obtrectarunt see III. 66, a. liiter se : Latin has no con-
venient form for ' each other ' (III. 62, e).
2. In his : 'in the case of these men.' qaanto : abl. of differ-
ence, modifying the comparative notion in qnteataret. antestaret :
for mood see v . 35 ; for tense see V. 36, fn. 1, 6. innboentiae:
f6r case see V. 78, v. c. unus : * aloii^,'" aadterlmns : ' have
heard of,' subjunctive in a restrictive rela|;ive clause of character-
istic (V. 32, ii.). For form of andierifrtm^e III. 66, a. sit
appellatns : ' has been called ' ; the perfe^TO^^fcending down to
the writer's time, testula : referring to the "^^0 of ostracism.
See note on Themistocles, ch. 8, T. exgllio f ^1. of means.
annornm : for gen. see V. 87. Translate 'was condemned to ienj
years' exile.' > 1 /
3. Intellegreret : *felt.' oedens : 'as he was retiring/ t.e/,
going away from the place where the votes were being cast.
animadvertlsset : distinguish force of tense from that of intd-
legeret. qnendam : from qiiidam. ut . . . pelleretar : the
object of scrihentem.^ For mood of peUeretur see V. 28, v. Plu-
tarch's version has more point; that an illiterate voter asked a
bystander to w«ite Aristides' name on hia shell. The bystander
was Aristides lymself, who, on asking the man what harm AristideS
had done him, was told that he was simply tired of hearing him
called 'The Just.' bur: 'that,' lit.? dnoeretur : 'should be
thought,' aubjaactive, Boi in-^^n-ilidireGt^quesfeiot
tive clause of charfKJterisUc (V. 32).
r-^M^'*
PART IV. — NOTES ON ARISTIDEsi
241
1. Inte
pngnae :
expect the i..
time (V.'lSa,
Athens ten
apnd : * near
4. laboraBset : for mood see V. 175 ; for form, III. 66, a. Th^
Clause quod . . . laborasaet forms the snbject of diacere (V. 198)
appellaretur : for mood see V. 24. <
^ 5. lesrltlmam: 'legal.' pertnllt : what is the force of per
here? poatquam : 'as soon as.' In . . . .desoendlt : 'came
down upon,' t.e., from the interior of Asia, sexto fere : 'about
the sixth,' really the fourth, as he was banished in 483, and'
returned m 480 B.C. quam : = postqxiam, as often, the omission
here bemg probably partly due to the presence of postquam in the
precednig line, although Nepos is not always so particular, «rat
expnlsus: PjjJ^^ct, a definite interval Ijeing specified (V. 152,
CHAP. ,2. . _ ■ V '■■■ ■.,■"
;ith the Athenian fleet, but as a free-lance.
j^je V. 78, v.^ c. llbei<aretnr : We should
ire, as the clause denotes tUMq priority of
*dem^ 'also.' praetor: 'a general.' At
ere chosen every year, one from each tribe,
goes with /Ms»ts also. ■ . ■ ' ^,^
2. hojas: i.e., Aristides. re mllltarl : *war.' factum- a
noun^here.' allnd . ; . quam :,« except, ' lit. 'other thkn.'
hnJiJa Imperil memorla : 'record of this, commaifd,' for the
deeds performed d^iring the command, res gestae in imperio. Jus-
^ftiae, aequltatls, Innpoontlao : depend on Uhistria facta (un-
«ietstood with multa), but translate freely 'many instances of '
quod: conjunction, 'that,' 'the fact that.' The subject of fac-
tum est 18 the result clause ut . . . Wan^erretur (V. 197). ^«pm-
muni : ' united, ' ' joint. ' quo duoe : abl. absolute (V. 49), toms.
under whose leadership.' erat fugratus : note mood, summa
Imperil maritimi: ' leaderahi^jtoL naval matters. ' See note on
Ihemistocles, ch. 4, 2. duc^^e.^f., Eurybiades at Salamis,
i:'au8anias at Platsea, Leotychides at Mycale.
3. intemperantla: 'arrogance' (V.r96). dvltates : i.e., the
maritime states engaged in the war, except the Peloponnesians
hos duces sibl: ' these (as) their leaders,' dwces is in predicative
agreement with hos (V. 69, v. ). slbl : for cape see V. 80, 6, i.
■■■ CHAP. 3. ,'-■'■
,—*• flf^® * ^®^ y* 28, iii. conarentur : virtual indirect discourse
( V . 177). quantum pecuniae : ' how much money,' lit. ? (V. 86,
h • \^^f^^^' ^^^^ qnisque. daret : 'should give' (V. 186, 1,
o, li). The clause quantum . . . £aret is governed by constitueret.
quadrlngrena et sexaflrena : for the distributives see III. 61, e.
D e lum ; race, owing ta idea^f^ — '^ — jml. . ..
ed to gender of aerarium(V. 13, i.)
16
coUata^
bliierunt ;
fa : iSttrac6-~
'determined,'
^>#,
^^
i
i
242
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK,
K
*appoii}ted. ' Qaae omnlg peounla : i.e., the accumulated amount.
postero tempore : ' at a later date. ' *
2. Hlc : Aristides. qua . .\ abstlnenttu : alST. of chkracter-
istic; freely, «how disinterested he was' (V. 105, i.). fnerlt :
subjunctive in indir. question governed by est indicium which is
equivalent to a transitive verb, 'shows.' See V. 18, ii. quod:
• the fact that ' ; qrtod decessit is a noun clause subject of est indicium
understood, cum: concessive 'although' (J. 66, a), tantls
rebus: 'such immense resources.** For case see V. 78, v. c.
praefnis^et: 'had cqntrolled,' 'administered,' qui efferreftur •
'the therewithal to bury him,' lit. '(that) wherewith he might
be buried., qui : abl. case (III. 64, a), efferretur : final sub^
junctjVTB (V. 26). rellquerlt : for tense see V. 33, iii.
3. publico: • at the expense ofithe state.' do oommuni ...
oollooarentur : ' were married off by dowries being provided from
thejpjjfolic treasury.' dbfibus datls : abl. absolute. The dos was
a^ry necessary considei'atioh in arranging an Athenian marriage.
post annum quartum quam : 'three years after, '= anno miarto
postquam; po9t coming before anno quarto is felt to have the force
of a preposition, and governs the "ace. Observe that the Romans
in reckoning from one date to another counted in both extremes,
where we include but one. erat expulsus : for tense see last
note on ch. 1, 5^ above.
\
NOTES ON HANNIBAL.
, ' ' OHRONOLOaiCAL TABLE.
V Hannibal is bom ...
fi Is talf en to Spain . . . .
Becomes commander-in-chief
Lays siege to Sagi^tum J'. ,
Crosses the Alps . ,. .
Wins a victory^t Trasymene .
Ct-ushes the Roma^is at CanheB .
Withdraws to Africa . * ; .
Is defeated at Zama . . » .
Qo0 to the Court of Antiochufl
Commits suicide
s
B.C.
II
»
ri
II
11
#:^
11
II
247
238
221
219
218
217
216
203^
202
103
183 (?)
■*;^c.
A ^ ^
CHAP. 1.
?:aZ*rw*^.;jllf^"'^^'' ^^" ^ ^^^ ^ ^"irk-^-f v-f^ ^ thing
wmo^- (V. 17dr«). gpit . . . aaperartt: a substHutiye clause of
4
%■
PART IV.— NOTES ON HANNIBAL.
243
result, subject of verum est, for the regular ace. and inf. (V 197
fn.). tanto . . quanto:,'as much as' (V. IQi).- anteoedat:
formood see V. 176. . .^\ . ,^
2. «o: i.e., populo ifomano. dtsoeMlt superior : 'came off
victor. Qaod nisi: «and if«. . . not,' 'unless, then.' Quod •
a conjunction here, but originally a rel. pronoun, mea^iiHifewith.
respect to which. ' olvlum : subjective gen. : so multimimj see V.
84. Tldetur: sc. Hannibal as subject» Latin prefers the per-
sonal construction (V. 18^ vii.). Translate «it seems that he '
potulsse: represents potuU (V. 64,^.). Translate «could (or
might) have conquered. ' il*
3. Velut ~^T . paternum : Hhe Ha^^red inhei^ed froiri his siVe *
So ' V ^***^^®^ o^ his father, left as it were by inheritance' (Y
7?u'^V' , J-L^r^dUate : abl. of manner, ut . . . deposuerlt:
that he laid it aside only with his life,' lit. (somewhat illogicallv)
that he laid down his life before belaid that aside. ' deposuerlt •
this verb, by a figure called zejjgma, is used with both animam and
Mt (sc. odinm\ in a slightly different sense. For tense see V. 33
"?• ,. ^"* quldem : ' since (in fact) he. ' pulsus esset, indlirerot :
distinguish these tenses. For mood, see V. 65, a. opum • for
case see V. 91, /. destlterlt : subj. in a causal rel. clause (V.
171). animo : * in his heart. ' ' . ;
■' ■ -•. . ■. CHAP. a. '''■'/'-■-..:,."'■'■'''-.:-
1. ut omlttom : «to say nothing of.' PhiUppnm : PhUip V.,.
king of Macedon. absens : 'without meeting him in pereon '
Hannibal neyer^saw the king, but arranged an alliance with him
by ambassadors ia B.C. 216. Antloohus : the Gr^t, king of
Syria, fnlt : we should expect Nam Antiochum, qui potentissimtis
fmt, incemiit. bellandl : obj. gen. rubro marl : by Red Sea
th« Greeks meant also the Persian Gulf and the Indian Ocean.
arm» .- ^ . inferre Itallae : ' to carry the war into Italy.'
2. oonfiUls oiandestlnls : ' by intrigues, ' lit. 'secret communi-
cations, regl: dat. of reference, 'in the eyes of the kini? '
adduoerent : ^bjunctive of purpose after darent operam. tam-
qua,m: » on the ground that,' lit. 'just as if,' with comtpiuw (V.
,44, HI.), oorruptum : sc. eim (i.e,, Hannibalem), subject of aen-
ttfy. alia atquo antea aentire : * held different views from*
formerly' (V. 168, i^. the infinitive depends on the idea of
thinking in siutpi^.u,nem (V. 191). feolssent. comperUset, vldl.-
■et J with CMm, 1. 16. Megrrefari : 'was being excluded.'
. 3. tempore dato: 'when opportunity offered.' tnqult : repeafc-
^^ l\^^^-i^^ K^^^^^^^y "^"" pHrentUotically as here, pueraio
.iiw 1 abl. absolute, mjidt» . . . nato t "To? T was not more than
nme years of age ' ; for ^dpote see V. 44, iil »nno. : for case see
244
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
i»y
M
i^'
Jovl : I.e., to Baal,
V . 129 and 98, iv. nato : agrees with me.
the great divinity of t^ie Carthaginians.
/AT^iKof ^®*®'***'*' * ^^^ ^®^^ writers would use the'pres. ind. here
(V 15d). vellemne : see V. 36, i. dubitaret : ' to hesitate ' (V.
27). dederls : for tense see V. 62. earn : obj. of tenentem, which
agrees with me. numqaam : emphatic position, in amloltla
. . 4 fore: 'befriends.' fore: see V. 17.
qaln
5. nemini .V. . quin :>'#io one should doubt thaib. ,,„.„
fntarns : substantive clause, subject of deheat (V. 139, b). re-
llquo tempore: * for the rest of my life' (V. 131, i.). eadem
see V. 105, i. i ...,.-':■- ■ ...':': .- ./ - ^
meiite
6. quid
.wards,' etc.,
. cosrltabls: *liave any friendly intentions to-
^ you will act not unwisely in concealing them from me,' lit. ? (V,.
184, 1.). m© : ace. after celaris, the ace. of the thing (id) boiiri
understood (V. 69» vi.). , celarU i^^elaveris. in eo: = m bello
para)ido. mo prinolpem posuerls : 'put me in the chief place '
''■ ■'■^'>- ■■■■;; .1^.,. ■■>■"■
.^/V 'y--''r'''-:' %■■■. ■ .;■ CHAP. 3. ,; / -^ ' .
^1. qua dIxImnR : freely' ' which I have mentioneJ^ ; complete
* the sentence thus, qiia (aetate) diximm (eum profectnm esse)
obltnm : in 229 B.C. praefuit : ' was placed in comn^^nd of '
' IV ^'\ o '^PPO^n^nient- Carthafirlnem : see on Delum, Aris-
tides, «J)u 3, 1. delatum: * when reported ' (V. 43). ^
2. annla : after minor (V. 98) ; with natns, the ace. as in ch. 2,
3, 18 usual, trlennio : see V. 131. Sa«rantum : a' corruption of
the Greek Zacynthus (Zante), now Murviedro, a corruption of mun
veteres. foederatam oivltatem : ' a city.in «Uiance (with Rome).'
Notice the absence of connectives > (asyncfeiotO in this sentence,
and, indeed, m the whole chapter.
8. Ex hli: «of these'; see V. 80, ill. omntbttt J setltjely dor
rect, as many M the Gauls were friendly. «1.1 vlotum : • without
having first delated him,' lit. ? (V. 44, iii.). ^ ., e^ / v,
% , ~ '■"■ ■■ "'" " '■■■■
4. Heroalem : referring to the story that Hercules brought the
oxen of the triple-lKxiiod monster Geryon from some distant island
111 the west, o»Ver the Pyrenees and the Alps, quo facto : ' from
^ which exploit,' causal abl. The name was really of local origin.
conantes ;. « when (or who were) endeavoring.' trannltu : see V
93. looa: 'district,' 'qountry.^ n^nnilt : 'built,' 'constructed.'
vf * • •; Po""»*: substantive clause of result, object of effecit:
trans. *made it possible for.' oa . . . qua : '(there) . . . where '
Jtctticfr th<^^}oHtyaHfe b u Lw uu u ekpfumfita aud anw i nmno[ oma^
Wifi
and inermisy ire and repere.
*. 'm^ '
t
9
m
f
PABT IV.^NOTES ON HANNIBAL.
245
• CHAP. 4. ■ " ■
1. Oonfllxerat, pepalerat : pluperfect because Nepoa looks
. forward to the more important action denoted by decemU. ^aoU
pione : father of the great Scipio. Scipio was really not present .
at this skirmish. Clastldll : locative (V. 127, i,),
2. Tertlo : *a third time,' adv. utrosqae : for ,the usual
, ntrumque. Indj : * after that.', peten«|i < on his way towards.'
3. Hoc itlnere : see V. 130. #Aextro : sc. ocvlo. According to
Livy he lost She eye altogether, oironmventnm ocoldlt : best
translated by two co-ordinate verbs, 'surrounded and killed,' lit.?
(V. 43). post : adv. booapautem : * while (ar who was) attempt-
ing to seize.' 3S"
4. Hulo : from hye'to ch. 5,4^, there is great confusion in the
order of events, ei : for dat. see V. 62. atrinsqne : 'of both.'
proello : the battle of Cannae, the most signal defeat ev6r sus-
tained by tl|e ]^oman arms.^ Panlam^: i.e., L. Aemilium Pavium.
:"■-■. <, : ' ■ / ,■• ■■ V ' , CtBlAP, U» '" \
1. pngna !T^^es6nts a cognate accusative in the active, pro-
feotns est : it wa*1teally not untili five years later, nallo rest-
ate nte : 'without anyone offering resistance,' lit.? habnlsset.
reverteretur : distinguish the tenses.
2. Hlo : adverb, exeroltns : ' to his army, ' objective gen. See
y. 86. oallldlsslmo Imperatori : 'shrewd commander as he was,'
lit.? dedit verba: a colloquial expression, 'fooled,' 'tricked,'
lit. ' gave words (only). '^ obdaota noote : 'under cover of night,'
viit."? dellfcata Incendit : 'he fastened . . . and set fire to' (V,
43). ejus irenerls: 'thcked out in this fashion,' or 'of thes^.^,
lit.? dlspalatam Itnmlstt : 'Jet loose to straggle in all direction^i^
•sent straggling *bff' (V. 44,*^ii.). Quo . . . vlsu : 'by the un-
expected appearance of this &ifO}ir or 'by causing this unexpected
Bight to be presented to them,' abl. absolute, terrorem Injeoit
exeroltal: s^e V. 78, v. c, <P v
3. rem ireatam : 'exploit.' Ita : 'so very.' mafflstram «qnl-
tnm: 'master of the horse.' |P*hi8 officer was usually next in
command to the Dictator, pari ao diotatorem Imperlo : ' with
an authority equal to that of the Dictator' (V. 105). dlotatorem :
attracted to the case of magistnim. dol«r . . . fmravlt : 'lured
into an engageinont and routed.' Iterum eonsnleni : for 6w con-
sidem; 'who had been twice consul,' lit? absens : 'though hsi ,
himself was not there.' pawl niodo : i.e., by an ambuscade.
4. Lionirain est: see V. 136, a, i. siRtts : predica£e"adjoctive.
Olfltiun: *BtAt6ac^t:i' rvdwtingUtquamdiu . . . poaiiiL posslt :
«
N»^ . V
^46
.i>ftIMARY LATIN
V
^
If ' ..
^p
.see V. 32. restltit: «successfully apposed.' ,in oAinpd' 'in
V J ^. .deftengjim : see V. 116. Solpionem : th« Neatest of * the
Scipios, afterwards-called Africanus - greatest. or the
On!r.*«ilTo« •••• • f««""«"«>«^«-'abl. absdute, denoting caused
Quo see V 28 m. valentlor : .-with stronger forces. ' l« ool-
loqalam, etc. : a conference was agreed on : the terms wet- p nnf
agreed upon/ or freely, Hhey could n6t comedo tem^^^^^
perslna uL V''^"^ '^? change from th*. impersonal to the
pergonal use oi conyemo, unless, as is possible, the first clause
means ' he met him in conference ' (V. 127, iii.). ^«»"86
r«^^^**lw **""*' ' after that^wasdtie.' Inoredlblle dl«;tu ; '
JfllL §1 • ^^'"^ V; • ■P^^^^^»^- ^or iictu, see V. 117. The feat
18 absurdly impossible. ^ . - • *:*"
i«f>»^vT*-*-£V ^«>^,f nder sei III. 48, ci aole : 'the field.'
Ih^' i^-'^t^8tead of being crushed by the Numidians, he crushed
them, Hadrumeti :. locative,
F , CHAP. T. ■ ■ -*^\. ■■■ •,^.~ '
' l- ^»»»»^ 'affchough.' ocoupatug : 'adj\|ihilo : see Y. 101.
«ewit: what IS the force of the. tense? (V\ 182, 6.) usque «d
date "^*"""*^' • "^*"^" ^^'^ t^« consulship of,' merely to mark the
trat;«^ ;,' .' ^»»;;*'»;"*«« •. aW. absolute, 'under thero magis-
?rrl J • *■*•' ^^ Carthaginians ; secum might have been used
(as mos for eomm, h 14), since the iegati represented the cTr
thaginians. feol»,ent : for the subjunctive Bee V. 147, ii. c-o/-
theRomans. Fregelli. : see V. m. e..ent, redd^reutur : see
3. Hia : indirect object of responmm est Trans * this answi»^
was given th^m.' For the direcT form of the answer s6^V 19^
acoeptmn*^ adj., 'welcome,' because (/rniKm, 'pleasing.' reml.l
-uro.: BO se toTet: = esset (III. 70). „omlui : here-«omi^.
cum imperio haberent : ' kept in command.' j i'»»^
4. doinum: see V. 125. ut : 'when.' (V. 162,6). ,^x the
usual term is ' sutfete. ' f „er«t : ' had^ become.'^ ' had been
chosen' (V. 162, 6, ii.). Uomae : locative, «nnn! : pred adT
jith creabantnr, ' were elected (to hold office) for a yeax. ' blnl * '
for the force of the distributive see III. 61, c, 1 and 4 ' '
6^ pugidllig
:^.
force of an ace. pred. adj. (V. 106, i.) ; f
or ac see V. 174.
1
qaa«
m
PA-RT IV.— NOTES ON HANNIBAL.
ipenile|*e«nr : ' to pay/ lit. ?
repOneretur (Y. 26). foedere
ihe second Punic war.
247
relative, clause of purpose, so qutie
; the treaty concluded at the end of
atest.of the
;>-!
6. anno post 5 * a year after,' lit. ? (V. 101). oonsalll^ng : *in
the consulship of,' lit. ? (V. 49). Boma : abl. of place from whic^
(V. 126). ratus: * thinking' (V. 44, ii.). sal exposoendl gvM-
tia : ' to demand his surrender, ' gerundive expression de|ioting
purpose (V. 119). mlssos : sc. esse (V. 18, ii^.). senatns: *an
audience with the senate;' daretar : 'could be. given,' for the
mood see V. 166, 6, in Syriam, etc«: 'to Antiochus in Syria'.
(V.126,iv.> ^^ .^^ . ^
^ 7. possent V virtual indirect narratioQ^ (^V. 177), fpr quae com-
j^ehenderent miserunt implies a command, in direct speech compre-
netidite. ipsum : contrasted with bona and domum. exialem, :
pred. ace. * « ,
♦ . ■ • " • CHAP,.8i'
1. domo : see V. 126. profngerat : for tense see V. 152, 6, ii.
>. oonsullbus : in 193 B.C. Afrioam : see on Themistocles, ch. 4,
1. In flnlbns: we should expect in Jmes. ■! . '..,„. Indaoeren-
tur": 'in hopes of the Carthaginians being incited,' etc.; virtual
K indirect narration (V. 177). Antioohl : ' in Antiochus,' objective
gen. (V. 85). persn^serat : as a matter of^ fact Antiochus did
not invade' Italy. Hno: to Cyrene.
« 2. qaa r * as ' (V. 174). absentem : with Magonem. lilt : the
two brothers. despVratls rebus: 'in despair of success,' lit.!
■olvlssent . . . dedUsent : ' had weighed anchor and set sail.*
duplex memorla: 'two accounts.' Interfeotum : strictly only
with a serv^dis (a case of zeUgma) : with naufragio supply peHiase.
aorlptuin rellquerunt : 'have left Won record'; acriptum is a
pred. ace, modifying interfectum (esse) «um^^ '
3^> antem; Afi^w.' tam , .. . voluUsetf^uam : 'had been as
ready . . . a^ for mood and t^nse see V. 61. eju«: =Hanni-
balisy passirig over the sortiewhat careless parenthesis about Mago.
snnolplendo : sc. beM. Inntituerat : 'had been at the qjatset,' sc.^
parere. Tlberl: xiat. Mjer prdpina (V. 78, ii.). Th«rmopyll« :
as a rule, the same corisSuction fo\\o\mumam as precedes it. This
battle of ThermopyljB was fought irtqfl B.C. de ««1^1 im-
peril: 'for the world's supremadfy,' litT? Qnem : i.e., i^^chust
et*l vldebat : see V. 65. a. multa ntnlte oonarl : ' forir^ ma
foolish projects' (V. 203, d). vldebat. desernlt: sc. Hanni^
The change of tense is due to the negative (= 'in no single case
A
4.^ Aala'm : Asia Minor. 11» : abl.
■ babfelc'; Bu. p r velio^ from eof^iOBtt,
of
•nl
onm
means.
"while
Quo: 'in thja
(V..161. fh.).==
««•■'
'his troops'; mua by no means -always refers to the sub^
*f1
I' PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
'^re, (V. 173, c, 1.).*' rem sressit : 'comm
. i -,;' ■ ' .C, 'CHAP. 9. ^
Jrans. 'Haipbal %ring.' ne 0'thMor lei
.which ;%the&ntement isfio'aM irmederd^
•totem: ^tad put Il^elf in^M^oweiMlit. ?.
y- 85). Cretam : *m,€reteWi 126 %
'* whith4 to retreat ' J#lg6, 1^^.) '• ^* *
«L •
the wiog
' charge.' '
ml
;f •
; objefctive ^^f^
l^no se confer|rc^|
<
'^'S^^i^^i^^ ''*he follo^d;^^-';;,»™^;:; 'the'
'v' '
>I1Z0J
'?! t«#™* • * at his house,' locM
ive.
:\:-:^^^'i§'[ *^ainst/ ne: "that! . . Mi CV 24^
^X m ^^^Cr '^'^' ^^o^ledge ' (V. S| ^ier^.
Insolen-
dnoeret :
... •»»
CHAP. 10.
% Poena.. 0#eten.U,u8 : both races had AVeputationfor cun
ing. in Pontum r 'in Pontus' (V. 125, ii^Tap^d oLm
18 court.' ilnlmo : see V; 105, t neaie «^u 1„ '
T^i *-^!^ -? ^^- aim i^^^/ keeTT^Z::^:;^
iji^ :::;:^!f^*:^V.!^Slte^r- nomanor^m; see V. 84.
,;foHfl.eonc,hadhim,^
w«\t'*"* ?«<"«*«»•»: see V. 124. Saperabatur : «Hannibal
was the weaker, ' w^ overmatched. ' irtultt<;Wdlne; arm^^ see
V. 102. erat pugnandnm : 'he had to fichiM^ 190 I^^ ' !^
11.1 : for the infinitive passive with Z^rofsF^''--'--^' ^***^
for declension se« III. 56, d. r- » a
6. elfeotgge Ba had got together.' l
navem : * thf 1|H of Eumenes only ' ;
phatic position (V. 3, g). g; «against.'
mi lka«ean<r! • to be content,^ Hir^
'22, vii. vaaik i
[ery> unat^ . . ,,
like omnes, in em*
- ■ with di'fpntlorcl
-rd it sufficient.'*
*
£ PART IV. — NOTES ON HANNIBAL.
249
les, in em-
m
*4>*'^*» *^6"* defence, lllos : see V. l'88. bonseoutaros, fac-
tnif'ain r sc. esse; the notion of saying i^ supplied from praecipit
\\ .\ i.\fl), ... I J ^'
6:^ at scirent faotnrnm : 5 would see! thaft tljey kn^w ' j for sub-
junctive see V. 33, v. cepisgent, Inter^ecisseut rsee V. 187; 6, i;
lls.li^aeinlo fore: see V. 81; freely, 'they should be well re-
warded ' ; the subject of /ore is the notion of capturing or slaying. .
On this whole passage see V. 193. • ^ ,*
CHAP. 11^ ''[' '' . -^
1. mliltum: see V, 85. .ntrUque: 'both sides'; note the
-force of the plural. .Qiiarum : i.e., classium. ^pngnae : 'forren-
gaging' ; objective gen. daretnr : for mood see V. 156, 6. pa-
'1am faoer^ : *make it clear' ; palam with the force of a pred.
adj. oadac^o : equiv^erit to a modern flag of truce, nt^aoeret,^
mittlt : for sequence'of tenses with historical pres., ^ee V. 28, iv.,
and cf . concurrant, ch. 10, 5. * » •
2. qnin ... sorlptam : * that there was soH^e written propo-
sal,' lit. ? For ^quin with subjunctive see Y. 1^9, 6. aula : dat.
eodem : adverb. : I? , v
'^ . ' ■.'■-- ■' ■ ■ ■„ ' '
3. qaae^ ., ; . pertlnerent : * such remarks as served to make
sport of him.' For mood see V. 32. neqne reperiebat : 'aiMi
failed td discover it ' ; cf. last note on ch. 8, 3. " oommlHere
dabltavlt : cf. construction f^fter dubitabat in section 2.
4; -Horam : the opposing fleets, praeoepto ; for the abl. = *in
accordance with/ see Y. 103, iii. «mlvjefal adorlnntur : «con-
centrate their attack, on.* qnam: «but . . .it,' i.e., salutem.
.oonaeoatua eaaet, reoeplaiiet : see V. 61. praealdia : the qastra
nanh'ca of section 6. proximo: 'neighboring.'
' 5. aorlita : 'with considerable vigor,' lit. ? (V. 98, vi.). ooepta
•unt : 'began ' ; for tl^e passive form.^ee V. 22, iii. Quae J acta :
*the throwing of these,^ more lit. 'these when thrown.' pu«-
nantlbuar 'in the combatants' (Y. 44, i. a); for. dat. see V. 80,
0. pdterat intellegl : trans, freely by active (V. 56). K
ft nova re: 'novel device,' 'unusual spectacle.' vltarent :
^ ejee'V.. 186, 1, !>,^i. pnppea verterant : after the analogy of terga
*vertere. Cf. .'to tur,n, tail.* oaatra naatloa : formed by drawing
the ships up on shore and throwing ramparts about them. ' ^^
•7. ooifallio: 'strategy.' altaa: adverb, pari prudentla :
' with a like cunning, 'see V. 103. Note the alliteration in the last
line»^ ^ ■ .
The fact of hii^ dealing at such length with the -silly episode
pcnta, whiW diwnitwing in tt^fwvliww Hrtnnibal'a famous
campaign^ in Italy, goes to show that Nepos was singularly lacking*
IDi Che sense of, historical perspective. - ^
.<^
perspective.
V.
<,
^x
' f: \
250
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
CHAP. J12.
^ V V*'"^*r •«^^'^i^T^ ^^^ 1; ^^^- ««««'«»*. dloerijnt : see
' \\ ^ • **^* «P*** = * at the house of, ' id : what is the antecedent ?
\ so^fT^^'S^l "**?**"*?** ■ *^^.^g^^ar name ftv 'members of the
W^nH ^1T '* conjci'tpii, *.e., the heads of patrician fami-
ly, and the plebeians afterward^ enrolled. HaiJnIbale vivo:
asdo^g as danmbal was alive' .(V.^ 49). sine: "free from'
exHtWrent : causal subj. (V. 171). In : 'among.' «Vum.
'bl^' fn?^^'''^''^^-^^^- »«<'«'-: direct reflexL. T^^\
but ; sc. wi, from ne. ^
3. His negare
III. 68, c. lllnd
' to refuse their request,' lit. ? ausus e«t : see
postQiarent : 'but this he did object to,
.u •■ , . ," — , i'"n«'M»€»»cMi, . uuiy WU8 ne aia oDiect to
their asking him to do '^; for the use of ne and subj. (here ii apb^I
sition with -dlx^), see V. 139, fn. ewet : see V. 175. ipsi com-
prehenderent : 'let them seize him themselves ' (V 186 1 c)
fniwl"****' • ^*'-' -f ^""^ '^^'•. J°'' cdmprehenderent arid inienturL
following recusam«, see V. 191. munerl : 'as a gift' (V 81)
Idqne: 'andi which '; for id, not quod, see V. 170, iv. aedlfl.
carat :* had arranged. ,, . ' . »=»»"»
. ». ?"®!^ ! ^""^; ^"^ "" ^°"*^ Af rica« native servant is called
^boy without reference to age. plnre* praeter consuetudt*
»k2/ 1 ""^ ^^^"^ "^"*^. '''' ^" linusual number.' lit. ? A some-
-mbat' pleonastic expression. Qui: 'Hannibal.* nnm . . ob-
•Ideretar: indirect question ; for force of num. see V. 35, i.
5. quid ewet: 'how matters stood. ' oooupato«. factum: sc.
esse ne pet! : he was the person they were seeking,' lit. ? (V.
205, a), slbl: see y..80, d. . retlnendam : trans, by 'could,' as
often m the case- of a gerundive with a negative or mx. quam
K,-:i^-**™*"*'l*- ^\^^^« ^}?^^ n«fc give thik up at another's
bidding, t e., he wished to die free, and not \o be dragged in
triumph through the streets of Rome and theb put to death
arbltrlo : see V 103, iii. consuerat : for the fWce of the plu-
perfect see V. 182, e. V ^
\ ■ ' • ■ ■. y-'
• — ■-— : -...-~;-^;-;..-.. .--^-.^CHAP. 13. .....^. ... , >,
1. -que: omit in trans. (V. 205, /.) laborlbus : see V. 64. .-
acqulevlt : a very appropriate word after perfunctus lahoribm, **'
^^r^^ ***■ -w*«»tr- ututButsmp, 111 wnat year ^IT
49); notice the indirect question introduced by abl. absolute!
PART IV.— NOTES ON HANNIBAL
251
ier«nt : see ■
iecedent? ^
bers of the . H
ician fami- H
»ale vivo: '^m\
> "
free from.' H
snnin, H
ve. -que : H
IS e«t : see ^B
object to, H
re in appo- H
<
Ipsloom- ^M
1B6, 1, c). ■
inventuros H
' (V. 81).' ■
r. aedlil. ■
[lould hap- H
•
I venlret : H
•'
iisui (III. H
mg abl. of ■
••
t is called ■
«
asnetadl- H
A some- 1
• • . Ol>a '^1
5, i. ■
Btnm : sc. ■
' lit.? (V. : ■
could,' as ■
K. quam < H
another's 1
ragged in m
to death. B
' the plu- ^ fl
The dates are 183, 182 and 181
cannot be correct, mortnam .
respectively, so septuagesimo
nit : cf. on ch. 8, ^i
: regularly used instead of
distriotus : * though busy '
2. Atqiie : 'I may add.' hi
hie imagnus. -que : omit in trims
(V. 42). nonniliil . . . litteris : ' devoted considerskl)le time
to literary pursuits.' temporis : for gen. see V. 86, i. oonfeoti :
'written.' ad Blio^o«: the title of the work ; sc. liber ad Wu>-
dios scriptus. Trans. ' among them one dedicated to the Bhodians. '
3. Hujns . . . iiiresta : 'Hannibal's achievements in war.' duo ;
8C. prodiderunt^ but trans, freely 'there were two.' slmnl : nofc=
eodem tempore, but =cwm eo' of the preceding line, jbsus est doo-
t)ore : ' had as his teacher ' (V. 55, Vy).
■■«>:
w.
■ r"
-::.^^
is'-
»^-^~^'"'-*-
m^\.
252
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
JULIUS jd^sar:
^^^^ "IWISiP^ ^** ^^"^ ^^ ^"^® ^^ *^® ^2th of July,
^^ ?-^«*5®^"*s^omm8en holds, in 102, B,C.), of one of the
oldest p^cian families of that city. Although of aristocratic
birth.lje espoused the cause of the popular party, and after barely
escapihg with his life on %l^gufi^i that party by Sulla in 82
^'£' ^^ withdrew frontWR^^rtics^r tever^l years. By
^f3*^ * however, he had become a favorite of the people, and onei«
most influential leaders. He rose rapidly througji the various
les of office, being made in succession quaestor, aedile, pontifex
lii^|imu8 (a life-office), praetor, and finally consul in B.C. 59, The
l^ree leading men of Rome at this time were Pompey, represent-
J^.ing the nobles; Csesar, the kader of the popular party; and
* -^ ^.X!ras8U8, whose influence was largely due to his immense wealth.
^ V On Cee^6 suggention they formed a coaUtion (the ao-caUed First
Triumvif^te), the result of wh^h was to place the praj^cal suprem- ,
^ acy of the state in the hands of these throe men. ^e powerful
influence of this coalition secured for him, after his consulship, the
fl^dmmistrltipn for five years of the three provinqes, lUyricum and^
. t Pisalpilie a# Transalpine Gaul. -In 55 B.C., by an agreement
with Pompey and Cyassus^this command was extended*^ another
'"-' ^:]'- period of five years, j^*^- .• ^ ■
After the conque^ of clnil, which^ngaged the attention of
> Caesar from «^ %B.C.V civilwaf* arose between him and
Pompey, his so^remiaining rival, CrassUs "having fallen in battle
.^: , in the Easfe/^BvUie overthrow of the Pbmpeian party Cjesar
^^ecame practioalfl|,reme rul^f th^ R||an world. He showed
unexpected qleme^jy to his ioi&TKr ^ponents, j^^ b%an& brill-
% iant career as "Mminiatrator an||pi«iier:' But twj£man aria
*' tocracy, alai'med at^iis grgftpowei: ai^, popularity and their own
'lo8S of prestige, formed &^^mP7 to remov^ him, being actuated
'^Mae cases by»^ealousy Ji otBirs by an honest but short-sighted
d^gire to bring back repu'^lican freedom; and on the Ides (the
15th) of^March, 44 B.C., «The foremost man of all this world'
fell beneath the daggers of the conspirators, at the base of Pom-
pey's statug. Saddest of all, one of his many wounds was d^fc by
the hand .of his intimate friend Brutus. ^^
PART IV.— CAIUS JULIUS CAESAR.
253
\^
We are told that in personal appearance Cflesar was noble and
commanding. He was tall of stature and of slender build» his
complexion was pale, his nose prominent and decidedly * Roman,'
his eyes were black, keen and full of expression. In later life he
had a tendency to baldness. His constitution was naturally deli-
cate, and he was subject to attacks of epilepsy, but by constant
„Bxercise and temperate living he managed , to acquire vigorous
health, so that he could endure the most prolonged toil and most
arduous exertion».
The genius of C?esar was many-sided, and he excelled in every-
thing he undertook. Not only was he one of the greatest generals
of all time, biit he was pre-eminent as a law-giver, a jurist and a
statesman, mreover, he has lefb>behind him a reputatiolr as an
orator, a poet, a mathematician, an architect and engineer, while
as an historian he will ever rank with the highest. He was the
author of numerous -literary works, on many different subjects,
but of these all that have come down to us are his Commentarii Be
;peao Gallico (from which the selections contained in this book are
taken), and his Commentarii De Bello Civili (in three books), a,
history of the war between himself and Pompey.
Tfhe Commentaries' of Caesar are memoirs written by himself,
desdriptive of his different campaigns. It is uncertain whether the
work was written as the war went on, and issued book by book, or
whether it was composed towards the end of the war. Each book
of the Commentaries on the Gallic War contains the account of a
single year's campaign. There are seven books in all, the history
of thp eighth year's operations having been composed after Cesar's
death by Aulus Hirtius, one of his lieutenants.
The Commentarii, by universal cons^b, ■ M written in the purest
Latin, in a style marked by great sim^!(3f;y and conciseness, and,
in spite of its condensation, by singular ease and elegance. The
best judges among Caesar's contemporaries praise his literary .style
for its purity of diction, and its business-like directness of expres-
sion. Cicero, the best l^rary critic of his day, has this to say of
Caesar's Commentaries : "I pronounce them to be, in fact, entirely
commendable ; for they are simple, straightforward, of a charming
elegance, stripped of all rhetorical adornments." .
\S^''n^?^^^T' '*'9',,™®*"*"J? "fetches, jottings, is used as the title of a book
wiy subject, but especially an historical one. whlc" " * . « » ««~«.
written without careful revi«ion.
tlich is only sketched down or
254
^^RIMARY LATIN BOOK.
In the choice of single words Csesar is pure and classical, as we
should expect that writer to be, who, according to Aulus Grelliusj
the Roman grammarian, has left us the invaluable advice " to shun
an un<|)mmon or out of the way word as a ship would a rock."
NOTES ON C^SAR, BOOK IJ.
CHAP. 1. ■ . '
1. qui fult, etc. : 'which was the year when . . . wei'e consuls/
lit. ' Porapey and Crassus (being) consuls ' (V. 49). The consuls
are named merely to fix the date, 55 B.C. For the agreement of
qui see V. 13, i. Germani : the larger division to which Usi-
petes and Tencteri both belonged, mnltltndlne : almost abl.
of manner (= 'in large numbers '), as it is really included in the
subject, mari : ' that part of the sea. ' quo : adverb, ' into which. '
2. Causa trans^undl : ' the reason for crossing '; contrast with
the meaning and order of bellandi cmisa in section 4. quod :
'that,' lit. 'because' (V. 198). annos : with exagitati (V. 129).
^bello : with premebantiir. premebaptur : Coesar's reason (V,
146)* agrlonltura: see V. 93. - V'
3. omnium : in emphatic position ("\ . 3, a).
4. HI: the Suebi. ox quibus singrnla millla : 'from each
of which a thousand'; lit. 'from which . .. . one thousand each.'
For the distributive see III. 61, c.
5. 'manserant : 'remain, '.lit. ? For tense see V. 182, c.
, -- lllos.
Hi : refers to relxqui. anno post : ' the next
'the others.'
' (V. 101).
agrl . . . nihil est: 'there is no . . . land' (V. 86, i.).
(V. 98). licet : ' they are
till :
year
. 7.
longriug anno : * longer than a year
allowed,' lit. ? (V. 143).
8.. mnltum : adverb, frumento : trans, by 'on,' lit. 'by means
of.' maximam partem: 'for the most part' (V. 72, i.). sunt
in venatlonlbus : 'are engaged in hunting,' lit. 'hunts.' ^
- 9. quae res: 'this fact,' i.e., the frequent hunting; subject
of alit. Td indicate more clearly the connection with the preced-
ing words, Latin constantly uses qui for hie ovis{Y. 172), ge-
nere: 'from (or 'because of) the character' (Y. 96). cum . . .
faoiant : explaining libertate vitae ; trans, by a parenthetic clause
with 'for': , lit, 'since. ' nnllo
ifactl: 'as they-ar e-4M>t-
aocuBtojndi to any obedience or discipline ' ; for the abl. see V. 99,
PART IV -^NOTES ON C^SAR, BOOK IV.
faolant : for mood see V. 148. allt : 'increases.' immanl. etc. ;
' of huge stature,' l^t. ? Understand eos, homines being a factitive
pred. ace. magnitadine : see V. 105.
10. Atque : • moreover ' In earn . . . addnxerant : lit. ' have
brought themselves to that (=such a) custom/ freely, 'have so
accustomed themselves.' tools frlgidisslmls : * although thecli-'
mate is very cold,' lit. ? (V. 49). neqne vestltns qaloqnam : 'no
'clothing,' lit.? (Y. 86, i.). halberent: for the mood see V. 29.
Here to be translated exceptionally by the present tense, so lava-
rentnr. See V, 36, fii. 1, 6. qaarnm : trans. &tter exiguitatem,
lavarentur : for* the Voice see V. 203, /. i.
u-^-
.. /:
';.:■•■'/'■'■.■■'■■■■■■.'.:'' // „. ./' "■ ..-CHAP.
1. MerQatorlbna ©*t aditns : * tradeW^(B admitted, ' lit. ? eo
adv., *for this purpose,' explained by nt . . . haheant; omit in
trans, qnibns verdant: '(persons) to whom to sell,' freely,
, * purchasers for' (V. 26). The object of the verb is (ea)quae hello
ceperint. For the omissipn of the antecedents see V. 173, a.
habeant : see V. 24.» ceperint : fbr the mood see V. 177. qno :
'that or because.* ^d : 'among.' deslderent : for mood see V.
147, iii.
2. Qnlnetlam: 'nay even,' Jnmentis : here 'horses,' gener-
ally beasts of burden. Jumentis importatis is governed by utuntur
(V. 54) ; to keep the Latin order, trans, freely, 'as for horses . . .
use imported ones.' qulbns, etc.: 'in which . . . take particu-
lar pleasure,' * for which, . . . have a special fancy'; lit. 'with
which.' qnaeque : two words ; trans., 'and for which they pay a
b%h price,' lit.? -pretlo : for case see V. 100. quae .'. . baeo :
'iXH.TiH.haec before the relative clause (V. 5, i.). haeo quae ...
parva : may be freely rendered 'the native ones, which are small,.*
etc. sntnmi . . . efflclnnt : trans. ' they make capable of the
utmost toil,' lit. « render so that they are of the utmost endurance '
XV. 87, iii.). .at Bint: for construction see V. 33, v.
U
3. pedlb.ns :
(V. 127, ii.).
qnos : 'and .
for mooc
4.^ moi^
,piug : pre
*on foot.' eodem vestlglo : ' on thei same spot'
assnefeoerant : trans, by the present perfect.
. them.' . omn usus est : ' when there is need^ ;
Lse see V. 149, ^,^
abl. ; trans, by 'according to ' (V. 103, iii.). tnr-
-^ lOTfi., agreeiiig with quicquqm. habetnr : 'is re-
garded.' ephippiis: governed by uti. The saddle proper was a
much later invention.
0- quemvlH : -from quivlsf with nu/nerum. adlre ad : 'advance
ft^ftiQf*^ - qaamvl H pnticl : 'howevnr Hmftll their numberg,' Np.
face the case ofpauci(Y. 66, ii.).
256
PRIMARY LTATIN BOOK.
I .V-v ' .
■%
6. • qnpd : conjunction.
homines : %cc.
ea re: 'by it,' 'by that means,' lit?
CHAP* 3.
.1 Pablloe: not 'publiqly,: biit 'as a state,' *as a community.' '
qnam latlsslme : -'as far as possible ' (V. 174, i.), vacare agros :
'•io'r the country to be unoccupied, '^subject of esse (V 195). hao
re slgrniflcari : ' that this indicates,' lit. ? The clause magnum
vmm^rum . . ..posse forms the subject of stgfm^ari. ' ':^.. ' >.
2.' ex : 'on* (V. 127, v.). a Sn^ebls : with th©^iollowing Wrda ?
'mlllla r'see V. 128. a;gri : nom., not gen. - h » !- ^ • •
3. Ad alteram, etc. r^ * on the o^er side the Ubii adjoin them/
lit.? T3iere would doubtless be some unocpupied country between
them, fult : 'ha&been,' not ""was'^ seft section^4. utregt dap-
tns O-ermanorum: freely, 'i^cording to German standards-' lit. '
'as.the capacity of the Germans is,' i.e., S»» far as German id^tf ~
go." Gaptw is a noiin et sunt : contrasted with /ui>, ' and who
even now are.' ceteris :* than tjie rest' (V. 9^). ^iultnm-ven-
titantad: '^ often, visit. ' Both «enitian^, and ^imt depend on (/ttdd.,**
For the frequentative form ventUant see III. 7U, ,6, morlbu»^"'"
for the case cf. on ch. 1, 9. sunt assuefa^ti : ' have beoij+brouHht
upaccordin^to,' etc. > -•• " ' *.
li
. 4. Hos;: with expellere. cum: * although.' HHftilbas : se6 V".
93. potQlssent : for mood see V. 65, a. • veotlirales : pred. ace. /
witl^ CO» understood, multb : see V.* 101. hamtllores iiifl<*nW<^^
oresque :' less impoftant and powerftil, ' lit. v. ' .^
,**"'^:|
(.,
• . CHAip.,4.
' ■ 'o J, f
1. 'oWasa :' situation.' annds : fbr case see V. l^yBo^^r^^i^
^iMm," section 2. ^ ^. , v^ ,« * ' ' / Mi^^i
,/e, kd extremnm: *at last,' 'wi% pcrvenerwHi only, not with '^
^mii^. or vagati. »tgrl» : ot on Jimbua, .ch. 3, 4 multU lools : •
- ' tl^rpugh many parts,' lit. 'in many districts ' (V. 127,41.):
'ihbise ; meaning the districts near the Rhine.
•qaas^c
Inoolebant
: * « J.
JamoB. here, by past indefinite, 'inhabited'; ^ l^abehaht by 'had." * '^
,^ 'Ml *XH|i*, ;--'■■. -,•.-■■■- •-- f .■■#,,'*■'■*'* • '■/■■
^ 3. atfventa: 'by,' not ♦on.'" Hs : 'the.' trans, «Is?' from
Ceesar's pomt of view, disposltls praesldUs : abl. absolute ; ^
iffcrans. ' by placing, ' etc. (V. ' :48), ; transire i • < from crtjtasing.' "
jlf^ollibebant ^ for f orce^ |igperf eot see Y . 18(X et • .^ - -'■
* 4» 1111^ * the lat^r,' marking a change of subject, omnia
expiBirtl cum : 'tried every device, but nd^n,' etc. possent :.for . ?
mood • see V. 161. -»1 contendere: ' ferce a. Iiahaage. ' lit '— "'—
.•'■#^
; moog-see v. 101. irl contendere : 'ferce a. patoage.' lit. 'ta»kft >
"TITelf way^y fofceT I revfcrtli»: 'toreturn,' itt-lfyT^ ^
•. • - # » ■ -. .' >. ' •, , >- J * , *k •■•- * ^ -' - .
■■ •■* ' ^-^
PART IV.— NOTES ON C^SAR, BOOK " IV.
257
6. trldui vlHm : «a three days' journey,' lit? for the gen. see
V. ,87, for the ace. V. 128. ttlnere . . . -.oanfeoto : ♦ havW cov-
eqoituta: trans, by * with, ' lit. *by means of.'
er^ .
. distance '
f. .*"?* • • ; '"""• .'^<>'^hen these learned . . . they'; more
lit. wh<^ on learning, per exploratore. : see V. 99^i.
't ^' P'f"*«"»™ • • • certlor fleret : ' before . . . could be in-
^ formed, depending on. troAaierwnt (V. 156, b). partem : for case
, see V. 1^. eornm opplis : ' on their stdres,' lit. * by means of.'
%:
OHAi.
*.
/-
5.'
/
b?.
.. 1. verttu8;^*fearingr(V,44,ii.). oaplendl. : 'fo^ing.^ n,i
xl» rebus : political changes, ' changes in the government, ' lit. ?
For dat. see T 52. Nihil committendum : sc. esse: impersonal
Irans, that no confidence should be put in them ' lit }
■' What C^sar feared was that the Gaulfe, soon wearying of Roman
tuje, would combine with these new-comers and revolt.
2. Est enim, ^:T lit. 'for this is of (i.e., belongs to) Gailio
- custonx ; trfcns. 'for it is a Gallic custom.' ati . . oogant : in
apposition with hoc (Y. 197)f trans, by infin. with 'to.' SoS
gitftcran/, etc et . . /«t: in trans, omit 'both.' «ndierit:»
midxvertt (lU..6b, a). For the mood see V.^^ ; so veniant et
. t. . . vnlgnn oiroamalstat . . . oogrant : 'and for a crowd to'
surround . . . and cbmpel.' For the change of number see V.
.4^, ff.B. qulbu«que : two words» so (jua*^. — . ^r
3. tfebu8 • V5tat»menfia.' •ammiB : «most ImporiAnt.*' qnornm
eo., Qte.: 'which they have to repenl> of at once.' paoiiit*r« : ;
with object, not subject, eos(Y. 91, d). ne«e..e e*t : lit. «it fi;^
DL^essary, with mfin. as subject (V. 141, 6). cam: 'sinee.''
•ervi^nt: iollow >lindly, " are «slaves to ' (V. 148). *lerique:
t.e^ of the traders and travellers, ad volnntatom eornm : i.e.,
oftheGauls, 'iosujt(ht. with a view to) their- pleasure,' ♦.«., 'to
please them, iiota reapondeant : 'invent answers,' more lit.
'give answers mverited.' • ' «». *^ «i*.
' -' CHAP. e. ■■ :'. ■ ■ ■' ■ "
mt.^l*^7,^ J^ sorious,' ht, ' more serious (i.«.t^Mi heloaf»
manage ) (Y. 9«, vi.). ne . .. . «ooarreret : see V. 24. eon*,
:^^:J»r** -^consiieverat (III. 66, a). - For force of tertse ^e V. 182
« fk^t**.?*****!? '■ }^ *P"y ^^ ^*^" stationed during the wiriter iii
- .th£f nqrth- west of Gaul. ^- ^^ , . \ s,, ' ^ , .
'^in£ "'^^^«^^ i "^ ^'*^^ 5P«e >^ word isi^ubject'df an
Minnn. Trans, 'what.' fnr« -rAt^i.^^ ^..^ \ * >."».«'. i
■ #
^
f"
*
^:^'^l'--^^y^\ imf^ ib. e^. 'W happened.' "
^t J*
'*'.
"f .
\
258
%%
PRIMARY LATIN book;
^'
iN
3< missas, Invitatos : sc. ease, depending on cognovit^ And ex-
^ plaining ea . . . facta, uti . . . dlsoederent : 'to leave the
^Khine/ i.e,, to come farther into Gaul. For ^lood see V. 27.
poatnlAanent :=postulavissent (III. 66, a); * they ^sked, ' lit. 'they,-
should have asked,' not 'they had already asked.' For the mood
see V. 176 ; for the tense (in the original words int. perf.) see V.
187, b, i. fopo parata : depending on an ideaio.! promising easily
supplied from invitatos ; * with .the prom^ th^it^veqrthing would
be made ready.' ; >^ v^*
4. Qn» spe : strictly a condensed Expression for ciijxui ret ape.
" j(V. 205, c.) The English has the same idiom .^ vagabaiitnr,
-.pervenerant : i.e., at the time of Osssar'a ariiyaj. 0))serve the;
-^-difference in tensed — - --1-— -— _---^ -„1 - ,; ; V
"^ 5. dlsslmiilanda albl : sc. esse (V. 120, i.). animia*? etc. : ^'
' having calmed and reassure4 their hearts.' imperato : this verb,
^ when used transitively means ' demand. ' ooastltuit : the context
requires the meaniog 'aooounced his resolve»' not simply 'xe.-
solved.* ,j. . - '
^ CHAP. f. ..;. ',:;-:^-v
1. in ea looa . . . qnlbiia in lo«ls : * towards the district
where,' lit. ? se& V. 173, 6. andieb^ : 'heard'; the imperfect
implies that he continued to .hear this duri^ his march.
2. Aqnlbna: Bk. locis. ab hia : sc. Germanis. panooram
dlernm Iter : 't>ut a few days' journey,' cf. on M^ viam, ch. 4,
5. qaorum haeo, etc. : * who spoke as follows, ' jlit. ? , haeo : ^
feminine sing. (V. 13, i.).
3. For all the subjunctives in sections 3, 4 and 5, excepts those
specially mentioned, see V. 186, 2. For the primary tenses (to be ,
translated as though secondary), see V. 187^ b ; see also V. 193.
'neqne priorea, etc. : 'were not the aggres8r>rs in making war,'
•tc., lit. 'were not making war the former (of the two parties).'-
ikeqae . . . neqne : here, as often, trans, 'not . . . and not.'
reonaare qnin . . . eontendant * 'object (or refuse) to,' etc.
For qnin and subjunctive, see Y. 139, a. qaioaniqa« : bo. iu as
antecedent (governed by resUtere) ; trans. * if any,' lit. ? ,.;■
4. Haeo: * this much.' dioere : sc. «e. yenlaae, poaae : sc,Ji/
in apm>8ition with Im^c (Y. 195). al;trlb«ant, patlantnr : trans^
^ *let them (i.e., the Romans),' etc. The imperative (or jussive
> Bubjunctiye) would -have beeii used by the speakers themselves
(V. 186, 1, cY.' eoa : %.«., agros. armia : 'in war,' lit. ?
5. dU: from deiu (TIL 9). rMlqanm : 'besides,' 'else,' lit.
'remaining.' quldem : adding emphasis, but, as oft«n, untrans-
latable by any word. In terrla : 'in the world,' or 'on earth.'
pMi|pifl I iof tne mood h<h» V . ^87
^
Vi -■ \v
• »■
- PAR^ IV.— NOTES ON CESAR, BOOK; IV. * 259
. ^. ■ ..■ CHAP. 8. ■
vimm est. SIM „SL «;/• f '!. '"«'eretooa M*subject with
chapter cf. on™ 7 3 For t), k ^" •™''^ " *« "«' °* 'he
ary^te primary sequence ll V m "vf '".1?"™ ^' ^■™" ^'"^■
' to him withThem^ . ; tranT .Ll^eJhtotd -them't^ SJ' k'""
those who* . to 8e°z^?- /v' nn •,• r*""^"»- «"• eo,, 'for
other,-; nnderet^d^r. Zj^uthn:!^^ '*"" "'
. ^i.Z'c!^7^ fc't'^'^f *•' "'•' (^- 1«> «P-*: 'with.' „:. J
themtoMttk^mongThe™: " «'™ ""«""l".' viz., todUow .f
■■r^/-> '--■'. -r^.:.;;^- vV;-: CHAP. 9. '. , ' ' ' /" ■'■"''
1. post diem tertlnm : * two davs latpr ' lif ? in,A t> '
. reckoning from one date to another counted in Wh ^^^ "*
wj^^^e incMe but one. • ^^
tr.rl: trans, by the active voice. .. rljKsar v ' *".«^
west. exBDentnri i«#.«x -^- /"^»"» Mo»ttih : I.e., towards th«
-■-■■...•' CHAP* lofr' ;•:•;-■ - 1 ,:;-...v. ::. ^:^ ■ :«■ - ;,'
i.th„. formed by the fe£™«, ^^1^ anTt!:» o'otn''^»''
etc^' mmC "1" V w ' If. "A" .t'r" ,"' r' ■"»■•'' ">•"••
the Meuse). ■•••*■••'""' ^'«'^•'«('''•«re it enteii • ^
>."»r ; '/owe raprd'y/^j" J ^^^ f'^ "■"« °<""*'' •"•»■•
1.^enr-:°^:r'^.!yi»- "■°-^-'n«. En,...h Jould u^ the
trans. (V. 205, /)
?iui>io(Uiaji uiib;.' .q., . omit in "
W^i
.^
t';,'^''.
r
.!/ '
^h
jr
it
260
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
5 exqulbu* .nnt qui: 'among whom are the people who.'
pisdbu. : for abl. cf ch. 1, 8. capltlbus : ' mouth8,^HU Capti
18 generally the source, just as we say 'head-wat^s.' *
■'chap. 11. ^>-:-' '.„■• :;^ -V 'v-- "■'s^-'-4
1. mUlibas : may be abl. of comparison (of. ch. id 2\ or ahl nf
measure of^ difference (V. 101, i.) uninfluUed b^ai^^I^ (V^
IN 'L .u r Tf* ««"""t»*»™*: 'as had been arranged ' (ch. 9,
1) ; with the following words, m itlnere: i.e., whiKhe was on
his march towards them ne pro^rederetnr : of." on ch. 9, 1.
OFttbaat: for tense see V. 180, 6. Hopetebant. ^
2 impetruMent : see III. 66, a. petebant nti . . . prae-
mltteret : * asked him to send on ' (V. 27). antece^lssent : see
V. 176. pugrna : for case see V. 93. -«bl . . . mittendl : «and
to give them permission to send,' etc.
3. fldem feoisset : * pledged their word,' lit. ' should have made
a pledge. The verb agrees in number with the nearer of its two
subject». For the mood • see V. 187, b; i. ea condldone . : .
u.uro.: «woujd agree to the terms which were (being) offered '
see ch 8, 3. For the abl. see V. 54. daret : cf.' on attrib^u^ni,
?v ,'q«' t ^\^ ^^^ ^""^ 8'''^' ^^ '(^^«y asked) him to give'
( V, loo, 1, c).
. 4. eodem lllo pertlnere : 'looked in that same direction,' more
freely had the same object,' i.e., as that mentioned in ch. 9, 3
This object is explamed more fully by the ttt clause. Eodem and itto
are both adverbs, at Interposlta ... reverterentur : freely
tnat a delay might intervene and their cavalry return ' (V 48) '
qui : refers to equitea, not to eorum. abesaent : for mood see V
i'7« mllllbu. : cf. on d». 10, 1. ■
qui
175.
/v iS'^*^ freqnentlRsIml : *in aa large numbers as possible'
(V. 174. I), ooiiveniront : 'they were to corrife ' (V, 136 L c).
oognosoeret de : ' inquire into. ' '.,■'*
6. mittlt qui nnnilarent: 'he sends (men) to" tell* (V*
173, a) ; for seciuence #)e V. 28, iv. ne laoesRerent : see V. 28, v
proello : 'to (lit. bv) battle.' Frqelio laeemre, to take the offen'
sive; aruttin^re, to keep on the defensive, to hold one's ground.
•« : * but."' exeroltu : often of the legiops only (the regular army)
as, opposed to the cavalry (native auxiliaries) ; so also milites.
aooeatiiiBet : 'approached'; lit. 'should have»' etc ^iM 4tM^
^rm wpuld be acceaaem (Y. 187, 6. i.). • ■■'..■ j * ''■ ■ - ('; -^ ^^^'.
m
7^
;,. ' " .-■'"'■.„■ ■■'-/'■ -■'.'• ' . 'A'^'- •"^■'^.\ .- •: ,.■,.'■■■
1. tobi primnm ; ^a» mkm bj^' life.! ^4«iwitti, ct^; ^ wfirt mm-
uen»d,' etc., liui miuiaw: see vv 87j^ iu. ««» : ^Wffi^
1
\
If
-T——W-
.^ ,-U^
• ^
n" ^ X
r
i
1-
PART IV.— NOTES OK CJESAn, BOOK IV.
261
Ci^^H' ^'^'^ **™P"«" o«"n»ento8 : «more than .eight hun-
ttmentlbti, no«trl« : «while our men felt no fear/ explained by
(T^o^ . . . petitus (V. 48). NlhU : cf. on ch. 5, 1. uaie». 7
m ? For f'ilJ f * wT ^«^- thffc day J^ad been asked by them,'
^t.^ Jp or the dat. twdwiiw see V. 81. % ^„ *"»
,2. rursus: t.e after the first confusion. resLtentlbug •
•aa for abl. = « accordmg to,^ see V. 103, iii. complurlbu*
nostrl. : 'several of our men.' lt« : with p^rterritos. Lllnnt
^droye them before them.' faga : see V. 93. prlus . . qu»m •
V. 1J7, ui. venlssent: see V. 156, iv.
> •
4. in: «among.' Aquitaati. : not part of the man's name
irener*„ata-:« belonging to (lit. bom^from^ etc. For thTabl".
SlJ' A- f™**'"!^ ^'i honorary title bestowed by the Roman
b^tS^^ ^""^ "^ foreigner^:) appellate.: freely "anSS
Before tratislating septions 5 and 6, study carefully V. 43 and 48
nnf' fh"™ ' 'r^^y ^I- ^^^^' *""•» = *^i™'' emphatic ; to bring
out the contrast with tpse trana 'whila he himself e^^
Tolnerato : the cause of dejects.
•; Id: «tkis,' referringi to ceciditset.
tullt: scfrater. atqi^e : ^ and so.'
' . ■ ■ - *
proello : see V. 93. o1»-
* /CHAP. 13.
* l'^»eque J»«i^ , ,, neque '^ ' no longer either .
V.32.
9
or.
■IM:
see t. 80, 4.^ ab li. qaf; *frora merwho7''\ntuU.wnt'r^
2. ex.peetare tto : 'while to wait'; ex««;c<ar6 is subject of
M^-- a-^"* ■ :. •"«•'««t»'' : ' until . . . sKould/ etc. {i. 156,
of f oSy. ' * ^ ■'^' ''• ^' ^' ""^ «^P^-ession, ' was a piece
.?■'•' ■, 'V .■■>";■., ^ . ^ ' 1
8. «insiitiim aaetorltibtfii : «hoW much prestige * (V 86 i i • so
h^wT'im^ ^*''*^ "^. «8h*f8''J'h *l^ over any day 8f
«iL /y-.^^)- '"•*= 'namely that'; the clause qLd . .
^rnnt b^ m g ^n >. piu., it i nn u iiU Vi» (V. 198). ^^^iSi^U^J^^
PH: on tt« veqr next d^,' l^i^^ th^Zrvp^ot^Tt Zy^
^H*i ^--^
-i'' ■
■f,--i-
- 'J
I" V
"^
^
W
262
\
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Wem: i,e., as narrated m ch. 12, 1. usl: * displayhig ' ; for
tense see V, 44, li. majoribns natu: ' elders '.(V. 102). ,
5. Bimnl .• . . 8lmal: 'both . . . and at the same time^' lit.?
nt dloebatar : 'as was alleged. ' sut purgandl causa : 'to clear
themselves, see V. 119, iv. quod . . . commmssent : 'from the
charge of havmg,' etc.; for mood see V. 147. contra .. .dictum:
contrary to what hatd been agreed upon'; more lit. «otherwise
V ^^4^ ' ^'^' ®*«®*' petlBsent, possent : for mx)od see
'/^ 1 \ Pe"«8ent:=;)e«mse»i^(III. 66, a), gf quid possent:
freely, whatever they could,' lit. 'if they could (obtain) any-
tning ; quid depends on impetrare understood, de : 'in the
matter of, with' impetrarent. fallendo :, ^ by deceit' (V. 114, d).
6. Quos : 'these' ; subject of. oblatod Wsf) (V. 22, ii.). gavt-
44, ii.); for semi-deponents see III. 68, c.
«juod : conjunction, pert^i^tom esse : sc.
sns : ' rejoicing ' ( V.
castrls : see V. 93.
equitatumt
CHAP. I4w
1. tHpllol : the legion was usually drllwn up for batile in three
. Imps, four cohbrts in ^h© first and three in each of the others
mllllum : sc. pasmum (V. 105). prlus . . . quam : as in ch.
* ir *l^*d ageretur: «what was going on,' lit.? possent:
see v. 166, b.
^ ■ , ■ ■' ... ■■. ^, ■■ ■ • " :*.■ ;■■• ■' "> ■■/ '
2. omnibus rebus: *by the whole state of affairs'; explained
by the a^positive phrases et . , . siwrum. dlscessu : freely,
absence. suorum : referring, to the principibtM majoribimpie
natu of ch. 13, 4. nequ^ . . . dato : freely 'and having no time.?
• consllli babendl: 'for holding a council.' Notice the change
from gerundive to gerund,' probably due to desire for euphonV.^
perturbantui': 'are at a loss/ lit. 'are (so) confused (as to be m
doubt), -we . . . an . . . an : 'whether . . . or . ^ . or*"' (V. 38).
* The three infinitjves.are skhjecta of prciestaret. ^^ .
3. o^w-js^as. • prlstlni dlel ; ' of the day before 'ff. 1^1^ JL
^ j*. Quo loco : ♦ tihi8He,'*elerrirwr6o casern (V. Tm, «irt : 'tkwe
who'(V.473,rf): nistrls : for dat. see V. 52.
u WT? • ,^Jf** 3®"*. ^^^Wi^"- ' dome e^ceesseran^ : ' had left
.« home (V. 126). Thid showed that it vt&s not an inrwid for plun-
^der, but a migrAtion. ^PlutAPch tells i\ja that this treachery on
;:CaB8ar s parb was severely oensurbd at flome.
1 .■ .. . ," % " . * ■
.. .^* ....,:.. . 'chap..
Before tnmslftfclng sections 1 and 2, stu% oarefully V. 43 and 48. .
1. Germanl : ilios^ of, ch. .14, 4. audito, com rWrcat ;
' wUuu Clw^.hoaid-. . . and BHW.' . '
l(
lying'; for
2). . ^^^^-_
timei'lit.?
: ' to clear *
'from the -r
«;«iictuin: * ^
'otherwise
mood see
possent:
»tain) any-. ,
: 'in the
V. 114,d). •
i.). gravi-
[II. 68, c. ;
lease : sc.
e in three
h^ others. j
as in ch.
possent :
explained
i: freely, "
ijorily>is(]iie
: no time.'
le change ,
euphony. '
w to be in
87X L- .
1: 'those
'had left
for plun-
kchery on
PART IV. — NOTES ON CiESAR, BOOK IV.
263
''3. ad nnnm : 'to a man,' lit.? ex
their dread of a formidable war, '
2. rellqna : 'further,' lit.? Interfeoto : giving the reason for
»fiiga desperata (V. 50, vi.). timore. iassitndlne, vl : with oppreasi.
perlernnt : from pereo. <
? ex . *. . timore : * after all
lit.? Explained by cum . . .
fuisset. nnmerns . . . mUlium : . c/. on, ch. 12, 1. cam, etc.:
trans, by a parenthetic clause beginning with 'for.'
4. iis: the envoys of ch. 13, 4-6. discedendi . ^ . fecit :
' gave permission to depart. '
5. supplicia crnciatnsque : 'vengeance and cruelty,' or hiore
freely 'a cruel punishment.' veriti : 'fearing' (V. 44, ii.). li^
bertatem concessit
as prisoners.
i.e., he kept them with him, but no longer
*
CHAP. 16,
1. sibi ... transenndnm : 'that he would have to,' etc. Ula
fult Jnstissima : 'this was the most cogent,^ or 'the strongeat
was.' quod: 'that'; quod . . . vcluit is in apposition wit^ t<2a.
cum Tideret : ' seeing.'* u(; . . . venirent : (V. 27). rebus . . .
timere: 'be anxious for . . . safety (interests)' (V. 79). onm
intellegrerent : 'if Jihey understood,' lit. 'when they should un-
derstand'; for fut. indie, of Csesar's own thought (V. 160; 176).
et posse ^et and^re : ' was both powerful and daring enough^'
• had both the power and the courage.'
2. Aooessit etiam quod: 'besides bhis,' lit. Hbere was added
the fact that' (V. 198). quam commemoravi : ' which, as I have
stated, had crossed,' lit,? (V. 18, vi.). translsse :^ irarwitMe
(III. 66, a), proello : fordat. see V. 78, v. c. ie «am lis con-
Junxerat: 'had joined fhem,' lit. ? "
3. quos : the Sugambri. Intnllssent : see V. 175. slbl de-
•erent : ' that th^y should surrender to him ' ; for mood see V.
186, 1, c i.
'4. «e invito: 'i^ainst his wish,' 'without his leave,' lit. *he
(bemg) unwilling ' (V. 49). Oermanos . . , t ran sire : subject of
eautf underst(H)d with aequum. existimaret : for an original pres.
indie. (V. 60). our «ni . . . pont.niaret : ' why did he claim
that anything beyond the Rhine was under (lit. belonged to) his
sway or powar?' For the subjunctive siae V. 186, 1, b; for the
6^ «1^ wit^^Nrim-iUoneT' subject of all three plupcorfeots. -4iiiti
■•e V. 86, iii. |»r«merentur : for mood see V. 147.
6. id facer» 'from doing so' (V. 22,. i.). occnpatlonibus
distinguish f rota mods» .fafpMaportHMjt ;
<
I'
;264
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
. !■■'
I
Met Kim take across' (V. 186, 1, c). For the two accusatives
see V. 69, IV. ud : lit. 'with a view to'; trans, 'to give assist-
ance, and hop^ for the future.' temporis : see V. 85, ii.
* '-/^ ««:*•«•. Caesar's, ad: 'among.' posslnt : 'they could';
tor the change to primary sequence see V. 190, vi.
CCHAP. 17. .
^1. neqae : . . stutaebttt : 'nor did he regard it consistent with
his own digmty or that of the Roman people ' (V. 83, ii.).
2. proponebatnr : « presented itself. ' l^ gibi oontendendam :
he must devote all his energies to that end. 'J . :
ii_
'• ■ — ■ : '■"' ■ CHAP. 18*: ^-' ■■ '■ - ■i:'''^'- ''
.x.^\ '^*®'**^'* df««»n. qulbus : ' within ten days after,' lit. ' within
/t? oo" ^T "^^^"^ ^^'?^ ' <^- l^l)- *">*P*» «>•«* ■ * had begun '
< V . 22, 111. ). opere : tlje bridge described in ch. 17. opere . . .
tradnoltar : ^jhe work is finished and the army is led across.'
2a ttd ntramqiie jpartem : 'at each end?
- 3. qaibus . . . peteiktlbus: 'on their asking for,' 'to their
request for, etc. This may be dat. of indirect object or .abl
absolute..^ ' ^ ■ :,. -v-;... ,.'■■:'■'<-'
4 ex eo tempore quo : ' ever since, ' lit. ? faija comparata :
had prepared for flight,' ht. ? hortantlbus lis ; modifying fiiqa
comparata (V.^, vi.) ; 'at the instigation of thosfe-gf the Tencteri
whom, etc., lit. ? ex Tenoteris : with qiioa (V. 'J^% iii ) in
V ;«S">'?*- '™ *^® solitude of the forests,' UtVl" Forciwe see
V. 127, m.
'"•-■■■,.,.- ■ ■, CHAP. 10. Iv ■'?•'"'■ . '' ■' ' '' '" .
1. f rnmentls : ' the crops. ' si : * in case. ' premerentur : for
an original fut. indic. (V. 62; 175). haecl 'as follows': with
naec sections 2 and 3 are in apposition. . 1 _
2. fieri : ' was being built. ' more sao ,* «e "^. lOSE, ffi. ; wiOi
concUto hitfnto. In . . .partes: 'in . . . cfirectiona,' Ut.? utl
. •. . demlirrarent : following on the idea of telling ii^plied in
nunttos dtmisme (V. 191). Trans, 'instructing them to remove '
possent : see V. 32.
• 3. hnno : sc. tdcum. medium : ' in the centre ' ; predicate adi.
agreeing with hunc (ioctim), and govemin^regionum (V. 86) ex-
speotare : depending on constitnuse. ibl :=hic of line 9 • omit
in trans. .
4. oonfeotls, oonsomptls, arbltratnii : titins. fnr aotiTA VOrbg
4i— ^ - J »* * * ■** ! 1 * > W i--mr-wm ■ > T^ ■ . . l . . - /t f - ft *■ -— _^ t ^ r ■■ ■ ■ ■■ _" ■■■■■ . ■■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■. ■■■■ —
intiuJuoul b > ^ i w.' Iiinicot\/wit, tu alUlu BaiTb^ecr~qwagttm
♦,
PART IV.— NOTES ON CiESAR, BOOK IV.
265
jf.
reram oanaa : «for which* (V. 173, 6). nt . . . injloeret f
namely^^ inspire the Germans with fear ' j for dafc. see V. 78, v.
%T TJS» clauses are in apposition with and explanatory of rebus
<V. 196^^profeotain : distinguish prOfectum horn prof ectum. et
«d landem. etc.: 'for (lit. with a view to) both prestige and
actual advantage.' ,
CHAP. 20.
*/ 1. exlgrna : emphatic from position, parte reUqna : equiva-
lent to a^ etd clause (V. 48) ; trans, 'although only a small part
. . . &nd although ... yet Caesar made an effort.' omnia: 'as
.* whok.' ad septentriones . vergrlt : 'lies towards the north.
hostibus snlbminlstrata : sc. esse; 'had been furnished to the
«nemy.' ' ^^
2. «l: 'even if.' defloeret : 'did not enable him,' lit.? u»ul :
see V. 81. fore : the subject is contained in the clause si modo
cognovtsset: adlsset : for adiisset (III. 66, a). For the mood and
tense see V. 187, 6,^ i. genua homlnam : «the character of the
mhabitants.' qn^e bmnld: 'all of which,>lit. ? (V, 86, iv. a).
fere : with omnia.
. I' .
3. neqae . . . quisqnam : 'no : . . one,' lit.? Ulo : adverb.
lis : sc. mercatorihus. Gallias : ' GauL' The plural with reference
to the division of Gaul among the Belgse, Oalh and Aquitani, with
which Caesar begins his Commentaries on the ^alHo War : GdLlia
^st omnis divisa in partes tres. *
4. vooatls: trahs. by 'although.' qaantaesaet . . . portns :
depending on reperire poterat. belli : 'in, war ' (V. 86). uteren- .
tup : 'they had.' qnl e#ta|t . . . portna : '.what harbors suit- ,
able for . . exibted.' nlSSprnm : ' larger than usual ' ; the war-
galley^ and transports being, larger than the coasting vessels of
those regions, poterat : for the pperfect see V. 180, b.
*V :'' . •.'*-■ ■■ CHAP. 21. . - ..:. '.■,:i;^ .. • "
1. Ad hafeo oo^ikoaoenda : with, praemittit, not ^ith idoneuWi
prluaqaam face ret ; 'before making' (V. 156, 6). Idoneam :
' a suitable person. ';■'.'"' ■■■■"^■ ■'<"- '7- ■.■:.'_' /■■''-'i-]:.i- ' "
Jrevertatar : ' to find outf
and re-
person.
2. xt% exiij^oratla
turn '(^.48). v
8. tm&i I tKe straits of D|per are meant >sf
4.'qiiam . . . olaaaem : 'tjhe fleet which.' ad: *^or.' Tene*
ticnm belitam : the year before (66 B.C.) the tribes on the north-
west coast of Gjwl^eaded bv thje Veneti, combined to redover
their liberty, but were def eatea by the Romans in a sea-fight.
fi dnre': irrogul
yi,^V.:08.«
35^
■#
■" ,.'"'
■
:,■ /'S^
"■,■ ' .
.#,-
»
'
i-
■,
i.
%
'
'1 ..
^
•....
«
■ •
!
t *
i
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
#
^•m&f^'"
6. Qul»«ap^s:; Wfi. referring to legatifV. 50, iii. fn.). lHbe-
^iiier pdllleltu» : '(and) having made li«^ promises,' lit. 1 (V.
;^2€o, d). domam : see V. 126. una : a<i«fiP^ .
, ■ / ... ^
7. superatls : referring to 'That day he overcame theNervii'
(57 B.C.), with which 'people the Atrebates w.ere allied, con-
stitaerut: 'had made.' Ibi : i.e., among th6 Atrebates. his:
of Gaul, not Britajin. magrnl liabebatar : 'waS valued highly' ;
for rna^m see Y. 88, i. , ;
. 8. qnas . . . otvitflttes: ' all the states he can, ' lit. 'the states
which h€fc can ' ; sc. adire. possit : see V . 175. udeut : with the
sam^ force -as ut adeat; so hortetur and nuntiet (Y . 186, 1, c, i.).
fldem sequantur i 'embrace the alliance,' depending on hortetur.
9. regrionibns: 'country.' qaantum, etc.: * so far as one
could who,' etc. ; more lit. ' so fajp/l^ppportunity could be given to
one ' ; for tantum factdtatis qxiantmn, ' according to such measure
of opportunity as cbuld be given.' aader«t : for mood see V. 32.
moratnr
CHAP. 22*
for tense see V. 153. de
oonslllo : ' for
gyious' conduct,' lit. ' with regard to the policy of previous
ley had joined the Belgian confederacy against Coesar
|;before, and the next year had been jn alliance with the
luod, etc. : 'in t^Hat, being uncivilized,' etc. consuetn-
Jee V. 90. . The 'custom' wa§, as Virgil, the Rom,an poet,
" 'The ways of pAce to proclaim, ^ •
> Meroy to show to the fallen, tl^ proud wi A battle to tame.'
fecissent: for mood' see V. 147\ -quel: joins exoiisareiit and
pollicerent^ir. Imperasset : see on pb^v0ssenty ch, G, 3.
2. satis: 'quite.' , post tergum : 'behind him.' has tantn-
larum, etc : 'atteijtion to such*trifling matters' (V. 85). Britan-
nltie : dat. (V. 78, v. c) ; meaning the expedition against Britan.
lisimperat : 'requires (or demands) of them' (V. 55, iii.). Qui-"
bus : "the hostages, eos : the Morini. in fldem : ' under his.
protection. ' " '
3; ooa^tis ooptractfoque : ther former oi impressing into ser-
vice, the lat^ter of gathering to one place, qijot : 'the -number
which, ''lit. fas maifiy as.' quod, etc.: 'all the ships of war he
had besides, riit.-? (V. 86, i.).' This clause furnishes the object of
" dijttribuit. v : '' - ■ J- ' ; -: ■ ' .7 v» ; , - - : V ■
. ' ' ( ■ ■■■» ■ ' ■ ■ ,.» • ■<
4. Hue aooedebant : * besides this there were,^ lit. * to this were
added, ab : 'at a distance of,' with millibus; or used adverbially
\
ss'aw^y.' «euvbuntar quo ralnni, -Btc^iT 'wor^- d^tAittfid . v .
*4-
PART IV.-— NOTES ON CAESAR, BOOK IV. 267
and prevented from being able,' lit.?' Q^u> mmt«, may also be
imtten as one word, possent : see V. 139, a.
J^«t~"t:";m.""' «°™""*'™ ^"^ *' ••»" ««™«ng with
CHAP. 23. , ' , . ,
\JL /*'"* vlgrUl» : the time from sunset to sunrise was divided
into four equal watches {mgiliae), and the time from sunrise to sun-
set into twelve equal hours (Wae), the length of each varying with
the season «olvlt: sc. naves, nlterlorem : 'farther,' k?., up
the coast. The eiactleca^es are unknown. V \2J^
;r.?f^l^ •*""*'*?' • ; • ,»^Bp«*»"at«m : 'as these carried out their
mstrubtiona^too slowly^^fl. ? For tardius see V. 98, vi. The
result, was that Caesar reached Britain cum primis (not ctcm omni-
di^pkyed.'"^' *^P*»«**^« «»P*«« «'™^*a8: 'the armed forces
S^haec : 'as follows '; more fully explained by atqiie . : .'con-
hnebqtur. ita anguste. etc.: 'so closely bordered.' FManv
editipns read angmtis (with montibm), meaning ' steep,' or 'close
to tne sea. J *
4. dam oonvenirent
phould,'etc. (V. 155, b).
6. quae flerl vellet : 'what he wished done' (V. 21)
nult . . admlnlstrftrentnr : 'instructed them to do everything
(promptly) at the signal and at the (proper) moment, as the science
ot warfare, and especially naval warfare, required, seeing that this
(latter) was subject to rapid and uncertain changes.' ut ratio
. . . ut Tea : vt= 'as,' and is repeated with each subiect. nostti-
trr"*iniZT^ '^t7- V^' ^-.^"^ 17^- «t quae. sc. mJmmae
m, inasmuch, as these'; ut might be omitted, and merely
Heightens the causal force of quae and the subjunctive (V 171 i )
ftionult admlnlgtrarentur : with the same force as montik ut
admv^mtrarentur -ct. ch. 21, 8 (V. 186, 1, c. i.). ad nutum It
ftSew*™**"* '' referring to celerem, the latter to imta-
6. lltore :. abl. absolute ; trans, by 'off/ ,
■■.'•,-•; .'■':• CHAP. 24.
^ 1. quogrenere: 'the sort of force that,' lit. 'which kind (i.e.,
of ^ wamors), referring to both equitatu and essedarm (V. 173 -^
n.). oonsuerunt: cf. on ch. 6, 1. «opll. : see V. 103, 'u!
egredi prohlbebant : see on ch. 4, 3. ' "*
: depending on
ad: 'until.'
exspectavit; * till'
Ino-
2. hag : referrfog to what foHowa. »t,i
Vs,
lit.? multibus autelta
nnn
«i^*
detUiend^m erat : ' while the sol-
•
i
«r.
•
/
->
^" ,-v
I
•
V
f
«
'•
«
1 /
o
'-■; . ■''■-, . >
4
^ ■■■
.""■>_.""
«
>«•
«J t
^ «
*
^:;-#
»
- ,
1.
'
•
•! . O
*:
■ilSsj.'
■
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^1
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^r^ /
1
I ■
■
BHHHHJI^
^^^^^^ '
■■-■•/ ■ /■ . >> '.'•*..■ -■, - "
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
^^^^^^^^^^^
■ . ■' i '.! ,v "' '.''■'. ^ . i . '
:■ ' ■■: :• .::''^-'^ :.".:•..;-.■ '■•■..r^.v' "/
^^^^^^^^^^^^r
' ' -. '.'"«■' •■'ifj'-'i'l ■' .' '"'W'-.. "■ . l... ■■, ,■>■'. : '. '
!■■ !-,*'■ ■ ' '■ ■: ■ ■■' ,-■*■'' *■.',■'■'"
^^^^^^r^
'" '■, '■■-■• ' -. . '' " •. y
'■■ -'^^^^*'- '•*■■' 'v'ii''.' ■■'," ■.'■'""". .. ". ■ ■,
^^^^^^v^
.;: ^'^E*V'..3i' ,- :'■ ■' ' '■■:-■ '" ■: " :,.
pp^'^'" :■'-■'-
" : ■■' *■■,■; • --'^ -J.'^
■ «
* <* ' ' - ' - ■' '
L ' " ,-■.■•■■■ ' ■ ■ „
"•,..*.'■ ; " . ' ■ ■■
■ •■ . ' : ' ■ '■ ' 'I
:. '^ "*'."■ '^^■'' ■ '^ " ^ ■'-
t .
* *
-■
..-■"■•■■ ' ^
■ ■- '-; -*j^ - % ■■■ ' '■> .- .-^ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ , . . . ...,..,, ,^- ' , * ■ .: 1 — - ■
,. ■■//■■■: . ..■■.:■' .■ «i
*, . -
■ ' ■ t ■ ■ -
..■■ ' . ^ §,
. ■■-■ '■ ".-•■ ..■-■" .- > ■ - ■^-.
■■■,■•--,* . • ■ . . ' ,
V
■*,■■.■■ ■ " 1
♦ '_^
.-'■.■,•
- . . , ■•-■ - . , - . ■ ■ • - "^
f «
■• * ■ 1 ^ . -
■ • - - „■ !»
:; .''.-■, ">^--; ■ ■ ■■:'..'■■ ■ ' . ',■:■'■
■^ .;■':■- -v.'-" ■:; ■■ •' „■■ ,.. . / '• t
■-■■"■■■ .',. • ' ;. , ■' ■ • / '' -^ '
■ ■ " ■ ■
• \ ■ ■■,■■,. ..,.,., , , , _, ^
"■^- ■ ■. -> .■■ .. ■■:' "■ ■•■■ .'■/
,'■ -.-. ■ ■ ■■ ■■ . ■ ..-t.'^
*
'
■ - •• '.■ ■"■ ■'.■■. - -:■ ■ -1, ./
'--' ' t ^ :"'.■■
r
,'■■•:'•' '". "'■■ ■'■ . 4 ,. ' ■. ' i
■-%', .■
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
/
//
5^
^^
/.
o
4^.
^
^
,>, '
r
■ A
MMMlHnMliiM
lb Sia
1.1
11.25
125
Itt
US
s; 1^ 110
u mil 1.6
II
rs-'"*^
/-
'^
■-^
.■^->^.-
^W'-:^'
"Hiotographic
Sciences
^ Ccporatta •
" jpi^"
M^TMAINStRMt
WIUm.N.Y 14SM
(71*)I73'4S03
''^ I\ ^
^^A
'i^
•'■"-:■ V^-
■^ .
^**-,
«»
.1 .
y
M
V-VV-
y
268
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
t2^. , ^^F ^'^ (^•^^>' ^«' *^« <J»«^« «e« V. 120. i.
IffnoWg lools: 'who were unacquainted with the ground'; iifc.
♦the ground (being) unflcnown' ; abl. absolute (V. 49^ So W
dttumantbus, «ppre..!. : d»t. agreeing with tniit^iftSa. . ^
3. cum mi: 'whereas the«lnemy.' ex arldo : modifies con-
ground, lit ? Cf. on tgnotu locu, section 2. In.aefaotos : 'who
were trained (to this).' oonjloerent, Inoltarent : see V 151, fa
4. arenerls: see V. 90 eadem . . . quo : for agreement see
^shiw!' ^= »« ««« V. 174. utl, «tebiHitur :' display 'Z
■ ' ■ *• ■'"'.■,
i I. n»ve. : subject of remmH, incUari and con«*i^Mi. qaaram •
whose, inusltatlor : ' less familiar,' i.e., than that of th?n<M«;
oneranae. et motus, etc. : ' and (whose) movements were qui^
nlflfT-K ''V l?""- •P«'*™™ l.«t«- : i-e., the right side, un
Cif^ !l -^ «t'^^^- *'*•• ""''• '* «»«»*«uvre which/ Ufc.?
2. remornm mota : the Britons used sails only with their lanz»
vessels, paulum modo : 'but only a little.' 'J"*^/"!?.
fS^ n-.^ A 3 «)• «* • . . «venlret: see V. 27. ea re.'
his (^it that) undertaking.' ,egumt : see V. 79. • ZJ^
vultl. see III. 4S. praestltero : trans, freely by future : for
force of future |)erfect see V.184j.i. «-t*™, lor
4. voce niatrna : *in a loiid voice' (V. 103).
5. inter .e: 'one another,' lit.? (HI. 62, e). ne .*. . admit-
teretur : 'not to incur 'lit.? (V. 27). dedeoi. : i.e., ihebS^,
the eagle, «nlver.l: 'ma body'; section 6 shows that he i»
-^)eakmg only of those on the same ship as the standard-bearer.
f».!; ^"' "t™' !^- *. * r^®** ^^"^ '"* *^® "^*''®»*^ 8^»P8 saw them,
theL* ' ***® "^^*'^*' ^^^^P* they saw
. 1. P9«natum e«t : see V. 56. alln; «Ha ex navl:' «tl^
teen from the different ships,' lit. '[one man from one ship and!
another from another ship.' For tliis idiom see V. 168, a auU -
buMamque . . . oeoarrerat : ' whatever . . . they fell in with.'
.rrtrif, Hoction 3, and nu<M i jwu!tTaf, aectiou i. -
~»ff*
^%
>■
^
V. 120, i.
nd'; lit
So impe-
ifies con-
with the
*b: 'who
. 151, fn.
ment see
splay' <»•
nt^nm :
(hen^Mjg*
» quicker
side, un-
*»' liM
,eir,lai||^
f
e eagle-
ea re« :
Inqalt :
III. 37.
are; for
admlt-
i loss of
at he is
krer.
w them»
(ley saw
i: 'thV
. qui-
1 with.' ,
PAET IV.— NOTI^S ON CESAR, BOOK IV. 261)
plure. "St *-more.^' ^' ^"^ ''^<=^»^^^ebant and conjtciefc^n*.
3. nnlver«o. : ' the main body ' ; bpposed to singvlares.
raL'Sw^^ ^O'l) •^—fj^ti.: 'with^ their com-
'aV distence' (V 98 vi" "f^'** ' '^"* • • • «of longln« :
Cis usual gild LS,'' l5f, '^F'of SaT-t ^O^.^^ "^^^^^^
^
CHAP. 27.
-^
1. proello : see T. 99. dataros • sc WV 1« ^ \
^ two words. ImperaBset-: cf. ch 22, 1 ^ " ' ^* «"*«««• '
lit^* erSi'in """h' '""^^;"" ^ «^fced before, was\ent,' eto.,
freely, 'as.' ^ ^ ' ^' "******= *" ^*^® capacity of; or^
ranVn:""""*" ""^ "«■? -" " ■ «nTeo„#ru•(V•
for"-. ""Tn'd g"e UP' l1u".?i: ' ^' "^i '""""■«' "<"■" "»<•
datura, (V 41) '^' : ^*" •*"" »1 «"«««am ia relative to
thlirZjVoJtrl"' ""^™"- -.'- Hh, country,; .•...,
y^. HlMrebna: *by this means,' lit.? post diem
•Tliree days after he came' ^die qluirl
^vj r 'i£ I^ gg g^l-^ ^?
"tiwT0K6"dl
see on ch. 9, 1.
yentam :
^omini
••t v«iitam : see
si -I
^
^
270
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
■
* v
V.' 66. naves : subject of aolverunt^ a rare use. demonBtratum
est : * mention has been made.' snperiore : in ch. 23, 1, called
ulteriorem. Tento : see "V. 103. v
2. vlderentur: *were in sight.' posset: see V. 29. So
referrentur and dejicerentur. Inferlorem : i.e., towards the S.W.
propiu« oocasnm : of. on ch. 9, 1. sul : ' to themselves ' (V. 86).
• 3. quae tamen, etc.: 'and as these had nevertheless (i.e., in
spite of the danger) cast anchor, and were filling,' etc.; or tamen
may apply to the whole sentence, and be opposed to the words just ^
preceding, 'however as these.' neoessario . . . profeotae . . . ^^
petierunt : *they were compelled to put out . . . and make for,' -,
lit.? ad versa noote : *in spite of the darkness,' lit. 'the night
meeting tbeni ' (V. 46). - ■
"-:■'''- ■ , /;- ■ - CHAP. 20.:-"
' 1, noflte : that of August 30-31, 65 B.C., according to astronom-
ical calculations, ^sset : ' there was ' (V. 31). qui dies : 'a time
which. ' marltlmos : 'on the sea.' aestus maxlmos : 'very
high tides ' ; our sjiring-tides. oonsuevlt : ' is wont,' or trans, hf
> usually.' Inoogrnltnm : the tides at the straits of Dover are 20
or 30 feet high, tho^ in the Mediterranean insignificant
2. uno : 'one and the same.' naves . . . oomplebat: to
ke^p the Latin order trans, by the passive voice. So onerarww
. . . ajliciabat. qulbus : 'in (lit. with) ^hich.' transportan-
dum . . . curaverat: ^he had had . . . brought over'<^y21).
ad: 'at.' neqne ulla : 'and no,' lit.? ^dmlnlstrandl^^pil-
andl : the former referring to thqse on board, the lftttei|||p.ose
onshore, admlnlstrandl : Bc. naves. '
8. maffnii, etc. ; * great alarm inevitably (or as was inevitable)
. arose throughout,' etc. ; lit.? ' Id quod : lit. 'a thing which ' ; id is
in apposition with the clause rhagna . . . /odfte eat, and quod i»?
subject of occtdei* (V. 173, d). exeroltus: for case see V. 85. i
4. neqne allae : trans, by 'no other.' possent : see V. 32.
omnibus oonstabat : ' it was generally agreed ' ; mor^ lit. ' agreed
among all'; for dat. see V. 80, 6, ii. .Iilemarl oportero : 'that
they must winter' (V. 66X. 4n hlemem : 'for the winter.' r
:>Ui^--.
CHAP. 304
4. This long sentence may be conveniently broken into four iii^
English, viz., at collocuti, transportaverat and producers ; tran^jkS^
if the Latin reeA collocnti mnt; intelkgebant et cognoscebant ; ittiqw
dxixer^mt; nam co'r\/ideba/nt. prlnolpes : subject of dttacenint, seo»i
tioft tf . im*yae: 'w i t h o n e an o Ui e r. ' «oi>w»nt» d e esse ; frooly,
•that the Romans were withouVJit-? ««ifce; referring to caitro*)
^M^
C
tratam
L, called
V
29. So
leS.W.
(V. 85).
(t.e., in
r tamen
•rds just
rao • • •
ike for/
itronom-
* a tim«
: 'very
TKDB.hj
)rare 20
evitable)
li ' ; id is
quod is*
r.86.
e V. 32.
, 'agreed
^: ^that
o four in
trans, as
U; tMgtte
runt, 860-
n-frtBoly,-
■\1%-
. UL\:
PART IV.— NOTES ON C^SAB, BOOK IV. ^
rtim. hie aniriiBtiora: «all the smaUer':
tracted for thw reason ' (V. 101, ii- c).
more lit. *more con-
2 opti^^ faotu: 'the best thing to do'; for supine see
Jeotsof^ TJ^: .^.T^»»^^- PrbWbere, produceJe : sub-
jects ot ««««-Jem- .the campaign.' superatU : trans, by 'if'
{ V . 4»;. bo tnterdwns. oonfldebant : see V. 146.
^ * atdiuS^^^r^r^'i^rSI^^T' ""I'l^'^'^ ,^ «!^ 'Change of
i.e., to the cSist ^*^ ' • ^^«''-«•'^ = **^ briDg down,'
■ CHAP. 3t. ' ,
^-^liih ** «^**»*" ^*^»»"» : 'from what had happened to his shins '
lit.? ex eo, quddrr^'from the fact that' (V^ im\ r^L S^*
resources, comparabat : • he proceeded to secure ' (V. l&^),
8hfp8*'Xch''.;eeT"Wr'"'"'''"'^'**^^^^^*^^^^^ «^** 'Of the
«or?ir ! ' f .' "^' ^ ****»••• ^- «« «« subject Of cixm.
jp<yrtmk. re. : 'purpose.' erant : for mood see V. 176, ^ ^ """^
-€f^ch 2?2 :.*^r*"*"*' ^r^' = 'asthe soldiersworiced,'lit.f
see V. 33, V. effoclt : notice the change of tense (V 180 c)
■^ '''''■■ CHAP, 32U * , ,:;;,;
1. gernntur: see V. 163.* ' e, «msuelttdUie • «as usual •
frumentatum: the supine (V. 116). ad- "un'f^" w '
Lr^=a^^^*^r''"*V^^«^.f theU^^nder aSdlprrn':
*Tfi,n «.• f°'' ^''P^*'"'"» ^*'^ P»^«ding words, homlnum •
of the natives.' ventltaret :' kept coming ' (III 74 6?«-^
eonsnetudo ferret: 'thAn usua^ ' than was cu^toma^^^^
•than custom brought' (V. 175) in «« customary, ht.
visible iytS^recti^Uici'Tw'A^^^ ™
2. Id, qno^erat! 'as was actually the case,' lit? Id U ar
loZi^'i^v^l^ru''^^^ "^- • • ^^" '"^-"«^"
auanl'.'fKfV" fu' «"»*«"»: 8c. «Me. In .tatlonlbn.: «on
guard ; the plural because of the four gates of a Roman camo ?n
-n^fh«r™ 7T**r^= 'tot^ketheirplaceonguardVthTXular
iVate'*^ar'*1«".r^*"«- .u'*"^V'^ thSiwe^tercK.
in a legion, armarl : ♦ to arm themselves ' (V. 164, iv.)
3. panlo
JLangl
JUL
ferta : trans, by • as, ' giving the rea«m for
Homa Ut il e d iatanon* fV — Oft — —■.v
^:.
I '
i
I
f-..
272
PBIHAR7 LATIN BOOS.
'-,;"»»■" ■ ' ■. -■/■■■■
' ' ■ "■ ■ ^*' --' ■'
5. dlspersoB : sc. noatroi; trans, by a • when ' clause ; so depositis,
occvpcUos. InoertlB ordlnlbas ; giving the reason for »eriMr6d-
vera/nt. The pluperfects in sections 4 and 5 tell what had happened
prior to Caesar's «rrival in section 3.
CHAP. 83.
c
^
:»'"■%
_ 1. hoc: *as follows.' ex easedli pngnae : 'of chariot fight-
iiig'; see V. 85, iv. fn. per omnes partes : 'in all directions.'
Ipso terrore eqaltam : ' by the very (or mere) terror caused by
their horses'; for gen. see V. 84. ordines : i.e., of their oppo-
nents, eqaltam: i.e., their own. Osssar had no cavalry with
him. Inainaaverant : see V. 182, c. *
2. ita : 'in such a way.' liii : i.e., those who had dismounted
to fight on foot. -^ habei^nt : see V. 29,
3. tanttlnd efflotupt : * become so expert,^ lit. 1 loco : 'ground.'
per : 'along.' *^
■'' . .' ■■'"'■■'-'■ .1 • , ■ ■ CHAP. 84. ■ ■ - ' '"■■■'-■■:''--■■ ■ V-:"-'-' -
1. qaibas rebaa: abl. of means, perturbatla noatrls: may
be dative with OAixUiwn Mit, or abl. absolute, kiovltate : trans,
by ' because of ' (V. 96). adventn : see V. 130.
2. qao facto :' in spite of this,' more lit., 'although this was
done ' (V. 48). ad : ' for,' depending on cUiewm,. «uo loco : ' on
his own ground ' (V. 127, ii.). brevi.. . . IntermUso : 'after a
short interval,' lit. ? * . ? ; ' <
,3. haeo: referring td the whole incident. oooupatU: ibmis.
by 'while.' qui erant reltqal : 'those who remained,' i.e., the
Britons spoken of in ch.^32, It'pa/ra . . . renumeret (V. 173, a).
dlsoeaserant : i,e. , from their jiomes to their strongholds,
4. secatae aant : * there followed ' (V. 12, iv,), . oontlnerent,.
prohlberent: for mood see V. 32,
5. qaanta : 'what' or ' how favorable. ' aal Ilberandl: see on
oh. 13, 5. expullaaent : cf. on adiaaei. ch. 20. 2. .. /
expullaaent : cf. on aditafit^ ch. 20, 2,
CHAP. 85.
1. Idem . . . fore: 'that the same thing would happen.' at
, . . efragrerent: 'namely, that . , . wpuld escape,' in apposi-
fion with i(km (V. 197). «1 : * even [f eaaent palal : for mood
and tense cf. on adiaaet^ oh. 20, 2. dlotam eat : see Y . ,66.
2. dlatlaa ; 'an^ longer.' i.e.. than the baginnin g of the hk.ttla.
?T. ; ■
«■'
Oc
^l
'PART IV.— NOTBS ON C^SiB, BOOK IV. 273
'^^'f^T^ : . . .o«olderunt : sc. nostn. turito spatlo: freely,
as far, lit. ',within (t.e. , over) as great a spac^ ' (V.JL271 anmil
tarn . . . effloere : 'as their sped and strength aUowed,' or ♦as
their rumimg. jpo^^ers^ out^(a case of hendiadys), lit. ? Omms
-raie oijauuu«»nfJMli^T»««MM of endurance. ,
2. Hlg numerum duplloavlt : * from these he required double
the number,' lit., «for these he doubled,' etc. die -^the time ' or
• the season ' ; for gender see III. 62, c. fn. 2 propJnqi» 1
navlbns: trans, by 'as.' «pmqua . . .
^3-
mediam nootem : ♦ midnight ' (V: 86, iv. 6)."
:ii
,4. quae : the ships, ex . . . duae : we should say * two of
toe transports, lit.? qnos rellqul: 'as the others,' lit. «which
toe other (crews reached)'; r^itgttt, masc., by sense construction
(V. 13,. N.B.). tnft.»:t.c., towards the S.W, i
- .' ' ■ ' .'■ -
nf ^«.,?J?*^"" ^*^**°l- S® ^^"^ J""^* mentioned, ea.tra : that
of Sulpicius Rufus, ch. 22, 6. prc^pwl«»ng: 'on setting 6ut'
1L« ' iV f T ''^'*^- "*»» /*A ™»»»o : 'with not a vbry
V^iVkI I •«-••. nollent : 'if they did not wish to be killed ' '
(V, 176) J for iese, see V. 22, v.
; \*?o*^f "**'*"* • *i«ans^rtotheshouting.' -liomliium: as
in en. J^, 1. 8ai8 an^Uio : ' to aid his men, ' lit. ? (V. 81. )
* 3. ampiias hori» : «more than,' etc. JTorw may be the »bl
H,r,«°2Sr^\Ti^rH"J;v*^ «^**? ^^(^' 98), or the abl. of
time withm which (V. 131), uninfluenced by amp«tt«;.cf. on ch.
11,1. panels: 'but a few." "
t^ PoBtea qnaih: answering to. primo, section 1; ireneiwllv
imtten as one word,
'/'■■' -CHAP. -38. ■■ ■^'■^^ ''.-c; ■"■-■■■" y- '■r;; ,
T !*. ■*««"»*«■.: trans, by singular ; the plural if, accordinff to
lAtin idiom, due to the plural miwdwrn (III. 53, c, 4) quo
haberent: * had no place to which to retreat, ' more lit., 'hadiiot
whither to retreat (V 26, i.). quo . . . u.l : trans, immediately
After jxUudnm, to which. qw> refers. For the agreement of quo see
V. 13, 1. perfngio : ' as a place of refuge ' (V. 66, v.). faerant
UBI. see Y. 182, i. In poteatatem vehernnt : 'fell into the
hands,' lit.?. , "
3. «Annea: noirii In silvaa : cf. on ch. 18. 4. •-
fe^d
.■a^.v
■
1
I
V
l
t—^
1
!*• I
.J
■
>
-
!
J
.1
274
PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
*^.«
5. His rebus : referring
paign. ex litterls Caes»
the whole of the summer's cam-
thanksgi^ng' celebrated b/ solemn ; tecrifice in the temples at
Kome. At the end of th»^mpaign two years before, Ceesar had
written. for these acts a thanksgiving for fifteen days was d©->
creedi an honor, which up to that time no one had received "
A,
X*\
V 1. oonsiiUfcus : see V. 49. dlsoe^ens ab : «on leaving.' ital-
lam. the province ^of Cisalpine Gaul (GaUia dterior), in which
Cwsar spent each wmter, attending to its administration, quam
plnrimas possent : sc. aedificare ; «as many as they could' (V
174, 1.). For mood of possent see V. 175. utl a^Oifloandas
oarai'ent : * ^ have built ' (V. 121). «eoinoandas
2. Ad: 'for.' onerandl: trans, by *m.' ft»olt hnmlliores :
sc. eas. quam qaibns : 'than those which'; sc. eas(V. 98 iii )
nostro marl: the name Mediterranean was not then in use
id eo magls: 'all the more so'; Ut. *(he does) that the more
because of this.' mtniis magrnos : 'smaller.' transportan-
dam: for agreementsee V. 12, 6, ii. reliquls marlbSs : the
various parts of the Mediterranean were given separate names bv
the KOmans. ^
; 3. aotuarlas: pred. adj.; naves actuariae were swift gallevs. '
impelled by oars as well as by sails, fieri : for infin. pass, with
'TwhiclTeld.? ' ''"• "^"""^ "* '""" '• '^^' ""^^^ P"^^««'' «*•
Hispania : Spain waf rich
4. Ea quae sunt: 'what is.'
iron and material for ropes.
5. Ipse : ir( contrast with the doings of the legati of sectioii I
oouventibus : the governor of a province was also its supreme
judge. Iiiyrioum : another of Ceesar's three provinces, flniti.
mam: t.c., to the.Pmwte. audlebat : 'he heard'; the tenso
implies that the news came more than once.
6. imperat: cf . on Bk. IV, 82, 2, — , -^ -
t. nihil: 'none,' lit.? publico oonsillo : fts opposed to the
work of irresponsible individuals, demonstrant : coordinate with
mirttmt, not with duwuml. »iiiuibus ratl onib nt ; *W~merfW^^
\ _-■
-■:■-;":.;
•
-: ■ - = -
■JX"-- . •.. -■
"• .
■
' «^
'l
' ,
■ ■
miner's cam-
4 i
PART ly.— NpTES ON C^SAR, BOOK V. 276
-,^1*^:J^^\ .***"*= ^"^^ gender see on Bk. IV. 36, 2.
rtnt : they do,' lit.? For mood and tense see V. 192. ;
9. ad diem : * by the day (specified), ' dat : * he. appoints. '
feoe-
. . and finds.' Btndlo:
•(although) amidst/ or
sc. generis naves ; trans.
'■■ ^--' :' ^'-^- ''-CHAP, a..- ■
v 2. olronitls . . . inveolt : 'he visits
with instnictas. in gnmma Inopla '
freely * although thei;e was/ etc. onjng . «;. yencT^ na
freely which, as though the object of demomtravimus. lonira. •
80. naw». neque muitnm, etc.: ' and that they are almost ready
to be launch^'; lit. «and that it is not far from this thJt.' etc
^V. W», c). dlebaa: see V. 131. .^
3.^Colla«datI« : more emphatiTtKan Zatwiaiw. ne^otlo : see
V. 78, V. c. qnld fieri vellt : cf. on Bk. IV. 23, 5. omnes : so/
naves, portum Itlam; the exact locality is unknown. mU-
JlumrseeV 87. hwlcrel: 'for this purpose,' i.e., for bringing
. ^4. «onollla: Caesar regularly established these councils or assem-
blies among the conquered tribes, whom he thus kept in official
relations with himself, venlebant, parebant : see V. 180. h
imperlo : ^ see V. 52.
-'"',.■■■■■■;'*-■■ ■.'■■■.. Chap. 3. ■ ; ■ • '■■;^'-'^ " , •" .■
i. plarlmnm: adverb, supra: Bk. III. speaks of 'the IVe-
veri, who are next to the river Rhine. ' The last words of chap. 2
show why he dwells on) their jposition here. ^y ^*^
2. Inter se : 'with each other,' lit.? (III. 62, e.)^* , , ^**^
3. alter : here ' the latter,' lit. ? coynltam est : see V." 56.
•e . . . futaros: with confirmavit. in officio: 'true to their
^^"^t l^V J*"P°^ :=: objective gei^ (V. 85) ; trans, by
4. cohere : depending on instituit, and connected by (iis)mie
with pamre. per: 'by reason of . ' Ingentl ma«nltudlne : modi-
v^«S^.^r'/^ 5 ^^! ^°'^''^ ""^ ''^ appositive adj. ; freely ' which is of
vast extent and,' etc. medics : see V. 86, iv. 6;
6. Olngetorlgls : cf. on populi, section 3. de snls prlvatlm
rebus petere : «to seek their own private advantage,' lit. ? prl-
vatlm : the position makes it almost equal to the adj. pnvatis.
oivltatl : see V. 79 ; m contrast with sitis privatim rehus. pos-
•ent : for mood see V. 147. -^. >
^ - jjeie noli
m«(V.191), l4elreo: explained by ^w /. . laberetnr. quo ^
276
PRIMART^ LATIN BOOK.
^;
■•V
ingkirreT^: '""^: ^»-"*-' <".«.— «bl. of time,;«gge»t-
/ort«;i'' ' ■""' i^^'"^-»- -..^ .mt..!. : both modifytog
CHAF. 4. ■ ^k
the clause aru^toriltefn . ie ej«f ' ''L\ """^^^^ ''
omit In Cs'^^^- •"«»«•• '«fe"-"»g to eit..(V. 165, ii.). tam:
f^'^^T^sh^^i^ in apposition with irf
(or whiL) he had 'been WV ly^^^^^ '^»»«'«*«
Colore : «at thirgrievance ' Vv ^^ '"'"rT'' ' '^^ ^" ^^^" ^»*»*»
6,4. grievance (V. 96). Cf. on qna ape, Bk. IV.
•.:■.'.:•-. /■■■'/■ ,;--■ .^ CHAP. 5... .-, " ' _ ■
2. facta© ew»nt, ©rant profecta© : for mood see V ^*7R i "
3. nunnero: modifying miZZmm : f or abl see^ im An.
»Jod^,.„,g ^,f^^(V. §7); t^nsV-th:'^^^^^^
^watabsenf "^^nr'fT •• '*%^f<^ge«-' cum ab©„©t : 'while he •
_Jiras absent, for fut. ind. of the actual thought (V. 187, 6 ;m,ill
■'.;' -.V"" ■.-■:■,:.■■- CHAP. 6.'--:-. - ,-J. ■-■,■■..
1. ant© . . . diotnm est: * we have snoken before ' Tiv t i. n
I
%■
PART JV.— NOTES ox CiESAR, poOK V. 277 \
3. factum: sc. esse, in©: •Dumnorix.' omnibus: '»U man-
ner of . peter© oontondit: 'sought earnestly,' lit ?' quod . .
tlmer«rt : on the ground that he was unaccustomed ... and ^
dreaded ; for mood see V. 177. dloeret : for mobd see ^. 177, U.
6V' t*' ^^^ request t^be left behind, ribl : »him'; indirect
''■■■-., ' '■ •*,■••"■ f
, 5. terrltare : historical infin. (V. 112) ; for form see III. 74, 6.
fieri : in trans, supply ♦ saying ' from tertitare (V. 191), ut
"'^^'iJ^'nS*'"' °* • • • '>®«»'«*: see V. 197 and 196. nobllltite":
3eeV.5J3. quo» : trans, after its antecedent Ao» (V. 5, i.). ut
Itraduotos neoaret : 'to carry over . . . and kUl them ' /V. 43).'
; ^ 6. interponere, pogoere : cf. on lerritare, aec^ba ,C. -* quAd •
f, whatever. IntellexiBsent : for mood and tense isee V. 187 Ti '
I «dmlnlstrarent : see T. 196. def^rebantur : iK>t once 'axdy^
; hence imperf. • *^ ^ '*
CHAP. 7. ^ /
1. tantum dlgrnltatls : see V. 86, i. ooeroendum : sc. esse.
qnlbnsoninqne . . . posset : * by whatever means he Could ' : for
mood see V. 175.
2. loiJlfftt»: 'still farther,"' i.e., than at preseAt. prosplel.
endum: sc. esse statuehat (V. 56). quid nooere : 'to do any *
harm ; foracc. see V. 72. sibl: i.e., Caesar. ♦
3. oommoratns: ' while waitmg,' or «as he was waiting '-for
the tense see V. 44, ii. • ftmnis : omit in,tran8. nt ; . Toontl-
neret : see V. 27 ; so cognosceret,
4. mllites : i.e., belonging to the legions ; cf. on Bk. IV. iT 6.
. 6. Impedltis: 'while Jl^ were occupied.' insoiente Oaestfre: ^
«without Caesars kno^^e' (V. 49). domum : 'for home'
•
6. omnibus rebus: ' everythlhg else.' retrabi : cf. on Jieri,
7. faeiat : 'oflTers '; for fut; indie, of direct discourse (V. 187 6)
leabsente: * in his (i.e., Caesar's) absence.' qui . . . neyle^»!
set : 'seeing that he,' etc. ; for subj. cf. on perapexisset, cb. 4, 3.
praesentls : * m his presence '; lit. ' (of him) while -present. '
8. ©nim: * in fact.' olamltans : for form see IIL 74, 6. Hbe-
rum, liberae olvltutls : both predicates of se esse ; trans, 'a free
man and a citizfen of a free state ' (V. 86, v.). *
9. uit : 'as.' Imperatum erat : see V, 57.
*#
fti
.y^
/: ,
■f
278
r I
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
CHAP. 8.
2. pari quern; 'the same as' (V., 174) ad- »uT.An/''
could not keep/ etc. lonffins : 'too far '7V qa . v""*"* ^«^^ • • •
3. qua :♦ where ': adv. See Bk TV 9<l ft L.-. * a
'' *3«e J3K. A,v. i:j, d egressuiii^^A noun.
^.-admodam laudanda; * deserving o^great praise *^rV llftf
jiottvuy ia(^en. non Intermlsso : ' without relaYmor ' /^^ <*
by-principal clause coordinate with adc^^uanmr^ ^' "^' *'*°'-
" 5." Aoce«8um est navlbus : 'ithe shim reached ' lit ? /v Kfti
i^atnftu. IS abl. of iheans. >eque ho.tl, V ' but no^neto^^^^^^ ^•'
6 cum: 'arthough.' qtiae cum annotlnis etc • «of ^»\^\.\.
including those of the previous, year . . . eight hundred wlS '
sight'; for the nom. auae. seo V «ft* «r « """urea were in^
oonfinod to rich officorindGSiio^lioile" .'„r:rlS°'''S
hi» own convenience '; a predicate possessive gen ( V S ? V he™
l^^ssmg purpose, «mpnu, .cWent». ?f„r U^ cf. oi Bk '
■ "^ ■ ' ■> ■■ CHAP. 9. ',' •'^ ^ ■■■;•■•.■:■;, J>:-, '
1. oaMrts: for dat. see V. 78. ii.. or 81 «xi t , " •
tojorotect the ship^' lit.? (V.'si) 'drtertla^.uu- 'ili^Jhe '
f^rt,.*^^**!**'',' ^^^^- ^^3, ii. ex loco «uperfore : beldmrinir '
^^^^^''^^^^'^^^^^'^toprohiberel the north bank wLhSf
ou^men ' — *-" P-Mbere : 'to check the ad^aS^e o?
• v.'**/£'«*'l munltum : «well protected. '• opei* ■ «bv art ' lit
6. Ingrredi prohlbeb^t : «f. oh Bk: IV.,4, 3.
thL :^t^r ^'^J:f^:f ^.T^..f°^ "L-V-o Hdiors holding - '
^
■ \
PART ly,— NOTES ON CiESlR, BOOK V.
m
^ 'continuous cover, which deceived its jiame from its resemblance to •
a 'tortoil^e she]!. ' Aggeve^;- this was to" .put them , on a level yith
those defending the walls, '.ad : .'elose to.' pairel* : 'but a fdw/
'.' '' . . . ^ . ' ■■ r
'78. eoB : Le., milites^ subject of prosequi, tngienteu : object of
pro^qui; see V. 44, i. a. longins,: cf. on ch. 9, 2. maniUoiii:
see^V. 81. ^ • < . .
, ' - ^ . .CHAP. 10.
y ■ ■ . . , *■■•■■';.•■
^ 1. postpidie, etc.: cf. on Bk. IV. 13, 4r im: 'on,' lit. *,^(nth a'
view to.' exttedition^m : strictly, a rapid niarch^of a flying
column of exj^dUi (ch. 2,' 4)^ • . "* — . "^
2. allqnantnm ItlneriM : >'some distance/ lit.? extreml:
*only the last (o)'««ttftrguard),' t.el, «f the troops sent out. neqne, ,
I sabsisterent : * wou^d (lit. did) not hold '", for mood see V. 175';
for tense see V. 180, 6.' « ^ . A
^' 3. eo oonoarsu : ' th§ 'collision thus resulting'; eo refers to
what is implied in the preceding lines. ^, ^
'■%■
V-*
.■■,■■:' - "■ *» ■' ' ■
1. reTooart : t.e., from pursuing the enemy.
■•/^■■-
V
/
,^. quae: ' as ' (V. 174)., sic: * tor the extent,' limiting the pre-
vious words eadem . . . perapimt. amlstflR, etc. : * with the loss
of,' etc. rellqnae posse vMerq^ntar : Hhe rest, it seemed,
coul4'life.?(V. 29; 18,viir) ^ ? ' '
4. sorlbit i^ Institnat : see ^V.. 28, v. lis legionlbas : '^ith
the aid of,' etc". (V. 99, i.). poBset, sunt : for the m«od see V.
17^, i'\ For the change of tense see V. 190, vi. "
^ ' ' ' . ■ , , ' -P' "'^
6. miiltae : for the agreement see V. 11. operae ae laborls :
see T. 87, iii. oommodiiiiiiiiiim ; 'the best plan,' naves: see
.V. 110, fn. \ ■.'■■-.m.-^;'' / ■ • ■
■> 6. no nooturnls, etc.^: fifeely 'not allowing the soldiers' ivork to
cease ev-en at night, ' lit. ? T^d. ; ^^with respect to. '
I 7. q^uas ante : sc. reliquerat. - '-
8. snmma imperil', e^. : '-t^e chief command and oversight of
the war.' lit.' 'the chief part of the command and^of the direction
of the war.'- , Biimma :« noun.' dlvtait': Sran8.^by qjian^ng the
voice, a n/aM : i.e.\ from Jbhe south shore where Oeesar bad landed.
♦ f^~ - ' . -'
9i Hoto enm jfellqnl a <ilYltatlbnB : 'betiee e n thia man And^fib
other states ' ; for dat. see. V. 78, v. c ; sifhilarly belh imperioq;tie,
. J*.
- >/■
r-J
^-
/
H:^
^*1 ■
aso
PRIMABy MTIK BOOK.
CHAP. 12. /
■Tram, freely, ™ofXmth«»^« . ™''J"" «uo» notetewi
that they wiie C' Z "T^'STblf "^f^^S " ••*™'^"
*. «4« ...BBt; .partly ... partly,- "
inUnd district. ^marltimU- C w^ "^i""" "?* 5»? !>«»■«, for m
I^gU»d, now chiefly inThe nZlZlT,Tti:^ '5? r.*- «^
» hard metal to work hiu i,onon.li„ i, ^ . ' '"'"' which, being
even where h rabu^S^'^i.'i'T» "»«1««''^ bX native tribe^.
•the bronze they ufe ij ta^rt^^vfj, » «mp^tic iK»ia„„.'
prater, etc. : an error on Ses^'s l«rt ' '' '"^•^'"> = ' «"n-'
-.sT-
mentioned"-:Sn.!'?:Lr:nr^x::^'Sg]i«^^
1. tiatara :
*ofit.' oiler
adverb.
2. alteram
CHAl»; 13.
; in shape ' (V. 102).' trlquetr» : sc. est
. one, corresponding to inferior.
ad
onjas :
*at.' quo:
-. — «.ri.,1, ere. Za^tw; «the second side' an 111.».^«
the ancients had no comr>aasfis>NinH 0^1^ .•« «I«l»»nlam : as
land. '«."r/Vi^rme' wrafte™!*''? P»r««/ •■'•• »» I-
P«>bafeljr the We of Ma„Thf,l me»? «'™...'° ^«'^' >«'
O-
PART IV.— NOTES ON CESAR, BOOK V.
281
yrodittmi
'raditibn
. 86, iy. .
n which
see V.
licative, '
'-■ t -■
• ■ ■ ■
Ted to,
for an
outh of ^" '
, being
tribes,.
' ■* "
>Bition,
' ■ . ■ ■
every.*
% .
■-■■-1
f&fnat .•
«
remlf.
■",;.. -■"'
ojat : "*
• .■/':'"
quo:
•
n : as
jhtof
istant ^
lot.
from .
as IS
' Ipe-
but
esae.
ilii:
been
ct ii
bp
, * could ' ; the tense implies frequent attempts during Ccesar's stay
nUl: «except that.ii. ex aqua: ^by water,' i.e„ with a waterl
clock or depsydm, which worked on the principle of the hour-glass.
5. ut j . . opinio: «as their belief goes'; freely *as they
believe, llioram : referring to nonmdli of section 3. miUimn •
sc. pasmum; for case see V. 87, iii. , ',
6. Tertinm : sc. lotus, angrnlns : the same as alter anautus,
section 1. In : *in' ; the ace. because of the notion of extending
over space. ' t-^ ,^^
7. violes oentnm : 'two thousand.' mliunm : for case cf on
section 5.
■ CHAP, 14.
#
-v
qu^^d^io : see V. 173, c. 11 omnfv:
1. qui : see V. 173, a.
* entirely.' ; ,
2. Interlpre» plWiqne : < most of those in the interior'; pU-
rt^ an adj. modifying interiores used as a substantive, laoto : cf.
V ^h - ' ®- ^*** • ' ***"^' ^^^ (^- ^^1' "• ^^)- •••lM»«t« : see
V . JLUii.
1^ 3. aunt : freely «they have.' oaplUo, parte : see V. 105, i.
- 4. Uxopea oommnnea : ace. ■ Ctesar is probably in error on this
point, deni duodenlque : * in groups of ten or twelve ' ; see III.
61, Cy 4. -que : lit. *and (in other cases).' Cf. in English 'tiire©
and four times a day. ' - ^* .
6. alqul: sc. liheH; «if any'(V. 166, a), habentnr : 'th«y
are regaled, '^ with pred. nom. libeH (V. 12, c). quo : adv. =*aS
^t«o«; 'to whom.' * ^
■r ■■:^^ .CHAP. 15. ^
1. tatnen ut : *yet so that/ otnnlbna partlbna : 'everywhere.*
fuerint, oompulerlut : for tense see V . 33, jij.
2. oompluribua : i.e.,of theBritoni. ovpldtna: see V. 98 vi.
8. apatlo: i.e., of time; cf. section 4, oaatrorum : a cai^p
was made at the end of each day's inarch.
_4. duabnaqne: trans, by 'when.' aubaldlo : 'to their aid'
(Y. 81). atqne hla : 'and these too.' prlmla : apparently the
first cohort of a legion was its best oum : 'although.' intar-
nilaao Ipol apatlo: 'leaving an interval.' inter ae : with irUerr
mtMO. perterrltla: trans, by 'as.' per medloa : 'between
them^ i.e., through the perexigunm apatium. aoque . . . r«oe-
pernnt : not meaning ' they got away,' as the last word* of eectiaii
pernnt : not meaning * they got away,' as the last word» of eection
ft Bhuw, but thai ihey cluwrea Djcragain £B3roiigh ihm op^ «Ti ffit
to their original position. -. ^^ •'""
"f.
282
■s .
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
CHAP. 16.
i.o* **"*'«*'®*»' : see V. 56. no.tro. : the legionary soldiew.
as Contrasted with equttes, section 2 ; subject of esse, oodenter:
ace.; see y. 44, i a. pc.ent : see V. 175. ab nlgnl» dl«.
oedero; they had been trained to fight in solid ranks only,
mlnu»: 'not well.' • '
2. autem: 'while.' proello : see V. 99. 'lui : «the enemy.'
oederent: see V. 175. cum :* whenever. ' removlMent : for
the mood and tense see V. 149 and 186, 2. nostro. : here =
entires»
3. EqueatrlB : with proelii. rotlo : ^» regular method,' or 'ordi-
nary style ; in opposition to the unfamiliar tactics described in
section 2. oedentlbas : either dat. of the participle used sub-
stantively, as in sectiop 1, yid refiarring to the Romans, or perhaps
TV *'^S^"<*_Flt^,-on*annM understood ; cf. on resistentibm, Bk.
1 V. IJ, ^. In either case Caesar is thinking of the danger to his
own men. inferebat : ' brought ' (V. 180, fc).
4. Aooedebat hao nt . . . proellarentar : of. on ch. 6, 2;
for mood see V 197^ Intepvalll» : see V. 103. ^allo. alii : ' one
another' (V. 168, o). -que :* and thus. '
: 1. »«H:* here and there.' lenlu» :* with less vigor. ' s..
^.2. tpe«: an unusually large force; of. Bk. IV. 32, 1. «am:
under. ad . . . advolavernnt-: see V. 78, v. h. «lo utt .
absuterent: «so as to attack even the standards,' etc.; lit.*?
They were not afraid to attack even the main body escorting the
actual foragers. ' '
3. ■nbsidlo : for abl. (= * in ') with fonfisi see V. 107, ii. prae-
«Ipltet: ace. egrerunt : see Y. 155, a.
4. sni oolllffendl : see V. 119, iv. ' :
6. Ex: 'after.' quae . . anxllla
ch. 11, 8. dlaoesaernnt : 'disbanded.'
their full force ' (V. Ite).
-o ,■ ' ■ 'V CHAP. 18. ■ ■ ,
1. oonalllo: that, apparently, which is described in ch. 19.
Tameaim : for form see III. 50, 6. in fines : see V. 127, iv.
hoe: 'here,' 'at this'; so. loco.
2. aniiriiim lulTertH : also mi^mcmimadwrHt~M^n^^7fV
32, 3. ad: 'on.' *
3. praeflxla ; driven into the face of the bank, deflxae : driven
i^p» fc a il — ■■■■■■ mn S ^ \ i m —■■■■■i
the niajores copiae of
anmmia oopila : ' with
)*
)•«
6.
-i^OTES ON CJESAR, BOOK V. 288
ea, eo
' although
but.'
nnWfK.,- I, 1«"°^**^(\^ 161)- «nm . . . e«tHi<ent: 'a
only thdur heads were above water,' lit. ? (V. 101). -que :
CHAP. 10.
1. nt . . . demongtravimuB: with depoaita ape. tnwa- ch
17,5. «mpllorlbu, eopii,: Hhegreater^rtofhis forces ''lit?
reliotl. : trans freely by ♦ keep.' .ervabat < for the force if this
and the succeeding imperfects see V. 180, 6. qutbu.' where"
more lit. ' through which ' (V. 99, ii. a). ' '
li' ZZLlZ^ZV^'-' ■ «JT?*- ^°' ""««^^ *«d *«"«« «ee V.
AW. iitmrins with ejeoerai; for meaning see V. 98 vi • so
lahna and longiua, section 3. vU. : see ^ 99, ii « V',' ' ,^
equltum : «danger to cavalry': for cen me V 85^ «' P^^cnla
* through fear of this/ lit. ? (V. 205, c) "* '
wat for'cr«?r w''f '"n* * •.»«*«»•«*«': 'the only course left
was tor Cajsar not to allow his men to leave,' etc. For ut
pateretur as subject clause see V. 197, fn. ; for diacedi see v! 56.
tantxim nooeretupj freely Ho do as much harm' (V. 72^; 57)
1^' /hJSLT*? °^' . labore atque Itlnere : ^Uborious^nL-
ing (hendiadys), contrasted with the dashing cavalry raids.
. CHAP. 20.
1. Tplnobante.: with mt««n<, section 2. ^ex ana .i. . »ita.
Terat: this parenthesis may be translated after legator. . mit.
^nt section 2, and broken at cujua pater, thus : «The Trinobantea
«end. etc.; from this state, ete. ; hiT father, etc.; they proSS^/
•to fldem «eoutu. : «attaching himself to.' lit. ? oontinentem
Oalllam: 'the mainland of Gaul' (V. 69. i.). obtlnuera™
Mneo does not mean * obtain ' (V. 203, /, iii.). ln,e • " whUe h^
himself,' or 'but who himself (t. 170, iv.) * ' /
2. sese dedituros : sc. ae as subject, aeae here being object.
rv^'ftfN*"'^"*"*"** '^** *^® P*"^"^ ^' "^ *at the hands of C
il'cmk:^" n,T ^*'"*'*^ *^ send (some one) to govern ' ;
4.^«xepoitiil: see V. 79. ad namernm : 'to the reouired
r"';^/;- ^^''J? ^^^ asyndeton in the last sentence, and also ^T
eos and tilt of the same persons. '
;>■■■"■. ;5*----''oi,: :i-v.--s= ;-; CHwAP. 21. ■ ':: .• ■■•'
1. defensU: t.e., against Cassivellaunus.
iveUauni, ch. 20, 3.
2. hU; so. legatia, from legationihmr qnoV ftdrerbr matU
V.*186'*2 ' fg^*'"^"'*^***^^' r"^«"«'" = ^"«^ n»ood and tense see
♦J://***/?"",* •"«•"''• '*»? «ft tow»'; the object of vacant is
^^ % !*»« ok««e cum . ^iMnimienint The Gauls, on the othe^
mllitnin : of. on
mmm
28#
PRIMARY LATIN" BOOK.
k
hand, had regular iovma in .whi«h they dwelt. . stlTas Impedltaa :
' a piece of woods difl&cult of access. ' mnnlerant : see V. 149.
4. opere : cf. «n ch. 9, 4. ex : * on * (V. 205, 6). hnno ; *it\:
lit. Hhis (place).' /
'^ 5. moratt: ' after holding out.' non tolerunt :* could not
withstand.' . . ,
6. repertn» : ^, est: maltt : * many (of the enemy). '
CHAP. 22. '
1. qal1)%is regrionlbaa . . . praeerant : 'over which . . . ruled'
(V. 79, V. c). his : i.e.,^the kings, na valla oaatra : see ch. 11, 5.
2. inoQlames : ace. with sttos, which is identical with nogtri.
3. jper: 'through the mediation of (V. 99, i.). . '
4. repentlnos motns : see Bk. IV. 5. neqae maltnin : 'and,
little.' in annoa alngolos : 'yearly,' lit. 'for the years one by
one.' veotli^alla: see V. 86, i. penderet : 'should pay'; for
mood see V. 186, 1, 6, i
0. Interdlolt atque Impejrat : emphatic repetition ; * he abso-
lutely forbids . . . to harm,' or ' he expressly orders , . , not to
ham.' ne»: 'or.'lit.? <V. 28, ii.)
CHAP. 23. ■ o^.;, ,
2. oommeatibna : for abl. see Y. 103. ^,* ' |
3. tanto namero i see Bk. IV. 22, 3 and 4, and Bk. V. 2, 2,
and 8, 6. tot navlgratlonlbaa : * although there were so many
mssages' (V. 49). portaret : 'had on board ' ; the subj. may be
by attraction (V, 177, i.) (so remitterentur, section 4, but not
•citraverat, which is not so essential a part of the sentence) or may
jperhaps be Characteristic (V. 32).
4. et . . . et: dividing these empty vessels into two classes, to
the latter of which mitterentur, not remitterentnr, would more
«triotly apply ; trans. ' both those which had made the first trip . . .
«nd those which,' etc. . jprloris oommeatua : sc. navibus (V. 87).
poatea : i.e., after Csesar had set out for Britain with the fleet
built during the winter, faolendaa ouraverat': cf. on ch. 1, 1.
numero : for abl. see V. 102. aexaglnta : aco.« agreeing with
qitas. looum oaperelit: 'reached their destination.' oapereat,
r«Jloerentar : bo. sic accidit iiti.
6. quod : ^for.' neoefaiirlo «oUooavIt : cf. on Bk. IV. 28, 3.
6. oonaeoota: see V. 60, ii. onm folvltaet ; freely, 'he Mt
sail . . . and.' Inlt* vlffUla : ' at th4 beginning of the watch.* -
t
f
■»iir
- ♦
PABT v.— SYNTAX AND^COMPOSITION. 28$
Ul.'-:
<i
/">^^^ ' PART V. • v. '■
LATIN HiOSE .COMPOSITION AND TEANS /
' ^ , LATION AT SIGHT. .
IN PROSE COMPOSITION.
1 '
INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER.
• I. Order op Words.
1. Because of its wealth of inflections, Latin admits much
gi«ater freedom of order than English does, without a corre-
sponding loss of clearness.
The order of words in Latin is not, however, purely hap-
hazard although no invariable rules exist for their position
m a sentence ; there are certain arrangements which are
normal or usual, and which should b^ varied only for some
definite purpose, such as to secure emphasis or to prbmote
euphony. ^ ^^ ' . * #
1 tii «he normal arrangement o! a simple sentence, the
subject, followed by its attributes, comes first; the verb
comes last, preceded by its modifiers or objects ; as,
Mifuae differ from one another in langmge .• Hi omnfi. llngulL
Inter «e differant. ••■•■
.8. This order ia often changed, especially in the base of :
■^S^^^^iSrSSlSSS-. -•"o «"<• <^
I baaed upon it.
r
I. RULES OF SYNTAX AND EXERCISES
■
286
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(a) Emphasis.— This WNoften secured by putting words
other^ than the subject at the beginning of a sentence, or
;Words other than the verb at the end ; as,
,^j
Greece was freed by^i^e sagacity of one num : ftntu* vlrl nrft.
depti& Oraeoia llber&ta est.
Other route had they none: Aliud Iter habdbant nullum.
Often, too, emphasis % secured by separating two words in
agreement. Antithesis (or emphatic opposition) is generally ex-
pressed by reversing in the second 'clause the order of the first
{Chtasmv^).
(6) Connection OF SENxkNOES.— At the beginning ot a
^sentence, are regularly placed words or phrases which refer
to the previous sentence or some part of it, and which thus
serve as a connecting link, leading from the known to the
unknown j*^s, . > ^ ' - V
Within those loodd* (just menttoned) the enemy kept themselves in
htdmg: intra e&a Bllv&a faostda In ooonlt6 ■«•« oontlnebant.
Tfie same day envoys came to Ocesar: Bddem di6 l^g&tl ad
Oaesarem v6n£runt.
4. (a) The modifiers of a nonn.^i. Cardinal numerajtis, adjec-
tives denoting size and weight, and pronominal adjectives com-
monly precede; as, Four days: Quattuor dl«s. Large forces:
M&grnae oopiae. This part: Haee pars. After their cusUm,:
8uo more.
ii. Ordinal numerals, other adjectives (unless emphatic), geni-
tives and words in apposition commonly follow; as. The third
year: Annus tertlus. The Boman people: Populns Rdm&nus.
Fart of the summer : Pars aest&tls.
iii. Where a noun is modified both by an adjective and by a
femtive, the preferred order is adjective^ genitive, noun ; as,
mmense size of framp: Ingina oorporum mAgnltfiidS. This
does not apply to the partitive genitive, however; as, A large paH
ofOaul: MAgrna pars Oalllae.
- iv. When two adjectives or two genitives connected by a con-
junction modify a jioun, it is commonly placed either before both
or after both.
When an adjective or genitive modifies two nouns connected by
a couj^nctiori, it commonly precedes both.
(6) The modifiers of a verb.— Either the direct object or an
adverb directly qualifying the action of the verb is, as a rule,
. €.
/
-N
fdatlve) for hie or ia; see Motion 172. «v — »»» \vm .w«mi«« oaaqioNs
, Vi
■%
PART V.-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
^ 287
Wd (if used «dJecfivBlrW^. "iP""^'"» «"en a coninnotH».
clause they ^ gene^lly^pCS SS """ ^^" ■»»«
-iffiSrre'tXlf ri'^'wET'?"' *» ''''"'» '*hey govern
. U; A prepos tion is often «.,1.»,?^ J*'"'"'» pr<«iouii8.
Ui. A monosyllabic preoo^on i^^f. V '" Aedaornm nn«,/
t.« «d its „o„„ : as, w:x"^n7t:i ^'r« ""^
w5,iit?e*XkZ;^„^f?s'';lP!««d before the word Ic^lified ^
nected with the verb/or moreXj"*- ""^ "^«™ « eit^SSl
«.e^,5"„?'iu ct^l^^il'^e^lr» "". k "'''''<'» Pl««d at
jord or words belonrine LTa ^.S- '"I'""** by some important
i^depe„dsratslt?;^':;1:rJri?r'''■•*--b„„-whioh
?=™es^'„S7r M^'^"?"'«^4t:^lt':e'^r™
_ 11. Autem. enifn an^ -.j„= ^ .
J^i^Z>S. «"^ ^' -«-. «d i^*„. .ery seldo», come
1, Th » .- — - I. t . _i___Zm!:=^==____^ , :
■^ *PP«"°e<* to »ome other woid.
288
PRIBfclRY LATIN BOOK.
II. Order of Clauses.
5. Noun and' Adjecilve clauses are, as a rule, in the position
a noun or adjective of similar value would have.
i. A relative clause however very frequently, especially when
emphatic, precedes a general antecedent, such as is or hie ; as, Ba
spcnls what he alters : Quae mutat, ea oorrampit.
ii. Indirect questions generally follow the verb on which they
depend. So also does the accusative and infinitive construction
when extended to any length.
6. Adverbial olauses are placed, as a rule, as corresponding
adverbial phrases would be, J__
i. Adverbial clauses that are preparatory to the thought of the
Erincipid clause, or express some, attending circumstance, regu-
irly either precede the principal clause, or very frequently are
inserted in it. Such are the temporal, conditional, causal and
concessive clauses. ^
ii. Adverbial clauses th«S are explanatory of, or complementary
to, the thought of the principal clause regularly follow. Such are
the consecutive clauses, and causal sentences where the emphasis
'lies on the reason advanced.
Final or purpose clauses, on th? whole, more frequently follow
than precede, the general principle being to place last the clause
on wMch the emphasis falls.
7. Participial clauses generally precede, oi" are inserted in, the
principal sentence, and very seldom follow it as in English ; as.
After settling fhis affair, he set sail, having vnet with suitable
weather: His oontsUtaUs rebus, nactu^s Idoneam tempestatem,
solvit. - ,■■,■■- ■''..•; ,:-''^ \: . -::^;.\-' rA- ,
8. In narrative prose the order of time is almost invariably
observed in the arrangement of the various ckuses of a sen-.
_tence; as, " . v'-.:---".--' '■-"■^^ .:;;.. z;' :-■,■■',-.;■-■ .■■.;■.:: ■. -
The Oermans threw aioay their arms when they saw that their
comrades were being slain, and rushed out of the camp : Germani,
cum suos Interflol vlderent, armis abjeotis »6 ex oastrls
^6o6runt.
9. The periodic struotrtre is much commoner in Latin than in
English. A period is a complex sentence, whose subordinate
clauses are inserted in the principal clause in such a way that the
sense afid grammatical construction of the whole are incomplete
without the final words, upon which also the chief emphasis rests.
—Tlw ex amplfr given in BP f i t i inn R a bove is ft pfflod \n the TAtin, b ^
\-
not in the English^ .
-^
PART V,~SYNTAX ^ND COMPOSITION. 289"
diiSi^j^^^P^Jj^^^ principal and; subor-
It should be placed at the heiZS^^^t'^'^^:^ In such cases
duty for both clauses • as. WhlTrt^ j penod, and thus do
^ retired to the forestThe7ete^ne^, ^"^"^ *^^ ^^ ^^^
non progrredl longlus. " '"''*'' '«««P'we. o6n.tltalt
^Aen Owar feam«rf thisJhevnS^L.i n^^ *^® ^"^* Pla^e ; as,
oomperlt. ,e In G.lliam recTpJf ^^ *'.^"^^-' ^«»* "^ Ca:.^i
iiK Concords.
The following «„ the gene^l rules of «greom^ti ^
^ <^'*y of Borne : vrl^n noma. ' ,, ^
peda|;;s-:7Lr:^t:Aa^^^
"• The appositive Wdmav SI' JSr '**■'"•• ""'pa-
■ as. J, rA.n.t.^ocfe,, Aa.e c JeTS • Them^Jr?-^''''^^ «"^J^ '
,, . ^"^- TA®n»*»to<Ble8vgnIailt«.
nu^iatnx::!^:^^^ ^^-^^- ^^-^-^^^-^ the
^^^rLY^sTitlr:-^^^^^^^ '
erat m„it«e operae ao /aboHr ^ ^'i^»* «#or* and ^«ftor ; rj.
12. The Predicate!. _(«) The verb agrees with if« «, k- .
Iff number and person. - *^^ subject
thep!^i3;:^t,^Slsf^i^Ti^^^^ -d,
/i. Where there is morrthin Kf'^^^
P ural, or niay agree wiTh The n^Ct' betr'' i^^^^? ^^^ »>«
others ; as, !Z%« Matrona a^id S,m S^rff'^^ ^^^^ *^«
^ The verb may also be siJ Jular w^t %* ®^«°»»»dlTMlt.
Tfemltusque origbatur. (CfS^. u *^ «'g^e .' CUmo,
(
:\
290
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK, i^
iii. Where the subjects are of different persons afid the plural is
used, the firs? person takes precedence, then" the second ; as,
Oicero and I ot^ well : Ego et Cioerd va'lemns.
iv. For the unemphatic introductory word there, and also for it
when used a6 an impersonal or representative -subject, Latin has
no equivalent ; as, Aiid there were no other sKipa.: Neqne naves
•rant aliae. It ii dangerous to enter : Intrare est perXonlosaih.
(6) A predicts adjective (or a participle in the compound
tefises of the verb) agree3 with the subject .of the verb iij
gender, number and case; as, '
The supply ia small : ISxigua e»t ebpisk.
Everyming toas unknown : Omnia erant incognita.
He was informed that tlie aaeetU vxm easy : Oert'lor f actus est
faellem esse asoensum. ^ ■ .
i Predicate adjectives are used with, the verb swww'^rbs of
seeming, becoming, and passive verbs of making, thivMi^, calliiM.
ii. Where theqe is more than one subject, the predicate adjec-
tive may be either singulai; or plural, following the numl:ter of the
verb (see a, ii.). '
If it be singular, it will agreq in gender with the nearest sub-
ject ; as, The cavalry and charioteers were -sent forward : Praemis-
sns est e'qnltatas et essedaril.
If it be plural, with subjects pf different genders, it will be
masculine when the subjects refer to livirtg beings, otherwise neu-
ter ; as, Fathir and momer are dead : Pater et mater mortal snnt.
The city and temple ivere taken: Urbs templnmqae oapta sunt.
V (c) A predicq,te noun agrees with its subject in case ; as.
He found that no^o Oalha was king S Beperlebat nnuo esse
regem Galbam.
Ariovistria had been called king and friend by the senate : Arlo-
vistns rex atqne amXoas a senatu appellatus erat.
i. Predicate nouns &te used with the verb sum, verbs of seerfiing,
becoming, and passive verbs oi tnakir^g, thinking, calling.
ii. The dative of purpose is used with much the force of a predi-
cate noun (see section 81). "^ . ''\
13. Pronoun and Antecedent.^ — A, relative or demonstra-
tive pronoun agrees in gender, number and person with the
word (termed the antecedent) to which in sense it refers ; as.
For many reasons, of which this was^ the strongest : Bfnltls d6
cansls» qnynm Ilia fnlt Jasti sslm».
t»?]But these pronoiius by preferettoe i^;ree with a pr^cHoate
t
V.
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. ^291
v/'
J
CHAPTER I.
I»
,■■.-■■■.- » '«-
_TB»,Accn8ATITp AKD lupISITIVR
««H /« , and such like {verba .entierub ee decla^J^ilZ-
.«» the .nfinitive with a subject aco„sative,.where?^^"
we have a noun clause introduced by th<U ; A ^
15. kulesfortheUsEOFTBNSEsareasJpUow»- * '
(c) When the. time of the ihfiniUve ia «,6«»„e„« to that lf\. '
prmcipal verb. Use pHe future inBmtiVe ; «i, ' T ' *"' ("^
..«t»::!' pT.^ir' *^.'^ « '«••'« '« i»w; ™.m.
.gum
. f
\f
^'
f^
A
)
291 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Hewisvjered that fhtmr would make peace : Respohcllt Caesarem
plliwa» esa« fdctfiritm. „^
O», If pat. the rule in another w%y : let the student imngine
himself asuig \he very words uttered or thought, and then use the
corresponding tense of the infijaitive (the perfect infinitive doing
duty for the imperfect,* perfect or pluperfect of the original words).
In the above examples, for instance, the words actually uttered
or thought would be : (a) The legion is being hard pressed: Leglo
premlturi (6) The Helvetians have moved their camp: Helvetll
^astra moverunt ; (c) Ccesar will make peace: Caesar paoem
faoiet. ^
16. (tt) As the infinitive is without personal endings, the sub- '
ject accusatives we, nos^ te, v5s, will be used for J, we, you.
•For he, she, they, when denoting the same person -as the
.subject of the terb of saying, thinking, eUi., se will be used;
but when denoting a different person- the accusative of is, or
for greater emphasis ille / as, ijik- v
They answered thttt they woidd mJute peace 'ifiith him: Bespon-
derant sese cum e5 paoem esse, faoturds.
GcBsar had decided to ke^p Dumnarix ivith }iim, because he had
discovered that he was eager for poiver: Caesar Dnmnorlgrem secum
habere c6ni»tituerat, quod eum eupldum esse imperil o6-
gnoverat.
(6) in the compound forma of the infinitive containing esse, care,
must .^lilEaken tt> have agreement with the subject accusatiw in
gender, number and case. (See superdtas in section 14 a^^
-1» JH
17. After verbs signifying to A^, promise, thr^
i^chiike, EngUsh generally us^s the simple infinitip^
of a-nouh 'clause introduced by that. In Latin the subject
acousp-ti^ Svilh the- /ut,ure infinitive is used in accordance
with t%^Biw.rule§ (15, c); ^
give -postages: Hae natlones s3 obsldfis
lihtar,
.■f
m
iMt
These t
datur
ur'bem obsessam esse, / tell you th<U the eity vxu being
aaggi nal ofeaideftfltU i E
TT
2. This distinction applies to all uses of the words him, t/kem, etb.; «or Aw and
tAeir, «tttM or «j^u» and coruwi respectively are usW. ' , ^ ,
marine
ise the
) doing >
jrpids).
ittered
Legrfd "
elvetil "
paoenpf _
I PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. /
if w:./" English «/.a* is often omitted ; as, Be mys hetuOlao
odbur^as "ZZetT^' but^so phrases. LntieJi eT^^arZli
iU 'p1 Pf '^*^^'^^ V«cw, memona teneo, farm eat, spem f^abed.
io^^s ortVe^Si,t:." ^™^^*^" '"^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^r perif,hrastic
iJT'- I®^.^^ of pretending are regularly foUowed by the accusatk*
wtitTXtf "' T"" '^ E»«l-h%y the simpLTnfinTtiv"'^
L tad o? 7l'-7l^'i ^^*""™ '«^«'" «/simulant. '
instead of rfwo followed by a negative, Latin prefers mad- aa.
i?tnce. Negrat «e posse Iter uUI pep proTinolam d«w.«
not usea parenthetically in Latin as in Enclish • as Ymt. nL r
Caesarem venturum fulsse. ' **
pr^nUu&i;r«"oom™i^'« '^'^' '*'•" °' *<^"' '»-.-*" «•«
^/i ■'''H ^?j®^^ ^*'^"^**^^^® *s not infrequently omitted when
s
EXERCISE 1.
flff* ^W
r
A.
\
f/: .?^^^^^'^** **'''* ^^^"^ ^^'^ conquered ^aul/ 2..He thliks^
that the Roman leader will easily vanquish the Belgians 3 We
saw that the nights were shorter in Britain than on the contin«it.
4. ihe enemy sent ambassadors to Caesar, and promised to give
hostages 5. Word was brought to C«esar thai the hill was hdd
by the Roman soldiers^G. To these envoys C^sar repUed tl«t
the «auls had been conquered by the Roman army. 7. The
general hears that the enemy ^re hurlingkv^lins at the soldiers.
3 ye enemy , he annwerfld , ha d boo n h iflli g javel ins at CcBsar^
cavalry. 9. ^e learned from the scouts that all the Belgians had
r
ijA
\
2^4*
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
'^¥^^
:.%-
encamped on '^te other side' of that river. 10. It is said that
Geesar set out fqr Cktul, and defeated the Helvetians on the other
sidei of the riVear Rhone;' 11. To that embassy he replied that he
would come to 'the enemy's -camp. 12. Some even reported to
Caasar that the soldiers would not advance. "
.;, B. {Themifttocles, 1, 2.)
1. He Baid tliat he was aiming at the magistrates especially. 2*
The answer was given that he would speedily crHsh the pirates and*
^nder the rest of Europe safe. 3. 4 report is brought that the
Athenians are goifl^ to abandon their leet and betake themselves ~
to their walls. 4. They promised to make war by land and sea.
5. It is said that they devoted themselves wholly to naval
warfare.y^6. They thought that no one was (their) equal. 7. Pb
had learned that a thousand war vessels were following t^ese
transports. 8. Qe was informed that the Athenians had not been
crushed, but would build a fleet of four hundred vessels. 9. They,
perceived that the citadel had been handed over to a few magis-
trates, and that the rest of the town was being abandoned. .
' . - - - ' , -
f C. iCIoesar, Bk. IV. t) ' / '
1. Caesar said that a large number of men had crossed that river.
It is said^^at this tribe leads forth a thousand armed men
every year. 3. These promise to remain at home in their turn.
4 We were informed that there was no interruption in the prac-
tice of war that year, 5. The Suebi said they had been harassed ,
for a large part of the winter^/' 6. The Germans hoped to cross the
Rhine the year after. 7- We understand that the character of the
food and the daily exercise make, the Germans" very warlike. 8.
He hears that the children had milk and corn. 9. He answered
that this tribe was the largest, but that the Suebt had been th«
most warlike. '
"^S^'
PART v.— SYNTAX ANP COMPOSITIOlf.
29d
tj^ese
4
/-
CHAPTER IT. ^ ^ .
Complementary Infinitivb. '
19. The present inenitive (active or passive) is often used likd'
the infinitive with to in English, to complete the meaning of certain
▼ef bs, whose reference would otherwise be incomplete. These
.verbs are often called modal verbs, and the infinitive when so used
_:_the cornpZcmcnfari/ infinitive. ___,_^„-.,
* 20. (a) With modal verba the simple infinitive {i.e., with-
-out any subject expressed) is used to denote another action
or condition of the *ame jsubject ; as,
"They attempt to cross the Hver: Plubien tran.Ire oonantor.
.. rje t«tnd 6e^«n <o 6e im>fen^- Saevlre ventu. coeplt.
Th^y are able to defend themselves : Se defendere pos.unt.
Ihe nver can be crossed : Plumen tpansin pote.t.
^was unwilling to leave: Dlncederenolehat.
27u5i|f^,-« compelled to give hostages : Obslde. dare oo&oti sont.
i. A predicate vmiior adjective with the complementary infini-
tive agrees with the subject of the modal verb ; as, wlcanL
useful frtends: roMunm. utile» ew© amiol. '' '^ can oe
21. (b) With modal v6rba the infinitive iMth a subjeet
accusative is used to denote the action or condition of a
different subject ; as,
^^ (Mow the Helvetians to go : Helvetic» Ire patlnntur.
He ordered thegaies to be closed; Porta» olaadl Jn«»lt. "^
He un^dth4i Germans to be alarmed: Germand» tl.nere Volult
He did rwt wish that place to be y.noccupied : Nolnlt earn locum
» ftCftPC
22. i. Profcto takes th^ accusative and oomplettientary infini.
tive; as, They prevent the Qermam from crossing : QermAnd.
tr&n«Ire prohlbent. ■ «««o»
««":7??"^ -^T^! expressing emo«ton, such as doUS (grieve) and
gaudeS (rejovceyoften take the accusative and complementary infini-
(oee also sectioH 147, ii.)
^/^I^wLv^.?^. .''!?'. ^'^^ ^" sailiiTTSS^; as, JaveUn» began
to be hurled: T«la ooqJIoX ooepta auat.
^•tfjk-
V
m
MiMARt LATIN teOOK.
#■
iv. With jubeo the subject accusative is sometimes omitted,
when obvious from the context ; as. He gives orders to fortify a
camp: Castr» munlre jubet.
V. Void, rf,6ld and mdlo often take the accusative and infinitive
even when the subject is the same, chiefly with esse or a passive
infinitive ; as, They did not wish to be put to death: Bene Interflol
nolebant.
vi. Pdliceor and sperd are -sometimes treated as modal verbs.
vii. Many of the verbs of will JId desire are followed by nt and
the subjunctive ; so regularly the verbs of oreieringf, except jiiheO.
Impero also may be used with the passive infinitive ; as, He orders'
him to be brought back: Earn retrahl Imperat. (See section 27.)
viii. This construction is more restricted in Latin than in Eng-
lish. (See especially sections 23 and 27.) But in poetry Latin
more nearly approaches English usage.
Verbs which Take the Complementary Infinitive.
^•>,r
AlloWf jiutlor, slijo.
Forbid, veto. /
•"'■,
Am able (can)y potanm.
Hasten, oontendo, maturo.
,, .;«
Am accustomedt am wont, con-
properd.r .
sue vl, 8ole5.
Hest^a^e, dablt5. ,
Am nnwilling, nold.
Order, Jubeo.
Am willing, void.
Ought, debed.
Attempt, oonor.
Permit, patior, «Ino.
. ■ ' i
4
Begin, Inelpio, Institnd.
Prefer, maid. \
Began, ooepl.
Prepare, paro.
■ ;/■',
Gea^', desind, dSslstd.
Pf event, prohlbedl
Compel, obgd.
Resolve, Bee decide.
Dare, andou.
Strive, oontendo, nltor.
Decide, determine, oonstitnd.
Try, Conor. >
, .
-
deoernd. atatad.
Feniurc, audeo.
#
Desire f oapio.
Wish, volo.
EXERCISE 2.
A*
•j*ti^*'-
' 1. The troops began to storm the town. 2. The Helvetians are _
accustomed to receive, not give, hostages. 3. Stones had begun
to be hurled from all sides against the raftijmrt. 4. Ciesar will
mt permi t thft Qniilw ^r >^»"r" "^Hi ^ ""^«^ «mftmywnre nnwil- -
. ling to depart from the Rhine. 6. The cavalry had prevented fires
• J'ART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
297
from being made. 7. They wUl not attempt to cross the rivers.
8. The Germans did not hesitate to engage in battle.; 9. The
soldiers were ordered to return to the camp. 10. The Romans
compelled the enemy to give hostages. 11. He determined to
pass the winter there. 12. The Britons wiU not dare to make
war. 13. Csesar w^ not able to set out. 14. The soldiers were
compelled to make a promise to remain at home. 15. We wish
him to be a soldier, but he prefers to be a merchant.
, ^; -ff. (Themistodes, 3, 4.) > -
i. The king will permit them to attack immediately. 2. The
Spartans were unable to withstand the double peril. 3. The sea-
men wished to engage off Euboea, but Themistodes prevented
them from being surroimded in the narrow strait. 4. Xerxes will
not dare to put the priests to death and burn the citadel. 5. We
shall attempt to seize Thermopylae and quickly crush the bar-
barians. 6. They were compelled to prepare to defend the walls.
7. He resolved to leave for home by night. 8. Most of the states
were unwilling to be conquered one at a time., 9. He hesitates to
compel the seamen to look for a more suitable place.
^ O. (Ca;aar, Bk. IV. 2.) V - ;
1. They prefer to use small and scrubby beasts. 2. He will not
permit the merchant to sell wine at all. 3. By daily practice the
cavalry are able to leap down and fight on foot. 4. They begin to
train these horses to endure toil. 5. He will order the Germans
to betake themselves to their horses with all speed. 6. They are
unwilling to be captured. 7. Wine cannot be sold nor beasts of
burden im,port<3d. 8. Thoy are wont to consider this base and
unmanly. 9. He does not wish this merchant t<:> Imj admitted.
^♦>
it
11
a..
H
298 , ^ PRIMARY LATIN BOOK*
■ • ' ■ , . «^ I . - > .
CHAPTER III:
r • i
FiNAti Clauses (Clauses op Purpose).
23. In Englfsh the purpose or end of an action is commonly
expressed either by the infinitive with to, or by a clause introduced
by that or lest ; las, They remained to avoid suspicion, or They
remained that th^y might avoid suspicion. ' ; '^
But in Latin prose the infiiiitiye should never be used to
express purpose, .
24. Pure Final Claijwbs.— One of the commonest modes
of expressing purpose in Latin is by ut (or utt) with the
subjunctive — in negative clauses ne; as, ■
TViiy remained in order to avoid siispicion: Ut «uRploldnem
vlt&rent, remayieblEmt.
He is setting out to attack the enemy's camp: Proaoisoltnr %t
oaatra hostlam oppuifnet. i
In order that they may not he (or in order not to be) surrounded by
the enemy, they will make a sally : Ne ab bogtlbuf olroumvenian-
tar, eraptldnem faolent. , / ' ,
Outposts are stationed lest a sally be mnde : Stattdnea ponnntur
n6 imptld flat.
:: 26. Rules for the Skquench olp TBKSEs.are as follows : .
(a) Primary tenses— viz., present, future, future perfect, and
perfect (when translated by English present perfect, with*;u»w)~^
pure followed by the present subj unctive. '^
0) Secondary (or historical) tenses—viz., imperfect, pluperfect,
«nd perfect (when translated by English past indefinite)— are fol-
lowed by the impet^e<;£ subjunctive. .V
Thus the present subjunctive is xjised where English could use
ihai , t J Unay, the imperfect subjunctive where English could
use thaiK f , might. ^! : ( '\ '' ■ ^V
(For examples see the sentence given in section 24 a^^eJ_
26. Relative Clauses op ^uhpbsE.— After certain verbs,
especially those of sending and appointing^ relative clauses of
/'•.
purpose arerfouna7**fT5^ingrejpTa(^ as,
^
V ^ V'
^
monly
>duced
• They
led to
nodes
h the '
I
onem
nr \it
ied by /
nlan-
intnr ^
, and
ive) —
irfecfc,
"^ fol-
i use
cuuld
«t
-^-.;:/
erba,
les of
•.H. '
>
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
299
^If^nds »couts in advance to hlmose a suitable place /or the camp :
iut^tally who are to choose). »wr|8 aeiiir»nt
«»^ti^^'^^®-^T®^ n^ay b6 introduced' also by relative adverbs
letaT N^'' '*^«':«' a«V JVTor W 7Aey an/ place towh^lto
r^^eat: Neqae quo se reciperent habebant.
; ; ^7. Substantive Final Clauses;— After verbs of urging,
asking, commanding, advising, persuading, striving (verba of
iviU and aim), Latin does not use the infinitive; it regards
the following clause as expressive of the end desired, and
therefore uses the subjunctive of purpose with ut (utl) and
. ne; as,:.,-..,,-,...' ■._:..,.,. .,.. ■,:-i,^.„ ... .■-;..■■/:....' ■ ■
> Hi ^irges fern to tahenp arms: Hortatur ut arma caplant.
He xruimed Casticua to seize tiie chief pmoer: Per.uarit eagHod
wt regnum ooouparet.
. They begged of htm not to do that: Ab eo petgbaut u6 id
laoopoc» '-•■ ^ .-■■■-■ ,.
Jubed and c5»|rare^lmportant regular exceptions to this rule ; so
also verbs of striving and resolving, when the subject of both verbs
is the same (where English also has the infinitive).
28. i. In clauses of purpose ut is not followed by a n^ative
ne being uaed instead. Hence where not, ,w one, notlZg/ni
(adjectival) and never occur, use ne. ne quia, n6 quid, ng qui (or
qulB) and ne umquiyn, as, He ordered tlie gates closed that the
totmspeople might receive no hurt : Portas <*laudl Jus.lt n6 quam
7r^f,?t'*'/";'."'A*"l***'*'*'*^'*"*- ^' '^'^ ^^"^ ^ <»^<^ none to
cross; Postul&vlt n6 quog tranglro pateretur.
u. A seconS firial clause, if negative, is connected by n6ve (or '
-neu}, not by peque , as. He issfiies orders tluit they are to hurl their
loeapons from a distame, and not approach nearer: Prdnuntlat ut
^'"""wu** «onJ**!»»* n«« proplns aooedant.
111. When.the clause of purpose contains a- comparative «uo is
.commojly^sedinplaceoftat, as, They ask for reihforcem^nts, that
I theymdy more easily .mthstand, the enemy: Sub.ldlum roiant.
•quo faoillus hostes sustipere posslnt.
',^«i!; *'^ historical present either primary or secondary
?«equenoe may be Used.. ^ . -^^^-U-^^-. - C-._ ^^^^^^^^
\^i\^^^^^'\T'^^ T ?^? ^^ **« constiHiction given in
l»otion.27, ahd as verba didarandl with the accusative and infini-
IZ :^, i ^^^'^ to Lcdmnus to b nUdthe iH -Hs e h': r.aMono
vjirofeotum eue. bo olao moned Kud persuOdtO*
_^^_]__j ^_l. ^ ^ ^ ::_ JL. _:
300
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
vi. With verbs of asking and cornmanding the subjunctive some-
times occurs without ut. This should not be imitated by the
beginner in prose, ,^
vii. Sometimes ut nS is found for nS, but not in OsBsar.
viii. Other modes of expressing purpose exist in Latin, the most
.important being by means of the gerund and gerundive. (See
sections 114 and 119.) • .
ix. For verbs of cavsmg^ see seotipn 33, ▼* '
Verbs which Take Substantive Final Claitses.
Advise^ inoned, ^dmoned.
Ask, peto, rogd.
;i
r-"^
V ■
Beg J beseech, dro, tilbMecr6i '
tmmand, Imperd» pmeolpl&t
Commission, mMi&d5.
Determine, eon^tltno, d^oerno»
statuo.
Exhort, hortor, ndhortor, co-
' '■; .' hoctor/ ■.; .; '.^
Incite, instigate, Impelld.
Inntrwt, praeotpid.
^Perm/itf oono6d5» permittd. * —
Termade, snibdeo» persuaded.
Prevail on, Impetro.
Bequest, require, peto, ro^d,
poitnI6.
Mesolve, see determine.
Strive, contends, nttor ; so Id
affdf operum dd.
Urge, hortor, adhortor.
Wa/m, mbne6, udmoneft.
V
EXERCISE 3.
A.
1. They sent Oe^sar iijto Gaul to carry on war with the Helve-
titans. 2. The Gauls had sent envoys to Oeesar to ask for peace
and to beg him not to storm their town. 3. He instructed the
cavalry to take possession of the camp, and not to pursue the
enemy. 4. In order to defeat the enemy, he sent forwiard the
cavalry and the slingers to attack them in the rear. 6. Caesar
exhorted the soldiers to fight valiantly, lest they should suffer the .
enemy to cross the river. 6. «The Gauls sent a messenger to warn
their allies that the Roman troops had built a bridge over the river
in order to pursue the enemy more easily. 7. He persuaded the
Helvetians to go forth from their territories ^th all their forces.
8. They ordered the bridge to be destroyed in order that no oifie,
might be able to cross th^ river. 9. He warned the soldiers that
the Gauls jrere at hand, and advised them not to leave the camp.
JO. flirtpipliodrthat Oiesarliarpraisod^e soldiera that theyTnight
\
«>■
P^RT V.^SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 3ai
fight the more valiantly.i 11. Ho sent messengers to announce
that Caesar had determined that Labienus should not return J 12.
CflBsar ordered (imperd) his soldiers to press forward and not to
hurl any weapon whatever at the enemy. ,.
B, {The^iatodes, 6^6.) \
1. He did this, not to skve the king, but to free Greece. 1^, En-
voys were sent to advise the Athenians not to restore their Walls
or defend thefr^ city. 3. In order to crush the Athenians he in-
structs his forces to build a bridge. 4. And there will bo no forti-
fied cities -for them to defend. 5. He urges them to destroy the
bridge in order that Xerxes may be un&ble to return to Asia. G.
That they might gain greater glory, they resolved that an embassy
should set out for Asia. 7. In order that the Athenians may be
as weak as possible, the Spartans will send envoys to forbid their
constructing a harbor. 8. He will persuade the king to return,
that Greece may hot submit to Asia. 9. Lest the enemy should be
informed that they were cut off from returning, he declared that
the bridges had not been destroyed. ,
\ * * C (Gcesar, Bk. IV. 3.) ,
1. They drive out the Ubii that the country may be'unoccupied.
2. They strove to be more civilized than the Germans. 3. The
Ubii were made tributaries that they might be rendered weaker.
4. They begged not to be driven from their lands. 5. He urged
'them to withstand the power of the Suebi. 6. These lands lie
waste that the Germans may not become accustomed to the man-
ners of this state. 7. He exhorted them not to think the state
insignificant or weak. 8. The others were sent to advise the same
merchants to come often. 9. We shall drive out the traders, lest
.we become ( = be made) refined. . / .
"^v,
802
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
.-.iL
CHAPTER IV.
,\i'
Consecutive Clauses (Clauses of Result).
29. Pure «Qjinsecutive Clauses. — Dependent clauses ex-
pressing result are in English introduced by that or as to,
following sa or such. In Latin result or consequence is
expressed by ut (or utl) with the subjunctive — in negative
clauses, utnon; as, ....... . ■ ■.;. ,. ,. , - . . .■ . ; .;../..
They advanced with siich svnftness that thu enemy took to flight :
Ba oeleritate lernnt vt hostes se tngae mandarent.
I am not so uncivilized a^ jnpt toknmvthis: Non tam bar bar as
flnm at non haeo soiatn.
• 30. Rules for the Usi» of Tenses are as follows : "
The rules for the sequence of tenses in final clauses (section 26)
do not apply to sentences of result. As a rul6 the English tense
will be a sufficient guide ; the Latin imperfect, however, is gener-
ally used for the English past (indefinite) tense, as in the first
example in section 29.
31. Substantive Consecutive Clauses. — After certain verbs,
chiefly those of happening and resulting, clauses introduced by that
are rendered by Latin consecutive clauses with ut or ut nOn and
the subjunctive ; as, _ , ^
It happened that there was a full moon : Aooldit at esset luna
pl6na.
„ The result ivas thai the Oenlnans ivere stimmoned : Faotum est
i ntl GerinanI aroesserentar. • , >.
32. Relative Clauses of Characteristic. — The sub-
junctive of result is often found in clauses introduced by the
relative pronoun. In these clauses the antecedent is referred
to as belonging (or not belonging) to a class characterized by
a certain quality, and the relative may generally be replaced
by the phrase such cts or such that ; as, ."V ., : n ' ' f
Nor vxM there anyone who was intent on looting : Negne fntt
qnltqa&in qut praedae atudiret.
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
303
i
But lam not the man to be frightened by danger : NWque 1. •«&
There were two roads by which th^y cmM have iome: Brant
Itinera duo qnibns aomd exire poAsent. ' '
i. This subjunctive of characteristic is especially common after
such general phrases of existence as mnt %il, Jn^TZ, tZ
aJso after dtgnus tndtgnm and idoneua; and after comparati^s
w^th ^mm; as, He wUl not be a Jit person to be «en*; Xn TrU
Idoneus qui mittatur. Th^ stonss are too Iwi'ge to be movX
Majoi^ sunt gax» quam quae moverl posslnt.
u. The relative clause of characteristic has sometimes a re«*m«i»e
force ; as, 80 far as I know : Quod solam. ra^w^ctwe
33. i. As </ia« noHn clauses of result is w* n(5n, so where no one
nothing, na (adjectival) and never occur, use ut nemQ, ut ni^i^ut
nuttm, ut numqiuim ; as, He put the enemy so speedUyto fliaht that
n^on^ h.ld his ground at ail : Tam oelerlter hltes L figlm dat
ntl omnind resisteret nemo. , " *
^ ii. <?t«n is often found instead of g^*? n5n in relative clauses of
?» ^5 w /f*'/^'' "^g»*^^« phrases ; as. No one is so brave as not
to be duturbed: Nemo est tam fortl» quin perturbetur
m. Sometimes the perfect subjunctive instead of the imperfect is
«T«r °^"J?P«"d.f 8 to our past (indefinite) tense. In sSch cases
^nZiil *^^® ^,?.*^' ^« f^W attention to the independent fact
rather than dwelling on the relation of cause and effect ; or (2) the
action is summed up as a single whole, and not regarded as con-
S"^J *^' ^'*'' ^^'^ ^'^'''^^'^ *^ ^«*^*' ^ *''«* ««»1/ Mo reached
e^ererto'* ^*''^'* ^''P"»"*^®'""*' ^* P^rpauoae ad terram
iv. A common use of the consecutive, clause is to form with
a preceding fore (or M^rum esse) ,a substitute for the future
inbnitive passive, and sometimes also for the future infinitive
active, especially with verbs that lack the supine stem ; as. He
Poped that Arwvistus ivould abandon his obstinacy: Spdr&bat fore
uti Arlovlstus pertlnaola deslsteret. >
V. Verbs of coming are followed sometimes by a clause of
purpose sometimes by one of result. Hence the ne^tive is some-
tunes ne, sometimes ut nOn. ,
'-■'-■ :-;.-.: :;...-: ■.■'.#- -EXERCISE 4.-- '■ '■ ;■••■'"; '';'-■;
1. So great a panic seized oUr soldiers that we did not dare to
JTi ^^^^^*'^ ^^^ ^."^"^y- ^- ^^ happened that no ship reached
the Roman people can be conquered by our forces. U. There is
/4'
13
'<.
304
V
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK..
no one but knows that the comniander was 'worthy of being loved
by the soldjefs.J 5. Such was the valor- of th'e soldiers that not a
man withdrew from the ramparts. 6. We have been so taught by
quj: ancestors that we are accustomed to receive, not to give,
hostages. 7. Csesar said that from these circumstances it had >
resulted that they roamed about less wid^y. 8. He was the oiily
man who had not been induced to take the oath! '9. He had
judged this cavalryman a suitable person to send to/Cfesar to adc ,
assistance. 10. There are some who say that the Helvetians ^
are too braveto be conquered bj__the Romans. .11. The roesi^n-
gers made answer to Csesar that the bridge had been so bra^y
defended by the enemy that no portion of the army had beei|^,^le
to cross. 12. There followed such storms as prevented the ^cmay
from attempting to attack the camp. . .
-: B. {Themistodes, 7t 8.)
1. So greatVasthe storm that he was compelled to land all the
sailors. 2. It happened- that they were^ awaiting the king, and
were unwilling to keep their promise. ^ 3. There i%no one in whom
we feel confidence. 4. He is acting so unjustly ,^at the rest of»
his colleagues complain that they are being deceived, and are
taking thought for their own safety. 5. The result was that he.
was driven from the state and condemned in his absence. 6. Ther^,
are three ship^ on which they can send' back the hostages to^,
Athens. 7. Athens was so near that he saw he could easily re4ch
it. 8. It is /so difficult to defend the city that it is i^eless to
declare war. on the king. , '
j'^ . C. {Ccesar, Bk IV. 4.) -*
1. "They advanced so rapidly that they ppmpleted the whole
march in three days. 2. It happened that they were returning to
the same parts of Germany. 3. He is not the man to cross the
river secretly and retium to his own village. 4. So vast was the
host of the Usipetes . that the Menapii were driven out from the
rest of the district. 5. So great is the scarcity of boats that we
cannot cross.- 6. Who is there who has not been informed of
both matters (res)! 7. He brought it abo^t that no one was
prevented from wandering on this side of the river. 8. He crdtsed
a/'-"
': ■ ■-,. V
*»■
'■■"A.
*
* , ■
.„■ .-. ' .;.
^ ,.
wete^
^
ag loved
lat not a
,ught by
to give,
3 it had
the diily
He had
ir to adc
ilv^tians
ine8g(^ii-
brayiSy
1 all the
ng, and
nwhora
» rest oi?^
and are
that he
5. Ther^
bages to,^
ly reach
eless to
3 whole
ming to
ross the
was the
roirt the
bhat we
rmed of
>ne was
crossed
ns weffr-
^
305
./
'■ (:"'!"
PART V.i-SYNTAX ANb COMPOSITION.
* ■ ■ , ^ .
■■rtvr--'--'-'.: CHAPTER V. '' ^.^K,'^:'^-\ -f,- Vv',
Questions, Dijiect and I5(tdirect. .
34. A DiKECT Question is a principal clause introduced *y
(a) An interrogative pronoun, pronominal adjective or adverb, or
(6) One of the interrogative particles : ne, niyiine, ornum; m,
What do they seek f Quid petant?
Whither are we setting out? Quo proflolgolmur?
—. no you not see? Ndnne Tides? . ^ ^^
nwfJ^^:.^*"r\'^"'"~;"^* '^ *," enclitic, appWded "to an em-
phatic word which IS regularly at the beginning of the *uestion.
r//.>* V -^ / information,' and is impartial or non-committal ; as,
18 he writing ? Sorlbltne ? . " ' '
,,..^^'*"* **^^ ^^^ confirmation of belief, and expect^, the answer
ycs, as, ■ * ^
. Ish^ not wriUn^ f {ov He is wrtting, ia he not ?) Nonne- «orlbir?
^jx^ asks for confirmation of disbeUef, and expects the answer
mrdyhe ia not writing? ipr.He is not toriting, is he?) Nurt
35. InWct Questions— a subordinate clause i»tr<;.'
duced by any of the interrogative words mentfOnea above is
called a dependent or indirect question, and always has its,
verb in the subjunctive; as, : \ v , v^
Be asked what they sought : Quaeslvlt quid peterent.
Me wonders what the reason is : Quae causa sit, mlra^nr.
In English we do not usually consider the clause a* a
de^ndent question unless the principal verb is of an interro-
ktive nature, but in Latin it may be a verb meaning to learn,
find out, know, tell, point out, see or decide; as,
Be learns what is bein^ done: Cdfirndsolt quae «erantur.
Ue reported wh<it he had seen: Quae perspexlsset reniintlavlt.
^1 ney cannot decide tn which direction it flows : in utram partem
llnat, Judloare non possunt.
„ *' A^^ ^^^ ^*^*"* ^^ dependent questions express whether without
any difterence of meaning ; as, He asked whether they were happv
%
nnm beAtl easent (or be&tla» egaeg t^
v?
N' "^^
1. -y» must not be used when the sentence contains some other interrogative word,
- 2Q ^ . -. . '
■^
r-
306,
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
36. Rules for the Use of Tenses are as follows J
In indirect questions as ar rule the English tenses will be a .
sufficient guide.* The futilre is represented by the subjunctivj^ of
the active periphrastic conjugation (see Part III. 69, a).
• ^
' Sequence of Tenses in Indieeqt Questions..
ft
Primary Sequence.
He asks, lenms,* V
He ivill ask, learn, ')
{what they are <iping :
what they have don^ T
what they tvill do:
etj
Qnaerit, cognoscit
Quaeret, cogndscet
(4uld faciant.
quid, feoerlnt,
quid factnri slnt.
^ ^ Secondary Sequence
^fY^df'P He was atking, learning,
b^O He asked, learned,
JitA-U^-^^ ^^ osfced^ learned,
\ \ ' iwhat they were doing
\ what they did :
I what they had done ;
\what they would do :
)
"1
»t. J
./
Qaaerebat, oognosoebat*
Quaeslvit,. oogrndvlt,
Qaaeslverat, oogrndve'rat,
Tquid faoerent.
' , J quid fedssent. _^ .
I quid fecissent.
Vqnld facturl essent.
37. After the verbs mentioned in section 35, English abstract'
nouns such as size, number, character, reason, time, place, and many
verbal nouns such as opinion, intention, are best rendered into
Latin by dependent interrogative clauses ; as, '^:
You, see the extent of the danger : Videtls quantum sit perl-
'onlnm. ^^ ^
He could not discover their intentions: Quae faoturl essentt
odgndioere non poterat.
38. Disjunctive Questions. — Where two questions are conr
nected by or, involving an alternative choice, we have a disjunc-
pive, altemc^tive or double question as opposed to a simple question.
/The first alternative is in Latin regularly introduced by utrum
(whether) or -ne, the second by an (or): Such questions^ when
dependent are of course in the subjunctive ; as, 01
1. The chief exceptions are : (a) Afler a primary tense the perfect subjunctive talies
]the place of the imperfect ; as, / know what he was doing : Scio quid fecerit.
/ (6) After the perfect tetise secondary tenses are used, even where'We should expect
primary tenses; as, I have shown what resources you have: Quae tubsidia
h«bf r« 8 | j»xpo»H ' ' (Thi 8=4a»t p e oaKMri tjf i»-4oyn4 y>m»thpe» 4ti»9
result*).
'ft'
i*::jr:
■Jj, . ^
^ill be a <°
nctive of
vr«
int.
at.
Vat
It. j
)88ent.
abstract
nd many
red into
lit perl-
[ essent.
are ccmr
|uestion.
^ ntram
ns when
ictive takes
erit.
)uld expect
I subsidia
PART v.— 1^
AND COMPOSITION.
307
Utruni' apad ed«
Does duty or fear ^veigh more vnth them?
offlolum an timor plus valet ^ ^
th!!^mZlt&ii'^^'''^ *« l^<^th^ir forces agaM
- «on! i!?^ o^toj^fend the camp. Dellberabant ooplasne adver-
8um hostem ducere. an castra deferiderc praestaret.
theinL^ri^ ''' ^"'^' ''^J""^^^^^ question, is ann.n; in
u. Utrum is often omitted in disjunctive questions in which
case -ne is sometimes used for an in indirect questSr ' iS sSe
SlTeSs!^^^""^ ^^ «^"^^*^-- omittld.esp^iall'/in-^^i^
^ ni. yc« and wo in answers are usually expressed bv reDeatinir
fn^ratto'^^. ^"^^*^^" <^^*^ ^^ -^^-' -^')' oAyl^^^ef
qimerl!" '''^'''^^ questions, n5nne, «;;,e<;i«r not, is used only after
fk^'j^*^ ^^i'^ ?^^**^ importance, but.not always easy, to distincuish
the dependent interrogative from the dependent ^^lativrEe
the latter being regularly in the indicative For instance in S
could not prevent what bad been done, and I can gou^^etLlZ
go ^vh^t^nd where are to be taken as relatives ; in ThZ coTMnot
A^Zt^f T ^n^^"" th^,Awbs mentioned in section 35, howei^er
^lt1:S:'^ gene^lly be^in WgatiVe ; If ter otLr v^^^^;
EXERCISE 6.
H ,
A
•^ - *
1. He asks who is leading the army into our territories and"
what he wishes to accomplish. 2. He told the gener^ who had
persuaded the soldiers to leave the camp.« 3. C«sar had sent
hors^en m advance to observe in what direction the enemy were
marching. 4. . Did yoU not know that he had asked whether the
Koman people would make geace with the enemy? 5. Of whom
shall I ask the date of his return to the city? 6. He sent scouts
across the river to ascertain what was going on in th^enemy's
camp. 7. Are you a Roman soldier or not ? What is your reason
for coming into our territories ? 8. Surely he did not ask whether
the Roman people had made peace with the Helvetians or not ?
9. He could not find out what villages the Gauls had beyond the
Jvnone. or the — -— *« "« ....
strength a^=
the ppsition of the enemy's forces. IX. Did C«esar inquire why
4
308
E.*
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
the officers had not led the troops against the enemy to prevent
thdr crossing the river? 12. He sent ispies in order that he might
be able to know with whom the leader of the Gauls held com-
munication.
B.iThemistoclea; 9, 10.) '^
1. They asked why he did not believe you. 2. Surely they
did not bury him secretly near the market-place?. 3. We know
what city will provide him with bread and whence he ^U obtain
wine. ^4. He e^lained the character and extent of the bridge he
had constyucted. 6^ Did he wish to do evil or good to the
Persians? 6. He asked whether they were promising to crush
Greece. 7. Did they not fight a battle with me off Salamis?
8. I believe what Thucydides has written concerning those times.
9. To whom has the king presented these gift»? 10. We wished
to knoF whether or not the bridges had been broken down.
O. {Ccemr, BL IV. 5.) •; V^
1. Prom what districts do you come and what have you heard
or learned there about these matters? 2. He ajsked what plans
they were adopting. 3. The merchants were compeUed against
their will to declare whether they favored a change of government.
4. Is he the slave of a doubtful rumor or has he been compelled to
co.me ? 5. Surely they do not fear this custom, do they^ 6. We
shall ascertain the reason for the Gauls' eagerness for political
changes. 7. We asked wheth^^^ qpt they had mformed Csesar.
of this/ruinoi^ 8. Ccesar qpri^le<^^ the Gauls to declare what'
plans ffley would adopt. 9. Do not most people fear the mob ?
I '',^'^~
"i '
m^--
«I
7
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
S09
. CHAPTER VI. '
The Present and Perfect Participles.
40. The participle is a verbal adjective. In Latin, like the
adjective, it is inflected to agree with its substantive, while, like
the verb, it has distinctions of voice and tense, and has the same
case relations as the verb from which it is formed.
The Present Participle has active force, whether formed from
active or deponent verbs ; the Perfect Participle when formed
from active v6rbs has passive force, but when from deponents,
active force. _ . .
>^1. The time of the participle is in Latin relative to that of
its principal verb. .;-,\/\_, J- ■■)-■:-■■]:):. .is. *
^ (a) The Present Participle denotes the same time.aa that of
its verb. : «^
(b) The P«»/ec< Participle denotes time jo»-»or to that of its
„ verb. ... ''-.:-
Hence whenever the English, as is so often the case, uses
the present participle to denote something that takes place
be/ore the action expressed by its main Verb, the present par-
ticiple must not l^ used in Latin, but either the perfect
participle or some equivalent ; as, .,
Betuming to the harbor, he found th» ships ready: Ad portnm
TOvergu» (or cum ad portnm redilsset), nhv6H parAtas Inventt.
Bexng defeated m batUe, tfiey sent envoys.: Proello «uperAtl,
Mgatos mlaArnnt.
42. The Appositivb or Circumstantial Participle^— The
most important use of the participle in Latin is its use in the
appositive relation to its substantive to define the circum-
stances of an action, expressing the relation of time or cause
or (less frequently) of condition or concession; as,
(o) Present Participle i—He is dain whUeftghting bravely : rat'
tlMlmfl pugniinB Interflcltnr.
They dew Husovus whiU fillifftfnjl^dmi; Dtfmum red^ntiir"
Roaolnm oooIdAruntt
C
■v
310
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(6) Perfect Participle "PasBive:— Being repulsed hy the cavalry^
they hid in the woods: Repalsl ab eqnitatu, se In sllvas abdi-
derant. ' ' '
Hti brought aid to his brother, when hemmed in by the enemy:
Fratrl Intercluso ab hojstibns auxlliam tnllt.
Though thrown into confusion, they did not retreat: Perturbatl»
tamen pedem non rettnlernnt. ■ * ^>
He ujill come if asked : VLogsktvLs yreini«>t. -
(c) Perfect Participle Deponent :—HaiHnsF encouraged the sol-
diers, he leaped down : Gobortatns mllltes, deslluit.
Fearing a' scarcity of provisions, he returned: Inoplam frumontl
Veritas, redlit. -
n.v
Notice that although the EnglisBT participle is frequently^pre '
ceded by such words as while, when, if though, the corresponding
Latin words are not used. - >
43. It is generally advisable to render this Latin participle more
freely into English, using either (a) a dependent clause introduced
by while, whkn, after, as, because, if, although; or (b) the preposi^
tions on, after, with a verbal noun, especially the gerund in -ing;
or (c) a coordinate sentence followed by and or but; or (d) a, rela-
tive clause.
And conversely All such expressions are commonly best rendered
into Latin (where possible) by the circumstantial participle,
Foi} instance, in place of the English sentences given in secticH
42, we may have; corresponding to the same Latin sentences :
They dew Roscius while he was retumitig home, ovt They dew
Roacius, toho tvas returning home.
On being remdsed by the cavalry (or. After their repulse by the
cavalry), they hid in the woods.
JSe brought aid to his brother when he had- been hemmed in by the „
enemy, or, who had been hemmed in by the enemy.
Though they were thrown into confusion, they did not retreat, or, '
They loere thrown into confusion but did not retreat, > '
He ioUl come if he is asked. t, • " • i
After he fuid e/neouraged f,he «kdiers (or, After encouraging the
soldiers) he kaj^ dovm, or, He enccet^raged the ai^diera auk leaped
0vm*'' \ ' "* .^ ^. -m^ ■'.:■-■'. •
^e returned, hecauae he feared a scarcity of provisions, or, Aahe
~^red a scarcity of provision^, he retwnytd, , ^
■'■„' ' ■ ■ \ ■ < :■ ; ■ ' .If. ■; •.•v.-";'.. - •
44. i. Other uses of the Participle are : ^
' (g) As a sf^tbstantiw^ olfcie Hy in the ohlique fwiwM linrf .iyipmf^iilty —
In the plural; as, lie, fdlvtved up the fugitives: fngUant^m pr»»-
PART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
811
e cavalry,
TAs ubdi-
t« eiiemy :
rturbatl,
I the s<A-
'rumontl S
»ntly pre-
sponding
iple more
itroduced
preposi^
L in -ing;
d) a rela-
rendered
le.
n section
oes ;'
^1/ deto
Ise by the
in by the
Wmt, or,,
V
.■:■ I
ging the
§ leaped
^ ifif hi
ipBdft]!y_
■eoutns est. OppoHunity for resting is givm to the vmmded:
Valhei atls facnitas qnietis datar. ' '
Note that those fleeing, those wounded is not in Latin II Wvleiites
or II ynlneratL
(6) As an adjective; as, This state was large and flourishing:
Haeo civltas fult ampla ^tqne florena. They thought they were
ready : Se paratds esse arbltrati sunt.
Paratus and many other participles are in fact compared like
adjectives.
(c) As a predicative complement of certain verbs, especially (a)
the present participle with video, audid^ facio, ana other verbs of
perceiving ov representing; as, He noticed a ceHain man meriting:
Animadvertit quendam scrlbenteni ; and (6) the perfect par-
ticiple passive with habed, very like the English perfect with have;
as, He sends forward the cavalry which he had collected from the
whole province : Equltatum, quem ex omnl provinola coaotnm
babebat, praemlttlt. (See section 182, e. ii.)
ii. The perfect participle of many deponent verbs appears often
to have the force of the present ; for instance, there is no appre-
ciable diflFerence between arbitratus and existimuns. Other words
so used Are veritus, difflsus, suspiccttus, u»iis; as, Stuspecting that
this would happen, Labienus uns advancing, employing the sam^
pretence: Qiyae fore snsplc&tns, Lablgnns eftdem usus slmnlg^-
tldne progredleba$ar. In most cases the perfect is defensible
as specifying the cause which leads to subsequent action.
iii. The participle occasionally has its force defined more exactly
by the use of nisi {except), ut or tamqmm {aa if), etal or quamquam
{althomh), utt)ote (inasmuch as).
iv. The lack of a present participle passive is supplied by a sub-
ordinate clause with dum, cum, or giti; that of the perfect participle
active (where a deponent verb is not available) by a subordinate
verb with cum, si, etsl, etc., or by the ablative absolute construc-
tion (see Chapter VII.),
EXERCISE 6.
■M>^.
1. They threw the ambassador into chains while he was attempt-
ing to speak. 2. The envoys, after being dismissed, returned
home. 3. The cavalry made an attack upon the Gauls, who were
spattered and in despair. 4. Thinking the ambassadors would not
return, Cassar crossed the river. 5. After encouraging the cavalry
the tribunes returned to Caasar. 6. He replied that the Germans
mmld ijomo if ask e d. 7. .Our iiiou Hltaoked th^ ettenky tod aiew
a groat number of them. 8. Promising to return in a short time.
m
PRIMARy LATIN BOOK.
I -.
I
he follojed «p the fuahves. 9. He comes upon the soldiers, who
«re fightmg^b„vely. 10. On his return he found the so dTer^
engaged .nthe work. 11. The <».val.y, being ovAerJt\^Z
^^iTwo^ ^:r:ir '"^ '^™"^- '"r "-■'™ ">'» -
■ ■ ■ ■■■ • . ■ ■ \ ■;■■'■
B. (Aristides, l-S.) \ . '
wi' ^it^f ^«~ withdrBwing. they inquired of him what ho~
I!^.Y *'sJ' ^^' '""°« """"I "■» J"»' t» "»ny years'
Aristides wal>„ished by an excited mob. a:jUthough fS
. from th.s penalty they wiU be driven from their 'ooun^
^ 4. Feanng (vermr) the l^rbarians, the states tmnsferred the mS
•^"'■■■"'- ^^/"''"."T^ the' Athenians, ff. He will be restored to h"s
\- ... ^ I"»""*'? «nd chosen general of the Athenians. 6. BeiuB repelled
• , >e-barbanans attempted to buUd a fleet. 7. They sl^ ^Z^^ '
T»nwho was «tempting to get together an" army.' 8. ^^1
.(f«P*»-)m the fourth year to Greece, he routed the army of tSe
Sy^venlS '"^"■^"■'^ ^" '-■"' » <'^- o" ^His siaJe. t£
_-|''.V' '■ Oj {Gmar^lBk. ir. e.) ' ^ '" i'.
WL^ <W was^ setting out for.the «miy he' learned of this
Eb^n'^1 ■"""«.""' "-«y »»«W,»«"d:embassies to the
fnvZr ^ p """"T* *fr leading men to him. 3. On the ■
mv^t*n of CaE«ar, he wiU carry on war a^nst the Treveri
4. Havmg set out eaiUer than usual, they learned that someX^
were not ready 6. After wandering far (io,^) ^nd ^de tt
Germans reached the Rhine. 6. Thinking th»t the cavaliy wh^^
^se^o'utTru '' T^r "'""^"™«' *= -^^^
to set out. 7. Embassies have been sent by this state, and are •
oommg to c«sar with .11 the leading men. 8. While tJey a^
w«g.ng war with the Eburones, they will reach the territorfes ~
the Germans. ^9 This vassal, suspecting, that 0«^ would ,L«
h« departure, had determined to arouse their spirit* • " "" ,
PART V.—SfNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 313
^ X , .>■■
CHAITER VII. • j
1 The 'Ablative Absolute.
*
45. In translating into Latin participial phrases (or their equiv-
alents), such as have been described in Chapter VI., two difficul-
ties often arise :
^ (a) The participle required is a perfect participle ac<m„ which
r^s not ejcist in Latin (except in the case of deponente) ; as,
Hamng heard this, he departed. After receiving hostages, he made
peace. They made art attack and drove the enemy back.
(b) Thesubject of the verb in the English subordinate clause
cannot be brought into direct relation with an/single word in the
main sentence ; as. When the arms had been surrendered, he made
peace, Althcyugh the defenders w^re but few, he crnddnot take the
46. In such cases recourse toay generally be had to the
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE Construction, in which a substantive (or
pronoun) and a participle in agreement are used, in the
ablative case ; as, , ' ' •
Having heard this, h^ departed : m. r«bu> «udltl», dlwegBlt i
' They made an attack and d^ove the enemy ba^ik : Impetu f aotfi '
lioatga reppnlerant. ««wto.
When the arms had been surrendered, he made peace: Tr&dlti.
^ ^«/wugfA- the defenders were but few, he coitld not take the iovm:
Puaols ddfendenttbus. oppldam expaRn4re non pptnlt.
47. There is a sipiUar nominative absolute construction in Enff-
J_«w» ^** o'^WM having been surrendered, M made peace. But
Jflnglish construction is of comparatively rare occurrence, and
!.!ff """"kT'^u ^^5 ""^^^^^ translation for the Latin ablative ibso-
su^'eTt^dlnS^^ "^ ''^"'^"''^ '^'^^'^^ *« ^^ ^^^^>^
■f: L" ^t ^f^:A''r^. ^" .'^"^^l^ ^^ ^- "^ay also have in
ft of thfl ft bl ft tivo 4aMw>kfee, ilept i iukfU tfftmaer expreaaing tim4^
eatufe, etc.; for inatanoe, in place of the present participle,
cum
* .
314
■I
PRIMikV LATIN BOOK;
-k
rTloHnnlTS^i^i*"^^!!"?*'''^^ *umrwith the pMseiit indicative
iThX i 'i^}' ^u^ ''l.P^^ f ^^« P^'^^^''^ participle, cum
with the pIuperfec|Bubjunctive or uU or postmmm mth the perfect
indicative (sectionasi ;452^ 6) ;.^b, OniaAing thisXl^rted:
Cum haeo audlvl..et, dl«o«Mit. Being unaUe' to orossAhey re-
turned: Cum tran.Ire non possent. revertftriint. .
49. Instead of the" participle in the absolute cdnstpuct^pn.. we
often find a predicate noun or adjective, without any copula, as
the verb ^ae has no present or perfect participle ; as, . ,
. They attempt to cross agcnnst his tuUl: B5'inTlto tranaire o6-
nantur. ' ■
He foTTMd a conspiracy ip, the conmdship ofMessalaand Pisd:
Messala atque PU6ne odnsalibiii oonjur&tlonem fecit. ^
50. i. The ablative absolute construction is not used with the
perfect participle passive of intransitive verbs, th^t is, of verbs
Z^fhJ'ij, p,.^ 7. ^"^ /"^* 5''^®''" *" accusative ; as, Havin6
reached the Rhine, they plunged into the river: Cum ad Bhenum
pervenlMent.l§ln liaraen praeotpltavfipunt. HatnnoDardawcd
theprwomrs, he returned: Cum oaptlvl. Ignfivlgget, re.mt.
u. In. the case of the perfect partic^e-of deponent verbs with
activarforce, the ablative absolute, is somewhafc sparingly used, and
Qhiefly with intransitive verbs ; a«, A great storm aro^ and 2most
,aU the 8htp8 xoera wrecked: M^ximh. ooort& tempestate, prope
omne. 11&V6. aflllotae «unt. So also mcrtvm, profectus, secutns
•-w ':• -^^^l^ojitrary to Latin usage to have the substantive in the
ablative absolute dehote the same person or thing as is mentioned
in thepnncipal clause ;^s. When Commius landed they seized him
18 not Commld « n&vl «grets6, earn oomprehenderubt. but
Commlum 6 nftyl «ffreMum oompreliendArunt.* *
IV. For msi, nt, etc., with the abl. absolute see section 44 iil
^hLa - ».'*^*»VV^^^"S "^^^ the nepiative is often equivalent to a
£ t-"»"*''*"^^ by ^^'^^^^^'«' '^^.^mthout losing any time he sets
out. iVniio tempore Intermlaad proflolaoltur.
..wi, ^^^^^'''X *b«V^"*^^ "?*y define -the circumstances of
i^n Z ' ^'h I ^ '^""t 'T* *"* (X»ifu»ionfrom heaHng the shouf-
tng tl^ rest took to Jtufht: kellqnl, e«udlt6 olftmore pertur-
!!f„ ««•*»«»«>«•. tergra yertftpunt. An ablative absolute may be
ZS^ h,^?„\°''T"°*''''l».^*'^;' **' "2^"'> with another ablative
absolute, but not with any other (even an equivalent) construction
'•^&.
1. Literally Be (^%) wnwitling ; M«$iala and Pi»o {being) wntvts.
2. Yet Offlsar has geveral inaUncM of the ablative alxolute In such a oaM nft^n
parent y to secure emphasis ; e.g., B. G., III. 14. 4 ; IV 12 1 • 21 «• vV^'i? «
[. 4. 4 ; 48. 1 : VII. 4. l*! 27.8'; jS.'l; 78. 8. Iftt IhouM nV 6« Imftofad*' ' "' *'
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
315
EXERCISE 7. V
A,
.,f:f
1. Having settled these matters, he returned.** 2. After encour-
aging the soldiers and giving the signal, he ordered an attack to
. be made. .3. He set out against Caesar's will, after promising to
return shortly. 4. As no enemy prevented (him), he led the
legion back in safety. 5. On this being done, the Roman soldiers,
drawing their swftrds, made an attack upon the enemy. 6. In the
consulship of Marius many were put to death without a hearing.
7» After that assembly had been dismissed, the chief men returned
to Ciesar. 8. After he heard the prisoner, he dismissed him.
9. When this battle was fought, the enemy, being impressed by
the bravery of out soldiers, sent envoys to Csesar. 10. Having
reached their territories, he set fire to all their villages and then
returned to the camp.
. ' B. (Hannibal, 1^ 2.)
1. After Hannibal was banished the Romans ceased to carry on
war with the Carthaginians. 2. Leading the son to the altar,
.the father bade him swear to "conquer the Romans. 3. While the
citizens were sacrificing, he was attempting to bribe the general.
4. When Hannibal was a little boy, Hamilcar was making war on
Spain. 5. When Hannibal was a little boy, Hamilcar took him
with him to the camp. 6. Af te» the victims are sacrificed he will
set out* 7. "^ While Philip was absent, the others/ began to act
unwisely. 8. They bribed the king and inflamed ^iiin with hatred
towards the Romans. *
O. (Catmr, Bk. IV. 7.)
^. While the Romans were offering resistance, the cavalry
secured a supply of corn. 2. After conquering the Germans he
heard that ambassadors were coraing'from i^ Suebi. ^ 3. Ho drove
out the Suebi, and assigned lands to the Gennans. 4. Without
anyone offering resistance, they will set out against Ctesar's wish.
5. Being unable to' conquer the Suebi, they made war on the
Germans. 6.* Although they be^ed for mercy, he nevertheless
drove the Suebi from their lands. 7. As we have secured cavalry,
we sh^ll be a match for the Romatis. 8. After making war
316
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
■*,<
CHAPTER VIIL .,
Verbs Completed by 'the Dative, Genitive or Ablative
—The Impersonal Passive.
51. Many verbs followed By a direct object in English are
represented in Latin by verbs that take, not the accusative,
but some other of the oblique cases ; as, C
!niey forget the disagreement: Dissensldnis obllvlsonntav. -
irUepersxiadesthestcde: ClvUhtlperanhdet.
lie used the timber ai\d bronze : Materia atque aere utebatar.
Thus while the English verb is transitive, the Latin equiva-
lent is intransitive. .
, 52. Yerbs WHICH TAKE THE Dative. -
Many verbs, cJiiefly denoting advantage or disadvantage or dis-
position towards, are {oUowed by the dative. Of these the most
important are : *
Aid, assist, snbventd, snconrro. "Harry (a man), nubo
sBeitere oredo." Wee^ oocurro ; so obvlam e6.
H^brnmand ( = order), imperd, -^Oppose, reslstd. repuKno, ob-
mando. slsto, ocourrd.
Ctommawd {=am xn charge of), ^Pardon, I^nosoo.
praesam.
^Displease, dlsplloed.
-^Distrust, aittldo.
•^Envy, lnvlde6.r
^avor, faved, studeo.
J Heal, medeor.
. Indidge, Indulged.
Injure, nooed, obsam.
-J Interrupt, Intervenid.
^I*ersuade, persuaded, anftdeo.
"Please, placed. .
Helieve, succeed, snooAdA. .
Satisfy, satlsfaolo.
Serve, gervio. , , » *
^■Spate, pared.
'^ Surpass, praestd.
^Threaten, minor.
•. Trust, f Idd, odnf Idd. . '
63. Verbs WHICH TAKE THE Genitive.
(a) Some vtrbs meaning to pity, remember or forget are followed
by the genitive; namely : .^ _^, : »_!__
Pity, mlsereor, and mlseret (for which see section 91, d)i
Bear in mind, tem^mber, memlnl. ,
^tU to mind, recollect, remlnlwor.
Jf'iMyef, obllvliwor.
I.
TIVE
L are
tive,
^1
PART %. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
317
nr.
liva-
dis-
aostr
eo.
ob-
red
^; (6) Two impersonalP^bs, Interest and (rarely) rgfert. mean-
%ig itconcemSf it interests (it its of importance to% take the genitive
^Tjfthe person interested ; as, *
*"■ It concerns the state : Bel publioae interest. >
^i. But instead of the genitive of the personal and reflexive pro-
nbuns, the ablative feminine of the possessives is used, namely,
mea, tna, nostra, vestra, gna ; as, This concerns me : Hoc me&
-Interest (or refert).. In this usage refert is common.
ii. The thing which is of "importance is expressed by a neuter
^ pronoun, an infinitive (with or without a subject accusative) or a
clause. The degree of importance is expressed by an adverb or by
the genitive of price (see section 88) ; as, Your safety is of great
importance to me : Magnl me& ifntereatnt B&lvu» »U.
64 Verbs WHICH TAKE THB;ij^BLATIVB. '
The following verbp (with their «ppapounds) are followed by the
ablative :
JSatf vesoor.
fangor.
UsCy utor. Enjoy, fraor.
Gain, obtain^ potior.
Also verbs of lacking^ ege5, cared. V
55. i. That in the case of such verbs the irregularity is only
apparent may be seen by observing the exact meaning of the verb ;
for instance,. semd, am a slave (to); persuaded, make it acceptable
(to) ; satisfacio, do enough (for) ; pared, am at hand (for) ; resistd,
stand in opposition (to) ; praesum, am at the head (tvith reference to);
Utor, benefit myself Qty means of) ; potior^ become powerfid (by means
of); cared, be cui off (from); obliviscor, become dark (as regards)
i.e., become forgetfid (of).
ii. Accordingly it is not necessary that all verbs having the same
English equivalent should take the same case. Thus jubeO (com-
«land, order), s^iblevo, juvd (aid), laedo (injure), delectd (please),
offendd (disease), miseror (pity), and recordor (recoUect), regularly
take the accusative.
iii. Some of the verbs given in sections 52-54 are sometimes fol-
lowed by a different case, especially when used in a different sense.
Thus imperS (command) takes the dative, but imperd (denuind,
require) t&kea the accusative, both being united in,, He demands
hostages of the enemy, Hostibns imperat obsldds. Meminl, of re-
calling a person one has knoum, takes the accusative. Potior, gain
sovereignty over, takes the ^[enitive, chiefly in the phrase rerum
potlrl, to obtain control of affairs. And the verbs of remembering
&nd forgetting regularly have the accusative in the case of ileuter
pronouns or neuter adjectives used substantively.
iv.t5ertaair phrases, having the^iTiiire or ■verbs which take tR5"
dative, have thQ aano construction, e.g.,fidem habeO—cdnfido,
\m
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
V. ^ppr may take a second ablative used predicativelv •- as He
VI. /n<er(/fc5 takes 4 dative (or sometimes an accusative) of the
person -debarred, the ablative of the thing forbidden. ®^ *'' ^"®
56. Tkk Impersonal Passive. -In English only the active voice
of an mtrai^itive verb may be used. But in Latin even with
intransitive -Verbs (He., such as do not govern a direct object in the
accusative), the passive may be used impersonally, that is, in the
third person singtlar, and (in.the compound tenses) in the neuter.'
The impersonal passive denotes n^rely the occurrence of an action
without reference to the doer; as, Puirnatur: Fighthuf takes place '
. or there- IS a fight Ventum eat i Coming took place. The u^ual
English equivalent is the activejroioe/the subject being obtained
from the context ; as, Ventnm ertTSeXor -TPl ui </iiij, etc.) im/t<j.
67. In Latin all intransitive verbs, if used ip the passive,
must be used impersonally, and this impersonal passive con-
struction is used to render into Latin the passive of the verbs
which take the dative^» (section 52); -as,
CkBsar is obeyed: Oaesarl p&retar (i.e., obedience is rendered t^
.OcMor). ,
They aslfdto be spared: drftbant ut stbl paroeretur (t.c., that
mercy mtght be shomi to them).
I had not been pardoned: Mlhl non erat Ignatnm (il-ibr(fwe-
ness had not been granted to me). ^ ^j j
Thus where a verb takes the dative in the active voice, that
dative is retained in the passive, and canijot become the subject.
.^,:i...^i^.,._:.^: .::_i.__: :: ::^ ' EXERCISE a.'---'---— ■-■---— -*---r--.
1. Cffisar commanded the soldiers) of the tentH legion, which he
most trusted, to remember their former valoi/ 2. He answered
thatDumnorix was always «pposing Ccesar's' plans and assisting
the enemy. 3. These resources he is using in order to gain the
sovereign power. 4. He says that the senate distrusted the (kute
-— — jr — ^
1. On the translation of a verb by means of a verbal noun, see section 203, d.
*i„!-,?^g."!f.°* the impersonal passiv e oonst n iction witb verbs which take'the gent.
is^ gv*"^^^* OOCU .. 4 ^refty m the pB88tw pef iphraatiu fuiljugiuon. (See 1^ ^
^
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
319
■■ i-
r.
>■
■%
and ordered them to obey Cffisar's commands. 5. Exercising his
usual (mus) clemency, he promised to spare the If ervii, and
demanded a Kirge number of hostages from the other states. 6.
To this embassy the answer was given that the Roman people could
forget the old insultibut not the recent wrongs. 7. It is your
interest, and the interest of all the citizens to obey the laws, 8.
AVord was brought^ that these tribes eat com and flesh. 9. The
soldiers whom Labienus commanded were persuaded not to injure
the prisoners. 10. We are accustomed to pity those who obey our
rule, but the states which oppose the Roman people cannot be
pardoned. 11. All whom we met said that they lacked food. 12.
Using this bridge, Caesar made a sudden attack and became master
of the enemy's camp. ,^v ,
B. {Hannibal, S, 4.)
1. While making for Etruria i^e shall meet the two consuls with
th% whole army. 2. He uses both eyes equally well. 3. After
SAguntum was taken Hannibal commanded three very large armies.
4.*^ltt-the.next year he gained Saguntum, an allied state. 5. No
one was spared. 6. After routing the consuls, Hamilcar was com-
manded to seize the pass. 7. It is of great importance to the
State that the chief command should be bestowed on Hannibal.
8. He obeys the consul's authority. 9. We shall never forget that
ambuscade. 10. He could not be persuaded to assist his wounded
colleague. \- '"
" 1. They do not trust even Csesar, 2. He has commanded the
cavalry not to injure the ambassadors. 3.- 1 cannot forget the
outrages of the Suebi, 4. Answer was made that this concerned
a large part of Gaul. 6. He says that a large part of the cavalry
IS being resisted. 6. They wish to obtain the lands of others. 7.
This speech displeased the ambassadors. 8. They thought that
they needed aid, and persuaded Caesar to assist them. 9. This
friendship will benefit Ceesar, 10- A large part of the Ubii envy
the !$uebi,
k_K
\ ]
320 ^^ l^ LATIN BOOK.
. ^ J CHAPTER IX. . *?
Conditional Sentences.
58. Conditional sentences consist regularly oip two dauses • (a) a
subordinate clause containing some assumption and iSuced b?
ri^y *'"*"'^"!^.'',^'*^' *"^ ^^> * principal clause containing the
P^I^TZYh ^-^^r^J'^-^-P^rnption.'^The former is called the
folSScS^cw' "^^^'^' ^^ P-^-« - often called the
59. One obvious distinction of conditions is that of (l)^^^mror'
pad, m which the question of fulfilment has already been decided
&nd (2) future, in which a possibility of fulfilment is always con'
ceivable. In each of these, two forms of statement are in common
use, making four main classes of conditional sentences.
60. I. In PRESENT OR PAST conditions, where no hint is
given of the accordance of the supposed case with fact, but
where it is merely stated that, granting the assumption, the
conclusion logically follows, the indicative is used in both
clauses, the tenses being those which would be used for the
same words if occurring in simple sentences ; as,
■If he thinks this, he is mistaken: SI hoc exUtlmat. errat.
tA^ Tr?^-^ f^ tiWHtm^^ingrZj/; 81 peooavl. Insdens feci.
^ ij they dtcl this, they are not enemies.- si bdo feoerant nan
. Inimlol sunt.
61. II. In PRESENT OR PAST Conditions, where we wish to
represent the assumption (and consequently the conclusion
also) as contrary to/act, the subjunctive is used in both clauses, *
the imperfect subjunctive ipr present time, and the pluperfect
subjunctive for past time 7 as, fe
If he th<AMiht this (but he does not), h^i vxnild be mistaken : SI hoc
ezlstlniaret, erraret. ««
^^Jf^had said this (but he did not), he would have b^en mistaken :
SI hoo dixisset. erravisset. ^^
If he were alive, t«j sh^dd have found him long aqo: inveniaiiii.
mnajamdlu, «I vlveret. ^ ^ ^nvemsse
Had my advice prevailed, we should to-day be frep..- at m ^nm
«onsiuuiu vulUM^I. &<Ktle Ubert «ssemat/ "i "«nm
^ 1
rf - ■ I
PART V.-srNTAX AND COMPOSITION. ^
»i»d. The Buglfah h^ ii' Th. ^ ^^ *"»" " «"P»»-
i -Je^ «-^^^«r.^ r *; "^ ;?'"' "»* ^^ » -»«1«"-
point of tim<( (pC"f r?„!T.^f "^ ^ i°dic.tu,r4««B the
^C'Ae doe, thca, he vM tStT^T ^:!^^^'*- ''"''^'*-
W'e shall attaint S tyTZ/T* ^'^'^^ *^« receivSgO
63^ ^V. In the other class of FUTURE cnnHifi^«
protasis ahouid or Lr« to 21 ^ '^ ^^*^ ^^ *^«
apodosis Wrf J iTlhe W ""'* «"bjunctive; in the
ci^y oi^^^^ are found, espe-
w vaned, the most important i^n«n«^-.^® "^^ ^*'^'® <^he m^
tion 61) where pos^^l ITr-S^iS**?? "^'^*^ *^ ^* (^-
gations (sections 120 and muTe ^^nl^l *** Periphrastic conju.
instead of in the subjunctive .^?/^LT! ""/^^ »n<ii«,«t«
gards mood aiid tense * J^ '/S /''"'''" ^^^ '^^ ^o' «« ^ re-
MAnAn. *«wJM«erit re», sen nHAnAKn.^. __„ _ '
•oentur. •om.erit re., sea BMndbunt »en profle^.
21
-v^
^
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
.|i
V
/i^»-.,
■ /-
Whether . . . or in this sense should be carefully distinguished
from whether . . . or represented by utrum . . . an (section 38).
In the former case we can always add in e^ker toMt or change to
no maMer whether . , . or.
iii. For if not, al ndn, •! minus and nisi are found. Nisi
{unless) is used to mark an exception, or after negatives. <Si minm
is used where the verb is to be supplied from* the context.
iv. Two mutually exclusive conditions are introduced by si . . .
•In» if . . . hit if. For but if not, where the verb is omitted,
sin mintis or sin aliter is used.
V. An important particular case of the present or past Ic^cal
condition (section 60) is thie so-called general condition, which,
in connection With any one of a series of recurrent actions, states
what is habitual. For present time the perfect^ indicative is usual
in the protasis, the present indicative in the apo^osis ; for past
time the pluperfect^ indicative' in the protasis and the imperfect
indicative in the apodosis ; as, If (ever) any crime is committed, the
Jhuids fix Ahe penalty : SI quod est admlssum faolBUs, Draldds
fkoenam «lonstltaant.
vi. For si^meaning in the liope that, to see whether, see sec. 177.
vii. Participles .and adjectives may be used in place of the
regular protasis to express condition; as, ffe wUl come, if asked:
Boff&tns venlet. If we keep together toe shall b& a match for them:
^niversl pards lis erimns. i^ < '
% viii. Another favorite classification (^ tjie conditional clauses it
"threefold: , , -V-^^^i^/ '
€. Logical conditions (past, |)re8^0l> future) combining classes
^. and III. above. Indicative4l^«M^ clauses.
II. Ideal or contingent condi|tomxfuture)— the same as class IV.
. above. Present subjunctive in both clauses.
i iji. Unreal conditions (present or past)— tlVe same as class II.
Bbove. Imperfect or plupt^ect. subjunctive in both clauseSf
■••.■■v.. ■ ,'■'■■ . .. ' .. . i;--
•■.;,:.;■ ^^ •" "■-. V , Exercise i9( : :.-:..:,: :i,^::^■''-
.. ., ■■ - ■ .ti..-J. — r-^r-, i-,^--^-^......-.- ^. . , .- _ ,,„ — hr - -' " T^- ~T ■'■ " - ■; ■ — r- ~- - -'- ~
1. If Oftstious should seize the supreme power in his stete, Osesar
irould wage war against him. 2. If our troops defeat the enemy,
the Belgians will *b ontoe send ambassadors to Cwsar. 3. If the
Gauls had been conquered by Ceesar they would have immediately
ient ambassadors to him concerning peace. 4. If a murder has
i>een committed, or there is a dispute about an inheritance, the
Druids decide (the matter). 6. The Germans would not now be
UPn pfrtMl Mid pl^B ii
UiMoUon
8!
Inoipls M tbs lutaw pitliQt_
V
PART V.-STNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 323
had not sent fonrord three enhnrt. "°™8«- 7. If the general
the victory .„d ourl. Z^ ^tlf^o JT"*^ '""" '"™ 8»»'^
TheHelvetiana would r„mttr-/°"'*«™"'**P«"'- »•
people were to conclude ^rjTh, hi T n f V"' """■'"
two legion» in that place, he will nofS' k?' y»'«» ^«sar enrol,
successfully with the Gauls 10 ^t^ "" '".'=!?' °" ">»."»
their towns and villages and bit uo .11 T?"^ ''"'""° «"
not have been able to return "^' "P. ""•">»" <»">. they would
dn!wn°UraXr%' "-O-'. >-> -«'not been
he would defeat thelttor 3 If T" ? """*«' » »- "-y.
«™y, he will be put t» dTh • 4 „ "^T' "'"""" » l^»
Hannibal in th^eld. fh^tt r!ut^ T J' '=°"»"'» "PP<-^
•"iQng the mountains, he would nTl» Ibi . ^'J "*" 'o «^'i»?
Hannibal was defeated in TtoW he di^w ^ °""'' """"• ?• "
his native land. 7 If thev^ •"e did not return unconque«d to
8. "theWu^io" trnCe;n„rx7•'L°''"'''"'~•P'•
venture to resist the Romans a Hh.!.' "" ""' "o""
."called by the master of ZhoL" " '™"*' '"' "^ "««"
C. iCasar, Bk. IV, 10, 11.)
t4'^td"Tr the^r^r ^" *«'''• *'''^'-'^'>»"
begged him not to return 3* im. "*!"*"• """^ "'"'" •»'«
they have not gained their reque^ TlVZST '"« """"•
C»sar, he wiU ask them to ad^ncTno tohe ' b^Jh "Ti"
into several branches, they form islair « « ""™"*"<"e
they were Serce and savage tribTh!.!:. 1 Y *^'^ "'""'«'^
«dors to them. 7 If X T'k u-.f.""" "^ ""* ^ ""^^ •">'»»•
nU far distant from the Al« "«""inhf r f'tT"' "■»' '"*
in adTKnee, w. should IiTT. Jl/. ? ""'^ "^ '^ '
b«""Ttn>
.«.«them permission thTy'ad';;::^?*"'^»- *•"•'* *«
#■
^-r
9U
PEIMARY LATIN BOOK.
ft-
CHAPTER X.
Clauses op Concession— Clauses op Proviso —
Conditional Clauses op Comparison.
66. Clauses' op Concession are subordinate clauses which con-
cede or admit something in spite of which the staijament in the
pfinicipal clause ^ill holds good. >
(a) Clauses introduced by although, meaning in spUe of the fact
thhtf or whereas, are rendered into Latin by qitMnqtuim, etstot
wmeta with the indicative, or by cum with the subjunctive; as,
Al^ugh the difficulty uxis very great, he determined to lead his
army across: EtsI •amma erat difBoaltas, tamen trftdaoere-
•xeroitam oonstltait.
The Romans, in spite of being weary with fighting, yet advanc^^
Bom&nl, qnamqaam proelid feasl erant, tamen prooSdnnt.
Jffe kept himself in camp, although the enemy every day gave him
ttn opportunity to fight: Castrlg sead ten^bat* oiuii hoatfis ootldlfr
pCigrnandl potestatem faoerent.
He was poor, whereas he might have been very rich : Fait pauper»
oam divltlulmas ease poaaet.
. ?fr>
I
(6) Clauses introduced by even though, even if, even granting, are
rendered into Latin . by etsi or etiamsi with the indicative or sub-
junctive, according to the rules for the^protasis of conditional sen-
tences (Chapter IX.), or hy ut or ni with the sul^urietive ; as,
Even if he cannot show graiitude, he at least can feel it : Ettam>il
refer re gratlam non poteat, habere oertd'poteat.
^ Even if my di^sition ^id not bid nte, 'pMcsaity compels me to
speak the truth: V£ra loqnl, etal meam Ingenlam non-moviret,
neoeaalt&a coi^lC. ji
Even supposing everything i^iwdd turn out contrary^to ipcpectation,
toe are very powerful in ships : Ut omnia oontr& oplnl£>nem aool'»
dantt plftrlmnm n&Vlbna poaanmna.
(c) Clauses introduced by although, meaning Ko^mf m\Uihlno
jtebAter hou), are rendered into Latin by qtmmvis wii>k t^9 subjunS'
Mve (usuiilly in the present tense) ; as, . «
Howtikr gr^at expectation may he (or Although expectation be
J- QnitmvfB alt mAyna <i»apeotA^i& r-
-^
tamen earn vlnoia.
«
•
"'
•' . "
^fe.
•
. ., . -, .■
_...
""'^^^
^
■
ff
*
•
*
k
- ' -^jiJ-
k
•' .
■'P
J/,
.^?:
PART V.-SITNTAX AND OOWOSITION. 826
.^.v^nly mcto(„) ia it always certain that what i, conceded
With th« ir^ 7' ? ,, commonly by dum. dtm^modo or mJo
with the .i^junchre (usually in the present tense) ; as
^^m ^^, ^^,ec£ (or so long as) they fear : oaerint auu.
^e negative in clauses of proviso is n# 1,
«r. f„iiA J u .1 ' ' " ''y ''™'4»«™ or »rf«« alone. These
oDsorvea (»,e., present or perfect subiunctire Aff^i. fk^
een^s. imperfect o, p,„p„,ect suMuicUrXf ^f ZZ^
■";;\^ .' ' :::■"; -/-^l;- .exercise lo. ^',. ,■ ;..;-->
j; ^vided that the enemy do not lea rn our numbem,
M>-
326
PBIMARY LATIN BOO?:.
Hi
<F'
«*
);
we shall ajbtack them to-morrow. 4. Many remain in Ceesar's camp^
as if they , were unwilling to return to Gaul. 5. If Caesar comes up
with the enemgiiK he wiU easily defeat them, nc*' matter how brave
• and numerous»hey may be. "6. In' spite oi their having taken up
their pomtion oil the higher ground, the eii&my could not withstand
the attacks of oiir men. 7: If only Labienus can, cross the river,
he will surround the enemy. 8. The cavalry quickly crossed the
river, just as if they had been instructed to do so. % Though you
can persuade these men to send ambassadors, you cannot make
them friends. 10. Even though he should have met with suitable
weather, he would not have sailed for Britain. 11. Whereas they
might returii without danger, they are unwilling to set out. .12.
Tne enepy sent hostages at once, as if afraid of Ceesar's vengeance.
. ' V B. {Hunnibal, 7, 8.) f " '. '
1. No'jnatt^r how welcome these gifts may be, the Romans will
not send back the prisoners. 2. Hannibal- will be declared an
exile, in his absence, just as if he were thie gr^test enemy of the
Carthaginians. 3. Provided they make peace with the Romans,.
Hannibal will be put to death. 4. Although they paid the money
i^ accordance with the treaty, the hostages were not restored^. 5.
Kvdu if they send vessels to. seize him, they will r|ot be able to
overtake him. 6. Whereas he might have been made consul, he was
persuaded to flee from Rome. 7. He was recalled, just as if he had
not carried on the war with great vigor. . 8. Even if envoys had not
been sent to demand Hannibal's surrender, he would have fled. .9..
Even though this answer were to be given, an audience of the Sen-
ate would not be granted., . '
^5 C {Ccesar, Bk. IV. IS.) ":'
1. Provided he resist bravely, he will not be surrounded. 2.
In spite of the fact that they were cut oflF by the enemy, our men
had no fear. 3. Even if several of our men are unhorsed, the rest
will not be put to flight. 4. Although he had come in sight of the
enemy, he did not cease from his flight. 5. The enemy ^exff put
to flight, as if panic-stricken. 6. Even if we had lent aid, we
should not have rescued him from peril. • 7. However brave an
opposition they may offer, they will be slain. 8. Although he him-
aeir hasirot muro tiuimrchnniBmtoAVAiry, he wtll T&tum. 9. £veii
though we were to leave the field, Piso would not be at all alarmed.
IMW
PABt v.— SYNTAX AND QOMPOSITION.
827
.\\
CHAPTER XI.
' ■ ■ *
Uses op the AccusAtivB.
*
-^-
•69. The DIBEC3T Object of a transitive verb (whether active
or deponent) is put in the accusative; as, *
* !gey day the man: Homlnem Ihterflolnnt. ' '
Mebmldaabridge: Pontem faolt. , !»«»»«■•«.
-^iv^®^*?^"^®^^ ^^j®*'*^ ^ *^** w^ich is (a) affected dr aDorehended
or (6) Drod^ded, by the action of the verb. apprenend^,,
^n'irn^iTv r""^^ ^""^'^^. T.^^ ^^ emotion) which are iiitiansitive .
mi^hsh are represented by transitive verbs m, Latin suchas
horr&re (to shudder at), ddere (to grieve over\ rtM (to^unhn!\
^reito flPPefor)L^^
iii. Many intransitive verbs (chiefly verbs of motion) become
transiUve when cpmpomjded with prepositions (espedTny ST
The Hdvettans nuet Camr : Helvet^ Caewtrem ebnTenlnnt -
feimilarly m Enghsh overrun, undergo. (See section !^8 v cTv
nJi^.^ilThl'^'T^'^^ v«.bs compounded with «t^rw tike two accu-
satives In the active, one^goverhed by the verb and the other by
the preposition ; as, He Imds his army across the river: m^mel
^f?^*"" trftduolt. (The preposition may, however, heZ
peated , as^ Tr&n» llumen exeroltam trftduott.) In the oaaaiva
^ the accusative governed by the preposition may be retained
^iJ.W^^f u .*^*'^' '^f'^'^ff. cqUin^, electing, cmsidering and
w 7». ^^-^ two accusatives of the same per^n or thing, one
^ ^mg the direct dbject,^nd the other a predicate nounoridjec-
<f^J/^'j?'' joii^ i/ie ^dut brothers: Aeduo. fr&tr6. appellat:
r?Lt /'^^ **^^ ^"™ oermrem faolant- They cW thes6
^Jhe^r leaders : Ho, duofe. drngnnt .Ibl. They consider this a
^« Kn-flT^^' .^? proprlntn vlctutl. «I.tlmant. Ip the pas-
^L ?!? "IS''^*?^^ *"^ predicate become nominative ; as, ^Z-
tRWA fwh l^„*'\,- "^^l ^*^"f ^. <«acAtngr and coneedling may
£a .r^r"^''^^' ***^ r* ^'^ ^^« ?«""» •^"d ^« other of the
thmg, as, tasar demands com of the jEdni: Caijwr Aednd.
■^»3trr 1? '!' * % {'"^"^i ^^ »^y o p i i^ ivn / i Z him. E um
^,W ml^ ?' J'' *'h^ ^'""^ °"^ accusative, usually of th«
thing, may be retained. All these verbs, however, ikay take a pre-
^
<^
m
^BIHiRT LATIN SOQK.
/ r
J
4
\\\'
positional phrase in place of dne of the aoouaatives, as jpe^, J^tiZd'
and qtuierd regularly do. . ^^
vii. In poetry, the passive of verba of dd^hmg^ as also the perfect '
participle passive- of some other verbs, is used, with a reflexive or
* middle' force, and takes a direct object ; as, Galeam indnitur :
He pids on (Mmaelf) the helmet. ■ If ddd slnaa oolieota : Having
the folds gathered m a knot, . , ' i\
70.j|The apcusative is used with the f ollowiiig pbepositionb : '
ad, to; adversas, adveriiam, agcUnst; ante, before; apnd, near^
ap^ f4Foht olrojun, a/ro%md; olrelter, ahout; oli, olilfr&, on this sidi of;
contra, oppoeitf to^ against; erg&, towa,rda; «xtrift, outside ; intrSi^
b^PfU}; inter, betweep,, among; IntrA, toithin; Juzt&, near; ob, on
account of; penes, in the power of; per, through ; pone, post,
hehindf after; praeter, past; prope, near; propter, on Oiccount
cf; seonndam, after, following; ■np]r&, above; trans, ocrow;
ultra, beyond; versus, towa/rda.
The accusative is also used with In, into or in, and sub, under,
when they express motion towar48, and usually with subter, beneath
and super, a^ove. These four also ta]f:e the ablative (section 108).
i. The adverbs propius and proximi, jtridiS Skud postr^ldig, and
the adjectives propior and proxim/us sometimes take t^e accusative.
71. The SuBJKOT of the Infinitive (except the historical
infinitive, section 112) is put in the acdusative ; as.
He ansxoered that Ocesar vm doing vmmg : Bespondlt Caesarein
Injurium faoere.
It is dangerous for the Qehnant to cross the Bhine : Germftnos
BbAnnm tr&nsire est perIoul6tum.
72. OooNATB AoousATiVK. — Intnnsitive verbs often take an
accusative to define more clearlv their meaning. Thii^s either a
subeta^tive (generally modified by an adjective) of kindred jneaning
fi^d often t>f kindred derivation, or more' frequently a neutes pro-
^Qun or adjective used substantively ; as,
WeshoM live a safer life : TatlArem vltam vIvAmns.
He makes tdmost the same mistakes : Badem ferft peooal^
Tlua is the origin of the a4verbial use of mvitum, n^t/U, ^piid,
et^. ; as, He has very great power : Plikrlmnm potest. |v
i There^«re also a few isolated phrases used adverlnally, which
' wtfn6ot i ed with-tha cognate a ocuBative,jauch a s mdximam
:»'
PABT v.— SYKTAX AND COMPOSmON., 32p
G "kfSS::''th":4^:^™^f ««-In poetry. Urgel, though
body affecte5?MTS^r«"^'? ''*?,""* *» t«^ »« 'he
intettobn'^r^lr ^" "frl" E«'""™»». with or without »
^-''r^^-' EXERCISE 11. ■ ■'^l '^''^■■■-^"- :-:■■''■
« S If 7.7 . *'"'"'8 *" *« «PProiwh of the Romans
d«tr.ot8 4. m.e ships were cairied down towards the lower nT
of the i8]»nd,.which is nearer the west B Ti.^ tTZ ?• r, ■
•on this side the Rhine have be': Zde Wb^ t H^' ''"?
8 R.f « ^ T '^'«ken, if they hope for aid from the Romans
they concealed everything fr^m^^' in ^™*°' '':'""*"''
comrades had been^put tTZhr^v i^" ^^'T' ""' *''"''
withdrew into the to™ " 11 OnV 5 ^Tf "' ""^"^ »°*
made no answer 12 F„,7m^ "* '^*' "•"' "P"»'»"' 'W
the Gal mZ; ^"'^*''^ """^ "^^' '"' '«'' not trust
• ^- (ffannibal, 9, 10.) \ ' '
1. They said he had entrusted att the gold to the Cretans 2
^n9 pretends to fill the earthen vessel with live sernentfl 4.
» — .: h^ 1 ■ •.
1. Hence thU i. often called the Greek aocuntiTt.
330
PRIMARY^ LATIN BOOK.
formed another plan. 8. He regards it sufficient for all the others •
to attack ,the king alone. 9. After the other nations have been won
over, we shall easily deceive the Carthaginians, with Hannibal's
knowledge / - • ,
' ' G. (C<Bsar, Bk. IV. IS.) , ^
1. He was of the opinion that the Gauls, after accepting thes^
. terms, would not make war. 2. Before th6 recent battle he had
ordered the forces to be increased. 3. He was glad thajb they had
attained very great prestige among the ^auls, 4. On account of the
treiichery of the enemy, he did not wait at all for the leading men. ,
6. After the battle was begun, he thought it was the height of folly
for the cavalry to return into the camp. 6. Ccesar believed that
th(^ Gauls had treacherously taken the bflfensive in the battle the
day before. 7. He perceived ht>w much power they had. 8. AH*
the troops, a^ter foUowing up the enemy, were l6d across the river.
9. Although he had not been made quceetor, he considered this cit-y^
«umstance inost opportune.
/
V .
^
m-.-
\ ■ ■ 1
PART V.~STNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
SSI
CHAPTER XII.
Uses op the Dative.
I,
expressed by a verb or ^Se Th?l ''^Tu' '^^^^«' *>' <1"»1%
express (1) the indirJc?^hi^r'(2)^trr^^ ***^. "*^ '^'' ^
purpose served. Thedativ^^^Agi^^r^Iirr^^n^^JS^i^^^^^
W^ thing indir^I, afi.cted,l put
.tJ^tive vtrtal'TiT) "^tt't^l.r"' '^^ ." f»»-» W with in-
direct object." ^' * '«««">™ verbs in oonneotion with »
whfcl, the feeling'or ZSiSTd^d ?'5^'"«' *-' O»»""» th.t to .
^ l^ friendly to he BelvetmmTiiwita. ., . .
Such adiectives aro fh«oz» *«, • "®*^®»"« «'at amlons.
jver «imit „tker const^li^S^". P^tiJTS' ""-^
««^e aocusafve. The <Utive «'sl^Lli'^T^I^^J^ ^'^l
>.f «IS;? ^h^^^^JeK'^ttld™*^
» m form indi8t&.gSsh.ble fromTheTrMt "L 5?, ™ T* "fei?^
w^tK the indirect obS^ZSL^n^ ^'?- "'"■«iti™ verb
with «,e direct objecr' (Sel^tt'^iTlf "«'""• '""""^™ '«''
1 - Thin divirion fat
^ J i lVC! o 'h!" ' f /''"^""^.^^t i« convenient for pm,tk ml punK>H..
Pl«l,?E|„'2^*;.^i««» <" «ou- become, toe «iy«ct 1« the S^M^^Z^uilr^
332
PBIMART LATIN BOOK.
^ in determining the case of the Latin noun. Three diflFerent con-
structions are found, for the use of which no invariable rules
can be given; the student must depend upon observation and
authority.
(a) The compound is sometimes followed by the same case as
the preposition would take. (For the accusative see section 69,
iii. and iv.; for the ablative, section 93.)
(6) More often (and especially in the literal local sense) the pre-
fixed preposition is repeated with the noun; as, They sally out fi-om
the camp: Ex oastrls c^rampunt. He came up to the camp: Ad
«astra aooegslt. He converses with him: Cum ed oolloqaltar.
2^ey p\d everything into the fire : Omnia lu Igrnem Infernnt.
_ (c) But very often also, in ^lace of the preposition and noun,
Xatin has the dative (to which in the case of transitive compounds
may be added an accusative of the direct object). This dative
means literally vnth reference to^ as^
He comes beneath the roof: Tecto aaceedit (literally, He com^
beneath, tvith reference to the roof).
He puts friendship before everything: Amiolttam omnibus
rebus anteponft (literally, He ptits friendship in front, with
reference to everything).
This usage is especially common with compounds of ad, ante,
con-, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub, super ; generally where the com-
pound is not used in a literal sense ; as, EquitatuI praeerat ;*
He commanded the cavalry (more literally. He was at the head
of the cavalry). He inured the soldiers with hope: Spem in- J
tulit mllitibns (more literally, He ptit hope intb the soldiers). *>,
vi. A few verbs, such as ddnd and circuntdd, admit a double con-
struction : (1) dative and accusative, (2) accusative and ablative ;
as, He presented the plunder to the soldiers: Praiedam mllitibns
ddnavit. They presented him tvith the citizefimip : Enm olvt-
tAto ddn&vernnt. |
vii. In the poets the dative of indi^ject object is extended to
include the idea of niotion towards' (see section^ 125), and is also
used with verbs of nearness, union, difference and contention.
79. The Dative ois' lNTEREST\|enotes the person or thing
concerned (especially benefited or haiimed). It is really iden-
tical with the dative of the indirect objbct, but the connection
is looser ajki the dative complement not so essential to the
verb; as, \
__ ____ k, ___ : ^ _^^
1. In no case should this dative be regarded as depending on the prispositioa, but
rather on the whole verb. « -
2. Most of the compounds of sum are used in a similar wa^ ^
8. This, some grammarians contend, was the original force of the dkUra.
rent con-
t)le rules
:ion and
» case as
;tion 69,
the pre-
outfrom
mp: Ad
»q altar.
»rant.
id noun,
npounds
s dative
^e comes
mnlbas
%tt with
d, ante^
he com-
teerat ;'
he head
em in- J
iiers). '>,
ble con-
blative ;
nitiban
n olvt-
aded to
[ is also
tion.
T thing
ly iden-
aectioh
to the
;-
^UoQ, but
sentence as a
rather than
4
PART V.^STNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 883
■ I^fwiaAfhUM mj^/.- N«,« „,„ k„, „„„. ,
!•*«%.■ MlIU llbertatem *^ta^;.^ "" talung Jnm me my
wh^oL^'d^ir;- ^' «"«^^NOi!;, modifying the a
fiplrs. -optriM. Oppldnm prlmnm Tenlentlku» »b
•Mwers to the EieUsS^ S^""!? °' «""«"n. «"d often
^^i^^^^^^^^^^^^ With
EI a m? ^.re„,L «i™;i.r ' "' ^^ """* «^ '^^ '^«'•"«*«--
deSte'^tSe^'p^n il^tT^^'o^Jlilf^rVi'' Jf^rr- '»
We m.«Ai«i,: D*mon.tr.nt ."l^u'.^e.^^ '"^"
_ 81 Se Dativk of Purpose is a predicative dative, denot-
mg the purpose served (that which aomething tenda or is
1: *•»•, moulng („ Ajfew < I, expr««Kl b, pro with the .blMlve.
834
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
intended to be), and is fEsuallj^vaccompanied by another dative
of the person interested ; as,
It was a great hindrance to the Gauls: Oallls magno erat
Impedlmentd.
Whey were coming to the aid of the Nervii : Aazlll5~ Nervila
Teniebant.
He leaves Jive cohorta for i^e defence of the camp : Qjainque oo*
liortda oastria praesidio rellnqnlt. ^ ^ •
L This dative is especially common With the verb sum (after
which it has almost the force of the ordinary predicate noun),
and is found also with /15, venidy mittd^ relinqud, do. The nouns
so used are generally of a semi-abstract nature, and are always in
the singular, some of the commonest being aitxilio, praesidio, sfiib-
Mdidy usutf impedimentdy curae, saluti, odid. .^ /
EXERCISE 12.<' / V
-. 'A : ; . - ,\. ■ ,.;-
'I- A. . ■•-:■
1. He consulted the welfare of the troops whom Labienus com-
manded. 2v He said all these matters would be an object of
concern to him. 3. It is well known to all that the departure of
the Belgians was like a rout. 4. The soldiers told Labienus that
Offisar had always shown special indulgence to this legion. 5. Woxd
-was brought to the lieutenant that the general had left two cohorts
as a protection to the ships. „ 6. They said iiHt^ preferred
death to slavery and that they would oppose thetav^F^ to the
enemy. 7. He found that traders have no access tof^a^l^fibes.
8. He asked what Caesar meant, and why he.had demah4i|i, of
them such a great number of hostages.' 9. To these envoys C^e^r
made answer that he could have no friendship with the Germans.
10. A centurion, who had participated in many engagements, was
in command of>the troops. 11. He ordered (imperd) the soldiers
not to surround the camp with a trench nor to go to the assis-
tance of Labienus. 12. Perceiving that they had become suspected
in our eyes, they threw themselves at Caesat's feet.
» ' - . .'» . -■■.■-.■
B. {^annibai, ll-lS^) '
1. The fortress which had been bestowed on Hannibal as a gift,
they surrounded with armed men. 2. It has been handed down to
tradition that Hannib a l wos hittoriy hontil o to the Romans. 3.
*'
PART V—STOTAX AND COMPOSITION. 386
to the «ldie„ whl° /Zt" TZy^' ?"!!." ^ "^^ «^»
friendship between hi™ a J^„ib.f t*^,.*^,!,»'". ™
begun they all at once sought safety for it . **'>'"« ^^^
The senators consider^ tl^t ^m" Z^T m f"'- *'
sources»! safety t^^jfceniT «rat^^ wouM»lirays bea
1 iT.«-i J|^P%^' ■**• ^"^ ^^^) ". ■ ■
I. Hastily seiab3|ffioii^-™o ^\ A " '
resisted our oa,.a%^CT3!L 'f ^»™»™ 'of a *hgrt time
women and «huZ^ d^fend^tl "" T"' ^* ^™ «>»
is better for tte Ger.L«^^ c^t^ RV '*"'!.'"" '"^<'- ^' » ^
0>™«^«o„menrt^b^S^^f*' *•?«»" ™*™<*^
dismay, the women began to ^^™ -? ^ ^""^' ""P- «• »"
%ht of the Genians 6 He J »^o.t.on to our troop. ^ the
neither arl noT^.^ °l l^ZT, ^ «^™"» "«i
pn.vedthesafety„fth?^^ry rinTf ^" ''""'''' W"-»'
rtore quiridy, the ca^aT™^ Jw f 1'1*° P™"' *« "«"y '
findsoutwhattheenemvI~T*^T •^*;'*'""- »• H C»sar
«inforcements'l^S^^trten^ "'" '*'°' »" '^' «'"^ «-
• ■/■■]
i#
MlilARY LATIN BOo£' '
(
CHAPTER XIII. .
tTsEs OF THE Genitive.
82. The. Genitive case is used for the more exact limiting of
nouns, and has thus an adjectival force. It is also used to lunit
certain adjectives, and (by analogy) t© complete certain verbs."
The genitive is regularly translated (a) by the English possessive
case, (6) -by means of the preposition of, or (c) by means of the
I j * phrase CM regrarcb, or some equivalent preposition.
83. The PossiissiVB Genitive is used with a noun to denote'
i tiieowner^as, ""> > * .v
«^ I* Thelandsof the Helvetian»: tteivetl6rnin agrt» • „
jv i. The possessive genitive may ba used in the predicate with
«Mm, fid, etc.; as, Ckvul does not belong to the Eoman people:
Neqae OfUIia est popnll RomanL
^ ii. This predicative use is often found denoting the person whose •
j property, duty, or custom the subject is, especially when the sub-
1 ject is an infinitive or a clause ; as, It is the part (orduty) of a wise
man to obey the laws : jSlaplentIa e^t leslbna p»r«re. So Saplen-
• ' **"* «■* • -ft *« a mark of wisdom. But instead of the genitive of
, the personal pronouns the neuter possessivfts are used; as, It'i»
iJ my duty (oT my woAf) : M^nm e»t.
iii. The word on which the genitive depends is frequently
omitted, regularly so il it has been used previously in the sen-
tence ; aG(, Me had been in the amiyofSidla, and afterwards.An that
o/ OroMU»; In ex4^roltuSaIlae et posted In OrassI faerat;
84. The Subjective Genitive is used with nouns express-
ing action or feeling, to denote tlje person who kcts of feels ;
TheflightoftheOnidsf^ngtkQMlbrnm. -
Ckuar's anxiety : BolUeltuiHt Ctu>»arl: ♦ ' .r
i. Jn all such cases, if the action or feeling were expressed by A
verb, the noun in the genitive would be its subject ; «k, The C^avl»
.^; OaIIIfdqr«rnnt. \
86. The Objective Genitive is used with nouns denoting
actjon or felling, to denote that to which the action orieel-
ing is directed^ aj^ ---~-^- -^-,-_^ ■ ^ ^
The d%ming of We cytp; BatpngnAtl6 oa«tr6rnm.
Th»fm/r of death: n^tns mort^ • ' ^
m to denote '
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 887
i. In such oases, if the action or feelin» were eTnrA«m<i u-
verb, the noun in the genitive would l^fte^obl^ •"^'S^^
t?Ui camp: Bzpfi^nant oastra. ^ ' ' ^^ *'*'*^
li. This construction is often used when f.hnw» w»»u ui
corresponding Utin verb with the «SaTti™ bu^^h^tt^S
expect a ditive or ablative or prepositional nhrM^'^drin^S
c«»s It wiU constantly be foj that thfSr&ei.Sie^fta^
phrase contaming some other prepo«tion thZo/bX^S^t «J
fi,i"«o *^® Objective and the subjective genitive may modify
i>eopte . Helvetlorum InJ&riae popall Bdm&nl.
y IV. Prepositional phrases* and possessive pronominal adieotives
86. The Partitivb Genitive is used to denote the whole
of which a part is taken.
The genitive is used with nouns/pronouns, numerals VesDeciallv
. ordinals and mUlia), adiectives (espTciaUy compaSs H^
latives), and occasionally with a few ad verbs ; ^^"'^^ *"** ^^P®'"
-^w^ of the soldiers: Par» mUItmu.
Which of yoii? 4ai8 vestrnm ? '>• , v * "'
wtt ^-^ *^ states: Daae olvlt&tam. ^ V f • N
Th€ bravest of aU these : Horum omniam fortUrtmL
i. The partitive genitive often depends on neuter pronouns or
adjectives used substantively (but only in the nominStiveT the
accusative without a preposition) ; e.g., nihU, tantum, ^^ntZ,
J^^, rmnus, qu^, W, aliquid, id, fcJc, and also the adverbs S
S ^ni^SZr "^ «">t»ntively. In most of these cases the English
FrZlin» ^*^"*;- ^^ ''^*'^ ^-^ "^^ "^ ^cmM:
latum: Hoc .oi^ptl. ^^ um< protection: Satl. pr.Jl«i/
388
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
M
ii. In other cases an adjective used substantively reeularly
agrees m gender with the partitive genitive depending on it : as
-Ma»M/ o^ </w ships : Mnltae navinm.
iii. With adjectives and pronouns the partitive idea is often
expressed by prepositions, chiefly ex or de, but also inter, ante,
(^pud and tn. EspeciaUy is this the tiim with unm, pauci and
quMam; as, One of his sons: vnus « fliiia. 'A few of (Aurmm-
Panel dd noatrls.
iv. The partitive genitive should not be used in the foUowinc
cases : °
(a) When, though English uses o/, not a part but the whole is
taken ; as. To aU of m.- Omnibas ndbl». Three hundred of w
V have conspired: Treoentl oonjuf&vlmaa.
(b) To denote the whole, the remainder, or any local part of any-
tmng, as the top. middle, bottom, beginning. Here Latin idiom
plrefers an adjective in agrieeraent, which regularly precedes the
substantive ; as, The who^ of Oavl : Tdta CJiaiia. I%e rest of the.
V strv^: Bellquiim oert&men. Th^ top of the hill: Sammn.
oollU. The mtddle of. the river: Medium flamen. At the be-
gtnnvngi o/'apnngr .P^imd v6re.
87. the Genitive of Cha6acteriStio» is used to ^enot^
some character or quality of the substantive modified, includ-
ing vidue, mjBasure, time, etc.; as,
A man of great prtidsnce :Vlr oonsiUi mftgnl,^
, «tone» of great weight: M&gnl ponderls saxa. «
,4 /«w> days' march: Paaodrnm dl«ram Iter. ' * - -
/■ tA six-foot wall: Murns «ex pednm. '
? i- There Viust be someadjectival modifier of this genitive; eg
A nian of bravery is not vlr fortltudlnl*, but vlr fortU. *
11. The modifiers most commonly used are numerals and such
adjectives as mdgnm, maximm, parvus, tantvs, summus, pawM.
1 lie genitive of characteristic should not be used with pdr, inmilis,
dtmrnUu, aeqwis, m with pronouns except in such phrases as
nu^usmodi, ijicamodl.
^m.'^j genitive of characteristic may be used M a predicate ;
as. The depth of the river was three feet : Fiuqpinls erat altltddd
trlum pedam. v
^^\F^^ **** relation to the ablative of characteristic see section
1,^00, lii.
■--,-■ ...■■.'■.,"•,.. ■ ■ , • ■ *
S8. The QiNinvr or pBrfftt denotes the value, but only in
getMtel, not definite, terms ; as. His ir\fluence wxw valued highly •
AaotdrttA* iiJa* mAsnl hab«bAtar. tf. ^^ *'
J» M^i oHM tta OMlUrt of OtmHfHon or Oeoitive of Quolttv
IB»
.^■'
f
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
33^
.i».f
■^Zt^^^^^^r- """^ ""* '^'"* "" '»™d only tern, .•
m. j< or the ablative of price see section 100.
B4ni», not Urb. ifemiw!' ' *" ^ "''" "/-Bo"" « Crb.
■ «ouL^*' ^r'T» T™ ^^"^""«-MMy adjective,
_re3uire a gemtave -(usually objective) to complete their mean-
iDg ; as,.
|W« of tonfid^'n^: Plduelaa pl6nwi^; *-^
^er for power : Cupldu. Imperil.
AA;t/fed tn tmr.^orlt«8 belli.
Unaccustomed to toi^^ In.ufttas labork '
.■JAS'SSiT"'"" '«"'•-'■"•■w.i»....
^(o) For verb, of p.Vn!7, m«mi,W„y „d /«^eKin, see sectioi
' cai^il".^n°d. "™''^'"* •°"""""' ^''« ">»■««"«'« of the thing
him of trtamm • Hn« ««^.*. -^f onarged , as, Fou ar« acciwna
(tQ Tliw • — ^ — "
j&*
Po^xUllnrnrrf'i,''''!?' **' emotion, m^f**, «,«f«t, w^
IwenO.* and taedet take the accusative of the peio? who ^'
840
ERIMARY LATIN BOOK.
^
and the genitive of that whicli causes the,Jfeeling;* iw, I am
«M^wie^ o^my/oWy: Me «toltltliMi pudot..
{^) ¥t>T the genitive, with interest &nd refert see section ^3, bj*
(/') Tbe genitive as sometimes found with verbs of j^nty and
«*tnt; with potior (see section 55, iii.), and in poetry (after the
analogy of the Greek) with verbs denoting separaiion.
r^ - EXERCISE la/
A.
V
, 1. He said that this circumstance had dispelled all 'doubt as to
the arrival Qf the legfons. 2. He was a man of consummate ability,
and had ve^ great experience in military aflEaii». 3. He believed
that the soldiers of Ariovistus were wholly inexperienced in this
mode of fighting. 4. In the middle of this^-course is the islalid
of Mona. 5. Hd reminds the soldiew of their old disaster, and
urges thenfbot to forget the valor of the enemy. 6. He distributed
three months' provisions of ground qorn among the soldiers. 7. It
is a consul's duty to be of service to the rest of^ the citizens. 8.
The top of the hill was held by a few of our men. 9. Your
influence is of great value, your friendship is of greater. 10. He
was aipquitted of treachery, but found guilty of carelessness. 11.'
The/compelled the -^Edui to give them part of their land and to
^ undertake to form no project against the Sequani, 12. He says
he is ashamed of his ti^aphery, and sorry for haijring attempted
to revolt. '
/^ B. (Thtmiatodea, Ariatidest ManrUhai.)
*1. They built a fleet of two hundred ships, of which one hun-
dred were the Spartans'. 2. He asked how much money had been
given by the states/ 3. He was a man of such integrity that he
alone, within the memory of man, was called the Just. 4. They
are incited by the hope of victory and by confidence in Hannibal.
6. Being accused of treason, he was punished with three years'
exile. 6. The result was that they became skilled in naval warfare.
7. He gave instructions to the rest of the ambassadors to set out
with these. 8. Thucydides, w ho was the nearest of those who have
1 ThM« TerlNi («xoeptmiwret) tometimM h»ve instMd of the nhitive wi inflniUv*
or ■utwtMtlye oUuw m ■ubjeot, or » iwufr pronoun In tha « mn»»^ «, v«.«^»i„. ■ ..
i mm wny fvr Aun w g tto ne thu : W haw rtietWl^piiinn
;«".*.'
. ,; PART V.-STNTAX -A^ COMPOSmON. 8«
' l^lf Pf t^ '™"''' "^ "»» '«^Wed f» this State. 9
■■-■'■ ■ V ■ " , '^ . - ■ '
1 T1, V, , ^- (Oosmr, M. ir. 15.)
with ^:?Thu'„^°~:Lz:rr ' '^-^^^
jivei*' Q q^ ,««.o^ It wicnarew to the confluence of the
•' ■-^^■:-/
•m ■•■
KAK
m
t ,'.
^.::-.4;.-;--:2ps-
"■» ., ';■"-."
#
hi
'a
Cn
I
PBim^Y LATIN BOOK.
OHijAlPTER XIV.
rSBsBF THE AbLATIV:
«ircumsk^oes attending uriL sZe^ffiLn V '^*^»* *^e
^i|s ojigirrepr^senting thr^^ «poBite Jn
^*e, meaning in or oT^I!^^™^ ""
, s
tteparation is opmmonly expressed bH the ablafi™
^ ^ & «bl.tiy.l'lsee .«tZ tIaT) """"«»' »P"P<»i«o„ with
'■■ !'"•??• y™ "«B'.AbIATITI of TBI Puo« «BOK WBlim -^tl, .
^ wjthQut prepMitions, see uotibn 126. ™' ■ > "'
fi;^* TbB Ablative op Source tells that from whiejh some-
A^ A. preposition is ^MBiilarlv used (a\ in »h^ .«^u B^. ,
(6).with pronouns, anM to Senote remote oriSMF^^ ^"'^^
11. Here belongs ^^pblative donotina theHKR U# i,- u
^^f "^8 » «««ie; wiTthi. ablati^i li%^5Ky u-^ t
■-■?
*
I^ART V.^YNTAX AND COMPOSITION?.
343
5^. The ABLATIVE OP Causb^ is used to denote the motive
from which some act proceeds, more i^arely the cikuse of somer
In that hope he sought our friendship.: Amioitlam e& spfi
pettvlt. ■ • \
. .' ' ' ♦ \ ' ' ' " 'i
. il" In place of this ahlatite we find more f Fluently prepositional;
phrases with ea, de, 06, per^ propter ^ jwoe, the genitive with cmtSa
or gratidy or, especially to indicate the moving cause, an ablfitive
of means with a participle such as adductm, permdtus.
97. The Personal Agent with passive verbs is denoted by
' the ablative with a or «6 ; as,
Their lands are lq,id waste hy the enemy: AgrI eoram ab
hoBtibng vasta^ntar.
i. For the dative of apparent igent see section 80, d.
ii. For the so-called secondary agent with per i?ee section 99, i.
^8. The Ablative qf Comparison (trg,nslated by means of
ih(m)\B used aftet» comparatives to denote that -with which
something is compared j as,
The tfhii are more GivUized than the rest: Ubll oeterb bu-
m&nidr6s sunt. ^ ■-,-.'.■■■'.' •%■■-■ ;
i. -This ablative is most often useid in negative sentences or their
equivalent, and is rarer after adverbs than after adjectives.
ii«. As a rule the ablative of comparison is used only when the
first of the Words compared is in the nominative or is a subject
accusative. But the ablative of the relative pronoun is (^Ften used
when the first of the words compared is an object accusative.
iii. In other cases, as well as often where the ablative mi^ht be
used, than is expressed by gttam, and-a noun or pronoun following
takes the case pf the word with which it is comp|tred ;* as, Ivela/nd
is smoUer than Britain : Hibernia minor est qnam Britannia.
iv. The comparatives flUs^ minusy Umgius and amjdius are regu-
larly used without quam, yet without affecting the case of the fol-
lowing word f as. Move than eight hundred ships had been seen:
Ampllaa o^tlngent^ n&v^a erant vlaae.
V. The ablative of comparison of some abstract words such as
opinio apd spe&Aa used in place of a comparative clause ; as, Sooner
than anyone expected; Celerlaa omnI opinldne.
1. T||ii«^e may also be^dassed under %he Instrumental Ablative.
2. Aa a g^eneral rule, unlike English idiom, the aame oomtrucUon whether of
M or o( verbf follows qruam as preoedaa j " "
e fw thmi Hjahe v t vpaiMw i u jo r wa r : p m tt fpi nf
pamrai. • " "
robstantives or of verbf' follows gttom aa preoeiiaa it ; aa. He taJd th»tf didnoikiiia
iiuOmv t v i niatwntjwwa r : p m tt fpi nim i a i tui t u»h HMW b^ l u wi
See abo aaoUon 98, Til. , ^ ' y
344
PRtMART LATIN BOOK.
»■■ :
■•1}
VI. Latin often omits the standard of comparison <e.g., 'than is
natwtal, than is lusuod, thorn is dedrcMe, than that just menti&ned)
when It is easily gathered from' the context. In such ea^s the
wmparative may generally be translated by unumally or too with
the positive. . ~
vh. When two qualities in the same object are compared with
each other, Latin has qmm with magft* and the positive, or with
the comparative in both clauses ; as, Ht. is mpre brave than ivise:
Magis forttrest qaam sapiens, or Fortlor est qnam saplentior.
So, too, with the adverbs. '
,5. Thk Instrumental and Comitative Ablative.
• 99. The Ablative op Means or Instrument is used to
denote that by means of which something is effected ; as,
It oaamot be determined by the eyes : Oonlls J udloarl ndn potest.
They live on flesh and are clad in skins : Carne Tlvant, pelll- '
basque snpt vestltl.
i A personal instrument is occasionally in the ablative, but is
more often expressed by per and the accusative ; as, He learns by
means of scotUs: ^Cdgnoaeit per expldratores.
ii. The. ablative -^means is used (a) to denote the route or
m^ns of conveyance><6) with utor, fnuyr, etc.; (c) with opus est
and Umis est; (d) with verbs oi filing and abounding and adjec-
tives of |72ent|/; r
- , 100. The Ablative op Price is used with verbs of buying,
selling, exchanging and costing ; as, ^ j^^
It was purchased for a small price: Parvo pretio redemptnm
est. '
They exchange wyr for agriculture : Bellnm a«rloiUtar& eom-
mutant. ; . .- - : .'
i. For the genitive of indefinite price see section 88. ■ i "
lOL The Ablative op Measure op Dipperence is used'
with comparatives and words implying comparison to denote
the amount by which two persons or things differ ; as, \
The oth^ road is much easier : Alteram Iter est malto fa^Ulas.
Irdand\s considered a half smaller than Britain: Hibernla
dimldlo minor qnam Britannia ezistlm&tur. " ■. v' ^
A few days after : Panels post dlebas. *
Three years before : Trlbas ante annls.
j» Thw ablative is used also in designations of distanoa. <; »., wi»,h
^^^^S31^m^X^hOTelBF^cui»iKve^^T^^^^^*^^^M4
345
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
T^fiilariy in the case of the words spdti/Hm and intervdllum; ap,
He halt» at a great distance : Magrnd latoniftH^ oonsistlt. '
^ii.' To this usage belong (o) qu^ . ,J. \^i_Mtquant6 . . . tank)
with Comparatives, as, The sooner the hetterT^wib oitins eo mellnb;
(6) qa6 and quominus with the subjunctive (sections 28, iii. aM
139) ; and (c) ed or ^c with a comparative. ' j
' 102. The Ablative of/ Specification is used to dei^oteiin
what respect a statement or term is to be taken as true ; ks,
They excel the rest of the Oavls in valor: Bellquds Oallda virt j^te
praeoMunt.
103., The Ablative of Manner and AccoMPANiHikNT jex-
presses manner or the attendant circumstances of an actidn ;
«, , . ' : .- -■--:^-v->--v:; :...'- 4 : , j ■
The news is carried with incredible speed: Inor6dib|lI oelerl<kte
f Ama perfertnr. 1
They began to mount the rampart with loud sfiouts: M&xim5
«lamdre vallam asoendere ooepernnt.
i. As a rule the ablative of manner and accompanimi^ requjires
the preposition mm when not mollified by an adjectivPor a geni-
tive, and even when so modified it often has ctim; as, He '^^Lto
death with torture: Cum ornoiAtu necatnr. ,JIe did this wfl^he
greatest care: SammA (onm) dUlgrentia hoc f§elt. SomeSbla-
tives, however («.gr., vi, jure, cdsa)y never take cttm, being usedj vir-
tually as adverbs. -. 1 ,
ii. Literal accompaniment is always expressed by cum- andl the
ablative ; except that in certain military phrases (chiefly of! the
troops with which a march is made) cum may be omitted if; the
ablative has a modifier; as, They hastened tcith all their fotws:
(jCnm) omnibiis o&plla oontend§raiit. 1
iii. The ablative of manner denotes that in a^xardanee with imich
something is done ; as. He did this in accordance t^^MB9|r> in-
Structions : Prsteeeptu Caenari» tide tielt. ^ %^il^^ j
■ ' ~- I
104. For the Ablative Absolute, which is perhaps locativja in
origin, but which in use resembles the ablative * of aooompanin^ent
in expressing the .attendant circumstances of an action, see Oliap-
ter Yll.
e Ablative of Oharagtbristic' is used todeiliote
aracter or quality of the houn or pronoun modified ; as,
1. This lut usatre is, however, oomplioated with the abUtive of oauf^, eeptdiallr
b e fore -gwxt clau— ■■ — ^ ^ J^^ =^
Wf^ called the AbUttre of DmripHm or AUatirfl of QualUg.
%4,
i
846
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
'-I
A y<ymg mm. of great valor ; Ma^rna vlrtate adnlfiioeii*.
i. This ablative "MsH^Hlot only attributively but also in
(literally, Th^y arfm^^^^th long hair).
«•7*^- wi^ ^^® ^T^ '® genitive of characteristic (see section
••• '''Tiru .!?^^® ®®'^® adjectival modifier of thia ablative.
m. When *he description refers to number the gelitive of char-
acteristic should be used To deno te phjusi cal characteristics or
e^<W appearand the ablative «^^^ other descrip-
tions.eitb|f case may be used, wiirSpfefetence f?r thfe genitive to
expresB permanent pr inherent qualitie^^ '
'*
C. The Locative Ablative.'
::«k
the Ablative OF the Place where see section 127.
ij Ablative of K»e when or within mtoch see sections
,. 107:*The ablative is used with many special verbs ai^d adjec-
tives, really banging to the classes already mentioned but not
always easy «to <aassify.
i. Forthe ablative with utor, frvSr, fungor, potior, W5«A.and
V With verbs of lacking^ see section 54. ^^
-?• ^^® *^^**^^^ ^* "^^^ ^^*^^ glori^r, laetor, gauded; ftdd, c^indd;
ntt(m^mssfU£sc6y1^mefaici6. j y j *
iii.j The ablative i« used with %nt«, indignus ; contentus, laetiis :
tretii^.
• 108. The ablative is used i^^e following prepo8i*ions : ^
A, ab (ab«), /rom, by; a^Mue, Wiihout; ol^am, in the presence
Wn^"' "^ ' *^' fe #«*^%/ e, f>x, hit of from ; prue, -
before %n companson^mh, manse of; pro, bef<m, in pCace of, in
accordance with ; alufy' ivithout ; tennu, as far as, ,
^hftt^^t"^ '^ ^^^ ""M^^^ ^**.' ^SJ'"^ •Pl».^'^*-, expressing
the pl^ where, and serines with ^UKtMith^iindunpe^
above, concerning, f heserioiir also tak^ the ^eeusative ^tioifVO)/
.||X^11C||E^
4 'it' ■ '
1. %e|%engthene^tHe plac^thlFrall, and filled the trench
^K water. 2. ^e was a man of 'the highest merfib.and worthy of
praise ; relyipg on the friendship of the ^mans he had col-
lefted all his retainers, two hundred in numW. 3. If they had
been able to keep pur men > from supplies; they would have cut
them off frfun rfttuming^. 4. Thoy all a t »iu themselves with woitd,
m
:/■
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
847
and thus are of more frightful appearance in battle. 6. In order
that the soldiers, influenced by the hope of plunder, might not
wander too extensively, he did not suffer them to go farther than
usual from the camp. 6. He was informed by scouts that the
enemy had encamped at the foot of a mountain two days brfore.
7. If they are of an unfriendly disposition, they will be incensed at
this grievance. 8. With such swiftness and vehemence did our
soldiers advance that more than six hundred of the e^emy were
slain. 9. Advancing with the charioteers, whom they are accus>
tomed to use in all their battled, they prevent our men frqm land-
ing from the ship. 10. In accordance with their custom, they were
boasting insultingly ^ then: victory. 11. Whether, by chance or
design they had been led out of thftcamp without bag^^. 12.
The Helvetians were much braver than the rest of the Gauls.
■B. {TJiemistocles, Aristt&es, ffannibcU.) ^ ''
1. In the same manner he defeated Antiofchus t^oygars later by
strategy. 2. He was informed by letter that the Greeks would
cut him off from returning. 3. If the harbor is surrounded with
walls, it wJAl surpass the city in usefulness. 4. It happened by
chance that the master of the horse was of equal authority. 5.
Terrified by this strange circuihstance they took poison of their
|ttta accord. 6. More than two hundred cities were taken by force.
tWh Accordance with the common law of nations, he was banished
from his country. 8. Through the instrumentality of Sosilus, whom
he employed as teacher, he became versed in Greek literature.
O. {Ccemr, Bh. IV. 16.) |p|^^
1. For these reasons after the hostages w^i|pfln up, he took
his army across the Rhine by means of boats. $^ The Suebi pressed
them harder th^n did the Usipetes. 3. Impelled by this hope
tb^y gave up less than thirty hostages to Caesar. 4. Against
Ceaaar's will they had returned to join the Germans. 5. Cajsar
many years before had been presented from crossing by the press-
ure of public business. 6. Messengers have come concerning pub-
lic business from the nations which are under the sway of the
Roman people. 7. They are considered by''the other nations to
sengers thi^ they had been kept by the envoys from fleeing.
348
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
CHAPTER XV.
- ; - i ■ \ ' ,
Vbbbal Nouns— Infinitive, Gebund, Supihe. /
A. The Infinitive. ' ' ^
, 109. The Infinitive is a verbal noun. As a verb it is modified
by an adverb, not by an adjective ; it governs the same case as
other parts of the verb ; it has the distinction of tense, and it has
a subject. As a noun it is used as a subject or object of verbs
or as an appositive, and is always neuter.^ *
110. The Infinitive as Subject.— The infinitive, wither
without a subject accusative, may be used as the stihject of a
verb; as, ' ,, .
It M best to defend the camp : Oastra def^dere praestat.
It is not right for the Germans to crossover: Oermands tranglre
Hon aequnip est.'
It was reported that the cavalry was approaching: Ifunttatnm
«at eqaltea aooedere.
He shows that carrying out their plans is an easy matter: Per-
faolle «Tsse probat oonata perfloere.
i. This usage is found chiefly with (o) certain impersonal verbs,
e.g.y oportety licet, juvat, placet r (6) est and neuter adjectives,
such as aequum, turpe, utile, necesse ; (c) passive verbs sentiendi et
decldrandi.
ii. Except with passive verbs sentiendi et decldrandt, the tense of
the infinitive used is almost invariably the present, the perfect
' occurring but seldom, and the future never.
111. The Infinitive as Object.— The infinitive, with or without
a subject accusative, is used as the object of a verb ; as.
He says Coisar has come: DIolt Caesarem venlsse.
He wished to depart : Disoftdere volebat.
i. For the'accusative and infinitive construction see Chapter I.,
for the complementary infinitive, Chapter II. For the infinitive as
an appositiye see section 195.
112. The Historical Infinitive.— In lively description the
present infinitive, with its subject in the nominative case, is often
1. In the case of the historical infinitive, however, the infinitive has the value of a
verb, not of a noun.
8. Notige that neither Ihe IntrQductQcit ^ /hr n ft r t h e reprfti i «nt > tlv « f .ihj ^ w' t it Ir —
i"GiyaiUr separate word.
;
\ '.
(/
"^B
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
349
found instead ojF the impeiiect indicative; generally several suck
infinitives are found together ; as, ;
Casar every day kept dunning the ^dui ; ^y after day the JEdui
kept putting him off: Cotldle Caeswr Aednos fl&flrlt&re; diem
e:( die duoere Aedal.
; ' ' B, The Gerund.
11^ The Gerund is a verbal noun found only in the genitive,
dative, accusative and ablative singular. like the infinitive, it is
modified bj an adverb, and governs the same case as the other
_^ parts of the v&bw
_^^.In use the gerund cori-esponds pretty closely to the English
; imperfect gerund in -ingii but often also, especially with arf, it
may be translated by the English (gerundial) infimitive with <o.
" , ■ »
114. (a) The Gknitive of the gerund is used chiefly as an
objective genitive with nouns and adjectives, and with causa ; as,
Desirous of making war : Bellandl cnpldns. For the purpose of
foraging : Frumentandl oansa.
(6) The Dative of the gerund is rarely found, and is used chiefly
: with adjectives denoting fitness (for which ad and the accusative is
more common), and in some official phrases ; as, A wall sufficiently
high for defence: SatlaaltnutuenddmuTvi».
(c) The Accusative of the gerund is used only with prepositions,
chiefly ad and in; as, Beady to fight (or Beady for fighting) : Para-
tas ad dlmioandnm. -^
(d) The Ablative of the gerund is used to denote means and with
prepositions, chiefly in, ab, de 'axkA eau; a6, Occupied in reaping:
\ In metendo oooupatl. , -
i. The use of the gerund with an accusative object is, on the
whole, rare. See^apit^^ 119. r ' ; ^^..i— -
' ^ ■' -^:-' ^^ ^jp. Tee Supimb. •■■
115. The Supine is a verbal noun found only in the accusative
and ablative singular, in both cases with adverbial force. It is
.translated by the English infinitive with to.^ f
1. The supine in -umcorrMponiila to the English (fferundiai)
a» ; the supine in -u to the English infinitive with adjectives a
Teribs
infinite with to after
and nouns.
.1 ♦,
> ll*i
m
PRIMARY LATIN BOOKi
116. The AccusATivB supine, or supine in -ttm, is uspd to
denote pur^se, Ispecially after verbs of. motion, and if tmnsitiye
. may take an accusative object ; as,, . ,
' They send envoys to^ Cmsfir to ask aU: U^htbn ad Caewrem
mittnnt rog&tam aaxilium. ^ •» «m
i. The construction is not common in classical Latin, which ore-
fers to express purpose by the final subjunctive, or by the gerund '^
and^rundlve with adotcausd. It is 'used most fr^uentily wS
. «a-^d wma, and also in the phrase nuptum dare (or cdlocdr}) ' '
, a. The rore future infinitive passive is formed by means of fri
2'irl^ .T*'''! P^?;? ""} f "'^ impersonally) and this supinei
as He says th^ city will he taken : Dlolt urbem oaptum in ftter> •
iLf^'' "."^ ^^^^. t ^'J^ '^y^- Here url^^ni is reaUy theT
object of captmn; not the subject of cap*w» frf.
'^^^.ll^-'The Ablative SUPINE, or supine in -w, is used to define
the apphcation of certam adjectives andfof the noun* f^l^l -
'^,^' « ,v -. -/ . '^ ■
' '^^ i» difficult todo: B6e eat dlfflelle facta. *» '" ' '-^^ " -,
* , -pi^edible to narrate .f>>Inor«dibiIe dlctu. , " >
It is a sin to say so : Hdo nef&s est dicta.. •;• w r^
i. 'Hie adjectives so used are chiefly those meaning e<»«/, diffietUt,
^eamiU, strange, best. The supines so used are ch^y aS
dtctil, facta, visa, nata. « , ' «*i#«»i'»,
ii. The ablative supine does not take an accusative object
-'-■". ViT'T-;
/••
:' EXERCISE 16. , * V
•^ .^1. The Ueute4nfe brouglit word to Oajsar thai he had foundthe
ships ready fer saUing. 2. They saw that 9W men were not
advancing for the purpose of fighting. 3. After making a bridge
Cffisar at^Bjpted to cross the river and pursue the enemy. 4. H»
proves to them that it is a very easy thing to do, to seize the
supreme pbweV. 6. For quickness in loading, £he ships were made
lower. 6, If messengers hwl come to Oeesar to ask help, he ^ould
have sent three legions to their ^Issistance. ; 7. Answer wi^s' made
that it was better to be slain in WUe thtm not to recover theur
freedom. 8. By making enquily, CaDsar found that ^e rest of the
cavalry had been.thrown into a panic. 9. They hurjthei^ weaponi
4t the enemy and >|tive tham n«> ^ ' * ^
J^'
VJ. \
t
r^
u
:'%^
\
.viu<-:- i
« )t>■■i^
'•*»»".
Ik' "'''
V"
»
- '
•i....-_^
>^t)portnnity. of retiring.^ ^lOil Tlioy
'<■•
(/.
« 1
;|^s.-
,^.
**■:.
MBfid to
a:%nsidre
aesarem
hich pre-
) gerund '
iljly with ,
lre% *,
ne offrl
supine;
rlOiter-l;
«lly the V
d^ne
fd« and '
.J. -
.*»
.-. *
M''^
%.
PART V.-l-8yifT:AI ANP COMKBITIQN. ^ : S^^
thought the best thing to do was to cut off our men from supplies,"
and protract the affair into the winter. 11. He learned froin thl'
soldiers that ^h% ships weire useless for sailing, and althougli he was
ready to set^ut, he thought it would be extremely dangerais for
the soldiers to embark. 12. So fierce an onset did the enemy
make that there was no possibility tol keeping one's position oH the
W»ll. . •■ .■,■'. . ; ■■■'^.' .■ -^ ,:■.'■ V '.:- '
1. The leading men came to Caesar to seek peace and to comphim /
of the «discretion of the common people. 2/ It has been pointed /
out above that the eneiny had surrendered part .of the hostages. 4 ^
He pointed out what was there^on for disemliarking. 4. He had .'
brought to them CaBSalffe instrub^ioiis regarding returning tio their^
l^nds. , 5. They kept laying ^ihe blame on the common people, and ^
saying they would surrender the hostages at once, and commending
themselves to Oa^sar. '6. He said that the ships would be carried back
by the.storm to the mainland. 7. He ordered the soldiers to send
back the hostages when thiey were given ^p. 8. A d«%y was
appointed (dtc6) fot assembUng. 9, By setting o^ fey the x>pen '
M ~V '.sea they escaped (ejft^<5) a greater dMi^er. '' . *^ .
/"
V/
*:^
i
■0.
V^V^.
ind'the
)re ncMb
Ibridg^e
ize the '
e made"
t^ ifould
i made
r their
of the
oapons .
'\
*"*-y*
C. (Ccesar, BklV. 18\. - '^ :rf
^^1. CcBsar beganio get timber together aiyd Ijuildi ^ dge." 'i f v
m^i ' ;^»«*®TiU be left the Sugambri for withdrawing from their terri'- '
[\K tories, • 3. He will order a strong gui^rd to be left at the bridge. '
r 4. The envoys jinswered Caesar that the hostages vould be brought- ' '
5. Sevdr^l envoys came to Cajsar to seek peace and friendshiu.^.6.
He^answered that k was best {opH^fMis) for all to^jrepare fdflligtifc* ■ '
7. The ansHrer was given that the Sugambri had conceal^ them^
jSeWes in the forest. 8. The Usipetes answered that a.day had' .* '
I „ i;:^«^« fi»«l (dfc5)jfor leaving their territories. 9. It iir^iffioulft ^V
t . ^lAdiffi^ilu) to say.why !he artuy has-been led across the bridae.
i». v/^
:<
■ M
•%■
4-*
i
Tho>
it'.
p
A • < < •
J<
t '
}
I»
•a-
tr^.""-^
'Map"'"
»v
#-i»
»;-.--1^-.
&
''■,H
362
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK,
\ ■
CHAPTER XVI.
1. ^
v\^
Verbal Adjectiveis— Gerundivej Participles.
A. Thb Gerundivb.
118. The Gerundive (sometimes called th» future participle pas-
sive) is a verbal adjective of the first and second declensions,
and agrees with its substantive.
ii^ll9. The Gerundive Construction. — Instead of th^ ^et^
imd governing a direct object in the accusative, we oftenf
find the substantive put in the case required hy the context-
and the gertmdive in agreement with it. This is the regular
"usage after prepositions and in the dative case, and is p^fer-
able in t^e genitive and the ablative of means ; as, ^
He sets mt to harcu^ the enemy: Ad hoat|s vexandds profleii-
«Itur (in place of ttd vexandum lioBt««).
They lose time in seeking their coinrades: fn q«aeMiidli inlt
tempu» dlmlttunt (in place of In qu»«rend6 «uo»). J . ^
An opportunity is afforded of marching through UiAfT^onnee:
Paonlt&a d»tur per |>rdvlnolam Itinerls ftwslendl (in place of
Itfcr faolendl).
i. The various cases are used in the same way in the geru6div«i
construction as in the gerund. (See section 114.)
ii. The Rerundive construction cannot be used with intransitiv*
verbs; ab. For the purpose of resisting the enemy: Hoatibui real-
ptendi oaaa& (never Hoatlnin realstenddrnm oanaft). But «tor,
fnuyTf fangor and potior, which governed the accusative in old Latin,
4egularly take the gerundive construction.; aa^J'M Jw^ ^tqkiM'
the camp: Sp^a potlunddrum oaatrorum.
iii. -K the case of neuter pronouns and neuter adjectives used
substantively, the gerund with an object accusative is regular, even
after prepopitions ; as, For i/uB puijtose of doing something : Allquld,
rv. With mel, ^^\, ml, nostrl^^vestrl, the gerund or gerundive in
.ruft is used, without regard to eit^her gender or number; as, For
the purpose of cka/ring Ut^mselves (or herself) : Bnl p&f gandf oauaA.
1 If p^iraamH ii the gerund, mii may either \^ the pronoinfn»! wf JectJve modifylnf
theKru«l^ni«*l m » eubrtwitlve. or be the pronoun depending wan obJe<'tiva
the neuter •Tngular poeaeerive, twum- iMr (or A#r) ptnonaliiy.
. n
run*
i
■%^
/
M-
»i^
rendu IWit
PABT v.— SYNTAX ANp C6llH)sinOW. dIS
.. 120. The ^Passive I^briphrastio CoHjuQA-noir. — The
gerundive is used in th^ noxqinative and accusatAee as a
predicate adjective with sum, to denote duty or necesHty; as
^^^hinghad to be d^e hy Quart Oae«ri omnl* e««t
..l\ttL^ ^"^ '' --.c?: Statuit H,..nu^
Je s^tioXl^''kf J^i^?-^^"^^' *?^ *8ent being in the dative
jsee section 80, d). The Ei^ghsh equivalent is, however, constantlv
u. In this construction intransitive verbs are used imn«r«n«»iw
rsee sect on 56), the gerundive staking ThT^J^r^Tth^^rS
. Irom which It IS formed ;|a8,/2%ere m^t be no dTy N6„e.t
thtngs ought to be used.' ^» r*bu. utendttml.t .
Il 121. The accusative of the oerundive in iia<wi {«^.^li- ,ii
agreement with the object of cerSSTver'^ (chieSf v Z^^S'
amSJMn^, imdertoAtVu/ and coring /or) to express «^Z^. 21%
;«»« *,5' ^^f -^"^ ^^ transportation of the o^ Set
;.' .'^^-^''■- '\-"'''B. The Pa»tic|plis8. ' ■':-'y^ --y"^'' y ■'•.,;''.-
'♦i,f^^' -^T *'^^™?™******^*^"®«^*^e participle aiid the use <^
the i>re«!ne and i>p»/w* participles se^ChaptwVI^ «la me use of
.123. The future participle denotes an adSoii as about to hanoen
at a time s,,hse^mitto that of its .pmncipal verb. Its chief ^£^
,»te (a) to form with e^) the future infinitive active in the ^SJT
nh^^ """^^'"'l' construction, and (b) to form th^activrr^l
phmstic coniugation. It is but rarely used as an adiectivVri.
substantive (f^UHru^ being the chiei iitance) ; in^^^d i»?!
" ,.' .?■;■'. ■' '■.■'''•■■'■'; ■ ' y. '
124. Twi AxmvB Prri^rastio OoHjuoATioN. ^ TW
future participle is used as a predicate adjective with iUm
to express intention^ likelihood, or imminmce /as,
rw*ar«<ifcow«<o/^Ae; PuvnAtfirl «wtia. "*
-^ *^y^ ^^^ ^ /t(ftrf 6een on f/te fii^jnt qf
^<#
Jf^
854
V f
? .<
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE 16L
>:a
1. Ceesar is about to lead out his forces with the object of
crashing the enemy. 2. He answered that the soldiers must not
waste the time for fighting in searching^ for their comrades. 3. He
caused two bridge^ to be built for the puppose of following up th6
enemy. 4. All hope of gaining possession of the town has van-
ished. 5. The enemy was on the point of making an attack on
the cavalry. 0. He perceived that he would have to set out at
I'oiWft. 7. We should not let slip the oggortuuity of freeing
ourselves for evear. 8. He will give this legion to Lal^enus to lead
back. 9. They did not think that so large a number of hostages
should have been required. . XQ. They were assembling from all
sides to defend the camp. .^
' ' B. (Coesar, Book ir. 1S9-S1.) -i>
1. An opportunity had been given our men to bring in com. 2.
They were about to form a conspiracy for the purpose of renewing
the war. 3. He had caused com to be provided and timber Inrought
from Gaul. 4. Caesar had to cross over into Britain. 5. The ships
are useless for carrying back the legion. 6. We shall have to make
use of bronze for refMiiring this ship, 7. Com must be brought in
dirily. 8. The. Britons should have shut the Romans out froi^
supplies. 9. The legio;is are going to winter in Britain.
"■■..".•■ ■ i ., •' " ^ ■ ' • '
V ■■>■ ,-?.-^'v"-;:'V 0' t€cB$ar, Sk. ly. 19.) -■ . V:- *^ ■
. i. ^JUl ought to a^sejmble with a view to holding a'counoil. 2. lA*
discovered that they w6re going to bUm their towBS. 3. A lew
days were spent in achieving these objects. 4. He provided for
the construction of a bridge. 5. The Gemians shoulZniave brokm
down the bridge for the purpose of freeing themselves. 6. Think-
ing that the Bugambri would break down the bridge, theyintended
to Withdraw into Gaul. 7. The'crops must be cut doVn in,of<|er tHi
ftrike terror into th^ Germuis. 8,, Caesar had to l^ad his arml^:
agroos Tor the purpose, of- taking vengeance on the Gei^^oans. %
They had ieamcM fqr ^hat purjxme he wa« ;»biQut to build tl|li
«■ ■■■S-f/V,
4^.
«■ . •
3',\ J»
I •«■••^' >,
.1 ■'k
tl.
"^, *,
■'•■^
\
PART V»-H3YNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
fsi^
CHAPTER XVII. , J^ '
Expressions of Place anA Time. '
f > 125. PLAiDB TO WHICH (limit of motion) is denoted by the
Accusative with ad or tn, except that with names of towns
And small islands, and with cfowwm, rfomo* (Aome), and rite («a -
„ ^ the country), the preposition is omitted ^«s,
__. ney hasten to the camp: Ad «R.tra oontendunt. -
He sets oxit for mtain: In Brit» nulam profloI«>itur.
2Vi«|/ reiwmerf Aome.- Domum redlerunt.
n«ia/iWW T»^H Ir' "^i^ "^ ^ ^ denote'mto (or in) the
mtgnooTtwod of and (6) sometimes in contrast with 06 in exorea-
' ««;«/dnrection;a8,ifecamem*oe/tenei9A6orW^
Oenftvm pervinit. He pitched his camp near Alexia Ad
126. Place prom which is denoted by the ablative with
ab, ex or dSf except that with* names of towns and smaU •
isUnds, and with dom5..(/rom home) and rQre {from iht
country), the preposition is omitted ; as, ^' '•■ *^ c--.
• ^y withdraw from tJ^ shore: 2: lltore dl«,e#.6runt. ^ .
wi^STl''^'^ ^«i^tm/ Ex B«I»I6 trftn.l6rant. ^ /
■^ Jtn Jtom Cprxnth : Corlntho tugit
They had gone atoay from, home: Domd dlMe..e»»nt.
6or/iood o/ (6) sometimes in contrast with ad in exoressions of
direction, and (c) with longi and verbs of distant ; STSX^e
Wrerfm^ie-Aom^ma; i Z««.a, «best iftliu; Vi«t«^ 1^- !
. ,M27. Place where is denoted by tl,e ablative i*rith in,
, except^that with names of towns and stoall islands, And wi^
. a few common nouns the preposition is omitted ; %»f,
^ Me stood on tha waU : m mar« ednstltlt. / ^ r^-
' SilLSf^f %,«^'"*«*' ♦»* ^«^ • »n «111» l»l.m«nt.
•y Mealed at Athens : Athtalmmortun^mu^
r^wW^, su^ular,^ th# luoatir^ ^ntk»l. m t^Zm^
I
-•a
ti
t
m
PBIMART LATIN BOOK.
genitive) is used, not the ablative; as, At Rome: Romae/ At
Corinth : CorintU. So oooasionallv in the third declension singu-
lar (vrherid the locative is identical in form with the dative, as
Ckvrthdgini)^ and regularly in the words <iomi, rHrif htiml, hellly
mtlUio/ft.
.■on
ii. 'nie words loeiis and parf, and other nouns when modified hf^
t(^tts (and sometimes by nCecUwt^ ovnms or cUncty^), may be used in
the ablative without a preposition ; as, On mitaUe ground: Iddne%
' -I^Nei* Throughout the whole camp : T5tls oastrls.
iii. Often where English uses tn, motion iotoord* is» implied,'
^H^td Latin consequently uses the accusative ; as. They concedkd
"memselves in the wood» (that is, went into thewocda and^ hid): la^
1::<^.^IJ^ CoRocd and pOnd, however, take the ablative with in.
^ iv. For such expressions as He came to the senatSat i2d»it (where
'' at Borne is an adjectival phrase modifyiiig senate^ ^tin has
Bdmam ad ■enAtnm vAnlt (where both expressions', modify the^
^verb). Similarly, He came fropi the senate at JSkme is Rdn^A !(-
- aen&ta v«nit'/ ■' i.-^ ';',;", • -;■'"•'■■
' y. With jiar«, latm, agmen, ccyrnH, tergumffions, the direction in
which or the side on which is expressed by the ablative with «^
.(and in the case of para, also with eiii)i as, In front: A f^pnte..
On one aide: fn& ex parte. . ., ; '-^ • ' .
i28i. Extent of Sq^cb is expressed ^y the accusative, with;
verbs and witljithe adjectives longua^ alius and Idius.; as,V . '
He advances three miles: Tria mlllla paHsnnm prooMlt.
A trench Jive feet deep : FosfM qnlnqn^ ped6^ alta. ' ' ^
i. With absfim and distd either this accusative or the ablative b£
measure of diflference may be used. (Sectiop 101, i)
i--
#■■.'
I'-. . «I
»«
f ;■■
. "..^W''-' ■
',■¥;-.',
■ * \
129. Duration opTiShi isexrpressed by the accusative; a%
He waits there a few dtiys : Pano5* difta Ibl morfttwr.
Me was twenty ymrs old: Vlglntl^nnbmnMnmermM,* ' '; ,^^
i. How long agoh expressed by abhinc and the accusative ; hov$^
long b^ore and liow long^after \fy.ante Bad post with (a) th^.acousa»
' '' 'IS — -• — '— ' — '■ "-^ r— '
1. On » lomcwhAt ilmUar pilnoipU, wh«M EnfUsh haa a dotntn^n noun, like tmvn 09
•oitj/ (modifled by ftn MlJ«otiv« ori^ji •qnivslMit), in appoaition with th« nam^of feplaafe,
witii the corraipondiiif nouiw lAtia fwi^Hmy uaM « pMpoaition to (^xpeen motto»
toward», motion frmti^ oi plae» whtn, taStts/t of having uri$ or bffidwn in appMUon
with the proper namt ; aa, Thsf/ haHfd at Jtlba, a otmmnimt eUff: MIim cenatlt»*
runt in uro* op|i«rtuii«. / eam« to Ath«m, a moat fmttoui eU^ : wih»nam in
urbam praaclarjiwimam vani. Bi tet out /rmn Cwrt», a town qf tA« JSaMiiM :
OMglbua a» amW •afcinopum praihmUm Mt.
fc il|i i any , g» * <i < »Nw from Hmiit mm
J -.-4- »
mae. At I
S/ _ ■ ' ■ -^ j-, .- ■;
ion singu- 1
dative, as 1
imi, bdlly ' I
odified by ^ 1
ie used in ; ■
-1 ■ " ■...
iMdoneo 1
" ^.
• implied, < I
concedted v ■
1 ■ ,
^ (where ■
Hiatin has i» ,1
todify the '■
Taction in c * H
e with (tb \ ' * 1
'? '
H
;iVe, witfe ' I
- 1 ■
'.^^
f . . ,
kUative of ^ % ''^m
, 1
PAKT V.—STNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 367
tive.or (6) the ablative of measure of difference ; ss, A few days
after: Port p»uo6. die. or Pawl. po.t tUihnu. - /«^ <K»y»
130. Time when is expressed by the ablative; as,
m returns <m the fifthday: Quiato die revcrtltnr.
duxit*" feocfc Ai» /orcea; Sdll. oooA.u sua. popla. ro-
131. Time WITHIN which is expressed by the ablative ; as,
^Sehas been put to death vnthin the last few days: HI« pauol.
diebas Interfeotus eat. -^ *«••«»•
i. Occasionally, by inference, the ablative of the time within
which, especially with tdtus may be equivalent to the accusative of
ti^e time how long; as. They matched all that night: £!& tdt&
-' V . . EXERCISE 17.
1. After waiting in Italy three month» he returned from
Kpme to Athens. 2. The enemy took up their position on wooded
ground eight mifes from Caesar's camp. 3.- Four yeaTs ago a battle
was fought hi th? neighborhood of Massllia. 4. This river, he
replied; was sixty fbet wide and aboMt five feet deep. 5. Setting
out from the army'te Gaul, he qaiAe a' few days later to the river
Thames m the enemy's countrit. 6. They were drdered t6 leave
horn* within three days and hide in the nearest woods. 7. He
set out «or the'-^untry at the beginiXing of spring and returned
home.thfr next year. 8. ,'J»fie' btfttle was begun on the right wing.
9. Hecamefroni GeneVa in the consulship of Crassus and Pom-
l»y, and»Ji%ed for awreral years at Rome and Atiens. 10. On the
same day, he was informed th?* tKe.enemy's forces were three miles
^tant from Bibmcte. 11. He siid that he was nine years old.
12, After eoippleting a march of .twenty miles, they remained in
ovAp for fevQvai suoptNuvtf:dg|;8.
1. For aefreacal day^ the resfr oJF the «Wfalry remained in the camp.
2. Ob the seventh day €»«r set out from Rome for Britain. 3. A
few day»-kt «- tha Rmrmn w wft r a driven out of.
rthey iudt Oi^
groundrw»
of the oainp. 4H tf=
jf^fefMddenly attack them by
V ' \..
358
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.^
night on two sides. 5. At an opportune moment they cama to '
steep ground. 6. After several days had ehjpsed the barbariana
betook themselves to their forests. 7. For a larger part of that
day Ceesar remained in the neighborhood of Rome. 8. Four years
ago Caesar departed for home. 9. Several days beforb Csesar's
arrival the legions had marched in that direction. 1,0. They lay
concealed in the forest six miles from the enemy's camp.
> \ C. {CcBmr, Bk. IV. ^.y /: ;
1. He found that the harSor was suitable for a lai^e part;, of the
winter. 2. In the war with the Gaul's he summoned the leaders -
.Irom every side. 3. On the north was an island. 4. Two days
later the forces will set out |or the harbor. 5. The winter is earUer
in Gaul than at Rome. 6. Waj had been waged in those regions
for many years. 7. Caesar set oilt from Britain for home. 8. Set- ,
ting out ioj^ the island they concealed themselves in a suitable
place.. 9. During all that time the Gauls were five miles distant.
10. Within that year he had examined all the coast.
■ • ■ :■/ :■ r -■-■' ■■- ^ ..":.'■:' ^ ■ ' :■■■ #
\
■*"
i ' " -■
1 -:
>
J
|:.'v--;
.'■' '- ,
. ri .'
■^
/'
. 1-
4'
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
cama to '
arbarians
•iot that
our years
> Caesar's
They lay
-
rliof the
B leaders -
Pwo days
IS earner
n
3 regions
8. Set- , '
suitable
distant.
CHAPTER XVIII.
"'■■■■■ " ■ , i
Imperative — Independent TJsbs op the Subjunotivb.1
"132. Commands.— The present imperative iJs regularly
to express cominands and entreaties; as,
Ckmsider Oatd : neaplelte Galllam. '
i. As in English, there are many substitutes for the imperative}
e.g., (a) periphrases with ji*6e5, petO, dtd, etc. ; (6) vdim (I should lik^
and/ac or cwm (see to ity be sure) with the present subjunctive (wit'
or without ut).
ii. The future* imperative expresses. rather a contingent commant
than one to be immediately obeyed. Hence it is used in laws and^,
precepts, and in distinct reference to the f uturef
133. Prohibition^' are usually expressed by nolif ndlUe (Jbii
unwiUing) with the present infinitive ; as, ,
Do not suppose : Notllte existlm&re.
i. Prohibitions are also expressed (a) by ca/o8y tav9 nl, vidi ni, or
fac ne, and the present subjunctive ; -(b) by ng and the present ot
Eerfect subjunctive, but chiefly ih familiar discourse ; (c) in poetry
y ne and the present imperative '' ^
134. The subjunctive is used independently to represent •
/action as willed. The following varieties exist: v
■ (a) Hortative.' — The first person of the present subjunctive is
used to exhort, or; with ne, to dissuade ; as. Let us consider^Oavi :
. Oalliam respiol&mus. Let u^^w>t despokr .' N6 ddspftrimns.
(6) Jussive.— The third person of the present subjunctive is'
used to command, or, with nS^ to for|>id ; as. Let the eonsids see to
^: Videant odnsnlgs^. ' '
• L, So too tlie second person of the present or perfect subjdnotive
is used with n9 to express prdhibiifon (section 133, i. 6^
^(c) Concessive.— The present and' perfect subjunctive are used
#o concede for the sakeoT argument, the negative being ng; as,
5tn is tioc ^ greatest evUf'stiU it certaifU]f w an evil :
0ra/nting that padn
Ii% stt snininuiu malum
=^^
imperfect -subjunctive^
-4.
%
malum oert£ est.
•T l ie first p e reea' t f th e pn
ilrfor du-ection (though withoqib
"^MtP!
u
JRUiURr LATIN BOOK,
"■^■-i,
8«0
ext)ecting an answer), ^if\i;bitt comte tb express r^*T^fi|j*^ or in-
dignatibn ; a^yWhat ain I to dof Qntd faolam ? "'wm^'^o* I ^o
dpt Qaid tu^Utem 7 Afe we to ytdd fo him? HaiiM^ftmas ?
195. The «ttbjunctive is used , independently to represent
action as c^itmiL "r ■ '
This is ci^ed the Optativb subjunctive or the subjunctive of
Dksirk. The negative is n«. The present tense is used to express
wishes viewed as practicable; the ^np6rfect and pluperfect to
express wishes viewed as impossible of fulfilment ih present and
|)«Mt time respeictively. Such clauses are frequently introduced by
KMfMim, regularly so in the case of the imp^ect and pluperfect
tenses; as, May they be happy: sint beatL Would that he were .
present: tJtlnfim adesset. Wotdd that I had never been born.'
^tlawm n6 n&tna eaaem. j(^(t^
136. The subjunctive is used independent, t^ represent
actionlus conceivable.
Modest expressions of wish or regret with
heir compounds, followed often by another
as, I snovld Wee to know: Vellm scire.
e present :_J)llsdlein xadesset.
■ one) woidd
as. It would
With the
thought :
rcely seem
V
ubjunctive
This is the so-called Potentiai. subjunctive, used of present and
past time. It is generally to be translated by coula, would or
thatddf and takeSu^|v i^egative ^^> The following varieties exist
(a) SxAtE:
vdim or vel
^^bjunctiye
I would rather
'indefinite second person ; as, You (
Put&res. (3) In softened assertions ;
proikMe: Vix verislmlle videatnr.
This last usage is found chiefly in the pro
conditional sentences (see sections 61 and 63).
i. Latin, however, often has the indicative where w«i iuigh^
expect the potential subjimctive. So regulllrly with possum^ dehedy
etc., with the passive periphrastic conjugation, and with est and
?redicate adjectives such as aegtet«m, melius, satis, facile, etc.; as,
might have said more: Pl^ra poteram dioere. It io&idd be
tedious to teU everything: Lihnguth est omnia n&rr&re. (See
section 64, i.) . i - " » i *
(b) Rhetorical appeals, asking whether something is conceiv-
able ; as, Whocould doubt f Qnls dnbitet ? Who wmUd ever have
thought? Unim-nmquamarhitrkritnr?
' 187." Notice the values of tvould in the following sent^oqes, and
the different ways of translating it into Latin !
• <\n), I thought he wquld come: Arbltr&lmr earn venliuriiin
^
PART y.~STNTAX AND COMPOSmON. 801
(b) laMwhat theywaulddo: Bo»»vIqald faturl e.^nt (36)
U^ltZtr'''''^' ^^""^ l^aec f«ee,e or X.^^vtt .^
- (d) If he were alive he wcndd he pre^nt : si vl voret, «de wet (61)
(63? ^^^ "^"^ ^ *^^' ^ ^^^ '^ •• SI haeo faclft., veniat
, (/) TTomW that he woyld come / Utinam veniat i (136)
(g) Would that he had come/ PtlMP» venl«et i (135X '
"^ ^^BwoM^ better to do ^igpti» e.t haec facere (136,
^Jt) mowauld ve^^ure todomsr^u^^^ faeere aadeat?
• (i) I tm« a/ratd he would corn^: Verebar »6 venlret (138)
» ^ EXERCISE 18.
■ , ' ■ . it. • • ' •■
_ 1. Letusnotfeartheenemy^however numerous, nor return to
• the camjt,, unless victorious. 2. Would that C^sar had not been
unwilling to send two legions to the assistence of Labieniis. 3
Who can endure that his freedom should be taken away from him ?
4 Remember the former valor of the Helvetians, soldiers. 5. Let
the Gauls send envoys to Caesar to seek peace. 6. Do not let sUp
this opportunity of waging warC 7. What was I to say ? It would
^ have been ^sy to make many promises; but who would have
believed me ? .a^ I should like you to inform me at once of his
departure. »• Would that C»sar would aUow us to march through
the projnnce 10. Advance towards the shore and do not betray
the eagle to the enemy. 11. He would not announce to the soldie,;
when.he would set out. 12. One would have supposed that the
envoys would not return the next day.
-7 - B- (Geernr, Bk. IV. S5-S8.) . »
fliihf^^'f w' ^f «^«'^d t»»«^t*««k of the enemy; do not teke to
-fch^otner states not omit to send hostages, 4. I should not like
•
•
r
■■ '-■- t.., \. ■ -..
.■. .• ■.
*
• „ .
\»«--
: ' , ^■
*
>
■ H7.
* ' * ' ■-,
. . .. : '.i,a^. ■-.':■
m
y
*«^ .
■" .-,■
'■ -
*
'
-
•
«
■ ' '^ .
'■' - :■ '^si-. ;■ ■ "■' ■
- '■ „
;«':
"^V^ .- ■ ■
r>
i ;;', '
-Sift»
A ■ f- .. . V,' ■ ^ i"
%
% ■
M
/-[■r
. Y - ■ ■ - _ V ■
■<■ ♦
. 1
^
«,
^
■ ■ i.wi---
y ; ■
* •
1 «• -
/.' ■-
■i;l'-^-:::
r
t
- *■
1
«
<
*■-
■
■
1
1
1
^^^
^
y
A^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
"^
?i>
*■»•■ '■■
• -.''■^-
1.0 v^^^
t
I.I
US
Itt lU i2.2
Wwu
//
^^.
i
1,
^■«'
#5^
-^;
^
1» -S^fSS'W
#
III ^^ II ^s
1 1-<^
■^■^- :'■■■■
>
4-—
— 6" -
♦ •
».
• #
y
<:<:■
Photographic
Somces
Coiporation
c ■,
n WIST MAM STRHT
WntTli.N.Y. USM
(7U)47a-4»0l
^
r
vt^
r.
> *•■:
■"^^
.#-■*■■■
' *
*
.«"•- >
v.. ,
« _
^
^..
■»*■
/-**
• f
362
^RIMABY LATIN BOOK.'
to tise the Tnarshes «s a pkoe of refuge. 6. One would have
thought that the Senate would decree a thanksgiving. 6. Lay
down your arms if you do not want to be put to death. 7. It would
not have been easy to escape tms danger. 8. After routing the
enemy, let us bum all the buildings. 9. Where are we to betake
ourselves {nds) ? Are we to conceal ourselves in the marshes 7
f G, {Ccemr, Bk IV. gl). '
' 1. Let us send the envoys home and set out ^ soon as possible
with all the fleet. 2. Land from the vessel, solfUers, and find out
these matters. 3. Would that an opportunity might be giv6i^of
making the attempt. 4. What was he to do ? Was he to report to
Gassar that he dared not return home ? 5. I should have preferred
that he had visited these states. 6. Ijet all the states give hos-
tages and be faithful to the-Boman people. 7. Return to thetfhip,
Yolusenus, do not entrust yourself to the Britons. 8. Who would
embrace an i^Iiance with Csesar ? It would be better to make trial
of war. 9. Thinking they would discover his design, he would not
announce what states he would visit. x^i m-
^
f^i...
•■ t.
ii'
f
»1 . - =w *
Ml
1
Si" * \ • «
old hare
6. Lbj
It would
iting the
o betake
hes ?
possible
find out
givei^of
report to
preferred
give hos-
theiihipf
ho would
ake trial
rould not
t» »
'H-,
I
PABT V.-^YNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
■ ^ ■ .■-.;■■■""-. • ' ; -' ' . .
CHAPTER XtX.
Vbbbs of FjtAMWG^VJMMS OF Quin AND Quominui.
138 After verba of fearing and such phriisea as metus esL
perxculum eat, thu and le%t a.re translated by ne,^ and that not
by ut, with the present subjunctive after the primary tenses.
thvmperfectsubjunctive after the secondary tenses ; as,
-^J&S:!^ '^^^'^(o'lfearlesthedcihis)': Vereor
^ i^ that he wainotdo this: Vereor ut hoc faoUt
•rat nft olroamvenlrontur. "«^««««««i
^^or ut, nirUhiiB very commonly u«ed, regularly «a after n5,i
fKaJr,!®'*^ °/ '^""* may be used as modarverbs, foUowed bv
^ I^r2 ^7^"'^' * corresponding infinitive in the En^ish^;
»8, i Jear to do this : Fereor haeo faoere.
139. y4>rb8 and phrases ,of hindering and' oJ^^tni^, and
■ negative verbs and phraserof doubtinff, failure or omission,
are regularly followed by the subjunctive with the intro-
ductory particles quin, guOminus or n5,» according to the
following rules ; the present subjunctive being used after the
primary tenses, the imperfect subjunctive after the secondary
tenses.' . ' , j
N.K—Quin is used only after negatives or virtual n^a^ive^ *
^i?V ?'*?°! ^fj^"^: «•«•. diterreO, impediO, retitL, and also
ree^, I object (if negatived), take ^Uhni^u, oi mtfJv *or% nSt
negatived) qxUiminus orn«; as, . ^ /
^ I^ did not object to coming: Ndii i^sAbant qain "(or
qaomlnns) veiilr«nft. h««" v"*^
, They hinder the Mui from bringing in com: Aedads d«-
terf nt ^nominn. (or ni,) fr umentam cdnferant. •
that they may not fr^iri^^^Iijr^EnXi. unS*--' r.^i^.?»1^_ tA4..«d«i i„ oni»r
uaderinr.
tAot IA4»j/ may not bnnff in «torn. "Enrilih uniikm I^ti^'tM^^X^^ J^iT"?"* "* '"^**^
-- the result, not the |.uW,^th« hfSin" ""' **"**■ *° '*"'' •^ P«»«ntlon
to tk» ^Uph gwmMi fovniMil i
■ ^>jy|* ggg^^a^^JgtSiobJaBoUy» oi^
1
"S,
PRIMARY hAXlX BOOK.
• i. ProfUbed reffularlj fakes the aoQuaatiye and infinitive (section
22, 1.x while nd^ reeHsd also may take the infinitive.
(h) Negative verbs and phrases of cUnibting, e.g., n9n duim, nOn
m avimm^ tak« dptin ; as, ' ^
There was no ^M)t thttt they had (or of their hating) very great
power: Ndn erat dablain qain .plarlmam poasent.
1. J[[>u5ifd, J AeMto^, r^^afly takes the infinitive.
((5) Negative verbs and phrases of faUnre or omuMon, such as
nihil praetermim (I, leave nothing undone), ha^id midtum abrnwi
(I am within a little^ facere niinjiotmm (I eaniwt but or J cannot
help), take quin ; as, ■
And a mepieion i» fiol wanting that he committed mieide:
^^a** ***** ■'**P'®*® «"'«» Ipse «Ibl mortem oftnselYerlt.
They' let no time go by without /stirring up the etates : NiUlam
tfinpns intermbAnant^qaln olvtt&tfta aolll«lt4rent.
i For quin after such expressions as n9nid eiH: see section 33, ii
/
EXERCISE 19.
' A.
1. I fear the soldiers wiUfinot be able to take the city by storm.
2. Who could doubt that the Romans are going to take our freedom
»w*y from us ? 3, They promised to raise no objections to being
for ever «nd6r the sway o<( the enemy. 4. There was great danger
of the enemy's crossing the river and maki]pg an attack udflKie
camp. 6. Geesar could not but suspect that they were ^Km to
renew the war. 6. They believed that Cissar bylliis influe«ce could
hinder the Germans from being brought across the Rhine. 7; He
feared that the«oldiers would not be able to ero«i(i the bridge and
attack the enemy Ini the rear. 8. There was no, dou^t that the
JEdui were hesitating to declare war. 9. Several vdasels were pre-
vented by the storms from being able to reach the same port. 10.
There is iio one who. does not know th^t he feared to disembark.
11^ We fear that the soldiers will be unwilling to defend the oamfi»»
12. Not even at the, conference could the Gauls be deterred from
hurling weapons ajb our men.
\ B. (Caear, Bk. r. 1, M)
I. The Gauls feared that C»sar would leave hither Gaul for the
winter quarters of the army. «. He prevented the Germans from
There was no doubt tltfiiF!
'•^
" ^
'\m^i^^'
, PART y.--OTNTAX ^ND itXMMOSITION. MS
they used lower shipa inthat sea. 4. The soldiers did not object to
repairing the old vesseR 6. Oaeaar was wifckhi a Uttle of having the
ships launched. 6. There is danger tha^ the Gauls wiU not assemble
nor obey Cnear's ai^Jiority. 7. Csesar did not hentate to place a
lieutenant in charge of this business. 8. There was no one but
knew that-CiBsar was in command of the legion. 9. TEey promised
to leave nothing undone to make amends to C«8ar.
a (Cceaar.Bk. IV. ££.), '
1. Thinking that they were afraid of being, left behmd, he
ordered them to come to him. 2. He could not help preferring
Britain to these trifling matters. 3. He will be prevented from
havmg an opportunity of taking the legion across. 4. There
«danger of this happening. 5. The Morini did not object to
bnngmg a hirger number of hostages. 6. No one <|pubted that
they were staying in Britain for the purpc^ of guarding the harbor.
7. They fear they will not be able to carry on war. 8. He did nflt
hesitate to promise to take them under his protection. 9. Thfere
is no one who dpes not think that he will assign these vessehi to
the cavalry. ' . •
•■''*■%*»-
■«,■€••
A. . -i ::
i,..
fHk--::X. . <»'
V ■•■...: 'iX >.
^"' *■
> ■•
.^^Z'.
'■tv::-s
«
366
•it
"A
PBIMARY LATIN BOOK.
^>^
CHAPTER XXv
DUTT, WiBCBSSITY, FOSSIBILITT, PsBMUBIOK.
140. DoTT. or OBLiOATiON is expressed most frequeDliy by.
iki%geTwndvoe with ««m, also by debeo and oportet.
(a) For the gerundive with esse (the passive periphrastic eonja-
' gation) see section 120.
. (6) Dih«0 takes the present infinitive, and the impenionil verb
oportetUkea the accusative and the present infinitive ;* as,
Ccuar ou^ to come to me: OaesHr ad mi venire dAl^et, or
Caeaarem »d mA venire oportet. ^
i, The infinitive remaini in the j>rMent tense with all forms of,
^ these verbs, while the verbs themselves change aocordLing tOLthe
<»me of th«^tion ; as, Oasar ought to have come .*. Oae'sar vjpi^re
' diMbat, OT Oaesarem venire oportnit. Comt ought to come
to-morrow : daesar venire or&s dfibd^blt, or Oae«arem~ venire
«r&a oport^blt. /
, 141.? Necessity is expressed most frequently by the gerun-
diva toith esse^ also by necease e8t. i,
(a; For the gerundive with esse (the passive periphrastic conju-
gation) see section 120.
(b) Necesse est ia used with the dative and the present infinitive
to- express what is inevUaMe rather than what is obligatory or bind-
ing ; as, *
All men must die: Omnlbna neoesM est morl
142. Possibility or abIlit^ is expressed by po88Wm and
the present infinitive ; as, * . * ' ' /^
The river can he crossed : Flftmen tr&nslrl potest.
They were uncMe to defend themsdves : Sp d6f endere n6n
poterant. *.'■* : ' ; :;■ :" ' ' ■ ■
It is impossible for us to cross : "rraastre n5n possnmns.
We could (or might) have been useful friends: Poteramos esse
atUAs amiol.
143. Permission is expressed by /«c«r with the dative and
the present infinitive;^ as, / v
1. Ths I pmtson*. Ywbt lioet, n»e»»t$ «H wad oporttt may >lto tsks tlw «iBliino.
A. SO» i ppetsoiMu yww tymt, n»M»t$ «n tata oporut may wto ulkn th
U f f V ss, Vmmuuht to xta thitr w—gnwt as opwf t . Wlta mtd^ ^
1
.'^W-''
/•
jQDotire often hM ut.
X
PART V.r-SYNTAX AN» OWIPOSITION.
367
Tou may remain: . Lle«t ▼6Ua reinan«re. i
They were not aUowed to depart: DIseMer^ llUa aAn, Ue«1m«.
i. A predicate noun or adjective referring to 'the datiie agreed
with It m case ; as» We may be free : N5bb licet erne llberla.
DIzI m€ statlm redl-
H«eo f£elt n6
^L».^^..*^****®® *^® values of ahould in the following sidqtences and
(be different ways of translating it into Latin :
(g) I aaid I tAmdd return at once:
V taram esse (15, c).
(6) He did this ao that I ahoul(f not return :
redlrem (24).
(c) If he had done Oiia I tlhwdd not be returning: SI haee
fiolsset n6n redlrem (61^
id)Ifhe ahould do this (or Should he do this), I ^wdd return
at once: SI baeo jTaolat, statlm redeam (63). i
(e) It M bed that He ahould return at once: Optimum est*
earn statim redire (110, i.). . .,
'(/) You ahotdd return at once: Statlm vdbls est redenn-
dnm (120). /^
(g) I ahotdd like you to, return: Vellm reflefts (136^*^»). - - ^
"* W ^ feared that I ahouid not return: Veritas sam nt (or
^«Bon) redlrem (138). v ,; *
(t) Be waited until they ahould retjAm : Dam redlrent exsnee-
•ti^vit (165, 6). , "^
0') -^« promiaed great rewards to anyone that ahmdd return t
81 qals redUsset, m&irn» praemla pQllloitas est (177).
"* ■ ' " ■"■■ -'j,\- .' '- . '
^ ^ V EXERCISE 20.
» .
1. You should have replied that you were unable to leave the
«ity. 2. The soldiers had to advance into the waves. 3. He
-answered that Gaul ought to be free, and that he could not allow
the Germans to cross the Rhine. 4. They asked to be allowed to
march through the province. 5. We must not wait longer ; we
must set out for home at once. 6. OsBsar should have ordered that
state to furnish hostages. 7. He was afraid this would ineviUbly
happen. 8. They could not be persuaded to stay longer. 9. The
Gauls may be uowards if they wish, but
V.
««i-»£,
^ mm ART LAtnr BOOK.
the camp yesterday, so far u I waa oonoeni^ 12. Our fi«Ida
ought not to have been laid waste in sight el the enemy, Mid
our towns taken by storm.
B, {Ccuar, BU. r. 3, 4.) ■; I
1. The oommoc people ought not to be compelled to revolt from
the Romans. 2. He cannot point out what is going on among the
Bemi. 3. He could easily have kept his kinsmen true to their
allegiance. 4. If they have revolted, we must begin to collect .
forces of infantry and cavalry. 6. They feared they should not
be allowed to take thought for themselves. 6. All had to conceal
themselves in the woods. 7. It is very important that Ctesar
should be able to win over the Treveri. 8. Caesar ought to have
urged them to come to him in the camp. 9. He thought everything
should have been made ready. *
t , a (CiMor, Bk. IV. gS.)
1. Thinking that it was quite impossible for them to land, they
weighed anchor. 2. The ship ought to be anchored in order that
the trpops may land. 3. Ceeaar hadto advance a mile and wait
till the fourth watch in the further harbor. 4. He could not get
suitable weather for embarking. 5. He pointed out that after the
troops had been drawn up on the shore, the lieutenants must
execute everything promptly. 6. They can hurl their weapons
from the hill into the sea. 7. If you wish to find out what is the
character of the mountains, you may land in a suitable spot 8.
He points out that the cavalry should have set saU tod followed
Mm, 0. He will point out whai they have been allowed to do.
PART Vv— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
^
369
♦ . CHAPTER XXI. r*^
> Causal Sentence? — Uses of Cum. >
^35' j.^*"**^ sentences are introduced hyquod,or (leas frequently)
quui, because, for the reason that; qtumiam, seeing that: am
nwx, as; and qui, »mqe he. n/ "««"^ "«w,
}.' J<^' ?"* with the causal subjunctive see section 171:
. }}.' 5P' «**?«» meaning the fact that, see section 198.
r.^A?x, "?®*. ^*f ^'''"*8 attendant circumstances) regularly
S^«f„ Pn''???^ ^^*"'^' «^*^ ^'^*^^^ (»« emphisisdSg the
reason) generally follow. * ^
*► „
' 146. Quod, quia and ^uontam take the indicative to ex-
J)re8s a reason advanced by the writer or speaker himself ; as,
Se set out for Mlyriciim, because he wished to become acouamtMt
irnth that district: In Illyrioum profeota. e.t. quod e&> re«i-
ones odgndsoere vol€bat.
i. Frequently a sort of antecedent (such as propterea, eO, hde, ed
dg causa) is found preparing the way for the quod clause.
147. Quod^ quia and quoniam take the subjunctive to quote
some other person's reason ;^ as, *
Tfiey begged him to lend them aid, because (as they saiMUiev wertt
hard pressed by th^ Suebi : Sr&bant at sibl auxUlnm f«fcb?auod
irraviter ab Sndbla premerentnr. ^W^ ^
Arigtidea was banished from his country on the ground that he vxu
xmreasonably just : Arl«tld«* expalsiii est patrlA quod praetM
modam J ustas eiset. -
i. It should not be supposed that the iubjunctive casts doubt
upon the reason ^ven, or refuses to vouch for its accuracy It
«mpljy quotes without expressing any opinion, and is, in fact.
1^^\ **^ J *^® subjunctive of virtual indirect narration (section
177;. Quod with the indicative tells why something was said or
done ; quod with the subjunctive tells on iohat grounds somsthinff
was said or done. » -i- """•
ii. Quod is very commonly used after verbs of oMusation, praise,
eomjOamt, tfuinks, joy, anger, and the like ; the indicative and s^
lunotive being used according to the distinction just drawn : as^
I thank you for setting me free :'Tlhl grAtlAs a«4. qaod mi
84
1. Or «ven to quote one's own previously e]a>re««d reMK».
i I
f
#
370
'm.
FBIMAR7 LATIN BOOK.
llber&vl»ti. aocrate» was ace^uted of corrupting the ymHh : Soora-
t6«aoou«&tu« est quod oorrumporet Juventutem. ^
m. N^ quod or ndn quo is used with the subjunctive of a
^ ISZLr^^^!? ^"^^ *^ ^ rejected.=noe hecavJiJT^!gU
iv. For the illogical quod diceret see section 177, ii.
I 148. Cum, with causal force, meaning since or oa, takes
:^e sttbjunctive 'f^ as,
fl^nw «Jey c<mW no* defend themsehesy they sent envoys to Cassar :
Cum .6 fldfendere n5ii posgent. 16g&t5> ad Gaesarem mlttnnt.
149. Cum, meaning whenever, in clauseis denoting indefi-
nitely recurring action, takes the* indicaiive. ■
■"Si
When, as is usually the case, the cum clause denotes an action
prec^ that of the main verb, the perfect and pluperfect tenses
^^^rS^f ""tI? ** 4«"«*«« r^^ is simultan^uTthe present
S^<iti?l "^" "* regularly present or im^perfect
^ IFfcenewr wtr men aitack, the enemy fcdl hack: Cam nostrl
^ Whenever there is need, the enemy fall back: Cum u.u. est,
]iost«a pedem r^ferunt. '
^ Wh^ver our men attacked, the enemy fell back: Vnm nostrt
Impetum feoer^nt. host^s pedem referebant.
i. With the same force and with the same construction are used
^iao quotigns, quot^nscumqxie, ut, ubi, si quandd. ^ ,
^ 150. Cum, meaning when, referring to present or to future
time, takes the indicative / as,
' When T find put, I shall inform you ; Cum oogndverd. faolam
te oertiorem.
(siti^^eiT"" ^^ ^^^^ ^'^^^ "^ ""^ ^**^ ''^'^ *® ^ •*
161. Cum, meaning when (or while), referring td past time,
regularly takes the subjunctive; the imperfect of contempo^
raneous. adfcion, the pluperfect of antecedent action ; as,
When iihey were approaching BHtain, a storm arose : Cum Bri:
tanniae approplnqu&rent, tempest&s ooorta eat
1 . For (7WH , with coi
\tifs nttnouffhi fm sflulluu' OS, K^
^i. i «l»n H i m wirtiMmlM
u^.' SoorA-
[motive of a
<w one might
lal or virtual
r aSj takes
/« to Ccesar :
m nilttant.
ing indefi-
B an action
rfect tenses
the present
r imperfect
am nostrl
US11S est»
am noBtrl
mare used
.»■■.
' to future
>dt faolam
as with a
[Mtst time,
:ontempo-
as,
[Jam Brl-
06, «. =
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSmON. 371
«n!^ '^ />«»'c«it«i Xhi^, he sent reinforcemmtl : Quod cam
anlmadvertl««et, «absldta Babmlttlt. ,
«, /"^* ^**^* cww with the subjunctive denoterthe ctm«wMtonc«
::u::itrth;7.^i^^^^ ^'^ "-^ exa.p,e, combiS^Z
reS^rif^ except^ns to this use of m«i with, the subjunbtivo
thei5l^':iv:rs2Sn1r9^^^ «^P'«^ »>y «-* «»d
1 Jlv Sr-!?'^^.?*^*?!'^ «"'^ *>' coincidence of time regu-
hTm ^^J^^^'^'^i*'''?' ""^^^ ^^^"^ the m;incipal clause conSs
Jri» r.S^T'''ww.*^P'^"'*°" ; as, fl^n Uey remain ^?
(or »» rematntwgr mmO, thex^ appnyte : Cam qalewant. p^oilnt
llmSr^*""" *" Oalllam v6nlt. la e4 dvl^te daaeera^
iii. p»tm, meaning «j/ien or «7A«n *Mdderai/,in a clause which ia
^^^5^..**^^^"°'^?*^ ^^«' ^*'^^^ the indli^tive. S principS
clause often has jam, vix or nOndum; as, 2%ey were^rF^y^.
pan^ig to depart, i^^n mddeiUy it was ankou^ed^t ?S Zd
|em c«pW; Jam dLcedere paralmat, cam repeaTe nL«-
fttam est urbem oaptam esse. f «««*-
IV. ^t^p%»Mm, oa «oon a», takes the indicative
. y. Uum . twm, meaning both . . . and, has regularly jio
influence on the mood of the verb. . *^s««»rjijr jio
..:-■• - < ■ ..-"'■■■'•-
^- ., ■.,■■.. -^ -
. ' EXERCISE 21.' ' ^
1. Caesar complained ^gpe the enemy were laying waste the '
temtones of the^dui. ^ When the ships were drawing near
the island, so great a tempest arose that they could with difficulty
hold then: course. 3. As they th%ht the ^nemy was within the
gates, they rushed out of the town. 4. Ctesar feared an ambush
Wuse he had not yet leamo^ why they were trithdrawing. 5
Whenever our men began to return to the place from which they
had started, they were surrounded by the enemy. 6. They asked
to be allowed to remain in our camp, on the ground that they-
dreaded the vengeance of the Gauls. 7. Since this is the case, I
Sntos hsbSJirll! ^ """ "**"~^' "^ TOitrl 1,6« «mpTlu. oclft^ _,
372
y^
#
11
PEIirAHY LATIN BOOK.
. shall ffet out at once. 8. The soldiers were proceediig with the
greatest cautionthrough the territories of the enemy, when the
Helvetians suddenly attackeid them in. the rear. <?. When our
meA saw that the camp was being fill^ with gr^at numbers of the
- enemy, .they immediately took to flight. 10. When Crosar returns
.to the camp, he will find the ships repaired. 11. At the time
.when.the enemy were prepariilgjo storfia the , camp, Csesar was
leading the soldiers across the bridge. 12.' When Csesar discovered
what had been done, he reproved' the rashness ojf the sol(!iers
.because they had not halted on the signal feeing giv«»/ ' *
._ . .^^i^ L ._„^, , B. {Caesar, BJk. V. S, 6.) *-^ _ . _
J; 1. They begged to be left in Gaul, on the ground that they were
not iis^ to sai^ng. 2. Since he has discovered that the vessel is
not ready for jailing, he has determined to return. 3. When Ceesar
finds out what is the -design of Dumnorix, he wUl send him as a
r 'hostage V) the' mainland. 4. Caesar, whenever heis absent from
: the mainhind, fears an uprising, not because the ^Edui ar6 jeager for
. .a change of government, but because Gaul has been stripped of aU
. it» nobles. 5. Whenever the ships set out, they are driven back
. by the, storm. 6. The ^Jdui were on the point of setting out ^
when Cffisar returned. 7. Csesar is taking the leading men over t6
Britain, because he is afraid to leave them in Gaul. '8. When this
. was reported to Dumnorix, he perceived that aU hope Had vanished.
9. He accused Dumnorix of being eager for supreme power. ^
a (Ccemr, M. IV. SA:)
1. When they were fighting with the enemy they leap^ down"
into the waves. 2. Since they are tlhacquainted with thsToimtry '
they cannot advance boldly. 3, There will be very great difficulty
• because our men are "unaccustomed to fight in the waves. 4. As
soon as they got a footing in the waves, they began to huri their '
weapons. 5. When they have discovered the Romans' plans,
they ^ follow them up with all their forces. 6. As they wpre ^
weighed down/with their armor, they could not get a footing in the
waves. 7. Our men were landing from the ship, when suddenly
weapons were hurlQ(^ at them. 8. He accused them of not show--'
,ing the same 'zeal in this battle. 9. Whenever our , men ^ped
' down, the enemy would spur on their horHfta.
- ♦ .
"«i
y
-/■ *■ .
\ '
v-
t .
■ '\
\
PART Y.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION» 373
Y
<^HAPTER X'XII. ^'
■■■-./•-
'Temporal Clauses.*
S?V'~-
~^M53. When, after, as soof» as,» mtroducing causes of
I time, are translated Dj
, (a) Cum or cumprlmum (sections 149-151)/ - , ' ^
(6) PoiOquam, posmqimm, ut.ubi, sinml de (or atquef^th
^^He indici«ive, in narrative; chiefly. t^p perfect indicative ; as,
^ft«r Catsar vmtl^d that jpla^e^ hetktermined to cross the Rhin^'.:
Eo portquam Caeiiar pervenlt. Bhenun, translr* con.tltult.
_ Wh^n he heard that, he removed to Corcyra : Id ut audlvlt C
eyram d^mlgrrATlt. x *
WTien they ivere informBdjof his approach, thty sent envoys : Ubt
dfi ^ as adventa oertlores f^tl «ant, Ug&to» my;tiint.
As soon a^they perceived thvi, theyjbegan to take up arm: Quae
slmal atqne oonspexerant, arma oaper« coepernnt. '^ -
i. To indicate indefinitely recurring action the perfkt and pRi.
perfect tenses would be used as^ith cum (section. 149).
u. With postquam the pluperfect indicative is usedwhena defil
Jite mterval is specified Tas, Me was kUled in the ninth year aftei
he came to Spam: Ndno ann^Jostquam In Hlsp&nlam Vfenerati
^oolsag est. * r. -^ ' •!
iii^Pos^gitaman^d pqste^qmmare often written as two words, ij
which case po^ is sometimes treated as a preposition : somelimesi
^fMom IS usedlFor/wse^taw. . *- f »^
•153» While, meaning within- the time that, is expressed by
dum with the ^ggenl indicative : as, *
^ ^^^ *f^ii^i>ingdone^ithe Tfeveri had gathered large forces i
©urn liaeo geruntar, treVerl m&gnas capias ooe^rant. .
\ i. This idea may alsO be expressed by cum and the imperfect
subjunctive (section 151), ^peciaUy if there .be any idea of con-
trast (section 161, fn.). '
154. While, meanijig as long as, is ;expressed„ by rfitw^
quoad or quamdiw^ with the indicative.
178^'if **' ** '^°' **** *""** °' ^*"* indioAtive see Chapter XXVIL, e^iaUy aectioi}
.5s3H*?: introducecTby when, whUe, after, an aiao often expreaaed In Latin b»
UT i cipi al p a r aa e a. ero e ci ft llv in 4he ablative^ MoluU^^iae ohfcptere VI. and VII.X =^
^
8. DoMc also ia uaed in poetry tad late proae, often with the aubjunctii^e.
k.
^^
jy
274
PRIMARY LATIN BOOR
/
I K
.-I;.
rot* shM stvdy as long as you wish : Dl*o6.. qu»mdl "Vol*.; "
rw.lw°' <^wm, meaning so long as, provided that, where the tem
po]^ force no longer appears, see section 67. ^"'"
■^ 155. IjNTiL, introducing clauses of time, is «pressed by
aum or quoad.^ , . ^^ ^
* ... .*■■
{a) To denote mere limit of timeml^idiea^ is used,
chiefly with g-Moarf/ as, * ',
, (0-To denote expectation, purpose or enrf tn t;t«i,, thdprec-
enfr or imperfect subjunctive is used, generally with c^J; as,
' ^^t^d until ths other ships shordd assemble: Du«ifiiiiau»e
i. ^orno* mtti, meaning nof6e/b«, see section 156 iii v " ..
^^«w^ * >K^' *^*'^",^ '•^^«"^"e <^ *h^ future may be^Siarded as
denotmg either mere limit of time or expectation. ^''^^'^^ *«
_ 156. Before is expressed by anteq.iam or priusquam.
(o) To denote mere priority or limit of time the indicative
IS used; as,^
Bhftnam pervdnerunt. «in»m Ml flumen
-.>5)To denote purpi^e ot anticipation or premnHori i^^^
presentor im^^fect subjunctive is used ; as, ._,_ .___ .1 _
^'^BefoTeiheyommreco^rfrom their panic, he led his army across i
"V
/^
PARt V.^-SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION/
375
i. Antequam and jpiusquam are often written as two words,
especially after a negative.
ii. Priusquqm is commoner than cmteqttamy esp^aaliy witii the
subjunctiye. v '
iii. To express riot before, meaning not untU, both indicative and
subjunctive are found, but after secondly tenses the perfect
indicative is preferred. ^ .,
iv. When the pluperfect subjunctive is found after jmtM^uom or
(mtequamy it is regularly either in indirect narration (actual or
virtual) for the perfect or future'perfect indicative of the direct, or
it is due to attraction. (See section 177, i.)
EXERCISE 22.
1. The Oauls decided they ot^K not to wait until Geesar reached
their borden^. 2. Before be should paake an attack on the enemy,
he sent forward a scoui to find out;what their numbers were. 3.
While these things were going on, the envoys who were in the
«temp took their departure. 4. As soon as they recovered from
their panic, they sent envoys to Caesar to sue for peace. 6. For
that reason I shall keep silent as long as I can. 6. -He did not set
out for the army until he learned that the enemy were ^hering
their forces tb one place. 7. Before he reached the hi^r, the
cavaby had set sail. 8. We shall hold our ground unt^
Csasar sends reinforcements. 9. After tAey had been informed of
our advftpice, they withdrew into their remotest forests. 10.
While our men were'gMting the ships ready, it was reported that
the camp had been attacked. 11. Before these could learn of his
departure, he crossed the rit^er. 12. Theienemy resisted bravely
until they s%9^;6urcavalry approaching in the rear.
» * A {Cofsar, Bk. V, 7,8.)
1.x After Bumnorix had taken liis departure for home, Ceesar
ordered the cavalry to bring him back. 2. So long as he disre-
gards Ceesar's authority, I shall take measures to prevent him from
-doing harm to the state. 3. While this was going on in Britain,
two thousand cavaby were guarding the harbor. 4. We shall not
embark until supplies are provided. 6. Before Caesar reached
iTiie^lesmed t^ist hn^fe roroei nan MStimnigitr^li. Thej
held on their course until the wind fell at sunset. 7. As often m
#"'
876
PBIMAKr LAMN BOOK.
^™toSl7 J"'"" ■°'*''"' "■«'•«•'«'y would conoe»! them.
«irtTTK^i ^ " "."' "^*^ """P^"" «nt" he found ^t
P«rt o( the uland w» the best landing pU«».
C. (Cfesar, ^jfe. Ijr. SS.)
enlyuntayo::^ Ju4t?oUow T'^.^" ^^ '""
of the soldier before ho ^ ne^ tie shif T\! ""''^ "«^
ships were urged forwaH f h. .„ u *" ^' ■*« «»n M the
h^uted h rc:rrtifr:d:z XTr^ \r r
;^r W-^unghinu^lf ,^^ »tip. t,^ ,::S„ Llj;:^ j^t
01
H
f
?
PAKT
m
W '
YNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
8^
""CHAPTER XXIII.
Personal, Demonstrative, Reflexive and Possessive
Pronouns.^
16t. As the pronominal subject is reidly diantained in the per-
sonal ending of the finite verb, the nominative of the personal
pronouns is nqt, as a rule, expressed except for emphana or can-
ifost; as, _ . : ■■■: ...,:. ^ - :;,-. ■■ :" - . ■ ,._...„_:_:_:_ :._.„::
^ I drove ovi kings, you bHng in tyrants: Ego reses eJ«oi. vds
tyrannos Intrdduoltls. ^ '-
^ J- The third^personal pronoun is supplied by m, hie or quu or if
emphatic by tZZe. '^*^ ^ ^ » ^ » ■^ "
ii.i^«5a is often used for ego (compare our 'editorial we 'X but
vds should never be used for tu. ^ ■
Ti\\F°^ *^® "^® ^* ^^^ diflTerent forms of the genitive see Part
111. oz, a.
168. Etc, this (the demonstrative of the ftrst person), de-
notes something near (in place, time or thought), Hence it
is used of something just mentioned or something just about
to be mentioned ; as, v
^ This present war : H6e hellntn.
" All these (the tribes just mentioned) differ from one another in
language : Hi omnia lln(ra& Inter »6 dlffernnt.
The character o/ the ground was as follows : Loci n&t Ara erat
baeo.
169. Is, that, thia, the, refers without emphasis to something
named in the preceding context, and also serves as the ante-
cedent of the relative. It is thus also used as the unemphar
sized third personal pronoun ; as,
They wder Lutetia to he burnt and the bridges of that toum to be
aestroyed: Latdtlam Inoendl pont«iqa« «ja. oppldl rMcladl
Jnb^nt. i_ : •■ ." _'' - '*
miyumwhmhihad^M him: 3^ ,^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^
_\
T
378
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
They send envoys to Mm: I^egato. «d enm mittan^
peaM or mideretood (Zs^t?™°^™i\"' ''°"'' " *"*""-
160. /K,, «Ao« (the demonstrative of the' third person^ de^
notes something „^^ u. place, time or thought^ «" 'ft
St"tT*''rf*"° ^'''"^ I^rsonal pronoV: t
person or thing; ite,
. IVoineti W tn «^ customs of former days hut n/f^^ . o^
/oa^iOtt; Von antland in a «.a-I ^ ^^^ ' **"**^ ^"^ modern -
In such cases it maVte ~nd^ k!™^ "^ 'l"'? P«<*ding clause.-
fo|.|^tteprs.^s,„X"i'^%«'^- ^^ w ^int •
m. ific . . , Ule often meiin «Ae latter . ! . «^jf^»rm«r. ,|^ :^;-
•Iso at tunes a oontemptuoOs forcT^ '^^'»<>^- '•*»•'«■• |t has
J^'J^'^.T^' expresses identity, and is often to beren^^
dered hy also ov likeunse; aa» . ^ ., - ^ ^
. ' The same dayhs movei^ his camp: Eddem dlA ea.*r^ «. .* "
Whatever is fionorabk is abo exoedui^alt ?^ movlt.
Idem est dtU». — ^^r^*' <»«*««»««» ««t hone.tum*
• «» .' ■" ■'■. ^
1. For Vie same as see section 174.
M
n. Am Wemis a Compound of is, Ka* .am. is i^i. «em. not « «^ .
..s^ii
^
M
i'V
1 '
PAUT V,Tr-SYNTAX AND (fciMPOSlTION.
379
* qui domam
hthefoftjeof
' 0na oohors
d repeating a
is either re- .^'
person), de-
b- It isfre-
' ;
aronoun, in
v.;r
iion to some
«
our modern; ■
idltn«> „
>;•
armls sai^t»' /"
zander.
for himself} \
alt.
» of subject,
ding clauBe.'
th^y, or by
' ,
■"■ ./
Qtuidm.
-v.f. :■
•
- !•'['.-■:
163. Ipset -^If, is used for emphatic contrast, not as a re-
flexive pronoun. It may be used with nouns or with any of
the personal pronouns, or may be used independently, meaning
he himself; as.
They slew Dumnorix himself: Ipsnm Dumnorlffem Interfe'.
eirnnt.
Leaving LcOnemts on the mainland, he himself set sail : tja.hl6n6
In oontinenti rellotdt ipse naves solvit.
i, The emphatic force of ipse is often best rendered by very or
m^re; as. They were fighting on (he very banks of the river .'In ipsis
fluminis ripis proeli&bantnr.
ii. The genitive of ipse with or without the possessive pronom.
inal adjectives may be used as the equivalent of own; as, My own
faidt : Mea ipslns culpa. Their .men tongue : Ipsorum lini^ua.
iii..l»se, when used to emphasize a reflexive pronoun, threes
WiW» the, subject, unless very strong emphasis is to lie on the
Ijpfl^xive; as. They kiU themselves : Se ipsi interfloinnt.
w. Occasionally in indirect narration ipse is used as a reflexive
for the sake of emphatic contrast, or where se might be ambiguous
164. Se, himself, him, the reflexive pronoun of the third
person, refers back to the subject of the verb. It should be
carefully distinguished from (a) the emphatic pronoun ipse,
and (b) the personal pronouns referring to others than the
subject; as, :.-•;.
They camnot defend themselves: S6 j^efendere non possunf.
* Com,mius took the cavalry over toith him: Commius s£oum
Suites tr&nsport&vit.
i. When sS refers to the subject of the clause to wl^ich it belongs,
it is called the 'direct reflexive'; but when, as often, a^ belongs
to a subordinate clause and refers to the subject of the principal
clause, it is called the 'indirect reflexive.' As a rule, in subordi-
nate clauses expressing a thought, statement, wish, command or
ouestion, the reflexive is indirect, refenring to the person who
thinks, commands, etc. The direct and the indirect uSf may be
found together ; as, They asked the kiiuj not to keep Hanni^l with
him, but to surrender him to them : Ab rdge petftbant m^ ttanni*
1>alem sAoum hab^ret slbiqne dMeret. • 1^^
ii. For inter si, used as a reciprocal pronoun, see Partlll.N^J}, e.
iii. For the reflexives of the first and second persons, the Wr>
BonaVpronouns are used. _ " _ ^ __ \
V. The passive voice of some verbs Is used wiUi reflexive for^ »
m. They exercise them^lves : Bzeroentnr or S« ezereent.
Jill
380
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
p..
UF
J!!i/ ' ^^' ^«•. Nost^r, Vester, the possessive pronouns,
are seldom expressed except for tKe sake of emphasis o4eames8 '
in other cases the context gives a sufficient indication ;%a '
pe^-^V^s'^eln^ "^^-^'^"^^ ^^-y ^^^ disregardU their ovm^
pern . Vegtrae salutlg causa suum perloulum ne^Uxertf nt
(J^B^^ ^^""•°^*^«,^^P''««« ^hat is characteristic of a
person , as, ^y hu otm pecvluir methods : guj. artibus
.:-;■•"■ : ■■■' - . EXERCISE 23. -;■ ■" ' '' —■;■"? ■ ',
1. After these matters had been settled, a war suddenly broke
outm the province itself. The cause of this war was as foUows. :
?!™"^"^^P^*««<ly««inchargeof us. 3. The enemy had con-
cealed thmr own forces in the same woods. 4. For the same
reason he feared our men would inflict injury upon themselves. "
6. I remamed wxthyouallthat time ; he returned to his own home.
6.,C»sarhad ttiese two legions and those of Croesus with him. :
J. They slew themselves m the very gates of the camp. 8. He
also thought this present war itself was dangerous to aU of us.
a Our cavalry, after encouraging one another, joined battle with
the enemy s horsemen. These latter at once betook themselves to
thenr comrades. 10. This muoh'he promised, that he would .give
them a safe passage through your province. 11. After their usual
former had taken up their position on the other side of the rivw
8»bw ; the latter were fortifying th^jr own t^wn.
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
B. (Cassar, Bk. V. 9, 10.)
38 1
1. These messengers came fipm those who were purtuing the
cavahy. 2 . On that same 'day they found out that their own vSssel
had been wrecked. 3. These reputed to him that the nature of that
place was as follows. 4. He himself forbadfe my advancing with
him. 6. He also has put you in charge of that'famous legion. 6.
We repulsed the enemy; you fled. 7. He learned that they had,
according to their custom, hidden thfemselvea in the woods. 8. I
wished you to advance to that river with ajfl your forces. 9. In
that place we caught sight of the Enemy's cimp. 10. These latter
had begun to blockade the very entrances./ ' , ___-^ ^
V C. {Coesar, Bk. IV. S6.)
1. He sent«aid to his comrades. 2, This alone i%^cking to you.
3. When he saw that these were putting our men tb flight, he was
himself alarmed. 4. These made an attack on those who had
landed from that ship. 5. He also ordered them to follow him.
6. He ordered our cavalry to attach themselves to t^at same stan-
dard. 7. We held our course ; they could not make the island.
8. Perceiving that the cavalry themselves were being thrown into''
confusion, he ordered the soldiers to follow their own standards.
9. The former hurl their weapons ; the latter man the boats, 10.
He perceived' that the enemy were in distress, and that our own
ranks were gaining a footing on tl^e shore. /
i^
.'-■■'.■■ •
, . .1
;-'--^^--:
S-,
; . .' '.-■.■' ■■'*::; ■■/ !^ .
, w
■ '■''•-.
■ ^. .. , ' ■
V'-"
* . -
'^ '":.-■'
-
»
r
•
«
w
d82
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
^ ii;
CHAPTER XXIV.
Ct Indepinite Pbonouns.
i ' Ant,- ^ '•
166. («) Quis (qui) means any, anyone, after «», nc, nttm»
and «om«, someone, after nm/ as,
^ any <me has heard anything he reports it to the magistrate : SI
qnls quid aooeipit, ad magiatr&tnm il6tert.
He ordered the soldiers not to hurl back any weapon : Multibus
Imper&vit neqnod t§lain rejicereut. *
(b) Qdisquam (substantival) means any one, and ullus
(adjectival) means t^iy, when all are excluded, that is, when
any has the force of any, even one, suggesting the idea of no
one or none. They are used in negative, or practically nega-
tive sentences ;^ as.
Nor was a/ny one found : Neqne repertns esi qalMiaam
The battle was without any danger: sine uIIq perloolo «r«t
proelium. '-,■>■ ■■ ■; . . -i (■'■ ' o, ■/''
i. Instead of non followed by quisquam or alius, Latin prefers
imnd, nihil and nullus; but wqae followed hy' quisquam or alius is
preferred to c« followed by imnS, nihil or nOXlus : as, They do not
expect any disaster ; Nullam o&sam ezspeotant. And nothing is
,^onsidered more disgraceful : Neqae turplns qaioqnam habgtnr.
(c) Quivis, QuiLiBET mean any, any one, when all are included,
that is, when any has the force of any you please, suggesting4he
idea of every one, all; 9»,
The vessels are buUt to withstand any vioience: ITftTSs faotae
•ant ad qaamvls vim perferendam.
.■.', -,,^,.- ''-' Some.
' 167. (a) Aliquis (aliqui) means some, some one (or other)^
wholjly indefinite ; as.
He bade them send some one : Jassit eon allqaem mlttere. '^'^'T
They are devising some new plan : Allqnld novl o5nBllll IneuAt.
1. For tmUiioa. rhetorical quMtiong, comt
WOll WWII MMfi) «fie, d^fi
MM nnnU iaiaf^
m'-
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
883
Even if some portion be sitrrtmndedy the rest can he saved: SI
p%r« aliqna oiroamventa erit, rellqnl serT&rl poMunt.
i. ^Mp*aw» has the force of oZijMM, but is much rarer.
^ (6) NoNNULii meajns some, some few, suggesting the idea some,
hdnot many; as, They lost some (or a few) of their men : Nonl
nulloB ex sals amiserant.
(c) IJbscio quis means some one or other unknown to the speaker ;
often, through an aflfectation of ignorance, it implies contempt : as.
Me fuia raised some rumor or other (or same tnAing nmor) : B4-
morls nesoio quid afflaverat.
i. Nesci^quis in this sense is treated as a single word, and as
such IS not followed by the subjunctive of indwect question. Simi-
larly nescid quo modd or nesciO qud pdctd, in stm^ toay or other.
(i) Sunt qui with the subjunctive (section 32) means some
(emphatic) or there are some who; as, /Some «aid; Brant onl
dioerent. f ^
(e) QuiDAM means o certain orui, a certain, of what one has in
mind, but is not anxious or able to specify further. Hence it is
often -used in vague deswriptions, meanihg a saH of; as,
^ of the soldiers said : Qnldam ex mlUtlbaa dixit.
The Romans have defeated us not by valor but by a sort of trick'
Non vlrtute vloerunt Bom&nl sed artlllold qaddam.'
(/) For (dim repeated, meaning some . . . other, see section
le», a, and for quu, meahmg some, see section 166, o. f
Other.
A-h^' ?• ,^"^® ^^^^^ ^*'^» another. When it is repeatel- in
different clauses, the meaning in the singular is one . . ^another:
m the plural «^ . . . others. When, in the same clause, it i
repeated in a different case, or is accompanied by a derivative
adverb, the meanmgjis, m the singular one . . . one, another . . .
anofW, in the plural «ome . , , one, others, . . ari>ther: as,
They fled in another direction: AUam in partem fugfirunt.
Home were filing the trenches, others were hurling weapons: Alii
fo»s&« oomplSbant. alii tela oonjioi«bant.
Some were carried in one direction, others in another ; All! aliam
in partem ferSbantnr. " «««m
>■ They believe one thing one moment, another another ; AlUa aUnd
«oL '^^¥',«'»;« or «^»**»- (and similarly after contra) Oe or atqw is
-g ma$mer w^y i^ff*iren^ frtm^^ far other tfm^^^
Gauls: Long* ali& ratlone 4i|kliqal Galll ^nm gerwit
S84
PRIMARY LATIN BQDK.
«u;.r
Venetl
u. Sometimes ahua repeated m the same clause is to be rendered
by one another; as, They lend aid to one another (or one to another) •
Alias alii sabsldinm fernnt. ,
. ^^j.J-Y^^^ ™^^s *^ <>*'^*"» the second (of two). When repeated
m different clauses, the meaning ift the singular is (the) om 1 . .
the other, m the plural (the) one paHy . . . the other paHy; as,
2%c one paH he gave up to the Ga^ds, the other he assigned to the
cohorts: Alteram partem Gallia concessit, alteram cohortibas
attribnit.
One division fled to the mountain, the other to the baggage : Alter!
se in montum receperant, alterl ad impedimenta.
(c) CixBEi and bbliqui mean the others, the rest, the remainder:''
as, "■ ■ , :/ ■ ". .^'" ""' ■;" • i- . ■
They differ from the others: Differant a ceteris.
The Vene^ and the other states also prepare fdr
reliquaequMtem civitates bellnm parant.
.Each.
169. (a) QuisQyis taeans each (of more than tujo),^ "every, and is
especially frequent with the iwflexive ;" as,
It is best for each to return to his home : Optlmmn est domnm
saam qnemque revertl.
i. With superlatives and ordinal numerals quisqne has the force
of c«en/ (or ott the); as, JSvery «law df noble birth: Ndbllissbnns
qoisque.- Every tenth man : Deoimus qaisqae. Primus quisoue
vaeaxiB the very first, the jWst possible. » -^
(6) Utbeqdk means each (of two), freely both; the plural utrlque
meaning both sides or both parties; as,
On each bank (or on both banks) they had viUages : Ad ntramqne
Vipam Ticds babebant.
That day both armies keep within their oum lines : Ed dl6 utrl-
q,ne sese sad loco >$iontlnent.
-.A^■■:-■^'■::^■■ ..;.:- V^EXERCISE 24. ■ 'v ■■•"■-■•: ,-■;./:
■; ', .,--■'-■■''■ I, - .;>:."■■■" -'A' , •-■•»- ■'■■*;■ ^' .
■' •/■^-v>' "'■ '■*•- -• •■■:'--!■■■';_ ' ^ ■ : ;- ■ -At ■■;,■■ .■'■■--'..■ .■ .. ■ '.«
I: They beheld certain of our men leaping down from the other
vessel. 2. They used to inquire what every one had heard con-
oeming e^ch matter. 3. Befor e he should make any answer,
1. For Hie agreement of eefm and re^tgui see fection 86, ivt &.
2; Wit4?ronounB quisque and wterq'te are used stibstantivel'
l i iifjuii; u>il,h ■iiliat-jMtln.j th^» *». .1.. I i i 1 1,— i— i- .-„. J
takjt^s th6 partltlvs
PART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. ^86
' he Qi^ered the others to be summonedto him.- 4. gome thought
- they could gain^the victory ^without a (=miy) wouii4. 5. It
would be bettor to puffer any fat^ at the hands of the Romans.
6. They will not makW»eace on any other terms. 7. The enemy
were advancing, some fr]^ onrdirectionyDthers froro^another. 8. '
When he saw that the enemy was pres^g him on each flank, he
suspected some new de^ had been formed. 9. If any pf the^
Gauls are captured, the r^t will soon surrender. 10. H« trusted
both the^dui and theReini, the one because of their ancient loyalty,
the other because of their recent services. 11. Scarcely any one '
perceived that some other plan must be devised than (tljey had
formed) jireviously. 12. Lest the flight of the Gfeuls should alarm
any, he pointed out that the Germans^ad woh by some trick or
6ther, rather thSiTBy their valqiK. . .
\y'
.S
B, '{OcBsar, Bh V. 11, 12.)
1. Labienussaid that he could build any number of fthips. 2.
There are some who say» that there is timber ii^ every ^rt of the
island. 3, If any workmen are summoned, they will be ordered to
repair thither vessels. 4. He put a certain Labienus in charge
of the oth^ legion. 5. Some were^born id the island ; others had
crossed over from the mainland. 6. Scarcely any one had discov-
ered that CfsBsar was leaving a garrison for both camps.. 7. ^me
think that the cold fs less intense in tljo-4iiterior ; others on the
-coast. 8. Others said that some place or othe»* should be dhosen.
9. Scarcely any ships have been lost j but some few miA't be
repaired^ ' - f 1
* 1. Killing some, they drove the rest from their ^ands. 2. ^o^
one said that the .Suebi" could withstand the power of any state.
3. la each state some think this a merit, others regard it as un-
manly. 4. If we wish anything imported, certain traders will be
given access. 5. We take pleasure some in one thing, others in
another. 6. Others thought that scarcely ^y state was more
civilized. 7. And they do not permit any' one to use wine. 8.
Lest they seize anvvessel, guards should be stationed on both
banks. 9. There ii|^ i»ntir|«. y^/. - -
reach another river.
2o «
•«i
V.
#
PRUfART LATIN BOOK.
lil
'M'
V^
CHAPTER XXV.
The RELArfvE Pronoun.
f
y
170. Qui, whOf wkich^ the relative or conjunotiye pronouii, is
regularly followed by the indicative; as,
The bridge whi^h was at Oetieva he orders to be destroyed: Ppn-
tem, qol'erat ad Gen&Tam, Jubet resolndl. /
i. The indicative is regularly found also after relative Hidvorbl,'
such as unde^ tt6i, gw5, ut^ relative adjectives such as qnMis, quan- '
tuSj and indefinite-relatives siuch as quisquis and qutcumqtte. '
- ii. For the agreement of the relative with its antecedent see
' section 13. > ' , . ,
. iii In. Latin, unlike the-^Ehglish usf^e, the relative is always
expressed ; as. The l'^)erty tve have received from pur fbref others :
Ba, llbertas, qiiam ^ majorlbas aoteptmng.
I iv. In the case of two relative . clauses coordinate with each
other, the second relative is generally omitted if the two relatives
would have the same case ; as, Mg prevails upon Dvmnorix, who
held the chief axUhority^ and i^Wvery popular with the common
people: 'Dtfmdbrlgrl, qnl prlnoip&tnio' obttnebat ao maxime
plebl aooeptut erat, pergaadet.- When the two relatives would
be in different cases,, as a rule both are expressed ; but sometimes
the .second is replaced by a demonstrative, or (if it would be in -the
nominative or accusative) is omitted ; a^, He has sent a man whom
we neither fear nor obey: Hominem,, qnem noqno tlmemna neque
61 par6mas, mlsit. ,
ly^,. Where the same preposition woiild be used with *bpth ante-
cMpBnt and rela^iver it is regularly omitted with the relative.
vi. The relative is often found in the ablative, absc^ut^ con-
struction. il
171. Th,e relative is usejl w^ the stihjunct'lmmahmim^ i j 1 1 1 1 1
clausesf of purpose (section 26), clauses of charactens^^ection 32),
and also clauses of concession and cause or reason ;' as,
Z ^lgg^^^O tcgro during all the previous days had kept the soldiers
*** ^^rllS^Sfct^ *^ «ewn</i dny he sent five cohorts to forage :
^*"^%^lBSr'?il^ wppiBrioreg digg mlllteg In oagtrig oontl-
■*"*f*^||^H»|»^«l*^|aInque oohorteg frumentatmn mlttlt.
• >J^!P^^F^^ ^^liM'***^ ^^^ *^ ^o'KMi'n^ cq^rry on, uvir,
'wnce^MlpJPn^l ofeie to W^ forward such mighty engines': N6n
f:
y.
or wtpote.
Th« OMtad tvIr^Iyq oentonoQ i^ ofteq introdxiceit iwa l^pl){^lI2e<l t»^ ^%»» t^
aronou^, is
lurf
I PABT v.— SYNTAX AKD COMPOSITION. ^ 367
oAtlonSa promovere posslnt/ '
172. The Coordinating Rilative.-^j is often used at
the beginning ofa sentence to introduce, not a, suboi^in^t©
" l!f ' ^"^ ^* ^*^"' ind'jpendent sentence, which it thiM, connects
m clearly with the preceding words than a personal or
r« (^onstrative pronoun, such as English uses, would do. The
m relative may belong either to a principal or to a subbrdinate
'Clause in the new seutenceV as,
y'or this reason the Helvetians mr^ss\he other Qaids: Qa&
de causa HeIvetlI*ell<m68.Gall6.praecedunt. ^ *"•«»*
Mamng completed this business Ccesar set out f(yr Gfodrf • Onibn-
'^^; «6»'«««« Cao8«P m Galllam profectn/e.t. * '*''*'*"•
JVh^ they peroeived them, they began to close. the gates: Quo.
cum oon»pexl8«ent, porta» olaudere ooeperuut. %
'occ^SeS.!- *''"°''J^^ peculiarities in the aneecedent are of common
(a) The antecedent is frequently omitted ; as, They do what thev
out : Allait qui dogndsoerent. "^
(6), The antecedent is often repeated in the relative clause, espe-
cially^the vords ««r., res, locus, diis; as. Dust ,ms seen inth^
direction, tn which the legion had marphed : PnlvU In ea parte
vldebatur qnam In partem leglo Iter fecerat.
^'^^Am!® antecedent is often incorporated into the relative dkuse •
. *• Where the relative clause precedes, an antecedept substantive
w often put in the relative clatise ; as, puit part which had cmtsed
the^jMster paid the penalty; Quae pars oalamltatem Intulwat
ea poen&8 persolvlt. /" •'
ii. Where the anteced^ftt is an appositive, it is Ks a rule pafc in^ '
the relative clause ; as, They hifutbit Kent, a country which lies
entirely on the coast: Cantlum Incolunt, quae reirld onwis
.marltlma est.
Jii. Somewhat similar is the transference of the -superlative or
other modifier of the antecedent to the relative «lause; as^ He
Ztli *^ * ^*^*™' «"»™ maxlmam habul^
(d) The substance of a sentence or phrase may be referred to *v
parenthetically by quod or id^quod; as, miMd them that after the
IT^ XlFL ^ fj^-^^'^^ ^^ ^ *^'^ i^xm^rfHWie case) they n^^on
f;
^
, «*«WCfc *^ Aw^TFraecgpit hostibug^n fugam conJectIs
Vqnod fore vid^bat) omnes peterent regem.
r<y
/■
388
^v
;
i
»
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
1'74, Thefirelative pronoun cw ill correlative sentences is repre-
sented ijy different words, according to the demonstrative in the
antecedent ckuse. . Jd!em is followed by qui, or by dc (atque).
(So also 2>a»* when used with the force .of idem.) Talis^ tantm
-and tot are followed by qiuUuy quantus and quot respectively ; as,
Our men resist in the same manner as on the prevums day :
^adem ratidne, qa& prldie, ab nostrlg reslstitar.
He was the same kind of wmn as I perceive yoM to he: T&lis
erat qai^em te esse video.
As (many, large, etc.) as possible is expressed hjqnam and the
1.
superlative, with or without the proper form of possiim; as, They
gaiher as vtuiny sh^ips as possible: N&vea qaam plurlmaa (pos-
•unt) cognnt. ' .,
ii. The antecedents talis, tantus, tot are often omitted ; as, They
assign them as much land as seems best: Attribaaut qaajfiliaiu
visum eat agrl. > ¥"
^ EXERCISE 25. '
":^V'-''-'rVV^'-^^^ A. ■ - ' - - V
1. The ships which he had built in the previous summer, were
ordered to assemble at once. 2. Nor could any vessels- be found
on which the cavalry could be brought- over. 3. Having made
these preparations, they fixed a day on which all were to assemble
at the banks of the river. 4. When they heard this, they with-
drew to tli^camp whence they had set out. 5. The same thing
will happen as has happened on previous days. 6. Thiis legion he
left to guard the camp, seeing that it was wearied with marching.
7. The number of those whe set out from^the country of the Hel-
vetians was three hundred and sixty-eight thousand. Of these,
those who xould bear arms were ninety-two thousand.! 8. Dis-
mayed by his advance, the enemy took to flight, although they
had gathered large forces. 9. These do not strive with as great
eagerness as they atfe accustomed to exhibit in battles on land.
10. The enemy suddenly came in sight of the cavalry Ceesar
had sent to the assistance of the JE^ui. 11. These are allowed
to go in safety in whatever direction they wish. J.2. He sent the
bravest horsemen he had with him to Vesoiitio, which is the
largest town of the Sequanfc
A {C(raar,Bk 1^.13,14.) ^ ^
.!■ Thoio who inhabit the diuli ' iot along the
oiviliced. 2. Ireland is not considered to be so large as Britain. 3.
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
889
imer, were
This island the Britons inhabit. These, seeing that they dye them-
selves blue, are of a hideous appearance. 4. When the ship was
^^ght to land at this place, we saw that most of the people were
^-Sladm skins. 5. The region which is called Kent is on the sea.
6. In this island they have nothing on which to live except milk
and flesh. 7. Although they are more civilized than the Britons,
they do not Uve on grain. 8. By these inquiries we foundthat the
nights are the same as in Britain. 9. The woad with which the
Britons used to dye themselves is thought to have produced a blue
; >; „ ;,- ■ '•(■"..' • , •
^ (Ccemr, Bh TV. 6-10.)
1. The islands which the river forms are inhabited by tribes
which live on birds. 2. When they heard this, they sent envoys
to Ceesar to ask him into what district- he was marching. 3. As
he suspected that they had formed some new resolve, Crosar deter-
mined not to move his camp nearer the Rhine. 4. There was no
tribe fer whom they were not a match. 5. The lands Caesar aUowed
the Germans to settle in were not of the same character as those
they had seized in^XJaul. 6. Being driven from home, these
tnbes had come to the Rhine, where the Ubii had lands. 7. If
these settle in Gaul, I shall assign them whatever lands they wish
to hold. 8. The Germans, although they cannot protect their own
territories, are asking to be allowed to drive out the Treveri from
their lands. 9. When he discovered their design, he made them
the same answer as he had given to the envoys of the Ubii some
days before. *
-d4-
'^
\ AN imw^
' . r
. -
*..--
•
k
':■■-'./■-''':':
t
V*
■_* -
\ ■
. . - ■
390 " PRIMARY LATIN ItOOK. . /
CHAPTEK XXVI. -
"I : -
- SUBOBDINATE CLAUSES IN INDIRECT NARRATION. /
175. In many of the preceding chapters rules have been given
for using, now the indicative^lRow the subjunctive, in subordinate
Glauses introduced by a relative or conjunction.
But all such subordinate clauses are put in the subjunctive
when dependent on a clause in indirect narration, that is,
on a clause which is itself dependent on some verb of stating
thinking^ perceiving, ordering or asking. The indicative
should never be used to express any portion of this quoted
words or thoughts of another ; as, , ^
Tie ansioers that he has been sUent as long as he has been able:
Bespondet qnatndiu potuerlt se taoalase.
They thought they UH>uld recover the hostages that they Jiad given
to Crassns: Sd obstdes qnds Crassd dedisgent reoiper&taros
exlatim&bant.
It ivas observed tltat our men were scarcely suited to an enemy of
this sort becaiise they could not follow up a retreating force : Intel-
leotum est nostrds, quod Inseqnl oedentes non possent,
minus aptos esse ad hujns flrenoris hostem.
.He ordered them to avxiit his arrival in the place cohere they
then were: Eios In ed loco quo tniu essent sunm adventnm
exspeotare Jnssit.
He asked why Ctesar demanded this if he did not think it right:
RoK&vit our Caesar, si non aoqnum existim&ret, hoc postu-
l&ret.
i. An apparent exception is found in the use of the indicative in
subordinate clauses that really form no part of the quoted words
or thoughts, but either are parenthetic or explanatory additions
made by the writer himself, or are the writer's substitute for some-
thing actually said or thought ; as.
He ordered the cohorts wfiich were on guard to set out unth
him: Cohort^s quae In statldnlbns erant s^cum prolloisol
Jnsstt.
Cce$ar suspected that that nnmld happen which did
fore id> quod aooldlt, susptoAbAtur.
/ .
■mmt DMiMw
Here qtme in stationihus erant formed no part of the order given,
while a»-«uch^ clauao aa q%tod accidU oould possibly have boon in
Cttjaar's mind.
i^ltlf V,— SYNTAX A^P COMPOSITION.
Mi
V 176. The sequence of tenses ia observed ui these subjunctive
clauses, primary tenses following primary and secondary following
secondary. In narrative, secondary sequence is the rule, the
present and future indicative becoming the iinperfect subjunctive,
the perfect and future perfect indicative becoming the pluperfect
subjunctive (see section 187, b).
But sometimes for^the sake of vividness the primary sequence is
used in narrative, the present and future indicative becoming the
present subjunctive, the p^tfect and future perfect in<ficative
becoming jfche perfect sulljjunctive. (See also section 190, vi.)
177. ViftTUAL Indirect Narration.— The subjunctive is
used in any subordinate clause which is conceived as ezpress-
iing the words or thoughts of another, without any formal or
explicit statement to that eflfect. This is called the subjunc-
tive oi virtual (informal or implied) indirect narration; as,
He offered great' reuxirds if they succeeded in carrying the de-
spatches through: Magna proposait praemla al litteras por-
(alissent. (Here propo^uit is equivalent to se daturum esse poUi-
citus est.)
They led part of their troops across, in order* if possiUe, to storm
the fortress: Partem «aarum odpl&rnm tr&duxirant ut, at
possent, oa8tellam expugrnarent. (This represents the original
thought si puterim^is, casteUnm expHgnabimus)
The enemy we^-k waiting^ in case our men should cross the marsh :
Paludem al no^trl tranalrent hoatSa ex|peot&bant.* (This
represents some such thought as si trdnnlytmt,^adoriemur.)
He gave vie aU W books that (as he said) his father had left :
Omnea llbroa qaoW pater aaaa rellqaiaaet mlhl don&vlt.
For other examptes compare the subjunctive with quod, dum
and priusqnam (sections 147, 155 and 156).
i. A cladse. dependent oh a subjunotive, and forming a 'close
connection with it, is sometimes itself put in the subjunctive by
attraction, without in any way being in virtual indirect narration ;
as. So profound an impression ttxis produced by this war anumg
the barbarians, tluit envois u^ere sent to Ccesa/r by those tribes
which dwelt beyond the Khii^: Tanta hujaa belli ad barbarda
opinio perl&tu eat, ntl ab lla n&tlonlbaa qaae tr&na Rhinuin
Inoolerent, mittejrentur l^gAtl- ad Oaeaarem. Th^ drove the
: cavalry before them in such a^panic that they ditt not cease from
their Jli^ht until they came insight of our army: Bqnliia Ita
perterrltoa igdrikht^ at non j^lna tngh dftaUier*nt qnam In
^
1. Bodi a clahaa tMina to have (Iw vali
protaait in virfcuM indirect norrfiUoa.
of -Ml indirect queation, but it realljr a
> I
.t
392
PHIMARY LATIN BOOK.
n
eonspeotam affmlni. no«trI venUsent. Whm Jui failed to
tnjluence him aa he de»ired, he sent by night to the king the most
trusty slave Ae had : Quem cam mWas qu»m velleft moveret.
nootu d« aervU «ula quem habult fldellsslmum ad re<rem
d«oi* '''^wfu™®*!"?®® "^""^ *** illogical extension (by mistaken
analogy) of the subjunctive of virtual indirect narration, in which
the verb of saytng or thinking is expressed, and is itself put in the
subjunctive ; as, He begged to be left in Gaul because, as he said, he
\was prevented by reli^tmis scruptea: Pet^bat «t in Gallia relln-
^qaeretur, quod rellgrldntbas impedlrl dioeret (for quod reli-
t^ibus tmpediretu/r), i ^ ^ «- /«»
EXERCISE 26. "
t He promised to send all the cavaliy he had with him. 2. He
believes that if the ^dui are crushed, the rest of the Gauls will '
disperse to their homes. 3. Cffisar feared that the same thing would
happen as had occurred on the previous day. 4. We were waiting
in case the Gauls should attempt to break down the bridge. 6.
Having offered rewards to those who should first mount the wall
he gave the signal. 6. He order«id Labienus. whom he had put in
charge of the damp, to hinder, by whatever Veans he could, the
enemy from crossing that river. 7. Ccesar complains because the"
j^ui have not lent him aid. 8. The enemy swarmed around in
hopes of finding some means of approach. 9. Word was brought
that Offisar would send the cavalry by the sftme road by which the*"
enemy had gone. 10. He inquire^ how many miles the to^ in
which they dwelt was from the <^mp. 11. Driven by hunger, "
they secretly went out from the «|imp to see whether tliey could
'find any grain or^tfcle in the field^. 12. They gave reasons which
(they held) were perfectly vali^
Ir
V. IS, 16.)
:m
(B, Cassar, Bi.
1. He observed that when our men had an engagement with the
«hemy, the cavalry never fought in close oni^r. 2. He feared that
if the enemy were driven back our men would pursue them too
closely. 3. The two cohorts which Caasar M sent to reinforce
— — ■■—•-■ ■ ■ _ '■ ■ , ■■- ■ ■ ■ • ■■• . i
' ; ^ • ' - ' ' " ■ ' t i ' ■ , ^ -
,L.w*/!;!^^°^fir*,?P°g> ^* fifeofwmf, tynfa/wnt Mid w/ fet. tnato^d of incol,banL
^4-
«>•
PART v.— SVNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
3^3
our men,; he ordered to drive back the chftrioteer» who were boldly
breaking through the cavalry. 4. They were waiting to see whether
,our men would foUov those» who were designedly retreating into
the woods/ 6. He thinks that our men will not dare to attack the
charioteers, because they are not suited for this kind of fighting.
6. They asked w|iat brought the same danger to the «avalry and to
. those who had leaped down from their chariots. 7. He had not
posted guards, on the grciund that all the soldiers were busy fortify,
ing the camp. 8. He perceived that if our men left the standards,
. the enemy rushed out of th^ woods aiid slew them. 9. They gen-
erally fall back towards, the hills until they have withdrawn our
cavalry from the legions. ".
: C. (Cceaar.^h. IV. 11-14.)
1. He ordered his men to defend the camp as long As they could.
2. They begged him to give no time for employing treachery, to
.those who the day b^re had put our cavalry to flight. 3. They
thought that the ene^ would not join battle until their cavalry,
who had gone across the Meuse, returned. 4. He waited in hopes
that they would accept the terms he had offered. 5. He perceived how '
much prestige he would gain if he forced his way into the enemy's
camp. C. He intends to put to death all who deceive him. 7.
They said that they had brought all their leading men and soldiers,'
as had been arranged. 8. Enraged at the thought of {quod) the
enemy having treacherously slain our cavalry the day before, he
ordered the env6ys who had come to the camp to be detained. 9.
They brought wordHihat? several of our men had been slain, among
them Piso, whoso grandfather had been called friend by our senate.
. ■ ■■-^,;-.-> .' »'■ ■. .: ■ ..... - ...... ■, -•■ ■
*
/
.■■■■.,: . -^ , ♦... ■ . ■■>■- ■ «
«
— i- "• .
< - , • V . ■ -
- - :S ■*,-,'/-' ^
< •
< ■. - M . ......
r
394 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
CHAPTER XX VIi; ^
Tenses" of the Indicative.
178. In the general use of the tenses Latin differs from English
in two respects : "^
i. There is no distinction in form corresponding to the English
Progressive,^Indefinite^and Emphatic tenses, except that the Latin
imperfect and perfect nearly correspond to the English past pro-
gressive and past indefinite respectively. .
ii. Especially in subordinate clauses Latin is more exact than
English in indicating both the point* of time (present, past or
fqture),' an^'alsopriority of action in relation to the main verb ; as,
Whenlj^ndoutyl shall inform you^ if lean: Cum odgrnoverd,
f aolam te *oertl6reni, si poterd. (Literally, Wfien I shall have'
found out, I ahaU inform yon, if I shall be able.) . ; ^;^^^^ v '.-
; 179. The present tense is used ■ -^ ' "■
* ' (a) Of what is going on now at the present moment ; &a. They
. are iweparingr /or tyar; Bellum parant. ^ ^,
. (b) Of general truths, and of continued, repeated or habitual
' actions or states ; as. Fortune favors the brave : Fortuna forte»
adjuvat. Those jin the interior dp not sow grain : Ihterlores fru-^
menta non 8erai|t. > '
(c) As an historical pi'esent,. in animated narrative; as, When
^ the news vxus brought, he makes haste to set out : Cum Id ii€intl&-''
turn esaet» xnaturat profloisol.' V* * * Y
- (rf) To express an action attempted or intended in present time
(the conative present) ; as. They are trying to avoid danger : Perl-
;: _ 5 . oulam vltant. ''^^^'
•\ . (e) With jam and its compounds to express actions continued
from the past into the present, where we should expect the per-
• feet; as. He has long bee» collectiiuj troops: Jamdlu odplas com-
parat.
if) With dum (whiU), where wq. should expect the imperfect
(see seption 163). ^ w'
* -*J.^: 1 180. The imperfect tense is used ' _ „, _i^ ^ ^" : l '^:^:^:^
Mil
f
(a) Of wliat was g<yng on in past time ; As, He was uHutering in
Oaul : * In Gallia hiemabat. r
.J*
l.?1[n l»tU r » th» Writw r often t r awirfwmhlm M lf in thought to- <
and uses th« imiterfcrt and plu|i(!rfccl itmtcad of the present and perfect ; aa, / AaM
nothing to write : Nihil habebam quod acriberem. * .
oplas com"
» ol the readefr
r - ^
^AKT V.__sYNTAX AND CPMPOSITION. 395
(6) Of continued, repeated, or habitual actions or state» in n.».f
time, like the Englkh past indefinite; as, ^^"^S wSv
lead hutropps dut daily: Cotldlfe pr^aiebat o^J. /TS
the greatest confidence in this ^e^n ; Tuto lei^aSi '"onfld^w
maxlme. He coxdd not discover amithino-^tf^i oonndgbat
gestingrepeated faUures^^;^^^^^^ ^«17^/^^*, 7a
concilia uon venlebant (implying repeated refusals)/
,•«„ ^ T® appropriately i. to express one's usual way of think
l^'n^fr?*"^ ^^rf^^ or feelings which accompany ^onsSeS
(while the perfect is used of coming to a dfecisiimV |^""f^^®^5»?n
, Situation of aflairs; iii. to give ^hTc^iS^S^^^li^,:^
^ describe the process as opposed to summing up the reTiSt • iv f^
men ion the natural featur^ of the scene ^^t o^^, '" "^
ii^Ju^ ^^P'^ *? ^*'*^^'*^ «attempted or i^tended or begun in oast
fame ( he conative imperfect) ; as, They tried to preven!^Z^
^ lZ\'^\o!S:Z^r^''-'^' ^^ proceeded trstiruptLTly
Af) In the case of possum, oportet, tfefrea and such verbs
express lack of correspondence with fact. '
. ^181. The PiUTURB is used to denote' what will take ulace at sn£«
J^trii. "' ^""^ "^' '"^ ''' ^"^^ 'y »^:%tT.:i:t:
rir!; J!^^T ^"!"'^ ^T*^ ^^^ P^^««"*^ i" » subordinate claiise refer
ring to future fame, Latin uses the future when ^ho l^f ;
contemporaneous (section 178. ii.). Sn^rTlSion JM, T •""
^ 182. The PERFECT is used
r:io%^'^!i,*^®^"^^'^^ present perfect, to denote an action com.
' The perfect narrates; the imperfect describes. The nerfect
(«) In 8uborfinat« clauses to denote an indeflnitelv reoeated
396
. PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
S
(e) T;b denote the present state resulting from completed action ;
as, He is dead: Mortnus est. They are gone: Dlsoesserant.
We are surrounded : Circnm ventl aumns. This is especially the
case with c6nsu^i% I am accustomed ; meminl,, I remember ; and
ndvly I know (literally I have become acciistomed, I have called to
mindy I hgj» learned).
Similarly the pluperfect of these verbs has the value of^the
imperfect, and the future perfect the value of the future.
i. The perfect tenses of the passive have sometimeis ful, fueram^
fueroy instead of «wm, eram^ erd. The form with fui generally
implies that the condition spoken of has ceased to exist.
ii. A sort of perfect is formed by habeo and the perfect participle
passive,* emphasizing the continuance of the result of a past action ;
as, He has large forces collected : Magna» odpias ooaotaa hubet
Similarly for the pluperfect fca6e6am is used.
183. The PLUPBRFECT is used '*
(a) To' mark an act as completed or taking place before some
point in pkst time mentioned or implied : as, TJiey had by this time
reached the territoi-ies of the uMdui : Jam in.Aedadram flues per-
'Venerant. !,--*.
■ rf- ■
(6) In subordinate clauses to denote an indefinitely repeated
action, preceding that of the main verb, which is in the imperfect.
^Section 149.)
i. Sometimes Ceesar uses the pluperfect instead of the perfect in
referring to previous passages in his Commentaries. ,, ,
134. The FUTURE perfeot is used to express something com-
|>leted or attained by some point in the future ; as» Meanwhile they
will have gone : Interim dlsoesserlnt.
i. Where English has the present or present perfect in a sub-
ordinate clause referring to future time, Latin uses the future
perfect when , the action of the subordinate verb is prior to that ofi
the principal yerb (section 178, ii.). Sometimeii where two future
. actions are regarded as identical, one involving the other, the
future perfect is found in bbth clauses ; as, He who crtishes Antony
will {thereby) finish the tear: Qui Antonlum oppresserit, is b^l*^
lum odnfeoerit.
ii. The future perfect is sometimes used to emphasize -the com-
pletion of a future act ; as, J at least shaU have my duty done (or I
at least shall be foiind to have done m.y duty) : Ego oerte mouni
offlotnm praestitero. It thus may come to give «issuraiice of
rapidity of action ; as. The first attack wUl carry the camp forth-
wiJth: Prlmn» Impetna ca»tra cfiperlt. '/ , ^
'1. Oompare in English / haw the Utter imt(«n, with 7 have vnriUen the letter.
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
EXERCISE 27. „ "
A,
397
1. To.this legion he always showed especial indulgence.' g/lf
you assist the enemy, I shall bum your villages. 3. The Druids'
are accustomed to hold aloof from war, and do not pay taxes. 4.
Afteriie had learned this, he thought he ought not to wait longer.
5. If Cee^r IS at the head of the army, we shaU easily conquer the
. ", A "^*"'^^^ *^'^"8^ the forest of Ardennes, which
extended from the Rhine to the Nervii. 7. By this means they
^sought to temfy the others. 8. While this was going on, the
enemy had already reached the territories of the ^ui, and were
laying waste their lands. 9. On the following day they move their
camp two miles. 10. Whenever he saw his men in distress, he
gcrnld send reinforcements. 11. For tha reasons which I have
Pientioned, Ciesar wished to set out for Britain. 12. Before mid-
fliignt the enemy will be gone.
■ - ■ .■■ '^" ■ ■■-'■-",.■ ■-■-"'.-'." 1 ^ ■■ ' .-'.-.
. 1. The enemy are rallying. 2. When Cfflsar learns this he will
send forward the legions. 3. Whenever our meii make an attack,
the enemy betake themselves to flight. 4. They were accustomed
to leap down from their chariots. 5. For a long time they had
been contending with their fuU force. 6. Whenever they began
to forage, the enemy would suddenly show themselves. 7. As
soon as all the forces had assembled, he proceeded to cross the
river. 8. The enemy's forces are drawn up on the hill. % While
the cavalry was foraging the enemy had v^ithdrawn.
^^^,, ,_ _.^ , „ C. {Ooesar, Bk. IV. 16-19.) -^ >--^ - f-^-
1. He did not think it right to give them permission to cross! 2.
After the army had begun to be led across, they held a council. 3
If they lay waste these lands, I shall detain the envoys who are
with me. 4. They were afraid of punishment, because they
remembered what they had done. 5. They sought to keep Csesar
from lending aid to the Ubii. 6. When the Romans have the
courage to cross the Rhine, we shall assemble. 7. He gave a
kindly answer to whatsoever envoys came to him. 8. Whenever
he punishes the Germans, he inspi res fear in the f^^^til. o w^n^
Tie^was staying there, the cavalry was burning the enemy's build
mgs, cutting down their crops and breaking down their bridges.
•V
398
I'i
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
\
CHAPTER XXVIII.
^ ' iNDraECT NaUration — Oratio Obliqua.
186. Direct Narration {Oratio Becta) gives in thejr original lForm
the words or thoughts of any person. '
Indirect Narration (Oratio Obliqua) gives (in depAidence upon
isome verb of stating, thinking, perceiving, ordering or asking) the\
substance of the words or thoughts of another person, and even of
the writer or speaker when quoting himself. .'•*,;
This indirect mode of reporting speech is more usual il^iil^in
than the direct, and is much more common in that langiisi^^ithan
it is in English. -«V
The rules for changing Direct into Indirect Narration •ifiw as
follows: / " .
• ^. Changes IN MooD.^ .
\ •-■ . "..-,.• -^ ".,■■' ■ . ■ .
186. 1. Principal Clauses.
° . -'ft wi. ,. ■ •
(a) Clauses containing a statement (assertiv^ «sentences) have "
their verb in the infinitive with subject accusati^' .(Section, J.4u)
(6) Clauses containing a question (interrogative "sentencel^ have
their verb in the sTtftjnwctii'e. (Section 36.)
i. Indirect deliberative questions (section 134, (2) retain the' sub-
junctive.
(c) Clauses containing a command or request (in^erative sen-
tences) have their verb in the subjunctive. >v
i. This use of the subjunctive is closely related to the substan-
tival final clause (section 27), both being developments of the inde-
pendent jussive subjunctive (section 134, 6). It is thus sometimes
difficult, if not impossible, to distinguish the reported command
and the substantival final clause, especially after ne or when \d is
omitted (section 28, vi.) ; as for instance in the sentences, Nuntll
postalabant bos slbl ddderent : The messengers demanded that
they sJix)uld surrender these m^n to them. Multibus Imperatnm
est nA hostSs aggrederontar : The soldiers were given orders thai
i^y ^undd not attack the enemy.
a. Subordinate Clauses. .. :,;.... . . .
All kinds of subordinate clauses (relative,^ temporal, conditional»
causal, etc.) are put in the svhjuru^tive mood. (Sectioi^ 175.)
). IQ no 01^ 1$ th« indiofttive rotaitied.
. ■ /
PART V.--SYNTAX AND COMl>pSITION.
399
^ . ^- C^GEs IN Tense/ . ,^
187.* (aXXJlauses put in <|he infiniti^ ch&n^B» follows !
;^ ^ DIRECT NARRATION. r / lyniRfcL NARRATION.
Present Ind. ^ 7 ' becomes Present Infin
Imperfect, Perfect- : )
or Pluperfect Ind. |
Future Ind. S
Presenter Imperf. Subj.^ |
Future Perf. Ind. V
Imperf. or Pluperf. Subj.V jl
ye;
(I
Perfect
Future
Inf. in arum fuis8e\
»f»
II
DIRECT NARRATION. ^ INDIRECT NARRATION: \
FXure ^' ''' - ^J- ^"'^'""^ ^'"«"^^^"^i- Imperfectla]^. ^
M
M
II
II
II
-II
II
II
II
Imperfect
Perfect
II
II
M
II
II
II II
II : „'
Pluperfect n
^11 II
M
'ii
Future n
Imperfect n
* Perfect „
Fut.lferf. „
Pluperfect,, „ .• „ Pluperfect,, „
Th^t,^u^^^''T ^«^'"^^^«^ever, in indirect q^mtims : , . ,
Ihe future indicative becomes (according & sequence) the
• pe^^t^^S^tc^^Stte?^ 11 '^"^-^ ^^^
fJ:^^^^'^ importance is the use of the pluperfect subjunctive
for the future perfect mdicative of direct narration. The difficult
fnf,^rl ri^T"^ T '? ^"^ ^"l^^^y- ^ t^« ^a«t <^hat the o7i3
Thr//f 'i ^' ^TT 5^„*\" .^^8*^«^ idiom (section nsfi?.)
\ ;1^' .{-I-^"^ ?^\ ^ '^^'^ f>^ word: Bl cognoieri
M anemia bnng back word: ttespondlt 8l odirnovisset hA r«
nuntlaturum e«.e. The pluperfect subjunctive £ such «^e^
means hteraUy shmdd have, not had already.
*
V* G Changes IN Pronot^
188. When, as is generaUy the case,» the first and second per^
'\
.5:
r
1,
0' *^.\
'■ \ ■
V _ ^
In the apodosis of a conditional sentence,
^^'^T^T^ss^^r^^.rs^^
-lo whonV t ig",;;^;t6d3rUkrFCiri^ ""^ ^t!^-" reporting or the ^emolT
indirect narration! ^ ' ^" "^.^^^ *"* ^' «^"^* Pe"»"» in
>■
r
400
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
sons of the original words are changed in indirect narration to
the third person : ' .„ ,
Ego, nos, become se (or if emphatic in the nominative, ipae, ipA).
Mens, noster, n suits. . . ' ,
tilt vo«, - II illBy iUl (of sometimes is, et). ^
tuus, vesier, n illltis, illdnim. '. .. ',
hiCy^istey ' ii ille (or is). -^ * "^ '»
i . D. Changes in Adverbs, y * '
189. Adverbs which are relative to the time or place of the
speaker are, as a rule, adapted,, to the; time and place of the re-
porter. Thus nufic, hodie, hlc^ hinc, heri would become respec-
tiv§ly turn or time, Uld' die, ibi, itide, prldis.
* 190. The following real or apparent exceptions are found :
i. Clauses introduced by the coordinating relative, which are only
apparently subordinate, are put in the accusative and infinitive.
u. Because of the tendency in Latin to use the same construc-
tion aftef gttam {than) as before it, the accusative and infinitive
sometimes occurs in qxuim clauses instead of the subjunctive. ■,
iii. For the indicative in parenthetic clauses in indirect narra-
tion see section 175, i.
iv. The hortative subjunctive (section 134, a) is usually changed
into the infinitive of the passive periphrastic conjugation.
Rhetorical questions which are virtual denials are of ten put
V.
in the accusative and infinitive. _ ,.
' vi. Instead of the. i?egular secondary sequence the more vivid
primary is often found aft;er historical tenses ; and sometimes also
a passage may begin with secondary sequence and suddenly change
to primary sequence. ; . . ^ ^^
vii. The pronoun hlc f^nd the adverbs mentioned in section 189
are often retained unchatiged in indirect narration. , /.
tiii. The regular rules for the use of se, Ule and is in indirect
' narration are not always rigidly followed, especially where no
ambiguity arises. See particularly the use of se and siiiis in sec-
tions 164 and 165. .
191. ^The verb of saying, thinking, etc., on which the indirect
narration depends, is not always expressed, being often sufficiently
suggested by the context. ' , "*.
Further, where the indirect narratiai includei0nore than one
variety of reported utterance (statements, commands, questions,
requests) it is not Latin usage to change the verb introducing
the various indirect clauses, as English,Q|jben does.
t;Mort vivid beq»wej>w8«a^°8S*<»>*^^*"'^^y ^^^ original tgrnHf i H nf the diraot
muration
/
pration to
ipsfi^ ipal).
ce of the
of the re-
le respec-
nd:
h are only
nitive.
construb-
infinitiye
bive.
act narra-
y changed
often "put
ore vivid^
bimes also
ily change
ection 189
•If
n indirect
where no
,iis in sec-
ii
Le indirect
jufficiently
than one
questions,
itroducing
of tti fl dirg ^
PART V. — SY
AND COMPOSITION.
401
,m^*Tr*%*'?^/'''"*'''* ^^^ <^«^^ ,^ying thai he wufi^ td treat
«nJV/|tm ahmd thsse matters , . .' and mking him to appJnta
*' lowing fo^ms'^r'^''^ narration conditional sentences assume the fol-
SI quid habeo do, rdldt se. si qold habeat, dare.
becomes \cHxlt se, 8l quid haberet. dare, '
' ®^**^*** '?*''«'».»™idlclt 8e, 81 quid haberet; dedUso.
^ dabam. become \dlxlt se, 8l.quld baberet, dedlsse
SI quid babul dedl fdlcfit 8e, 81 quid babuerit. dedlsse.
becomes ^d< 8e. 8l quid habul8.et, dedl88e.
. dabo. becomes \dlxlt «e. 8l quid baberet. daturum e88e,
SI quid babeam fdldt se. si 4nld habeat, daturum esse,
dem, becomes \aUclt ne, si quid haberet, daturum e»se,
SI quid haberem/dlclt\8e, 81 quid haberet. daturum ful«.o
darem, 6ecom€5 (dixit/ (or ease).
®^^«Hf ''"^f''*"'l*'*'"lf!L^' ^"** Habuisset, daturum
. dedls8em,6ecome«\dIx|*jr — fulsse.
^ 193 Thj following examples illustrate the rules for changine
from durect to mdirect narration • ^'"««ging
(1) Direct.— Your gift is pleasing
j and welcome ; the hos-
tages will be in the place
you ask; the prisoners
• we shall not send back,
because Hannibal, through
whose agency the war was'
-r undertaken, you keep even
now in .command.
Indirect.— -(ThiB answer was
given them:) that their
gift was pleasing and wel-
. come; the hostages would •
be in the place they asked ;
the prisoners they should
not send back, because
Hannibal, through whose
agency the war had been
• undertaken^- thoy Jcepfc—
Munus vestrum gratum a?-
ceptunique est ; obsides,
quo loco rogratls, erunt ; -
captivos noQ^emlttemus,
quod Hannibalwn, ciijus
operf susceptum bellum
eSt, «tiam nunc cum im-
perio h^betls. '
(His respSnsum est:) mflnus
llldrum gratum accep-
tumque esse ;n)bside8,
quo loco rograrent, futa-
ros ; captivos non remls-
«uros, quod Hannibalem,
■ cujus opera susceptum
bellum esset, etiam nunc
cum imperio baberent.
even then in .command.
26
JIL
402
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
■M-"-
(2) Direct. — All of you make your
attack on the ship of Eu-
menes alone, against the
rest be content merely to
4efend yourselves. You
- will easily accomplish this.
I shall see that you know
in which ves&el the king is
sailing ; if you capture or
^ slay him, you shall be well
j^warded.
Indirect. — (He gives instruc-
tions) that they are all to
make their attack on the
ship of Eunienes alone,
and against the rest are to
be content merely to de-
fend themselves. They
: wyuld easily accomplish
that. He should see that
they knew in which vessel
' the king was sailing; if
' they captured or slew him,
they should be well re-
warded..
(3) IMrect. — We are not th« ag-
gressors in making war on
the Roman pe6ple, but yet
we do not refuse to fight
y" in case we are attacked.
. > 'I'f. yo," desireufiui: good-
,A will, ^we can be useful
J ' friends to you ; either as-
sign us lands or permit us
to hold 'thSStar^-wUjcb^ we
have acquired by our arms.
Indirect. — (They said) they
were not the aggressors in
^making war on the'Roman
:": people, but yet they did
not refuse to fight in,i»se
they were attacked. If
the Romans desired their
good-will, they could be
OmnSs in tlnam Eum^emis r6gis
oononrrite n&vem, S. c3-
tetia tantura s^tis habete
■ Tos def endere. Hoc facile
.: odnseqaetninX.^ Rex au-
' tem in qua navl vehatnr,
ut solatls, ego faolam ;
quem si aut oeperltls aut
lAterfecerItls,mSgno vo-
bls praemio erit,^
(Praeoipit) omngs ut in Onam
Eumenis rSgis oonoar-
rant navem, fi c6terls tan-
turn satis babeunt «e dS-
f endere. Id 11 ids facile
o6nseoaturo8. Rex au-
tem in quS, Mvl veherd-
tnr, ut Bolrent, »6 fao-/
* turam ; quem si aut oft*
/'plssent aut Inter fftols-
aent, mSgno iu praemiG
fore.
N6» noque priflrBs populS R5-
mftno bellum Inferlmns,
Deque tamen reoan&mns^r.
si laoessemar, quin armis
oontend&mna. , Si nos-
tramgratiam vnltlrf, poa-
■nmaa Vdbla AtilSs esse
Htnlol ; vel ndbia agrSs) ■
attrlbnlte vel pat4i^ua
eOs tenSre quQs armIs poa-
aedlmut.. ,,
(DixSrunt) «ft neque priOrSs
populO Rdm&nS bellum
Inferre, neque tamen re-
oua&re, si laoeHantar,
quIn armiR contendant.
Si ■aam gr&tiam Rom&nl
vellnt, poaae Ua tltilSf
eWHft a mt«ft « f v a l «tlit-
a-
7
•v
useful mtads tdihem; tot agrOs iittrtl»iiiiat, vel m
P^to v.— SYNtAX AND COMPOSITION.
403
'-iM
/^
y
tiML.
them . either assign them
lands, or -permit them to
hold those^which they had
acquired by their arms.
(i) Direct.— I c.an Jiave no friend-
ship with you, if you re-
main in Gaul; there are no
lands vacant in Gaul ; but
if you wish, you may settle
^^ in the lands of the Ubii^
whose envoys «re with me,
jj—^'-'- and are asking aid of me ;
'fe ' I shall give this order to
* theUbii..
Indirect. — (Cassar answered)
that he could have no
' . friendship with them, if
*:_ they remained in Gaul;
;^ there were.no lands va-
cant in Gaul ; but if they
^ wished, they might settle
in the lands of the Ubii,
whose envoys were now
with him,, and were asking
- aid of him ; he should give
this order to the Ubii.
(5) Direct. — Let them not provoke
the enemy to battle, but
if thev are themselves at-
tacked, let,them hold their
ground, until I myself
come up.
Indirect. — (He sent men to tell
them) not to provoke the
. enemy to battle, but if
they were themselves at-
tacked, they were to hold
their ground, until he him-
self came up.
^6) Dirtct. — Surrender to me those
who have made war on me
and on Gaul.
. The Rhine ia the limit of the
ilbtttatt p«6|3le'R authority:
tiantdr eds tenSre, qu5s
armls possedorlnt.
Mlht nulla voblsonm aml-
oltlu esse potest, si in
Gallia, reman^bltlg;
nequeulllinGalliS, vacant
airri ; sed licet, si valtis,
in Ubiorum finibus con-
/■ sidere, quSrum sunt IS-
gfttl apud me, et S. me
auxilium petnnt ; hoc
Ubiis Imperabd. J
(Oaef^r respondit) slbl nullam
wtMW his amioltlam esse
posse, si in Gallia rema-
n§rent ;' neqvie ullos in
GalliS, vaoare agrros ; sed
Iio§re, si vellnt, in Ubi-
6rura finibus consldere,
quorum sint IggatI apud
•e, et a 86 auxilium po-
tant ; hoc se Ubiis im-
peraturam.
NS TiostSs proeliS laoessant,
et si ipsi lacessontnr/.
•ustlneant, quoad ipse
V Mcoesserd.
(Mittit qui ntlntiftrent) nS
V hostSs proelia laoesse-
rent, et si ipsi lacesse-
- rentnr, snstlnerent,
quoad ipse aooesslaset.
Eds, qui mlhl Galliaeque hel-
ium Intolerant, mlht
dMlte.
Popqll RjSmftnl impi
Rh«niia flnlfe. m
erium
ti in-
If you think it wrong for vltC GermftnOs in Galliam
404
PBIMABT LATIN b6oE.
the Grermans to cross into
Gaul against your wish,
why do you claim that any-
thing beyond the Rhine is
under your sway or power ?
Indirect, — (Caesar called on
them) to surrender to him
those who had made war
^- on him and on Gaul. -
(They answered) that the (Besponderunt :) Populi R5-
Bhine was the limit of the man! imperium Bhennm
Roman people's authority'. r fXnIre ; si se invito Ger
transire non aequum ex-
Istimas, ctirtalquicquam
esse imperii aut .potestatis
trans Rhenum poatulas ?
(Oaesar postul3vit) eos, qui
slbl Galliaeque bellum In-
tullssent, sibl dederent.
If he thought it wrong for
the Germans to cross into
Gaul against his wish, why
did he claim thi^t anything
beyond the Rhine was un-
der his sway or power?
(7.) Direct.r-Do no harm to the
Trinobantes, Cassivellau-
manos in (ralliam trtosire'
non a6quum exlstlmaret,
ciir 9al,quicquam esse im-
perii aut potestatis trluxs
Khenmn po9tal&ret ?
Noll, Oasslvellaane, Trino>
bantibus noo6re.
■ ■ ■ '-.i- ■ ■-■,"■ ■ . . . , ■ - - -^y t
Indirect. — He orders Cassivel- (Tmperat Oassivellaand) ni
launus to do no harm to Triuobantibus nooeat. .^^
the Trinobantes. 'I^
(Observe how the vocative may be turned in the indirect speech.) ;
EXERCISE 2S. 1
. ■ • * ■■ - ',. ■
1. To those ambassadors he replied : ** I will come now, if you
are ready to follow." 2. Thfey sent ambassadors to Ceesar saying -
that they were ready lo op«n the gates they had closed the day ^--^
before. 3. He told them not to forget the former valor of th«; - • '
Helvetians, nor the wrongs done by them to the Roman people.';
4. ** I," answered he, "have spared the citizens, you the Gauls."! V
6. He began to urge them liot to set out ; Ceesar did not dare toj
leave them in Gaul ; but if they crossed over to Britain, he would»
kill them all. 0. "Leap down," he said, "fettow-soldiers, unless ^
you wish to abandon the eagle to the enemy. Let us not incur
such disgrace. I at any rate will do my duty." 7. They replied
that if these prooeediny u»r ero reported^to Arioyiatug, thej did not
douH thtl'lie would inflict the Mvenat puaistuoent on all iM
I
^ g
£
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
405
?he
and
I
I'
\
•1.
hostages who were in his power. 8. Whit were they to do
asked ; it was impossible to defend the camp any longer^
Caesar would have been annoyed if they had set out withou.
orders. 9. In his consulship (he said) the Germans" had m.
eagerly sought the friendship of Rome. Why shoMd anyo
imagine that they would forsake their allegiance? 10. Woul^
they have sent Commius back, he asked, if he had not led his
ftrmy across? ,
B. {Cceaar, Bh V. 19-Si,) >
_j !♦ He pointed out that if the cavalry wa-iidered too extensively,
the enemy would rush out from the woods and seize them. 2.
• ♦♦ We shaU send you all the corn we have," they answered Csesar!
•• Why are you setting out with the legions ? Do not make an
attack on our town." 3. He said that ^this young man would have
' had suprejne power if he had not been slain by Cassivellaunus. 4.
" Let us cross the river," they answered. " Who can harm us if
we are able to conceal ourselves in the marshes ? " 5. The Trino-
. bantes sent envoys to Caesar, saying that they would surrender to
him aU tho' hostages he demanded and begging him not to suffer
the soldiers to lay* waste their lands. 6. They feared that if
Caesar allowed the legions to leave the line of march, the enemy
would seize many bf the soldiers. 7. They said they were accus-
V tomed to assemble in these towns, wheneveithe enemy made a raid.
^ 0. (Ccuar, Bh TV. gO-gg.)
1. He said that this had happened very opportunely ; for if he
had set out for Brita[in, he would not have found suitable harbors
2. "What was I to do ?" he asked. " Was I to trust myself to
barbarians t" 3. He ordered him to explore whatever isUnds he
visited and bring Jlim back word of the size of their harbors. 4.
He was aware that Commius, who had been made king there, had
' , discovered his design and would report it to the Atrebates. 5.
' * Do not land from the vessel, " he urged Volusenus, « * We have
done All tVt C&sar ordered. Lot us return to Gaul." 61 " How
- many legions," he asked, "were sufficient last year to make war
on Britain?" 7. Envoys came from Britain to Ceosar, saying that
- they wished to attach themselves to his alliance, promising to be
faithful to thu Ronum peuplo and nut t o f urnis h aiettoT^Gi^
and asking him to visit tho island at his first opjwrtunity.
PRIMARY lATIN BOOK.
CHAPTER XXIX.^ .
Different Forms op the Noun Clause.
\ -
'A^'
194. A noun (or substantive) clause is one that takes the place
and discharges the functions of a substantive, whether as subject
or object of a verb or equivalent phrase, or as Vkti appositive^ to some
other word in the sentence. . ^
N.B. — ^The accusative and infinitive construction is here treated
as a noun clause because it represents the English noun sentence
ntroduced hy the conjunction that. Similarly in substantival
clauses of result, and in clauses with quln and quominm, the''
erbial notion of result or purpo^ has become so weakened that
the^are properly treated as noun clauses like their English equiva-
lents^
1. CWses, like infinitive phrases, fwe always regarded as n^euter.
.|'# j».^ ••,;i05. After verbs of saying and t/iiWaiw/, many so-called imper->
* Z ^^'yX^naX verVf^ and many expressions corajjiosed of a neuter adjective , .
'■,V'''-1 'li|nd «^^ EMlish noun clauses with that alte expressed by the accu-
gftlive and infinitive.
''1<^,
•* .u
'.
''<a) Subject\--Jt is not riffht' that the Oei-mdm sihorild cross *the.
^itl^ : Non aeqaum est Oerin&nos Ilhenuin translre.
' (6) Object. — Theythmight they posaes^d limited territories: An»
^ <-'.p>' \ Vu*t5s sS flh^s habere arbltrabantur,
*' " (c^ Appositive. — This report was bronght to Cceaary that they wefe
attempting to march through our iprovince :• Caesuk^ Id nuntlAtam
est, eos per prdvlnolaiu oogtrain iter faoe^e o&narl.
196. After verbs of ordering, asking, dderminin^, and verbs of
fearing, English nouit clauses with tMt are expressed by clauses
with nt or ne and the subjunctive. This subjunctive is akin to the
subjunctive of purpose, and like it is in its origin the subjunctive
oxiK-essing will or wish. (See section 186, 1, c. i.) ' .
(a) Subjeqt. — The soldiers /wiiy been given orders that they are to ^
^tack the enemy : MUltibua iinperatum est at |]io«fi§s aggredt-
.antur. " ' ■ ■• .'.;■ *".-" "
(b) Object.— T fear that Tmay be deikrted hy oR : Vereor nA ab .
omnibus deserar.
(c) Appositive.— Their aim is thai they may recover thsir liberty :
Id agunt at llbert&tom reoiplant. V ; -
•1. A noun clause \» oocMtonally uwed aa n reltfictive appoaitlTO to nn lioouaattve ol
ipoai
MtiClpHton ; M. *'»H k t u n v Mat'imUm, hvw kI d w fa r-wr . Ho»tl M « r e all u m t q u» n*-
tardus tit. They/eand that auppli49 could not be broxight in ; Rsm f rumentftriam
ut Bupportari posast timsnti ; i ' , •
m
*.
St^M
) place
subject , '
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
407
imjSer-v
j active /.
e accu-
197> After verbs of ha/ppening and caiisttujr,' English noun clauses
with that are expressed by clauses with ut and the subjunctive,
which is a weakened subjunctive of result.'
.(a) Subject. — It happened that tliere toas a full moon: Aooldlt
ut esset plena luna.
(ft) Object. — He brought it about that supplies could be conveyed
unthout danger: Commeatua ut sine perXotilo portarX posgent,
efflolebat.
(c) Appositive. — TTie day had this res^dt, that a very great num-
ber of the enemy were wounded : Die» hnno habult eventum ut
maxltnns tiostlum numerus vulner&retnr.
198. English noun clauses with that hiteT verbs expressing
emotion, and clauses with that = th^ fa^t thalj are expressed by
clauses with gnoci and either the indicative, or the subjunctive of
virtual indirect narration. ,
(a) Subject. -^T/iere iwm also the fact that he had stated this in
th^ assembly of the ^dui .* AooMebat huo quod In oonollio Aedn-
drnm haeo dixerat. • •
■^^ (ft) Object. — He comptainsr that he has, been ahandotied: Qiiod
■It d^atltutns qnerltur.^
(c) Appositive. — A most fortunate thing happened, that the n^xt
day the Germans cam^ into tJie camp: OpportunUalma res aool-
dlt, quod postrldle Germanl in oastra v£n£runt. ,
(d) Adverbial Accusative. — As to the fact that you threaten me
ymi urill not disregard the wrongs of the ^dui^ no one has contended
loith me, except to his oivn destruction : Quod mlhl denuntl&a t£
» Aoduorum Injuriaa non negrleoturum, ngnio m§oum alne aa4
pernfcjle contondlt., . • , - <
199. After verb& of asking, learning, hnoivirig, telling, etc., Eng-
lish noun clauses introduced by an interrogative are expressed by
an interrogative clause with the subjunctive of indirect question.
(o) Subject. — It cannot be determined with t)te eyes in lohieh
direction U flows: Oonlfa In utrakn partem flnat Judlo&rl ndn
poteat. .,■■■,'.»
(ft) Object. — We found out what was being done .'t^dgnSvlt quid
yfrerStur. , ^
1. Substantive clauses of result with «fare also found as subjects of such verb» and "«.^
phrases as nequitur, regiat, relinquitur, reliquum e»t, jtu e»t, mon eat, eunituetudo eat. >.
2. The BubstJintlve notion became so much more prominent than the notion of*.
^b■^ll^ thnt this rn nitnifitlon name to ba luad in caaw whera not evan tho faintwt
trace of result can be dlaoerned.
8. Hera, aa often, the substantival and causal notions an combined.
,f .'
■:* ,
• 'l
408
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(c) Appositive. — This is tJie real queatiouy whether he Jias returned:
Iliad qnaeritor nnni,. redlerit.
- ■ " I:'"'" *■'**--■' ■- \ \ ■-
200. The same verb may have more >than one construction, the
difference of construction in most cases representing a difference of
meaning:^ ' ■,;- ••■■■:/-;■••■ '- - *;■ ■ V S- :'''-- :
- (o) Thty determine that these should leave the tov}n : Comftltannt
at hi oppldd exoedant. %
They determine that it is best to, return: Cdnatltnont Oiptlmnm
esse revertL * - ,.-;'';,,* • ■. '■ '-d-'--^ i
He determined what tribute Britctin skotild pay : Quid veotXgaits
Britannia penderet; oonstltnit.
' • ' ■■■•■■»' ^
(b) Word was brought that they were not to dtfack the enemy/
Kuntiatnm «st'ne liostes proelio laoesgerent. (Compare sec-.
tion 196, c.) ;; •' ,. '
" (c) There wds also the fact that they fought in small groups :.Ae-
o&dibat li4o at rarl proeli&rentar. (Compare section 198. a.)
N.B.— Itjls itnportant to^distinguish carefully (a) between sub-
stantival clauses with thai and the purely adverbial clauses of
purpose and result also introduced hy,^that, and (6) between sub-
stantival interrogative clauses and relative 'clauses with omitted
antecedent (section 39, v.). \
» EXERCISE 29. "''
^" •■. ^ , ■•■•■•.■ ■ -*' . ■-.
1. It is bes|; that w» should announce to th^ soldiers that they
are not to provoke the enemy^ to battle. ,2. They madf the com- •
plaint that, the enemy were laying waste their lands. 3. The
result was that it was quickly ascertained what tribes inhabited the
island. 4. There was a danger ttiat it would be difficult to deter-
mine what should be done. 5. There wds added the fact that he
•had stated that Caesar had confefred the chief power upon him.
6. It happened that some. of the soldiers were intercepted by the
sudden approach of the cavalry. 7. It was reported that Cresar
had given orders to the soldiers to storm the enemy's camp. 8.
By means of messengers he informs Ceasar what he thinks should
be done. 9. He answered that he did not know why the soldiers
had received orders that they were to attack the town. 10. There
=4f=0
lfaMrra1ttHi1^^i;lKiua wliiubtOlldwrVerui ui vmmrmmmg, annownnng, teumg,
111 Ite in the ipflnitive or subjunctive, aooordlng to the rules of indirect narra-
•to.,wHl _
tion (section 186^ a).
Wiig;mn6uncing, ieUviig~
\l
PART .V.-^IyNTAX aWd COMPOSITION.
40a
8.
\i
■i*':
isnO/douM thatth^elvetians' ar^ the most powerful; 11. He
w)^ of the opinion thit ifc would be dangerous to the provincje that
the enemy should bedome accustome dj to cross the Rhine. 12. This
report had been bro|4ght, that the Germans had betaken themselves
■ tp the woods. / , '■'■^ , : '; /Ij- ■ ■■■ ■ ^' ■ ' ' - ^
•1. There waft ad^ed the fact that some ships had been driven
bick. 2. TMs report had been biSught to Cassivellaynus that .
CsBsar had determined to lead his forces back to the mainland. 3. ,
When he Md determined what to do, he announced that they were
to wait forf the vessels. 4. There is danger that Ccesar will deter-
mine that/ all the legions shall winter in Gaul., 5. It happened
that the^hips in which he had ordered that the enemy should be
taken bick had been lost in the storm. 6. Ceesar complained that
they ha|a. not paid the tribute. 7. He announced that the best
-(optimis) thing was for the envoys to fritter away, the rest of the
summtr. 8. The result was (qud factum est) that Csesar was not
•aware how many losses had been sustained. 9. As to the fact that
you ai inounce that the equinox is at hand, I am aware that the
army fiust be taken back at one tVip.
a {C(Bsar,_Bk. ir:s3-26:f' ^^^^^^^^^^^'
1. Ill happened that he perceived that some were in distress. ,2.
He praW the^ods that aid might be sent him. 3. Csesar had
warnedlthem that they were not to land from the Jship. 4. He
warned ihe soldiers that the country was perfectly jfemiliai* to the
enemy bk unknown to them. 5. There is added the fact that he
perceived this would be of great service to him. 6. They had
learfied what Csesar had pointed out should be done. 7.. He com-
plained that the men were doing their work too-slowly. 8. This
has been determined^ that the lieutenants iRall point out to the
soldiers what Ceesar wishes done. 9. The science of warfare de- -
mands that all should do their duty.
—^ r-- -r,*p ,-• — - - - ......
* -
410 ^ PRIMARY LATIN BOOK." *
■A»
, ' CHAPTER XXX."
\ , Continuous Narrative Prose.
201. Passages of continuous narrative set for translation into
Latin prose may conveniently be arranged in three divisions of
increasing complexity : Jirst, those passages in. which little njore is
V required than in the detached sentences heretofore given for
translation, namely proper choice of words, correct inflection and
observance of the rules of Latin syntax ; second, those passages
T"^^^ ' ^^ in addition, the phraseology requires alteration, either to
adapt the passage to Latin idiom or to avoid difficulties arising
' from a limited vocabulary ; and third, those passages in which-
some alteration is necessary or desirable not merely in phraseology
but also in the structure or relation of sentences.
The three following sections discuss the chief points to be ob-
served in each of these divisions.
^. ' Connection of Thought. ? »
f' 202. Even in the simplest kind of narrative passage it will not
do to treat the component sentences as 6o many independent units. .
Latin differs very markedly from English in regard to the connec-
tion of sentences. If a modern book or newspaper^ be compared
with such an author as Ceesar, it will be found that in narrative
English it is the exception rather than the rule to give, formal
expression to the connection of thought, while in narrative Latin
"~ th6 reverse holds true. *
. Hence the general rule that ajf the fceginning of each new sen-
tence care should be taken to nritke plain the conneption in thought
' , (a) The usual means of expressing the connection between son-
. tences are as follows :
, . i. Particles such as atqne, nnd moreover; neque, and not; at, but;
autem, hoivever; verd, hut indeed; itaque, therefore; nam or enim,
for. , ■ ' '
ii. Pronouns, especially the coordinating relative qtii (section
^ 172) and the demonstratives hiSt^Js^ iUe, ipse and idem (sections
168-163)..
iii. Words or phrases whose meaning suggests a reference to th»
. preceding context, such as interim, meanv^iile; ita, in this way;
i ^m,, 4heii upon t t^, it^ thal^^^
. ■ 1 '*
,' \ ■■?<&
as cattadf for the same reason ; accedit quod or ut, besides this.
■i
i'K
%
V,
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
411
et^sl
'^ (6) Where the sceS^shifts and a new actor comes upon the
. ^'Sfcage, Latin is generally careful to inalrk the change of subject corii/
'.viA the sentence. If the new subject has been mentioned in the
preceding sentence, qui, hlc, is or (for emphatic contrast), ille are
^ -generally used; if it has not been mentioned, a substantive is
ufied, as, for instance, Ccesar, hostes or nostri. In the latter case
f ' yery often none of the (Connecting lintcs mentioned above is used ;
■^•- -^iapparently the contrast afforded by the change of subject .is in
/^ ^ such cases felt to be a sufficient mark of connection.
'\ *' On the other hand, where there is no change, the subject is
seldom indicated in Latin except by the persona^ ending of the
main verb of the new sentence.
'"" I' ' ■ : ---..----.---^ . „ ,-
(c) It may be noticed here ^hat Latin prefers as a connective
neque (or nee) to et followed by »t5n; and similarly nee qiUsquamt
nee HUva, nee un^fiMm are preferred to et nimOf et nUllits, et nMm'
- . ♦ PHRASEOLOdT. : v
'. ' '■ 1 - .•-.■■- ^ _ ■'■ ,
» ' ■ -'- . '■■■-.'■'
, 203.0 Before an' English sentence can be turned into idiomatic
Latin, it often requires remodelling and adaptation (in whole or
part) because 6f differences in the form of expression preferred by
. each language. In our own language, as we know, the same
thought may be expressed in many different ways, and of these
some are sure\ to be more, some less, like the form of expression
a Roman woula>dioose. So it often happens that when at first it
would seem impossible to turn some English sentence into Latin
because it conta^s some words for lyhich the student knows no
Latin equivftWt, the whole difficulty is easily solved by expressing
the thought of the sentence in some other way. But again, even
when the student does know aLaUn equivalent for each individvud
^oord in au English sentence, he may yet fail to get a tolerable
* rendering, for the, reason tluix Latin may put the whole thought
' into a f^m quite unlike th^English.
To a certain extent diff^enc6s of phraseology between Latin and
English are matters of detail that the inost complete vocabulary
could not fully treat, but certain general rules may be given which
—r^~- have a very wide a^pplicatiop. These rules are really illustrations
' of one great principle : that the genius of the Latin language is
above all things direct^ definite and concrete^ like the Boman char-
ac fco r i ta^ff^
«««*«*««*■
atiye.
-./
/i
412
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
;^ Hence the general rule for narrative prose, first to see clearly
what is th^ exact meaning of the English phrase, and then «to
express that meaning in the simplest and most direct manner.
Some important special applications of this rule are as follows :
(a) Awid' metaphorical or picturesque expreMons. Very little
moderp English prose is as simple arid direct as Ceesar's style;
much even of our everyday language is in fact highly metaphorical.
In narrativa prose, the best plan is to avoid figurative Language
altogether ; translate thj9 thoughts and not the words. So, for
example:
He left no stone unturned .-^Nlhil praetermlsit.
He turned a deaf ear to this advice : Quod odnsiliam ndn Dro-
bavit. '
He sacrificed friendship ^njhe alta/r of patriotism: Amioltiam
reX publloae posthabult. ""■ — — w ,
Where figurative language is found in Latin (as in Cicero's ora-
tory and Lfvy's semi-poetical prose) .we cotistantly find either that
a simile is referred to the metaphor or that the metaphor is quite
different frcfcn the English one, and even then is apt to be toned
down by taniquam, quasi, quidam, etc.
(h) Avoid abstract forms of expression. Latin has fewer a^bstract
words than English, and those it does possess it uses much^
sparingly than we do, many of them being found only in
sophical writings. The number of abstract words which can «.x^x v
be ventured upon, in narrative prose is very limited, such as ami-
c^ia, auctdritas, cHeritas, magnitudd, studium. Almost invariably
the English abstract expression should be turned by a concrete
Latin phrase ; as, j
On the conclusion of this tvar ; H66 bollo oonf eotd.
On the receipt of this information: Quod cum nuntlatum esset.
They promised submission to his authority : Ea quae imperasget
•e fact ur OS poll ioltl sunt. _ T
L^ InCcesar'sconstdship: Caesare odn«nle*
His measures: Ea quae» faolebat.
Ifipursxiance of his annwil ciustom :^Vt qnotannU oonsno^erat.
So the indirect question furnishes an equivalent for many ab-
stract words (sefe section 37) and the vagtfe word res often affords »
convenient translation for various wofds such as circumstances,
situations, measures, etc.
Similarly Latin is very deficient in class names which express
the doer of an action, such aa fugitive, defender, coml)^tdnt, dis-
coverer, believer. These can generally be expressed by the verb •
^•g-y f'ugientes or el qui fugiebant. *
(c) -^^^j^ ^^ personification of t'nommate
I»" '
things or of qiMlities,
Latin Betdom represehfe 4ny thin^ "But a living thing as the doer of
some action, while English so constantly makes inanimate objects
#
/••->?
PART V.—SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
413
or abstract n6uns the subject of a verb of action that we scarcely
notice the personification.
Casar'a sitdden approach frightened them into sufmdaai<m: Cae-
saris repentlno adventu oommotl, legratos de deditlone mit-
tant.
The darkness of i^ night hid us from the enemy : Propter tene-
bras* hostes nostros non oonsplcatl sant.
^ed (done v^l save tis : fjn» est liji oelorltate posita salus.
His dying vxnxls : Ejna morientlH verba.
(d) The chief weight of the sentence falls in Latin Upon the verb,
whereas in English there is a tendency to make the noun the sig-
nificant word. So for English phrases consisting of some Anem-
phatic verb, such as make, have, take, do, etc., followed by a verbal
noun which is the really significant word, Latin often has a verb
which contains the meaning of the English noun within itself ; as,
JBe made reply to me: Mlhl respondit.
He funs no hesitation: Non dubttat.
He took his depoHure : Dlsoessit.
This verb is often accompanied by a cognate accusative (see seo-
ion 72) in the form of a neuter pronoun or adjective ; as, ^
'**^ Hiey can do no harm to us : NlhU nobis nooere possant.
X'^--^e made mxiny promdses : Malta pollioltns est.
They make the same attempt: Idem cdnantnr.
This idiom is especially noticeable in the impersonal use of the
passive voice of intransitive verbs (section 56) ; as,
' , Mention has been made of him : De illd dictum est.
There must he no delay : Non ounotandnm est.
(e) The active voice is preferred to the passive in the leading verbs
in narrative prose, because of the desire to state exactly and natur-
ally w*hat takes place. But as Latin prefers to keep the same
subject throughout a period, the verbs in the subordinate clauses
and In participial phrases will often be passive while the main
verb is, according to rule, in the active voice. Two important and
frequent examples of the use of the passive are the ablative abso-
lute construction, ^nd the impersonal passive construction.
(/) ^f^ precise n%eaning of both English and Latin words must be
dosdy watched. It will seldom happen that a word in one language
corresponds exactly in all it« uses to any one word in the other.
i. For instance, in English very many transitive verbs may be
used intransitively also, whereas in Latin this much less frequently
^ occurs. L» such cases the intlransitive use is expressed sometimes
~ by the passive voice, sometimes by the active with the reflexive
pronoun, and sometimes by a quite diflFerent verb; as,
move (transitive), moTftre ; (intransitive), movgrl.
. J^rremfer (fapBmsitive)» dfid e ro4- ji^tranm
increase (traniaitive), aagire ; (intransitive), orSsoere or
*^ angrerl.
r"
414
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
ii. Again, many English words have widely different meanings,'
according to the context ; as,
'M;et^£ (burden), onus ; (influenc^^^uotorlt&s.
Rome (the city), Boma ; (the nation^T popnlns Bdmanns. '
./{e2c{ (piece of land) ager ; (battle), acies or proellnm.
ask (make a request), peto ; (put a question), qnaerd.
commcmd (give an order), Imperd ; (have authority over),
praeitnin.
; iii. An entirely different source of mistakes is the fact that many
English words derived from Latin originals have in the course of
time taken on a very different meaning. For instance :
obtineo =holdy possess;
oooapd = seize;
otBLoinm =dAity;
reoipto =' recover, regain;
■Scurns = free from anxiety;
obtain =odn8eqaor, adlplscor.
occupy =oht\ntib. ^
office = maglstratas.
receive =aooiplo.
secure =tutas.
(gr) Omit unnecessary and m^dy ornamental epithets. Some .
English writers are fond of heightening the effect by adding words
or phrases that may adorn tU^ style, but add nothing to the mean-
ing. Thesia may safely be omitted ; as, The enemy uhxs awaiting the
approach of our {gaUa/nt) leader. They aim^ their weapons par-
ticularly at the horses {of the enem,y^s cavalry).
(h) Here also it may be in place to call attention again to the
precision shown in the Latin use of the tenses, especially i. in sub- .
ordinate clauses referring to an action prior to that of the main i^
verb (sections 178, ii. and 187, b, i.);«ii. in the tenses of the par-
ticiple (section^ 41) ; iii. after verbs of p'ommngf and hoping, etc
(section 17). In one important respect only is Latin less exact
than English,,, namely, in the frequent use of primary sequence
, after secondary tenses (section 190, vi.). , ^
„ Structure. ^
: 204. It may happen, however, that all the preceding rules about'
syntax, connection and phraseology have been carefully observed,
and yet that the result is far from being good Latin prose. For it
may be that the English passage is constructed in a way that is
very unlike Latin usage.
Modem English narrative is apt to consist of a series of detached
sentences, each comparatively simple in its structure, generally
short, and containing very few terbs. "^ Classical Latin narrative is
more apt to group several of these crisp sentences into a longer
and more complex sentence, making the ve^ which expresses the
main idea the principal verb, and putting the others in various
Itubordiiuie relations. ~- ~
1
J,
saningsj : " '^^
^ . ■'' ' ^ ■
nns.'
r
».
er),
•
1" *
it many
ourse of
. ■ .' .
plsoor.
■■■■■* >■ "'
J., "■.■'--. "*
■ - - :
Some -.-
g words
V
e mean- " " .
itmg the
yns par-
i to the
in sub- .
le main ^
he par-
',ng, etc.
)s exact
;'■'■ ' i. - ' '
equence
)s about'
" ,
)8erved, ^^^^
For it
that is
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION
415
-* Again, even when English does have a long complex sentence,
it is more loosely constructed than the Latin, period (section 9).
In the Latin" period (as in the Latin short sentence) the main
thought is, as a rule, not complete until the final words are given ;
the period Is intended to be grasped as a whole ; grammatically it
may appear very involved, but the thoughts are marshalled in a
perfectly logical order. While in the English long sentence (as
often in the short sentence also) we seldom find the main thought
left in susiJense until the very end of the sentence ; £he final words
are not th6 emphatic ones ; the thought is intended to be grasped
in detaiL ' ' ; — «c- wr"
Gontraat the following passages : „
Our men thin marched back to camp. Not a mnn had been
killed, and very few wounded. Yet they had expected a formidable
' campaign, for the enemy nuftibered four hundred and thiHy thousand
men. Nostrl ad unnin onines inoolames perpanels valneratig
ox tanti belli timdre, cum hostinm nnmertis oapltam qnad-
ringrentdrom triglnta mUliam faisset, se In oastra recene-
runt. *^
In the elementary stages of the writing of continuous Latin
prose. It IS not necessary to study very closely the formation of the
Latin period» which, after all, is by no means invariably employed
by even the most careful Latin prose authors ; the following sug- ^
gestions, howeveiw will be found of importance for even the be-
ginner, ^v
^(o) Arrange the various clauses of a sentence in the logical order "
of thought, which in narrative commonly means the order of time.
Put all clauses or phrases expressing attendant circumstances before
the mam verb, and put last the clause on which the emphasis falls. '
Ihis will generally be the principal clause, but see section 6, ii.
(6) Reduce the number of principal verbs by grouping short
independent sentences that relate to a common topic into a com-
plex sentence.
(c) Within this complex sentence or period, avoid as far as pos-
sible changes of subject. The subject of the main verb should, if
exprefwed at all (section 202, 6), appear early in the sentence and
be made, where possible, the subjept of the dependent clauses also.
ffli^?**,^^® ^^ ^^"^ °^ inserting a subordinate clause in the
middle of the clause on which it depends, but the loosely joined
parenthesis should be carefully avoided.
^ Even^ whew-t h e r e i a n o need for -f rog
'»(»>
into a period, it may often be convenient to readjust some of the
sentMices
>
•*w>iiM«jiir
416
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
1
clauses or phrases in the passage for translation, shifting them
from one part ht the sentence to another"^ even transferring them
t<^the preceding or the following sentence. For instance, in the
passage : On receiving this news he led his forces against the enemy.
His marchy thmtgh rapid, was so conducted as to save the troops from,
all fatigue, the translation is simplified by 'transferring the idea of
marching rapidly to the preceding clause : Quae cum aadlvisset,
odplas udv«r»ui^ hostes quam oelerrime duxit; Itk tanien at
mllltes labdre et itlnere non defatlgatl slnt. similarly, in-
stead of representing one action as the result of some preceding
action it may bo more convenient to represent the/ latter as the
cause jof the former.
2d5. Some miscellaneous differences of idiom also deserve notice
(a) English often expresses emphasjs by means of the verb to
generally followed by the relative pronoun or adverb ; as, It was'I
who did it. '" Piso was thefitst to readi the camp. Latin has nothing
corresponding to this, but expresses emphasis by otjher nieanaj as,
Ego feoL Primus ad oastra pervenlt PXao.
(fc) Latin constantly tends to look upon an actio|ri as proceeding
^rom a certain source or quarter, where in'^nglish it is considered
as happening Mt>* that quarter ; as, He fought on Jwrsiback : Ex eqao
pugnabat. They attack our troopsi^ httth flanks: Nostros ab
utroqne latere agrgredlantar. ^e^also section 128, v.)
(c) In Latin, demonstrative and ^ative pronoun s (especially hlc)
referring to some previouA n^ffl^OT the substanc^ of a previous
clause are put in agreement^;Jl^^^^ noun, instead lof in the objec-
tive genitive depending on It; iWlish has frequently this same
condensed form of expression ; as, TKrau^hfear of mis circumstance
(or through this fear) : B^'ineta { = Hujus ret nietn).
(d) In such, expressiona as Th&^rewd Vabhisl Tour 'excellent
father. So brave a manias you, Latin usfjs an appc^^itive with the
superlative in agreeinent ; as, Fablus oailidlaalmas Imper&tor,
^ater tnaa vlr o,ptinvuH, Ta vlr fortlaaimna. When, however,
such euifehets have no bearing on- the context they should oe
-tMnitted altogether (see section 203, g). \ ^ '
(e) This jjfreat ^i^lr^ularly in Latin hlo tantaa notWio m&gnas.
^ (/) Latin freJ^uently uses et or -quo to join adjeWives, where
''^Einglish omits the connective ; so especially with mvll^ ; as, Many
greiU contests : Multae et m&gnae ooutentlon^a. \
(g) The Latin adjective or participle frequently has the value of
a noun; as, noatrl, oitr nun; omnia aua, all their property;
•aplentea, unse men, philosophers ; fuglentfta, the r^etrekttng force.
..r"
ng them
ing them
e, in the
e enemy.
Hyps from
e idea of
llvlgset,
kiuen at
arly, in-
treceding
ir as the
'e notice,
erb to 6(
It waa'I
I nothing
iansj as,
oceeding
nsidered
Bx eqnd
itros ab
) .
ially hlc)
previous
lie objec-
his same
ximstance
'excellent
with the
perator,
bowever,
lould 1l>e
n&gnns.
)8, where
bs, Many
I value of
wroperty;
ng forc«»
PART v.— SYNTAX AND POMPOSITION.
417
/
' EXERCISE 30.
(Based on Ccemr, Bl\ IV. 1-^.) ^^
In the foUowinf year a large number of Gauls crossed the Rhine
for the purpose of harassing the Ubii and keeping them from tilling
their landa They thought that by this means they would make
the Ubu tributary to them, and that theumen and boys whom they
captured in war they would sell at a high price to the SuebL These
latter were desirous of making the Ubii as weak as pcisible, because
they thought it disgraceful to permit any tribe to become accua-
tomed to dwell not far from their territories, andljelieved that if
the Ubn were driven out, thfrTencteri, who adjoined them oh the
other side, would not venture to remain. The Suebi have large
experience in war ; they are able to endure any toil, and they use
r skins for (pro) clothing. Prom childhood they are not allowed to
do anything contrary to custom, and to be refined is considered
unmanly. On account of (propter) the character q| their food and
their daily training under arms tkey ^e men of immense strength,
and are said to be the most warlike of aU the Germans.
^ EXERCISE 31.
{Based on Cassar, Bk. 7V. 4, S.) . '
The tracers were compelled against their wilNo halt and Btatd
what they had learned in the districts through which they had been
wanderihg. At first (pnmoy they pretended to have heard rtothing.
, At last they informed Ceesar'^at the Menapii whom he had driven
out of Germany had returned secretly to their villages, that a largo
part of their cavalry had crossed the Rhine and Were putting to *
death those who dwelt on this side the river. Knowing the fickle-
ness of the Gauls, and fearing they would be anxious for a change,
ho thought he ought to cross the Rhine and, after crushing the
: Menapii, seiae their boats. Before he could reach the river, how- *
ever, they had been informed of his approachjand had placed guards
•Jong the banks. Being unable to advance, he halted for three
days, in order to discover what plans the Gauls were forming.
«T
^
••MPipfinififaf^PfPii
418
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
.EXERCISE 32.
^ {Based on Cceaar, Bk. IV. 6-8.) .
Hearing that tho Germans, after seizing the lands of others, had
begun to wander far and wide, and were but a few days' march
from him, he determined to set out for the army. The leading
men of the Suebi, who were with him, suspecting what he was
going to do, asked to be allowed to remain in Gaul. To these
Caesar made answer as follows : " I hav^ set out unwillingly earlier
than I am accustomed, in order that the Suebi and their depen-
dants may not begin a more serious war than I wish to meet. I
shall not allow the Suebi to drive out the friends of the Roman
people fron» their homes, and I shall assign no lands to those who
have invited th^ Germans to make war upon the Treveri. No
one can be more useful to you than the Romans ; some think that
we are no match for the Gei'mans, but there is no ono wh^m we
are nob reAdy to resist. If you ask aid from us, we shall protect
your territories ; if you should wish to settle in Gaul, we should
give you lands. But it is not right for tljose who have been the
aggressors in doing wrong, to complain and beg for mercy. This
was not the custom of your ancestors. "
* EXERCISE 33. ' '
/ ' {BcHied on ae«ar, Bk. IV. 9-lI.) I
When these^ ambassadors returned* to Cresar they said they had
reported his demands to their friendi^ arid that the next day the
leading men of the tribes which inhabited the Vosges range would
assemble to discuss these matters. Meanwhile, they said, envoys
were being sent to beg the Helvetiananofe to cause delay, but to
accept these terms, and that if he should give them lan opportunity
of returning beyond the Rhine they would keep the Sequani from
fighting. . ij
• Thinking that he ought to wait until all his amy should assemble,
Caesar said that he would not move his camp that day, but that on
the da.y following they must all meet (comjredior) him four miles
from the camp, as had been agreed. Having arranged this matter,
he announced to the officers whom ho was sending in advance for
the purpose of foraging, that the Helvetians had been advancing
for Bovoral day s t and wore di ' nwiug near th w=
'k
V-;-V'-
f '■■' . .V
,"y
-J- -
caiiip ; and that hii
ha4 given a pledge to the senate not to hanws their lino of march,
era, had
3' march
leading
he was
?o these
y earlier
' depen-
iieet, I
Roman
ose who
sri. No
ink that
hom we,
protect
I should
)een the
', This
hoy had
day the
e would
envoys
, but to
jrtunity
ni from
isemble,
that on
ir miles
matter,
inco for
vancing
that he
march,
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 419
EXERCISE 34.
{Based on Cceaar, Bk., IV. 1-12.) ^^
The Ubii had Wn bverpowered by the Treveri three days
before ma cavalry engagement, and after many had been skT
b/thTRh 'T:r ^^^--^^-^othe islands'which are foted
by the Rhme and Meuse, not far from the sea, and inhabited by
many savage tnbes. .Impelled by their lack of provision^ these
send ambassadors to C«,sar, U> beg him not to suffer any stote to
!th? ?? ^ .^ r ^*'""' "'^ ^"'^^"^"g «f '^^^^ thought that he
ought not to wait for the remaining portion of his army, which wa!
^^ <^-^nt and , out as early as possible for the'^I.tC
J^w near he islands, he was informed by those who were pre
JBPg ^'^ ^f^"!"^^ *h«*the Gauls had ntoved their camp fearer
■Ptver, and with their cavalry, who are accustomed to leaj down
apurpose of securmg forage and plunder.
•*f
EXERCISE 35.
(Based on Oceaar, Bk. IV. J-il.)
Although (etH) he h«d not yet discovered their phvne, yet, know-
ng the,r oueto™ he suapeoted that thi, would h«pp;„, LZZ,
th. they would ,„v.te the Suobi to seize .11 the toCna belorX
muld gather supplies »„d post g.„is6ns. He was also .faud of
Gaufs "rdThol tri'^r'" ■^ "-"^ ""»'*'"'' «- 'heot;:
new plans. So he decided to summon all the leading men and the
senate to him. and pretended to have hoard that no one~uita:
to remain ,n the lands which he had assigned them. When he
asked what was their reason for complaining, or why (c„r) thev
J^ented their ,«th, they mado.no answer, i; last s„m ^^ ^
^ LZ7r^ ""' """ ""«^ «'"'''' «"""^' ""thing : they had
hought that If they drove out the Romans, they would oitainfrTm
the Sucbi whatever they asked for. C«H«r thought hecouldpu
.V . .u "'t """" *h " if "m, disnicl,, uvtiii 11 they gkVe a phj„
ttat the, wo«M sot be the slave, of untrustworthy rumors. bSJ
I til l I I I 'm MS
SSBBRB
420
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
ii:
m
in order to calm and reassure their hearts, he announced that it
seemed "best ^oV them to remain with him for some days ; after |ie
had inquired Jito thj& outrages of the Suebj, t%y might depart.
^ EXERCISE 36;" . - ;
{Baaed on Ccesar, Bl\ IV. 12, IS.)
After listening to the ambassadors, he said that they could not
obtainf their request for a truce until all their leading men came to
him to clear themselves ; that they had without provocation sur-.
rounded and put to death sevei^l of our men the day before,
jamong them* the brotber of Pisb the Aquitanian. Osesar was
aware that the Gauls Jiad deceived Him, and that their forces were
being increased, and, knowing their treachery, he. thought he
ought ^ detain the envoys as long as he could. He gave orders
next d^y thfit all the cavalry bo led out of the camp, and that after -
the battle had begun, the rest of the f9rces should bring aid, if
they perceived that our men were being thrown into confusioti.
The enemy did'^ot wait for an attagk to be made ; putting spurs
to their horses, they did not cease from their flight until they
caught sight of-th^ Mouse. More than eight hu;idred were slain
in this battle, and Csesar gained such {tantus) prestige that the
Germans thought it would be the height of madpess to make war
on those who had so {tarn) quickly put to flight five thousand
•Gauls, • ' ./ / ■
* : ' , .; EXERCISE 37* T^*
♦ , /'' ' (BoMd jon CceMr, Bk. jy. 14-16.) ' ,,
^As theirlands had* been laid waste by the Suebi, the Ubii weipft
easily induced to leave hon\e with their women and children.
. After holding a council, they began to beg the Gauls^to give them
' lands ; if they were prevented from lending ai^, le^ them merely
give them permission to cross. As the Gauls had given hostages
to Ceesar, they did not venture to do so without Ceesar's consent.
Besides which they wore aware that it was better to be sate in the
friendship of^he Roman people than to-be afraid of the treachery
of the Germans. Acc( )rdingly (tYcu/i<«) they quickly sent messengers
t Q_flp »y ftr te b«K him to load his forces j^^^^^ the
Bhioe. and del<|»4 them frpm the cruel vengeance of the Ubii.
III
l/
.1»ART v.— SVNTAX AND ..COMPOSITION. 4il
>- . ft ' ^ -■..■•■
' Csesar, for these reasons, thought he ought to join battle before
the Ubii could join the forces of ^Tioviaftus. The enemy, alarmed
at his approach, speedily took, up «rm» and began to offer re-
sistance ; but when they saw they col^ld not prevent our me^
bursting into their camp, they despaired of safety and threw away*
their arms. Four hundred of them rushing out of the' camp sought
safety in flight. These reached the Rhine in safety, but being-
unable to cross on account of (pi'opter)Mi6 force of the current,
- they were killed to a man by our cavalry. The rei^t surrendered
to Oaepar. On that day Ctesar captured (dapw) thirty-eight mili-
tary standards, and a large amount ot baggage. On hearing of th«
battle the most distant tribes of Germany sent envoys to Csesj^r to
^promise that they would not n^o war on the Roman people/ : '
^ • •• EXERCISE"38. -g -1, 'y'-:^['-'
; « ' {Based on Cixsar, Bin! Jl^.vJB, 19.) . .
On ^scovering that the bridge had been §nish§d and that the '
^army had be^un to be led across, the Suebi removed from their
towns and burned al^ th^ir dwellings. All who could not feeir
arms were ordered aclj'ordingto their custom t<xhidelin the woods.
Meanwhile they sent out, messengers to several spates telling them
> prepare for flight and to remoye all their possessions into the
midst of their territoriea Gaesar had decided to spend eighteen
days in the districts in which, the enemy had collected, in ordot
that he might cut down the drops and fight a decisive battle with
the Germans, but aftdr heleamed that the garrison which he had.
left at the bridge was beiijg hard prbssed, he left their territories
• within ten days after he had brought his army across. He broke
|A)wn the bridge and withdrew to the country ^f the Treveri.
^ere he learned .that the Suebi had returned to their villages, had
set free the hostages which Were being l)i»ught to him, and were
taking vengAnce on the states which had sought peace from the
Romans ; and that these wer^ awaiting the assistance he had
promised.. * ? ^ \
:": ; .— ---^-^-' -^ 'EXERCISE 3©.'^^- ..^^, ...-,.. ..
{Based on Cemir, Bk. IV. SO, */.) »
• Befni
mBetting^ut Jiimsolt fog Britfti»^, CH/sai had l lw previow
wmter sent in advance Caius Voluwnus, whom iie considered to
■ « •'•*
c,:
422
PRlMAttf LATIJl fiOOK.
/ r-
%■
be (a man) of great worth and discretion ; he had giveAjiim in-
sfcruction;^ to get aequiwnted with the country, as far as ne coul4,
and find out what "states would ally themselves with tlie Roman
people. Volusenus had not ventured to approach the island that
year, as he understood that the winters are early in that region
and that there are no suitable harbors,; he had, however^discov-
er^ from certain (qnidam) traders what was the character of the
inhabitants and from what place was the shortest passage. As
soon as (tibi) the time of year was suitable he set out, and landing
from his shji), examined the whole sea-coast. He visiled several
states and made liberal promises if the Britons" would give hostages
to Ccesar and promise riot to furnish «&id- to our enemies ; he an-
nounced that a large number of ships of war had ' been ordered to
assemble, and that, if opportunity bffered, Ccesar would set out for
Britain that summer. On discovering that Cwsar was building a
fleet and wad going to visit the island, several traders who had
been of great .assistance to us in the former wars, came to him
and urged- him net to venture on making the attempt, because he
could not conquer the island, a large part of which wa? inhabited '
by barbarians ; these had great experience in war, and would not
obey the authority" of anyone. Although Ccesar knew that these
traders were loyal to him, he yet did not think highly ot their
' opinion, and gave orders that tho {orces should set out as quickly
>pos8ible. ^ EXERCISE40.^ - \ -
i' (Bcued oh Goisar, Bk. IV. IS-Sl.) . '" /-
When lie had formed this plan, Ciesar sent out messengers to
all the states that had promised him vessels, to announce that*
as (cum) he had accomplished everything for whiclffie had crossed
th^llitine, he- was going to visit Britain, and would spend the rest
of th^ summer in that island i accordingly they were to assemble
with all their vessels as soon as possible, for the purpose of making
war. As- soon as this plan was communicated to Commius, the
Atrebatian; who was soverieign over the states which Ceosar had
^* conquered in the war with the ^eneti, he decided that he ought
for several reasons to go to Cwsair in order to urge him not to cross
over unttl%e surveyed the whole situation. He thought that even
I^ART v.— SYNTAX ANt> COJlPOSlTIOif.
m
. i,
this war, and would inspire fear in no one ; that the Roman, people
had no good reason for demanding supreme power ii^^Britain, while
the Britons resist most valiantly those who make war on them ;
and that if Ceesar should be hard pressed by the Britons, he him-
self wo'uld have reason to fear for his own safety. Csesar, however,
answered that if anyone was alarmed by the enemy's renown in
war, and did not dare to make the attempt, but wished to remain
in Gaul, he would grant him permission, but that on his return
he would, according to his custom, punish all who urged the leading
men of Gaul liot to t{iko part iii the war. .
EXERCISE 41.
{Baaed on Ocemr, Bk. IV. IS-Sl.)
;— After the flight of the Morini, Csesar determined that he ought
not to wait for the bridge to be finished, but should take- his men
over in boats. He ha4 no fekrs for the ciyalry who were pursuing
thd enemy, although they had not yet returned, 'as he had ordered
them to stay for a few days in the country of the Morini to secure
forage. .Crossing the river with the rest of his army, he «ent
Labienus in advance to find out what were the numbers of the
,*^enemy and in what direction they had rptired. The enemy, on
learning of Caesar's advance, were rejoicing that he was giving
them, an opportunity of freeing th^nselves. they thought that if
they could surround our column iLd prevent our men from re-
■ turning to Gaul, they should be safbsfor th^ future, and no one
would venture to lead his forces against them. Accordingly under
the pretext of surrendering, their leading men and elders came in
Ij^Y-ge numbers to Cupsar to promise to'acdept his terms and to beg
him not to make war on them. , Such Was the reputation of his
army, they said, that they considered "it the height of folly to
resist the Romans, and for this reason they sought peace and
friendship. Crosiir thought that a most fortunate thing had hap-
pened, and answered them in kindly terms, promising to make
peace with them, if they should istirrender to him them6n who, in
the war with the Veneti w^ich ho had finished a shortJiime before,
had treacherously put to death the king of the AquitanJ^ns. They
promised to brjng them within a few days, and urged him to vJiiit
their villaget. The next day Caasar setting out in the misiiiing
.-fe:
4^4
PRliiART^ LAtlN BOOK.
reached the cbnfluence of two rivers. Suddenly the Germaits
rushed out of the woods, and confronted our men. Befpre OsBsar
could draw up the triple line of battle, the enemy made their
attack. Several of our men, panic-stricken by the confusion, .
■I^rew themselves into the river; the rest Csesar ordered to put
the baggage in one place, and quickly taking thdir arms to join
battle. V '
', g:; EXERCISE 42. v^ . '
{BMed on C(X8ar, Bij^ IV. SSf $S.) * . ' ^
ETaving pointed out what he thought should be done in order to
settle these af&irs, Caesar gave two legions to Cotta to lead against
the Morini, who had hot done, what they had promised ; the
i^maining legion, with all the cavalr^, was ordered to occupy the
harbors. While he was carrying out these measures, the Moririi,
thinking it by no means a favorable time for waging war, sent
ambassadors to Csestur. He .demanded of the envoys eighty meh-^>f^
war and sev6n transports, and ordered a large number of hostages
to be brought to him. "" When the vessels had been collected, he
warned the lieutenants to wait until they got a suitable wind, and
.. meanwhile to anchor their vessels in the farther harbor. After
• waiting eig^t days, on the ninth he ordered the signal to be given
and the anchors raised. The cavalry, to whom the transports had
been assigned, were prevented by the wind- from embarking ; the
.rest of the forces advanced about eighteen miilesy and having found
an unobstructed and level shore, waited at anchor for the* cjbvalry
to follow. When all the vessels had assembled, and the troops
had been ordered to land, Ceesar learned that the^ higher groui^d
'* and all the hills were held by the enemy, '.^sM.
• , EXERCISE 43.
^ ' {Based on Casaar, Bk Iv/g4-S6.) ' «
Terrified by the unusual appearance of the ships of war and the
motion of the oars, which they are not accustomed to use on their
larger vessels, the barbarians hesitated a little, while our men,
leaping down into the waves, began to advance towards the shore.
As soon, however, as they perceived that our men wore impeded
Jbeoause of the heavy burdens they were carrying, the enemy, en-
couraging each other not to retreat, tried to keep our men front
- fc"?-*
1:1
^ARt v.— SYNTAX ANt> COM^SlTlON. 425
gaining a footing on solid ground, and whenever some would draw
near the shore, they would advance with the utmost bblduesa into
.th6 water, and, making an attack, throw them into great confusion.
CcBKir perceived that there would be very great difficulty, chiefly
because the ships, on account of the shoals, were anchored in deep
water, a^d that unless he sent aid to those who were in distress,
he would incur very great disgrace. Having prayed, in a loud
voice to aU the gods that his former good fortune might not fail
, him he cried out, -We must not abandon the eagle ; fight vigor-
i TV ?^"' """l^^^ y*''' "^^^ ^^^ ^''^^«^ ^ turn out favorably for
Vfche barbarians.'^ He then ordered the soldiers to i|\an the small
boats of the nearest transports and hurl their weapons at those
who were surrounding and attacking our men. ^ When the enemy
had been dislodged and driven off. C^sar sent forward the cavalry
. m order to follow them up. ' ,
EXERCISE 44. :
/ {Based on Ccesar, Bh. IV. S2-26.) ,
While CsBsar was procuring vessels for carrymg the army across
to Untain, envoys came from the nearest canton of the Morini to'
apologize for not having doii^ their duty in time past, and to
reveal what was the policy of the Menapii. Ceesar, after demand-
ing eighty hostages and promising to take the Morim under his
protection, dismissed the envoys. When all the forces had
gathered, he assigned the ships, some to one legion, others to
another, and leaving Labienus with two legions by {ad) the sea to
hold the harbors, he ordered the rest of the troops to set sail iA a
body about the third hour. As the soldiers promptly executeiFall
his commands, the foremost ships reached Britain in a few hours •
but the transport vessels, whicl^foHowed the men-of-war, sailed so'
8l6wly that they did not make the island that day.
_ Th^re was very great difficulty in {im sremfm) landing, because
the cavalry and charioteers of the enemy were drawn up on the
shore and sought to prevent our men getting a footing on the
island. Both sides were unskilled in naval affairs, but the ground
was perfectly familiar to the natives. Ceesar ordered the ei^les to
boniaagainat the^iMHny. A few^ our nren-WBFS disrnayeri^
the depth of the water and, hung back, but. the rest with the
* »
426
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
utmost zeal and alacrity leaped down from the vessels, though im-
peded hy their anus. They advanced rather (magis) as thenature
of the place than (quam) as the science of war required, and being
unable to keep their rankB, they followed whatever standards were
nearest, and making an attack on the enemy, quickly put them to
flight.
, EXERCISE 46. ,
{Based on Cceaar, Bh. I^. 1-19.)
The Suebi, who were the most warlike of all the Germans, used
to think it was greatly to their craiit as a community, that the
merchant» to whom they sold iike/nsh and eggs which they could
not use themselves, should ha^e access to their territories. These
merchants, however, all of/whom came from the districts beyond
the Rhine, they would comp^ to halt, even i^ainst their will, and
to inforn^ them what th^ had severally learned about the
war, and what was going on across the river I have mentioned
above. On that qceasion, after receiving information on these
points, the Suebi, fearing the merchants would not go back the
^me way they came, refused them permission to depart unless
they promised not to approach the ocean, into which the Rhine, .
which rises in the Alps, flows, after forming several island». On
this account the merchants, fearing a conspiracy, as no time was
allowed for forming a plan, began to entreat Csesar to lend them
aid on the ground that they were sorely afflicted by the Suebi. On
hearing this Ceesar ordered a bridge to be built over the Rhine,
and leaving forces at each end as a guard, conducted the merchants
back {reduco) to their homes in Germany in safety, before the Suebi
could learn of the bridge being built.
^ <" EXERCISE 46. *
(Based on Ccesar, ^k. IV. 1-19.)
^ In the meantime, Caesar, having proceeded a three days' journey,
fell in with the enemy on the march about four miles from the
Rhine, and earnestly besought them to advance no further ; the
Ubii were friends of the Roman people ; why did the Suebi claim
any power or authority on this side of the Rhine? he did riot
think it was fair for the Gauls to cross into Germany, nor for the
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
427
^
Germans to cross into Gaul ; they must return to their own lands
if they, wished friendly relations to exist between him and them.
To these remarks, the Suebi made answer as they thought fit.
They were willing, jirovided they might, to settle in the territory of
the Ubii, but^they were not willing to become tributary to them,
even if they were much more civilized than the Germans; if this
were not granted them, let Cajsar'as speedily as possible lead his
army against them ; they were prepared to offer a brave resistance,
and would not beg off. Ciesar feared he would be prevented from
setting out for Britain, and that his forces might be crushed by
the superior nornbers of the enemy, and in order to secure a few
days' delay, hjtold them to go back at once to their own town
and return to hin*i on the following day. This they promised to
do on the condition that Caesar should not take his departure
ui^ they returned at the date specified. * . ^ n
EXERCISE 47.
{Baaed on Cmar, Bk. IV. 1-19.) "
^ In the winter of Pompey's consulship, the Ubii attempted to
'^-reduce to subjection the Suebi, a very powerful tribe, who had
crossed the Rhine for the purpose of carrying on war against the
Romans. These Suebi were a race of giants, who from boyhood
followed their Own caprice, accustomed to no system of instruction
and recognizing no obligation. Their diet was composed mainly of
animal food, and their apparel was confined to skins, which they
profcured by the chase, in which much of their time was spent,
while (et) their bath was taken in the coldest rivers. As the Ubii,'
who were much more refined than the rest of the Germans, were un-
able to make headway against the violence of the Suebi, they sent
envoys to Caesar to ask aid on the ground that, owing to the
proximity of the enemy, there was a complete cessation of agricul-
tural operations. Caesar made reply to them as follows : That as
he regarded it.the height of folly for the Roman people to aUow
the Suebi to grow too powerful» he would send the two legions he
had with him to the assistance of the Ubii ; they themselves were
to l^main in the place where they had encamped, until he should
_-g°°^g JQ IhggLA jew Jm^ latflr, in oftftp h ft ww r w n ot for ced to tako
his arftiy across into the country of the Sugambri. After waiting
428
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
a few days, they heard that envoys from the Suebi were with
Goesar ; so thinking no confidence ought to be placed in him, the
envoys returned to their own countrymen and informed them what
the Roman leader had stated were his intentions, and what they
had learned was going on in the camp. -^
\EXERC1SE 48.
' {Based on Cceaar, Bk. IV. 20-S6.)
9
On reaching Britain with the larger vessels, Cftjsar learned from
Yolusenus what was the nature of the hills which bordered so closely
on the sea that there was groat difficulty in finding a suitable
harbor. Yolusenus advised him to disembark and give two legions
to the lieutenants to lead against the state from which no enf oy had
come, but he thought that if he waited at anchor until the first
watch, all the'rest of the men of war would assemble there, and that
he would meet with suitableT'weather for drawing near the shore.
The natives learned of this plan of Caesar's and said that our men
must liot disembark ; they wished to keep the Romans from visiting
the islands, and they would advance into the water if the Romans
were to leap down from their vessels, and would hurl their weaponsf
at the horses, a mode of fighting they are accustoihed to pi^ctiso
very successfully. In the meanwhile the eagle-bearers of the first
and the third legion called the boldest soldiei^ |ioge^er from the
nearest ships, and in a loud voice bade them liauG^^m, unless they
were minded to let the eagle fall into the hands llJnfl^i3^«iny ; they
for their part would not hesitate to do their duty to tlllsp?* country.
They thought that when a few had venture! to trust themselves to
the waves,, the rest would leap down in a body and attack the
enemy. But they foun^ that Cfesar's old luck had forsaken him,
for although the Roman soldiers generally display the greatest
zeal in battle, the barbarians attacked tlhiem so vigorously that they
quickly put them to flight,^and the Romans had to draw off their
vessel^ and anchor them in the deep, water a mile f^om the shore. '
c^
EXERCISE 49.
(Bas€d on Ccemr, Bk. IV. 1-26.)
Certain traders, to whom the natives were- wont to sfeU such
/
things as were taken in war, brought word to CiBsar that the
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
429
/
G^nnans, however few, would have the courage to advance against
any number of more civilized men, because they had been accus-
tomed to military discipline from boyhood. On these merchants,
however, Csesar considered he could place no reliance, since they
for the most part blindly followed untrustworthy rumors, and too
often made use of the wine which, on the ground that men were
rendered effeminate thereby, the Germans thought should not be
brought into the country. On learning that Ctesar kad determined
to make war on thfe Germans, several states sent ambassadors to
hi»J». ^8gi"8 hM|^*' to form the plan of crossing the river Rhine.
Ceesar, afterj|p^||l to their statement, thought it best to make
a kindly an^*^ to calm and reassure their hearts; but
the end of 1^I^^|<^|^as about as follows : .That th% must not
remain in Gi|iS|pliSy wished to be on friendly l^tos with the
state (res ptihlica) ; Re had learned that their cavalry had been jsent
across the Rhine for the purpose of laying waste the lands of the
Gauls and burning their villages ; he would not allow them to
harass the (xauls, who had embraced the alliance of the Roman
people many years before and had remained faithful i the Gauls
were complaining a^nd asking aid of him, and he had promised to
sebd three legions to their assistance. After these envoys were
^is^iasedby Oeeisar, who also ordered the Germans to bring him
a large number of. hostages, they retimed to their own country,
where they reported to the leading men of the cantons the aSiwer
Cf«sar had made. -
£X£iR<
50.*
While CsBsar was attending to these liiattera, the Bituriges sent
envoys to him to ask his assistance agaim^t the Camutes, who, they
comj^ii^j^^ad made war on them. On receiving this informa-
^ionf he led out of the camp the third and the sixth legion, |rhich,;
as has already been stated, had been sent across the riverro get
supplies. Thus with two legions he set out to punish thia Car-
nutes, who, on learning of Cjesar's approach, left the towns and
villages they were inhabiting and betook themselves to flight.
the
'^ The 8X6i'Live>^ which follow Are nlf
Wofds and phraseg required are ^ivei; iir tb^ foo(i
^
430
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE 61.
Having decided upon this plan, Caesar sent the ba^age belong-
ing to the whole army to Labienus, in the country of the Tteveri,
and gave orders for two legions to set out for the same destination:
he himself taking five legions withbut baggage,' began his march
against the Menapii. These latter did not gather any forces, but
took refuge in the forests, where they collected" all their belong-
ings. Cfeesar before very long had burned many of their villages,
and had captuf'JBd a large number of both people and cattle/ These^
measures compelled the Menapii to send and sue for peace. He
demanded of them two bundled hostages, and declared that he
would take vei^geaoce upon them if they gave any aid to Ambiorix
or his officers. ' ^ ^^^
1. expMUus, adj. 2. eorkfero. ' 3. peeu$.
«
EXERCISE 52.
When all the troops had mustered, he sets out against the Bello-
vaci, and establishes' his camp in their country. Cavalry is sent
out in all directions to capture some people from whom he may
discover the enemy's projects. The report these bring back is that
but few were found in the houses, and these not men who had
stayed behind to till ihe land, but men who had been sent back to
reconnoitre. Cwsar questioned these to find where the- main body*
of the Bellovaci was posted, and what were their intentions, .and:
leamigl that all the Bellovaci capable of bearing arms had colleis^d
imone ^lace, as well as the Aulerci'^and Atrebates ; *that the placo
^ they had chosen for their cJfKip was in a wood surrounded' by i,
marsh,* »nd th»t all theiyMtggage the^ had placed in more^ dJAtani
parts. ' •- •■■•'■•. '/ -■ .■, -' V; ♦' - ' , ■'/;'-^'
* ■'■■■'■■■"■"' 'Si •■ .'
L fMMk %. multitudo. ». eircrtmdo. i. paltu. ■ v '\; .i ^ »-■
^
"*<h
■\
EXERCISE 53.
Ho soon gathered a large army by ^'is means, and sent Luc-
terius, a mm possessed of great daring,' with a portion of the
force against the I^eni ; Vercingetorix himself .went against^the
Biturig^ As he^prew near, the Bituriges sunt to the i4<3dui,
under wnoao protectionyhuy- w e re, and bosought thoir aSBistanoot-
in order to be able to hold out against the invaders. On the
c
»
%.'
!,!
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
431
r"
li-
N^
vice of the lieutenants whom Caesar had left with his army, the
^dui sent a detachment of both infantry and cavalry to reinforce
the Bituriges. The auxiliary forcqs, on reaching the river «which
separates" the Bituriges from the ^dui, remained there jj^ few
days, and then returned home without having ventured Wctoaa
the river. They told our lieutenants that they had returned because
they were afraid of treachery on the part of the Bituriges ; they
had discovered that it was their intentioj( in case they crossed the
river, to surround them and put them to death. The Bituriges,
on their departure, at once joined Vercingetorix._
1. aitdaeia. 2. divido^
EXERCISi; 54. '
As soon as the natives caught sight of our men they set upon
them from every side. Our troops were thrown into confusion
at first ;' some advised making a rush and breaking through,"
seeing that the camp was close by ;' even if some portion should
be surrounded and slain, they were sure* the rest could be saved ;*
to others it seemed best to make a stand on the hill. This plan
the veteran' soldiers did not approve.^ Accordingly with mutual
exhortations to remember* their old-time valor, thoy forced their '
way through th§ midst of the enemy and reached the camp in
safety to a man. Those who had taken up their position on the
hill were unable to abide by their resolve to defend themselves
on the higher ground, and at the same time could not display
the 8am§ energy» and quickness as the rest; they tried to make
their way back to the camp, and got on unfavorable"* ground,
where a largo number of them were surrounded by the natives and
perished. i» ', . .
\. pnmo. i. p^rrrmpo. 9. pvopinqum. 4. conftdo. 6. gervo. 6. «thw, -«ri». 7.
fW^. a reminiseor(vr. gen.). 9. ril. 10. iniqwu, ^
■ *- .^' '- ^ . ■ tT
u , *;. « "! EXERCISE 56. '
1 When the news came, Crosar sent Labienus with six cohorts' to aid
the hard-pressed troops ; he gives him instructicms to withdraw* the
garrison, if he cannot hojd his ground, and niftko a sally ;' but^not
do so unless it is unav(>idable.* Finding the fortifications»
. iiiunpuble ttF withstanding ttio onemy'fl fierce 6ttSot,~^ifif)ieniii"
I , gathered together all th« cohorts, und inforraod Cfiesar by mei-
.» ••
^^
J«f>
432
%
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
sengers what in his opinion should be -clone. Oresat made all
haste^bo the point to which he had dispatched Labienus, withdraw-
ing four cohorts from the nearest fort," and ordering part of the
cavalry to accompany him, while the others were to tak6 the
enemy in^ the rear. When they perceived him approaching, and
saw the cavtdry and cohorts which he had ordered to follow him,
our men, raising^ a cheer, beg4n the attack. Suddenly, while the
fight is racing fiercely on both sides, the cavalry is seen in the rear,
the en<^my take to flight, the cavalry meets the fugitives and a
great slaughter" follows.
1. eoJiors. 2. deduco. 8. «ruptio. L nmmirio,adv. i. mmitip, ft. caHel{if^
1. a, 8. toUo. 0. caede». « -'r. • ^
■ ■■■ ■ ' ^i . - t- ■■■•-■■ ■• - -■ -J .- ,v,. .- ■, ,
V ■ . - -■- ■ ■ .♦ ■:.■-- ' :- "'■:.' ■ :'.y ..-.'":'- ■ ■ _.
^'■^^- . EXERCISE B^ ■ :v ;• C-,- -^:- :^i ■■''■-■* ■;:.:„■
' He surprised and overwhelmed the Arvemi, and then told the
cavi^ry' to range over as wid%,a tract of country as possible, and
inspire as much alarm in the Snemy as they could. WKwi news of
this occurrence was brought;, the rest of the Arvemi in terror
crowded about Vercingetorix and besought him to take tKought'
for them, and not' allow them to be plundered' by the Romans.
Influenced by their entreaties* he shifted his camp from the
country of the Bituriges towards the Arvemi. Ceosar after
two days' stay in this neighborhood, started oflf from the army to
* levy cavalry, leaving Bmtus in charge of the troops and tellinc him
that he would take care* not to be more than three days absent Iroia
fchecamp. ^^^. .^
EXERCISE 57. ' \ ' ^
At the iame time representatives of both the ./Edui and the
Trevori came to Cresar ; the former to complain thjit the Harudes,
#ho had recently' crossed over frqm Germany, were laying waste'
their lands^^ they had found it impossible, they said, to purchase*
neaoe even by giving hosfeges '; the Treveri to state that a hundred
Sntons of the Suebi had encamped* by the bank of the Rhine, and
werd attempting to cross over ; these were under the leadership of
H^d broihw» Nwwa ftoJ^ Oimboriii w Thi n n ewH d wply
CiBMr i bo dQoid«4 tJiiaVh^ ntust^ mall4) liaste" lost resistance be lm«
-**n-
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
433
easy in case of a coiQbination of thie new band' of tlie.Suebi with
thp old® forces of Ariovistus, He got together suppli^ witb the
utmost expedition* and by forced" marches hastened aghast
Ariovistus. " •'
W
- 1. nuper. 2. popuior. 3. redimo. 4. consido.
7. manm. 8. vetm. '9. magnvi».
5. vehementer commoveo. 6. matt»ro«
M
EXERCISE
58.
Cffisar with ai^,. inferior force was besieging' trdops which had
not yet suffered defeat ; they were supplied with an abundance of
everything: every day* a treat number of ships arrived from all
parts to bring* provlfiohs. CcBsib on the other hand had consumed^ '.
■all the com wljich he had been able to procure, and was in great
cfistreds ; yet^^is men bore theseipijivations*. with extraordinary
patience.' In the meantime Labienus, whom Coosar at his de-
parture had left in command of the camp, received information of
this state of amirh-s, and came to the assistance of the investing
army with two legi(^i!k. This movement was mqst .effectual ; for
within three days after Labienus arrived, the town of the enemy
was captured witho#, the loss of even one man on th6 side of. the
Romans.
1. obndeo.
2. cotidie. 8. t^^porto. 4. eon$umo. H. re$. 6. singtUdri» patient^,
■•**■•,
;-y^;^^
^"^ ,;• r ■■*'■: ■ ' .■ ^XERCISB 59." ^: .* ;•■;''- .^ ],^'::\ "'
The news of Caesar's advaiipe caused Vercingetorix at once
give up' this desi^ and- set Stt to mealfthe Roman commander.
The latter had got r«ady' to mfl*e an ' attack? on Noviodunum, a
town of the Bituriges,- Envoys l|iul come out to clear themselves
of the charge of having made war on Rome, and to suer for peace,
and CsBsar, in order to carry outthe rest of his purposeH iritK the
same speed with. which he ha4 soooeeded jn* most of his uhdertak-
ings, gave orders that th^ilr arma^ere to be brought in* and host-
ages given. Some of pho hostages had already been delivered up,
and the other matters were r>oing attended to, a few of the soldiers
having been admitted' to cgl^bt^ the arms, when in the distance
there was seeii Uie enemy's cavalry, which had gone in advance of
the main column of Vercingetorix. N o soon er did Jha oitizgns'.
Cftt«|{i sight of this body of cavalry than the proepect of ani
.^r»
.;f
■<*
V.
I M
434
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
led them to seize their arms. Our troops, in the town perceived
- that some new scheme was on foot among the G^auls. They
m/Byd&^ ru8h,;took possession of the gates,* and got aWay without
vloas. , - ' \ ■■:■■ .. -":,, ' ' ■ m .. • .;.
. ;■■. ■■ , - , i> . ■ . . . «...,*> ---
1. dMWto (with '{abl.). 2. iTUtituo. ^.' oppugno. 4. cov»equor. b. eonfero. 6. tn-
.^gi^omitto. 7. conquiro. 8. oppidanua. 9, porta. > ■
•^'-•^'
e^
EXERCISE 60.
Before the army was jready to march, two Irbqubis warriors
came to the fort pretending friendship, but more probably in the?
hope of" retarding the expedition until the approaching wint^r^
should make it impossible to proceed. They represented the
numbers of the enemy and the extreme difficulty of penetrating so
rough a countl^ ; and affirmed thai if the troops refrained " from
hostilitf^s, the hostile tribes, who were already collecting their
prisoners, would soon send to mak^' their submission. Bouquet
turned a deaf ear to their advice and sent them to inform the
I)ela wares and Shawanoes that he was on his way to chastise them,
unless they made ppeedy atonement for their perfidious and wrong-
Macts. « (V ^ , • '
,#- . ^^- V : .■ ' . ■,-; ♦ • , ■•
\ [ To show hmo a pcMsage from inodern English may he dealt vnth^
djid especially how nuidern proper names may he handled, the foUoxo-
1% adaptation is givetvi] ' '* « , i '
•^j Before the army wasVeady to n^arclk two of the Morini came to
/the camp, pretending that they were friends, but, what is nioro
/probable,' hoping' to be able to hinder our men from marching"
until, on account of the winter which was at hand,* they should
not be able to set out. T|iese pointed out how great was the
number of the enemy, and how great the difficulty of marching
through country so rough ;' that if our men Would not make war
on them, the enemy, who were collecting their prisoners,* would
soon send envoys about surrendering,'' Ciesar did not «pprove"
this plan, and sent them to inform the Usipotes and Tonct/Ori that
he was setting out^o punish them unless they quickly made repac-'
ation for* their poiifidy and wrong-doing. * '' - -■< '^'■''' :■■-■■
3
»
»
•
4
' V
T
♦
i. ' ■
ft
r -.
^'
1. " •
d If
'V
•
«
*
t
■ ^1- "
f. dtditio. 6. ynbo. 9. aati^facio d«; ^ : i; ■'»•' '".■■■:''.
*
':f¥
6. ifi-
PART, v.— SYNT^X^^ND CpMPOSITION.
435
* - EXERCJSE^ei.
Between the town of Ilerda and the neaarest mil, on' whicK"
- Afranius was ehcampedi there lay some h'al f mile of level ground,*
and about half way* was a slight eminence.^ IfvCjBsar could get
possession ^f this, hp felt sure* he could cut oflF His opponents firom
the town and the supplies they had gathered* there. With this
idea, he proceeded to lestd out a*fbrce of three legions, which he
drew up" in a suitable position, and then ordered the front rank to
hasten forward' and seize the desired positioir. However, Afranius
perceived his design and speedily sient the troops oji guard* before*
' the camp by a shorter route to forestall*" him. The other side
having reached the place first, our troops were forced back, and
on,fre8h" fortes of the enemy coming, up, were compelled to make
their way back to their comrades. " , j,
1. jflanicies. 2. Say ' in about the middle of this interval ' (apatium). 8. tumU'
his. 4. confido. 6. confero. 0. instrtio. 7. proeurro. 8. utatio. 9. pro. 10. prtu-
oc«ujw (' seize beforehand '). 11. Say 'other.'
•■ _ EXERCISE 62.' J ;>: /-.V/ ^'-9
Caesar determined tb come over to Britain because the Belgians*'
* of South Britain' had sent help to their kinsmen^ in Qaul, with
whom he waB at war. So he set sail for Britain With a small army.
When the Britons, who were watching for him, saw his. fleet draw
near the shore, they advanced into the waves and Kept the Romans
from landing, till a brave standarfl-bearer^ leapt from the galley
into the water and advanced against t^^ Britons. When the
Roftian sol(}^i» saw him in the midst of^^eir foes, they followed
him to saye^^he standard, and ^at last made good their landing and
drove the Britong^i^yup into the country.* Then Caesar, marched
through K(^t,V fou(j^j|^ several battles, and forced Jhe nearest
tribes to give hostaf^and sue for ijie&ce.
1. Belgae.
4i aquUifer.
2. Say ' who inhabited the lo'
5. ^eroo. . 6. Say ' from the coast
rt of the island.'
7. CatUium. 8. /(
EXERCISE 63.
' The next night, ILisdrubal led his men silently* out of tneir
■^ camp, and moved towards the Metaurus, in the hope of placing
that rivar hatwuan' himwelf and. the Ro mftna before hirf fatfaat waa
..*
discovered. The Roman cavalry, liowever, was soon* seen coming
i-:^^
A-
■um or 4}^rt>i
sentence. ©,
umu 6. ^y «da-
►y ' drew them ud^^
i^^ ' .. *^. - ■ ■. ^ ■
l^ Pi^MARY LATIN BOOK.
up>m pursu^, followe<|.i||^ no great distapce* by
«larch^ in readinesstlor an engagement. lb?
Hasdfubaltothial^of cqa|tinuing his retreat.* He
his men to prepwre for ^iion, and o^de t^! be;
thehi that'thelfiature of'4he grou)fd',^f>uId%yrmit
1. Mntio. 2. Say ' cross.' i^^revi. ^^
apairlng of fiiglSl,' and connect clo^ic|Jir with tfifl*
{imtfuQi ajs advantageously (cot^iim^) as poasib}^, conaiderinc: (»r«f tik nat
%EXiROISE-M I ^■
husual^'ableV lelkder,^hdftii L«|!l|^hi8£(p*i!an^
* |iad vferought a great host dfxj^aUldT ^to attack
5 city, and the inhabitants jeni Uf Rome to
ambassadors were ft^t 'fronL. Rome to'.
<l3l\|i|*ns.* They asked Bren^us i^hat harm the
men of Qlusium had done the Gauls, that the;|^ :^hus made war'' on
Uiem.. firiBil^us made answer that the injury wSlthat the Clusians
poqiiHased k^d/jbl^at the Gauls wanted,' remar|u^{, that it was
exacibl|i the way^ in which the Romans themlhel\|^ treated* their
.ghb|r- - ■ -'■ " ' ':^^- ■
neii
»r8.
•\ 1. Say 'of exceptional khpwledge {»inguliiri$ feierUia) of )|ie scienos of war.*
2. Romanm teriptor. 3. Say ,' of the Etruscans (Ein^ciy 4. Say ,' to urge BrenQus
to do no harm (noeeo) to theCIusians (Clusini}.'' 6. Say ' provoked by what wrongs
^ were they making war.' 6. Say • that the Olusians were doing wrong in that (qtiod).i
v' 7. app^o. 8. modtu ot ratio. , it. tract o.>
. ^'^ ' \;^;;::V. EXERCISE 66. :
, The cKie^, when they; «aw that our men were ^e8i9ting so
biavely, and that there was no hope^ of the speedy capture of thu
catnp,. sent ambassadors to Cicero to say that tbey desired a
parley.' When leave was granted, they told the same story that
^the king had told Tituriue^, that the Germans had qrossed the river
and all Gaul .was in arms. They add' that Tit
with his whole army ; but they had no wish to
mep ; their sole^^ire was to prevent the
their legions poHWiently' in their cou
to leave his caif^p^e was free to go witho
1. Say 'all hope having been lost (adimoy 2. Use
B . ^ etinm.Vaimi^ — i . noceo (witVdat.). S.
remiUn (
{ver$ory
had perished
Cicero or his
m quartering'
he^were vailing
here he pleased.
lave a confereno^).
y 4tee»g tow«| to -
PART V. — SYNTAX AND OOMPOSITION.
437
g so
)fthe
•ed a .
r that V
nver
ished
ar hie •
«ring'
filing ^^
lased. , '^ .
renoA*). •
BlQCl PV
-^ EXERCISE 66. '
■;.: . ■ ■ ■ . ■" ■. -•■ ■■*-:'■ ' . ■'■>■■■. V,
After making all preparations, Ceesar quickly caMed the greater
paf t of his forces' over to Britain without the loss of a' single man.
Within a few days he marched against the enemy, Who, he learned,
^had mustered in great nunlbers and now held a very stroiig^ V^'
tion. Since his arriyal the previous summef , the Britons, with the
object of offering as strong opposition as possible^to the ^mans
whein they should return, and of driving them more quickly from
the island, had decided to entrust the entire conduct of the war' to
one of their chiefs, Cassivelaunus. But it was soon clear* to the
latter that he could not defeat Ctesar in battle, nor even prevent
him from laying waste the country ; and so he setit envoys t9-the
Roman cohimander to treat for peace.
1. Say 'well fortified ' (egregie munitus). 2. mntmam ^mptrii permUtere. 3. Use
animadoerto. . >
\«, . V.' ■'//■:■■-: vi*3XERCISE^M' '
G8esar„ on coming up to the tenth legion, exhorted the soldiers
tb sustain with courjige the assault of the enemy and 'not' to be
thrown into confusion by a few savages. The army was drawn up'
as the mature of the ground demanded ; for the legions, being
aieparated,' were resisting the enemy, some in one quarter, dthers
in another. It could not be foreseen* what needed to , be done in
each direction, and it was impossible for one man to attend to every-
thing. The men of two legions, the eighth and the ninthr^ Mid not
hesitstfe'' to cross the river, on the other side of which 'the enemy
were drawn up in great force und^r the direction" of Boduogpatus,
/ whdm the Nervii had piit in command of the whole army.: At the
•same time our horse, who, as I stated, had been routed at the
first onset of the Nervii, met the enemy face to face' while retroftt
»tne
A **■'
,.«.
ixig to the^cf^mp, and', thrown into a panfc, sought flight in anotner
direction. Caesar, on perceiving his men hard pressed, sent four .
cohorts to the assistance of the cavalry, who had already lost many*
of their number at the hands of the pursuing enemy. In the
meantime, two other legions, which had been acting as an escort"
thr the baggage, were observed on the top of the hill* by the
enemy, who immediately took to flight with the loss of one hundred
and eighty kUl^ and more than eight hundred wounded.
1. neu. 2. inHruo. 8. diwrstu. 4. provideo. 6. dubUo. 6. Say '
,]^ing leader .(du«X' 7. <«|p«r«u<. 8. fra^idi^tm. 9. tummm atUii.
BoduoffnaAt»
438
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE'68. .' > i
Css^T, who was at a great distance at last getting intelligence
of their danger, returned with all expedition; and having- collected
a body of men, which did not excised seven thousand, hastened to
the relief of Cicero. The Gauls, who were not ignorant of his move-
mentSf raised the si^ge^ and went to me^t him with their entire
strength. Ceesar, to deceive' them, niade a feint as if he fled, till
he came' to a convenient place, and there he fortified'* his camp.
The instructions he issued to his men were not to fight, but to
barricade the gates, ^ continuing by these mancBuvres to increase
the impression'^ of fear. It- succeeded as he wished ; the Gauls
came up in great disorder" to attack his entrenchments. Then
. Caesar, making a sally,' defeated them and destroyed the greatest
>, ^part of them. This success laid the spirit of revolt^ in those parts.
t. Say ' left the siege (obsuito) .' 2. decipio. 3. munio. 4. portas obstruo. 6.
opinio. 0. Say ' their ranks being in great confusion.' 7. eruptio. S. Vae dejieio {I
revolt).
■^i"
EXERCISE 69.
When spring was almost come,^ a considerable company of jWr-
ginians, under Captaiji Trent, hastened across the mountains and
began to build a fort' at the confluence of the Monongahela and
Alleghany, when suddenlyVthefr f^und themselv^ invested by a
host of French and Indians, who, with sixty bsi^aux and three
hundred canoes, had descended from Le Boeuf. The English
were, ordered to evacuate the spot ; and being quite unable to
resist, they obeyed the summons and withdrew to Virginia.
Meanwhile, Washington with ;another party was advancing from
the borders ; and hearing of Trent's disaster,* he resolved to
fortify himself^ on the Monongahela and hold hift ground, if pos-
sible, until troops could arrive to support him. The French sent
out a scouting party under M. Junonville, with the design of
watching his movements ; but a few nights afterwards Washington
surprised them not far from his camp, killed thei officer and cap-
tured the whole detachment. . \ #' ^ f
1. Say ' when but a small part of the w!nt«r remained.' 2. eastellum. 8. «ufrtto,
4. Say .' what had happened ta' 6.. ccutra munio (' fortify a camp ').
■.f
^f'
ible to
'■.''..- ■ "
rginia.
; from
'■--' ■■ :
ved to
W -.■"'■»'
if pos-
h sent
sign of
-,'.■■.•''
ington
d cap-
*,
:. .. .. - ?■
■ ■ ■ ■ ^
. «uWto, .
f"
.s
PART v.— SyNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
EXERCISE 70.
439
Finding great difl&culty in nfetflT^^r^he Soudan, the Govern-
ment'' reisolved to send some famonsNnilitary leader* to drive out
the barbarian chief, and rescue the garrisons which -were be-
sieged* in several towns. They asked Gordon, a man of the
utmost skill and bravery, to do what he could in that country,
which a few years previously he had' ruled with great uprightness
and wisdom. He consented" to try ; and travelling as fast as pos-
\ sible, he arrived at the capital,^ Khartoum, which was many nicies
distant from the sea. Holding it for many montjhs* against the
•«warms of barbarians, he repeatedly sent messages home to ask for
ihelp ; but the Government for a long time' refused to send rein-
forcements. At last, however, thinking that he was in danger,
they carefully^" organized an army and entrusted the command to
the best general they had.
1. paco. 2. Say * the senate.' 8. Say ' of great reputation for {gtnitive) merit in
wax (bellims).' i. obsideo. 5. jxistitia pruderUiaqus. 6. Say 'promised.' 7. Say
• largest town.' 8. menais. 9. diu. 10. Say 'with great cai;£<;d«iflrentia).'
:: :■ ^ EXERCISE 71. , . ^ _^
Before the task^ was completed a ^putation of ^p^s arrived,
bringing word that fJlteir warriors were encamped in great^numbers
about eight miles distant, and desiring our general to appoint' the
tjime and place for a council. He ordered them to meet him on
the next day „ near his camp. In the morning the little army
moved in battle order to the place of council, and at the appointed
hour* the deputation appeared. Their orator* declared that the
war had arisen without any fault of theirs ; they desired that there
slfuld be peace between us and his peopl€|jai|^^k> show th.eir
good- will,* ^ once* delivered eighteen prisortiSWK^ had brought
With themj'promising that we should receive ,the rest as soon as
they cpitld collect them. .
1. negotium. 2. con8tituo. S. ad eertam haram. 4. Say 'he who «poke f<»
{ioguor.jpro)theeavoy8.' 5. beneoolentiam praestQ. 6. «tattm. 7. oopMi>t«.
7-'— •■""-■'■*•• EXERCISE 72. ■ '■-;.^----v; :-^v,-- , -I
• ■> r ■■ ■ .*.■■■.
The English army began. to cross the bridge, Oressingham lead-
■ 1- 'il
I III
440
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
%
u
1^v.
the bridge, without oflTering any opposition ;' but when about one-
*^*^* ^ere ^ M^llllpljll^ ridge - was, crowd. d with those who were
foUowiiM|j|a^||Hp^tJiose who had crossed with his whole
streng^^feplrvery great number, and drove the rest into the
river ^P^, where the greater nurnbet wete drowned. The
ren^ainder of the English army, who wer# left on the southern''
bank of the river, Aed in greatcoi^sion, having first set fire to
the wooden bridge that^<|iljpiH^hfeaot|iursue them. Cres-
lingham was killed.in the very beginning of the battle.^
i.>^- i^«*«nt agmen. 2. Say • had suspected would happen.' 3. Omit because %i
;61ved in • suffered.' 4. dimidia pars. 6. Say ' and tfie rest were, following in dense
y (amferti).' 6. Say ' the other.' 7. Say • the batt'.e having sqarcely (vix) be6n
in.' ;;,»,,
.■i\ ■ ^^ ■ : ■: .*:v '■'--'' EXERCISE 73. ^ ;:. ,'
^ Soon after their arrival, a party of Indian chiefs and warriors
enter^4 the camp. They proclaimed themselves an embassy from
Pontil^ ruler of all that country, and directed in his name' that the
English should advance no farther until they hadj|^ an interview^
with the great chief, who was already close at hM. Before th_
day cl^ed», Pontiac himself appeared. He greeted Rogers with
the haiig^ y^mand,* what was his business in that country, and
how he dare^enter it without his permission/ Rogers informed
him that tBe French y^e defeated, that Canada ha%urrendered,
and that he was oil^*il;way to taj^e possession of Detrpit, and
restore a g^ral|^eace." ^Ppntiac replied that he wOuld stand in
the path o^||e K(j|lish vmH momiiigj Having inquired if the
strangers were in need of anything, he withdrew with his chiefs at
nightfall to hjjL^wn encanmment ; ^Ue the English, dreadin"
treachery, st^^ell on thdpgua^^^ tWlughotft the night. " -
1. Say 'said that he cpmmana'ed.'^^Jfo^ttor,- S.^eoc(i^m'soli8, «before
sunset.' 4. Say 'he haughtily foupefgp^riianded.' 5. injusmMoi 6. Say 'establish
(eonftrmo) peace an* friend^j|^th all the^ states.' ' 7. Say ' «Sder from marching
(iter) until the next day.' -^^^"'- *- *
Uiaey
9. Say, « spent the whole night in watching
p"^: ■ ; "^ '*^- ■■ ^^l^CISE 74. ^^^
A deputation of the Wyandots came to thefort, and begge^Sr
peac^, which was granted them; but when the Pottawattamies
came on the same^errand, they insisted as a preliminary» that some
(>f their jmnplfl. who were dfltainf^d in th e English fort, ohot d#^
t»e given up. Gladwyn demanded, on his part,» that the English
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
V
441
captives* known to be in their villages should be brought to the
fort, and three of them were accordingly produced. As these were
but a small part of the whole, the deputies were sharply rebuked
for their duplicity, and told to go back for the rest. On the
following day, a fresh deputation of chiefs made their appear-
ance, bringing with them six prisoners. The Indians detained in
the fort were about to be given up and a treaty concluded, when
one of the prisoners declared that there were several others still'
remaining in the Pottawattamie village. Upon this the conference
was broken off" a^nd the deputies ordered instantly^ to depart.
I. VBe'prittsquam. 2. eftpseC himself also'). S. captivus. 4. Say ' he complained
bitterly (^ramssime), because they displayed such perfidj'.' 5, etiamnune. 6. collo-
guium dirimo. ^ statim. ^
EXERCISE 75. ^J-"
The British general, whose forces had now S'^lled to sixteen
Jiundred, retreated to a new position at Beaver Dam, about twelve
i miles from Niagara. The Americans pursuing him with a force of
'4 twenty-five hundred' men, he continued his retreat to Burlington
Heights. The enemy advanced to a stream known as Stoney Creek,
w%ere they encamped for the night. Relieved from immediate^
pressure, Vincent sent out a strong reconnoitring party under
Colonel Harvey, to examine the enemy's position. Finding the
entrenchnients carelessly' guarded, Harvey made a daring attack in
the darkness. The American soldiers, rudely awakened, sprang
up from their glimmering camp-fires* and stood their ground
bravely for a time. But they were bewildered and without disci-
pline.' After a brief struggle, theyjp|,9re routed at the point of
the bayonet, and their two generals. Winder and ChancHer, with
one hundred other prisoners, fell int«^^||^ey's hands. Vincent at
once followed up the retreat of thF^ invaders, and" sent a small
advance party to reoccupy the position of Beaver Dam. This
dangerous duty,' which was entrusted to Lieutenant James
FitzGibbon, with but thirty British regulars and tljirty Mohawk
Indians, was successfuUy performed.
"^ 1. Use quinffenti (' five hundred '). 2. Use in praetentia (' for the present'). 8. in-
diligenter, or nay 'by no means carefully (di^^enfer) defended.' 4. Say 'being sur-
prised when off their guard and taken unawares, quickly seissed their arms.' 5. Say
' unski^d in warfare.' 6. Say ' this task (negotium), although dangerous (periculosu$),
waSquio'kly'flnisfiSt.'™ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ "
^%-
il
4 i
v>
i42
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES.
{Baaed on Ccesar, BTc. IV. 1-26.) ' /*
.1.— 1. They had crossed in that year. 2. They had been
Wassed for several winters. . 3. A large number of Germans
c^sed the rivers in the following year. 4. All the other tribes
wfere staying at home. 5. This canton is the largest, that the
most warlike. 6. Several years after, they were led out of this
place. 7. With a hundred thousand Germans hie was making war.
8. On account of their huge size they do none (lit. nothing) of
those things. 9. The country' was very cold. 10. The milk and
com make the Germans very warlike. 11. They used to bathe in
the river.
^.'2,— 1. The merchants do not desire beasts of burden to be im-
ported. 2. They used to use small and scrubby beasts. 3. They
sell what they have taken to the Gauls. 4. The merchants have
right of entry. 5. They had not ventured to leap down. 6. They
betook themselves to the cavalry. 7. He betook himself to them.
8. It used to be considered disgraceful. 9. He leaps down on
foot (lit. to the feet) because the cavalry are approaching.
10. They think it is disgraceful to use imported horses.
3.— 1. On {ex) the other side, the country is unoccupied for six
hundred paces. 2- The Suebi could not withstand the power of
the state. 3. The same merchants used to come often to the Gauls
them'selves. 4, They think their state is large and flourishing.
5. It is the greatest possible glory to be more civilized than the
Germans. 6. This state is said to be insignificant and weak.
7. They cannot be driven out because they are tributary to this
state. 8. They are more civilized than the Germans themselves.
• *•— 1- Terrified by so great a number, they station guards.
2. The Germans drove the Menapii from their lands. 3. They
keep the Menapii from wandering. 4. They had removed from
both banks of the Rhine. 5. They pretend to cross the river.
6. He was informed of their arrival. 7. Being unable to maintain
themselves they had returned to the river. 8. The whole journey
had been finislied in three days. 9. Having, crushed the Menapii,
they advanced for the rest of this night. . 10. As the Germans had
■(/
/
PART v.— SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
5,_-l. Influenced by this report, he asked what plans they were
adopting. 2. He' compelled the Gauk to answer. 3. He asked
What they had heard or learned. 4. He repents of the plans
which he has adopted. 6. No answer should be given to those
who yield to these runtors, 6. The merchants, against their will,
were compelled to come from each town. .
6.-1. Having sent embassies to the leading men, they deter-
mined to set out for the Rhine. 2. They were invited to come.
3. Having determined to wage war they s|nt embassies to sdVBral
states. 4. Some wander farther than usual. 5. On learning this
he thought he ought to summon the leading men and demand an
army. 6. When everything vhich he had demanded had been
prepared, they thought that embassies should be sent.
7,-1. As amttassadors had hot come from the Germans, he
began to pick ^ut cavalry. 2. Our ancestors have handed down
this custom. i^3, He had heard that the Roman people had made
war on the Germans., 4. He began to attack the Germans from
whom ambassadors had not come. 5. We wish to be friends to
the Romans. ' 6. They said that the Suebi alone had been driven
from their lands. 7. The Suebi do not yield even to the immoi:tal
gods. 8. As they have come against their will, having been
driven from home, he assigns them lands. .
/ 8.— 1. He answered that he could not give any lands to those
who were seeking aid. 2. There cannot be friendship between :
Csesar and the Ubii. 3, They may remain in their own lands.
4. It seems best to ask aid of Caesar. 5. They are complaining of
the outrages of the Ubii, w*ho have settled in lands not their own.
6. So great a multitude cannot remain without wrong.
0»— 1.' The ambassadors said the^ would send the cavalry some
days after. . 2. They thought that the camp had been moved
nearei*( ^^%iving reported this to their friends they returned to
him. 'f^\^S^8aid he would move the camp. 5. He learned that
some horsemfeii had not retur«ed^-^nd that the Ambivariti were
awaiting him. 6. They thought they could gain their request,
frotn Ceesaf . ^>»-_i--^
' 10.— 1. The ishind used to "be Inhabited by the Batavi. 2. A
-^^f-^v^f^ l^^caired Mom is thoughr^^^ me in ^€x)~thi5pAlps.
444
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
:«^
■ •■ ;t
3. The Alps are inhabited by ar fierce nation whi6h lives on birds.:
4. After forming the island, it repeives a branch from the Vacalus.
5. Many barbarous nations inhabit^ large part of the ishinds. . *
11-— l''*VVhen the ambassadors were returning to Csesar, the
cavaliy whjwn he had sent in advance were twelve, miles distant.
2. e«jsar, meeting the leadihg men on the way,* gave therathre^
days' time to send ambassadors. 3. As he had ndt given them an
opportunity of advancing, they begged him not to e^rry out these'
pfaris. 4. They sent ambassadors to say that the tfft»y was ap-
proaching nearer. 5. He thought they would not- return the
same day. 6. They said that as many as possible would asaeitable, '
and that as all the cavalry wer^ apprdachiqig, be would gkia hi»
request, --^vv;-^- --..;■*.:., ..V--^ ;■■ '■';.; ^' '^ ' .■>;.^-...>,
12.— 1. As soon as the cavalry returned, the a|nbaBsado^ left
the enemy. 2. Our m*en have no fear, becaufle not ijiore than^ -
eight hfindred horsemen have returned. 3. Having pu|; the cav^'
airy to flight, a^d thrown ^he rest into confusion, they return to * .
Cftjsar. 4. He did not cease until his brother was saved from all j^ i-
danger. 5. When he had risscued his bother, he Sought aid to * '
his grandfather. 6. While resisting bj^vely, he was surroimdec^^t /^ **
by the cjivalry, and reciived many wouiids. .7. As soon as they --^
could, they brought aid to Piso, vhom ei^r senate had caUed friend f^
•^ 13.— 1. No time was given to tke'Went^ for seeking peac^'^ .
2. After. these ajubassadors had b^n heard,, he waited till thej^^^^^'
shotijd adopt the plan. *.' He though^ that the enemy had gained
no prfestige by these ternis. 4t He pe^peived that, after accepting
these terms, they were making war. 6. Cmsar is glad.tha<r t;he .
tjhief Aien and the ambassadors have been detained. * 6; No timft. .^
sh(*uld be given for arranging these matters. 7. The cavali:|r,i^'i
having followed up the enemy, had begun, bi^ttle. 8. diesar, |;hd*
next day, after leadiiig out all the Oavalry, ordered the batUe (« be *'
i%*al. He began to draw up a triple line df |»ttW. , i. the
«iviajy had J)een sent^to defend the camp. 3. Terrified by the
•rrival.of our cavalry, he had i»ought safety in flight. 4. Th^
forces, alhrmed by all this, perceived that they (Sd\M riot cross th»
Rhipoi 6i Tokiug ormH they gave the ^ ' — ~ — —
.«-•:
>.*;.-V';
m:
'i\%
m
Ji.
I '
»r«
gave the enemy «6 Utaie to draw up!^
: **— k * --^ *♦♦, ^ -' — :
«r!j
' '^- *.l
.1
'<'
on birds. I
Vacalufl.
nds.,
3sar, the
distant,
jrathre^
bheih an
ut these'
was ap-
urn the
jaeitible,
gain his
loi» left
Te thfua^ ^'.
ihe car-^' '
(turn to V .. ■■■*■' -"i
wm «U ^ '\"
b aid to
'oimde4|i(./'
as theVv, ■.^t|-*a
ifrieni t
peac^'";!^'
'" the/ .^^Sm'
gained - .■.
cepting *
lat.the ^
Fo time... . , „
«valqf^: ;
»r,^hti ^
e to be '
^. the
1. V
by the
4. Th^
088 th(6 > /.
nyrup. .
i^* -:
.•".?• ;
KJ
I ;
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
445
•IS-
the line of battle. 6. With the rest of the women and children
they fled to their friends. : ,. ." >•
16. — 1. Seeing that a large number of t)ur men ha^ Ibeen killed,
he threw away his arms. 2., Thirty thousand Germans had per-
ished in that flight. 3. As they wished to depart, he said ho
would allow them their freedom. 4. Caesar reached the river
Rhine in safety. 5. They said, that thirty military standards had
been left. 0^. Hearing the shouts of -his men*, and fearing the Gauls,
he rushed out , of the camp. *: J* \ /
16»— rl. The Germans had been very easily induced to cross- the
Rhine and make war on the Roman people. 2. Messengers were
■sent to promise vessels for crossing the Rhine. S. After sending
ambassadorip and%iving tip hostages, , ihey be1«ook themselves to
their friends. 4. As tl^e Suebi had joined the Usipetes, he had,
against his will, lent aid to> these tribcp. 6. Against Caesar's will
they had vnntured to carry over the army. 6. He resolved that
*the war must be finished. 7;. Perceiving that they were hard
pressed by the Germans, they were alarmed. 8. They answered
that they would prevent diesar from ctmveyi^g his army, across the
Rhine; 9. They thought that they could not be safe without his
,f^\oonsent. 10.' He besought Ctesar to take paVt in the bftttie. H.
Th6 Germans who had made war on Ctesar, were surrendered to
himv 12. S^ great was Ceesar's reputi|tion that the fartht»tt|:i]bes
"sent ambassadors and ^ve hostages. . ■, •' * '..(j^
18.~lk Ceestir began to lea4, the afmy Across. 2. The army
began to be led across. 3. For several days they were bringing
in timber. 4. He ordered ambassadors to come to him from both
statcMS. ^, He ordered s^ garrison to be", left at the bridge^. 6.
They began to concq^l themselves in the woods. . 7, Meanwhile,
all the timber having been collected and the arniy ]«wi across, {|ioy
|H)gan to, prepv© for flight,- • - j^V. '.. f
f|;l©.~l. Ctesar learned that their wives and childiten had beim
{4soed in tihe woods, and that they weiw gathering to ode* place.
2. As the bridge had been torn down, CjosaiMjesolvud to punish
the Germans. 3. Who**thft Ubii learned thatall the btiildinga
^ • had been burned, and a bridge«biiilt| they, l)ettH)k themselves to
■.■*
» CI
I.
;.V t^^'i^o^ij»- 4. ^^J^n b«»r ftrms» 0. For ten days they Mkdl.
} .*-
. .»f'
%:
i^
I
« 446
/<t'
•^'
... i
.M-
- ». < ■
iV.
MI-
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. ,
awaited his arrival. 6. He thought that everything, for which
he had led the army across, had been a«M;oinpIiahe4. 7. TheSuebi,
after learning this through scoots, had ^^etermmedljo burn all their
villages and buildings. 8. Ei|ht dayfl in all had been spent in the
districts which the Suebi held. 9. They bet0o]£ themselves to
their own territories. 'i\:* '
'^^
20. — 1. He found out that the tyaders did ndF yisifc these
u islands. 2. Almost all the harbors are suitable. S^. He found out
'to whom they had furnished auxiliaries. 4. He thought that the
fccaders could find out how large the harbor was. 5. AUhough the
. harbors were not suitable, he set out for the island. 6. He j|£ne^^
tliafcthe winters were early. .7,., All this will be of great servic?.
'81. He found out that all the tribes had these dustoms. . .--
»* 21:'— 1. He instructs Volusenus to find out -these things. 2.'
.At'mbassadors caine from the states which he had conq.iiered that
summer. 3. Commius, who was faithful to dtesar, had visited
•th^se states on the previous days. 4[ They themselves, with all
"the fleet, assembled as quickly as possible. S. Him he orders
' (jiibeo) to visit the States. 6. He orders (impefo) the traders to
come to him. 7. Having given hostages, they ^j|,yi<<n home. 8.
JBtd tti^ea VoluBenus to leave the ship. ^9. He rep'^rted what they
hud promised. 10. Commius had been made kingl ' '.
22. — 1. He ordered about eight ships of war and a large number
of translJoWs! 2. They promised to make re^dy the ships which
he had requited. 3. While they were collecting the ships, atnbas-
sadors came fnnn the Morini. 4. The rest of the ships could not
catry over the legion. 6. A|ter the two legions had been taken
over,' he gave the rest to B'Ufus to lead against the Morini. 6.
When the hostages had been brought, he promised to receive
them under his protection. 7. He left a garrison of two legions.
8i Hee^oes not .wish either to wage w»ir or to delay fot the purpoia
of collecting cavalry. 0. In the previoudi year he had had an
opportunity of ^ taking over th6 legiyns. 10. 'I'his happened very
opportunely.. :_:__^ ^' ..^.^^.^._^:...:^..:..^^
23.— 1. As the cavalry had advanced to the higher ground, he
drdered iho rest of the soldier» to follow them. • -2. He ordered
the anulior i i to bu ralaod» 3. Wu wunot thfuw wcauuns fwm jLhy
^'
^
•^ . .
. «*
^
;
4
>, -
"'
%^ v.-r4k
i 1*--'
^ # '
4 , "
• «
' ^ *.'. "- t
•
•
«
)
* ^
*
I ...
it '
«^ ■
*..
I :
PART V. — SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
447
ship to iAie shore. 4. Thinking the shore suitable, they landed.
5. On the signal being given, they embarked and followed him. 6.
^e waited until he foifnd a suitable tide for sailing, ^t. At)out the
nin^ih hour of the day he found out what was being done. 8. On
the ninth day he ordered the tribunes to set sail fropi the farther
harbor, \ ;. . : - >^, , .,.' , ■ •: ,
♦
-]J|jP\9y kept our men from leapaig down. 2 Sending
i^^rs in advance, they hurled their weapons more boldly.
4
24.—]
the charioWBrs in advance, they hurled their weapons more boldly.
8. The soldiers, burdened by their arms, leaped down from the
^hip. 4. The locality wjLs unknown to our men, who did not show
the same zeal as the enemy. 5. They had to advance into the '
water. 6. On account of the great difficulty, the rest of the forces rff" * ,
cannot follow up the ca airy. 7. They were wont to use horses in^ "
their battles, 8. The enemy, dismayed by the size of the vessels,
could not hurl their weapons, . - '
'25. — 1. The soldiers were^OTdered to leAp down. 2. ah
soldier was leaping down, Cseskr noticed that the enemy
halted. 3. On the ships of war being removed a short dists
As the
had
ships of war being removed a short distance,
the enemy began to retreat. 4. He urged the soldiers not to
betray the eagles to the barbarians. 5. He cried with a loud
voice that he was willing to do his duty. 6. On account of the
unusual kind of vessels, the ma^r turned oujb most favorably for
Oeasar. 7. "Leap down, Ca^r," he said, •.^iinless you wish to
incur disgrace." 8 Our solflSters eiho^|,ed one another not to
hesitate on account of the appearance of the barbarians.
. ,. 26.— 1. On the vessels h^i^ filled, he ordered aid to be sent to
those who were in difficulty. i''S^. Whenever the, enemy made an
'ittack, Cffisar would- order our men to keep their ranks. 3. Both
sides were, unable to leave their ships. 4. Whomsoever they
• attacked they put to flight. 5. Making an attack, they sur-
rounded the enemy. 6. Having reached the island, the cavalry *
landed from the ship. 7. Having attacked the enemy, thejjiii»
fought fiercely. 8. "This alone is lacking. 9. He ha^ manned
,-lihe ships of war with the okvalry,^ _ . i : i„ 1 _^ ^„_.i^^,^^v;^ _,
T
■ ¥
* '
y
44a
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. .
%
II. EXERCISES IIST TRANSLATION
AT SIGHT.*
ft.
■ — #*
1. Gaul and Its XKyinons. ' ' J
Gallia est omnia divisa in partes tres, quarum unam incolunfc
.. Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam qui ipsoruin lingua Celtae, m^tra
Galli appellantur. Hi omnes lingua, institutis, legibus, inter se
differunt. GaUos ab Aquitanis Garumna flumen, a Belgis Matfona
et Sequana dividit. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, 5
propterea quod a cultu atque humanitate provinciae longissime
absUnt, minimeque ad eos mercatores saepe commeant atijue ea^>
quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent, important, proximique
sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, quibuscum continenter
bcllum gerunt. Qua ^e causa Helveftii quoque reliquos Gallos 10
virtute praecedunt, quod fere cotidianis proeliis cum Germanis
' contendunt, cum aut suis finibus eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eoruiA
finibuB bellum gerunt. Eorum una patis, quam Gallos obtinere*
dictum est, initium capit a fiumine Rhodano ; continetur Garumna
flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; attingit etiam ab ^equanis et 15
Helvetiis flumen Rhenum ; vei^t ad septentriones. Belgae ab
extremis Galliae finibus oriuntur ; pfertinent ad inferiorem partes»
fluminis Rheni ; spectant in septentrionem e^^ orientem solem.
r .Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes et eam partem
Ooeani, quae est ad Hispaniain, pertinet ; j^^tat inter oecasun^ao.'
8olii3 et septentrionea. . -^ . ,
. ffc Umi*! Bewmd layt^m ^ Otmutny, B.0.;8tf"^ ^
CaeAai*, postquam'ex Menapiis in Treveros venit, diiabus de munf
Rhenum transire constituit ; quarum una\erat qiu)d Gerntftni auiUiik
* AU th^ words not tftven 111 the fooinoiet ocot}# «Httt Uie mbw me»niiif in t^
Mlaotiona fronk NepoH and C'i|)Bar in Part IV. \ ,
1,— 2. Hnirua, tenofH<w/c. 6. puUub, cinUixatiati 4,J)uniftnitM|, rffinrment. f.-
miriime, by no meafu. J. ronimco, vuit. 8. pertifte ), Itnd. 9. oontlnefnter, ooiii
tinruUly. 11. praeoyio, «nrpgwx. II. oontineo,,^ (wHti4. \16. mh, on the xidfi q/.
W ii, mi, nniU m^
T^~T"^
\
%■■'
♦ \
::V ' ■ ]
, <•
^au^
ncolunt
nter se • "
latrona
Belgae, 6
gissime
que ea, ^
cunique ,
linenter
GalloBlO
3rmani8
eorurtl
btinerev
arumna
lanis eti5 v
Igae ab
partem
solem. ^
parteiri ^
•ccasun^ao*
PART Y.--^TBANSLATION AT SIGHT.
449
contra se Treyeris miserant ; altera, ne ad eos Ambiorix receptum
haberet. xHis constitutis rebus, paulo supra euiu locum quo ante
exercifcora traduxerat facere pontem instiiuit. Mi^no militum
studio, paucis diebus opus efficitur. Firatto in Treveris ad pontem
ptaesidio relicto, ne quis ab his subito motus oreretur, reliquas 6
copias equitatumquetraducit. Ubii, qui ante obsides dederant atque
in deditionem venerant, purgandi sui causa ad eum legates mittunt,
qui doceant auxilia ex sua'^vitate in Treveros non missa esse ;
petunt a€que orant ut sibi parcat ; si amplius obsidum yelit dari, ~t-
fpollicentur. Cognita Caesar causa repent ab Suebis auxilia missa lo
jene. Ubiorum satisfactionem accipit ;• aditus viasque in Suebos
peniuirit.
Interim paucis post diebus fit ab Ubiis certior Suebos omfies in
linum locum copias cogere, atque eis nationibus quae sub eorum
sint imperio, denuntiare, ut auxilil^'^ifeditatu8 equitatusque mittant. is
His cognitis rebus rem frumentariam providet, castris idoneum
locum deligit, Ubiis imperat Ut pecora deducant, suaque omnia ex
.j-nr^i^is in oppida conferant (sperans hostes inopia cibariorum ad- '
'^uctosad iniquam pugnandi condicionem ppsse deduci) ; mandat
ut crebroe exploratotes in Siebos mittant, quaeque apud eos 20
l^erantur, cognoscant. . ' '
Illi imperata faciunt, et paucis diebus intermissis re^erunt:.
Suebos omnes, posteaquam certiores nunfti'de exercitu Romi^orum
fen€ftint, cum omnibus suis copiis quas coegisseht, ad extremof fines
se recepisse; «ilvam esse ibi infinita magnitudine ; ad ejuspilvaefS
initium Suebo/ls adv«ntum Komanorum exspectare constitiiisse.
Caesar, postquam per Ubios cixploratores comperit l^uebos sese
in silvas recepisse, inopiam frumenti veritus (qilod, ut supra
demonstravimus, mtnime omnes Germani agricul^urae student),
oonstituit non progredi longius ; sed, ne omnina metum reditus sui SO
bar'baris tolleret, reducto exercitu- partem ,ultim^m pontis, qiiae
s, ripiKs Ubiorum wmtingit, resciudit, atqu£ in extremo ponte" turrim
ooHtitituit, praesidiumque coh6rtium duodecim pontis tuendi causa
• ponit, magnisque eum locum munitionibus firmat ; ipse ad bellum
Affibiorigis profioiacitur. . • ^
i.—l. Anil>lorix wM t\w leader of a levmldable revolt In north-eaatern OaXil.
• W, cogno«?o cauMuii, invttiiigaU <t etue. 11. «atisfactlo, exeutfg. 12. (t«rqulro,
fn<juirf t^mit. IS (ienurifcio, fftiy n^itv l». «p^ro, hofic. 18. cibaria. priwiaimi,
1». irtiquus, unit(fitml. 24. extrptwua. retnoh»( .^Vi. nilnime wtudeo. jwi/ wry (ittU .
uUten^
.\.l
•4
4D0
PRIMARY LATIN 'BOOK. ^
[1|A]
age»
8. The Campaign against the Belgee, B.C. 67f ^ •,
' Cum esset Caesar in citeriore Gallia, in hibernis, litteris Labieni
oertior factus est, omnes Belgas contra popiilum Romanum con- '
jurare, quod vererent.ur ne, omni (jallia pacata, ad eos , exercitus
noster adduceretur. His nuntiis commotus, Caesar duasJegiones
in citeriore Gallia novas conscripsit, et inita aestate ad exercitum 6
venit. Imperat Senonibiis, qui finiUmi Belgis erarit, uti ea, quae
apud eos' gerantur, cognoscant, seque de his 'rebus certiorem'
faciant. Hi omnes nuntiayerunt manus ^t^jgi, exercitum in unum
locum conffnci/ Turn Caesar re frutaicfcria comp^rata castrt»
movet, diebusque circiter quindecim ad fines Belprum per\'enit. 10
Posteaquam omnes Belgarum copias in unum iflfjim coactas esse,
et ad se venire vidit, neque jam longe abesiib ab exploratoribu»
cognovit, flumen Axonam,quod est in Hgmorum finibus, exercitum
traducef e maturavit, atque ibi castra posuit. In eo flumirie pons
erat. Ibi praesidium poiiit, atque in altera parte flu^linis Q. Titu- 15
rium Sabinum legatum cum sex cohortibus reliquit. At» his
■ cajstria oppidum Remorum, nomine Bibrax, aberat millia passuum
octo. Id magno impetu Belgae oppugnare coeperunt. Aegre eo die
Bustentatum e^. Cum fitiem oppugnan4i nox fecisset, Iccius, qui
turn oppido praeerat, i^unt^m ad Caesarem mittit : nidi subsidium 20
sibi submittatur, sese diutius sustinere non posse. Eo media nocte
Caesar ^uas cohortes subsidio oppidanis mittit: quorum advent»
hostes discesserunt, agrosque Remorum depopulati, omnibus vicis
4 atque aedificiis quos adire potuerant incensis, omnibus copiis ad •
flumen Amonam contenderunt, quod esse post nostra castr» demon- sa
stratum est.
Ibi vadis r^]^i», parttBi suarum copiamm transducere conati
sunt, eo consilio, ut, si possont, castellum, cui praeerat Q. Titurius
legatus, expugnarent; fi minus potuissent, agros Remorum popit-
larentur, comii|featti4ue nostros prohiberent 30
Caesar, certior^f actus ab Titurio, omnem equitatum pontem
traducit, atq'^ue ad eos contendit. Acritor in eo loco pugnatum eat.
Hostes iropeditosnostri in flumino aggressi, magnun^ eorura nan^e-^
roiSf . ». oonrtnco, ffaflirr 14. iwrturo, ha^itn. 17. ^ml, there wore olhe» of the
•^
i-
il^'iiiluaa, not. 2». populor, lag
■• -i ,
nonacribo,
lie» of ttm
-
i.
. * -l
PART v.— TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 45I
. rum occiderunt. Per eorum corpora reliqui audacissime transire
Z^'^T"^ ^^r^ -pulsisuntl^ primi. ^ transit::
jqoitatu cu^uMventMnterfectique sunt. ' Hoc p^^elio superati .
ftostes conciho convocato constituerunt optimum esse domum suam
l^emque reverti et quorum ip fi.es prhuum Romani exerc tu" 5
introduxifisent, ad eos defendendos undique convenireitt ■
, «u castns egressx sur.t ; ita ut consimHis fugae proLtio vL.
retur. Hac ro statmi Caesar pet speculatores cognita insidias
^jentus. quod qu.de causa discederenr„ondum perspex^U extr'lO
citum equitatumque castris continuit. Prima luce confirmata re
ab exploratonbus, omnem equitatum qui f ugientes persequeretur,
2lf ^'Z"'"'"""'^''" '^'''^ ™"^"""^ multitudinem eorum conci!
derunt subque occasum solis ^titerunt, seque in castraAut erat
imperatum, receperunt. > \
Postridie ejus diei Caesar, priusqua^sehostes ex terrc^lie aJ fu<.a ""
reciperent xn fines Suessionum.^qui proximi Remis erant, exe'r
citum duxit et ad oppidum Noviodunum contendit. Id oppugnare
Znd!' rP'" ''''"'"'" '^^^^^ """^"^ altitudinemf p'auci!
defendent.bus,.expugnare non potuit. Castris munitis, \L ad20
multitudo m oppidum proxima^ nocte convenit. Celeriter aggere
jacto, magnitudine operum, quae neque viderant ante.Galli neque
audjerant. et ce entate R<«„anorum permoti, legatos ad Caesarem
His rebu. ge8tis,>nta huju, belli ad bsrbaros Opinio perlaf»*'
«^«t. ab ™ nationibus quae trana Rhe„u,„ in^Mun^r^,,^
X^ntu™" "" """-''•" -^'u^^i^pe^U factum.
- j| i- The 'Gauls and the Oemuot.
p^issedp^nem smguhs domibus factiones sunt; a^ue e.>dem
m^o *;^ Ga^Kdiv^sa est in duas part«s. Cum Caesar in GalHam
vm^, >lt«riu8 fe«^»«iiB pr incipe^^ g^quani. F" "^
«•^-«l. lirtMwrf jr, *»d«. 82. pur.. 1»,^. »- "» -^
A-^
M
45^
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
, I
w
In omni Gallia eorum hominum qui aliquo sunt honore genera
sunt duo; nam plebspaeneBervorumhabetur loco. r>«hi«d"«^"^
«eneribus alterum est druidum, alterum equitum. Drmdes rebus .
divinis intersunt; sacrificiis publica atque privata pto<mrant ; de ,
omnibus controversiis publicis privatisque constiiuunt. His autem
omnibus druidibus praeest unus, qui summam inter eos habet
auctoritatem. Druides a belle abesse consuerunt, neque tnbuta
una cum reliquis pendunt. Tantis excitati praemiis, et suasponte
multi in disciplUn conveniunt et a par^ntibus mittuntur Mag-
num ibi numerum versuum ediscere dicuntur. Multa praeterea de 10^
sideribus atque eorum motu, de mundi ac terrarum magmtudme,-
de rerum natura, de deokm immortalium vi ac potestate ^^Pf^
Alterum genus est equrt^m. Hi, cum aliquod bell^m incidit (quod
fere ante Caesaris adventum quptannis accidere solebat) omnes in ^
; bello versantur, plurimosqiie clientes habent .
^ Nat\o est omnis Gallorum admodum' dedita religionibus ; atque
ob eam causam qui iii proeliis periculisqu^ versantur, aut pro vic-
timis homines immolant aut se immolaturos vovent ; jubhceque
eiusdem generis habent institute sacrificia. . '
Germani multum ab hac consuetudine diflferunt. nam neque»
druides habent qui rebus divinis praesii^t, nequ6 s^crificiis student.
Vita omnis in venationibus atque in studiis rei militans consistit ;
a parvis labori ac duritiae student^ Pellibus utuntur, magna
corporis parte nuda. Agriculturae non student, majorque pars
feorum victus in lacte', caseo, came consistit. Neque quisquam 26
auri modum certum aut fines habet proprios ; sed magistratus ac
principes in annos singulos quantum visum efit attribuunt, atque
aano post alio transire cogunt. _ 1 ^
Civitatibus maxima laus est quam latkrime cireiim se ▼»»»«» ^
finibus solitudines habere. Hoc prbpnum virtutis existmxant, 80
expulsos ag*i8 finitimos. cede re, neque quemquam prope se auder»
\. t ».«.,«- ««,!##. rft««MW!<ton 2. poene. olmout. S. druidea, the dniids.
3 iul S^. Tfe^dl^^l^TnaUerslfreUoion*. J"te«um «^ co«.«^^
3 eques, KTt^«i. oacrifioe 5. controvereia, duptUe. 7. tributum. wo!.
r'*- u*' .JJ^tS s^X^inm rewardr 9. In disciplinam, for tmtrwiwn.
8.excito. gtxmviaie. s. P™*™\"'"' ,',!," _^ „ mAoA ^ar 11. mundug,
the unii'erm.^ ^^j "''Ti^; i7^kima rS iT^^^ 21,28.24. itudeo.
90 propnum, a mark.
1
i;i
genera
iuobus
1 rebus
nt; de
autem ^
habet
tributa
sponte
Mag-
;ereadelO
itudine}
iputant. :
it (qiiod
nnes in
15
; atque
pro vic-
bliceque
1 neque20
student,
ansistit;
, magna
[ue pars
ui8quam26
Tatus ac
it, atqae
I vastfttiB
istimant, 30
e audere
the druid».
I concerned
Litum, tax.
irwtnuiion.
I. mundys,
wotU. 16.
,24. itudeo,
1, ednitist ef.
cheeae. 26.
m. armmd.
PART v.— TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
453
consistere; simul hoc se fore tutiores arbitrantur, repentinae
^"^•'^^'^^ timore sublato. Cum bellum civitas geyit, magistratus
qui Wbello praesint deliguntur. In pace nuUus est communis ("
magistratus sed principes regionum atque pagorum inter suos jus
: dicunt. Hospitem violare fas non putant ; qui quacumque de causa 5
-ad eos venerunt ab injuria prohibent sahctosque habent.
^ Ac fuit antea tempus cum Germanos Galli virtute superarent,
ultro bella inferrent, propter hominum multitudinem agrique
' inopiam trans Rhenum colonijis mitterent. Nunc quidem in
^eaderainopia atque egestate Germani permanent, eodem victu etlO
vestitu utuntur ; Gallos autem provinciarum propinquitas ettrans-
marinarum rerum notitia humaniore? eflfecit. Paulatim assuefacti
superari, multisque victi proeliis, ne se quidem ipsi cum iUis virtute
■; comparant.,,^,, :.■■;, :...c<,;V',—\, .,^^., ;,:.'.■. .;^.-,, .. . ■' .^.
5- the Battle of Marathon. '
Darius autem, cum ex Europa in Asiam redisset, hortantibus 16
amicis i|^t Graeciam redigoret in suam potestatem, classem quingen-
. tarum mvium comparavit, eique Datim praefecit et Artaphernem,
usque ducenta peditum, decem equitum millia dedit, causam inter-
^oneris se hostom es.se Atheniensibus, quod eorum auxilio lones
Sardes expugnassent suaqup praesidia interfecissent. Illi,'classe20
ad Euboeam appulsa, ^^riter Eretriam ceperunt omnesque'ejus
gentis cives aWeptos inl^am ad regetn mise'runt.
Inde ad Atticam accesserunt ac suas copias in campuiii Mara-
ttiona deduxerunt. Is est ab oppido circiter millia passuum decem. '
. Hoc tumultu Athenienses tarn propinquo tamqu'e magno permoti 25
auxilmmnusquamnisia Laceda^mohiispetiverunt. Domi autem'
croant decem praetores^qui exertitui pra^essent, in iis Miltiadem
Inter quos magna fuit contentio, utrum moenibus se defenderent* '
an obviam, irenfc hostibus acieque decernerent. Unus Miltia'des
max<me hortabatur ut castra fiereilt : id si factum isset, et civibusso'
ammmn acces8uium,.cuii||griderent de ^rum vftttute nx>n desperari.
TO. Tones, the ioniaiin.
nuaqxiam,'^ nowhere: <>
o«8fci"» lacip", "hereiirea
abrlpio, carri/ off.
contriiverMu.
^
zOv mmuhua, mdden attak. 20
,,89. (leBfirnn, fight, cowtowd. 8o!
81. »«jed'orcoTfte, am'j/uien.
■/'
iPiPiiii
'i% : *
^5^4
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
#
;,2?z)^^^
efc host^^Jem ye fc*e tardiores, si anijj^dvert^rent auderi ad-
J^rsus se tarn exiguis copiis dimicaid. .. »»
. Hoc in tempore nulla ciVitas Atheniensioua auxilio fuit praeter
Plataeenses. Ea mille misit milites. Itaqwe horurn adventu
decern millia armatorum oompleta sunt, quae manus mirabili fla- 5
grabat pugnandi cupiditate. Quo factum est ftij plus quam collegae .
Miltiadea 'Valeret. Ejus ergo auctoritate in^pulsi Atheni^nses
copias ex iirbe eduxeyunt, locoque idpneo castra f ecerunt.' Deindc
postero -die syib montis radicibus acle instructa (atque ftrbores .
multis locis'erant rarae) proelium commiserunt hoc consilio ut etio
montium altitudine tegerentur et arborum.tracta^quitatushostium -»
impediretur; '> ■■■;.„ ,'= ■;.'■'■ '■%.^,'.-; ■■■*;■''
Datis, etsi rion aequum locum videlkt suis, taraen fretus numero
copiarum suarum confligere c.upiebat, eoque magis, quod prius-
quam Lacedaemonii subsidio venirent, jjj^icare utile arbitrabatur. 15
ibaque iij^ aciem peditum centum, equitum decem millia produxit,
groeliumque commisit. Jn quo tanto plus virtute valuerunt Athe-
nienties ut decemplicem numerum hdstium profligarint, adeoque eoa
"^ lerunt ut Persae non castra sed naves petierint.
6. ^anI^bal'9 Father, Hamilcar.
lilcar, Carthaginiensia, primo Pimico bello, admodum adu- 20
lescentulus in Sicilia praeesse coepit M:ereitui. Cum ante ejus
adventu m et mari et terra male res gererentur Carthaginiensium, v
ipse, ubi adfuit, numquam hosti ccissit n|eque locum 'nocendi dedit,
saepeque e contrario, occasione data^4«rcessivit semperque superior
discessit. Quo facto, cum paene omnia in Sicilia Poeni amisissent, 25
• ille Erycem sic defchdit ut bellum eo loco gestum non videretur.
' Interim Carthaginienses, clause j^pud insulas Aegates a C. Lu-
tatio, consule Romanorum, superati, 8ta,tuerunt belli facere finem.
Paucis post annis, quo facilius causam bellandi cum Romania
reperiret,^ effecit- ut imperator cum ex6^bitu in Hispaniam mit- 30
teret^ur, eoque secura duxit filium Hahnibalem annorum novem.
5.-5. compleo, make up. 6. mirabiliR, wonderhU. 6. iflagro, be inflamed xintk.
6. coHega, colleague. 7. impello, lead. 9- sub raaicibus. at the foot. 11. altiiudo,
heufht. 11. tego, protect. 11. tractus, nm. 13. aequus, favorable. 13. fretus,
rel'i/hvj on. 15. utile, a good thing. 16. produce, /m<i om<. 18. d&cemT^lex, tenfold,
' O,— 20. admodum odulescentulus, a mere youth. 23. adaum, dm preMnt. 23.
loouH, Opportunity. _24^ e contrario, on t/ie cjmtrari/. 24. occaaio, opportunity.
'"S
w
iu IMene, dlimisl. ZQ: Ecyv, & lowjQ In sidiy. 29. causa, pretext.
\.- ^■.
-»•-■•
#
iri ad-
tn adu-20
te ejus
insium,
dedit,
uperior
sissent, 25
etur.
C. Lu-
finem.
omanis
m mit- 30
novem.
altitudo,
3. fretus,
:, tei\fidd.
Kent. 23.
turtunity.
PART V. — TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
455
% - ■
*
if
)raeter
Iventu
»ili fla- 5
'
oUegae •
ii^nses
Deindo
ubores
) ut etio
w
'
ostium ^-
-
«
'l
lumero
prius-
ibatur. 15
oduxit,
b Athe-
f
c[ue eos
«^ Erat praeterea cum eo adulesoens Hasdrubal, qui, Hamilcare
occiso, exercitui praefuit resque magnas geasit. Ejus post
mortem Hannibal ab exercitu accepit imperium.
At Hamilcar, posteaquam mare transiit in Hispaniamque venit,
magnas res secunda gessit fortuna ; maximas bellicosissimaaque 6
gentes subegit, equis, armis, viris, pecunia totam locupletavit
Africam. Hie cum in Italiam bellum inferre meditaretur, noi^
anno postquam in Hispaniam venerat, in proelio pugnafas advepsu^
Vettones occisus est. ^^ ^^- — -^
Hujus perpetuum a^Ri erga Romanos maxime concitasse vide- 10
tur secundum bellumTunicum. Namque Hannibal, filius ejus,
assiduis patris obtestationibus eo est perductus ut .interire quam
Romanos non experiri mallet.
7. Batamedi Captnrea Aspii. ^
. Datames cum maximo studio compararet exercitum, Aegyp-
tumque proficisci pararet, subito a rege littierae sunt ei missae, ut 15
' Aspim aggrederetur, qui Cataoniam tenebat, quae jacet supra
' Ciliciam. Namque Aspis, saltuosam regionem castellisque muni,
tain incolens, non solum imperio regis non parebat sed etiam
f fiuitimas regiones vexabat, et ^uae regi portarentur abripiebat.
Datames, etsi longe aberat ab iis regionibus et a majore re abstra- 20
hebatur, tamen regis voluntati morem gerendum putavit.
Itaque cum paucis sed viris fortibus navem conscendit,» exis-
timans, quod accidit, facilius se imprudentem parva manu oppros-
surum, quam paratum quamvis magno exercitu. Hac delatus in
Ciliciam, egressus inde, dies noctesque iter faciens, Taurum trans- 25
iit^, Quaerit quibus locis sit Aspis ; cognoscit haud longe abesse,
profectumque venatum. Interim, adventus ejus causa cognoscitur.
Pisidas, cum iis qdos secum habebat, ad resistendum Aspis com-
parat. Id Datames ubi audivit, arma sumit, suos sequi jubet ;
ipse equo concitato ad hostem vehitur. Quem procul Aspis con- 30
spiciens ad se lerentem pertimescit atque a conatu resistendi
6.-;6. secundus, good. 6. locupletd, enrich. 7. meditor, plan. 10. pernetxius
unceaamg. 10. concito, provoke. 12. assiduus, constant. 12. obtestatio, akmrationl
12. perduco, lead. 13. experior, try conclusions vkth. 13. malo, choose rather. ^
7.— 14. Datamea, a Persian general of Artoxerxes II. 16. jaceo. lie. 16. suura.
beyond. 17 Baitximua, full of forests. 19. abripio, carrj/ off. 20. abitraho. draw
^*""'^;^ - • ^*^"' «c. navi. 27. \enor, hunt . 28. Pi sidno.-^^^^ Pi sidianH. a p.
-vmrm) Jipipr rmr TJOr vetiai-,, «W terror r'^c. 31. fero (hen» Intransitivts se^dnT
omitted), advance. 31. pertinicsco, become frightened. 31. conatus, attempt. J;
^™.^'
.**:-
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARC^ET (MT-S)
*i ii
"V. ■ -^
1.0
IttlM 125
lis ^^^ ■■■
■» IM ' ■2.2
£ us 12.0
Photographic
Sciences
CorporatiDn
93 WMT MAIN STMn
WIMTfR.N.Y. t4SM
(71«)t71-4>0S
S
fc
.
«
'
. ' . **r
,
•
•
. * * ' 1
"■ . * * "•.^■■■■.-. ^
•
V
) :
•
»
^ . *
•
.
"( '■--.■••
"' .■■
■ «1 -
If
/•
'V "('
» «
=^^
</
•
,
*
, _
•
•
■ ■ . #,
r
•
«
•
«
»
1 ■?
' ■
•^
^
'
•
-
•
•
,
.,
* " •
- . _^
•
■■•
* «.
'
•
»
1
•_
'
m
, ■■'W*^^^
.; %
%
■~
'
456
.PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
y
detemtus seae dedidit.
dum dedit Mithridati.
Huiic Batames vinctum ad regem traden-
% - / 8. The Military Oeniui of IphioratM. ^ ?'* .
ipffirates Atheniensis non tam magaitudine rerum gestarum '■
quam disciplina militari nobilitatus est. Fuifi enira talis dux, ut
non solum aetatis suae cum primis compararetur, sed ne de ma jo- 8
ribus natu quidem quisquam anteponeretur. Multuih vero in bello
ost versatuB, saepe exercitibus praefuit, tantumque eo valuit, ut
multa in re militari ^rtim nova attulerit, partim melLora fecerit. .
Namque ille pedestria arma mutavit. Cum ante ilium maximis -
olipeis, brevibus hastis, minutis gladiia nterentur, ille, e contrario 10
peltam pro clipeo fecit, ut ad motus concursusque essent leviores ;
hastae moduni duplicavit, gladios longiores fecit. Idem genus
loricarum novum instituit, et pro aeneis linteas dedit. Quo fActo .
expeditiores milites reddidit.
Apud Corinthum tanta severitate exercitui praefuit, ut nuUae 15
umquam in Graecia neque exercitatiores copiae neque magia dicto
audientes fuerint duci ; in eamque consuetudinem adduxit, ut
cum proelii signum ab imperator/esset datum, sine ducis opera
aio ordinatae donsiaterent, ut ainguli a peritissimo imperatore
diapositi viderentur. Hoc exercitu mowm Lacedaemoniorum^
interfecit, quod maxime tota celebratum eat^ Qtaecia. Iterum
eodem bello omnea copias eorum fugavit, quo facto magnam
adeptus est gloriam. ■ -
8. The Honesty end Foreiight of Epaminondu.
- Biomedon, rogatu Artaxerxia regis, ut Epaminondam pecunia
cbrrumperet, magno cum pondere auri Thebas venit et Micy-25
thum adulescentem, quern Epaminondaa plurimum diligebat, quin-
que talentia ^d auara perduxit voluntatem. , lilicythua Epaminon-
7.— 1. vlnclo, pu* in ehaim.
8.— 4. disciplina, nkill. 4. nobilito, make fammt». 0. vero, in fact. 8. alTero,
introdw». 8. inelior, helUr. ». pedetter, (tf infantry. ». muto, ohange. 10. olipeua,
■AMd. 10. hasU, Kpear. 10. minutus, wn/ $hort. 10. Rladiiw, guxtrd. 10. e con-
tnwrio, on the eontrah- H- P«lt*. lufht tthield. 11. pro, it^dacf qf. 11. levUi. li^ht.
12. modus, tiunMHrr, length. 18. lorlc», cuirtuM. IS. Instimo, introdttce. 18, llnteui,
oflintn. 16. severiUa, ntrietnu: 16. exercitatua, well trained. 16. dloto audieni,
ci)edient. 18. opera, a»in$tam». 19. ordino, net in irrder. 19. peritua, exjMi^iem^
20. mora, a dlviiiion of the- Spartan army, regimtnt. 21. oelebro, talkqf, praine.
_^ ^ __ _ ^ _ _ JIgOt Iw /wM> qjfi
, tr.'ptidooo^'^riiv'otfr.
PART V.-T-TRANSLiirriON AT SIGHT.
457
dam convenit, et causam adveutus Diomedontis ostendit. At ille,
Diomedohtis coKwn : "Nihil," inquit, '* opus pecunia «st ; nam si
rex ea vulb quae Thebanis sunt uj)ilia, gratiis facere sum^paratus ;»
sin autetn contraria, non habet auri atque argenti satis. Namque
Qirbis terrarum divitias accipere nolo pro patriae caritate.. Tu quod 6
me incognitum tentasti, tuique similem existimasti, non miror,
tibique ignosco ; sed egredere propelre, ne alios coirumpas, cum.
me, non potueris. Et tu, Micythe, argentum huic redde, aut, nisi
idconfestim facip, ego te tradam magistratui." Hunc Diomedon
cum rogaret ut tuto dxire suaque liceret eflerre : "Istud quidem" 10
inquit "faciam, neque tua causa, sed mea, nor^i jbibi si^j)ecunia
adompta, aliquis dicat id ad me pervenisss." ^A" quo cumquaesi-
visset quo se deduci vellet, et ille Athenas, dipdsset, praesidium
dedit, ut tuto perveniret. 1 '
Atque Meneclides quidam, adversarius Epaminondae, quod in 15
re militari^ 4orere ilium videW, hortari solebafe Thebanos ut pacem .
bello anteferre&t, n^ illius imperatoris opera desideraretur. Huio '
ille, "Fallis," inquit, •♦ verbo cives tuos, quod eos a bello avocas ;
otii enim nomine. servitutem concilias. Nam paritur pax bello.
It^ue qui pace diutina volunt frui, bello exeroil^ti esse debent. 20
Quare si principes Graeciae vultis esse, oastris est vobis utendum,
non palaestra." ^^
10. The Story of UlyuM.
The Lotus- Eaters.
Cum urbs Troja, a Graecis decem annos obsessa, tandem per
insidias capta esset, Graeci,tpngo bello fessi domum redire matura-
verunt. Omnibus igitur iSl^ profectidtiem paratis naves deduxerunt 25
et tempestatem idoneam' nacti magno cum gaudio solverunt.
Erat inter primos Graecorum Ulixes quidam, vir^summae virtutis
ac prudentlae. ■ Hie regnum insulae Ithaoae obtinuerat et, paulo
antequam cum reliquis Graecis ad bellum profectus est, puellam
9.-^1. oonvento, go to. 2. conm, in th$ prMence qf. 2. opus, need qf (w. »bl.)
8. grntiis, /or nothing. 4. sin, but if. 4. oontrarius, opposite. 5. orb!» terrarum,
the whole world. 6. carita», love. «. tento, eeek to bribe. 6. jimili», like. 8. reddo,
give bank, 10. efPero, oarr?/ ouwy. 10. intuA, what yon aOi. 11. cauia, /or ... «a*?.
16. floreo, am eonsjrifniom. 16. «oleo, am wmt. 17. opera, HerviceM. 18. avoco,
dienuide. 19. otium, prone. 19. «ervituB, elavery. 19. connillo, brxiig atmut. 1».
pario, ofttain. 20. dlutinu», /ojiWnj;. 20. friior, (r»yoj/(w. abl.). 20. exwvilatus, uW/-
irained. 22. palacwtra, «. y( a<<m y^ jwj^<w< <»» t,ypH»t<>l poatit.)
10.-28. ohBideo, ftr«trt/c. 24. feBsiw, «««oricd, 84.
joy. 29. anUqiiam, b^ore, 20. puella, maidm..
\
^
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
formosissimam, nomine Pehelopen, in, matrimonium duxerat.
Nunc igitur, cum jam decern ann9s quasi in exsilid consumpsisset, ^
magna 6upiditato patriae et uxoris videndae incensus est.
Poatquamtamen pauca millia passuum a litore Trojae progressi
sunt, tanta tempestas sqbito coorta est'ut nulla navium cursum 6
tenere pusset, sed aliae alias in partes disjicerentur. Navis autem
qua ipse Ulixes vehebatur, vi tqmpestatis ad meridiem delata,
decimo die ad litus Libyae appulsa. est. Ancoris jactis Ulixbs
constituit nonnullos e suis iti terram exponere, qui aquam ad
navom referrent et qualis esset natura ejus regionis cognoscerent. 10
Hi igitur e navi egressi imperata faoere parabant. Dum tamen t~
funtem quaerunt, quibusdam ex incolis obviam facti ab eis hospitio
accepti sunt. Accidit autem ut maximam partem niiro quodam
fructu, quem lotum appellabant, hi homines viverent. Quern cum
Oraeci gustassent, patriae et sociorum' statim obliti, se confirmave- 15
runt semper in ea terra mansuros, ut dulci illo cibo in perpetuum
fruerentur.
At . Ulixes, cuiii ab . hora septima ad vesperttm exspectasset,
veritu^. ne socii siii in periculo versaren^f, nonnullos o reli<][uiB
misit, ut quae causa esset morae cognoscerlent. Hi igitur in terram 20
expositi, cum ad vigum qui non l^nge al^crat pervenissent, socios
suos quasi vino ebrios reppererUi^iil^quo oid persuadere conabantur
ut secum ad navem rcdirent^^^B tamen resistere ac manu se
defendel-e coeperunt, sacrpe- clamTOlntes se numquam ex eo Ioqo
discessuros. Quae cum ita tfisent, nuntii re infocta ad Ulixem25
redierunt. His r6bu8 cognitis Ulixes ipse cum omnibus qui in
nayi relicti sunt ad loiaum vonit ; et socios suos iFrustra hortatus ut
sponte sua redirent, manibus eoruin post terga vinctis, invitos ad
navem reportavit. Tum ancoris sublatis quam. celerrime e portu
solvit. ; , • , 80
, . . ■ ■■ -' A '• ■' . ■» ~
'.' . The OiarU, Polyphemus.
Postridie ejus djei postquam totam noctem r^mis contendeirant,
ad terram ignotam navem appulerunt. Tum, quod natu^am ejus
10.— I. formom», btaiUifiU. I. niairlmonhiiti, nHtrn'offe. 2. axmni, a» it wrr»,
'6. disjlcio, matter. 10. refero, brituj hack. 12. fon», itprrng. 12. obviam flo, fall in
with. 12. hospitlum, hospitaliti/. 13. minis, wimtlerfitl. 14. (nictUB, fruit. U.
lotus, the Intun. 16. ob\iv'iacor,fi»yet (w. gen.). 1«. dulcis, eieeet, pleatant. 17. fruor,
jnpy [vf. a.b\.). IS. vtuper^ evening. 19. mMiiua, einnrade. 22. tihriun^ ilnmk. M^ ig^
enjo
Tnte
egpe:
/
m
■(
'ecfca, tMKbulaooomjHtehivg tSeir pUrpuHe. &. vincio, &tnJ.
=Mt
8;
:^ .
^ ■.■ V_.. . -^' ■..:•■: ■■:•:■'■■ ■./:'•■
/; ; . • - /^«T V--TRAKSUTI6N AT S;/5hT. ' 459
. regioms ignorabat, ipie Ulixes cum duodecim t ^- ■ .
egreasu» locum Mplorare oonstitiiit p , l^'" '" ^*™"»
-Bpecum ingentem ler.lZT'^.m ^t:^"^,""',!^"'^' «O
P«riculo id facturos, intravem," llf """"^»"»»' "o" «»«
- qui. eum locum inooleret «MtZ ?' . ^™" n»™»'»' «
^n, humana quid::tere ' ;u~- ^^^^
yC.c.opi.„..ae';rtrmtmrrnr '•^"^^ """•" »
., «uod monslrum aimul atque vidernnt « . '"
interiorompartcm.pdu„caeSuJteur P^ 7 """^™" '"
•nim giganti, nomenemt) pecom^!™ :, .^"'wtemus autom (id
saxo ingcnti portam ob,fr, ,,!!? ° «P»''"»™» egit f turn cum
(Hoc faL, cC^Sl^^ " "VT" '" "'"''" "Pecu accendit
V'Qui esti; homin'rri^e^^rrarplaresr^ T °'*r " ''
o«am ut Sibil:: L^srrirer^iTrr^ "-''" ^
dato responso duo « P.„ ' ■»•""» Polyphemus, nuUo
divu.,israr;devo;^r;r"' """*""".'" "■«""•-, — »
»et Ulixcs, tanUm occL,i„nem r.i Ze «Hi ^ ""'" "*'■
FW'atus, in animo habcbat ^iwrCtTd"""''""/**"''""'^
cum saxnm animadverUsset n,„; 1, •! «Wio occdere. At
- e,ua ...i m^„,„,„. „, „, ,_ quidltml!^"!^
i£"^i, '«: Cyclops . ibiilou, kftf^UV'Tj"- J!- "•'""• "''">■ "1^
Ktone. 14. obstnio, ba*ric<uif u i.t„u ^i*""- '^- ■pelunca, caoern. U uxum
i-.
■/
460
PRIMARY LATIN BOOlL.
N
' pecore suo progressus est, atque postquam ^omnes oves exierunt
saxum in locum restituit. ""^"^-^-.^
Sub vesperUm Polyphemus ad specum rediit et eodem modo qU<j^
ante cenavit. Turn Ulfxes utrem vini prompsit, quam forte secum
habebat, et giganti praebuit. Polyphem% qui numquam antea 6
vinum gustaverat, statim hausii^quod cu^ fecisset, quaesivit quc^ ;
nomine Ulixes appellaretur. Hie respondit se Neminem appellari|
Quod cum audivisaet, Polyphemus, **Hano tibi gratiam," inquit,
"pro tanto beneficio referam ; te ultimura omnium devorabo."
Ilisdictis, cibo vinoque gravatud, breAT tempore somno oppressuM©
est. Turn Ulixes sociis con vocatis, "Habemus," inquit, **»q"»«|
petimus facultatem." Tum postquam quid fieri vellet ostenditi
Budem praeacutam conquirebat. Quam cum repperisset, igni
calefecit, atque oculum Polyphemi diam dorrait transfodit ; qu<!)
facto omnes in ultimas speljuncae partes se abdiderunt. ' W
AtilleBubito illo dolore, quod nfecesse fuit,e. somno excitatus,
olamorem .ingentem sustulit, et dum per speluncam errat, Ulixem
manu comprehendere conatur ; cum tamen jam omnino caecus
e^et, nullo modo hoc efficere potuit. Interea reliqui Cyclopes -
clamore audito undique ad speluncam convenenint et quid ^rere- 20
tur quaesiverunt. Hie respondit Bo graviter vulneyatum esse.
Cum tamen cpteri quaesivissent quis ei vim intulisset, respondit
ilfe Neminem id fecisse. Quibus auditis unus e Cyclopibus
•'At si nemo," inquit, '*te vwlneravit, non dubium est quin con-
silio* deorum, quibus i-esistere nee possumus nee volumus, hoc 25
supplicio aflSoiaris." His dictis, arbitrati eumin insaniam inoidisse,
discesserunt Cyclopes. ,
I At Polyphemus, , ubi socios suos abiisse sensit, furore atque
amentia impulsus Ulixem iterum quaerere coepit; tandem cum
portam invenisset, saxum amovit tit pecus ad agros exiret. Tum 30
ipse in'introftli sedit, et ut quaeque ovis ad locum venerat, tergum
ejus manibus tractabat, ne Graeci inter oves efifiigere possent.
Quod cum animadvertisset Ulixes, hoc iniit consilium : intellexit '
enim* omnem spem salutis in dolo^ mt^'s quam in virtute ppni.
10._1. ovis, 8keep. 2. restltuo, ptit fta.-Jfc. 8. mib, totmrda. 4. uter, ftcini
4. promo, brinff mit. 4. forte, by chance. 6. haurio, drink off. 9. beiieflcium,
Bervice 9. uUi'mus, /flwt. 10. gravatus, A«atw. 18. \ttax»a\ii\\a, sharpened at the end.
18 conayxSro, look ab<nU for. 14. calefacio, heat. 14. dormio, deep. 14. transfodio,
i. '^ ^a Ar.\nr, «u»i«i 17 arm, \iiivader 1H omH^iia tMnd. «ft. In iniiaiilam
tedo, Jnwcwm «iai' 28^^^»
"" tncto,/Ml. ■ ■ , ' -^ • ■ ■ :^^ - . , -!
f
'/*'*'"' "''•'— TRANSLATION AT SI^HT. , 461
Primum tre. quas' yidit pmgu«8ia.a8 ove» delegit ; qm«cum inter
o»ju„o la^ret; daindo ove, honunem aeoum ferent*, adpH'
egit. H aocidit quod fore suspictus etttt. Polyph^nius enim
Eodem modo omne. suos eocio, emWt , ipie iltimu8 eyZt.
_ H.8 rebue .ta oonfectis, CUxes cum eooiia magnopere verito „o
PolyphemuB dolum eenUret,- «d litus eontendit (£<kI oum vem/
se^ „„n satis tutum esse arbitratus si i„ eo W _t qZ" ^
oeteuneproaoi^ioonstituit. Jus«tigit„r«mne,„.vemlr„ .0
dere, et »„co™ sublat» p.„l„„ . iit„re ia altum provectus est
JZ^IT"^"'- "^"•P<"^P'"'»«.'!"J".h^pitU.pe™t
«Tdl ^^^ ^^T.""'™"-" HaovJ audita Polyphen* ,
™ ct doWre moensus ad mare seoontulit, et ubi inteUerit navem
nuUo accepto damno, oursum tenuerunt. < , ,
. • •■> Omx, tilt Hnclumtre»». 'i V.t' '' ; :
KeW intfflmisso spatio insulae ouidam appi6^i.^*averunt,qu.m
Circe, fiba Sobs, mcolebat. Ibi cum navem appufisset, Uliil in
teram frumeatandi causa egrediendum esse statuit rcognTe™"»
emm frumentum quod i„ „.vi haberet jam deficore. Soclk°Zr
Cum tamenomnesmemonatenerentquamcrudelem mortem ocou. "
bu^sent ei qu. m fine, Cyclopum egresri essent, nemo repertuZt
qu^oo Mgotium euscipere vellet. Tandem res ad sortem revoo» 2is
tu^aWue Eurjlochus cum duobus et viginti sociis ^«,80!^^
credebant emm se socios suos numouam iterum visuros.
IIU autom aliquMitum itineris progpessi ad villam quandam •
pervenerunt eumma magnifioentii aedificat^n. Cuius villao d"»
mm», cm nomen erat Circe, Graeco. invitavit ui apud se dever-
■arentur. Emrylochua autem imidJM su spicatu. fori, exspectare
8- venter, btUy
Ijm, damage. 81. defloio. ff „ut. i^o^Z\r L.}^- '^' ''"^'^
2. subjioio,
17. damnum.
834 occumbo, ' wwafe ^
ou(«id« (tbe door). ""«««d», mwrfw. gi. devoreor, Ktat/. 82. fori*,
V •
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK;
constituit ; reliqui rei novitate adducti introierunt atque convivium
magnificum invenerunt omnibus rebus instructum. At ♦Circe
vinum medicamento quodam miscuerat ; Ijupd cum illi bibissent,
gravi sopore omnes subito oppressi sunt. Tum^^irce baculo aureo
quem gerebat capita eorum tttigit ; quo facto oinnes in porcos 6
statim conversi sunt. Interea Eurylochus ignarus quidx^ereretur,
ad ostium sedebat ; postquam tauien ad solis occasuiit^rustra
"exspectavit, solus ad navem reverti constituit. At UlixesKcum
iptellexiaset socios buos in pcriculo versari, Eurylocho imper^it
ut^^sine liora viam ad istam domum monstraret. Ille tamen multis.10
cum lacrimia Ulixem complexus obsecrare coopit tie in tantum "^
periculum se committeret ; si quid gravius ei accidisdet, omnium
salutem in summo discrimine fore. Ulixos autenti respondit se
neminem inyitum secum adducturum ; ei lic6re, si mallet, in navi
manere; se ipsum sine uUo auxHio rem suscepturum. HI|K5 cum 16
voce magtia dixisset, e navi desiluit.
Aliquantum itineris progressus, subito adulescentem quendam
conspicatus est, forma pulcherrima, aureum baculum manu geren-
tem. Hie "Quo proficisceris ? " inquit, **Nonne scis amicos tuos
in Circes domu inclasos <esse, in porcoa. con versos ? Num vis ipse 20
in eandem calamitatcm venire?" Ulixes, simul atque vocem
.audivit, deum Mercurium agnovit ; nuUis tamen precibus ab insti-
tute consilio deterreri potuit. Quod cum Mercurius sensisset,
herbam quandam ei dedit, quam contra carmina plurimum valere
dicebat. ' ■. / ^
Brevi intermisso spatio, Ulixes ad omnia pericula sul^unda
,paratusad villam pervenit atque ab ipsa Circe benigne ej^tceptus
1 est, Omnia eodem mode atque antea facta sunt. Servi panem et
obsonia ei apposuerunt. Mox, ubi cenasset, Circe poculum aureum
vino repletum dedit. Ille, etsi suspicatus est venenun^sibi para- 30
tum esse, poculum exhausit. Quo facto Circe, poslj4u^ caput •
ejus baculo tetigit, ea verba locuta est quibus socios ijus antca in
, ___ ; ., ; f r ' .;■ ' , -. '■ f
10.— 1. introeo, enter. 1. convivium, banquet. 2. mapfiin-us, auwptuMU.
8. niedicainentum, drtifj. 8. misceo, mix. 8. l)i»)o, drink. 4, sopor, deep. 4. bacu-
lum, wand. 6. porcuB, pig, gwine. 6. converto, tum. 6. ignarus, not knowing. .
7. ostium, door. 10. monstro, point otd. 11. complector, embrace. 11. obsecro,
beg, beseech. 12. conimitto, pM. 12. ffravius, «criot«. 13. discrimen, pwri. 14.
nialo «re^er. 18. pulcher, co»»<rfj/, AaruMOMic. 19. acio, know, 20. include, tmj/mon.
21. cammitaa, misnap. 22. Merouriiis, 3/frcMr//, the nibssertKCir of the pods. 22.
ttfnowo, nHWffniaer-^Hrhiirba, plant. 24. uarmcn, i ne antat i utu i2(Laub c o, undergo,
encounter. 27. benigfne, cordially. 27. ex^io. welcome. 29. appono, set before^
^. poculum, 0oMet. 80. repleo,/i«. 81. «xhautu^ drain. 82i loquor, «peo*.
f^0l
PART v.— TRANSI.ATION AT SIGHt"
463
nisrtd factum essot ostonr . !?^'"° P™'"»"> reduceret ; .
IX. Hannibal's Youth.
Romano ge^erunt. Nu.nSm^^^t^^"""'^' ™"" ?"?"'"
bus oertarunb quam viribua. fI™; eth^ ^" ^P """^o"-
duoe^tur in His^ir™ :^h'Jratl? '"''' '''"""^'' "'»
«dactam, se cum primum „„Mw , ^ ^" J'^oJ^ndo
>«nt; sed mors Himilcar rTn„ m """' It^l^oiUaturi
obtinuit, a^ue. pluraconaih^^:'^ "tn T oT '""""""" ^»
auxit. Is Hannibalem adul Jen^m iS I «arthaginiensem
Missus Hannibal in vZT **"" ^ ^ arcessivit.
vetores milites credeC' ^u "l^r™ . J"™-"' -dditum sibi
V
■IK
464 f
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK. «-^ ^
haud facile discemeres, utrum imperatori an exercitui carior esset,
neque Hasdfubal alium queraquam praeficere malebat, ubi quid
fortifcer ac strenue agendum esset, neque miUtes aUt>^ duce plus
confidebant aut audebant. ' ^ .,./
Plurimum audaciae ad pericula capessenda, plurimum consiln fi
inter ipsa pericula eyat. NuUo labore aut corpus fatigari aut
animus vinci poterat. Equitum peditumque idem longe primus
erat ; princeps in proelium ibat, ultimus conserto proelio excede-
bat. Has tantas viri virtutes ingentia vitia aequabant, inhumana
crudelitas, perfidia plus quam Punica, nihil veri, nuUus deorumlO
metus, nulla religio. _ ^_^^ > 1.
/j
il — 1 haud. not. 1. discerno, decide. 1. utrum, whet?ier. 1. can», dear.
2 malo prSfer 8 B renue, v<oormu,ly. 5. audacia. boldness.^ 6. tati«o, weary.
S S^Si,%ermd. . 9. t^^n^ e^ual. 9. inhumanu», aavoife, inhuman. - 10. cru-
deSiaa, cruelty ' Wy^hinicua, Punw, Carthagi
pinion.
Supplementary CHAPTER.
The Roman Mod* of Reckoning Time.
1. After the reform of the calendar by Julius Caesar, in
B.C. 46, the Roman year consisted of 365 days (in leap year,
366), the months containing the same number of days respec-
tively as the English months.
2. The day of the m«ith was calculated Jn the following
manner : Three points were taken in* the month, the Calendis
(K(dendae\ the Ides (jdm\ and the Nones (Ndnde\ which the
names* of the months qualified adjectively, and from these three
point» respectively the date was calculated backuxird. •- . '
3. The Calends fell in every case on the first of the month ;
in March, May, July and October, the Ides were on the fifteenth
and the Nones on the^seventh ; in the other months, thp Ides came
on the thirteenth anclthe Nones on the fifth. Any day between
the Calends and the Irenes was reckoned such and such a day ^
before the Nones ; any'^^ay between the Nones and the Ides such
and such a day before the Ides, and any day after the Ides such;
and such a day before the Calends of the following month.
1 These names are J&nu&rius, Pebru&rius, Mlrtius, Aprtlls, Maius, JQnius, QulntHis
<or Julius^. Sextnis (or Augustus), September, October, November and December. The
names QuintUU, Afth month, SextUin, sixth month, September, jeventh motUh, etc.,
Wexplaiw i dVth c f a ct that thflJtolUMU^ ft rJttigin al lyhfganwtt^
vf<
PART v.— TBB BOMAN CALENDAR.
'Ci
465
vLf K T^ «f 'he Calends faH withiri the next monih if tKv
5 The Romans had no second day befafe any of these thro«
S? I^d^^'*^ ^^ ^''"^'' ^^^"f the .eco^ui according to ^vI^S
: ^ 6. The following examples wilUll^tratiTthBie calculations ; "~—
_ . Feb. i5^=(28 + 2-15)=xv. Kal. Mart.
June5r<i=(5 + l-3)=iii. Non. Jan. T ^
•' -f«]/{f^^ = (l^ + l-U) = PrIdle Id. Mai. .
^pt. ^3th=^Idlhna Septemhrlhn».
7. The Roman dates giyen , in the above 'section are anm«
what contracted. For example, VI. Id. Jit/.ls Swie^W
aueidus Julias, die and anfe- being omitted, the numeral Tj
being substituted for sexto^and the other words abbreviJJJed '
Frequently we find it in the fo^ni a.rf. T^I. Id Jul that i«\t«<* '
diem sexfnrn. Mas Julias, where Si>^o^ coming b^tween^^^^^
proposition and its object, is attract Jinto tlTe fccusltiri^ ' •
§extM.m. Such expressions are lookd^ Upon as single Words and
Z%': fm ^?'/'/ other prepositions ; ^; Th^/^Z^dlXture
"Smant "^ '^'*^^* I*'of«oM6aem.ln a.d.. IV. Id. Jjil. con;.
& >h! ?1SH^^»^ ^y '2-^?*?/^^ I™ ^"«?'^d ^ter'Vebruary
■d, the 24th {x.e VL Kcd. %[art.) being reckoned twice and ii "
Jfe second pase of occurrence called bis sexttut; whence the year '
-Itself was called bisextilts, from which we have our wor4 bissexke
oifWP^ N T"5 f^^^.^n^d. their time frpm the building of the: *
city (Rome) the date of which is fixed at 753 B.C., and tS reduce ^
the Roman date to the corresponding year before Christ, the y^ar
of the city IS to be subtracted from 754, and nee v^rsa; as, Cicero '
delivered an oratton against Catiline on Ifovember 8th, BXi 63-
Oloopo in CHtlllnam VI. Id. Nov. A.U.C DCXCI. orAtldnem
babuil^.r (A. U.O. =ab ulbe conditd, or annd urbis conditae.) If the
year specified is written out in full, the ordinal numerals ««peeinir
with anno are used ; as, Anno sesoente.lind noTn^geglmo prlmd;.
10. Any date in our era may be calculated from the birth of
Chnst withor wi^out^^nnJi>omtm ; as, Queen Victoria (Qsse^ed
',./
^
-n '.
1
"V...
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
T ♦
K
(.
. <
:i.
.> '.
EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE J
* f
' Tha quantity of all vowel» lonjr by nature ha» been marked. Vow^pls ndt marked
9
are to be com
lidered stiorc i>y nai
The following abbreviation» are used*:
■ k "_
- «bl. . . .
•oe. ..
adj.,. *V \
adv. .
•
. ablative.
aceunative.
adjective.
. adverb.
eonjuncti^m.
dat. . . . . . dative. »
F. or Jem. .... feminine.
gen. . ' . , . . • genitive.
' indecl. - .' . • ' . . indeclinable.
InterJ. . ... interjection.
M. ormosc. .•'• . . ' nuuctUine.
H. or neut, v • • .' neuter.
|)«rt. .... participle. . <
pass. . • , • • • passive.
peST ., . , . . perfe&t.
phir. , . . . ." plural.
prep. . . . • prepositi^. ^
pre». J . ." . . Regent.
'pron. . .' . • pronmin.
sing. . . >; . Si^ular. '
subst. . • *. -.-.. . j»uh8tanti,ve.
w. . . • . w . wUh. V.
a
a
a
a
/
a
a]
a1
,•*
PART Vr.~VObABULAHY.
■■i t'-
467
^ J-
irked
er.
iciple. r
ive.
)H.
al.
ent.
■oun.
ular, '
tantive.
^ ..^':
: . t
VOCABULARIES ANB^ INDEX.' '
I. MTIN-ENOLiSH^VOCABULARY! r *
---Jt-
.>^-
A, an^a^hreviation for Aniti^
a, j»b, 1. jn-ep. ^dth abl. (a he-.
' fore consonants ; ahbefofe.mtv.
els and some consonants),' a,wa.y
: from, from, at a distance of :
by ; on the side of, at, on, in,,
agamst. 2. adv. off.
abr-d6, ere, -dldl, -dltam, hide,
acoeptntiti^irTiM; arfj. (reo/^y
- perf.pdrt. pass, of aool|>l6),
welcome, acceptable. -.
ao-cl^, «re, -bldl, befall,'hap.
peWj occur ; turn oiii. ^
Ho-clpld, ere, -oepi, -oeptvm,
receive, ,tak« ; ^suffer', . meet
"with; accept; hear.
aQ«abd, ;Are, avl, atairi, re-
^ cluie at table.
■r
■n'
■— V
conceal. • - ciuie at table.
ab-du^ ere, -duxl, -duotum, 7»«-cn"6, ere, -olirrl (-oaenr^
lead oflL remove ; carry off **')> rjin up. ^^^ - „,
abl-es, -ells, F.. fin u<3>cuso, are. a vt. &«:»<». nlta*»*^
, carry
abl-es, -ells, F., fir.
"'lO*®' ®'®' •'^*'*' -Jeotuiii,
throw away, thro\^ to one side
--(as of^no valiie). *
absens, -eii.tl8, absent, away,
being away. . ^
absiniiiig, e, unlike. ^*
ab-8i8t6,.ere, -«tltl, keep away
(from). . "^
abstinentla, ae, p., self -re-'
straijifcj ^unselfishnMs, integ-
ritv. i«: •»
1
aWstuH,„/Vw»^ufer& » ■'..'
absanvi'abesse, afnl, be absent,
be Wanting ; be far,' be distant ;
be away, lack, be lacking.
Ac (shorter form for atqae, ^ised
' only before consonants), and,
and furtheii;, in -comparisons^
as, th^n.
ao-oedd, ere, -oesrf, -oessam,.
app roach;' draw near, coma
—up, go toi be added. '
U60USO, are, avl, atnm, charge,
,, accuse. . ,
4«j«r, oris, ere, sharp, shrewd!
. ^eagSr. •
aperbns, a; iim,, soujr. •
acerrlme, from aorlter.
AohiUas, ae, M., Achillas, an
Egyptian officer.
"«*«*'«*».*■•. edge, line, line 'of
-\ tjattle ; pitched battle, battle,
Vthe field. - • '
uo-qalesco, ere, -qnlevl, -qnl-
' etum, die, Kr *<Jon»e^o rcai';
cf. our expressions, ^rest frofn
his labors, ^pass to his rest. '
aoriter, adv^ (acrlns, acer-
rlme), fiercely^ hotly, deeper- '
ately ; eagerly ; actively ; rig- * "
orously,
aotaarim, a, urn, light^ swift. '
actuM, a, nirt, from ago. .
Ap i i inw, a ^ njco, sharp, point e d.
ad, prep, with acb., tp, towards,
-w
X
468
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
1 against; ^th a view to, for;
accordibgito ; neai", by, in,
> among ; before ; until.
adaequo, are, avi, atniii,
equal. , ' „
ad-do, ere, -dfdl, -dituni, add.
ud-duco, ore, -daxi, -dUctuiii,
lead, bring ; bring in, conduct ;
induce, iuQuence, promi)t,
force.
ad£niptas,- a, am, /mm adlnio.
ttdeo, adv.; to such a degree,
so, so much, so v^ry, such a,
so . . . a, so much asi
ad-eoV^re, -U (-Ivl), -ltum,'go
to, advance ; attack ; visil ;
approach.
adeptulB, a, ani,/romadipi8eor.
~ adequlto, are, avt, atuni, ride
up. 1 . %
I i V adhibed, ere? ul, Itum, call in,
I " ./l^ bring along, bring in ; use,
' ' employ.
adhortor, arl, atus sum, eh-
^ courage, cheer.
-, ad-lK^o, ere, -egl, -actum jjiurl,
^;. I. " 'cast;- ■._. ■ ..
"-^J ad-lmo, ere, -emi, -emptam,
_ ' take away, destroy, f
ad-ipiscor, I, -eptus gum, ob-
tain, gain, acquire.
^ adItuH, uH, M., approach, ad-
vance, access, means of ap-
'- proach, right of approaching,
admittance.
ad-Jic'io, ere, -J6oI, -Jeotum,
throw up. •
ad-Jungo, ere, -Junxl, -Juno-
tnm, join to, unite, add.
ud-Javo, Are, -Juvl, -Jutum,
assist, help ; aid ; bo of a&sist-
./■ anc4 to, further.
.;_ .AdmetuB, I, M.^Admetus, a king
• of the^Molomans in EpiriM.
.)y lidmlnWr6, Are, Avl, Atum,
• " carry out, executi^, attend to.
\^
,,.^.,..
•dmlror, Arl, "fttu^ sum, wbn-
-^---.-^iv :-
der, wonder at, admire, be»
astonished, bo surprised.
i\d-mitt6, ere, -nil8l, -migsum,
ailow, incur ; commit ; let go.
adnioduni, adv., very, very
inuch, exceedingly, in a high
degree.
admoned, ere, ul^itam, advise,''
WtU-n. ,
ad-o^or, Irl, -ortu«- snmj at-
tack, assault.
ad-8uni, -^sg^ -fnl, be near at
hand, be present. .
ati-sunio, ere, -sumpal, -sump-
tum, take with {one's self),
adalesceus, -entis, M., young
man ; the younger.
udulescentiav ae, F., youth.
advQntas, us, M., aiTival, ap-
proach, coming.
adversarlanj I, M., opponent,
" -enemy. -
adversum Or adversas, prep.
with acc.f against.
^dvergas, u, am, opposite,
facing, in front ; unsucceas-
. ful ; proeliam udversum,
defeat^ repulse.
ud-verto, ere^ -verti, -versani,
turn towards ; adimam ad-
verto, observe, notice.
advoco, are, avl, Atam, call to,
summon to.
advold. Are, Avl, Atam, fly to,
fly up ; rush upon, fall upon.
aedes, 1b, . F. (sing.), temple;
(pint:), house.
aedlflolam, I, N., building.
aedlflco, are, Avl, Atum, bi^ud,
construct, arrange.
AeduuB, I, M. , an ^duan ; in
plur., the iEdui, a tribe in the
centre of Oaul.
aegr6, adv. (aegriaft, aeger-
rlm^), scarcely, with difficulty.
AeffyptuB, I, F., Egypt.
A e i ii iUa ti j t^ -t?^ i MHrcU B JRmu
->.
wi
UuH Paulus, consul in 256 B.C.;
-^-'^K:-
.■ \
PART .Vl.~VOCABULARt.
|:j ' ^
469-
-^
2. Lucius ^milius Paulus,
cotisid in 216 B. C; 3. Lucius
^milius Paulus, comrd in 182
B.(J. ->
aeneaH, a, «m, bronze, of
bronze, copper,
aeqaaiis, .e, of the same age,
cpntempdrary ; as nmm, ae-
quaUls, 1«, M., contemporary,
coeval. t-^
aeque, adv., equally. '
aequinoctluni, 1, n., equinox.
aeqnlperd, are, avi, atnin,
equal, rival.
aequl'tas, -tatlg, f., fairness,
j^ice, sense of justice.
*»®<8^8> «1 «m, fair, just, right,
ressonable, proper ; level, fa-
vorable.
aerarlfim, I, N., treasury.
aes, aerig, N., bronze, copper ;
money.
aestas, -tatis, F., summer.
aestinio, are, avI, atam, esti-
mate, assess ; reckon; regard.
aestas, ug, m., tide.
aetag, ia,tl», v., age, -years'*,
time.
Afer, Afrir M., an African.
affero, afferre, attull, al la-
tum, bring, ^use.
of-flold, ere, -feci, -fectnm,
visit with ; affect (often to be
rendered by cause, inflict, im-
pose); in pimf.,' ho troubled,
be attacked.
«irirmd, are, avI, atuni, assert,
declare.
affllctro, are, avI, atum, bufl'ot,
toss alxjut ; damage, wreck.
nffllotng,, a, uni, from aflllj^o.
af-fllgd, ere, -lllxl, •fliotum,
itriko down, shatter, damage,
wreck.
afrore,^*^. inf. of admnm.
Afr&ning, I, m., Lucius Afra
Afrl<ja,-ae, F., Africa, imiaily
of the mcmity of Carthage onlii
Libya, •
Afrlcug, I, M., Africus, th4!
south west wind.
aiper, agri, M., field, land, coun-
try, territory.
ak«ror, -erig, m., mound, iam-
pai t, earthwork, agger.
a^-Srredior, I, -grregsug gum,
attack.
aggreKo, are, ay l, at um. at-
tach, join./ \^
afirilig, e, active.
agmen, -minig, n., army on the
march, iline of march, column,
Hrmy; prlhium airmen, the
van; tt<|vigglmum agmen,
. , the roar. ^ -
a«o, ere, e^t; aietum, drive;
do, plan, carry on ; confer ;
grratlag a^d, thank ; id aird,
strive^
affriooin^ »e, ^i., husbandman,
a»rrIeMta|»i,\ae, F., agriculture,
' taiing tht^fendjfarming.
aid, defective verb, say, affirm,
declare.
ala, ae, P., wing.
alaorltag, -tatlg. P., eagerness,
ardor.
albug, a, nm, white.
Alexander, dri, M., Alexander
the Great, king of Macedonia.
^Jo^andrla, ae, F., Alexandria,
fa city on the north coast of
Egypt. ^
aliag, adv., on other occasions.
allenug, a, urn, of another, of
others, another's ; unfavor-
able, unsuitable, disadvan-
tageous.
alia, adv., in a different direc
tion, to a different object.
altqnaiudl n. f>r/r., forwrnno fimn
Ctn ^ ""^ "^^'•^ '"^ «llqu«nd«,rirfu. at some time ;
Spain.
at last, at length.
470
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
allqaantufl, a, nin, some ; neut.
as snbst. , some portion, a con-
siderable part.
allqui, qua, quod, some.
allquls, qald, some one, some-
thing. ,
, aliquot, adj. indeclinable, sev-
eral, some, a few.
ullter, adv., otherwise.
alius, a, nd, other, another ;
different^ alius . . . alius^
one . . . another ; alii . . . alii,
some . . .others.'
^ all&tus, a, uni, from affero.
Alliu, ae, F., the Allia, a river
north of Rome.
Altobroges, tini, M. <plnr., the
Allobroges, a tribe near the
Rhone. "
aid, ere, alul, altum (alitnni),
nourish, «Support, feed ; main-
tain, keep ; strengthen, in-
crease, foster.
Alpes, ium, F. plnr., the Alps.
Alplcl, drum, M. pZw»*, dwell -
■ ers in the Alps, Alpine tribes.
alter, era, eruiii, the other ;
the one, another {of two) ; sec-
ond ; alter . . . alter, the
one . . . the other.
altltiidd, -dinifl, F., depth ;
height.
altns, a, urn, high, lofty ; deep ;
neut. as subd., altmn, I, the
deep, deep Water, the sea.
alvons, I, M., channel, bed (o/
nver). ^*
• aniiibllis, e, lovable.
ainanter, adv., lovingly, affec-
tionately. \
Amblvarltl, drum, M. plnr.,
the Ambivariti, a tribe ith^ihe
^ north-east of Oaiil. -N:
ambal6, ftre, ftvl, &tum, walk.
ftmentla, ae, F., madness, folly.
ami«<A. adv., in a friendly man-
anilcltia, ae, F., friendship, al-
• liaiicA
amicus, a, um, friendly.
amicus, 1, M., friend, ally.
aniissns, a, um, from amitto.
a-mitto, er«», -mlsl, -niissum,
lose. >*
amo, are, avi, atam, love.
amphora, ae, F., wine-jar, two-
handled jar, amphora.
am-plector, I, -plexus sum,
embrace, grasp.
amplitudd, -dinis, F., size, ex-
tent, greatnessr.
a^mplius, adv., comparative of
amplje, more, further ; more
than.
am plus; a, um, lai^e, g^reat,
numei'ous ; illustrious, noble.
an, conj., or, introducing the
second part of a double question;
whether.
Anoalites, um, M. plur., tT
Apcalites, a tribe in Britain.
an-««p8, -dpitis, double, two-
fold ; doubtful.
anoiUa, ae, F., maidservant.
ancora, ao, F., anchor.
aoffulus, I, M., corner, angle.
anguste, cidv., closely.
angfustiae, arum, F. jdur., nar-
rows, straits; narrow defile.
ang^nstus, a, um, narrow, small,
confined, contracted, steep.
anliiia, ae, F., life.
auimndver-to, ere, -tl, -sum,
notice, observe, perceive.
animal, -alls, N., animal.
^niinus, I, M., soul, mind, heart,
Spirit, will, feelings, courage,
character, ability, dispositicm ;
consciousness ; pride, ambi-
i tion ; pleasure, amusement.
annftlls, in, m., sc. liber, his-
torical work, chronicles.
an not! HUB, a, nm". of the year
ner. '
bef(tfe.
N,
PART VI. — ^VOCABULARY.
471
annng, 1, M. , year.
annnus, a, niii, a year'»; for a
year. '
anser, -erlg, M., goose. ^^
ante, 1. adv., before, formerly,
previously ; above. 2. prep,
with acc.y before.
antea, adv., before, previously.
ante-cedd, ere, -oessi, -cossuni,
go before, go in advance, 'pre-
cede ; surpass, excel.
ante-ferd, -ferre, -tull, -l&tniii,
place before, consider supe-
rior.
ante-pond, ere, -posnl, -posl-
tnm, place before, regard of
more importance than.
ante-8td, -stare, -stctl, stand
before, surimss, be superior
to, excel.
Antioohan, I, M., Antiochus,
Ung of Syria, 223*187 R G.
antlquna, a, uin, old, ancient.
Ap., aw abbreviation for Appias.
aper-lo, Ire, -ul,"^uin, open ;
' disclose, reveal.
apertna, a, urn, adj. (really
perf. part. jmss. of nperlo),
open, unprotected, uncovered,
exposed; clear, unobstructed.'
ApoU-d, -Inta, M., Apollo, the
god of the aun, propheaj, hml-
ingand music; his chief shi]ine
ifcw at Delphi.
appareo, ere, ul, Itum, corne
in sight, appear.
apparo, &re, &vl, Atuin, mftke
ready, prepare.
appello. Are, AvI, fttuin, call,
name ; accost, address.
ap-pell6, ere, -pull, •p^liiam,
bring to land ; |nu«., laoid, j^ufc
in. "^" -"^— -y-^--
Appennlnns, I, M., the Appe-
ninos, a range of mountains in
. I^dy .
pet-6, «re, -I%'I, -Itvim, striire
ft©^, seek, try to get.
Applns, I, M., Appius, a Roman
pnenomen.
applied, are, avi, atom, At-
tach.
ap-pono, ere, -posul, -posltam,
set before one, serve.
apporto, are, avI, atnni, bring,
approbo, are, avI, atnm, ap-
prove.
approplnqnd, are, avI, ^tnni,
approach, draw near, be near
(ivith dat.). ,
aptns, a, um, suited, suitable,
fitted.
apnd, jwep. <\vith ace, at, with,
among, near, before, in the
presence of ; at the house of ;
in the writings of ; on.
Apulia, ae, F., Apulia, a district
in sovth-eastcm Italy.
Apulus, I, M., an Apulian,
aqnn, ae, F., water.
aquatlo, -onU, F., getting of
fetching wate^.
aqulla, ae, F., eagle, the ensigri
or standard of a Roman legion.
Aqnltanla, ae, F., Aquftania,
the south-western part ofOaid.
Aqnlt&nuA, I, M., an Aquita-
nian ; in pliir. the Aquitani.
&ra, ae, F., altar. :_^
Ar-ar, -aria, M., the Arar, U
river in Oanl.
Arbiter, tri, M., arbitrator.
arbltrlntn, I, N., pleasure, will,
judgment.
nl'bltror, Arl, &tna aum, think,
consider, judge. .
arbor, -orla, F., tree.
arceaa-o, ero, -Ivl, -Itni
mon, send for,
A^dnonna, aie, 7., Ard^
forest in the north-east '
arduaa, a, um, steep, dif
arirentnm, I, N., silver.
-M^ vlnr. ,8eeA\
Argl , <>rn
uu
y£Cfi&
Arii^i, N. (otUy nom. and ace.),
nmally in me form Arri
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
"V
I
6mm, u. ijinr.,,'ArgoSj a city in at, conj., but, but yet. .'
the twrth-eastei'ti Peloponnesus. Athenae, arum, f. phir.^ Ath-
&ridas, a, am, dry; nent., arl- ens, the capital oJ[ Attica a'nd
^ 1:
dam, I, as snhst , dry land, solid
grouad.
Ariovlstas, 1, M., Ariovistus,' d
chief of the Germans.
Aristldes, ig, M., AristideSj afa-
moris Atlieniati.
chief city of Greece.
Athenieiisls, e, ruij., Athenian ;
masc. as snbst., an Athenian.
atqae, couj^, and, and further,
and I mj^ say ; in compari-
sons, than, as.
arma, dram, N. plur., arms; Atre-bas, -batls, M., an Atreba-
force of arms ; war. tian ; in film\, the Atrebates,
aMnamentaj dram, N. plnr., a tribe in the nortJiern part of
tackling, tackle, riggihg. Gafd.
armatl, orifm, M. plur. of perf. Atrias, X, M., Quintus Atrius, ■
part, paiis. o/armd, armed men. an officer of Casar's.
Arminlad, I, M., Arminius, a Attica, ae, f., Attica, the di<t-
German prince. trict of Greece of which Athens
armp, are, ayl, atam, arm, toas the capitaL
equip; rouse, incite; perf. Attloa8,l,M., Titus Pomponius
part, jpcws. , armed, in arms, Atticus, a Roman historian, a
. with one's eCrms. great friend of Okero and Ne-
ar-rlpi5, ere, -rlpal, -reptam, pos.
seize, catch up. - at-tln^o, ere, -tlgl, -taotam,
arg, artlg, F., art, skill. touch ; border on ; reach.
Artaxer'keg, ig, M., Artaxerxes,' attrlb-a5, ei*fe, -al, -utam, as-
SMmamed Longimanns {^ Long- sign, give.
hand '), king of Persia 465-425 aactor, -oris, m., leader, adviser ;
B.C. an authority, author, histo-
Artemlglam, X, N., Artemisium, rian. .
a promontory at the northern aaotdrltag, -tatia, f., influence,
'^nd of the island of Eiibced. "weight, prestige } power.
arx, arolg, F., citadel ; in Ath- aadaola, «io, f., danng.
ew«, the Acropolis ; in Rome, aadaoter, adv., boldly, f ear-
ths Capitol. . lessly.'
a-soendo, ere, -goendl, -goSn- aaded, ere, ausag gam, dare,
gam, mount, climb, ascend ; venture, attempt.
embark upon, go on board ; audld. Ire, ivl, Itam, hoar, lis-
(of a cannage) get into. • ten to ; hear of.
sgoengag, ug, M., ascent. aadltld, -onlg, f., hearsay, ru-
Agla, ae, F., Asia, Asia Minor. mor.
.agpeotag, Ag, M., appearance. aaferA, aaferre, abHtall, nblA-
asper, era, eram, rugged, rough. tarn, take away, carry off.
a-gploid, ere, -gpexl, -gpeotom, aaffoo, 6re,' aaxi, aaotam,' in>
see. .^,---^-.-r--—^-^---^^--^.^~.-^ crease, strengthen, ^-y *-
aggnd'^aofd, ere, -f*oI. -fao- AaffUHtag, I, M., Augustus, the
tarn, aolDustoni, train. first emperor of Rome.
J nd Miimhle . mtyi tun- ■ A nln «, l . m., Anbia, 'fi Rnmnn
—t'n . Jfe.
ally Athens. .
jmvnnmen.
..^.
»■
Tr-"
^ . t>ART VI.— VOCABULARY.
473
Zli^l' ^l T' .^^ ^'-^f' ^''^'^^"' '^«'^^*"*^ *> «™, bearded ; masc.
anrum, IN., gold, money. Batavl, drum, Si. plnr., the
. Aurunculeius Cotta, one of. of the Rhine.
an^lTJ T""^'- beat»., «, up., fortunate, happy.
aujug, a, „m, /rom audeo. Bol^ae, arum, M. plnr., the
a,it, con;, or, or else ; ailt . . . Belgian^ a people ^oe^pZg '
aut, either . . or theloHjleastofGa.a. ^"^ ^ '
whni . "'"''•^" ^"^' whereas, BeHrlmn, i, n., Belgium, the
while; moreover, now,, how- country of the Belq J
ever, furthermore, again. bellloosu*, a, urt., Varlike.
a«xro7\r, V''"'""'"' • »>«"»' *'e. avi, atum, make ^
«1i SIV- • -^ *""*' 8^^® ^*''' «««"ry on war, fight.
^ aid help assist Bellovaol, orum, M. plnr., t'he
■auxlllum, i,N., aid, help, assist- Bellovaci, a tribe in Gmd. ^
ance ; in plnr., auxiliaries, re- bellum, i, n., war.
mforcements. Melius, », um, pretty, lovely.
7J^J*' ^*'®' "*'' '*"*"' *^"™ Blbulus, I, M., Lucius Bibulus,
^^^^- , , consul in 59 JS.a
«V dr^i.'^'';-?^'^ ^^^*!"'"^' '' ^' *^»^« «p««« of two
\*!*."*'' ■*""■♦ *^' eagerness, days, two days' time
bltil, ae, a, two by two, two at
"a time, two each.
bis, adv., twice.
\^ greed.
»vl8, ig. P., bird.
^vu«, 1, M., grandfather. „„, aav., twice.
MTon^r' ^" ^''''"*' " '"''^*' BIthynIa, ae, F., Bithynia. a
%n vfam. country on the north-west coast
<f fjj! ^j^ Minor. ' ,,
® • Bithynll, drum, M. plnr., the
•n i.Li- T> Bithynians.
Babylon, -onU, p., Babylon, a Blltho,' -6nU, M., Publius Sul-
ntk on the Euphrates pjcius Blitho, a Roman his-
BabyhonluB, I, M„ a Babylonian. toi'ian.
Tamj\hiU8 ajtd M. Biebius a tribeof Qerman oriqin.
*?ftrr\^ ' '^'^'t^r^V" ^^^ **^ bonltft., -t&tl., P/vgoodness, ex-
, 181 B.V. respectively. collonco.
ballneniii^, I, n., bath. tonus, «, um (meUor, optl^
btorbaru.,, », «„., fo reign ; un- mn»), good ; safe i k pUtr.
oiv i liHtH l, i ^ttde, b arlMimTr
barbarna, \,m., a Iwrbarian, a
as snbst, honn., drum, goods,
property; services.
sssss
.... i.
474
«.PRIMARY LATIN BOO^.
i H-
boB, bovls, M. and F. , ox, cow.
Brennns, I, M., Brennus, alead-
\ er .of the Gauls.
brevls, e, short ; as adv. brevi
(for brovl tempore), in h
short time, shortly, presently,
quickly.
Britannia, ae, F., Britain.
callidns, a, am, skilful, shrewd,
cunning, sagacious.
Campania, ae, F., Campania,, a
district in Italy y south of Monte.
campns, I, M., field, plain; the
open.
Candidas, a, am, bright, shin-
ing, white.
Britannioas, a, um, of Britain, canis, i6, M. and F., dog.
of or with the Britons. Cannae, aram, F. plur.y Cannae,
Brltannag, 1, M., a Briton. a town of Apulia.
bruma, ae, F., the winter sol- Cannensis, e, of Cannee.
Btice ; winter. " Cantiam, I, N. , Kent, in the
Bruttil, drum, M. plur., the south-east of England. ^
Bruttii, a people in the south caper, pri, M., goat.
of Italy. cape88-6, ere, -Ivl, -Itam, take
Bucephala, ae, F., Bucephala, * part in, undertake.
a town in India. oaplllas, I, m., hair.
Bucephalus, I, M., Bucephalus, oapio, ere, oepi, oaptum, take,
Alexdnder the Great's war- catch, seize, capture, take pri-
horse.
C, an abbreviation for Cains,
oado, ere, ceoldl, casnm, fall,
be slain.<
soner ; get, occupy, reach ;
move, aflfect ; form, adopt ;
select.
Capitolium, I, N., the Capitol,-
~-tb^ temple of Jvpiter on the
Capitoline hill at Rome.
oaduceus, 1, M., a herald's stj^ oaptXvus, I, M., captive, prison-
oaedes, is, F., slaughter.
oaedd, ere, ceqidi, caesum,
slay, kill.
caelum, 1, N., heaven.
oaeriinonia, ae, F., religious
observance, reverence. \
oaeruleus, a, am, blue, dark
blue.
er.
captus, us, M., capacity, nature,
standard, notions. /
Capvia, ae, F., Capua, thechiej^
city of Campania in Italy.
cap-ut, -itis, N., head ; person ;
capital, chief city ; of a river^
mouth.
Caesar, aris, M., 1. Caius Julius cared, ere, ul, itum, be with-
Ciesar, a Roman general. 2. out, be free from, loith abl.
Lucius Cresar, a lieutenant card, earnis, F. , flesh, meat.'
with Ctesar. carrus, I, M., cart, wagon.
C&iuB, I, M., Caius, a Roman Carth&grinlensis, Is'^'^., a Car-
pi'ianomen. thaginian.
oalumitas, -tatis, F., disaster, Carthago, -Inls, F., Carthage,
. reverse. a city in northern Africa, on
oalceus, I, M., shoo. • 'W the Meditemmean.
oallide, adv., skilfully, cleverly, ciir'iis, a, am, dear ; valuable.
shrewdly; Carvilius, 1, m.^ Carvilius, a
oalllditfts, -t&tiB, F., cuni|ing, kmg^rtilMgTn KsnT.
trickery
casa, ae, F., hut.
l^
PART VI. — ^VOCABULARY.
476
CaasI, Oram, M. piwr., the Cassi,
a tribe in Britain.
GasslVellaanns. I, m., Cassivel-
■' launus (also written Cassive-
launus), a British chief.
oastellam, 1, N.,^ fortress, fort,
stronghold ; fortified dwelling.
Castloas, I, M., Casticus, a chief
of the Sequani.
«*^'». drum, N. plur.^ camp,
encampment.
oasas, us, M., fall; accident,
chance ; emergency ; misfor-
tune, disaster.
. catena, ae, P., chain. <
oanga, ae, F., cause, reason;
/ pretext, excuse ; position, situ-
ation ; w the ahl. siifb. ioith
a gen. preceding, for t'he sake
of, for the purpose of.
caved, ere, oavl, oantuQi, be
on on^'ti guard against, beware
of. . ^.
ceddl, /roTTf^oadd.
cedo, ere, cessi, cessam, re-
treat, give way, retire ; yield.
oeler, erls, ere, swift, speedy,
rapid, sudden.
celerltas, -t&tl8, P. ^ swiftness,
speed, rapidity, quickness.
oeleriter, adv. (oelerlirg, celer-
rlm6), swiftly, quickly, rapid-
ly- ' '
c616, are, &vl, atam, hide, con-
ceal.
celsns, a, am, tall.
oena, ae. P., dinner. •
Genim&grnI, dram, M. plur., the
Cenimagni, a tribe of Bntain.
oeno, are, &vl, ataivk, dine.
OentenioR, I, M., Caius Cente-
nius, a Roman general,
oentam, a hundred. . >,
eentarto, -onl«, M., centuri^^n,
an officer in the Roman^rmy.
c6pl. /rom capto.
cert&men,, -minis, N., contest,
struggle, battle.
eerte, adv., certainly ; it least.
o^taa, a, Tim, certain, sure,
fixed, .specified, exact ; certi-
drem faoere, inform.
cervix, -Ids, P., neck.
oessl, from cedo.
ceterl, ae, a, the other, the
others, the rest of.
Cethegaa, I, M., P. Cornelius
Cethegus, consul in 181 B.G. ,
cibas, I, M., food, provisions ;
m6al.
Cicero, -dnis, M., Cicero, a Bo-
man name.
Clngretorix, -lyig, m., Cingetorix,
1. a chief of the Treveri; 2. a
king of Kent.
dngd, ere, olnxl, clnctam, sur-
round.
clro&, prep, with ace., around,
near.
clrdter, adv., about, nearly,
droaitas, ia, am, perfi pari*.
pass, o/ dreamed,
oircaltas, us, M., circumference.
drcam-do, -dare, -dedl, -da-
tam, surround, invest.
drcam-duco, ere, -duxl, -dac-
tam, lead around.
drcam-eo. -Ire, -II (-Ivl), -Itam,
or droaitam, go around, sur-
. round ; make a tour of, visit,
joake the round of.
clfcam-fcro, -ferre, -tall, -I&-
tam, cast around.
droijim-seded, ere, rsSdl, -aet-
aani, encamp about.
drcamallld, Ire, hop aboiit.
droam-aiato, ere, -stetl, su'r-'
, round, crowd around.
drcam-ato, atare, -atetl, stand
around, surround.
dream- venlo, Ire, -v6nl, -ven*
L tnni. aangMind^ autflflnk.^,_-. ..^
y A
oerno, ere, crftvl, cr§tani, jper-
ceive, behold, see.
da, prep. k». ace, on this side
of. '
TV.
/V
476
"N»'
PRIMAftYX^TlN BOOK.
.■* .
' oiterior, las, adj. (comparatim)^
hither, nearer. '
oito, fidv. (oltlns, oltiflsime),
quickly, swiftly, rapidly.
olto, are, avi, atnm, hasten ; sum-
mon ;pef/. jt)ar£. pcu»., cltatns,
as adj., swift, at full speed.
eltra.,prep. w. ace, on this side of.
civ is, is, M. or p., citizen, fellow-
H citizen.
«Ivitas, -tatis, F., state, country.
olades, is, F., defeat, disaster.
^olam, adv.y secretly.
' olamitd, are, avI, atam, cry
out, keep shouting.
Olanid, are, avI, atam, cry,
call out.
Ii^olamor, >drig, M., shouting, out-
■'- cry. '
, olande^tlnas, a, am, secret.
/~elariis, a, am, celebrated.
olassiaril, dram, M. jilur., sea-
men ; sailors, naval forces.
olussicum, I, N., trunipet-call
(for battle). " /
«lassis, Is, F., fleelf,
Clastidiam, I, N., Olastidium, a
I town of CHs(dpine GoaU.
Olaadius, I, M., 1. Marcus Clau-
dius Mfircellus, consul in 208
B.C. 2. Marcus Claudius
Marcellus, son of the preceding,
consid in 196 B. G. 3. Appius
Claudius, consrd in 64 B. C.
olaadd, ere, ol.aasi, olaasam,
close ; surround, hem in, en-
close ; shut in, imprison.
olava, ae, F., club.
cliens, -entis, M., vassal, de-
pendant, retainer.
cllvos,*!, M., hill, slope.
Oiuslnus, a, um, of Clusium, n
__ city in Etmriti.
,Cn., an aJbhreviaUmi for Onaeus.
Gnaeas, I, M., Cnaeus, a Roman
prmiomen.
'v^r a*»T ftvi, atam, heftfi ^^
coaotas, a, am» /rom oogd.
Codes, -itis, M., Codes, Hora-
tius Codes, a fammis Uoman
hero.
coegfl, /rom cogo. o-
ooepl, isse, codptas som, be-
gan, ^aye begun.
ooerced, ere, nl, itam, restrain,
check.
oogitd, are, &vl, atam, con-
sider, think.
edgrnatid, -onis, F., relation-
ship, connections.
cognomen, -minis, N., Sur-
name, family name.
oo-gndso6, ere, -gndvl, -gnl-
tum, perceive, learn, find out,
discover, ascertain, become
acquainted with ; inquire in-
to ; in perf. tenses, know, ^be
aware.
odgd, ere, ooegX, coactam, col-
lect, gather, get together ; com-
pel, force, constrain.
oo-liors, -hortis, F., cohort,
"Tcompany, one-tenth of a legion.
Qoliortatid, -Gnis, F., encourage-
ment ; speech, harangue.
ooliortor, arl, atas sam, en-
courage, urge.
4;olIai>e-fld, -fieri, -faotas sam,
be ruined, be overthrown.
coUatds, a, am, from confero.
oollaado, &re, avt, &tam,
praise, commend highly.
ooliega, ae, M., associate, col-
league. &
eol-llgo, ere, -l!§gl, -leotam,
collect ; 8e colligere, rally.
oollis, is, M., hill. -
oollood, are, avI, atam, place,
station ; arrange, stow ; give
in marriage.
oolloqaiam, I, N., conference,
interview^
ool-loqaor/^ I, "lobutas ■nih,
^wmvera a f confer, diacuM r^
#■
up, collect.
oolla'm,y1, N., neck.
PART VI. — VOCABULARY.
477
oolo, ere, oolnl, oaltum, till,
cultivate ; cherish, regard,
venerate, reverence, esteem.
oolor, -dris, M., color.
oolumba, ae, F., dove.»i
coma, ae, F., hair; foliage,
leaves.
oom-edo, ere, -edi, -esnm, eat.
ooiiiitor, arl, atns snm, accom-
pany, follow.
oomme&tns, us, M., supplies,
provisions ; passage, trip^
ooniniemoro, are, avi, atum,
mention, relate, state, tell.
oominendo, are, avI, atum,
commend, commit, entrust.
(Oom-mlttd, ere, -mlsl, -mlssum,
join ; do ; trust, entrust, put
trust in ; vnth proeliam, be-
gin, engage.
Commlas, I, M., Commius, a
kitig of the Atrebates.
eommode, adv., satisfactorily,
easily, to advantage; well,
fluently, efiectively.
oommodiis, a, am, suitable, fa-
vorable ; neut. as svbst., com-
modam, I, advantage, con-
venience.
otnmoror, art, atus sum, stay,
delay, wait.
oom-moTed, ere, -niovl, -mo-
tum, disturb, alarm, agitate,
stir, affect, arouse.
oommuniod, are, avI,' atam,
communicate, share ; an-
nounce.
oommunlo. Ire, IvI, Itam, for-
tify.
oommunls, e, common, general,
concerted ; joint, united, of
all.
oonimutj&tl&, -dnls, F., change,
turn.
oomparo, &re, &vl, atam, pre-
pare, provide, procure, get,
■■ nmka
-i
coio^ire.
> ll c ct ; -
com-pelld", ere, -pall, -palsam,
drive, gather.
oom-perlo, Ire, -perf, -pertam,
learn, find out, discover, hear
of. «J,.
oom-pleotor, I, -piexas sum;
embrace.
oompl-eo, -ere,-evl, -etam, fill,
fill up ; man. ' .
comploxas, us, ^., embrace,
complures, a (gen. -iam), sev-
eral, many, a great many.
com-pdno, ere, -posal, posl-
tam, settle, conclude ; bel-
l^m compdnere, end a war
byStreaty, make peace.
compVp^o, are, avl, tttam,'
bring in, collect. ' '
4lk>mpre-liendd, ere, -hendl,
-hensam, sei^e, catch, cap-
ture.
oomprobd, are, avl, atam,
ratify, sanction, approve.
oomipalX, ooihpalsas, jfrom t om-
pelld.
odnatam, 1, N., attempty-uhder-
taking.
con-oedo, ere, -cessi, -oessam,
grant, allow, permit ; yield ;
depart, withdraw.
ooA-eldo, ere, -cldl, fall ; fall
dead, bq slain. '
oon-6Idd, ere, -oldl, -olsam,
cut down, cut to pieces, kill,
slay. , ; \^
conollid, are, Avl, Atam, win
over, make friendly, join;
gain. ," .-'-,'
oonolliam, X, N., meeting, as- ■
sembly, council.
eonoito, are, avl, atam, rouse, ' '
excite ; spur on, urge on.
oonoordia, ae, F;, harmony,
union, concord.
oon-oarr6, ere, -oarri (-oa-
oprrl), -oaraiam, hurry, flock ;
ffl e et, ^ oin battle ; mako t»«oaFi
raon attack.
\
478
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
V-
«ononrauB, us, M. ,^ running tg-
gether ; collision; oh&rge, at-
, tack ; conflict.
oondipid, -ohla, F., terms, pro-
posal, agreement, condition.
oon-do, ere-, -did^, -dltam, .
found. ' .
oo^ddno, &re, &vl, Atom, over-
look.
CondrusI, drum, M. |){i(r., the
^ Condrusi, a tribe in tJie noi'th-
easfof Oaul.
oon-ferold, Ire, -fersi, -fer-
tum, pack closely ;per/. part,
pass., odnfertns, a, nni,
crowded, in close array, in
. close order. " .
oonferd, odnferre, oontqlt^
ooll&tnin, collect, ganfer,
convey ; compare ; se 'cbn-
terr^y betake one's self, go;
" toith oulpam, lay, put.
oonfertus, a, um, from oon^
fef>old.
odnfestim, adv., immediately,
at once.
oon-flolo, ere, -f§oI, -feotiim,
finish, carry out, complete,
, accomplish, perform ; exhaust,
spend»; write, compose.
oon-fldo, ere, -flsus sum, trust,
rely on, have confidence in ;
be confident.
oonflrnid, &re, &tI, fttum,
arouse ; establish ; declare,
give pledge; encourage, re-
assure.
odnflsns, a, nm, from o5nfId5.
oon-fllgrd, ere, -flixl, -fliotum,
contend, engage, fight.
•«dnflp^ns) ' -entls,
ence, junction.
odn-fngid, ere, -fugl, flee, flee
for refuge, take refuge. -
oon-gperd, ere, -gessX, gestani,
collect.
con-gredtor, I, -gressiis sum.
H., conflu-
oongrego, &re, ftvl, fttnm,
bring together ; in pass.^ come
together, assemble. '"^
oon-Jiol6,< ere, -J*oI, -Jeotum,
hurl, cast, throw, throw to-
gether ; infer, conjecture ; tmifc
in fugram, drive, put ; s6 qon-
Jloere, throw or betake one's
self. " -
oon-Jnngro, ere, -Junxl, -Jvino-
tnni, join, connect, unite ; «e
' oonjangere, join. ' /^,
cen-Jnnx, -Jugls, P., wife.
oonj ur&tio, -onls, F., conspir-
acy, league. -
oonor, arl, &tns sum, try, at--«
tempt, endeavor, undertake.
oon-soendo, ere, -soendl, -ao6n-
snm, mount ; embark on, so
• on board. ^ \
oon-sorlbo, ere, -sorXpsI,^soHp-
tum, enlist, levy, enroll ; pa-
tres odnsorlpti, senators.
oonseotor, arl,^ Atuf sum, fol- '.
low up, pursue, hunt down.
eonseoutus, a, nifi, from oon-
seqnor.
oousedl, from odnsldd. \
consensus, us, M., consent.
odn-sequor, I, -sboutna^ •!»»,
iollow ; arrive'; overtake ;' ob-
tain, gain, secure ; sticc6ed ;
accomplish.
oon-serd, ere, -serni, -sertntn,
i'oin ; mannm oonserere,^ join
»attle.
cdnservo, &re, &vl, fttum^keep,
** save ; presei:ve, keep alive.
odnsXdero, &re,' fbvV&tnm, cdn-
SM|er, reflec^.
odn-sXd6, ere, -sedl, -sessum,
sit down ; encamp, take up a
position ; settle. -
odnslUnm, X, N., plan, design,
intention, resok^e, purpose ;
prudence, dij|cretion ; ,coun-
sel, advice, strategy; intrigue;
ooun<»i J «dnslUnm oapere.
■■^
\
S-
ci
•c<
CO
g
CO
CO
CO
CO
1
oo:
»
1
1
odi
: t
J
OOI
M
form (adopt) a plan ; oonimu-
ni odnsnid, ,by common con-
sent, according to a common
course of action.
NoonslmllU, e, very similar, like.
oon-8lsto, ere, -stltl, take up
l^posi^ion; get afootiiig; Iwlt,
y- stop, make ^^stond.
^dnsolor, arl, atns gam, con-
|8ole.
conspectus, iis, M., sight, view.
. 0on-spiolo, «re, -spexl, -spec-
'■••,. turn, catch sigjit of, see, ob-
; serve, behold.
cginsplcor, &pI, atus sum, come
in sight of, catch sigKof, ob-
serve, see. *
cdnsp^, are,'avl, atam, com-
bine, «onspire.
-constanter (cdnstadltlas, con-
stantisslmeX adv., steadfast-
ly, uniformly. '" j
constantla, ae, F., firmness,/
heroism. ' t
constlpo, are, avi, atam,
crowd, press. > ^y
constltl, frovii oonlBistoi "^
oonstit-uo, ere, -ul, -atam, es-
tablish, arrange, Inake, ap-
point, fix, settle J decide, re-
solve, determiireT; place, sta-
. ' tion, draw up. ^
odit-st^', are, -stiti, -statam,
consist ; stand firm^ constat,
' impers(^ial, it is agreed, it is
understood.
oon-saesco, ere, -saevl, -sne-
tum, becdme abcustonJbd ; in
perf. tenses, am accustomed,
• am. wont.
consaetudd, -dinls, F., cfUEf-
tom, habit.
•^oonsal, -sails, M., consul, one
of ttoo chief magistrates at
Mome, elected anniuiUly.
oonsalarls, e, 6f consular rank ;
H. as at ' '
PART yi.— VOCABULARY.
V
.479^
consal-o, ere, -uI, -tuni, con-
sult, ask advice," enquire ; pro-
vide for, talie thought for, with
dat. ,..-
odnsalto, are, avI, atam/ de-
liberate, take counsel. ""
odnsalto^ adv., purposely. "
odnsaltom, 1, n.,. resolution,
decree. - " .
c6n-sum6, ere, -sumpsi, -sump-
tam.^pend ; expend ; exhaust.
oon-temno, ere, -tempsXj-ttomp-
tohi, despise. "_ - ' __
conten-do,-er^, -Af, ^nm, has-
** ►ten, make one's way, push on ;
strive, exert one';^ self ; have a
contest, struggle, fight, con-
tend ;.a88ert, affirm, ma^tain,
oontentld, -onls, F.,* contest. '
con-terd, ere, -trivl, -tritam, "
exhaust, harass.
contestor,, arl, atas sam, call
upon, invoke.
continens, -entls, F., mainland,
continent.
oon-tineo, *%re, -tlnal, -ten-
tam, restrain, hem in, keep,
hold; border, bound ; pres. part,
as adj. , continens, -entls, con-
tinual, incessant, contiguous ;
continens terra, maimand,
Ncontinent. . ' '
continnas, &', am, successive.
c6i\tl6, -onls, F., Assembly.
contra, 1. adv., otherwise ; on
contrary ; oontr^ atqae,
ontipary to what,^ otherwise
thaW^. prep, with ace, op-
posite, over against ; against.
con-traho, ere, -traxi, -trao-
tam, collect, g8tt;her together,
assemble ; reduce, contract.
oontall, from cdnferd.
contamella, ae, F., 'reproach,
• disgrace. . "
oon-venlo, Ire, -v'eni, -ven-
oonsul.
bam, come togeth«ir, meet, *s-~
semble together j be agree<fo^ ;
v;
m
480
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
oonvoiiit, ^mpemonaX^ it is leius Oojita, ow of Ccemr's lieu-
agreed. i^no^^M^ ft ,
^jonventiis, Ag, M., meeting ; Cotn», 1^ M.,^^Cotup, a Omil*i
assizes, court.' name. '
conver-to, «trej^-tl, -sam, turn, draMUii, I, M., Marcus Licinius
change. . „ CrasaaByaliomang^nei-alyCgn-
Con^totolitavis, la, m,, Convic- sul 55 B.C.
tolitavis, a Omd's name. orSber, bra, brum, ir
oonvood, Are, avl, &tani, call numerous, many.
^together, call, summon, as- ore-dd, ere, -didi,
>-'Bemble. trust ; " believe,,*.
oo-orlor, Xrl, -o'rtas •am, arise. dot. ) ; ' thipk. a '| [v
oopia, ae, F., supply, abun- «i»4»«i.%a a^J ^^IJb||^*--". ^"*'" \_
dance, plenty, amount, quan- oreo, are, &T^^&]tii^, choose,'
tity; in |>ittr., resources, stores; elect.*^- ' < , '* f. "
forces, troops. crepitus, fis, M., noise, flapping; -
cdpiosas, a, am, well supplied, Cr§ta$ ae, F., Crete, a large
rich ; "Ubundajit. island, south of the mgean.
ooram, adv., in person, face to ' Cretenses, lum, m. plur., the
face, "urith one's oWn eyes. Cretans, inhabitants of Crete.
Ooroyra, ae,',-F.. Corcyra, an crimen, -minis, N.,chai^o^ accu-
idatid west of northern Oriece. sation. >
Corey raeasJ^, am, Corcyrean, Croesus, I, m., Cfoesua, khig of
o£ Corcyj|iPM. phlf. as sf^st., Lydiafrom 560 tp 546 B.C.
Corey raci, orurii, the* Cor- craoi&tas;.bs, jn., torture, cru-
cyreans. - ^Ity. ,
Corneliuri, I, M., 1. P. Cornelius oruddlls, e, cruel, bai'barous.
Scipio, cons^din 218 B.C. 2. . cubicnlumt I, n:^ (bed) cham-
C. Cornelius Cethegus, consul ber.
in 197 B.C. ,3. Lucius Come-, calmen, -minis, n,, Summit.
lius Merula, consul in 193 B. G. cuipa,^ ae j f. ,« blame, fault.
oornu, us, N., hom^ wing (o/ coitus, us, M., civilization.
an afmy). .'"'■, cum, prep, loith ahl., with, to-
corona, ae, F., garland, wreatly^ .j;ether with ; againikt.
crown. ^
corpus, -oii^lN., body, pergi
cor-ruglpo, ere, -rupl, -r
turn, bribe, win over. ,
. Corns, 1, M. (unth ventus), the
I north-west wind,
Corvlnus, I, M., Corvinus, a
■^famous IU)man.
[ cofij., ifhen, whfineve^
e ; asfMyj|fce ;'^aitnough ;
prXmnm, as soon as ; '^
cunft . . .' tuhi, both ... and,
not only . . . but also.
ounctor, &ri, atus sum, hesi-
tate, hold biftck.
cunotus, a, um, all, all together.
onpidj^, adv., eagerly.
oorirus, I, M., raven.
' oo^^Uanus, a, um, daily ; regu- onpiditas, -tatis, f., eagerness,
Hj^"**" fondness.
ootidiS, adv., daily, every day. Cupldo, -dinls, M;.;^Cupid, Love
C9ttft , a», Ml , li\\<im Aqrnncu- jpetsorvifj^) :
i
I
W:
I 1
/^
c<>
PART VI.-^OCABULARY.
^ 481
' *"^JIr"i^k;?"* ®*^'' desirouB, decide, determine, decMe, or-
fond, «nbifcious. . dbr, amign ; firirt; doUttir
eup-io er6, -ivl, -itnm, be ea- dieert*, ftleJivfLal^Se
ger, desire desire earnestly. the isiue, fight *
eur, odt,., why ; fredy, that d6-eid5, ere, %m; m down
' car6 lr« *^t ** .* \3 Deolma., I, M.rD^cinnJs, a ifo.
coro, are, &vl, ^tam, attend md?i p»wnom«n.
- to, take care; wiih gerundive, de-olpld, ere, -c^pi, -ceptum
causeto be (cfon«), have (Ame), disappknt, btf?, dtli*
«^rl"'' ^"' ''^' *'i*"''*- ***^*'*' *'«' ^^ *tl«. Show,
cnrsus, us, M., rUnmng, run- make clear.
_ hmg powers, speed, pace; deciiTlg, e, slopii
^urse, passage. deeoro, 4,., iXlJtnm, jdom.
cn«todla, ae. P., guard, picket, deoretus, a, umV and d«!»itu
eastos, -todl»5 M. ', guard, sentry, deonm&nas, a, am dkjb nor*»
Cyrenael, drum, m. jdlw.. the rear ^ ^^ "^ ^
CyreneanB, inhabitants of 'Gy- de-ourro, ere, -earn {-cueur-
rey, a town m the north oj ri), -cnrsum, run d^te.
^/nca. , dfidecu., -orl., n., Tf^
Cyrus I, M., Cyrus (i^e eZdcirX reproach.
fownder of the Persian empire ; dodi, from do
retted from 659 fo 529 AO. d6didi,/rom dedo
[race,
ft
D., on abbrevicUion for Deoi-
* mug. ■ ;■ ■ ,,;■ ..;'
damno, Are, avl, atnm, cbn-
demn.
Darius, I, m., Darius, king of
fr^Tf T • f ; ' ^ u'™'. ^*""^ ««atlR^.are, avi, atum, weary,
f^m ; of, out of; about, con- exhaust. ' ^'
^ cernmg, of, in regard t© ; with d«fectl6, -onig, p., revolt..
pax, dedttio, to treat of ; with de-fendo, ere, -fendl -f ensum
nox, ylirllla, m ; tmth causa, defend; protect. ^ '*'»•'*"'
dMitlo, -onts, F., 8urreL__.
de-do, ere, -dldl, -dltai», sur-
render, give up ; devote.
de-duc6, ere, -d&xl, -duotini,
lead off, withdraw; lauw^,
lead out; leAd (home), wed,
marry ; conduct. .
4k«i't^ni, de^sse, /rom desum.
for.
debeo, «re, uT, ttnm, pwe; with,
tnjin., ought, should, , <»nnot
-^help; in pass., be due.
deblllto, &re, avI, &tum, weak-
en. "
«bI« -oesspm/
— ^ ^ ====•.—=-----==
d£-o§do, ere,
die.
d«-oern6, ere, -cr«Tl, -«r«tam, sake.
de-fero, -ferre, -tull, -l&tnm,
carry, bring, convey ; report j
confer upon (ad).
defeaisns, a, urn, perf. paai. of
dffCetlsoor, exhausted.
d6-fe*ls«or, I, -fessus sum, be-
come ^khausted>
d^^old, ere, -feci, -feetum,
-iaih, be wanting ; revolt, for^
f
I
m.
i
V
482^
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
d(ft^l^<&t. f '•» -^Ixl) -flxum, fix, demdnstro, &re, &vl, fttank^
dd-flup, 'ere, -fla'zT, -flnxam,
flow off, divide.
ddfdrmls, e^ ill-shaped, un-
shapely. '-
d§fal, from desnin.
dA-fangor, I, -functus sum,
have 4one, complete ; die.
delrioeps, culv. , in turn.
delude, cuiv.^ then, thereupon,
thereafter, next.
d6-Jloid, ere, -J60I, -Jeotnm,
throw down, haul down ; carry
down, drive ashore ; dismount,
uilhorse.
del&tas, a, am, from dgfero.
deleotd, &re, avi, atuin, de-
point out, explain, state, men*-
tion.
deni, ae, a^ ten each, in groups
of ten, by tens.
densus, a, um, dense, thick.
de-pello, ere, -pull, £j>ulanm,
drive out, dri# from, force
, from. , /
deper-eo, -Ire, -II, PN^h, be
lost. ' «^sr
de-pond, ere, -posnl, -p<Mi-
tani, lay down, lay aside ;
store away, deposit, place ;
give up.
dgporto, &re, avI, &tam, jce-
mote, carry, convey.
depi»altti»,-af um^frotii ddpono.
^>
light; in pass., take pleasure, depreoor, arl, &tuB sum, peti-'
dMiotu^, us, M., levy.
delectus, a, nm, from dSUgd,
•re; as adj.^ picked, chosen.'
dftl-ed^ ere, -§vl, -etuni, de^
stroy, annihilate.
dftllberd, are, &v1, atum, dis-
' CUSS, consider ; question, con-
sult oracle.
dUiolae, arnni, F. plUr.^ de-
light ; darling, beloved.
dillgd, &re, avI, atum, bind
fast, fasten; moor.
d6-llffd, ore,. -16gl, -Iftotum»
pick out, choose, select, levy.
d61lt-^sod, ere, -nl, conceal
tion against ; ask meroy, ask
quainter.
(depugno, &re, &vl, atum, fight
it out, fight to. the end.
depulsus, a, nmj from, d§pelld.
.de-soendo, ere, -soendl, -so6n-
•um, come down, descend.
d6ser-6, ere, -ul,, -turn, desert,
abandon.
deslderium, I, N.^ longing, re-
gret.
deslderd, are, ftvl, &tum, de-
sire, wish for ; lose, miss.
disil, /com d^slnd.
d^-slllo, Ire, -sllul, -snltam,
leap down.
one's self.
D6I0S, I, F., Delos, mv island in dS-slno,' ere, -sll(8lvl), -situm,
the Mgtan. cease, desist.
Delphi, drum, MT., Delphi, a di-slsto, ere,. -stltl, -stltnm,
cihj in northern Greece, famous cease, leave off ; give up, do-
for its oracle of Apollo. sist from.
Delphlous, a, am, Delphic, of dispird, are, ftvl, &tam, give
Delphi. . up hope ; despair of , be in de-
dementia,»*, F., madness, folly, spair.
I** d6mer-gd, ere, -si, -sum, sink. d£stln6, &re,&vl,&tamt choose,
dft-metd, ere, -messul, -mes- "betroth.
sam, cut do'#n, reap. d^stltl, from dAslstA.
dd i nlgi^ **Ot *y>t **«"»» fft' d t -strliH ip ^4MP»y-strlaKl,»t>to
A\
move, withdraw.
tam, unsheat.he, draw.
«k
'»
iff
' --,
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
483
desam, deease, defal, be want-
ing, be lacking.
deterred, ere, ul, Itum, deter,
discourage, i>revent.
detineo. ere,, ul, detentam,
detain. ■
de-traho, ei-e.-traxlj-tractuni,
take off, remove.
detreoto, &re, avi, atum, de-
cline, refuse.
detrlmentdaus, a, uni, hurtful.
detrlmentum, 1, n„ loss, de-
feat. -— —
detra-do, ere, -»1, -gum, dis-
lodge.
■^ ;f etall, from defero.
^d^turbo, are, avI, &tain, haul
qown.
den», 1, M.,^od.
dd-venid, Ire, -v«nl, -ventam,
come,, come down.
devlnoo, ere, -viol, -vlotatn,
conquer thoroughly, overcome.
devord, are, &vl, 4tum, de-
vour, destroy. .
dexter, tra, trum, right, on the
right ; fevi. deztra, as snbst.
(sc. manas), right hand;
pledge.
dl OK dll, from dens.
Diana, ae, F., Diana, the goddess
of hunting.
dlbio, -dnl«, p., rule, sway.
died, ere, dlxi, diet am, say,
state, mehluiif ; call.
dlot&tor, -orU, M., dictator, an
officer appointed at Rome with
absobae potoer, when great
danger threatened the state.
dl6«, *i, M. (rarely ¥.), day, time,
period.
dlfferd, dllTerre, dlstall, dI14-
tum, defer, postpone ; differ,-
be different.
dlfflollU, e, difficult.
dimcalMkB, -t4tU, F., difficulty.
airaoniMr, am. (dlflRuInt;
dlffloUiim«), with difficulty.
dlf-fld6, ere, -flsan sam, dis
trust, w. dat.
dlf-fagld, ere, fugl, flee, van-
ish, disappear." >
digrnitas, -tati», F., esteem, re-
spect ; reputation ; rank, dig-
nity ; splendor, magnificence ;
digrnltatem trlbaere, have
respect for.
dlgnns, a, um, worthy, deserv-
ing, with ahl.
dl-labor, I, -14^aiis sum, scatter,'
dispense. ^t
dlllgrenter, a(2v., carefully.
dlllirentla, ae, F., care, watch-
/ulnesB ; diligence, earnestness.
dl-llgrd, erer-lexl, -l^otam, love^
esteem.
diniloo, are, avI, atom, fight,
struggle, contend, engage.
dlnildlam, I, n., half.
dl-mlttd, ere, -mlsl, -mlssain/
send out, despatch ; dismiss,
send away, send in different
directions; 'lose; let go away;
abandon.
dla-eedo, ere, -oe«*I, -oessnni,
go away, withdraw, depart;
retire, come off ; scatter ; dls-
oedere ab, leave. »
dlsoeasna, u», m., departure,
withdrawal.
dlaolplina, ae, F., training, dis-
cipline,
dlaoo, ere, dldlol, leamT ~"
dlTOordla, ae, F., dissension,
disunion. \
dlsoordd, &re, 4vl, jktam,
quarrel.
dU-Jloi5, ere, -J4oI, -jeotani,
break, scatter ; raze.
dlspalatus, a, nm, part, o/dit-
p4lor, as adj., straggling, scat-
tered.
dls-p&r, -parls, unequal-.
1^
Jl>«^rgl»» arc, -n^friit, -ipr
•um, scatter, separate.
dl»-|iUo«6, «M, -pit**!, .]dto|.
'->
484
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
)'
«5
tnm, find no favor with, be
distasteful to, displeiase, with
dat. •* .'
dis-pond, ere, -posnl, -posi-
tumy place at intervals, post,
station.
dls-flldeo, ere, -sedl, with ah,
, have a quarrel with, be at
varianca^ith.
disstmald, are, avi, &tnin,
conceal.
dlR-Rolvo, ere, -solvl, -aolu-
- - turn, destroy, break up. -
dlg-tlned, ere, -tinai, -telitnin,
keep apart ; keep at a distance.
dlstrib-nd, ere, -nl, -utam, as-
sign, distribute.
di-stringo, ere, -strlnxl,
•atrlotnm, busy, occupy.
dltd, are, ahrl, .enrich.
diu, adv., (dlutlns, dtutisstme),
long, for a long time.
dl-yido, ere, -vl«l, -vlsnm, di-
vide,''separate. , ' ,
divlnaa, a, nm, divine, sacred.
divltlae, arum, F. jjinr. , riches,
wealth.
do, dare, dedl, datum, give,
graht, allow, afford, bestow,
furnish ; appoint; with flnein,
or In fugani, put ; operam
dure, take pains, see to it,
• give attention to, pu^t forth
efforts ; verl>u dare, cheat,
deceive ; tergru dare, flee.
doo-eo, #re, -ul, -turn, teach,
tell, inform, explain.
docte, (wii?.. skilfully, well.
doctor, -oris, M. , teacher, in-
structor.
dolor, -oris, M., pain, grief,
sorrow, distress ; indignation,
resentment ; grievance. '
doIuN, 1, M , deceit, deception ;
craft, cunning ; artifice, trick,
strategy.
doine a tico i , », nm, at home,
personal, private ; with t>el-
lum, intestine, civil.
domi, adv. (really locative of
domns), at home.
domiclllnm, 1, n., home, resi-
dence, dwelling.
domina:,'ae, F., mistress,
dominatio, onis, F., -sway, su-
premacy, rule. '
domlnng, I, master, ruler, cap-
tain.
DomItIt|8, I, M., Lucius Domi-
- tius Ahenobarbus, conmd 54
B.C.
dom-d, are, -ul, -itum, subdue,
conquer. _#^
domus, uB, F.j-lfippe, home,
dwelling pl^'; .'|iousehold,
family, house»; 4||inl, locative^
at home.
doneo, conj., so long as, while.
dono, are, avI, atnm, present,,
give, grant, bestow.
donnm, 1, N., gift.
dos, d^tis, F., dowry, marriage
portion.
Druldes, um, M*. vlur.. the
Druids, priests of the Gauls.
dnbitd, are, avI, atnm, doubt,
hesitate ; have doubts.
dublam, I, N., doubt ; line du-
blo, undoubtedly.
dublns, a, um, doubtful.
dnoenti, ae, a, two hundred.
duco, ere, du:]n, ductnm, lead,
bring ; take ; carry oflf ; run.
. make, prolong, spin out ; con-
sider ; marry,
dnlolfl, e, pleasant, agreeable.
dum, conj.y while, until.
Duninorlx, -IgrI*, M., Dumno-
rix, a leader of the jEdui.
duo, -acf -o, two» i " - -^
dnoflerim, twelve.
duodeul, ae, a, twelve each ; ■
in groups of twelve, by twelves.
duod^vlglntl, indeed., eighteenl'
PART FL— VOCABULARY.
485
da-plex, -plicis, twofold,
double.
daplloo, are, avl, atam,
double.
durd, are, avl, atam,' endure,
remain.
Duras, I, m., Quintus Liiberius
P Durus, tt military tribune with
Gcesar.
dux, duels, M., leader, general ;
guide/
*, prep, with aU., see ex.
ea, adv. (abl. fern, of I»; sc. via),
by that way j there.
Eburdnes, uiii, M. phir., the
Eburones, a tribe in the ex-
treme north-east of Gaul.
ecoe, interjection, look ! see ! be-
hold!
e-duco, ere, -duxl, -dadtuin,
Iriad out, lead forth.
effemlnd, are, avl, htnvll, ener-
vate, make effeminate; in
jMiss., become effeminate.
efTerd, ferre, extull, elatum,
bear out, carry away, bury.
ef-flolo, ere, -fed, -feotum,
make, cause, produce, form,
construct; bring about, ac-
complish, bring to pass; make
up, complete.
of-fugrlo, ©re, -fugl, -rugltum,
escape.
ef-fundd^ ere, -fudl, -fuauni,
pour out, bring forth.
igh from afro.
effo, met, I.
«-«redlor, I, -tire»un» sum, de-
part, go forth, leave ; land,
disembark ; come; set out.
, ,*»r«»U, odt)., excellently, ex-
tremely well, admirably.
*»'«»rlu», a,\ um, exceptional,
marked, remarkable, eminent.
dgressus, us, M., landing. ^
ejloio, ©re, -Jeol, -Jeotnin,
flmg out, cast out; banish;
with se, rush, dash, rush out.
e-Ugo, ©p©, -legrl, -leotnm,
choose, pick.
elephantus, 1, M., elephant.
eloquentla, a©, F., eloquence,
ability to speak.
emendo, ar©, avl, atuni, cor-
rect, amend, make good.
e-mltto, ©re, -mia« -^lissain,
send out.
©nlm, conj., for, now, in fact,
indeed.
Ennlns, I, M., Ennius, a Roman
poet.
ennmero, ar©, avl, Htnin, re-
count, relate, tell of.
enuntld, &ro, avl, *atum, dis-
close.
eo, ir©, II (ivl), Itam, go,
march, proceed; advance.
e6, adv., thither, there, to that
place, to them (it, etc. ).
eo, adv., with comparatives or
before quod cMuse, the, all
the ; on this account.
eddeni, adv., to the same place,
to the same thing, in the same
direction.
Epamlaondas, ae, M., Epami-
nondas, o famous Theban gen-
eral.
Bphesus, I, F., Ephesus, a city
of Ionia in Ana Mimtr.
Bphlaltes, ae, M., Ephialtes, a
Greek.
•phlpplatus, a, pm, using sad-
dles.
ephlppiutn, I, N., horse-cloth ;
(freely) saddle.
ephorus. I, m., ephor, 4% Spar-
tan moffistrate.
£plrns, i, M., Epirus, a district
of northern Greece, on the Adri-
•*
— excoHent; q^jg^ ■ -- .^^^j.
«tressn», imiin./rom «gredior. «plstula, ae, F., letter, epistle.
486
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
:*
/^
eqn-eH, -Itts, M., horseman,
horse-soldier, cavalryman ; in
plnr., caivalry.
eqnester, trls, tre, of cavalry,
cavalry.
equltatas, us, M., cavalry.
equns, Xj, M., horse.
«rga, prep, vnth ace, towards.
ergo, (idv.^ therefore, accord-
ingly.
6-rigo, ei*e, -r§xl, -reotam,
arouse, raise up.
£-rlpi6, ere, -ripul, -reptnin,
' seize, snatch away ; rescue.
erogo, &re,'.avl, atum, expend,
> pay out.i ' - ■
error, -oris,^ M., mistake, delu-
sion, blunder.
grndto. Ire, IvI (ll), Itnm, train,
educate, tdach.
6-rampd, ere, -rupl, -raptani,
make a sally.
ftrnptid, -dnl8, F., sally, soi-tie.
-aoendo, ere, -soendl, -scen-
■nm, embark.
esNped&rlaB, I, M., charioteer,
c1)ariot-fighter.
efsei^ai», I, N., chariot, war-
chariot. \ \ ■
'et, com.., an^, but; et . . . et,
both .\. . and.
ettlum, cd^tij. Ofnd adv., also, fur-
ther ; e\^n, ^till, besides ; non'
./ sdlatn . . . ^ed etlani, not on-
ly . . . but ajlso.
'etiamnono, eVen then.
etlMintaii||; odjj., even then, still.
Etruria, ae, IF., Etruria, a dis-
trict in It(uy(, north of Rome.
Gtra«ca(i, I, M., ah Etrurian.
etal, conj., eyep if, although.
Eaboea, \«#t >*•« Bubgaa, an
island hjing ea«i of Ore^^e.
Bamenf ■, la, M., Eumenes^ king
ofPergamum, 198-158. B.C.
Bnpljr&t^a, la, M., Euphrates,
— a, river in Pernin ,
Snrdpa, ae, F., Europe.
Earybladea, la, M., Eurybiades,
a Spartan admiral.
Earyatheaa, el, M., Eurystheus,
the king who imposed upon Her-
cules his ttvelve labors.
eva-dd, ere, -al, -aam, make
one's way, climb ; escape.
e-venlo. Ire, -veni, -ventam,
turn out, result.
eventna, ua, H., outcome, ex-
perience, fate.
evoed, are, avi, atam, call out,
summon, challenge. "^ ,
evolo, ari, avi, atum, fly away ;
rush out.
ex (sometim.es § before conso-
• nants), prep, vnth a6i., from,
out of ; of, belonging to ; af-
ter, upon ; in accordance with ;
of direction, \x\., on. .
exaotua, a, u m, /rom exlg6.
exadveranm, prept^ ivith ace,
ov<er against, opposite.
exagltp, are, ft-vl, &tain, harass,
- drivg^uty expel.
exanilno, kfe, &vl, &tam, weighs
test.
exanlmd, &re, avI, atam, kill ;
in pass., be^killed, die.
ex-ardeaod. ere, -aral, -arsum,
blaze forwi; become enraged,
becoAie incensed.
ex-oed6, ere, -oeaal, -oeaaani,
go out, go away, withdraw,
depart, leavje,^ quit. ^
exoelld, ere, exoellfal, excel,
surpass'.
exolo, Ire, Ivl, Itam or Itum,
sutnmon ; arouse.
ex-olpio, ere, -oipl, -oeptn^,
follow, succeed, relieve.
eifoitd, &re, Avl, &tain, awake.
^' rouse ; stimulate, arouse^ .
exoltna, a, um, from exolA.
excl&mo. Are, AvI, Atam, call
out, cry out.
yr^ett«ir~-oiaiiii», '
shut off", cut off, hinder.
^
\m
. \
!i^
■<;^'
> *
^
PART ViiXvOCABULARY.
437
exo5irito, aVe, ftvt, atam, de-\,esf»lorator, -orl», M., scout
vise, plan
exoubo, are, avl,.atnin, sleep
out ;. keep watch. v
exctiirslo, -dills, jp», "invasion,
^ raid.
exoAso, are, ivl, atnin, ex
exploro, are, avi, atom, ex-
amine, investigate, reco|inoi-
tre ; endeavor to learn. ' '
e^pond, ere, -posal, -posltnm,
isplay; array, land, disem-
tk ; set forth, relate.
cuse; se oxouBare, apologize, exp^to, are, avI, atuni, carry
exem plum, I, N., Example. oflP,yemove.
ex-eo, -Ire, -II, (-Ivl), -ltum,^o ex-po^d, ere, -poposol, de-
out ; set out ; start; leave, mand,\ ask earnestly from, re-
disembark;o/ a rejjort, spread, quire the surrender of.
go abroad. '^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ex-prlinfl^ ©re, -preasi, pr«»*
, ex^roeo^ ere, nl, itam, exer- 80111, describe, express.
cise ; work, till ; arouse to ac. expugnd, 4te, avI, atam, take
-tion; exasperat^. by storm, 6arry.
exeroltatio, -6nl«,\F., training, expnlsas, a, km, /rom expelld.
exercise, practice.\ exqul.ltn», a\ um, carefully
^xeroltus, ug, m., arniy, forces. chosen ; excruciating.
ex-banrio, Ire, -haai^I, -haua- ex-seqnor, 1, -ae^utna anm, en-
tntn, exhaust. force. \
exheredo, are, avl, fttum, dis- eJcaUinni, I, N., exile
inhent. exapeotd, are, *yi; atam,
ex-igo, ere, -«gi, -&otam, ^rive await, wait for ; wa^t.
out, expel. ex-atlnari*6, ©re, -atinicl, -atlno-
exlflrnitaa, tatla, F., scantiness, tarn, blot out, extinguish.
smallness shortness, small exato, are, stand out, be above.
size, small extent. ^ ex-atrao, ere, -atruxl, -XtrAo"
exlgaaa, a, am, small, scajjty, tom, raise, erect, build
iimited, meagre. exaal, -aalla, M., exile. v
exiatlmd, &re, ftvl, fttam, think, extempid, adv., at once, imn
believe, consider ; estimate. 4iately.
exltaa, iha, M., way out, exit; extir&, prep, with ace., outsid^
conclusion ; issue, result. of , beyond ; out of reach of.
expedtd, Ire, Ivl, Itum, free, e!s-tr4|id,ere,-tr&xI,-tr&otam;
• extricate; perf. part pass., draw out, extract ; waste by
expedltua, a, am, as adj., delay, fritter away.
unin9umbered, free; easy; in extr^maa, a, am (superlative of
light marching order. exteraa, exterior), farthest,
expedltlo, ^nl a, F., expedition. " last, outermost; «d extr«-
ex-pelld, ere, -pall, -palaam, mam, at last; to the last. .
. dnveput; banish. extall, ^rom efferd.
•^IMV-Ior, Irl, -taa aont, tiy, ex-fiirA, ere, -aaal, -oatam,
prove, make an attempt ; ex- bum up. «^ ,
perience, find by experienpe. , ^ ^
•**?^^"*' <^re, AvI, fttam, set "
forth, ItaleT unfold, carry on ; ttAmr, bri, M., artisan, work-
extend, deploy, move freely. man, engineer.
V
■Jiff.
4»d
-"^
Primary latin book»
FablaR, I, M,, 1. Quinttis Fabius
Mazimus, coimxU and dictator
in the second Punic war. 2.
Quintus Fabius LAbeo, conMil
in 183 B.a
Vttbrlolns, 1, M., Caius Fabricius
Luscinus, consfid in 278 B. G.
f««lle, adv.t easily, readily.
fiftollis, e, easy.
fnolo, ere, f£oI, faotum, pass.
flo, ^erl, faetns «am, make ;
do, act ; form, build, con-
L iHfcruct ; render ; bring about ;
^ith ppoellam, fight; with
Tim, offer, use ; with poteat&-
teiu, give ; with praedam,
« . obtain ; verba faoere, speak,
}rfe4d ; oerttorem aliqaem
faoere, inform one ; in vasa.
, oflxn^ beoofne ; take place,
come to pass, happen, result;
qno faotum est, the result
was.
faotto, -oni«, F., party, faction.
fiMttam, I, N., deed, act, action ;
occurrence.
fAoalta«, -tatis, F.^ opportu-
nity, chance, power ; in plnr.,
' wealth, means, resources.
faenns, -ori«,N., interest, usuVy.
thgu», I, F., bieech.
Falernus, a, am, Fnlemian, of
Falernus,^ a district in C^m-
falld, ere, fefelll, faianm, de-
ceive ; elude,, esoapei discovery
• by. ■ ■ ''-■.■■■'-''■ ^
falans, a, am, Wse, Untrue.
f&ma, ae, f., ispmor, report,
news ; fame, reputation:
fam^ !■, F. (oM., famd), hun-
ger, ?fomine. ^
ItaMllla, ae, F.,'hou|Mhold, fam-
flamy l&rln, e, private ; r#« fa-
mlilftrU, property, eatate.
fa ii iUIA i iltfc a , 'tfctU, y., lafa
f&s, K., irideclinahle, right (&y»
divine law).
fasois, is,.H., bundle.
faveo, ere, favl, faatam, fa-
vor {with dat.).
fefelll, from fallo.
fellolter, adv., happily, pros-
perously, successfully.
fdllx, -iols, happy ; prosperous.
fer£, adv., almost, nearly ; about;
for the most part. . *
fero, ferre, tail, latum, bear,
carry, bring ; endure ; with*
stand ; in pass., rush, go,
flow; with auxilium, lend;
imt^ oondloidnem, offer ; with
'•ententlam, give ; gpraTlter'
ferre, be annoyed at, feel
keenly ; opinio fert, bpinion
goes; ednauetudo fert, it id
customary. ' , '
ferdz, -dels, warlike, fierce.
ferreus, a, um, of iron« iron.
ferrum, I. N., iron; sword;
ferro at<iti,e IgnX, with fire
and swbrd^
fertilla; e, fertile.
ferua, a, um, fierce, saVage. .
featlvua, a, um, joyous, chaihn-
ing.
flotilla, e, made of clay, earthen.
flotua, a, am, from flngo. .
fldSlia, e, faithful, loyal, trusty.
fldSa, el, F., trust, faith, confi-
dence, belief; pledge, word, '
oath, prohiise, honor ; loyalty,
J&delity ; protection, depend-
ence, allegiance, alliance ; 11-
dem faoere, give a pledge ;
fldem' interpooere, pledge
one's honor ; fldem prae-
it&re, keep faith ; fldem ae-
. qui, embrace alliance, ajbtflboh
one's self .to,
fIdCi.ola, ae, F., donfiden<Nk
flfTHra, a«, shape.
fUiai au; F>; daughter. .
i
macy, friendship»^
flllna, I, M., son.
.-»»■.
;/■..
f:t
PAKT irt^j-VOCABTJtARY.
48»
>U8. •
ut;
ity.-
ttfi-
rd, '
Qd- ;
fl- •
?e ; )
km- * *
ilnffd, ere, finxl, flotum, make
up, invent.
flnld, Ire, ItI, Itnin, limit,
bound.
finis, Is, M., end, limit ; inpltir.t
fortls, e, brave, courageous.
fortlter/ odr,, bravely, gallant-
ly, stoutly. .J. I
fortitudo, -dints, F., bravery,
courage, valor.
borders, territory, land, dis- fortaito, adv.y by chance, acci-
tnct. dentally.
nnitlinns, a, am, neighboring, fortana, ae, F., chance, for-
adjoinmg, adjacent ; m. plur.y tune, luck ; good fortune, sue-
as «M6«ton*we, neighbors. cess; lot; inplnr., property,
fid, fieri, f actus smu, pass, of possessions, fortunes.
faolo, be made, be done ; be- forum, i, n., market-place,
come ; be brought about, be forum.
eflfected, take place, come to fossa, ae, F., trench, ditch,
pass, happen, result ; quo fao- moat.
turn est, the result was.
firmtter, adv.y firmly, steadily.
flrmo, &re, &vl, &tum, strength-
en!
firmus, a, wm, strong, powerful.
Fl&mlnlnns; I, M., T. Quintius
Flaminius, con»id in 198 B.C.
Flamintus, I, M., Caius Fla-
minius, consxd in 217 B.C.
Ilamma, ae, F., blaze, flame,
burning.
fleoto ere, flezi, flexum, turn,
' guide, direct.
fled, 6ve^ flevi, fletum, weep,
be in tears.
Up, are, &vl, &tum, blow.
fldreo, §re, ul, bloom ; pros-
per ; pres. part., florins, -en-
ti; a^ adj., Nourishing, pros-
perous, influential, i-^- — ^^
fluotns, As, M., wave.
flumen, -minis, N., river. '
fluo, ere, fluxl, fluxnm, flow.
foederatus, a, um, in league
with, allied.
foedus, -eris, N., treaty, league.
fore, fui. tr^n. q/snm. ■
fbrem, «essem. r^--^^
f oris, Is, F., door.
fdrma, ae, F., shape, form.
fon|i1ea, ae, F., ant.
.-'^ .J ji-.-.».i.
frairor, -oris, M., crash,
frangro, ere, fregl, fr&otum,
break, shatter, wreck ; crush.
f rater, -tris, M., brother.
frunif, fraudis, F., trick, eva-
sion.
Preffellae, &mm, F. jdur.y Fre-
gellae, a city in Latium.
tregl, from frangro.
fremitus, us, M., din, confused
noise. ,
frequ6ns, -entls, in large num-
bers.
frlg^idus, M, um, cold.
trlfpa; -oris, cold; frosti CoW
season.
frugr^a, um, F. plur., fruits.
frugl, adj. indecL, temperate,
frugal, moderate.
friMnent&rius, a, um, of grain,
pertaining to grain ; rfts fru-
ment&ria, supply of com,
grain, provisions ; n&vis fru-
ment&ria, corn-ship.
frumentor, &rl, fttns sum, get
grain, get provisions, forage.
frAmentum, I, N., grain, com,
provisions ; in plur., crops.
fFfiistrA, adv., in vain.
friistror, &rl, Atus sum, de-
otire, diiappoint.
^rwnwrmmr, by ohanoe; m tt^ frftstvin, i, v., piece, bit.
happened. f&dl, ^/rom fnnddu "
r
490
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK
^
#;
; tnga, ae, F,, flight, rout; la
#. f again oonjicere or dare,
put to flight.
. fugrlo, ere, fugl, fagituni, flee,
escape.
tngd^ are, avi, atam, put to
. flight, rout.
tv^; from mnm^
Palvlas, I, M., Servius Fulvirs
Nobilior, constd in 265 B.C.
fund», ae, F., sling.
f andamentam, I, N. , foifiida-
— J^ tion.
Fandanlns, I, M., I* uiidanius, a
friend of Pliny. >
fando, ere, fudi, fusnni, rout,
overthrow.
fdngror, I, functus sum, hold,
fill, 'loith cfhl.
funis, is, M.i rope, cable.
funus, -erl8,N., death.
Furlus, I, M., Lucius Furius
Purpureo, cormd in 196 B.C.
f usus, from fundo.
futurus, a, um, from, sum ; N.
• plur. as subst.y fntura, drum,
the future.
G
Galba, ae, M., Galba, a Roman's
name.
iralea, ae, F., helmet.
Oallia, ae, F. Gaul.
1. The Roman provinces of
__._ Oatd, Grallia Cisalpina or Ci-
terior, the northern part cf
Italy; anc2 Gallia Transalpina
or Ultejrior, the south-eastern
part of France.
,2. The coimtry west of the
JRhine and the Alps and north
ofthePyrfnees, thus including
^^_; France^ Sivitzerlandy Belgium
and part of Holland and Ger-
'"* . ■ ■• man/g. .'■■■•.■■;,.
3. The centred and largtst of
4h« three part» into v^hieh-^hml-
t
.in the previous sense is divided, and 213 B. C.
tKe Belg86 and the Aquitani
holding the other tvx).
Galllcns, a. um, of Graul, of the
Gaulfii, Gallic.
gralllnai ae, F. , hen.
gallus, i. M., cock.
Gallu8,.l\ M., a Gaul.
graudeo, ere, gavlsus sum, re-
joice. V
fraudlum, Ik N., joy, rejoicing.
GeminuR, l\ M., Cn. Servilius.
Geminus, (X^nsid in 217 B.C.
gemma, ae, f*., pt'ecious stone,
jewel.
gener, erl, M., son-in-law.
generosus, a, um, of noble
birth. ' -
gens, gentls, F., tribe, race
nation.
genus, -erls, N., race; family'
kind, sort, class.
Germanla, ae, F. , Germany, the
region east of the Rhine.
Germanicus, a, um, German;
of otjwith the Germans.
Germanus, I, M., a German.
gerd, ere, gessi, gestuni, carry
on, wage ; do, perform, con-
duct ; in pass., be done, go
on, happen ; rem or res ge-'
rere, carry on operations ; r^s
gesta, exploit, deed ; morem
gerere, humor, comply with
(one's) wish ; magisf ratuni
gerere, hold office.
gesta, drum, N. plur. (perf.
part. pa^s. of gero, itsed sitb-
stantively), events, operations.
glaOilns, I, M., sword.
gloria, ae, F. , glory, fame.
Gobryas, ae, M., Gobryas, a
noble Persian.
GortynlX, ornm, H. p^wr., the
* Gortynians, citizens of Oor-
tyna^ a'city in Crete,,
Graoohus, I, M., Tiberius Sera-
Tmtt3cnuH| consW) axv
<i
1
I
»:!
^W
a
1
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
491
Oraeoia, ae, f., Greece. ■> ^
Graeons, a, am, Greek.
Oraeons, I, M., a Greek. J ;
srradns, us, M., step ; position.
Grain*, a, urn, Greek, Grecian ;
Graian; m. plur. as mbd.,
GratI, dram, the Greeks.
gramen, -minis, N., grass.
gratia, ae, F., favor, good- will ;
influence ; favor, service, kind-
ness ; «rratlas agrere, thank ;
tn abl. preceded by gen.y gra-
tia, for the sake oJF.:
gratalatlo, -dnls, F., rejoicing;
thanksgiving.
gratalor, arl, atus sam,
thank, give thanks to.
gratns, a, um, agreeable, pleas-
ing ; welcome, acceptable.
gravis, e, heavy, severe, seri-
ous ; hard, bitter, difficult ;
weighty, strong.
gravitas, -tatls, F., weight;
strength, power, importance ;
dignity.
gravlter, adv., severely, bitter-
ly, seriously ; gravlter ferre,
be annoyed, feel keenly.
gremlnm, I, n., lap, bpsom.
gabernator, -oris, M., pilot,
helmsman.
gasto, are, avi, attim, taste,
eat.
habed, 6re, ul, itum, have,
possess, occupy ; keep ; hold ;
find ; treat, regard, consider ;
with or&tld, deliver, make ;
ivith per/, part, pass., have.
Aabltd, are, avI, atum, dwell,
, live, reside.
Radrumetam, 1, N., Hadrume-
tum, a town on the coast of
Africa.
hacred, 6re, haesl, haesttm
-BtidrtaBt, am ImprTsbned:
carnassian, of Halicamassus,
a city of Asia Minor. . ^'
Hamllcar, -arls, M., Hamilcar,
the father of Hannibal.
Hanntbal, -alls, M., Hannibal,
the famtnis Carthaginian gen-
eral, son of Hamilcar.
Hasdrnbal, -alls, M., Hasdru^
bal, the name of the brother-in-
law and also of the brother of
Hannibal.
hand, adv., not.
Hellespontns, X. , M. , the Helles-
pont (now the Dardanelles).
Helvetlns, a, nm, Helvetian,
of the Helvetii; in plur., Hol-
yetll, ornm, M., the Helve-
tians, a tribe of Oavl, dwelling
in the modern Switzerland.
Heronles, Is, M., Hercules, son
of Jupiter; g. Greek national
hero, who, after his death,
was worshipped, as the god of
strength.
heredltas, -tatls, F., inheri-
tance.
Hermlnlns, I, m., Herminius, a •
Roman.
biberna, drnm, N. plur., win-
ter camp, winter-quarters.
Hlbernla, ae, r., Ireland.
Mo, haeo, hoc, pron., this ; he ;
the following ; the present ;
often loosely, that; hoc, N. aU.
as adv., in this way, on thi»
account, and with compara-
tives, the.
hio, adv. , here, herein ; upon
this, hereupon, now.
hlemo, &re, avI, atnm, win-
ter, pass the winter.
hlems, hlemls, F., winter^
stormy weather. ^ --
hlnc, adv., hence,from this place»
hlrons, I, M., goat. /
? Hl spft nia, a e, F» jS p a ii j, iadu ds=
{
ing Portugal.
Halloarnassln., a, am, HaU- bUtoria, ae, F., hUtory.
^P^
■•■ A.
492
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
m
bodle, adv. , to-day.
hodlernua, a, una, to-day's, of
this day.
bom-d, -Inls, M. awi ¥., man,
person ; m plur., inaxi, man-
kind, people.
bonestas, -tatIs,'F., honor^ in-
tegrity, f
bonestua, a, nm, upright, hon-
orable, worthy ; becoming, re-
fined.
bonor (or bonds), -oris, M.,
honor, repCKS ; office, official
position.
born, ae. P., hour.
Hor&tlns, I, M., Horatius, a
Human liero.
borreo, 6re, nl, tremble at,
dread.
borream, 1, N., storehouse,
, granary, barn.
borrldas; n, nm, terrible, fright
ful, horrible.
bortor, &rl, &tn8 sum, Urgdv
encourage, exhort, cheer on^
bosp-es, -Itis, M., guest, friend.
bospltlnni, I, N., guest-friend-
ship, hospitality. , •
bostla,,ae, F., animal tor sacri-
fice, victim.
b^tis, l#, M., enemy, public
foe.
buo, adv., to'this, to this point,
to this place, hither, here.
bumanlt&H, -t&tis, F., refine-
ment^, culture.
bum&nus, a, nm, of a man,
human ; civilized, refined.
bnml, adv. (really locative of
bnmns), on the ground.
<bnmlliR, o, low, lowly, of little
importance, obscure
bnmlllt&B, -t&tls, F., loVness
loVn
Ibani, tb6,/>:otnc6.^
-tlyr, cwfer., the re , iff tha t pla cgr^
Idem, eadem. Idem, the Bftin6 1
also, likewise. - «
Idonena, a, nm, suitable, fit>
ieram, from «o.
Igitnr, coiij. accordingly, there-
fore ; ta resume, then. •
Xicnis, is, ^., fire.
Igrnoro, are, avi, &tnm, not
know, be unacquainted with,
« be ighoraftt.
Ilirnosco, ere, I^ovl, Ignotnm,
forgive, pardon, vriih dapive.
Xirnotns,i^aj^ nmi, unknown.
lierdnj ai^ r,t Ilerda, a citjr^ in
■ Spain,^;;!^--' . - . ■
lllatusf IK nm, /rdm Inforo.
llle, illrt, Jllud, that, he, she,
it,' the other, the former.
1115, adv.y to that point, thither,
there.
illfie, adv. f to that place, thither.
il-ludd, ere, -lusl, -lusniti, de-
; ceive, mock at, make sport of.
lljlastrls, <^, /distinguished.
"iiluHtxo, &re, avX, fttum^ make
famous ; pass, becbme «famous.
illyricnm, I, N., lUyricum, a
district along the eUatem coast
of the Adriatic.
lAabeolllis, e, weak, feeble.
liriHmnis, e, huge, enormous.
im-mltto, ere, -misl, >missnm,
let loose; »& Immlttere, to
leap in. '
immolo, are, avl, &tnm, offer,
sacrifice, immolate!
-Immort&lis, e, immortal.N.
immdtns, a, nm, undisturi
untouched.
impedlmentnm, I, N., hin-
drance, obstacle ; in plur.t
baggage, baggage-train.
* impedlo. Ire, IvI, Itinn, hinder,
hamper, obstruct, check, pre-
' vent, interfere with ; perf.
part. pass, as adj.^ impedltns,
a; nnr, hamper e d , t>e cupi e d -r
idolroo, adv., for this reason.
difficult, impassable.
- *.
■^
a
'J
PA|IT VI.— VOCABULARY.
493
push ; instigate^ incite. «^
Im-pendo, er^, -peiiai, -pen-
sum, expend, devqte, apply.
Imp^naiia, a,«um, ^ eu>ensive,
high. : _
tinperator, -orlg, M., comman-
der, leader, general.
Imperatnni, I, n., order, com-
mand, bidding.
imperltns,. a, um, inexperi-
enced, unacquainted, with gen.
Imperiam, I, ST., command,
order; power, supreme powers
control, rule, supremacy, sway,
authority; generally with the
notion of military power.
tmperd, are, &vl, atam, de-
mand, require, order to fur-
nish, levy,, requisition ; order,
' command.
Impetro, are, avl, atum, ob-
tain, t)btain one's requgst, ac-
complish, prevail on.
impetus, us, M., attack, chaige,
/ rush, onset; fury, impetuosity.
Impl-eo, ere, -evi, -etum, fill
up, complete.
Imploro, are, ivi, atum, beg,
beseech , entreat.
ttii-pdno, ere, -posul, -posl-
Jium, place on.
importd, are, avi, atum, bring
in, introduce, import.
lmp)>aesentlarnni, a rare cdlo^i^
qiirial adv. ( = ln pruesentla
rerum), for the present, for
the time being, under the
(present) circumstances.
tmprovlsus, a, um, unfore-
seeh ; imprpvlso or dg impro-
vlso, unexpectedly, unaware.
Imprudens, -entls. Unsuspect-
ing, oflf one's guard.
Imprndenter, adv.^ unwisely,
imprudently
Jessness, indiscretion '; igno-
rance» inadVe|tonce.
lmpud§ns, -entls, shan^eless.
impi|lsu8, from impello.
- In, prep., 1. wUh ace. into, to ;
at, towards, against, iipon, on ;
Hntil ; for, with a view to, ac-
cording to ; in (where there tr
the notion of rest, as ivdl as of
'' motion). 2. ivith abl, in, &t,
within, oji ; among, in the
, country of ; over ; considering,
. m view oi ; in the case of, in
regard to.
4nanls, e, empty.
inoendlum, 1, n., fire, burning.
in-cendo, ere, -oendl, -oen-
, sumi set on fire, ,set fire to,
btirji ; inflame, arouse.
inoertn», a, um, uncertain, un- '
, trustworthy, groundless ; con-
fused, ih disorder.
In-eidd, ^i^, rroldl, -o&snm,
fall ; fall in with, come upon.
In-cldo, ^re, '-oldl, -olsnm, cut
into,' cut through,
Inoiio, aire, avI. attim, urgd^^ '
on, impel., excite,- , spur on ;>
irritate;' in pass., go at full
speed: 1"^^ V • '
Incogrnltus,' a, um; unknown ;
strange. • . ', '
^noola^-ae, m and P.; inhabitant,
^col-o, ere,»^-ui, inhabit; dwell,
live. ■ ■ \ r'v
Incolumls, e, safe,- unharmed ;*' .
in safety, without lpssr-l4 "' . -■
Incommode, adv., dis^trously, " '
unfortunately, badly. - ^ -l
Incommodnm, I, s^, n^i^oj^.' ?
tune, loss. ' , .>'
Inoredtbills, e, incredible. ? ' '-
Inorep.d, are, -ul, -Itum, up-
braid, taunt.
inoursid, -onls, 1"., raid, inroad.
tnde , ffld».» froia that plac » ,
Imprudentia, ae, P., thought- thence ; then, next
*.
494
\v
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
' .
Indioiani, I, N., inai:k, sign,
indication, proof. '
in-dloo, ere, -dixl, -41otiini,
declare, proclaim, declare pub-
licly. , •
Indloas, a, nm, 6f or. with In-
dia. -■]
Indigedj §re, al,'^e dependent
upon, with gen. ,
indlffnor, &rl, ata« •nmT^be
indignant, be angry.
in-duc5, ere, -duxf, •^notam,
Ibad into, di»w into^ lure.
Indnl-'iroo, ere, -•!, -tain, favor,
vnth dat. ' /
Ind-ap, ere, -«I, -fitnin, put on.
Indnstrlu, ae, F., diligence, in-
. dustry, activity.
Industrie, adv.^ strenuously,
vigorousfy.
Indutiae, &rani,^ F. plu/r.^ truce.
IndatiomaruB, J,M., Indutioroa-
ru8, a chief of the Treveri.
In-e5, Ire, -II (-Ivl), -itnm, en-
ter upon, adopt, form, devise ;
„ . begin (trans, or intrana.).
Inermis, e, unarmed.
lu-et-s, -ertla, dull, lifeless;
lazy, unmanly.
Infeotna, a, um, not done, un-
accomplished ; Infeota p&oe,
without having effected peace;
Infeota r^, without accom-
. plishing his purpose.
Inferior, las, comparative of
Inferus, a, am, lower.,
Infero, Inferre, Intall, 1I1&-
fikin, bring; bring upon;
cause ; bell am Inferre, vnth
dat, make or wage war on.
In-floio, ere, -ffeol, -feotam,
^ stain.
Inflnltas, a, am, endles^ couat-
less, boundless, vast.
Inflrmitas, -tatls, F., fickleness,
inconstancy.
laflrma», a, am, weak, power i
Infltior,.&rI, &tas sam, deny;
In- Had, ere, -llazi, -flaxam,
. flow (into), empty (into).
Iiifr&, adv., below, farther down.
Ih-frlngo, er«i, -fregl, -fr&o^
tain, break, crush, weaken.
Ingink, -entis, large, huge, great,
vast, enormous.
infgf&tllls, adif., against one's
will.
ingr&taa, a, am, ungrateful.
in-gredior, I,' -gresms «am,
enter ; enter upon, begin. ^ -
In-haered,- £re, -haesl, -hae-
•am, ding to, hang upon.
Inlmloas, a, am, unfriendly,
hostile ; ob avhst., Inlmloas,
I, M., enemy^ personal enemy ;
aij^rl.f Inlmlolssfmas, I, M.,
bitterest enemy.
inltiam, I, N., beginning ; edge,
frontier, borders ; a&2., initio,
at first.
initas, a, am, from lileo.
in-Jlfilp, ere, -J^ol, -Jeotam^
cast, put into ; inspire, strike
into.
injuria, ae, F., wrong, injury, in-
justice, wrong-doing, violence.
injusti, cu^v.," unjustly.
Innooentia, ae, F., innocence,
integrity.
Inopla, ae, F., want, scarcity,
lack, dearth.
Inopln&na, •antis, not expect-
ing, contrary to ex|)ectation.
Unawares.
Inopln&taa, a, am, unexpected.
Ihquam, inqalt, defective, say.
Inaoiftns, •entis, not knowing,
(being) Unaware.
^aolua, ^ a, nin, ignorant,^ un-
awares!
In-aequor, I, -aeoutua aum, fol-
low pp, pursue.
In-aided, *re, -aftdl, -aea^am,
iak» poaawaion of» (joiger-ef-
'
ij
in
un-
. PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
. Insldlor &i.r' &^ v • *"**'<>«">. sometimes.
in slsto, ere, -gtltl, stand on, Inter-flold «re -fe«i r«A*«
mggecto, are, avi, atam, look Interim, orfi,,, meanwhile.
* Inrtftblli;, e, unsteady change ^"^n^t'' w *' • '^^^^«**'^« «<0'm
Able ""»"«»«7, cnange- mner, intenor, more secret ;
'" '"de'i^Tke *l^:n"n'''' -"*""?'T *»*«''««•. u«. M., death.
r Institutam,. I, n., custom, prac-
tice. , ■
„ Inst^rfare, -stltl, -ftatom,
press forward.
In-8trad, ere, -struxl, -struo-
tum, draw up, arrange ; build, ,
equip.
Insue-facio, ere, -feci, -fao-
tum, train, accustom.
InNuetas, a, um, unaccustomed^
Insula, ae, F., island. "^
intesr^r, grra, «rrum^i uiiim-
^ paired ; fresh, unweaned.
Intel.legro, ere, -lexl, -leotum,
understand, be aware, per-
ceive, see, know, learn, feel,
Intemperavitla, ae, F., excess,
arrogance, haughtiness. noncerns.
amonrdur^f.'^nte''''"''"' I«t^rvM,um, ,,^ k.. interval,
«« ^k^L T^ V*"*®' **' *^"« distance.
^"n^tSh:^:^'^"-^^^*^ ^^l^P^f' -^^ -. within,
*"::«:i^e,^t,irSis;r i^^^^^^^^^^r^^-
tween. ^ > or ^^ be- Intro-ttuco ere, -duxl, -^uo-
tf ififi , lead in.
discontinue ; delay, postpone;
let pass, leave between; in
tpass. be left, intervene, elai
'cease.
Inter.pdnd, ere, -poi
tarn, interpose ; j^lj
forward, allege ; in[
vene, arise (to prev
Inter-pres, -pretis,
preter. _
InterrojEird, are, ftvl,
^ask, question.
mter-rnmpo, ere, -rupl, -rup-
tum, breakdown, destroy.
Inter-sum, -esa^ -ful, be be-
tween; be engaged in, take
part in ; as impersmial verb,
interest, it is of importance, it
J5pncerns.
^"iur 'cTt V*V '*"*?' •*''*■ *'»*'»*i««> «».'M., entrance, ap-
sum, cut ott, intercept. proach. ^ » "F
V
s
-t'
-A:
49Q
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
In-tneor, 6rl, tnltus .nnvlook lter«m, oM., again, a second
upon, regard, consider.
Intull, /rom Infer© .
intu», adu., within, in the
house.
Inusltatns, a, nrti, Unusual,
strange, novel, unfamiliar.
Inutllll e, useless, unservice- Jaoeo, ere, «I, Itum, lie.
time. A
Itlna, od2-> PO'^»» Itt^«, Portus
Itius, a harbor on the coast of
Oaid, near the modem Calaia.
able, harmful.
inva-dd, eTe, -»l, -sum, enter ;
InVado In, invade, attaick.
In-venlo, Ire, -Venl, -veBtuni,
come upon, find.
Invloem, adv., in turn.
invlotns, a, am, unconquered.
Invidla, ae,r., envy, jealousy,
hatred.
Invltd, . are, &vl, atum, in-
vite. « .1,.
InvltnH, a, nm, unwilling,
against one's will.
16, inter j., ah ! oh !
Ipse, a, nm, himself, he him
Jaoid, ere, Jeel, Jaotnm, throw,
«ast, hurl.
Jam, adv., now, at length, by
this time ; already ; with nega-
tives, any more, longer. "^"
J&nlonlnni, I, N., the Janicu-
lum, a fortress across tlie Tiber .
from Rome.
J anna, ae, F., door, entranCe^/V,
Jovls, from Jnppiter
J abed, ere, J nasi, Jastam, or-
der, bid, command.
Judaeas, I, M., a Jew.
judlclam, 1, N., trial, lawsuit;
,ge, a, am, mm«eii, «« »..»- judgment, opinion. ^
self, itself, etc.; in person; Judioo, are, &vl, atain, judge,
^*^ ' ' ' ^ ^cide, consider, think ; de-
clare, proclaim, adjudge^; pass
judgment "^
very.
IratuH, a, am, angry, raging
Ire, framed. j — o--^ , -
tr-rldeo. ere, -rl«I,-rlBam, make Jasrum, 1, N., yoKe.
sirt ofjeer at.' Ju»-. «. *»., Julius, a Roman
U-ramp6, ere, -r,upl, -rap- prmnomen.
Itn.^ break into, storm, rush Jamentam I, n., beast of bur-
i^into 4en, ox, horse, etc.
U ea,ld, that, this; he, she, it, Jango, ere, Junxl, Junetam,
thev • the ; such ; abl. eo as join, unite. .
'^.,'Bomnch, the, on that Jano^^fci.^F.,^^^^^ « B<man
account. • -rjMrf^M. T.i^fpr
ita adv 80, thus, in this way,. Jnppiter, Jnmfn, M, ^"P»^.'^'
In such a ;ay, ai follows. Jove, the J^f god a,m^^g the
_ ,- w Tfjilv RomxvM.
«,«i"*;' and «..therefore, 46«.. «e, «■■ . J"". " ">»»«
"•^tT^^Vur^-"-'; iao'tH.,».. right. Uw^pri.
pttHBugu» ftdmiaainn -right of vtlege.
fafsere, march. N.fBatn.
If
PART VI. — VOCABULARY.
497
lecond
Portus
oast of
Oalavi.
throw,
th, by
h nega-
Fanicu-
e Tiher .
im, or-
kwsuit ;
judge,
k ; de-
;e ; pass
Roman
of bur-
inctnm,
I Roman
Jupiter,
noit,y the
a range
r Juror,
«r, tak©
ftw ; pri-
Ju88l and Juggns, a, um, from lamentam, 1, n., wailing," la-
Jubeo. mentation.
J ngg^, abl. rased as adv., by order. Lampsacng, I, f. (or um. If tS. ),
Jugtitia, ae, F,, justice, fair Lampsacus, a totm in Aina
dealing, upriglftness. Minor, m the Hellespont.
J u stag, a, uiii, just, rightful, lanlo, are, avi, atum, tear,
fair; Jugtus, I, M., the Just. lacerate.
Juvencuii, I, M., btfUock, young largrXtlo, -onlg, F., distribution,
***• bribery. ^
Juvenlg, tg, M., a youth, young L&rigga, ae, f., Larissa, a citJ
in»n- in Thesaaly.
>uv6, are, J«^vl, Jutun|^aid, Larg, Lartlg, M.,Lars, «m JfriM-
keep, assist. canpr(enom£n.
I^ liartluig, I, M., Lartius, a Ro-
man.
L>., an abbreviaUon for IjucIuh. Ii^ggitudd, -dlnlg, f., fatigue,
Labeo, -onlg, M., Quintus Fa-\ ^exhaustion. %
bius Labeo, consul i» 183 B. C. iat6, adv. , widely, extensively.
Laberlng, I, M., Quintus . La- latltudo, -dlnlg, f., width,
benus Durus, a military tri- breadth, extent.
hune with C'cpsar. latug, a, ttm, broad, wide, ex-
Lablenug, I, M. , Titus Labienus, tensive.
one of Cmaar's lienteriants. latns, -erlg, n., side, flank. .
labor, -6 rig, M,, toil, hardship, landandag, a, um, re<dlygerim-
labor, exertion, occupation ; rftve o/laudo, praiseworthy,
iandurance, hardihood ; diffi- lando, &ro, avi, atum, praise,
Gulty. commend.
labor, 1, l&pgng gum, slip; do laug, laudlg, F., praise, glory,
wrong, fall away. credit.
laboro, Are, avi, &tum, toil, lav6, &re, &vl, &tum, or l&vl,
strive ; be in difficulty, be hard lautum or idtum, wash; in
pressed, be in distijess. prtsa., Imthe.
, labrum, I, N., lip. leotloa^, «e, F.,. litter, sedan.A
l&o, laiotlg,, N., milk. leotulng, I, M., couch. *
lAoedaemqn, -onlg, F., Sparta, l«g&tld, onlg, F., embassy.
the chieficity of the Feloponne- leg&tug, I, m., ambassador, en-
^"*- voy ; lieutenant, a staff officer
Laoedaemonlug, X, M., a Spar- next in rank to the comman-
tan» der-in chief .
Iaoeg«.5, ere, -Ivl, -Itum, pro- Ieirl6, onlg, F., legion, a body
voke, harass, attack, assail. of soldiers of the nomimd
laorlma, ae, F., tear. strength of six ttwujmuit di-
laoug, f|g, M., lake. — ^ ; videdinto ten cohort»*
laetltln, a<», F., joyfulness, re- Ieirl6nftrlng, a, um, of a legion,
joicing. legionary.
Lae vlnug , I, M.. Publius Vale- l#>ttlmng , a, um, Iwgal
rius Laevmus, consid'in 280 lejrd, ere, iftfl, l«otam, choose ;
B,a
t t
.T-
'%■
498
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
&
Lemannas, 1, M., Lemannus, a llnquo, ere, llqui, llotum,
iafce noto coXUd Geneva.
lenip, e, gentle, light.
lenlter, adv., gently, with little
vigor.
led, -onig, M., lion.
tied n Idas, ae, M., Leonidas, a
leave.
linteum, I, N., linen cloth, cur-
tain.
Itqnor^ -oris, M., fluid, water,
lis, litis, F., law suit ; damages,
... , penalty.
Spartan king, dain at Ther- Lltavlccus, I, m., Litaviccus, a
mopyht, ^80 B.C. ' leading man of the ^dui. r
Lepontll, drum, M. plur., the llttera, ae, F., letter (of the
Lepontn, an Alpine tribe. alphabet), character; in plnr.,
lepas, -oris, M., hare. . letter, despatch; literature,
levls, e, light, shgnt, trifling,^ _ literary pursuits. ^
lex, legrls, F., law. ntu., -oris, K., shore. ^'
llbenter, adv., gladly, with locus, I, m. (pZwr., iboa, drum,
pleasure. ^ n.), place, spot, point, posi-
llber, bpl, M., book. ' tion, ground, situation, destin-
IXber, era, ernm, free, inde- ation, country; in /)/w., space,
pendent. ground, district, region, coun-
llberallter, adv., generously, try, place,
graciously, kindly, courteous-, longre, adv., far, long, by far.
y* . , longlnquus, a, um, distant, re-
llbere, adv., freely, unrestrain- mote ; long, protracted,
edly, frankly. longltudo, -dlnls, f., length. '
^ ll^rl, -ornm, M, phir., chil- lonsrns, a, um,,Jipng; tedious.
°''®"" -^avls longa,il!»war-8hip, war
llbero, are, &vl, &tnm, free, galley.
set free, release.
llbeiglis, -tatls, f., l^t»erty,
freedgm, independence.
Hoot, 6re, lleult, it is permit-
Liongus, i,,M., Ti. Sempronius
Longus, consid in 218 B. G.
loqnor, I, looutus 8um,'sp^k,
. . , 4 say.
ted, it is allowable; freely lotus, a, nm, /rom lavo.
may, might. Lucanl, drum, M. plnr., the
Ilffneus, a, am, of wood, wood- Lucanians, a people duxslling in
•"^ji. amUhem Italy.
Itflrniifl^, I, N., l6g; in plnr., Luolus, I, M., Lucius, a iJoman
fare wood. prcenomen.
Llvar«», am, M. plur., the Li- luged, «ro, Iftxi, lactam, la-
gunans, a peitjtle hmna'on the ment, mourn, weep.
wed coast of northern Italy. Lagotorlx, -IrIs, m., Lugptorix,
llmen, -mlnls^ N., threshold, a BHton of rank.
door. , », ■■ luna, ae, F., moon.
Lln^on«i, urn, M. piwr.,^ the Lut^tla, ae, F., Lutetia, a town
Lingones, a tribe in the eaatern in OatU.
paH of central Gaul, t la^, lads, p., light, dawn;
lingua, ae, F., tongue, Ian- prlni& luoe or ort4 lAoe, at
m^ daybroftk, fttdttwu. 'i ^
£pi,-.,. i!.--..^r
m.
. ,■■■.,■
': '»
stum,
o.nv.
.•
I
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
499
M
liydl, drum, M; plnr., the Lyd-
ians, a people living in Asia
Minor.
lympha, ae, F., water.
Lyslmaohus, I, m., Lysimachus,
father of Ariatides.
' ■ M
M., an abbreviation for Marcus.
maeror, -oris, M., grief, sorrow.
inagls, comparative adv. (see
magrnopere), more, rather.
maglster, trl, M., master,. com-
mander ; magister eqnltnm,
master of the horse, chief mb-
ordinate of the Dictator.
magistratas, ug, M., magistrate;
office, magistracy; in plur.,
authorities, chief officials.
Magnesia, ae, F., Magnesia,
a city of aonth-westem Asia
Minor.
magnltudd, -dlnls, F., great-
ness, great size ; size, extent ;
» stature.
magnopere, adv. (magis, max-
*">«)» greatly, exceedingly,,
very much, earnestly, urgent-
mj^gnns, a, nm (m&Jo^, m&zl-
nius, great, large, important ;
eminent ; loud, extensive ;
m&gnl a» adv. , highly, greatly.
M&g5, -onls, M., Mago, brother
of Hannibal.
m&Jor, us, comparative of mhg-
nas ; niAJor tiatq;, elder ; in
M. plur. CM «ti&«^., «aiders, an-
cestors.
nale, adv., ill, badly, wrongly,
unsuccessfully, cruelly ; vobls
male sit, cursos upon you.
maleflolnm, I, w., mischief,
outrage.
m&lo, mAlIe, mftlal, prefer,
had rather, be more willing.
mains, a, urn, evil, accursed.
mandatum, I, n., order, in-
struction, message.
mando, are, avi, atnm, in-
struct, order; give up, betake.
Mandubracius, I, m., Mandu-
bracius, a Briton of rank.
mane, adv., in the morning.
maneo, ere, mansi, mansam,
stay, remain; abide.
Manllus, 1, m., 1. Titus Man-
lius Torquatus, a famms Bo-
man. 2. Marcus Manlius, con-
sidin392B.C. 3. Cn. Manlius
V olso, consrd in 189 B.C. '
manns, u,s, f., hand; band,
force; manu, by force, or,
with munXtns, by art ; ma-
num oonserere, join battle, y
Marathonias, a, nm, of ofj
at Marathon. '
Maroellns, 1, M., Marcus Clau-
dius Marcellus, |1. a famous
Boman general; 2. consid in
183 B.C.
Marcus, I, M., Marcus, a Bo-
WMn prcenomen.,
Mardonlus, 1, m., Mardonius, a ,
Btraian general. ^
mare, is, N., sea. ^»
margarltum, 1, N. (of a, ae,
F.), pearl.
margo, -inis, M., edge, margin,
side. •
marltlmns, a, urn, on or of the
sea, at sea, oi^ the coast, mari-
time, naval.
m&ter, -trls, F., mother. ,
m&terla, ae, F., timber, wood,
m&tr6n<s, e, of a matron, wo-
manly. ' J
m&'tar«, adv. (mAtfirtni, m4-
tikrrlmg), early, soon.
mfttarns, a, uni, early, ripe. '
in&xlm«, superlative adv. (see
irtftgnop ie re)» vary grea ^
nuAlaBi, I, H., evil, ill, harmful
deed ; calamity.
yeiy much, mwt, especially ;
in the highest degree.
600
r
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
\ '.
m
Maximns, 1, M., Quihtus Fabius
Maximus (see Fabius).
maxiinns, a, um, superlative of
magrnns. \
Medl, drum, M. plur., the
Medes, a people of \cestern
Asia.
iiiedlons, I, M., physician.'
Mediomatrices, um, M. pliir.,
the Mediomatrices, a tribe in
the north-east of Ganl.
niedlterraneus, a, um, inland.
medlns, a, um, middle, cen-
tral ; generhlly . rendered by
hiiddle or midst of. : | -
Meldl, - -drum, M. phir., Wi'e
Meldi, a trihe in northern
Gaid.
melior, us, comparative ■ of bo-
- hus. ,' .1 . ''
mellltus, a, um, honoy.-sweet.
membrnin, I, N., limb.
memor, -oris, mindiiil, remem-
beting, With gen.
memor ia,, jae, F., memory, re-
collection, tradition, account ;
; time ; inemoriae prdflere, re-
■ cord, recount, descaribo. '
MenaplI,* drum, ' M. 'phi/rl^ the
Menapii, a tribe in the extrepie
north-eoM of Oaid. ' \
mSns, mentis, F., mindr intelr
lect, feeling, way ol M^i^ikl
' ing. %^ \ (\.. t^'
minsls, is, M., month. '■ ;\ V|'
m.6n«ura, ae, F., measurement.
mentio, -onis, F., mention.
ineroator,. -drla, M., trader,
merchant.
tnereo, £re, nl, Itum, deserve,
earn.
merldi&nna, a, um, of mid-day ;
..merldi&num tempna, noon^.^^
meridian, 61, M., mid-day, noon;
the south.
meritnm, I, N., s^vice ; desert,
TnBTtt;
metaiiiukij t, N., mine.
metd, ere, messnl, measum,
reap, cut grain.
meti^s, us, M., fear. \
mens, a, nm, my, mine.
mll'es, -itis, M., soldier, man.
militaris, e, military, of war.
mllle, -indeclinable adj., a thou-
sand -j subst. in, plnr., mlilia,
i um,^ k. , thousand,, thousands.
Miltiades, is, M., Miltiades, a
famoiis Athenian general.
minimc,. adv., superlative of pa-
rum, by no means, very little, -
least.
minor, us, comparative of par-
vus, less, smaller ; younger ;
'^ "less great, less eminent.
Minucius, 1, M., 1. M. Miniicius
Rufus, muster of the horse in
217 ^.0. 2. Quintus Minu- \
cius, coristdin 193 B.G.
mih-u6, ere, tuI, -utnm, lessen,
'^lliminish, decrease. n^
minus, adv., comparative of pa-
rttm, less, not . . . enough ;
^^-wmetimes nearly = non, pcarce-
ly, not.
miror, arl, atvn sum, wonder,
wonder at, be surprised at.
mirus, a, vim, wonderful.
miselius, a, um, diniiniitive of
miaor, poor, hapless.
miser, era, ernm, wretched,
unhappy, pitiable.
miserlcordla, ae, F., compas-
sion, pity.
mitesoo, ore, grow mild, relax.
mltto, ere, mlal, mlsskim, send,
despatch.
mobllia, o, fickle, changea'blo,
capricious, uncertain.
mobillt&s, -tatla, F., activity,
mobility. i^-_, ,^^=, — —
moderor, hrt, fttni sum, man-
age, check, control. ■ . "
modest^, adv., modestly.
\:
-
niodicna, m, am, moderate ;
small.
TP-
t:'
■»* <ij^
».'
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
601
X:--.
»
,
«
'
-"
.♦, .
•
' ■ -v-
"»
•"•
•• .,
^
N . ,
/> ■
^ ,■' ■■■*
-^
. \
\
. «
.•
modo, adv. , only, but, merely ;
mo^o . . . modo, now . . .
now.
modns, i, m., mi usure, fashion,
style, way. manner, kind, sort ;
ahl., modo, in the manner or
character (of), like, as.
moenla. l«m, ^. plur., walls.
nidllor, ipi, itag gum, meditate,
plan.
mollis, e, easy ; gently sloping;
favorable. ' ,
MolossI, um, M. plnr., the Mo-
• lossians, a people in the eastern
part of Epims.
momentum, I, n., movement,
impulse.
Mona, ae, F., Mona, an Hsiand
in the Irish Sea.
moneo, ere, ul, itum, warn,
advise, remin'd, admonish. . ♦
mong, montlg, M., mountain,
hill, clifF ; mountaifi range.
monnmentum, I, n., monu-
ment -y memorial.
mora, ae, F., delay.
morbug, 1, M., illness, disease,.
sickness.
morlbnndng, a, nm, dying, at
the point of death.
Moplnl, drum, M. plur., the
Morini, a tribe in the north of
Oaid.
morlor, morl, mortnng gum,
: die ; per/, part, as adj., mor-
tnufi, a, um, dead.
moror, arl, atug. gum, delay,
wait, stay, linger.
morg, mortig,F., death,
moriallg, e, mortal ; m. assnbst.y
man.
mortuug, a, um, from morlor.
m6g, morlg, M., manner, cus-
tohi, habit, usage ; in plur. .
oflert, character ; will, humor ;
mort-m yerere. with dnt.. du
a person's will, humor, obey. jS«
Mosa, ae, M., the Meuse, a river
in north-eastern Ganl.
motus, ug, M., movement, mo-
tion, change ; uprising, dis-
turbance, revolt.
moved, ere, movl, motiim,
move, set in motion; influ-
ence; se movere, stir; ivith
cagtra, move, break up.
mox, adv.y soon, presently ; soon
afterwards, then, next.
muller, -erls, F., woman.
multitude, -dl-hlg, f., great
number, great numbers, large
body, multitude, host, num-
ber ; the crowd, the multi-
, tude, the common people:
multd, are, avi, atum, punish,
fine.
multo, adv., by far, by much,
much, far, long,. * *./^
multam, adv. (plug, pliirl-
mnm), much, often, frequent-
ly, yery.
multiig, a, um (plug, pluri-
mng), much ; n. jdnr. as
snbst.j, multa, drum, many
things.
munlo, Irp, IvI, Ititm, fortify,
protect, defend, 8ec^re ; build,
construct»
munltlo, -inlg, F., work of for-
tification, fortifying, construc-
tion ; fortification, line of de-
fence ; fortified works, de-
fences. .
munltus,' a, um, perf. part,
pass, o/ munlo, as adj., forti-
fied.
mnnng, -erlg, n., present, gift.
murug, I, M., wall.
mug, m&rlg, m., mouse.
mutd, are, ftvl, &tani, change,
exchange. .
Myug, untig (are. Myunta), F.,
Myu H , a city of Cnrin^ in J.»ia ==
^
Me] — ^
tnor.
w' " :S^
"rrr
-^
■*,.
fcSs
■ :!v^ .
602
PmMARY LATIN BOOK.
- not to ; 'tvith verbs of feetriiigf
nactniB, a, pm,/nomiianoisoor. that, lesfc. \
Naeviasy I, M.,"Mar<ms Naevius, »«» adv., hot ; ta* . . «^qnidem,
a Boman.\
nam, conj., for.
namqae, conj., fo^ indeed,, for..
tianotsoor, |, liaotas ornaiiotiis
sam, find, get, meet with,, ob-
tain. • * i V
Niintia&tgft, lam, M. fiur., the
not even.
no. enclitic interrogative ^r'\
ticle, in direct questions un- ^
; trmidated ; • in indii-ect ques-
: . tyi^ns^ whether. ,
nebalo, -onis, M., Worthless
fellow, wretch. _^ ■
"Nahtuates, a tr^ , in the ned, see neq^uo.
Alps.
narrd, are, &vl, atnm, tell,
relate. ,
n&8oor, I, natas gam, be -bom,
be sprung from, derive (H'igin ;
' o/ me^a^s, be found.
.Nasloa, ae, M., Scipio Nasica,
an eminent Boman.
neoessario, adv., of 'necessity,
unavoidably.
neoes8|ti^ia9,'a, nm, critical.
neoesse, indeclinable adj., neces-
sary, inevitable; neoesgia est,
often to be rendered by must,
inevitably.
neceasitas, -tatls, F., necessity.
n&tto, -ohIb, f., ra«e, tribe, need, are, avi, atam, kill, put
nation. to death.
natura, ae, F., nature, character; neg-lego, ere, -lexl, -leotnm,.
shape. " '■* . neglect, slight, disregard, be
n&tas, a, lim, from naaoor. indifferent to.
nitu», u«, M., birth. ■ ' nego, hjte, avI, atam, * deny,
naufragriam, I, N., shipwreck, ^^-say .^. . , not; refuse, say
literal and figurative. '*no. '
nau^a, ae, M., sailor, mariner, hegrotlam, I, n., business afiair.
seaman. .
ndntlens, a, am, liaval, naini-
cal, pertaining to the s^a ; lea
naatloae, seamanship. t
n&T&Us, e, naval. -.
n&yioala,, ^, F., boat.
n&vlgatio,, -onis, F., sailing,
voyage.
n&vlfflnm, VN., ship, vessel,-
- boat.
n&vlgo, are, AvI, &tam, sail.
n&vls, in, F., ship, boat, vessel;
nayU longa, warship, man-of-
war ; n&via oner&ria, trans-
port ; n&vis frument&ria,
corn-ship.
Naxoa, I, F., Naxus, an idand
in the jEgean
matter; trouble, difficulty. '
Nemea, ae, F., Nemea, a city ii^
the Peloponnesus.
nemo (nemfnls), M., gen. and
abt. not in use, nulllas and
nullo being used instead, no
one, nobody.
NeoolSs, 1« and I, M., Neoclei,
the father of Themistodes.
neqaaqaam, adv., by no mleans.
neqae, or sometimes neo before
consonants, adv. and conj.,
and not, nor ; ivken repeated,
neither . . . nor, not-. . . nor. .
Nervlf, dram, M. pltir.,- the
Nervii, a tribe in the, north-east
ofOaiU.
nea« conj. and not, nor.
\
ggTcor^rrtttst not, leat, in onfe r-iiginrci', tT»,~yrinn, iimthor i^ ^
that not; <^ten best rendered pinr., neither side.
PAKT VI.— VOCABULARY.
603
nihil, N. indecl.^ ^thing ; with
gen., no; ace. as adv., not at
all.
Blhllomlnns, adv., , none the
less.
iilhllain,I,N., nothing; nlhilo,
abl. as adv. vnth comparatives,
■ none, no ; nlhUd mlnns, ni-
hil© seolus, nevertheless,
none the less, all the same.
nisi, conj., if not, unless, except.
altldns, a, tun, neat, elegant.
^Bltor, I, nlaus and nlxns sum,
■ rest upon, mount; strive;
j^\ depend upon, rely upon.
iilx, nlvls, F.r mow.
NobUlbr, -drlg,iM.,Serviu8Ful-
vius Nobilior, constd in 255
B.C.
i^blUg, e, noble, of high birth ;
all-known, famotis, promip-
., - --ifc. ■ ■> - -•".'■•
XidbllHitH, thti». P., high birth ;
the nbbility, the nobles.
aooeo, 6i^al, Itum, do harm
§-: to, molest, injure, with dot.
nootu, ahl. ds^adv., by night.
nootarnns, a,>m, of the nigl^.
by night. V ^
Kola, ae, P., Nola, a city in
Campania, south dfBpme. ,
Kol&nns, a, nm, of l^la. /
nolo, nolle, nolnl, am unwill-
ing, do not wish, do notx^aznb,
^ refuse.
ndmen, -minis, N., name;\^*
putation, prestige ; people.
Ii6nilnfttlm, adv., by name. "-
ndn, adv., not, no. , 4t '
ndndnm, adv. , not yet.
ndnne, interrogative particle,
not ; whether not.
^^onnlhll, N., vnded., somewha*-,
something; ynth g^., some,
considerable.
ndnn&llg», a, iftm, gome.
ndsod, ere, novl» notam, be-
come acquainted with ; in
per/., know ; per/, part. pass.
notus, a, um, as adj., known,
well-known, familiar.
noster, tra, tram, our ; M.
p^ur. as subst., our men, out
forces. -
noto, are, avi, atam, observe.
notus, from ndsod. ^
nove^, nine;
novi^ /rpm ndsod. •■ -
novltas, -tatls, P. , novelty .'un-
familiar character.
novas, a, am, new, fresh ;
stratage; novlsslnms, latest,
last, rear; novae r£s, change
of government, revolution.
nox, nootls, P., night.
nubilas, a, am, «loudy, gloomy.
nudas, a, am, naked, without
clothing, unprotected, bare.
nullas, a, um, no, none ; in
gen. and ahl. sing, stipplies.
case» of n§md, no one.
nam, an interrogative particle,
expecting (in direct qiiestions)
a negative answer; in indirect
■\ questions, whe>ther.
nnmerd, &re, &vl, atum, count,
reckon; consider; possess.
iaumerns, I, m., number;
amount. ^ :
Numldae, arum, M. plnr., the
Numidians, a people of rtorth-
ern Africa.
nummus, 1, M., coin, money.
lumquam oy nanquam, <xdv.,
\neVer.
nunc, ach.,novr, at this time, at
th^time ; nuno . . . nuno,
now\, . now, at one time .. . .
at ano^er.
nCintld, Ax«. ftvl, &tam, an-
nounce, r(&port, bring word,
V
ikdnai,,a, am, ninth.
no
a&ntlni, 1, m\
^ news, report.
messenger ;
;e, tidmgs.
\
i^
504
PRIMAftY LATIN BOOK.
ndptlae, arum, F. plur.^ mar-
riage, wedding. .^
nu(trlxj -Ids, F., nurse. '
nutas^ us, M., nod, beck, sign.
O '
6, intefjectiony oh
<,
ob-tined, ere, -tinnl, -tentam, ^
hold, possess, occupy, keep, 4
maintain. ^ s|
obtreotatid, -onls, F., jealousy, *
detraction.
obtreoto, are, avi, atam, ft©
opposed, thwart
"V
ob, prep, ivith ace, on account obtuIX, from offerb. " « *
of, because of, for ;.ob earn obviam, adv., in the ¥^y, trf,
caasam, on tliat account, obviam Ire or venire {xJbiih
therefore
ob-duo6, ere, -d&xX, -ductaiti,
— bring over, draw over, over-
spread. . •
ob-ed, -Ire, -II (-Ivl), -Itum,
meet ; discharge, perform.,
obitns, us, Mt, death.
dat.\ go {or come) to meet,
. meet.
ocoaslo, -onis, F., opportunity.
oocasns, us, M., setting; sdlis
^ooasns, sunset, the west.
oc-cldd, ere, -cidi, -oasum,
set ; fall, be slain,
ob-Jiclo, ere, -Jeol, -J'ectnm, o«-oldd, ere, -cidl, -cisnm, slay,
place in the way of, throw in kill ; m. plur. as svhst.y ooolsl^
the way of, present, cause to
appear ; pass, lie opposite.
oblatns, a, urn, from ofTero.
ob-llvlsoor, I, -lltns sum, for-
get, with gen.
the slain.
ocoultd, are» ayl> atum,
' CQnc&a^.
oo-cnmbo, ere, -onbo^ -oubi-
tnm, fall, be slain.
ob-rno, ere, -rul, -ratnm, ooonpatlo, -onls^i"., engage-
overwhelm, bury.
Obsouro, are, a vl, atum, dark-
en, hide.
obseord, aire, avI, atttm,"<<b/^/-
seech, implore. ^^ "^ '
ob-sequor. I, -seoutus sum,'
obey, submit to, withdat. ^
ob-ses, -sidts, M., hostage.
ob-sldeo, ere, -sedl, -sessum,
blockade, besiege, beset; tofa-
cupy.
obsidlfi, •^nla, F., siege block-
-^ade, pressure, besetment.
obsdnttrm, I, N., that which is
ment, occupation.
oocnpo, are, &vl, atam, seize,
get possesion of f perf. part.
. jMMS. ^ocupatus, a, um, as^
adj., busy, occupied, engaged.
f>e-carrd, ere^-currj^ (-clWitrrl),
-our«am, meet, fall infwith,
come upon, find ; opp<^ie,
check, nnth dot.
Ooeanns, I, M., the ocean.
ocellus, I, M., diminutive jpf
ocnlus, (poor) eye.
Ooelum, I, N., Ocelum, a town
near th^ Alps.
ea^enttn^/i&reiMi, relish, viands, ootavus, a, am, eighth.
meat, fish. ' * ootlngenti, ae, a, eight hun-
obstin&tg, adv.y steadily, firmly. dred.
obstin&tas, % „»9», resolute, ootd, eight. .--. "' ■ ." ,■ -^-V;- -
steadfast.' ootodecim, eighteen*
ob-atringriP», «'©» -strinxl, ootd^inta, eighty. •
-■triotam, bind. ooulua, 1, M., eye.
DlftPiiipg roT"*' ^? » y '» fttum, u atnin,i^'Trr7 hatred, enm ity .
obey, submit to, with dat. odor, -orla, M., perfume ; spices.
-ft-i
^
.-• •<
o
o
M'
■XI
'p.
:eep, $ r.
'within
aeet,
!.!
*IP^»
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
605
"^rT:.^ *^^!^??^-' --' opportune,
' tmn, present; se offerre,
> come forwartf; confront, throw
/ vones self upon; in pass, t&n
, into one's hands.
offloium, I, N. , service (especially
pubhc or official), duty; alle-
. .gianpe, obligation.
ollm, d^v.f once, once upon a
time, : '^
• ' let tall, drop; pass over, omit,
^ f say nothiit^ of. t -«^ 7- *
«mnino, ot^k, altogether, .en-
tirely, malVpnly; withnega-
twesy at all, whatever.
. , omuls, e, all, *^very, whole ;
new^. _p^rtr. , omnia, everything.
onerarlas, a, urn, for burdens ;
. navlg onerarla, a transport.
, ^ onerd, are, avi, atum, load.
onus -eriB, N., burden, weight:
*. load, cargo, freight.
oper^, ae, F., effort, exertion;
services, assistance agency ;
^4, *"* ?P®'a» through your fault,
/ \ thinks to you ; operam dare,
\ take pains, take measures, see
I to it, bestow care on, give at-
i tention to.
operrlo. Ire, -ul, -turn, cover,
cover over.
opgg, from ops.
opinio, -ouls, F,, opinion, be-
lief ; reputation, prestige.
oportet, ere, oportuit, im'per-
sonal verb, it behoves, it is
necessary; render freely by
ought, should, must.
< oppidnm, I, N., town. v
®P:P*«o» «'«, -Plevi, -Stum,
fall ; per/, part. pass, oppietus,
"- ». nm, filled, swarming. '^
op-p6ud, ore, -posul, -post-
turn, set against, oppose, put
m the way LQ£
fortunate; fitting, suitable,
advantageous.
op-prlmo, ere, -pressi, -pres-
8um, overwhelm, crush, over-
power, surprise ; burden,
weigh down, belir down.
oppugno, are, avI, atum,
attack, assault, storm,
(ops), opis, F., power, aid ; gen-
eraUy in plur., opes, opum,
riches, resources; power,
forces ; support, assistance.
optlmus, a, um, superlative of
bonus, best. ]-
opulentus, a, um, rich, wealthy.
opus, -erls, N., work; fortifi-
cation, structure ; , opere, with
munltus, by art.
opus, N., fotind only in nom.
, and ace. dn^.y need; with
esse, a necessity, freely, neces-
sary. 7
ora, ae, F., edge, border; sAore,
coast. ,
oraoulum, I, n., oracle. ^
oratlo, -onls, f,, speechi ad-
dress, words, statement./
orator, -oris, M., ambassailor.
orbls, is, F., circle; w^th or
tvtthout terr&rum, the world.
Orcus, I, M., Orcus, the abode of
the dead.
ordior, Irl, drsus sum, befi
make a start.
ordo, -dinis, M., rajv< line;
arrangement, 01'
orlor, Irl, ortus sum, rise,
^rise, begin ; spring, be bom ;
'oriens sol, sunrise, the east,
orno, are, ft vl, atum, supply,
furnish, equip, prepare; 6r-
natus, a, um, perf. part. pass.
as adj., with all (its) trap-
pings.
^^^oK^tfSr^^ssr^^l^^
conveniently.
entreat.
ortus, a, um, from orior. '
A-ii
',>
506
Xnr'
m
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
6g, 6rl», N., moyth ; face.
oa, omIs, n.^ bone. .
oHten^do, .«po, -dl, -tnin, or
oatenHxtfn, show, display;
point put^ declare, state ; dis-
■ close, unmask.
ostium, 1, N., doof.
otiuni, I, N., leisure, rest.
ovum, I, N., egg.
p., an (f^brevirttion for PObllus.
p&bnl&tor, -oris, M., forager.
pabulor, &pl, atus sum, forage.
p&o5, are, a,vl, &tum, subdue;
> pr£ pg.ri:. ptixa pacatns, u,
' nm, aa adj., pi
Padns, I, M., the Po, a rii^er in
Cisalpine Gaid (northern Italy).
paenoykidv.f almost, nearly.
paenltet, • -ere, puenltult, m-
personal verb, it repents, i£
causes to r8f>ent ; render freely
by he sorry, r^ret.
pagus, X, M., district, canton.
palam, adv., .openly, publicly^
ivith force: of pred. adj. in
palam falQere, make clear,
disclose, make known.
pal-us, -udis, F., marsh, swamp,
fen. • ^
Pamphyllns, a, um, Pamphy-
lian, «f Pamphylia, a district
in Asia Minor.
p&nls, is, M., bread.
p&p, parts, equal, similar, like,
the same ; of battles, drawn,
indecisive ; a match.
pared, ere, pepenpl (parsl),
parsum (or puroRum), spare,
withdat.
parens, -entls, M. and P., pa-
rent.
p&red, fire, -ul, Itum, be obe-
dient, obey, submit ; listen
to, follow, comply with ; with
imrio, ©re, peperl, partnm,'
produce ; wi^, gain,- secure,
pard, are, avi, &tttm, prepare,
get ready, have in view ; pro-
cure, get, acquire ; perf. part.
pass, paratns, a, um, cm adj.,
ready, prepared.
Parrhasin», I, m., Parrhasius,
a famous Greek painter*,
pars, partis, F., part, portion,
number, sharojwsome ; quarter,
direction, side. ^
partim, odn., partly ; when re-
peated, often rendered by ^nome
» . . others.*
partus, from pa rld..
1)Uf Umper, " adv., for a short
time, for a while.
parvulus, a,° um, little, small,
tiny.
parvus, a, um, (minor, mlnisd
mus), small,- trifling. >
passer, -erls, M., sparrow.
passlhn, adv. An all directions.
passusXa, ullk,./rom patior.
' passus, us, M., pace (about five
feet); one thousand pa4;e8 mads
one Roman mile.
^ate-faold, er«f, -fiol, -factum,
open, throw open, keep open,
open up.
pate-flo, -fieri, -faotus sum,
IXMS. o/patefacl6.
pated, 6r&, ul, extend. ^
pater, -tris, h., father ; patrSs
oonsorlpti, senators,
pat^nus, a, um, of a father,
father's^ paternal.
patlentia,'ae, F., patience, en-
durance.
patior, I, passus sum, suffer,
allow, permit, endure, with-
^stand.
patrta, ae,'P., native country,
native land, (one's) country.
patrius, a, um, - ancestral, of
mi e 'a fath er s ; o f ona ' a no BP
/.
I
I
1
I
F
P
P
P
P<
P<
pc
m
pro-
■um.
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
"607
^ ' rJ"^- 1; ^' ^*^ P»*'". ' Pepnn, /ivm polio.
the^gods of the atete (i.e.. per. pr4,.,nYA <Jc., through;"
panel, ae, a (sing, vertj rare).
few, but few. ^'
P^uoltas, -tatis, F., small num-
oer, fewness.
panlatlm, adv., gradually, by
degrees.
paoligper, adv., for a short
time, for a while
during ; by means of, by ; by
way of, over, along ; by reason
of.
peivago, ere, -egl, -aotam, fin-
ish, complete. "
per-olpio, ere, -cepl, -oeptUm,
hear.
percontatid, -onlg, p., inquiry.
peroontor, arl, atna sum, ask.
= A-^i'^i ^««'^^.-^^^ - - j-:^-:
pauinm, adv., a little ; a short
distance.
' I*aalii8, I., M., see Aemlllas.
panpertas, -tatls, f., poverty.
Pausanias, ne, M., PaUsanias, a
Spartan general.
pavor, -oris, m., fear, panic,
alarm.
pax, pacts, F."i peace.
pecunia, ae, F., money, sym' of
money.
peons, -oris, N., cattle, herd ;
flesh, meat.
pod-OS, -Itis, M., foot-soldier, in-
fantry-man ; inplnr., infantry.
pedestor, tris, trt^, on or by
land;,;^f infantry; ooplae
' ifedostrt^, land forces; in-
fantry, jg^
podltatns, Ss^.; infantry.
peilis. Is, F., skin, hide. .
polio, ©re, pepnil, plnlsnm, de-
feat, rout, dr^^^ back ; banish,
drive out.
Peloponnesns, I, F., the Pelo-
ponnesus, that part of Greece
lying south of the isthmus and
g^df of Corinth.
penates, Inm, M. plw., house-
hold gods, Penates.
pendo, ore, pependl, pensnm,
weigh, pay.
P«p^»r prep, with ace., with^ in
the iiatids of.
pe||M)rI, frcm parld.
rl), -onrsnm, run along.
por-duco, ore, -duxl, -dnotnm,
bring over, bring ; carry, car-
ry along ; lead safely.
per-oo, -Ire, -11 (-ivl), -itnm,
perish, bo killed.
pereqnlto, are, avi, atnni,
ride about. % , •
peroxiffnns, a, nm,,very small.
perfaollls, o, very easy.
por-ford, -forre, -tnll, -l&tn»n,
carry, report, bring ; bear to
the end, endure, submit to.'
por-floid, ere, -feci, -fectnm,'
finish, carry out.
perfldla, ae, F., faithlessness,
treachery.
P©r-fodl6, ere, -fddl, fossnm,
pierce.
perfngra, ae, M., deserter.
por-fagio, ere, -fugl, flee for
refuge, flee.
perfngrlam, I, n., refuge, place
of refuge.
per-fnngfor, I, -functus snm,
perform, endure, undergo, fin-»
ish.
Pergram6nl, -drum, M. plur.,'
the Pergamenians, inhabitants
ofPergamum in Asia Minor.
Pergramenus, a, nm, of or be-
longing to Pergamum, Perga-
nienian.
p^irionlQS^f , h , nm , dftngormn i . =
r
porlonlnni, 1, N., danger, peril,
risk ; attempt, experiment.
^08
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
porltns, a, nm, skilled, expert, pertnll, from perfero.
perlatas, a, nin, from, perferd. perturbatlo, -dnls, . F. ,
per-maneo, ere, -hi4nsl, -m&n-
«nm, cuntinue, remain, abide,
persist.
per-iflit*5, ere, -mlal, -mla-
snm, give up, entrust ; allow,
. permit. . ■::;:•■■■ ■^''■''^'■•
per-nioveo, §ro, -ni5vt, -mS-
tani, move, influence ; alarm,
excite, dismay.
per-muloeo, ere, -mnlal, -mnl-
sum wnd -lualotnni, soothe,
calm.
permultl, ae, a, very many,
pernmtatid, -onli, F., ex-
change.
perpanol, ae, a, very few.
perpetuus, a, nm, continuous,
lasting; in perpetanin, for
ever.
per-ramp6, ere, -riipl, -mp-
tum,, break through, force
one's way through.
Persae, arum, M. pZwr., tlwPhlllppus, 1,*M., Philip, fctngr o/
alarm,
panic, confusioi\k
pertnrbo, &re, avi, atntn,
thrown into confusion, dis-
turb, disconcert, alarm.
perva-dd, ere, -si, -auiii, spread
through, penetrate.
pervagror, arl, atas stiin, roam
about, range, scour the coun-
try. :. ■ii,;.:-.^:^»
per-venlo. Ire, -vfeni, -Ten-
turn, come j^iceach, arrive at.
p6a, pedis, M., rpot ; pedibits,
on foot ; pedem referre, fall
back, retire, retreat.
pet-d, ere, -IvI (-il), -Xtam, ask>
request ; seek, ask for, beg,
sue for ; make for, seek to
reach ; aim at, attack.
phal-anx, -angis, F., phalanx,
solid column.
Plialgrlcns, a, um, Phalerian,
of Phalerum. — —-' —
seontns sum,
follow up ; attack ;
Persians
per-sequor, ' I,
pursue,
punish. '
Perses, ae {aihl. Pers£,), M., a
P^ian ; ow «dj. , Persian,
perseverd, &re, ftvX, &tnm,
persist, persevere. ^
Persioas, a, um, Persian.
Persls, -tdts, P., Persia.
perfsplcld, ere, -spexl, -speo-
titim, sjbe, observe, e:^amine,
reconnoitre ; ascertain, find
Macedoniay 220-179 B.C.
plotor, -oris, M., painter.
pletura, ae, F., picture.
pUa,. ae, F., ball, game of ball,
tennis.
pUum, i, K., javelin, spear.
pingo, ere,' pinxX, plotum,
paint.
plpilo, are, peep, chirp.
Piraeus, X, M., Piraeus, the cW^
port of Athens.
PIrustae, arum, M. plur., the
Pirustae, a tribe in Illyricum.
out, become acquainted with. ' > plsols. Is, m., fish.
per-suadeo, Sre, -su&sl, -sn&-
sum, persuade, convince ; pre-
vail upon, induce ; ivithdat.
perterre6, gre, ul, itum, ter-
rify, frighten, alarm ; discon-
cert, dismaji ; in pa»»., be
panic-stricken.
PIso, -onls, M., Piso, an Aqiii-
tanian of rmik.
placed, £re, ul, Itnm, please.
pl&n'us, a, um, level.
Plataeae, &rum, F. plur.^
«»Plat8Ba, a town in Bcmtia.
plibN, pl^bls, F., plebs, the
pBr-ilue o, 6 r e , ■t lnnl, e xtend, -eonwwm p e opl e,
reach, stretch ; tend, serve. ' plenns, a, nm, full.
v~..
r
F
\
P
p
p
p<
p<
pc
' p<
> , pc
PC
-pe
^
y\
PART VI.— VOdABULARY.
509
\
t>16rlqae, pleraeqne, plera-
que, the most, most persons.
pleramqne, adv., generally,
for the mo^t part. '
plumbum, I, n., lead; pinm-
bum aljbnm, tin.
plurlmnm, adv., s^iperlative of
multnm, most, very much.
plurlmngf, », um, superlative of
mnltns, most, very much ; in
plur., very man;y^ quam piu-
rimi, as many as possible.
plus, piurls, comparative of
multus, more ; inplur., more,
several, many.
poena, ae, F., penalfy, punish-
ment.
poenitet, see paenltet. •
Poenn8,.a, um, Carthaginian.
Poenns, 1, M., a Carthaginian,
, an inhabitant of Carthage, es-
; pecially the Carthaginian, i.e.,
Hannibal.
loeta, ae, M., poet.
<^iceor, erl, ltu« sum, prom-
ise, make a promise.
PoIybiuB, I, M., Polybius, a
Ghreek historian.
pomifer, era, erum, fruit-bear-
ing, fruitful.
Pompeins, I, M., Pompey, Qneiua
Pompeius, the triumvir, consul
in 55 B.C.
pondus, -erls, N,, weight.
pono, ere, posnl, positum,
place, station, post ; depend,
rest ; with oastra, pitch ; tuith
arma, lay down ; in pass.j be
situated, lie. ,^
pons, pontls, M., bridge.
Pontug, I, M., Pontus, a country
^^ in Asia Minor, on the southern
W shore of the Euxine Sea.
poposel, from posed.
Ipopulor, art, atus sum, devas
tate, ravage.
iPvpuAaa, I, M., peo|to, nation.
Porsena, ae, M., Lars Porsena,
an Etruscan king^ , & '
porta, ae, F., gate. ;: ^J :
porto, are, avi, a turn, carry,
bear.
pbrtns, us, M., harbor, port.
poseo, ere, poposci, demand,
ask, request, call for;
pos-sldo, ere, -sedl, -sessum,
. seize, occupy, take possession
.of.
possum, posse, potui, be able,
««aap*B possible ; be ppwerfijd,
be strong, have weigfit or in-
fluence. \
post, 1. adv., afterwards, after.
2. prep, with ace, after, be-^^
hind. > .
postea, adv., afterwards, later.
potfteaqoam, conj., after, when.
posterns, a, um, next, follow-
ing ; later, subsequent; m.
plur. as suhst., poster!, de-
scendants.
post-pond, ere, -posnl, -posi-
tum, set aside^^isregard.
postquam (&ften written poit
. . . quam), co^ij., after, wh^n,
as soon as.
postridle, adv., next day, on
the morrow, on the following
day-
postulatnm, I, n., demand.
postnlo, are, avl, atum, de-
mand, require, ask,
Postumins, I, M., L. Postumius
Albinus, cormd in 215 B.G.
potens, -entls, pari, o/ possum,
powerful, influential.
potentla, ae, F., power, influ-
ence.
potestas, -tatis, F., power, con-
trol ; opportunity, <3hance, per-
mission.
potisslmum, adv., especially,
ch i efl yj i m ost, in profflrftno o to .
all others.
510
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
potlas, adv., rather, more, in
preference.
potnl, from posgnin.
* praebeo, ere, uI, Itani, show ;
* furnish, supply. , te
prae-oedd, ere, -oessl, -ceB-
auni, surpass.
prae-oeps, -olpltis, headlong ;
I abrupt, steep.
praeoeptor, -oris, M., teacher.
prtte,ceptaiii, X, N., direction,
instruction, command.
_- .prae-olplo, ero, -oepi, -oep-
tum, instruct, give instruc-
tions, order, direct.
praeoipltd, are, aylf atnm,
fling, throw headlong.
praeoipue, adv., especially, pAr-
ticularly. \ .
praeolpans, a, nin, especial,
particular.
praeol&ras, a» nn^ glorious,
noble, distinguished, famous.
prae-oludQ, eitft, -c^sl, -olu-
' nam, close, barricade.
praeda, ae, iVjj^ plunder, booty,
prvLed^loa^miey -avX, -&tnm, an-
nouBjre, declare, give out, pub-
lish,tproclaim, state.
prafv^Ico, ere, -dixl, -diotuin,
il^truct, charge.
^aedo, -di»ft«rM., robber ; ma-
' ritlmus praodo,^ pirate.
^ ^.jpraedor, &rl, htn» sain, plun-
.der, pillage, raid.
praefeotuH, 1, .M , officer, Com-
mander {especially of cdvalry). f
y^\ prae-flolo, ere, -ffeol, -feotam,
. set over, place in command
^ of, give control qf, voiiK ace.
and dat,
^_ . j^r»e-flg5, ©re, -Wxl, -flxutn,
fix before, plant in front.
prae-gredlor, I, -greasiis siim,
go in advance.
pg ao mtttd» e w» - mlil» - mil
sum, send in advance, send
on, send forward. . ; '^
praemium, I, N., reward.
praeparo, are, avi, atam, pre-
pare or get ready beforehand.
praeseng, -entis, part, of prae-
8um, present, on hand.
praesentla, ae, F., the present
moment ; in praesentia, for
the moment, for the time be-
ing.
praesertln^ adv., especially,
particul
praesldiqy^^X, N., guard, garri-
son, (prnecting) force : protec-
tion, support, escort ; in plur.,
entrenchments, defences.
prae-sto, are, -stitl, statnm
or -stltnm, show, display ; per-
form, do ; excel, surpass ; ful-
fil, make good ; keep ; prae-
8tat, impersonal, it is better,
it is preferable.
prae-sum, -esse, -ful, be over,
be at head of,^ have comniand
of, be in charge of, rule over,
ivith dat.
praeter, prep, with ace, ex-
cept ; beyond.
praeterea, adv., besides, more-
over.
praeter-mitto, ere, -ml«1, -mia-
Rum, pass over, let pass.
praetor, -oris, M., general, com-
mander ; praetor, a Boman
magisi^ate ranking juat below
a consul.
precis, am, F. (singf. defective
and very rare), prayers, en-
treaties.
preoor, &rl, &tas sam, pray,
entreat.
prenio, ere, presst, pressam,
{)ress, press hard, attack fierce-
y, harass, beset, overwhelm ;
boar down upon ; in pau,, be
ftffliotod, be aifeqt wtr^
J
^
36, send
fd:
am, pre-
jrehand.
of prae-
i.
) present
itia, for
time be-
pecially,
'd, garri-
: proteo-
tn plur.j
ces.
statnin
lay; per-
oss ; f ul-
; prae-
i better,
/
over.
be
ominand
lie over,
ICC, ex-
58, more-
[•I, -mla-
ral, com-
Monum
ist below
defective
rers, en-
n» pr*y»
irenaani,
ck tierco-
rwhel^ ;
paM.f be
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
611
e;4f:
i
pretinm, I, n., price.
prldie^od»., the day before, on
the previous day. !»
primo, adv., at first, in the first
place, first.
prlmnm, adv., first, in the first
place ; cum or ubi prim am,
as soon as; qaam prlmum,
as soon as possible.
primus, a, mn, superlative of
prior, firsj^oremost ; in prl-
mls, espci^ially, in particular.
prlnoepi, -olpla, first, chief ; m.
as snbk. , leading or chief man,
leader,'! chief.
""■sfe^-- Sf'- =^^^^:^
prdcruro^ &re, avi, atnm, at-"
tend to, take care of. -'
pro-ourro, ere, -onrri (-ou-
currl), -our 8am, run forward.
proded, -Ire, -II (ivl), -Itum,
come forward, appear.
prodltld, -onlH, f., treason.
prodltor, -oris, m., traitor. .
pro do, ere, -dldl, -dlttam, be-
tray, abandon, give up j hand
down. ' , ^,
pro-duod, ere, -dQxI, -duetam,
lead forth; prolong, protjwct;
. draw out, lure, entice.
proellor, arl, atus sam, 6ght.
chief position, sovereignty.
prior, lug, comparative, former,
earlier; first (o/^w).
prigons, a, um, early, ancient,
old-tim^.
prigttnug, a, um, former, pre-
ment, fighting, fight.
prafeotlo, -6nlg, F., departure.
profeotuf, a, am, from profl-
olgoor.
profectug, ft, um, from pro-
7 — , — J .>^»...N/j.,.|jio- field.
.V10U8; of former days, old- profeg.u.,a.um,/rom profiteer.
,pH«i,Waht.«<f... earlier, '*Xl:;c:rmpHsh:'' "'*'''""'
«ooner, first; see also prlu.- pro-fielgoor, i, -feetug gum,
«Ji«r« / *^ ■:. set out, depart, start, go, pro*
prlugquam (often written prlng ceed ■ i »", piu-
prlyatlm, adv., privately, as iir-
— r
dividuals.
prlv&tn^H», um, private, indi-
vidual, personal.
pr6, prep, vnth abl, before, in
front of; instead of, in place
of, as ; in defence of, for ; in
accordance with ; for, in ^.
turn for. m
probd, Are, Avi, Atum, approve ;
favor ; recognize.
pr5-o«d6, ere, -oegsl, -oegtfum,
go forward, qome forward,
advance. '
prooer, -erU, m., noble, chief.
pr6e*rt4Ae, -tAtlj. F.. height
confess, declare one's self;
state. "
profllg5. Are, AvI, Atum, rout
prd-flu6, ere, -fluxl, -fluzum,
flow forth, rise. " ____ _
pro-fugrl6, «ire, ^fft|fl, iee,
escape.
prd-|irredl6r, 1, -frreggng gum, go
forward, advance, proceed, go.
prohlbed, 6re, ul, Itam, re-
strain, keep,, prevent, check,
out off"; protect. ;...,'
prA-JIcld, ere, -J*oI, -JeeCnnt,::
throw down, throw; ad prd-
Jloere, leap down. «»•
prO-mlttd, ere, -migl, -mitaam.
A digtanoe, far,
>
.-"V
pass. i>rdmiggag, a,
adj.f long, flowing.
am, Of.
±.
612
■•%i;
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
i
*ii'
Piromptas, a, am, ready, quick.
pronuntid, are, avi, atam,
declare, tell.
prdpatuluni, X, N., open, court.
prope, adv. (proplus, proxime),
near ; nearly^ almost ; as prep,
with ace, near.
pro-pello, ere, -pnll, -pnUnm,
dislodge, force back.
propere, adv., quickly, speedily.
propero, are,^' avX, atuni,
. hasten» v %/
propInqatt&8, -ta'tis, F., neaC'
ness, proximity.
propinqnus, a, um, near, close
at hand, neighboring, at hand ;
M. as snbst., relative, kinsman.
propior, ins, comparative, near-
er ; "see proxlinus.
proplhns, a, urn, gracious, be-
nign.
proplas, adv , comparative of
prope, nearer. ^
pro-pono, ©re, -poanl, -poal-
tuni, set forth ; present ; dis-
propter, prep, xnth occ, on
account of, because of.
proptere&, adv., on this ac-.
count, for this reason ; pjirop-
ter«& quod, for the rdason
that, because.
prdpugn&cnlain, |, N., bul-
wark, rampart, defence.
prdp&f(n5, &re, &vl, . &taai«i
• rush out (to fight) ; make |flor^*
ties. !:
prd-aeqaor, I, -BeofitaM «ani|
attend, accompany; pursue,
follow.
prospectas, fi», M., sight, a^
prdsperA, adv., successfully.
pr6-spt«16, ore, -spexl, -speo-
tuin, look out, watch ; take
precautions, take care, pro-
vide.
prdtlnns, adv., at once,j|gime-
diately, right onward.
proturbo, are, ' avI, atam,
drive back, rdpel.
pro-vehd, ere, -vexl, -vectani,
carry forward; in pass., be
carried, be driven, sail.
pro-video, ere, -vIdX, -vlBam,
provide, procure, make pro-
vision for, arrange for ; guard
against, take precautions.
prdvtriola, ae, F., province ;
especially 'the Province' o/
Gallia Transalpi'na.
prdvooo, are, avX, atam, call
out, challenge.
proximos, a, am,^earest, next,
close by ; supeH. of propior
prudontia, ae, F., discretio:
sagapity, shrewdness, c
ning.
PrusLaa (or Frusta), ae. If»,
Prusias, king of Bithynia, to
whom Hannibal fled for refuge.
t*tolemaeafl, X, iL, Ptolemy,
king of Egypt from 51-47 B.C.
pultlloe, adv., officially, in. the
name of the state, as a state,
at the public expense.
publico, are, avX, atam, con-
fiscate.
publioos, a, am, official, of the
state, public ; r^s publloa,
state ; public affiiirs, public
interests; in Them,. 7, 4, deX
publloX, the gods of the na-
tion (i.e., of Qrce<e\
PAbllaa, X, M., Publius, a Ro-
man prrenom^n.
pad or, -drla, M., sense of shamg,
shame.
paella, ae, F., girl, maiden,»
lass ; sweetheart, mistress.
paell&rla, e, of a girl, a girl's.
paer, orl, M., boy, child, lad;
servant, slave ; 4 poerXa, from
#
pro-t cr o, c f» , - t r X v X, - tri HHWr
trample upon, supplant.
ohildhoo dr
paei^ttlns, I, M., a little boy ;
vectnni,
oass., be
il.
-visum,
kke pro-'
• ; guard
ons.
rovince ;
ince ' o/
am, call
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
613
)st, next^
ropior.
scretiy
3, c
4Pi
ae, ^,f
1/nta, io
>r refiige.
^tolemy,
-4:7 B.C.
, in' the
I a state,
Afu, coia-
A, of the
mblloa,
, public
r, 4, del
the na-
il a Eo-
>f shanifi,
maideir,»
itross.
a girl's,
tild, lad-;
rU, from
puoruld nie, when I was a
mere child.
pugrn*, apo, avl, atum, fight,
contend. .•
pulsus, a, um, from pelld.
pulv-ls, -erls, M„ dust, cloud
of dust. V
puppiN, Is, F., stern of a vessel.
purgo, are, avl, atum, excul-
pate, excuse, clear.
purus, a, um, plain. - "-—
putous, I, M., well.
puto, are, avl, atum, think,
believe, hold, consider.
'*y*^"a» ao. F., Pydna, a toum of
Macedonia, on the seashore.
P^enaeuB, a,um, of w over the
Pyrenees, the range of mouu-
tains between Gaul and Spain.
Pypphus, I, M., Pyrrhus, king
of Epirusfrom 295 to 272 B.C.
Pythla, ae, F. , ^^i^iUim, the
priestess of Apollo at Delphi,
where was heated the chief
oracle of that deity.'
' ■ %
Q., an abbreviation for qnlntnn.
qua, adv., where, -by which
route.
quacumque, adv., wherever.
qaadrAgint&, forty. %-
quttdplnsrenl, ae, a, four hun-
dred (each).
quadrlngentl, ao, a, four hun-
dred.
quaerd, ero, qitaeslvl (-li),
quaesltum, ask, enquire ;
seek, look for ; qunerere ab
„ 6«t!6 or a Janu&, ask for (one)
ftt the door.
quROHtor, -oris, M., quaestor,
paymaster, one in charge of the
quam, adv., as ; how ; after con^
paratioes, than ; with superla-
tives, as ... as possible, for
pogtqnani, after.
quamdlu, rel. adv., as long as.
qutunobrem, adv., wherefore.
quaiiivis, 1. adv., however. 2.
conj., although.
quantns, a, um, how great, how
much, what;* mth tantus,
expressed w understood, (as
great) as, (as much) as," su^h
as; nent. as subst., how much ;
tanto . . . quanto, as much
• • • AS*
qna.re, adv., wherefore, for which
reason ; consequently, there-
fore.
quartu|, a, um, fourth.
quasi, Conj.,, em if. ;
quttttuorjfour.
quattuordoclm, fourteen.
-que, enclitic conjt, and (to be
translated before the word to
which it is added).
^**®,**^^hi'"®"*'*«' ■«>*>» com-
plain.-.'- ""-^^ ^
qal, quae, quodprel. vron., who,
which, what, thAt ; he who ; cm •
coordinating reldtive, this, he ;
after Idem, as. \
qui, quae, *iuf>A,\ interrogative
adj., what, whic^. **
qui, qua or quae, quod, tncfc/J-
nite adj. or rarely pron., any;
anyone.
quia, conj., because.
quloquam, /rum quisqaam.
quioumque, quaooumque,
quodoumque, whoever, what-
ever, whichever. M
quid, N. o/quls, as adv., why. ^
quidam, quaedam, qulddam or
quoddam, a certain, a certain
man, a, one.
qutdem, arft> . certainly. inHeed
^^uct. of a pnm^mw^n—^o; but, honevZ; n*??^
tie boy ;
army
39
quldem, not even.
^.
f
/
514
. PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
q«In, eonj.j but that, but, that ;
fredy, to, from. ,
quin, adv., nay, in fac^
qnlndeclm, fifteen» «< '*
qalnf(entl, ae, a^ five hundred.
I, fifty
ae.
IS, (tfiv.,
qalnqa&g6nl,
(each).
qaXnqa&gint&, Mtf.
qalnqae, five. »
quInqniSs or
five times.
QalntUlas, 1, M., Publius Quin-
— tilius Varus, a Roman general.
Qnlntlas, X, M., Titus Quintius
Flamininus (see Flamlnlnus).
qnlntna^ a, nm, fifth. .
Qaintuf, I, M., Quintii», a Bq-
inan prcenomen. -
QuirXs. -itii, M., Roman citizen ;
in iXK. plur., fellow-citizens.
qals, quae, quid, interrogcttive
prpn.y who, which, what.
qals, qua, qnj^, inde/imfe proti. ,
anyone, anything ; foith nisi,
something, someona. ^^
qalsnam, quaenam, qnidnam,
•. interrogative pron.y (-nam ocW-
ing emphaaia) who pray, what
then, who, which, what.
qataqnatn, qaldqaam or quie-
qnam, anyqne, anything, aoy.
qalaqne, qaaeque, qnldqae or
. qnodqne, each, each one ;
' • every, everyone.
qalvis, qnaevl», qaldvis or'
quodvli, any, any whatever.
quo, odt?i, 1. rei., wliither,
where, to or into which, ^
Whom. 2. interrog,, where,
whither.
quo, abl. of qui, cm conj., that,
in order that ; because.
qu6> aU. of qui, cu ttdu., by
how much, |^.t|uB, on Ihis
account.. i---'' >'';SK--
quoad, conj., until, as long as.
qasff; oonj. , bocause, that, -iir-
thatf the fact that; with ad-
vethial forcCf • wherefore, so
* that.
quomlnuB or ^qiid mlnns, conj.,
so that not ; freeiy^ to, from.
quondam^ adv. , once.
quoniam, co?)j., since, seeing .
that.
qnpque, conj., also, too, as well. '
quot, indecl. acLj:; how many, as
many as. . .-
quotakinis, ait'., pearly, every
year, annually;"
quotienscuinqne, adv., as often ^
as, whenever.
rj&:d5, ere, '-si, -sum,^ shave. ^'
r&mi|8, 1, M., branch.
raaa, ae, F., frog. '
rapidliaB, -t&tis, ¥., swiftne&s.
r&rus,,?»o nm, scattered; in
. fAur.'f in detached groups,. in
' small parties^ -^ ,, «
rafus, a, nm,'from rliidd;
ratld,'-diila, F., method, system,
theory, science ; charticter ;
manner, yr^y; plan; consider-
ation, reason; calculation^,
strategy. • tt^
rati 8, is, F., raft. ^^
ratus, a, um, from reor.
rebellio, -dnis, F., renewal of
war ; rebellionem faoere, re-. ^
new the war. * ' ' .
reo6ns, -entls, new, recent, '
late ; fresh, unexhausted.
r«oeptus, lis, M., rejxeat, way
retreat. . . <
reoiperd, &re, &vl, &tam, re-
cover.
re-oipid, ere, -oepi, -eeptnm, ,
.Regain, jjet back, recover; re-
ceive, admit, welcome ; s6
reoipere, 1.. reo6|i%r one's self, ,
recover, rally ; 2. return,
retreat, betake on«'s self.
A\
i^
'^
re^curru, erg, - wttrgl,
back, return,
•t/..
' ■■ . I ' . \
^
'ore, so
18, conj.j ' \
y fronv.
^
, seeing .
as well.
many, as
y, every
as often
have. ^
riftnea».
red ; in
oups, . in
6t ■ ■• '^
, sysfcem,
larjicter ;
jonsidor-
ilation^
lewal of
«ere, re-.
#
recent, '
jted.
b, way
?uin, re-
eeptam,
•ver; re-
me ; «6
ne's self,
return,
self.
I -
']
PARf VI.— -VOCABULAHY.
516
rea-L btT Ma^ J.. ' '«"«*«. -onlg,F., religious scfu-
'back' resto^^;f ""' ^J^ ^^^' ^^^«''«nce. conLienfeious-
renL .1 rf di^ ^? ' w *5^» "^^' «^ligation of an oath.
redeirT /r/LT^ i.' .^^'^' mamder, remnant. ♦
\eaeo, ire, -n (-ivi), -itum, . leave, leave behind ; abandon ;
neglect ; irdpersonal in pass.,
,it remains.
rellquug, a, nm/ remaining,
other, left, else ; future, sub-
• sequent ; flignem«y to be ten-
dered by the rest of : m. plur.y
Tellqjil, oTuiii, as mbst., the
^rest, the others; reliqaam \
tern pn», the future.
rei^iyianeo^ ere, -manal, -ni&n-
som, remain, remain behind,
stay. ^
r6m-ex,. -tgig, M., rower, oars-
man.
A pome back, return; come in,
be derived. \.~^
red-lgo, ere, ^figrX, -a'otam, re-
duce, make, bring. . .
redltlo,' -onlB, F., fetuni. ' *
redltas, U8, M., return, return-
ing- \
re-duco, ei^, -duxl, duotum,
lead back, bring back
refero, referi'e, rettoll, relA»
turn, bring back, carry back,
drive back; bnn^ bafck word,
report; pedem i^eferre, re-
treat, fall back ; sfi" re f^Pi^e, „mn.
t^r^ .r2«' ^"^^'/«*^«*^' f- ^^-^^ 0«-««. M. «?ur.,theRenii,
re-flMd «t*« ««1 * * V . "^"•'«o. are, avi, ^tnm, row.
, re-f«rglo, ere, -fugri, escape. '----.- * - •
re«rl6, bnin-f., region, district,
• country, part.*
reirlaa, a'^ um, roy&l, of the
' king.
wgno, .ftpe, AvJ, Atum, be
*6|rn«,„, I, J^. kingdom ;r^l,e-move6,6;e,-..;6vir^t«m.
re-mltto, ere, -inl8l, -mlssnm,
send back,. release, give up;
relax ; perf. part, pau.y ro-
mtssns, a, uiii, cm ad4.. mild :
light, cheerful.
reniolieflco, ©re, beoome soft» or
enervated.
' ,; power, supreme power,
' throne.
«v'®K*. ere, pfexi, reotdtn, rule.
« .^govern.
re-irredlor, t^^ressna anm, re-
turn, go batk., \^ . •
regrnlfi, ^e, r.,^ul€f.
R«8rala8, I, m., Marou^ Atilius
Regulus, nfnmom Boirian, con-
B^ilin Ibii B.C.
move back, withdraw, draw
back, draw away ; put aside,
put away; remove, destroy,
put out of the way.
r«ma8, I, m., oar. *
reaovo, &re, AvI, &tain, renew., '
renfintlo, Are, AvI, atam, re-
port, bring back word ; «s-
nftnti&tnr, word is brought jA
, (back). * ''^'.
■Jftnlinm, > o ur, ffi r i, I ' atu» mm, Ihillk. "^
11 '
m
PRIMARY LATIN BOO%
/ n
re-pello, ero, reppnll (or po-
pall), -pulsuin. drive back,
•defeat.
repente, adv., suddenly.
repentrntis, -a, uiii, sudden,
hasty, unexpected.
peperldi Ipo, repperl (or te-
perl), -p^rtuiti, find, find
out, discover, ascertain. .
pe-peto, ere, -potlvl, -petltrim,
demand back; bring >, backj
renew ; pepetepe- memopla,
call to niindj.recollect..-
pepo, epe, repsi, peptuni, creep,
dtawl along. * '
pe-pduo, ope, -posul, -posltum,
store up. V
pepopto, ape, avi, atum, carry
back, take back.
poppert, from, reperlo*
pe-ppimo, ere, -pressi, -ppes-
suin, 'restrain, check.
pepulsns, a,' «ni, from pepello,
pes, pel, F., thing, matter, affair,
circumstance, means, fact^
act. object, interest, situation7
. if
i^gtitl, from-teaHto.
ratit-uo, ePe, --ul, -utam, re-
store ; 'rebuild. ^
r.^-tined, epe, -ttnni, -tentum,
detain, keep ; preserve, main-
tain. » . ■
pe-traho, ere, -tpaxi, -tpao-
tuni, bring back (by force). "
pettnil, from pefera.
pe-vello, orej -velll, -valsnm,
. teai? or wrest away, pvill up.
^e-vertp, ere, -vertl, -versnm
-(chiefly inperf. Senses), return,
come back, go back. '
pcj-vePtop,!, -verauHaiini(chiefly
in pres. imp^rf. and Jut. tenses),
return, come back, go back.
pevoco, ape, avI, atuui, recallr~~
devoid, are, fly back. .'
pex, regris,- M., king; com-
mander, admiral. *^v>t
Rhenus, I, M., the Rhine. ^" ' i
Rhodanns, J, M., the Rhone.
RhodlX, oTuni, M. plur., the
Rhodians, the people ofRlwdeSy
<in island near Ana Minor.
deed, proposal, property ; res Pideo, ere, rlsf; plsani, laughV
publlc'a, pel ^&bllcae, F., rip», ao, F., bank. ' ^
state, public affairs, public pIsus, u8, m., laughter, laugh,
interests; pes gestae, F.232t«r., roBustus, a, un». strong, pow-
'
deeds, exploits.
pe-8clndd, ope, -scidl, -sclssnni,
break down, tear down, de-
stroy. 0; : ■- ■ - -, ■
pe-soXsoo, epe, -soXvX, -scXtain,
ascertain, learn, find out. ^
pe-gido, epe, -sedl, sit dowA.
pe-«i«td, epe, -stitX, hold one's
ground, halt ; roflist, with-
stand, oppose, make resist-
ance, uithdat.
pe-splolo, ere, -spexX, -speo-
tuin, regard.
pe-«pondeo,6pe,-BpondX,-8pon-
•nm, answer, make answer,
reply. c
r eipoiigu i ii, X, W., alia w ei ' , wplj l^
res publlca (see, under pes).
erful. ■ ^-i^
Pogo, &pe, ,&vX, atttin, ask, re-'
quest, entreat. '
pogus, X, M., funeral^ pile. •
Roma, ae, F., Rome. «
Roinanus, a, uni, Roman ; M.
* as »nhst.y a Roman.
Romulus, X, M., 'Romulus, tJie
founder and first king of Rams.
rota, ae, F., wheel, . . "
rubeo, ere, be red. <
ruber, bra, bpuin, red. *' ,.
Riif'uH, X, M., 1. Marcus Mipu-
cius Ruf us, master of the horsef
217 B. a 2. Publius Sulpicius
Rufus, one of Ct£S(ir'8 lientcn-
t tnta. . , =
f,>
, ~'kf
runiop, -opis, M., rumor, report.
• s
JS
i
4^.
am, re-
antum,
-trao-
)rce) *
PART VJ.— VOCABULARY.
elf
•
alsani)
1 up.
/ersnm!
rpt.iirn
(chiefly (
tenses)^ V
jack, ^ ■-■'
recaUr~~
*
com-
3. ■^"^■',- .::.:::.:.;
lone.
r., the . '> ;
Rlu)desy_ . . •
-
laughV
1
augh.
I
^, pow-
,sk, re-' ;
8"
an ; M.
[us, tlie
fRome.
' Mipu- ^
i^horsCf
ilpicius
lientcn-
riitnpS, ere,
break.
rursiK, adv., again, back again,
in turn.
■^o*', 5"''**' N'» *^he country;
field, land. ^^ '
' '■::'■■' s ■■ ■•'■■
Sablnna, I, m., Quintus Titurius
riTpI, ruptum, sanns, a, am, sound, sane ; pro
sano, like a discreet man, pru-
dently. ^
sapiens, -entls,wise; VLoasub^,
wise man, sage. . ^ » ■
sarmentum, l, n., twig, fagot,
brushwood.
satld,aro, avi, atum, satisfy,
sate. ^'
.a«ou„.. ,. ...chapel, serine. • «'^r^Xt o^ "gtS!
>.-feoI,-fafctam,
religious If orahip, sacred rites. .atis-f„ci6 ere
sh ' I, N,, sanctuary, ^apologize. ^
a»«i.iA«- - I - -^ «»»clu8, a, um, wounded.
rifice ""^' *^'»>*?™' «^<^- ««-«-. l.^N., stone, rock. .
- *„''^, , .' ' * soalH, ao, F., ladder,
«aepe adt, (.aeplns saopli^ «cando, ere/ climb, mount as-
slme), often, frequently. c'end. «'"uut, as
suopio, Iro, saepsi, saeptum, soapha, ao, P;, skiff, small boat
hedge m, surround, enclose. solenti;, ao, L kn^wTedL
.agaoltas, -t^tls, F., shrewd- seUieet, W, e^idenUy,^ '
sa^ltta, ao, K„ arrow. - ""down "^'"""^ -oi"»»»; te«^
Sagruntum, 1, N. Sagun«*im,.a scio, Ire, IvI, Itnm know' '
Sai«minT„r f Q 1 • ^ Comehus Scipio, cmml in 21S
Salamlnius, a, urn, of Salamis. . B.C. 2. HisZm, Publius Our
Salamls, -Inis (ace. Salftmlna),
I*., Salamis, (in island of the
pyest const of Attica.
saMo.^re, -ul, -turn', leap.
nehus Africanus Major, tfie
conqueror of Hannibal. 3.
Pubhus Cornelius Scipio Nas-
ica, consid in 191 B.G.
saitus, ug, M , pass, monntain «oltum, I, »., decree.
• >»«« ; woodlana. -^ ^ «orlbo, eie, iorlpsi «orlotum
. sttlu«,, f, N., open sea, high sea. ^ write, state. ''^"'
saia* -Otis, F., safety, welfare, scutum, ij n., shield,
grotc^tion; .ource of safety, Seythae, Vrim, m. plur., the
. ...I v«. - * Scythians\a people dwelling
sal vuj a, urn, safe. • , ^ noHh of th^^Line Sea. ^
.Sitmnttes, lum, M. plnr., the 8#,/romiul.
c«*<ra« /Ml/. seteSidu., », um. second • fa
fl fintnn<^s, n m. M. /jfui., the vumblu. * *""' ^^^°^ 'fa-
report.
-■""'"■»■ < — wwT , jff i — pvwr.y Ta re-
.♦ •
ip
mm
518
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(
otherwise ; nihii5 sScjlufl; none
the less, nevertheless.
■eeuttis, a, nm, from seqaqr.
aed, conj., but, however.
Jldeoim, sixteen. ,
»6d6»y is, F., seat ; al^ode, home,
settlement.
Segontiaol, ornin, M. plur.^ tAe'
Segontiaci, a tribe m Britain^
Segov-ax, -aotis, U., S^ovaz,
a king ruling in Kent.
aegrreKo, are, 4|^I, &tain, shut
out, exclude.
se^Jangro, ere, -Junxl, -Juno-
trnn, separate, divide.
•enilta, ae, F., path, by-path.
semper, adv.^ always, at all
times, »ever.
SemprdniuB, I, M., Semp^onius,
see G^aoohus.
■enatas, us, M., senate; jbm-
' dience of the Senate.
■9lieotu8, -tutls, F., old age. ^
■enex, senls, M., old man ; a»
adj.f old, aged.
•ententla, ae, ?., opinion, way~~
of thinking ; decision ; sen-
tentlam ferre d§, to pass
judgment Ai. .
■entlo. Ire, sensl, s^nsni», feel,
be aware, perceive, learn, dis-
cover; hold viewsj have opin-
ions.
•6pard, &re, &vl, &tuni, separ-
ate ; per/, part. pass, separac-
' tii«, a, nm, as aiij., separate.
•epello. Ire, IvI (ll), sepal-
turn, bury, inter.
■eptem, seven. a ^^
•eptentrld, -dnis, H. {chi^y in
pinr.), the seven stars of the
constellation of the Great Bear;
hence the north.
Septiniias, I, u., Lucius Sep-
timius, an ojfficer who slew
I Pompey.
septlngenti, %e, a, seven hun-
dred.
septaaffesinins, a^ am, seven-'
tieth.
septoa9lnt&, seventy. '
8epaloram,'l, N., tomb.
sepaltas, a, am, from sepelld.
Seqaanos, a, am, Sequanian,
of the Sequani ; m. as subst.,
a Sequanian ; inplur., the Se-
, quani, a tribe in Oaid north of
' the Frovince.'
seqaor, I, seoutas sam, follow,
pursue, attend. ^
sermo, -dnis, M., conversation 7^.
language.
serd) ere, sevi, satam, sow,
plant. <
serpens, -entls, M. or F., ser-
pent, sna^e.
.Servlllu|i<''^l, M., Servilius, a
Bom^n family name.
servio. Ire, Iv|, Itam, be sub-
t'ect; be a slave to ; follow
>lindly ;. devote one's self to ;
■ wUh dat. ' f, ' '
servitus, -tutls, F.{ bondage,
slaiMny, subjection.
Servlas, I, M., Servius, a Soman
prcenomen.
servo, are, avl, &tam, sayeT —
keep, tnaintain, observe, watch.
■erValas, I, M., diminutiiie of
servos, young slave, slave. ^
•ervus, I,'M., slave. ii
sesoenti, ae, a, six hundred!»
sese, from sul. , •
sea, see sive.
•evood, are, &yl, atum, call
aside.
sex, six. .'•
sexageni, ae, a, sixty, (each)»
sex&glnt&, sixty.
s^xtus, a, nm, sixth.
si, eonj.f if, «ven if-; in case, to
see whethoi
• ^ ptlmas, », nm, s e venth.
■till, /<'W>HHd l
,;
,
■*/- . •
'
n hun-
seven-
* ,
»pelid.
iianian,
snbst.,
the Se-
mrth. ttf
\
I!
savFT
.,i:.
PART VI»— VOCABULARY.
519
•lo, adv.^ thus, in this way ; so,
in such a way.
•looitas, -tatla, P., drying up.
Slellla, ae, P., Sicily.
fligrnlfloatio, -onls, P., intima-
tion, announcement, signal.
algnifloo, .are, avX, atam, indi-
cate, show ; mean, signify.
slArnum, I, N., signal ; standard.
■Uentinm, I, N., (j[uiet, silence.
Sllenus, I, M., Silenus, a Cheek
historian.
•11 va, ae. P., wood, forest.
all vestHs, e, wooded. V^
alnillis, e, like, similar.
simnl, adv., at. the same time-;
. also ; along with, in one's com-
pany or society; slmni . . .
sinial, both . . . and ; simal
at que, or sometimea slmal
alorie, as sooh as.
• Imul&orum, I» N., imi^e,
shadow, reflection.
■Imulatld, -oulfl, P., pretence,
deceit.
■iniulo, are, avl, atum, pre-
tend.
sine, pr^. with ahl., without,
free from. *
singiUatlm, adv., singly, one
by one.
•tngnlarta, e, extraordinary,
unparalleled, remarkable ; in
piur. , one. by one, in small de-
tachments, in scattered groups.
•In gall, ae, a, one each, one at
a time, one by one; often freely
severally, singly, individually.
■Intster, tra, truni, left ; fern.
•InUtra, as a^ibat., left hand
{sc. manusX
•ino, ere, sivl, sitnni, allow,
permit. f°
•Itio, Ire, IvI, thirst, be thirsty.
•Itas, a, am, situated, lying.
■Ive or «en, cottj., or if; rtve . . .
uve, wAcrtner . . . ^ngither
Booer, eri, M., fathen^in-law.
•oolet&8, -t&tis, /, alliance,
league.
soolus, X, M., ally.
sol, aollg, M., sun-; orl6ns tM,
the east ; oooldfina sol, the
west.
sdlaclnin, I, n., comfort, conso-
lation.
soleo, ere, solltus sum, be ac-
customed.
solitudp, -dlnls, F., solitude,
wilderness.
.solliclto, &re, &tI, &tam, stir
up, tempt, try to influence,
tamper with, bribe, try to win
over.
Solon, -dnla, M., Solon, a fa-
motis Athenian law-giver.
aJMLnin, adv., only, merely, alone.
«olua, a, -am, alone, only.
boIto, ere, aolvl, aolutam, •
loose, open ; free, exempt ;
toith or toithout navea, weigh
anchor, set sail.
aordldaa, a,- am, unclean, mean,
humble.
aoror, -5rla, P., sister. '
Soallaa, X, M., Soailus, aBpartan
historian.
apatlam, X, N., space, extent,
distance ; interval {whether of
space or time) ; time, length,
duraticm. «
apeolea, el. P., appearance, form.
apeot&oHlam, X, N., sight. Spec-
tacle.
apeoto, &re, avX, &tam, look,
face, slope, lie ; have an aim
or object.
apeool&tdrlua, a, am, of a spy,
for spying, reconnoitring.
apeoulum, I, N., mirror.
apero, &re, &vX, atam, hope ;
hope for, expect.
■pea, el. P., hope.
or.
apoTfS, ftre, & vi, &tam, strip,
deprive, despoil
_^
X'
520
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
spontld (fell.), aponte (ahl.\ de-
fective noun, F.; in all., of
one's own accord, voluntarily.
Snurinna, ae, M., Spurinnti, a
Jioman general.
Spuria*, I, M., Spurius, a Ro-
man prcenomen.
stabllld. Ire, Ivf, Ituni, make
steady or firm.
8tabllit&8, -tf&tis, F., steadiness,
firmness.
itatlm, adv., at once, imme-
diately, straightway.
statld, -&nlg, F., post, guard,
outpost.
•tatna, ae, F., (statue.
stat-ao,. ere, -nt, -utum, de-
cide, determine.
statura. ae, F., stature, size.
sternd, *ere, strAvI, «tratam,
scatter ; knock down, over-
throw.
•tllaa, X, M., style, pen.
■tlpendi&rlns, a, uni, tributary.
■t5, &re, stetX, «tatnm, stand^
remain standing.
str&9$«, is, F., confusion, con-
fused mass ; slaughter, defeat.
•trepltus, us, M., noise, rattling.
struotura, ae, F., gallery, mine.
•trno, ere, struxX, struotum,
build, raise.
itndeo, ere, al,> strive, bo eager
for, pay attention. '' ^
itndluni, I, N., zeal, eagerness,
enthusiasm.
stultd, adv., foolishly, stupidly.
•n&vlt&s, -t&tls, sweetness, at-
tractiveness.
■ub, prep. 1. with abl., under,
beneath, near to, close to, at
the foot of ; at. 2. with ace,
1 close to, close Up to.
■ubftotna, a, am, from aablgo.
■ub-duod, ore, -duxl, -duo-
tum, draw off ; draw 'up, haul
— ap, beaoh.
aubduotld, -dnln, F., hauling on
shore,, beaching. .
8ub6gX, from aablg6.
8ub-eo, -Ire, -II (ivl), -Itum,
draw near, advance ; «go under,
enter ; undergo, encounter.
auberam, aubesae, from aub-
«uni.
aub-fodio, ere/ -fddl, -foaautti,
stab from beneath or in the
belly. ! J ;
anb-igo, ere, -egl, -&otnln, sub-
due, overcome, subjugate.
aublto, adv., suddenly.
anbitus, a, am, sudden.
Bub-Jicio, ere, -Jed, -Jeotum,
place beneath ; place close to ;
expose ; in pass., lie near, lie
close by.
aublatua, a, am, from tollo.
aublloiua, a, uin, built on piles ;
-* Pona Subllolua, a wooden
bridge over the Tiber, the oldest
of t}\A Roman bridges.
aubluatria, e, with a faint light,
dark.
aubmlniatrd, &re, &vX, &tam,
supply, furnish.
aubinittd, ere, -mlal, -mla-
aum, send (to aid), send to
one's aid.
aub-moveo, 6re, -m5vl, -m6-
tum, drive off or away.
•ub-aequor, I, -aeofitua aum,
follow (closely), follow up.
aubaldlum, I, N., aid, support,
relief ; reserves, reinforce-
ments ; aubaldta oomp»r&ro,
p!^ovide resources, make pro-
vision.
aub-alatd, ere, -atiti, stay ; hold.
aub-aum, -eaae, -ful, be near,
be close at hand ; be at the
bottom, lie concealed.
aub-venld. Ire, -vftiil, -ven-
tum, come to aid, aid {with
■r.
datt).
M.
■k^
1 f
r
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
621
'^■
^T- t-
r-~?>;r
t
•no-oedo, ere, -oessi, -ceasnm,
succeed, take the place of, re-
lieve, with dat.; come close
up, approach, advance, come
next, adjoin.
SQc-cIdo, ere, -jbWI, -olsnni, cut
down, cut through.
sac-cnmbo, ere, -eubul, -onbl-
tmii, yield, submit.
«nc-ourro, ero^ -cnrrl^ -car-
sum, run to aid, runfto the
rescue' of (vnth dat). |
. idls, is, F., stake.
Saebi, drum, m. plur.^ the
Suebi, a German tribe on the
' Bhine.
snf-fleld, ere, -feci, -feotnm,
choose as successor, elect in
one's stead.
•affrasrinm, I, HT., vote, voice,
suf&^ge.
SngambrX, ornm, M. ^wr., the
Sugambri, a German tribe on
the Rhine.
8ul, glbl, ae or Heae, reflex, pron.,
himself, herself, itself, them-
selves; him, her, it, them;
Inter ge, one another, (to,
with, from, etc.), one another.
Salpiolns, I, M. 1. Publius Sul-
picius Galba, consul in 200
B.C. 2. Sulpicius Blitho, a
Roman historian. 3. Pub-
licius Sulpicius Rufus, one of
Caesar's lieutenants.
sum, esse, ful, be, exist, prove;
tvith gen., belong to, be the
part or mark of.
sniinna, ae, P., total; chief part;
chief control, chief command,
management, supremacy, chitf-
lytoith ImporlT.
•ummum, I, N., top. Summit.
snmnins, a, um, superlative of
superns, highest, greatest,
-JPhief, aupreme» very great,
portant, perfect, entire, ' all ;
highest port of, top of, top.
sumo, ere, sumpaX, sumptum,
take ; get, obtain.
superbns, a, nm, proud,
haughty.
snperlncldens, -entia, falhng
from above, falling on.
superior, lua, comparative of
superus, higher, i»pper; for-
mer, previous ; supferior, more
successful, victorious, stronger.
supero, are, avi, atum, ^n-
quer, defeat, overcome ;^ sur-
pass, excel, overmatch; sail
around, double.
super-ateg, -gtitig, surviving.
super-gum, -egge, -ful, be over,
remain, be left ; survive.
gnp-plex, -plicig, M., suppliant.
gnppiioatio, -onis, F., thanks-
giving.
suppiidum, 1, N., punishment
{nsnally of death) ; torture.
sup-prinid, ere, -pressi, pres-
"sum, check.
supra, adv. and prep, ivith ace,
above, before; upon:, over,
more than. .^
sus-olplo, ere, -oepi, -oeptnm,
undertake, enter ujKin.
suspXcio, -onlg, p., suspicion ;
in sugf^olonem (allcui) ad-
dueere, freely, to make (one)
suspicious of.
gugpioor, arl, atug sum, sus-
pect.
sus-tineo, ere,-tlnal, -tentnm,
withstand, meet, endure, hold
out against, bear; hold one's
own, hold one's ground ; check,
rein in.
suatnll, from toUo.
auua, a, um, his, her, its, their;
his own etc, m. phir. assubst.,
sui t o rnm, h i a ( t h e ix) frleuds, "
rt in> * I ■ ■■■» 1 1 I - 1
V017 high, extreme, most im- comrades, men, countrymen ;
522
PBUfART LATIN BOOK.
:V
N. fitAvr. as subsL^ ana, dram, Taxlmagnlns, I, M., Taxima-
his (their) possessions, prop- gulus, a king ruling in Kent
erty, belongings.
Syria, ae, F., Syria, a country
in western Asia.
tdotnin, I, M., roof, abode, home,
quarters.
tegd, ere, texl, tgctam, cover,
_ . hide, conceal ; shelter, protect.
= * Tellns, I, M., Tellus, an Athe-
T., an abbreviation for Tltns. niam,.
tabellarlug, I, M., letter-carrier, t«Iani, I, jff., weapon, missile,
messenger. dart, javelin.
tabala, ae, F.^ tablet ; picture, tenier§, ado., rashly, without
painting. cause, without good reason.
t&lea, ae, F., bar, rod, t£md, -onig, m., pole, tongue (of
tulentuin, I, N., talent, a Greek a vehicle).
standard of value, varying in teinperantla, ae, F., self-con-
different states; especially the trol.
Attic talent, equal to about tempers, &re, avi, atnm, con-
81080. '•„. --,trol; refrain; perf. part. pass.
tails, «, of such a kind, such ; ^ temper&ta«, a, um, as adj.,
this, ihe following ; this, the ' mild.
preceding. tempest&s, -tatlg, f., weath^;
tain, adv., so, so much ; tairi . . . storm, tempest.
quam, as or so (much) . . . as. templnm, I, N., temple,
tamen, ttdt>., still, however, yet, tempto, or tentd, are, avI,
nevertheless, for all that, ye<i,:_ Atum, try, test, tempt.
at the same time. " ,\iempn», lorlg, n., time, sea-
Tamegls, Ig, M., the Thames, » isOn; age, period; occasion,
TamphUug, I, M., Tamphiftj^f/ ofjportunity, circumstances ;
see Baebiag. ' 4^ i^**^'**''» emergency ; rellqnani
tamqnam, adv., as if, iust as uPj^tompus, the future.
tandem, adv., at length, atlas§«
tango, ere, tetlgl, t&etnm,
touch; reach ^, LK>rder on.
tantnlug, a, am, so small, so
trifling.
tantum, adv., only, merely.
tantus, a, am, so great, so
^<Jit(prI (or Tenctgri), oram,
i^nr., the Tencteri, a Ger-
mdni tribe near ■ the nunith of
^ the Rhine. I ' <■
tendo, ere, tetendl, tiniam
or tentam, make one's way,
go-
kUbUM, a, UIII, mJ l^lVUV, BU gu«
large, so vast, so important, tenebrae, arum, ir. pittr., dark-
so much, such ; as great, as ness, the shades.
much ; N.. tantuih, as adv., tenebrloogag, a, am, dark,
so mucl^so ,far. v gloomy,
tardg, ad?., slowly. / tened, ere, al, tentam, hold,
TarentlBl, drum, M. plur., the grasp, keep,^ maintain ; retain,
Tarentines, the people of Tar- detain.
entum, a city im the south tentd, see tempt6.
coast pf Italy. _ . Terentlag, I, m., Caius Teren-
.
last king of Rome.
B.O.
t'l
PART VI.— VOCABULARY.
523
#
tergam, i, n., back, rear ;
tergam vertere, or dare,
turn and flee, take to flight ;
a tergd, in the rear.
terra, ae, F,, earth, land ; In ter-
rlg, in the world, on earth ;
orbls terrarnni, the world.
terreo, ere, ul, Itum, alarm.
terrestrig, e, land, of the land.
territo, are, avi, atnui,
frighten, terrify,
por, -drlB, M., terror, alarm,
\ic.
L adv., for the third time.
tB, a, urn, third.
^ p, arl, atus gum, declare,
^i^sert.
tegtudo, -dlnls, p., tortoise,
testudo, shelter of overlapping
shields. ,
tegtala, ae. P., small tile or
potsherd, voting-tablet, ballot.
ThebanX, ornni, U. plur., ^he
Thebans, the people of
Thebes, a famous city in
' Greece.
Tbemlgtocles, Is or I, m., The-
mistocles, a celebrated Athe-
r^ -nian statesman arid gertercU. .
Thermopylae, arum, P. plur.,
Thermopyles^^ufanums pass
in northern €^I^Spt'.
Tbegplengeg, lum, M. plur., the
people of Thespise, a town be-
tween Athens and TUehes!
Thuoydideg, Ig^ja., Thugydides,
tfie great Greek historitm of the
Peloponnesian tear.
Tl., an abbreviationforTllaerlua.
Tiberlung, a, um, of the Tiber;
. TIberXnng pater. Father Ti-
ber, as a river god.
Tlberlg, U, M., the Tiber, the
river ^<^n which. Rome is situ-
ated. - /
Tlbertng^ I, w., T
timor,terig, wf.', fear, alarm,
dread, panic.
TIryng, -ynthlg, p., Tiryns, a
cityin the Pdoponnesus. -
TlturKig, I, M., Quintus Tituri-
us Sabinus, wie of Gaatar's
lienteiuxnts.
Tltug, I, M., Titus, aJ^itmian
pr<Bnom£n.
tollo, ere, gngtall, gnblatnm,
raise, lift up ; take on board ;
take away, remove ; destroy,
kill, slay.
tormentnm, 1, N., engine, hurl-
ing-machimj(/or throwing large '
Cissiles).
qnatug, I, M., Torquatus, ^
the name of a famous Mom^i
family, * '
torqulB, Ig, M. one? p., necklace,
collar.
toty indeclinahle, so many.
totMem, indeclinable, just as
many, the same number of.
totng, a, um, whole, entire, all ;
often rendered freely by en-
tirely, altogether.
tra-do, er©>^-dldl, -dltum, hand
over, give up, surrender ; hand
down.
tra-duco, ere, -duxl, -duc'tnm,
/ lead across, bring over; lead
through,
traj ect its, u s, M. , crossing, pass-
age, route. ^^
trand, are, avl, atum, swim
over, swim across.
tranquimtag, -tatig,. P., calm.
trang, |%p. ^vith ace, across,
over, beyond, on the other
side of, to the other side of.
traugactug, a, um, from trang-
Igo.
trans-duoo, ere, -duxX, -duo-
tuni, lead across. .
TZbwia*i prcenomen.
timed, ere, ul, fear, be afraid.
la .: ^€Oy^lrey-J4I44v^), -ttuni)
cross, cross over, go or come
ov6r.
524
primary' LATIN BQOK.
&
*'f"«if?'**^®"®'*"*^"***"™' trlennlum, I, n., a space of
"*"""" three years, three years.
trigrlnta, thirty.
Trlhohantes, um, M. plur., the
Trinobantes, a tribe in Britain.
trlportltOj adv.y in three di-
visions.
tripl-ex, -lc<8, triple, threefold.
trlquetras, a, um, triangular.
triremis, Is, F., trireme, galley,
a vessel 1 mth three banks of oars.
trlstls, e, sad^ sorrowful ; trls-
tlsslmas.'with the saddest of
hearts. '
Troeaen, -enis, f., Troezen, a
nu- / ' ° city in tJie Teloponnesns.
across the Khme {from Gaul) ; , tropuenm, I, n., trophy; victory.
M. ptur.assubst:, the people tracldd, are, avi, atum, cut
across the Rhine. down, slaughter, slay.
Trusuiiidnns, I,' W., Trasume: trunons, l, m., trunk.
nus, a lake in Etrnria. tpux, trnolg, fierce, grim, stem.
Trebla, ae,,M., Trebia, a river tu, tnl, thou, you.
transfer
trauH-lj^d, ere, -egt, -Return,
complete; in pass. ^ be com-
pleted, pass, go by.
transltus, us, M„ passing over,
crossing. >
translatus, /rom transfer^.
transiiiarlnns, a, um, from be-
yond the seiv.
transmlssus, iis, M., passage,
distance across.
^^tr&nsporto, are, &vt, &'tnm,
carry, lead, bring, or tjike
over; convey ac'rbss.
Transrhcnahus, a, tim, living
in nortlievn Italy.
Ti^bonius, I, M., Caius Tro-
bonius, one of Caesar's liai(,en-
ants.
treoenti, ae, a, three hun-
dred."^
trepldo, &re, avI, atum, be in
confusion, bo in a {mnic. --
trepldus, a, um, alarmed, ter-
rified.
trSs, trla, throe.
tuba, ae, F., trumpet. ^
taoor, erl, tutus (or tultus)
sum, protect, guard,» keep
safe, defend. "
tnll, fiom ferd.
turn, adv., then, at that time,
thereupon ; oum . v i turn,
•bothv. . . and, not only . . .
but also.
tumulus, I, M. hill. ^ • '^
Ivffldulus, a, um, swollen.
Tr^erl, |rum,^M. plnr., the t'urma, ae, F.,'squadr<m, trWp.
Trevwi, a tribe tnrutrth-eastern turpis, e, disgraceful, unbecom-
Oaid^^lfm the Rhine. ing, base.
TrJ^bootT. drum, M. plur,, the #lir r Is, Is, F., tower; dove-cote!'
Triboci, a German tribe on the tus, to rls,^,, incense. •
'^^^ne. tiitd, advfy safely, without dan-
trlbunus, I, M., tribune; trl- "ger.
bunus mllltum, an officer in tutum, I, n., position of safety,
the Konum army; trtbiinus safety. ' - »
pl6bts, a civ^magUlrate oit tutus, a, nin, safe, secure.
^""^" tttn», «, um, thy, your,
U
ti|U)-a5, ere, -nl, -ntnm, grantk
Ipustow, devote ; ascribe. ^'
tflriu |fc i, 1, w., a mwoo of throe.
dayfjf throe days.
ubi, uji ) ., yylmm UH HU6n ftf y
where. .
. I
1
■.^^
PART V;.— VOCABULARY.
625
Cbll, drum, m. plvr., the Ubii,
a tribe in Germany on the
Johine.
aloJscor, I, ultus'suiiiV- punish,
avenge.
need, necessity ; usu venire/
come about, hfippen ; ex usu,
;of advantage, advanbigeous ;
usal esse, be of service, b6 an
advvintage, be useful.
'"ny'ino: """' '"^ ' "' "'"- »* *?*Cth»t in-^*.^ that, so
mo::tto.^""«P'^" *''"»« "t;, -"'. -"-■. which („,
farthest, most distant.
ultro, adv., voluntarily, without
. provocation.
umbra, ae, F., ijhadow, shade.
ninerus, I, m., shoulder.
umqnam, adv., ever, at any
time. ; .
una, adv., at the same time, to-
gether, along. • ^
unde, orfv., whence, from M'hich.
OndevlglntI, nineteen.
each (of two), both ; u. plw.,
.both sides; both.
utl, see ut.
utuig, e, useful, serviceable.
utuitag.-tatla, f., advantage,
usefulness, service, utility.
utor, I, ususuum, use, employ,
have, make use of ; ejtperience,
hnd; show, display; adopt,
follow, avail one's self of ; with
am.
"Terfume""' '' "• """"""'• "»'»•'?-••>•. «*•. m both w«^
»».n... ..; M., nail ; okw, t«I„„^ Z.n^'' ''''"" ^ *"'"'«'«-
body. 'V *
T«;..f?' 1^ 1^' P^^«^^'^»'J; ^ cupied, lie waste,
tn pass, ho hard pressed. Vacuus, «, u.n, empty
U^te., «in. M. jjvr the Usi- vftdo, eVe, T^SvS. - «
. rsi^rsi::^^'^-''^^ ^tr^J ^^^^ ^^' -^^^
Qsque, adv., all tlm way, even --»«•«»' i^ a* j
as far fts nil f it« 17. i ^^***»'» *"» **"" ■"">' wander,
astw: as, all the tuijo, al- roam about.
Aa^fn nil. from ft*,.- valgn., -entli, stronpf, powerful.
^.»n, x,n, M., use, experience, Ims x.werf , W^TIfluehco
practice ; advantage, service, havi weight;h.vX!ce! Zuu
526
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Valerias, I, M., Marcus Vale-
rius Corvinus, a fatnotts Ro-
mam. ;
valetudo, -dlnls, '^F., state of
health ; illness.
valles, is, F., valley. #
vallum, I, N., rampart, en-
trenchment, wall.
venta, ae, F., pardon, favor, .
indulgenca; venlam dare,
consent. ; .\
vetilo, Ird, veni, ventnm, come,
go.
Tentlto, are, avi, atum, come
often, resort, visit.
ventus, I, M., wind.
varlng,fi, u^|i, different, varied, TenaH, Veneris, F., the god
changing.
^Varns, I, M., Publius Quintili-
us Varus, a Roman general.
vas, vasls, N. plur.f V&sa,
ornni, vessel, jar,
yasto, are, avi, atain, lay
wastej ravage.
v&stna, a, um, immense, vast
dess of love and beauty ; piitr.,
Veneres, Gxaces. .
Venusla, ae, F., Venusia, a
town in Apidia, in Itcdy.
ver, veris, N., spring.
verbum, I, N., word ; verim {'
dare, cheat, deceive ; verba \
face re, spealtT— t'T
yeotiual, -alls, jf.j taxi^tribute, Verolngretorlx, -igl», Vercin-
revenue.
veotlir&lls, o, tributary;
reotdrlus, lynm, for carrying ;
veotorlufm navlgrlum, 'a
transport ship.
vehenienter; adv., vigorously.
vehlcnlnm, I, N., Carriage.
getorix, king of the Arvemi.
vere, adv.j truly, accurately.
vereonndla, ae, F., reservdf
modesty.
voreor, 6rl, Itns sam, fear, be
apprehensive, be afraid of.
vergro, er«, lie, face, incline.
veho, ere, yexl, Teotmn, carry f^^vero, adv., in truth, indeed, in
in pass., ride, sail.
Veil, drum, M. ^^nr., Veii, ipll
ancient city of Mniria. ,.
vel, conj., or; vel . . . vol,
either ... or. .^ .
VAlle, from void. ♦> */* '
vMox, -dels, swift, active.
-vilaiii, I, v., sail.
Telut or velatl, advi, just as if,
i just as though.
▼ ftn&tld, -onls, F., hunting,
hunt, the chase.
v£n-do, ore, -dldf, -dltnni, sell.
oYenen&tas, a, urn, poisonous,
venomous.
vendnnm, 1, N., poison.
Venetl, dram, M. plur., the
~ Veneti,*a tribe in the extreme
narth-ioest of.Oanl
fact; but, hc|wever, moreover;
t»/Xen untrandatable.
Ter«or, art, &tns •am, be en-
gaged in, live. • *
ver-to, ore, -tl, -sdm, turn ;
terga vertere, turn and flee,
■ take to flight; papp§« vorr
tore, turn the ships, wheel
about.
T#ram, cory., however, but. ^
vdras, a, uui, true ; real, gen-
uine ; accurate ; ri|^t, lair,,
just, reasonable,
vaster, tru, trafih, your.
vestlirlam, 1, N., footpriftt}
track ; spot.
vestld, fro, Ivl, Itam, clothe,
dress ; in pass, freely, wear.
vestltas, us,,M., clothing.
Vonetlous, a, jam, of or with vestis, Is, F. , clothing, clothes ;
thg Vgn«ti . garmont, rob o .
I. ,
>;>'■
,•-*
-■ i
^.#^
.w*
\- .
•i('5>'»''->'
PART VI.-^VOCABULARY.
627
▼et-6, ftre, -ul, -Itnm, forbid,
Old or order . . . not.
vet-as, -©rig, old.
• je*'llo»»»» I, N., banner, flag(a red
banner was theaignnl for battle).
vexd, are, avi, atani, ravage,
overrun.
vl, from .vl«. ^
. . ' via, ae, F., way, road, route,
^ joUmey. #
viator, -oris, m., traveller.
^ vloeslinus, a, unv, jiwentteth.
^ viol», gen, (nom. not found) p.,
changfi^ turn ; in vloem, in
turn. ^
vibl, from vinoo.
..' vloleB,adw., twenty times.
Victoria, ae, p., vigtory. ,
vlotrlx, -loin, p., victorious.
flotns, a, um, from vlnoo.
1^, TlotuB, ^^, M., life, living, man-
. ^* ner of living.
"ipBhis, I, M., village.
fldeO, fire, vldl, visam, see,
perceive ; in pass. , be seen, be
tri sight, appear, seem, seem
good or best.
l^lffll, ^lU, M., watch, sentry?
▼Iflrtlla, ae, p., watch (one-
^ f mirth of tlie night time).
▼Ifirlntf, twenty.
VtKor, -orlB. m., strength, ac-
• s.' • 4 tivitv.y ■§
:tfnol6, Ire, vinxl, vlnotuni, .
bind, '
» vinoo, ere, vlfli, vlotain, con-
quer, defeat.
vlnotaa, a, uin, from vlnolA.
▼Inoalnni, I, 0., chain; often
in plnr. , prison. * :V
vinea, ae. P., vineyard ; l^ine.
vinum, I, N., wino,
'^*'» ^*rt» M., man. ^ _J^ _
vlr«s, lain, /rom vl«.
vlrgra, ae, *•.', rod, stick. '
V vlr»6, -«InU, p., maiden.
v^^|^l^&^l^^ n) m i uoiden's, nittid-
vlrtus, -tutlB, p., manliness,
valor, bravery, co^irage ; vir-
tue, eltcellence, gooSi quality ;
energy, apirit, conduct.
vl8. Vim, vl, plnr. vires, lum,
F., force, strength, power,
energy, might ; violence, fury,
attack, assault ; ;)inr. , strength,
might, jjowers, bodily vigor,
powers of endurance.
visas, a, um, /jow video,
visas, us, M., sight, appearance,
spectacle.
vita, ae. P., life, course of life.
vltlaiii, I, N., fault, failing.
vltd, are, AvI, &tum, avoid,
escape.
vitrum, I, N., woad (a plant
-tised for dyeing), dyer's weed.
«rividus, a, um, vigorous, full
of life or energy. -
vivo, ere, vixl, vlotum, live.
vivas, a, um, alive, live, living.
vIk, adv., scarcely, barely
vixl, /rom vivo,
vood, are, ^vl, &tam, call,
i summon, invite.
void, velle, volul, wish, bo
willing, desire, want, intend.
Volso, -onls, ^(aee Manilas),
voluntfts, -mm,i,y', wish, in-
clination; MUMriU ; disposi-
tion, attitude!
voluptas, -tatla, P., pleasure,
delight.
Volas«nas, 1, m.. Gains Volu-
senus, a militai-y tribune unth
Ckrsar. '
Vprenus, t «m I^ucius^orenus,
« centuHon with Qeaar. ''
v6s, you, fdur. of tu.
Voseflras, I, m., the Voages
Mountains, in eastern Quid.
v6x, vdols, p., voice.
vulfrus, I, N., the common peo-
P^«» the crowd, the masses.
vainero, &re,4vl, 4t«m, wound, ,
\
»«■,.
ei#.
52$
PRIMA«Y LATIN book.
valnns, -eiiis, N., wound ^ blow. Xerxes, 1«, M., Xerxes, king of
valpeoala, ae, F. , littJ^ fiox, fox. i^Persia, from 485 to 46^ B.G. •
valpes, is, F., fox. \ • " v
vultafB, u8, M.f expressid^, look ; », * .^ > /^ '
' countenance, ™>e,. l Zama, ae, F.^Zam», a iowrt o/
'^ Ij., Nurmdia, in northern Africa.
, ', -^ ' . ZephyruB, I» M. , the west wind. ,
Xanthlppus, I, Bf., X^nthippus^^ ; Zeaxts, is, M., Zeuxis, o/tpele-
a Spartan general.. brated Greek painter.
/
i^0,tjef>S^
i\ III ]
V"»
II. ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
V
r
; I
Ad
*-
abftffcTdii» pi''
Iditum. ■ ,. ^...
ability, ingemum; ^I, V. "
able, be— .possum, posse, potui.
abound In, abundS, are, avi,
atum, w. ahl.
1. about, { = con9eming)y d6j-x
' pi'ep. w. ahl.
2. abouf, tvith numerals, cfrci-
teTj adv.
3. about, to be— to, tise the fat.
. pa/rt. active ivith sum.
absent, abs6ns, absentis.
aooepj;, ac-cipi6, ere|-c5pl, -cep-
tum.
aooess, aditus, As, M. *
aooomplUh. pr6-fici5, ere, -fScT,
-fectunl ; c6n-ficio, e^'e, -fScI,
.fectum.
aooompllabments, hflniJInitas,
-tatis, F. {in the sing.).
aooordanoe. In- with, prd,|>rej>.
w. ahl., or aU. alone. * «f •
aooount, on— of . propter, prfp.
w. ace.
1. aoouMtomodl, be-, c6n8U§vI,
isaeiperf. *enad^C(5n8u6sc6)^
fl, a<<«wfftft«nwd. Income—» o5n-
aotinalnted, become— with, cd-
gnosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnituni,»^
w. ace.
acquit, ab-solv6, ere, iiAlvI, -so^-
laturat. 'V
1. across , trftns, prep. to. ace.
2. across, lead—. trans-dtlo5,
ere^ -dUxI, -ductum.
action, conk>se of— , fSs, reT, F.
added, be—, third sing, active of
'] ac-c5dd, ere, -cessi, cessura. ^
afljoceni, finitimus, a, um.
Aduatnol, AduatucI, orum,-*!.
1. advance, pr6-c6d6, ere,-ces8l,
•cessum ; pr6-gredior, I, -gres*
Stts Buni ; slgna fer6, ferre,
tull, latum. ^ 1
2. advfk'noe. »wntw, adventus, fls^r
M.
3. *'■■
• advance, send In—, prae-
mitt5, ere, imM, -missura.
4. advance ffuard, primum ag-
men (agminis, v.).
1. advantage, tisus, tls, H.
2. advantage, take— of, tltor, I|.i
tlsuB sum, w. abl.
'3. advantage, to any—, satis
commodS, adv.
advice, ask-of. oCnsul-flt ajftr '
i«%f >•
/ ♦
'^:^ -
«l9wd, ere, -suevL
-ul, -turn, to. dec.
^
.**.
1
Icing o/ ''
B.a • '
'own of '
Africa,
i wind. ,
qtpele-
fch, c6-
jnituni,»^
iri, -spi:
PART VI. — VOCABULABT;
QSB^
ace.
8-dflc6,
«
eT, F. *
>ctive of
ssum. 4
ai.
" . - -J
■ • " ' ''^ , ,'■
,-ces8l,
• -
, -gres-
, ferre,.
.' tii
bus, tls^ r
, prae-
rnu.
urn ag-
u.
fltor, I,
, satis
B« ^ *
adrlse, admoneo, ^, ul, itum.
JKdal, Aedu!, drum,^M.
aJTslr, res, rel, f.
• I. after, prep. , post, to» oec.
2. af^, conj., postquam, cum ;
or use perfect partieiple,
afterwards posteft. T^
afratd, be— of, vereor, Sri, itum '
sum.
agatn, rOrsus.
' against, in, prep, to.'oec.; with
contendo^ ad, w. ace.; ioith bei-
Ivm gerd, Qum, uq. ahl. ■
mgeney, tliroagh the*— o^, per,
prep. to. ace. ■ ,.
aijgro, abhinc.
acpree, c5n-sentid, Ire, -sSnsI,
-sSnBum.
1. aid, wrft, ]Uv6, Sre, jflvl,
jtltum, to. cux.; suc-curr5, ere,
-<mrrl, -cursum, w. dat.
2. aid, noun^ auxilium, I, N.;
subsidium, I, N.
3. aid, oome to— of, ajixiliS ven-
i6, Venire, vSni, ventum, t«. dat.
: 4. aid, Ko'to-HDf, auxiliS eo. Ire,
^.(ivl), itum, w. dat.
[/^. aid, send to -of, auxiliO
mitt5, ere, misl, missum, vi.
:^ dat. and occj. _
^«aarm, per-mov(B5,, 6re, -mflvl,
m5tum ; com - moved, 6re,
-mSyi, -m5tum. <^|^ ^
alertness, dlligentia, ae, 1^
AJesla, Alesia, ae, F.
all, omnia, e. ' ' »
al^gfianoe, officium, I, n.
AlloMrKes. AUobrogSs, um, M.
1. a^nv, patior, I,- Aj|88U8 sum.
2. atlowe4, be-, «pt, licSre,
licuit, impersonal w. dat.
Ally, Bocius, I, H.
lUmost, paene.
alone, sdlua, a, om ; ftnus, a,
um.
aloof, hold-,absum, esse, ftful.
itf r e ady, jam, nrfff =
althooflpi, etta ; qaamquam ;
quamn^* ^
always, 8«mpe■^ i -
ambassador, legfttQS, I, M.
ambosh, InsidiM, ftriiQi, Fi, im,
piwrid oidy,
amongr» inter, prep. w. aec 1
ancestors, mftjdr^ um, m . . ^
1. anobor, weiflrb— ,=M< «ail.
2. anebor, at—, in ancoris.
anoient, vetus, -eris.
and, et, «que, atque, fie.
angry, be— wltb, IrSaoor,I,IrjUiua
sum, w, dab. ,^
annonnoe, nflnti^' fire, fivl, '
fitum.
annoyed, be — , graviter fer5,
ferre, tull, Ifttum.
1. another, alius, a, Ud.
2. another, one—, inter J96.
!• answer, verb, re-8ponded,Sre,
-spondl, -spdnsum.
2. answer, fiotm, respdnsum,
I, N.
3. answer, give {or make) — ,
= answer, verb.
1. any, tlllus, a, um ; after «i,
qui (quis), qua, quod ; =any
amount of, quIvHi^ quaevis,
4 quidvl% or qucwvls.
2. any one, quisquam ; wi^ a
negative use nSmp «no» one;
after «f, quis.
8. anything, Alia rSs, qiad-
quam ; after «i, quid,
•nxlety, without-,, aequo ani-
mC. *
J^Mtlt, keep—, dis-tine5, 4re,
-tinul, -tentuni. .
apolMn|^« catis-faci5, ere, -fSoI,
•ppe^^noei^^fiPHa, ae, F,
' spedSs, ^Mk ; aspectus,
apprliied, Df^m^e— of, CO-
CO, ere, -guOvI, -gnitum,^
ace.
84
♦
■1#
*
**«.
A ,
'^ 11.-. ■"■■
I^K,'"-
t V ..
% im
'^'.: ■
KftA k' -
PRIMARY LATtS BOOK. ^
t
. -oeaal, -«Bessum/j appropinquo,
2. dimroaoh, noun, adventi
ppi^ili^al, cdnsSnsus, fls,.M. ('
of i$^ral persorS) ; vmin
?l turn—, -^ fi-yerfc6, ere^
f^;«re,l|j|^M, petltum ;
«t jlra^ Mum. 4.-
>J>\^Hn^ a gri^tion)/
, erllp^iiaeslvl, qxiaesl-
pm ; rbgo, are, ^yl, fttum..
i| Ardenn^l^Tdpf g|| ae, i^^ ,3. l^k -ttor, 0^ er^, petavl,
ardor Jiiwl4ium,'^;i!^?, " ;■■ ^J^:,«|)etltui
Arlofistiis, Ariovis^, ]^i>^#| 4. aal^li^ K>f, ddhsul-o, ere
..•jlRj^meA, ^rm&tus, a, um. g W"-t. *'|jtfl^llWii'.^/T['iri ''^'"i )/ con-, ,
or.ai^, OrumfN.^ miJ^.V ^^fe^^lro,*-^ ,
a, orum, n., in ;)Zwr. assigl;, sub-venid, Ire, -v^nl,
', ' %^ ^ -yentum, v^ dat.;\juy6, are,.
mv«%, exercituB, lis, m. % '^V jjvl, jatum,;ia ace. ' .^m-
.lif^nd, circum, prep. w. f»c<m 1. «sslstanoe. auxiliunnJvK;: •
Hr^uJle) Qonfirmo, are, avi, ^iWHi,. 2. asslstanote, firo to— of, auxiliO ,
^
/
\ '.<'ff
arrange, oonsiit-uo, ' ere
I'^'i c '^
-fLtum.
i| jarrangement, rSs, rel, F.
eo. Ire, il (ivi), itum, w. dat. -
3. assistance, send to-of , auxrlid '
mitto, ere, rolsl, missum, w, •
arrival,, ad ventua, fls, M. \ ^^^ dai. and ace.
frow, sagitta, ae, f. ^ ■* . ^.«iiat, of time when^ tmc abl.
as=^/ice, ctim. '^ ;'^2. at^ of place wkerey use locative^*
2. t^m( after «d<!m, qui, quad,% or in and abl. ^
quod. - 3. atfOfteT'COnjicidf in, w. ace.
3. am^ while, dum, cuiq> or atae 4. at onoe, statim, odv.
■ prejjei^ participle. ■ 5. at, in phrase throw one's self/^
4. as, si^n of apposition, xm- at feet, ad, w. ace.
trandated; -use appoaitive or Athens, AthSnae, ftrum, I'.y in ;
daiive of purpose. plv/r. only. : f,- ;
6. as soon as, simul atque. 1.. attack, verb, (of places), op-.
6. as— as possible, quani toith pflgiiS, are, avI, atum ; (of
supetii , . men), ag-gredior, I, -gressus
7. SL» to, use the genitive. '"Sum ; ad-orior, Irl, -ortuB^sum;
ascend, ascendo, ere, ascendl, impetum facere in, w. ace.
ascS]^um._ _ 2. attaofc, nonn, impetus, tip, M. #
1. attempt, verb (=»=^ry, "w. in-
^Jinitive), cSnor, arl, atus sum ;
(=mdke an attempt on), temp
to, are» &vl,<fttum. *
2. atteml^t, make an-:, cCnor,
^^■:/'-
. 7.,-;,-,.. .-J
iasoertaln, c5-gno8c6, ere, -gn6y
-gnitum.
ashamed, be—, pudet, impj
stmal. .
aside, lay— , d6-p<5
posul, -positum.
• Ths Btiion who |t tiilwj U
wltli fUMtn ta ttw *»i. with «b or
arl, atus sum. ^
— _i
jn ths soa^ trith'fwtffl in ths ib!
.^.
5, ere,
equest),
)tltum ;
quaesl-
lum..
petivl,
1-6, ere ,
eon-
im. ,
J. m
6, fire, ,
auxilid
. dat. <
auxrliS
im, w,
te ahl.
ocativCf
l;'t
/.
PART yj. — VOCABULARY.
631
X. avengre, ulciscor, I, ultus sum.
-^. avenge one's sel/ on (or
upon), ulciscor, I, ultus sum,
,1/7. ace.
await, exspect5, Ire, S.vi, fttum.
away, take— , tolld, ere, sustull,
' subl^ttum.
1»aok, t^rgum, I, n.
Imgrgragre, trnggrage animals, im-
pedimenta, 5rum, N. plur.
1>and, manus, tis, f.
bank, rlpa, ae, F.
bar, tftlea, ae, F.
iMtrbarlan, barbarus, I, m.
' 1. battle, proelium, i, n. ; ptig-
na, ae, f. ^
2. battle array, lln« of battle,
acigs, SI, F.
be, sum, esse, ful; to express dis-
tance^ tt^absum, abesse, ftful.
1. bear, fer6, ferre, tull, Ifitum.
2. bear on, fer6, ferre, tull, la-
tum. »
beat a retreat, s8 re-cipi9, ere,
-cepr, -ceptum.
1. beoaase, quod.
2. because of, propter, jprep., 40.
ace.
beoome, fI5, fieri, faotus sum.
X. before, prep, (of time and
place), ante, 4ki, ace. ; (of
place) pr6, W7. ahl.\ ( = n«ar)
apud, w. a^c. ; (with summon}
ad, w. ace.
.2. befofe, conj.f antequam, pri-
usquam.
l^g» 6r5, &re, ftvT, fttum.
1.^ 1>egrln, incipid, ere; for the
perfect tenses^ use coepi, isse, '
coepiEus sum.
2. beirln battle, proelium com-
, mitts, ere, -mlsl, -missum.
befflnnlnir, initium, I, n., or nse
Belgians, Belgae, Srum, m. pliir.
believe, crgiijlo, e]fe,-didl, ditum,,'
w. dat. *
\f9n\\ become—, s§ In;:flect5, ^e^
-flexl, '-flexum. ' .
beseech,, oro, ftre, fivl, Stum ;
impiord, fire, fivl, fttum : ob-
secrS, fire, fiyj, fttum.
bc;set, pb-side6, Sre, -sSdl, -ses-
sum. .
!• best, optimu,8, a um.
2. best armed, omfitissimus, a,
um.
bestow upon, dSno, fire, fivl,
. fitun), w. dat.
1. betake, re-cipiO, ere, -cSpI,
-ceptum.,
2. betake one's self to nigh$, sS
fugae mandfire, (mandd, fire,
fivl, fitum).
X. better, melior, ius.
2. better, Itls— , praestaty fire,
impersonal.
betray, pr6-d6, ©re, -didi, -di-
tumi
X. between, inter, priep. w. ace.
2. between, be— ,inter-ced6, ere,-
-cessi, -cessum, ti?. inter and occ.
beyond, trfins, prep. w. aco.
Bibraotd, Bibracte, is, n.
bind, vin-ci6, Ire, -xl, -ctum.
bitter, gravis, e.
boast of, glorior, fill, fitus sum,
to. abl.
Boll, Bdil, 6rum, m. piur. "[ ^ '~^
boldly, a'udficter.
boldness, audficia, ae, J»
bondage, servittls, -tfltis, F. .;*
X. border, noun, initium, I, n. ;
finis, is, M. (^
2. border (=hem tn), con^^tineS,
6re, -tinul, -tentum.
born, nfttusf'a, um.
X. both . . . and, et . . . et.
2. both.uterque,utraque,utrum-
que,==gg d!L
f;
beluaf, on-of , prO^p»^ ic. odl. 3. b^, on— «IdM, utrimque;
behold, vided, 6rS, vidl, visum, bongh^ rftmus, I, M.
^
PRIMARY LATIX BOOK.
bo#.arcu8, 08, M.; abl. plnr.j L hum, ia-cend5, ere, -cendl.'
arcubus. -cSnsum. *
boy. puer^ ert, m. <, 2. burn up. com-bflro, ere,-bu8.
branob, ramus, i, M. V si, -bflfitum.
' Jw»ve, fortis, e. . ' burrtln. ir-rump6, ere, -rtipL
bravely, fortiter. ^ -ruptum. ' *^
*'*!i^*'^*- ^.^^*^' '**^^^®' fortita- busineu. negStium, i, n.; rSs»
-a6, -dims, F. ,. rel f. ' ' ,' « »•
1. break down, re-scmdo, ere, 1. but. sed.
-scidl, -scissiim. 2. but. ^who-not, quin.
^. break out. co-pnor, M, -ortus 3. but. cannot-, facerenon posse
sum. qyj^
J. break up camp, castra moved, buy up. co-emo, ere, -5ral, -gmp-
ere, mSvI, motum. turn.
bridgre. pons, pontis, m. by. fi, *ab, prep. w. abl,
1. brlnar, tero» ferre, tull, latum. r .
^' hving(follmvedbyaeromm),tT&' 'O > w
v^ dflco, ere, -duxi, -ductum. Cwsar, Caesar, ^aris, m.
- }*^-^ ^*^^ (f-iectd back), re- 1. call ( = mmmon), voco, are, avi
dttco,, ere, -dOxI, -ductum ; atum ; ( = name), appello, are,
{=^00^ back), refero, ferre, avI, atum. x-r , ,
rettull, relatum. 2. call togetheri convoco, are,
4. bring word, ntlntia, ate, avT, avI, atum.
, atum. camp, castra, 6rum, n., in piur. '
o> bring back word^ renOntio, ordy. . * .
ft ^®' S.VI, atum. \oamp-follower, cal6, -onis, M.
o. bring In C= coif ect), comportS, can, possum, posse, potul.
are, ayi, atum; (^import), capable, be-of, possum, posse,
miporto, are, avi, atum. - W^^^'^' , V^
jS^*"i5 "^®**' ^^^'^^P**'*^^' ^®» o©;Ive, captlvus, I, M. '
^avi, atum. capture, capio, ere, cepi, capJ^m.
^ 1 J ^^ *'*® '***'• agmen care {= carefulness), diligentia,
^ Clauds, ere, clausl, clausum. ae, f.; (^object of concern),
». bring together.comporto.are, ctlra, ae, f.
avI, attim ; ^ coufero, conferre, oarefnlly. diligenter.
contull^ollatum. ,, carelessness, mdlligentia, ae, F.
Britain, Britannia, ae, F. l.\carry, fero, ferre, tuli, latum
Briton. Britannus, I, m. 1 {of carrying a report), per-fero,
broad, latus, a, um. / • -ferre, -tuli, -latum.
bronze, aes, a^s, it. 2. Aarry down, d6- jiciC, * ere.
brother, rrater, -tns, M. -jfcl, -jectum.
Brutns. Brtltus, I, m. - 3., carry off, ab-dflcd, eii^'dtLxI."
buffeting, contumglia, ae, F. ductum.
bmid, aedificO, are, avi, atum j 4 carry on, gerS. «W.^WML
facio, ere, fed, factum. gestum. -j* V •^^
building, aedificium, I, n. 6. carry out, c5h-ici^, ere, -fgcf.
burden, onus. QPeris, y. -fi^^^nm
V-i
i^^:
PART VI. — VOCABULARY.
533
5. carry over, /transpbrto, Sre,
• avi, atum. ) /i^^^Ib
case, since (p^ ^nhwMsh) this is
the—, quae cum ita^int.
cast, { = throw headlong), prae-
cipito, Sxe, avi, S,tum.
Castlcns, Casticus, i, M.
catile, pecus, -oris, n.
!• cause, no^m, causa, ae, F.
. 2. cause, verb, ctlro, are, fivl,
atum, vnth gerundive.
caution, with—, caute; with th«
greatest—, iise aiiperlative cau-
tissim§.
1. cavalry, nonn, equitStus, fis,
M. (in sing.); equites, um, M.
{inplnr.).
2. cavalry, adj., equester, tris,
tre.
3. cavalry-man, equ-es, Htis, M.
centre, use adj. medius, a, um.
centurion, centurio, -onis, M
1. ce rtain e ( =some), quidam,'
quaedam,quiddam or quoddam.
2. certain (=Jixed), 9$rtus, a,
um.
chain, vinculum, I, N.;l»tSna,
ae, F. ,.. .\ i.
ohallenare, Svoco, Sxe, ftvlj Stum.
, chance, c38us, lis, M.
1. changre, commiltatio, -5nis, F.
2. change, political—, novae res,
F. plur.
character, of such a—, talis,
adj. ' p.
chargre, place (put) in — of, pr^i^
ficiO, ere, -f 6cl, -fectum, t«|
ace. and dat.
charioteer, tosedarius, T, M,.
1. chief, prin-ceps, -cipis, m.;
rSgulus, I, M. •
*. chief man, prin-ceps, -cipis, m.
3. chief power, rSgnum, I, n.;
imperium, i, n. \
chiefly, maxim6. V
children, llberi,,5rum, m.
chosen p dSlSctus, a, 'um ; 6l6o-
tus, a, um.
circumstance, rSs, rdl, F.
citizen, civis, is, M. .
citizenship, civitas, -t&tis, F.
city, urbs, urbis, F.
diemency, clSmentia, ae, F. '
cliff, mons^ montis, m.
1. close, verb, claudd, ere, clausl^
clausum.
2. dose, be-^^t hand, ad-sum,
-Qsse, -fui.
closely, angUste.
coast, ora, ae, F. " ^ ^
cohort, co-hors, -hortis, f.
collect ( = get togeiher)^ cogo, ere,
co6gI, coactum ; col-ligo, ere,
-ISgi, -ISctum ; (=sumrnon to-
gether), cbnvocS, are, avi,
atum I (=ctirry to mie pkice\
dp^feris, c6nferre,,contuiI, col-
latum. ' .
color, color, -oris', M.
l^Mttpe, venid, Ir^, vSni, ven-
". obnke often, ventitd^ fire,
avi, atum.
3. come togrether, cop-veni5, Ir6,
-veni, -ventum.
4. come up with, cfftt-seqwor, I,
sectitus sum, w. ace*.
5. come upcin, oc-ciirr6, ere,
-curri, -cursum^ w. Hat.
IjjBommand ( = ord!er), verb, ira-
sro, are, avi, atum, w. dat.
<• command, nqun ( = miUtary
power), imperiuni, 4, N.; («*
oi'der given), imperatum, I, n.
3. command, have-.of , be in—»
be at head of—, prae - sum,
-esse, -fui, w. dat.
4. command, clbief— , Summa
(ae, F.) imperil.
Dommander, imjierator, -5ris,
M.
faciff. ere^ fBcT. factum.
commits
^oEoose , cR^o, ere, -16^, -ISc-
tum. . « ^
-■- .1« -■:-.-.-
Oommlus, CommiUB,%l[.
eommon, commflnlfl|jC
r
%*.
ii: I
534
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
1^1
.1
\'f
I, .locotus sum tere.t. (welfare) of, cSnsulA
comp&rij, ^ are, ftvl, ere, -ul, -turn, w. dat.
^ ''_ consummate, suihmus, a, um. '
.c6g5, ere, coSgl, coftc- contest (^battle), certftmen,
, . ' ■ ' ' V* *' ;j;,^mini8, n., pQgna, ae, f. : ( =
complain, queror, I, "que^us tmr), bellum, I, n. ,
*"^' , continent, continSns, -entis, P.
°T?^',^!^_ *!jmiSiffi> »q"^^»^> ^ continually, continenter.
questu^jP^iW^ ,^ > continue, maneS, 6re, mftnsl,
complete, verB, coij-ficio, ere, mftnsum.
-fecl^ -fecturm - ' - convenient, idSlteus, a, um.
comrade, their comrade., sul, conversation, seraiC, -dnis, M.
orum M., idur l. Converse, Joquor, I, loifltus
conceal, occults, fire, avl,atum; suih. ^ ' '
cgl6, toe, avi, fttum. 2- convert,, hold-, loquor. I,
*-<'«J»o«»n«. It-, interest; r§- locfltus sum. -^
a 1- corn, frflmentum,5iN.'
£. concern, ohject of— .cOra, ae, 2. corn, supplies of—, rSs frfl-
o ^* J ^ mentaria, F., (t«et;i€OTW).
o. conderned^so far as I was-, Coita, Cotta,^ae, m.
perms. ^ . ««||p"» conciliun^^ n. -
r,^ c^try (= Zand), ^|r, agri, m. ;
finSs, ium, M.,aKnr.; (=■
ground), locus,'!, M^^=atoieW
r6s pflblica, rel pflhliflk; ( ^
native coimtry), patM^^, f. ;
per mS.
4. concernlnflr, d6, prep. w. fMi c^tr'y (=iand),
conclude ( = majfce), facio, ere, " ~
jf J f6cl, factum.
mdltlon, condiciS, 6nis, p. ^
infer upon, d6-fet6, -ferre, -tu-
lli 'lAtwn, w. dat.
confe^|i% colloijuium, I, n. ,
confldenoe,yidflcia, aef, f.
{=^^ral dutrieta^ rOs, rty^
couraire» vittfls, -tfltis, F. '""^'
^ te^ljim. « . -2. course of action, rfis, rel, F.
^. confusion, tumultus, fls, M. covet (= complete), c5n-fici«, ereC
*V^nJ>»*on, throw Into-, per- -feci, -factum.
^mi^hdy are, a||,^ atuun ;i(|rrow ,„coward, Ignavus, I, M.
^»to ffwa| *!^f%|fn, mag. Crasiu», i^rassus, I, M.
., noijerepertui^^ .. <roj^; cross over. 4rfe, trRns-eC,
eomnmr, jmcum^mlcn, vie- .«^, -il(-lvl), -itum.
tmin; sj||fr5| toe, avi, atum. cruelty, crfldslitas, -tatis, f.
oonslder»Sptend, &re, avi, crush, frangfl, ere, frSgl» frJJ^*
1 ^^^yrn^K- 'A' / *"™5 QpprimS, ere, -pressi, ,.
Oonsldlus^Onsidius, I, m. * ^ -pressum.
consplre,c0njtlr6, are, avI, atum. ^custom, cOnsuSttldC, -dinis, F.:
consul, c5nflul, cSnAuhs, m. mOs, mSris, M.
consulship. In the-of, ii«e c6n- cut otti-^ intercept or shut off),
Bulmtheabl. ahadute. inter-cladS, ere, -clOsI, -ola'
1. consult, cOnsul-g, ere , -ul, au m ; («fctm in ter-fioia. ere.
-Ium, w, wic. .tscl, -feaW^T^^
PART VI.— VOCABULAKY.
685
-^
'» '• J
m'-^
^.
-cia'
danger, periculum, I, N.
dangeroua, peiiculosus, a, um.
dare, audeo, ere, ausus suui.
dark-blne, caeruleus, a, um.
dart, tSlum, i, N.
date, the-of, use clatiae with
quando (=ti'^«n).
daughter, Mia, ae, F.
day, dies, ei, M.
d^y before, the — , prldiS.
daybreak, prima lux, iQcis, F.
dear, carus, a, um.
1. death, mors, mortis, F^
. death, put to-» inter-ficid,
ere, -fScI, -fectum.
deelde (form a resolve), c5nstit-y
uo, ere, -ui, -atum ; (=/oi
anoptwtwi), jtldico, S.re, avl
fitum; {= adjudicate) de-cemp,
ere, -crevi, -cretum.
declare (=aMert),c6nfirm6, ate,
avi, atum ; { — make knouln),
pron^Jitio, are, avi, atum ;
{of declaring vxir), in-dlc5,/^e,
-dixi, -dictum.
deed, factum, I, N.
deep, altus, a, um.
1. defeat, 'verh, repellS/ ere,
reppuli, repulsum.
2. defeat, nmm, proelium ad-
versum, n. ; calamitas, -tatis, f.
defend, de-fendo, erp^-fen^I,
-fsnsum. . MSL i
dejection, tristitia,
delay, moror, arl, aH
delightful, jticundus, a, um.
demand, impero, are, avi, atum;
po8c6, ere, poposci.
dense, dSnsus, a, um.
deny, iMgo, are, avi, atum.
depart, dis-cedo, ere, -cessi,
-cessum.
1. departure, discessus, tls, M.;
profectio, -finis, f.
8. dffpartm^^^i^e o»MB**~>-J^g^
deprive, dSspoli5, fire, Svl,
atum ; (of, expressed by aM.).
depth, altittldo, -dinis, f.
desert, destit-ud, ere, -ul, -Atum.
design, cox^siUum, I, N.
desire, cup-i6, ere, -IvI, -Itum.
despair^ be in despair, dSspSrS,
are, avi, atum]; (of == d§ w. abl.).
destination, reach—, locum ca-
pio, capere, cSpi, captum.
destroy, re-scina5, ere, -scidi,
-scissum.
destruction, pemiciSs, 51, f.
detain, re-tineo, Sre, -tinul, -ten-
tum.
deter, dSterreS, Sre, ul, itum ;
^npedio, ire, Ivi, itum.
determine, c5nstit-ud, ere, -Ul,
-tltum.
devise, capio, ere, cSpI, cap-
tum ; in-eo. Ire, -il, -itum.
die , morior, mori, mortuus sum ;
vita (or § vita) dS-cSdo, ere,'
-cessi, cessum.
differ, differs, differre, distull,
dilatum*
different, alius, a, ud; in dif-
ferent directions, = some in
one direction, others in an-
other.
difflonlt, difficilis, e.
1. difficulty, difficultas, tatis, F.
2. difficulty, with—, vix, aegrg,
adv.
3. difficulty, with the greatest— ,
aegerrimgj adv.
direct (=^ order), impero, fire,
avi, atum, w. dot.
1. direction, pars, partis, F.
2. directions, from all — , undi-
que, adv. ; or use pars (= quar-
ter).
3. direction, in what — , quam
in partem.
•disappointed in, dSjectus, a,
um. w. ahl. ; repulaua, a, um,
ced5, ere, -cessi, -cessum ;
pro-ficiscor, I, «fectus sum.
w. s^ and dbV.
disaster, calamitas, -tatis, F.
mmmn
<
lim
WIIMARY LATIN BOOK.
IftjSS^^t^^ I, ffla<^« <:;J^-)' «e^^ ere. ge^
*'^^5!;; <»ten.da, ere, -dl, -fcum, double, duplex, dhplidB.
^ljoo^rt,com-movea,«rre,.m«. atum. w, are, avi.
iliIL^'?. n-S!!L«^ . 2. doirtifi Vumn, dubit&tiS, ^Snia,
oM^Krtrer, co-gnosc5, ere, -gnOvI, » . *
repertum. dubium (=aMno<rfotz6«iii).
to.^acef«l, trtfpfc, e. - 2. drow near. -apprtoacfc.
%^lfttm^'^"^"^' ere, -pull, 3. draw out.VveC ere, -yelli,
i#. xoum. -vulaum.
X'nT'*' ' ^~' "™'^'' -*• *~^ «iNln-sfcruo, ere,.sfcrQxI,
ji / j. •11. -«trflotum.
^S&m • "*' ■"'**' fWM». "'«". 5rt, ita» ram.
*..puy, pr«.st«. ito, -rtiH. 2.1^wr^'^S ere rep
-pucitum, M>. rfai. <i. i^ j»"".
1 ^t- .^. • - ^ drive oir, sub-move6« Sre.
1. dl.po. tion, ammus, I, M -m5vl, -mStum. " ' ■
•mX?ae?; '"-*'"'^-'-'l«- ^. drlveout, S-jici6, er^, -jgcl,
1. dlgtanoe. spafcium, I, n Dr«ld.. DniidSs, um, m.
di-?i'^T'***T* P'^"^;«^^- Dumnorlx. Dumnorik, -igis, m.
dljtont. be-, absum, abesse, tlurlnir.,i«eacc. o/*tmJ^l:>^
tUtre... be to-, labOrO, ftre, ^"officiumT n f;^ ^- ^?'^'
ftvl, atura. ' ?5J"^JI' ^*) P^ae-sto, fire,
flw"V^' di8tanb-u«, ere, -ul, dweU. in-colo, ere, -colul.
dlgtrlot, regis, -dnis, F. ( e
^tmm «,. ^^ utrumque; (ofmSreihanZo):
dlgturb. perturbs, are, ftvl,atum; quisqul, qW^ue, quidauTci-
c6m-move3, 6re, -m«vl, m«tum. qut^que ^^^^' quiaque pr
?y^!/ S ^'--- - - - • l' eoge»-. ftlaoer, ork. ore. ^
r^ d^, facio, ere, fec5l, faptum
\
III.
eo,€re,^
PAftT . VI,r— VjOCABULAR Y.
687
■r .1
rt--,
«aflr^rly, cupidS.
eai^erness, alacrit&s, -t&tis, F.
eagrle, aquila, ae, F.
early, m&tOrus, a, um,
earnestly, mSgnopere.
easily, faoile.
•nqntre, make enquiry, quaer5,
ere, quaesTvI, quaesltum.
enrol, c6n-scrib5, ere, -scrTpel,^
-scriptum.
enterprise, rgs, ref, f.
entirely, t^e tdtus, a, um, adj.
I ■
easy, faoilis, e ; very easy, per- entrust, com-mittC, ere, -misi,
lacilis, e. -mlssum.
eat, vescor, I (withcM.). envey, iSj^tus, I, M.
ef|ge, the water's—, lltu», -oris, 1. equal, vei-b, adaequo, are, fivl^
N.(t=8hore). atum.
eigrht.octo. 2. equal, adj., par, paris.
eighteen, duodSvTgintT; ootSde- equip, armo, are, avi, fttum ;
decim ; decern et octo. 6m6, are, avi, atum.
eiirbth, octavus, a, um. , escape, 6-labor, i, -lapsus sum;
eighty, octSginta. ef-fugio, ere, -filgT, -fugitum.
--elect, CTeo, are, avi, atum. escort, praesidium, I, n
eleventh, findecimus, a, um.
else, alius, la, udi
especial, um praecipuS
cially.
espe'
embark, navSs c6n-8cend6, ere, establish^ confirmo, are, ftvl,
-scendl, -scSnsum. _ atum ; of establishing a prece-
embassy, l6gati6, -onis, F. dent, Instit-uo, ere, -ul, -atum.
encamp, con-sido, ere, -s§dl, ses- even, etiam ; not oven, n6 . . .
sum. quidem; even if, etiam si.
enconragre, cohortor, Sri, Stus 1. ©ver (=alvxiy8), semper.
^""ft ' • 2. ever, for— , in perpetuum.
end, flms, is, M. \ 1. every, omnis, e; quisque,
endure ( = tderat^), patior, I, quaeque, quidque or quodque
passus sum ; (=withstand), =each.
' per-fero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum.
enemy, hostis, is, M. (vMiaUy
in tfie plHr.).
2. every one, omnes, plut, ; or
quisque, mig., =each.
every thin AT, omnia ; omnSs r§8.
\,
i. ei|gafife>com-mitt6, ere, -misi, example, exemplum, I, n.
-missum. : excel, prae-c5d6, ere, -cessi,
2. engagre In, 'verSor, Sri, atus ' -cessum.
sum, w. in and abl; engage excellently, egregiS.
In (battle), com-mitto, epe, exercise (=«Aau)), tltor, i, iisus
-misl, -missuin. sum.
engcige with, c6n-flig6, ere^lbxhibit, dtor, I, Osus sum.
-flixi, -llictum, w. cum and abl. exhort, hortor, Sri, fttw sum.
4. engaged, occupatus, a, um. expect, exspeoto, are, avi, atum.
1. engagement, proelium, I, n. experience, tisus, tis, M.
2. engagement, during the—, extend, pertineo, Sre, ul. /
- while Jighting. extensivelyrltt^
eingine, tormentum, SJ n. extent, magnitadS, -dinis, F.
enjoy, fruor, i, frQctus gum (w. extrem el y, maxim6 ( nr use tkp.
abl,), — — -— - —————— g^pgj^i degree).
^ -.
* %
638'
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
. . ' ^ ikfthv quiiltua; a, um. '
faM, d§-fici6, erei -fScI, -fectum. dfty, quinquagints.
faithful, fidelis, e; fidus, a, um. 1. fl«rht, piigno, are, Svl, Stum.
'""ij*'""^' ^^^^^*®^J sunamS 2. flffht a*battle, proelium facio,
. OdS. . ; ere, feci,, factum.
1. taiii ^er6,'cad5, gre, cecidi, 3. flfphtlnfir, piigna, ae, f.; or
casum ; ,con-cid6f ere, -cidX. use gerund of pugnor-
2.. fall, noun, wors, mortis, p. fill, fill iy|>, com-pleO, 6re, -plgvL
(=cfea</i); calamitas, -tatis,F/ -pletu'm. , «^
'< finally, dgnique.
3^*^ fl^d, reperio, Ire, repperi» ■
/fame, fSma, ae, f
famons, praeclSrus, a, um.
far, longe ; too far, longius;
1. farttibr, oc^v, longius.
2. farther, odj., ulterioy, ^iis.
farthest, ultimus, a, tim.
fate, fortflna, d(3, F. "
father, pater, patris, m.^ "*'
father-in-law, socer, eri, m.
fatliraed) dSfessus, a, um. -,...-,
favoi^, probo, are^ ftvl, atum ; « "tuln.;
faveo, 6ro, fftvl, fautum. («;. 1. ' lire, Jfenis,. ii^ m.
dat. )
favorable, idoneus, a, um.
1. fear, verb, timeo, Sre, -ui ;,
pertim-esco, ere, -ul ; vereor,
6rl, veritus sum: ^^ ^"
2. fefft*, noun, timor, ' -firis^ m.;
metus, as, M
feel, intel-leg6, ^r0,>-t6xl^ -16c- tkx(=appomiir^dlc9, ere,-i
tum. . / -dictum ;(t<Miite,>, dice,
•(use
-• i^pertum ; iu-venio, IrQ, -vgnl,
-ventum. ^"
'2. findLbnt, co-gnosqo, er% -gnfl-
vl, -^tum ;vpon^-p,erip, 4re»
-perl, ,-pertum. , . ' - \ -^ -^ , ' .
fine, pulclier, chra, cl^um,*^ -
^ fliilshr per-fici6, ere,' -fSor,- -fdc-. ,
turn ; oon-ficjio, >ere, fS^I, -fee- * .
2. fire, set-to, . in-cfend6^ ere,"
^ -cendl," -cgnsym, to. aec. \^
nr»t, prfmus, a, um ; at 4rstt
primo. ■^ i ^»^ V ■< . -
fish, piscis, ispk.' .'* \ '
five, qumquej fl-i^'lhuliare^j,
quingenti, je, a.# '
dixl, /
ere,,"
fee|[lnffs, animu^f I^ > m
, sing^: ,
fellow-oltiB<Qn, clVis^Js, M.
fertile, fertilis, e ; fOTfi,x,.-acis.
few.bat few, paucl,ae,a; afew, — ,, ...j,.,
nonnOlll, ae, a; very fe»«, per- Heet, classis, is, f.
_ pauci, ae, a. ««,«, caro, carnis, F.'
1. Held, ager, agri, M. 1. lHnht, f^», »«, F.
2. nelAi^JUld of battle,, Ua^ve .2. fligrht, Vtake to-, 86' fugae
•dixl, dietuihSJI^i^^
flag, v6xillum, I, K. «1^1»
flank, latus, -eris.N.
flee, c6n-fugi6, ere, -f Ogi ; fiigis,
ere; fflgl, fugitum.
y,f
iO
the fleld, proefi5^x-ggdo, ere,
-oessi, -cesau^
3i fleld, take th«-, i^rma sQmS, *<iow, flu5, er0^, fluxl,%uxum.'!
, ere, mandftre, (mando, l^r^ ttvl,
* '■■^.^:fAtum).- - . ■ r ^!*- %« ■•>,;
Urns, flow, flu5. er0^. fluxl. fluxum. ^*'* "^*
! ' i
ere, sQmpsr, sflmbturii; ad^ 1. follow, sequojw L «ecMu» .1
, bejlum pro-fioi8cdr,\r, -fectus ^^^^^-^ -^-.^--^^*.~^:---^^-..r^. ^
*"™* .- , \ 4? -2. follow v»|]u per:»equor,T, #e-
flerpe, iw*" ftcntef . f ... V' dltus sunvf
7lf!rit,er. r : -'' w "
* '■' ■
T •
flprgeliTi
8; fylluw»*H jf T
6djn pt
«tof Ui, hn^ ■■
fifteen, <iuIndeoim.
IS'
"CE*!
^<
^1*' r^. umMnsequfin», -epti». *^^^
t
it. : / -. ■ ■ , w V -.-■..
.vT, Stum,
ium facid,
le, F.; or
re, -plSvI,
■ . >
repperi, *
[re. -vgnl,
9r% -,'g^d> :'-
Bcip, -Ire»
urn,*, ;
fsk -fee- '
i5i erey '^
tec.
at flrst»
jre, -dlxl,
die6, ere^..
I; fiigiO,
}8' fugae
I"
^ •i^:
xum. '• **
.1:
PART VI.— VDCABULARlr.
580^
4. follows, a»—, hic, haec, hoc.
follower, camp-, cSlo, -5nis, M.
folly, amentia, ae, f.; stultitia.
ae, F.
^r, I, lie* : '
«/
< '.'
food, cibus, I, M.
Ik foot, pSs, pedis, m.; on foot,
pedibus.
««: foot, at the— oi, sub, wUh abl.
footsoldier, ped-es, -itfis, m.
.1- for (of motion towardt)^ in,
ad, w. aec. ; (wiih reason), d6,
w. abl.; (of . purpose), ad and
. Qertindor gerutidive; (of time
^ how long),'^ ace. mlly ; (with
infiniti^ clause) untranslated :
A ^"^ arrangements for the fn-
t tiire), in, w. acc,',(i=.on behalf
of), pro, m ahl.
2. foi^, conj., nam.
. 'forbearance, m&nsuSttld5, -di-
nis, F.
forbid, veto, p,re, vetui, vetitum.
1. foWe, verb, com-pell6, ere,
-pull, -pulsum. ^
2. force, noun ( = violence), vis, f. ;
forces ( =5= troops), cdpiae, ^nim,
F. plur. ^
3. forced (of a march), ihfignus,
a, um. ■ j^
ford, vadum, I, n. >I
forest, silva, ae, F. tf . ' , ^ .
forever, in perpetuum.
«brgret, ob-llvis*or, J, -lltus sum,
to. gen.
h fotm ( = make), faciS, ere,
iSoi, factum ; ^vith cSnsilium,
, , capis, dre, c6pl, captum.
2. form («rfmt» itp), In-struC,
ere, -strflxl, -strQctuih.
, former, pristinus, a, um.
forsake, di8-c6d6, ere, -oessi,
; -cessum, «?. ab atid aW.
jjbrt, castellum, I, n, ^ ' \
rfortlfloattort, manltifi, -5niii, ir.j
I* opu8,>«ris, n; . , •
Ibrtlfir, mflnid; tn, fvHt fttmii.
foitty, qimdrilgirtUb- ^ ^
«forward, send—, prae-mitt5, ere,
-misi, .-missum., '
four, quattuor ; four hundiijd»
quadringentl, ae, a. *
fonrth, quftrtus, a, um ; three-
fourths, = three parts; "
1. free, verb, llberd, ire; ftyl»
fttum.
2. free, a^j., liber, era, erum*
.f|!eed, liberfitus, a, um. v V
freedom, lib^rtfis, -tfitis, »,
freely, llberS.
frequent, c^gber, bra, brum. "-^
fresh, mte^er, gra, grum.
friend,' amicus, I, Mi ; often ex-
pressed by possessive prgnounS^
friendly, amicus, a, um.
flrlendshlp, am^itia, ae, F» '
frigrhtful, horridus, a, um.
1. from, a, ab (=auwy from)^
ex (= out of); from^ which,
unde ; (with ,verbs of taking
aivay), me themt.; (J/^^er-
und in -ing), ^uln, quominui,
i&. s^ibjunctive.
2. from* be — , absum, abessel
alul.< ^
, front, In— of, pr6, w. aW. ; awte,
w. aM.\^^ ^^ . ; , , . .; -^ -'.,,.. *
fnflritive«f' »</bM fteeing. . ,
full, plenus, aj um.
furnish, order to-^,imper5, are,
avi, atum (w. dat. cjf person»
%.
4
ordered, ace. of that io 6« jur-
■ ntsMdy. — ,-'-^.,_r_--^-.^^- .' -.^^-_
1, ffaln, pbtipr, Irl, Itus sura,
:*^. ahl.; ^-ipisc», I, -eptus
sum, w. aec. «
2. Drain a reql^st, i
AvI, atum. ,^ .»
Gallba, CaIba,^Ae,
irallaAtly, acriter. «
Gallic, l^alMlte^, utf» ; or use
Qalldrum.
itrd, &re»
C4 ■ ^
garriwu, piacBidiun iTTpng
A»-
# ^Urtw^anh, quadraggnl, ae, a. „, gate, w»rta, ae.^. . m, ,,
H
f
i:
•■/
'A
if
If
%
540
P;|IMARr XATIN BOOl^
\
«ather, cogo, ere, CoggI, <jo-' Greek, Graecus, !, m.
actum. "^
- ^ ^ - grievance, dolor, -oris, M.
il.Qanlt {the country)^ GSHiaV '^Ivj^ronnd {^position), locus,
2. Gaul (a na*ii;e o/ Gaul), Gal- 2". «rroand, stand (hold) one's-,
lus, I, M. % 4«? consists, ere, -stitl; sus-tineS,
- . lyeneral, imperator, -oris,^ m^ ' r* Sre, -tinui, -tentum.
Geneva, Genava, ae, F. ^ '8l «round, provisions of-born,
««entleness. dementia, ae, f. i;molita cibftria, orum, n. 2^ur,
Oerman, Germanus, I, m.; or n4. grround, on the-that, quod.
a4j.y Germftnus, a, um. 1. «nard, verb, custodio, Ire,
. 1. gret, nanciscor, I, nactus or iy|,' itum. *« «^ ;
_^^^ ^^ J^nctussum. 2. guard, ?Wi% praesidium,
' 2. fret ready, expedio, Ire, IvI, i, n. * ^
-' Itum. . ., i^lde, dux, ducis, m. ,
> 1. irlve, do, dare, dedl, datum. irntity, flnd^, condemns, fire,
2. give orders, impero, are, avi, avi, atung». . ,
fitum. • ^ \
3. give np ('^ hand over), trtk-dS, h
erk, -didi, -ditum ; (=aban- -^ ^
^» don), dS-sisto, ere,. -stiti, w. ha,\t a. mile = Jive h^tdred paces,
«W. I halt, con-sisto, ere, -stitl.'
florlotts, pulcber, chra, chrum. 1. hand, manus, Os, f.'
. go, e6. Ire, il (IvI), itum. 2! hand down, pr5-d6, ere,
2. iro forth, ex-e6, -Ire, -il^ ^ v ^dicll, -ditum.
^ i*uiii. ^3. .hand, beat — ,^ ad-sum, -esse,
, 3. go out, ex-e5, -Ire, -il, -itum. f ul.
4. go outside, 5-gredior, I, -gres- 4. hf|nd over, "trft-do, ere, -didI,
BUS sum, IV. extra and ace. ditum.
6. going, to be-on, fI6, fieri, 5. hands, at the-H»r, ft, ab, w.
, factus sum ; geroi', I, gestus aU.
sum. hang out, pr6-p5n5, ere, -posul,
6. going, tobe-to,i'M/M^pai^. -pbsitum.
*^ X in .flrus aiwi sum. happen, aecid<5, ere,-!, ; flO,
_: gone, be — , discessi, isse. . ' fieri, factus aurti.v^^^^,^'/^^^^^^
government, rds pablica, ref harass, lacess-(^, ere, -fyf, -Ttum. "^
pflblicae, f. .' harbor, portuB, tls, M. *
^ , irnOili frrtmentum, I, n. 1. hard, difficilis, •.
! irrant, do, dare, dedl, datum. 2. hard pressed, to b©-^, pre-
«refit, mSgnuH, a, um; mor, I, pressus sum; urgeoir«
how great, quantus, a, umf HA»
'■'**' so groat, tantus, a, um ; harm, nocefl, 6i:e, ul, itum, w.
\ ■; very great, niAximus, a, ufltr dat. ; Isedfl^ erit, liws l, jaesmp, . .
v^ -grroatest, m&ximus, a, liim ; or to. ace.^
/ : 'iueadv., mftximS. haste, make— , mfttflrO, ftre, ftvl,
«reatly, mftgnopere, mftgnS' fttum ; oonten-dd, ere, -dl,
opere ; how greatjy, quant i o
itum.
pere ; quantu opere»
hasten, oonteA-d5, ere, •dl,-tuiii4
#
*
..'"> ■
••■ M
:*^ ;
i "
■u
PART VI. — VOCABULARY.
541
3, M.
%), locus,
d) one*»—',
sus-tineo,
I of— isorn,
I, N. 2)i^^^'
It, quod.
>di5. Ire,
aesidium.
\ »■■
nnS, fire,
J* :
red pcicea.
d5, ere,
am, -esse,
are, -didi,
S, ab, w.
:«, -posuT, '
-hi fl«.
•-»-, pre-
; urgoo?,
itum, w.
[, la 6(wim.-
, ftre, ftvi,
w», -dl,
>dl,-tum«
#>
&. haT«, habed, Sre, uT, itum;
(=catMe), cflro, fire, fivl, &tum.
2. hav^B to ( — mtisty, vse geruri'
dive ivitk Aum» ,'
lie, is ; SB. ,■ - /,;^' ■
1- head, cap-ut, -itis, m.
2. head, be at the— of, prae-
sum, -ease, -ful, txj. da*.
'-headlonflr, prae-ceps, -cipitis.
, health, be in fpood — , valed,§re,
ul, itum.
hear, hear of» audio. Ire, IvT,
^ ^ Itum, w.acc. ^— — ^
bearlnflTr without a—, indiictfi
causA. '
1. heart, animus, I, m.
^ 2. heart, lose — , animumi dS-
mitto, ere, -misl, -^lissum.
heavy, graviSj^eTV
h heiflrht (of mea^remeni)^ al-
titadS, -dinis, p.
2. 1ielfrht(=a high place), su-
perior locus, I, M.; (in plur.,
superiora loca, N.).
3. helKht of madne^, summa
dSmentia, '^extreme madness.
help, auxilium, L N.
Helvetian» H«v6tius, |, pif*]
adj., HelvStius, a, um. / '#
Helvetil, Hel%«til, 6*um; M.
hem In, con-tineS, ire, -tinul,
•tentum. ^ J
hesitate, dubiro, Sre, fivl, fttum.
hesitation, cunctatio, -on is, f.
hide^ 86 abdere, (ab-dd, ere,
-didl, -ditum).
1' hijirh, altua, a, um; —^^at,
mdgnus, a, um.
2. hinher (of position), superiQi*,
lua.
3. hiffhest, summtis, a, um«
km, collis, is, M. ; np the hill,
. ■ adverso coUe. —
iiltnsolf, i{)su, a, um; s6.
.hinder, impedio^Ire^ IvI, Itum;
prohibeo, Pro, ul, ituin.
1. hold, <^e<$; gre, tenul, ten-
tum. ,
2. hold a levy, dSlSctum
habed, gre, ul, itum.
3. hold out, sus-tined, Sre,
-tinul, -tentum. •
4. hold (of holding poioer), ob-
tinep, 6re, -tinuj, -tentum.
5. hold (== regard), habed, Sre,
ul, itum.
home, domus, fls, f.; domicili-v
um, I, N. ; at home, doml.
honor, omamentum, 1,1». ; hon- ^>
or, *6ri8, m. ; .^ \,
1. hope, verb, Spaftj, fivjB, -JBLv,
fttum; exspeoto, fire, fivl,
fttum ; (for express by acc^. .
2. hope, noun, spgs, spel, f.
horse, equus, I, m.; (=camjA/), .
equitfitus, as, M.
horseman, eqU-es, -itis, M*
hostage, ob-ses, -sidis, M. ''\
hostile, inimlcus, a, um. .
hour, hdra, ae, f.
how (=«n what manner), iqud-
" modo ; (i=6y tvhat route),' q\i&;. .
how flrreat, how lar^e, quan-
tus, a, um ; how steatly, '
quantopere, quanta opere ;
how many, quot (indeclinable^ )
however, quamvls.
humanity, hdmfinitfis, -t&tis, V.
hundred, centum. , l ' , .
1. hurl, con-jioiC, MW, .Jirit|
-jectum. - - • •-
2. hurl back, rS-jici5, ere, -jSel, '
-jectum.
hurt, of-fendd, ere, -fendl, •Ush
If ( « tn case that), si ; ( ^^.whetherjf
«um ; as If, quasi, velut?
«*-.;;
■f'..
Wtlwr, w^M citoriur, imi»
Mnafrihe, ixnU\ fire, fivl, fttuml
Itninudinteiy, statiui. «
imniensts JngSVis, -entJH.
*ry
.. *^i'
«i
; '♦■
» .
ipimlnent perii,ob8idio, >-oni8yF<
••r
^
,' r^-
■'■ '''\"
^^^^^^^^p^
542
I^IMARY LATIN BOOK.
lmi>a««able, impedltus, a, urn. inform, xjertiSrem . (o^rtiSrSsi
Important, inSgnus, a, um ; facio, efe, fScI, factum ; of,=*
most important, summus, a, d@, w. (iM.
""^' „. inhabit, in-col6, erie'i -colul. '/
impossible, be, rise possum. I inlieritanoe, hgrtditfla, .-tfttis, F.
impress, com-moveo, ere, -mOvI, injure, noce6, 6re, ul, itum, to. '
-mStum. ^ dat. ,
in, m, prep. w. aU. injury, injOria, ae, r.
incensed, be ... at, exar-desco, inland, interior, ius.
ere, -si, -sum, tv. abl. inquire, qijiaejrd, ere, quaesIvT,
inclose, con-tine6, §re, -tinul,, quaesltum ; rog6, Are, ftvl,
-tentum. , fttum.
increase, ftug eo, 6re, ao xl, auc - inroad, incursio, -«nis, F^__'
*'"™* . it. "" instead of, pr5, w. aU. <
incredible, mcrSdibilis, e. instruct, prae-cipi3, ere, -c5pl,
incur, adimtto, ere, -misl, -mia- -ceptum, w. dat; jubeS,- ere, '
^"™- J J jussi, jussum, tf". occ.
induce, ad-dac6, ere, -dttxl, -due- insult, contumSlia, ae, F.
*^""^- . , insultingly,' Insolenter.
indulflre, indulxgeS, Sre, -si, intend (lute future paHic. in
-tumfW.dat. - «tlrus anc^ sum). - :
indnlilrenoe, shotv — ,. indul-geO, intercept, inter-cipio, ere, -<*pL
ere, -si, -tujn, w. da¥. -ceptum.
inevitably, me necesse est. interest, be of—, interest ; rS-
inexperlenced, imperltus, a, um. fert. ,
infant, In-ffins, -fantis, M. ^ Interpreter, inter-pres, -pretis.
infantry, peditfttus, As, M, ; pe-
destrSs cdpiae, f. plnr. y
inferior, Interior, ius.
1. infliet {ofp{mi$hment\ sflmS,
H.
into, in, w. ctcc.
invade, in-gredior, T, -gteflsus
sum, w. intra arid ace.
ere, sflmps!, sttmptum ; (upon, invite, aroeas-S, ere, -IvI, -Itum.
d6, w. aW.); (of injury), l^- 1. iron, ferrum, I, N.
ferC, ferre, intull, illfttum ; 2. Iron, of—, ferreus, a, ura.
(wpon, expre»» by dat.).
'w* InlHct death upon oneself,
mortem con-scIscOi ^e, -i^AvI,
"Scltum, w. dat. -
island, Msulaj ae, r.
Italy, Italia, ae,.!*.
■^1
Irt influence, verb, ad-dflcS, ere, »^„^,„ «ilnm V •» . fsi.,» »
-daxi, -ductum ; per-mive<); «^^J*""' P""™' ^' *i ^^""* V
«re, -mOvI, -mOtuni ; im-pelld, ^^ J »^**i. n*ru>ii..»i ^». ««;**«
ere, -pull, -uulsum. ' ^ JL ^.tat^Ti» ™^^'*^^^
t* m 'I ^ \-Mi«t-A* ®**» -niM, -missum.
. influenoe, tryt«> — ,^mmumi, »«„-«-» it5«r i(^in»ria «r
&ra «vT* fttimi ' Journey,. Iter, itmens, W.
ye. ftvi, fttum. . Judire, jftdio<J, are, ftvl, mmi
-tatiH,^., gratia, aeir, indjrment, oOiisilium, I, k.-
Hlliuentlal.he-.vAled, e**iMiI. J^^^ j^^^ ^,^ ' ' . .
— y^
• I
1
1
l4
1
2.
3.
, 1«
' mi
2.
1«
la<
i
1.
-. V »,
.«\
i**-.'
\. \
QdrtidrSs)
n; of»:*
v-t&tis, r.
itum, to.
quaeslvf,
Ire, avi,
re, -cSpI,
be5, ere,
». .-
irtic. in
re, -cepi,
•est ; r§-.
-pretis,
-gfeosus
ii -Itum.
um,
t.
I.
• I
PART Vr.— -VOCABULARY.
543
•" < II
^ 1. lead, dac6, ere, dQxI, duc-
1. keep,'>^con-tme6, 6re,,s*tinul, *""*» ( = infltience), ad-dtlc5,
-tentum. ew, -dOxI, -ductum.
Z. keep apart, dis-tine5, Sre, ^' '««d «cross, trans-dilcS, effe^
-tinul, -tentum. -dOxI, -ductum, often w. two
^3, koepfrom, prohibeS, 5re, ul, accusatives. '
itum, w?. t>^n., or m;. ab ond 3. lead back, re-dac6, ere, -dttxr,
abl. -ductum.
4. keep off, prohibeo, 6re, ul, ** ****** <>"*» 6-dilc6, ere, -daxli-
itum. " -ductum.
Kill, inter-ficio, ere, -f6cl, -fee- '««dor, dux, ducis, m. /
tum ; oc-cId6, ere, -cidi, -cisum . leadership, principatus, (Ig, m/
kind, of what— , quftlis, e. *• leadlngr man, prin-ceps,
king, r6x, r€gis,^M. ' -cipis, m. /
know, scio, ire, IvI, Itum. - ^* loadlngr I»laoe, priDoipfttiii» .
^ ^'^ "leap down, dS-siliS, Ire, -spidi
' Lablenns, LabiSnus, I, M. i^ «a' ;^ - y
1. lack, car^; 5re, ul,\.. «W. '•"^t^^''''' ''"' t^
dSfS!'^*^^' '^''"™' ^'^^' *«••*' red^mC, ere, -eW-Bmp. s
ladcfeif, scala, ae, f. ^ * t *!f*' / , , . . ° ,
lake, iacus, fla, ii. 1- leave {^leave behtnd), ra-
tm^er), terra, ae, f ^^ *' '?^ ^1'; -««^^' -^'««^»™. ^-
na. on , pedester, tns, tre, i, -gressus sum^ w. ex mui aW.
. 4. ia„d, i«r6, S-gredior. L -ares 1*!^^ ""}**^^ '^ ^™"^" V * '^
«68 aim 8™"»°'^» ^. gJ*e8- ^ legrlon, legij, -finis, p. l\
lannaM Uniniit «*» - - lefirlonary, leglSnariu», I, M. '
^^Sr^ferum;- ' 'e^^/er5,fer„,..ulI,W
. how lar,e, quantus, a, uiftf .,..., minui; «if.
Tery large, mftximua, a, um. lest, nS. ^ ' ' ,
^. larger, maj-or, -us. .i^^^er, litterafe. llrum. p vlui •
^U^^l^'^' '♦ >*% dS-mitt5j|^,.mI«;
B, ere,
1^».» : ,.pdo,. w! «« .;:;': u.^i^cri^i.. ^ »
f ,
».
•^K "^
1-:
I
111 t
r
t
I' .
1%
_i_
544
PRIMARY L«TI*N BOOK.
life, vtt^ ae, F.
1.«- vtl». ae F magistrate, magist^tufl, Ob, M. /
. like, similis, e, w. dot.
likely, be-to, i«c /wfcure |)ar-
ttctjpie m -arus i/ntfe sum ; .or
vols, velle, volut
1. line, line of battle, aci§B,
6i, F. :
2. line of marob, agmen, -nun-
is, M.'
linger, moror, Sri, atus sum.
, 1. UtUe. a—, paulum ii^nte).
— r-- nRiiln. adv. *»1_1e!L_^
2. make a malch, iter (gen,
itineris, n.) f*cio, ere, i6ci,
factum. ' >
3. make ready, compart, fire,
&V1, itum.
4. make use of, Ator, I, tisus
' sum, w. abl. '
5. make war, Oellura infero, in-
ferre, intull, lUatura ; (on, ex-
pressed by dm.).
I. man, vir,- viri; M.;, homS^
'(on, expressed by abl).
load, onero, axe, avi, mm.
lofty, ^tus, a, urn. v^ .
1. long,' adj-^ longus, a, um.
2. long, ad»., dia ; longer,
diatius. '--'
3. long.aB-a», dum, «0»y. .
lose, a-mitto, ere, -ml8i,_-mi8-
possessive pronoun.
2. man, to a-f , ad ttnum omngs.
manner, ratio, -5ni8, F.
many, m«l^' »6' »•' t//oIiW'
by anoth&r adjective, supply et
or -qae^ —and; bow many»
quot, indeclinable; so many,
tot, indeclinable ; very many,
permultl, ae, a.
2. marob, noHW, iter, itineris, N.
3. marob. \ine of-, agmen,
minis, N.
Ml batUe), d6per-d6, ere, -didi,
-ditum, or amitto.
1. loss, detrimentum, I, N.
2 loss {= disaster), calaravtas,
ft
loss (^disaster), c»i»iuiw», -nni.xo, .,.
Sti! F ; ( = dwatiwntog^), 4. marobing, noun, itep, iti-
dStnraentum, I, N. ; (c>f io*. °«"*' ^ J.„. r m ' •
inbaUle), ly amitt6 = io^, or Mar.«^^««, t^_. ^^^^
. interfici6=««ai/. ■ ""^'''^'ja aUhJit datum
loud, magnus, a, um. marsb,"paljtef Odi., F.
love ^W, ere, -l6xl, -l6cHi»; MassUl», Massiba, ae, F. ^^
, Knmilia e i JtUB sum, w. oW. * n
SrX, M6B, er, P. w V - 1- »'-»"'. '«'•• "'• '• „v,|' •
**'^ ^ - - • • - . , 2. mirtiter, no— bow, quaravi*
may^ licet, impersonal w. fiat.
mean, volo, velle, volui, w. dahr
* of reJUadvB pronoun. , *«'.
"nuMle. be-^> fig, fieri, factus 1. means ("ti>e<i«nm), r§s, «a,
BMMln«Ml 1«»««. -*«%'*• , ^ -^
•Luolas, Ltlcitts, i, M.
SST" -9 — ^ i - -
~ paulo, «<*v. ^'i^^ .^. "-^ ' ^ I («««Zdier), mil- t
2. little, be wltbln a very- of. ^ 2^ S«' «]' or jLn bv the
minimum abesse, w. quin. ,^ es, -itis, m^, or o/wn oy
Uve, vivo, ere, vjxi, victiwi^
^-»- —
-^^
•■
1
t - -,
. >1
'■'^^
,"/
' ^ ,U^
w-
■ 11
,i^
^^:-
\
V -
n
'
n
n
n
n
'■
n
ni
ni
>
.■■«
,.
M
^
,..
ii
as
If
m
• k
ra(
- m<
m^i
.■^
, tlfl, M. *'■■- ' '
factum. •
>r (gen,
*, f6cV ^ .
^
pB, are.
;
i, tisus
r
fero, in-
;' ;';^-.,-.
(on, ex-
hom^i
5r), mll-
i hy the
.1- -V,
I omnSs.
*
■ ', ■,
followed'
upply et
'■'■- -.
many»
' '\
many*
. .■:. \
y many.
..*'
cio, ere,
X march $
V ■
turn.
ineris, N.
agmen,
■
itey, iti-
nflptum
I, datum.
F.
r<>
totior, M,
iiamvIiC
li, m. cM'
\ "■"*■«■
), r@Bf nit
.1'
■ r PART VL—yOCABULARY. . ; 545
..'.■/'.■■'■■-::. ';..^.v 7_- :^-, ■:<^'' '.''-' ^ ■•■■''„./.■■■')■■■'., ■'-^:^--' .: ■ '-
2. meang of approach, adittis, 1. move, moveS, 6re, movl,
us,.M. motum.
A means, t>y no, nec^uSquam, 2. ?move forward, pr5-move6,
' *^** ere, -movi, -mStum. ,i
4^ means, by-^f, per; prep. w. ninoh, adv., multum ; multS. ,
^"^' ' . ' " -* multitude^ multiCfldo, -dinis, »;
meantime, in tlie-, intereS. mnrdep, caed^ is, v.
measure, consilium, I, n. 1, must, us^genindive pdMtive
1. meet, oc-curr5, ere, -currl, vnth anm.
-cursum. _ ,*> 2. must needs, necesse est, iu.
^. meet with, naiiciBcor, I, nacfcus dat.
or nanctus sum, w. ace. my, meua, a, m»; ' "
- niemoryv memoria, ae, y^ -^-^^-p— ~^^— -^ — .
mention, commemoro, fire, fiVIi ' . MT
; fitum. • ^x.v,«„ • •
_■ , ^ _ _, , . name, nom^n, -mims, n.
merehant. mercfitor, -Sris, m. „^«on, nati^, -onis, k
Xae, Fjac mansuStadS (-dims, nature, nStflrrae, f.
^ ,1 «j-*« i.«i.- ' nearer, propius, odtJ.
mert, virtus, -tatis; F. ■ nearest, pro^dmus, a, um,
merited, merijus, a, um^ i.. «««^ ^^rb, use c^s est
^message, nantius, f, M. _, {^ there is need), iw^rsor^,
lessenfirer, ntintms, I, M. w. a6i. /♦ ^ ««,
liddle, twe medius, a, urn, ai/j. 2. „eed, nmm, tisus, Qs, m. . '
my„i|fht, media nox(nocti8F.). neirlect, neg-leg6, ere, -16x1,
midst, ?Me medius, a, um, adj. -Igctum- «. i«^,
mile, =a ^/.ouW pac«r. * neighbor, finitimus, I, m. / ,
mistalcen, be-, «rro, Sre, avi, trum.
atum. i o ... »
, mode, «enus, -eris, ». . neque. '_■-'
^ Jtona, Mona, ae, f. ^ Nervli, Nervif, Srum, m. ptw. '
^ ^TfV '?"' **' money, pecflnia, ne«t, posterus, a, um ; proxinmfc
. ae, F.; (=cOTn), nummus, I, M. a, um , **«»»«»
•ontb, msnsis, i^ M. ^ew. novM, a, um.
,ii.orj,plfl8, ampMtis. night, no», noctis. r.
Morlnl, Monni, 5rum, M. "^Ine, novem. ; ^, *
■lomlnir, on the followinir--, ninety. nCnfiinntft. *' ^ *
^ .postridig ejus diSI mftne. «jnth, nonusTa, um. ^ . .
r,onthe-,po8tridi©,odt>. »0, nftllus, a, um. *^
mftximS, or ti*!«itpeWattT«. no one, . n«m6 ; «en., ntflllus :
.*. a-8cend6, ero, -soendi, ace, n6minem j aW., nOllS
-scenaum. ^j^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^
I, mfliiB, iHuutlH, M, noMe, ««bills, «. , "^
i--:_
\
.86
>
#-
* f
. 1» •
•^ '
f ■
i
*.m :-l.
546
r 9
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
noise, strepitus, us, m.
none, nClUus, a, um.
nor, neque.
1. not, non (in final htid imper-
ative clauses, ne) ; and not,
neque (or *in Jinal claiises,
neve, neu).
2. not a man, =W^ one.
3. not yet, nondafn.
notMngri nihil, n., indeclinable.
now ( = by this time), . jam ; ( = at
this present time), nunc.
1. number, numerus, I, m.,' or
use clause with qyot = how
many,
2. nnmber, larnre— , multitfldo,
-(^inis, F, ; magnus numerus,
1, M.v -
3. numbers, «rreat^, = large
number (tise sing.).
numerous, creber, bra, brum ;
mult^^e, a.
oak, r6b-ur, -oris, n.
1. oath, jflsjOrandum, jOrisjClr-
andl, N.
' 2. oath, take an— ^ jflro, are,
avi, Situm.
obedient, be—, pfireo, Sre,)*ul.
obey, pfireo, ere, ul, itum, w.
dat. ; obtempero,' are, avI,
fitum, w. dat.
o1]Jectlon8, raise—, recflso, ar6,
' fivi, fttiim, w. quominus and
8Hbjiim;tive.
observe, video, 5re, vldl, visum.
obtain a request, impetro, fire,
avI, atum. '
oocupy, ob-tine6, Sre,^ -tinul,
-ten turn.
ooour, fI5, fieri, factus sum.
ot( = about), d6, w. abl.
offer, pr5-p6n5> ere, -po8ttI,^po-
situm.
1. officer, liSgfttus, I, M.
, 2. officer, cavalry—, praefeotus
(T, M.) equitum;
old, vet-us, -e^is; (so m^my years)
old, natus, a, um.
on (of place where), in w. abl.;
(of time when), iise abl. only ;
(of making attack on), in w.
ace. ; (of direction), ab or ex w.
abl.; (=conceming),dew.abl.
on account of, propter, w. ace.
1. once, at—, statim, adv.
2. once more, = again.
1. one, unus, a, iftn; one hun-
dred, centum ; no one, nemo.
2. one another, inter s§.
3. one at a time, singularis, e, '
adj. « '
4. one, the one * . . the other,
alter . . . alter.
only, tlnus, a, um, adj.
onset, impetus, us, M.
open, pate-facio, ere, -feci, -fac- ^
tuml ; passive pate-fio, -fieri*
-factus sum.
!• opinion, sententia, ae, f. '
2. opinion,beof the— ,exIstimo,
are, avI, atum.
opportune, opporttinus, a, um.
opportunely, opportune.
!• opportunity, occaijio, , -onis,
F.; facultas, -tfitfs, f. ; potes-
tfis, -tatis, F.
2. opportunity, give — , facultfi-
tem dare, or potestatem facere.
1. oppo8e( = resist), repOgno, are,
fivl, atum ; re-sisto,' ere, -stitij
w. dat
2. oppeae (^aet in opposition);
op-pM», ere, -posul, -positum.
or, aut ; (in quest ions\ an ; or
not (in questions), anndn (di-
tect), necne (indirect). • /S
Oroynia, Orcynia, ae, F. .
1. order, jubeo, SrOf^uSit, jjis,
sum w. a4x. ; imperO, p/e, fivl,
atum, to. dat. *
2. orders, frive-, impwS; ftw,
fivl, atum. -: i .
3. orders, receive — ■; jubeor, Irlj '
' »>
^MawwmiX^^m^m^rtd).
Vi'
'»■■ 4
i:!
{di-
4
PABT VI.--yOCABULARY.
4. oMer, In— that, ut, n§. *'
5. order, in— to, uti" causa, ad.
6. orders, without .l||l|— * ^^'
' jussQsuo. '' r . "•^■^\.
Orpretorix, Orgetorix, -igis, M.
1. otlier, another, alius, a, ud.
2. pass bej^ond, e-gredior, T,
„ -gressus sum, tvith extra and
Vi'cc. , - „
3. pass the winter, hi^mo, fire,
avi, £ltum.
passage, iter, itiriSris, N.
2. other, the — , (of two), alter, pay, pendo, ere^ pependi, pen-
era, erum ; { = the remamin<j)y sfim. ^^
reliquus, a, urn. peace, pax, plois, f.
3. others, the — , reliqui, ae, a ; people, populus, I, M. .
c§terl, ae, a.' perceive, con-spicio, ere, -sjUxi,
onjBrht, tise gernndire passive tvith -spectum ; intel-lego, ere, -lexl,
sum ; or debeo, ere, ul j opor
tet, ere, oportuit. ^
our, noster, tra, trum.
out of, ex, e, w. ahl.
outer, exterior, ius,
outside, sro— of, e^gredior. T,
-gressus suiii, w. extra an<mcc. a. permit, poti or^ i^ p ;
ovpr (o/ bridges over riverif)^ in, 2. perniltted, be—, li
" w^ abt.
ov<Sfp\itJnplmy op-primo, ere,
-press!, -pjpBssuni. „
own, usetiposaessive pronoims iitnth
or without ipeiuHy ipsorum.
-lectum.
perhaps, fortassS.
peril, perlculum, I, n. ; to the—,
cum perlculo.
permission, have — , licet, licere,
liciiit, imjyersonal, iv. dat.
1. permit, poti or^ i^ p asgusjum,
permitted, T»
sonaly VK dat.
icet, imj/er-
, ipse, a, um,
1* pace, passus, us, M,
1. person (=a man), generally
untranslated.
2. person, In-
— himself. -
persuade, persua-deo, §re, -sT,
^sum, iv. dat/
pillage, praedor, S.r!, atus sum.
2. ^ace, 8la^^^|n— , de celeritfite pitch (of a camp)^ pono, ere,
posui, positum.
pity, feel— foir, misereor, erl,
itus sum, ■?('. gen. >
!• place, verb, pono, ere, posui,
positum; colloco, are, avi,
Htum.
2. place, noun, locus, i, M. sing. I
loG&, Oram, jf. pliir. "
3. place, leadingy , piincip&tus,
as, M.
. 4. pl(|pe, in that — , ibi, oAv,
kH^ place", to that—-, eo, adv. -
plan, sponsilium, I, N.
pleasing, gratus, a, um.
plenty, copia, ae, V,
ri-nlittor, ^^issils sum
1. paui<5,,timor, -oris, m.
2. panic, throw into^a — ,perter-
reo, 6re, uI, itum.
1. pardon, verb, I-gnosc^, ere,-
-gnovi, w. dat. Q
2. pardon, noun, venlia;, ae, f.
rrent, parens, -entis, M. or F.
part, pars, partis, f.
S. .part, in — ,partim, adv: • '
3. part, fof the most-^, mfixi-
msim partenjl^; , ^
4. part, take— in, inter-sum,
-esse, -iful, to. (JJat. ;
p^rUclpate In, intec-Bum, -esse,
-fuTTlt'. dat. ',.. /
party, f^£tl.6, -^nis, F.
1. put*
, plunder, praeda, aOfF.
. - !• point out, doceo, Sre, uT ; os-
); gfi, Tre , iI,(yYl). tiftndft, ftm, 4nndT, tontum or
' , ostensum.
%
A-
"/•:
*?"?."
■^^
mk
"■«4fc,
548
#
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
paH. in ilrus ti>i*/i sum. .■
,3. pi>tnt, on tj^ait — , j=»f>
,' tkOit, ''■■'■'"'. '■ -■.'■"'
political olianfire, noVae res, p.
plv,r. • '
Fompey. Pompeius, i, ^, «
\> popular, acceptqii a, um.
.' port, portus, tls, M.
portion, pars, partis, F. ' „ .
1* position, locus, I, M.; or use
daiise with ubi or qud in loc6,
2» position, keep at—^ con-sistq,
ere, -stitl. -^
possess, ob-tine5, 5re, -tinuT,
-tentum ; pos-sideo, ere, sSdi,
-ses^um. .
,1», possessions, their — , ^0^y
orum, N. plvA'.
preparations, make—, comparS,
S.re, avi, &tum.
p repare , pare, are, fivT, fitum.
1. presen t, ddno, g,re, 3.vl, 9>tum.
2. present, be — , ad-sum, -esse,
-ful.
'^kpeserve, re-tine6, Sre, -tinul,
;tentum. s
1« press, press hard, urgeS, Sre,
ursi ; premu, ere, press!, pres-
Bum. V .
2. pr^ss forward, In-stsf^ftre,
-stitl, st&tum.
p revai l, superd, Are, ftvT, Stum/
preveht, prohibeo, §re, ul, itum.
prevTous, superior, ius.
pre vio usly, ante. '
price, pretium, I, N.
priest, sacer^dos, -dotis, M.
2. podbession, gain— of, ^tior, prisoner, captlvus, I, M
Xrl, Itus sum, w. hiH.
3. possession, take -of, occUp5,
are, aviv fttum, w. ace.
.possibility, potestas, -tatis, F.^
possible, as ; . as — , quam,
toUh sivperlhtive.
posterity, poster!, 6rum, m
1. powetfi,' royal—, chief—,
preme — , rSgnu
2. power, grain the doverei
~ of, potior, iri, Itus
1. powerful, firmus,
potSns, -entis.
2. powerful, be fhost—, plari-
mum.possum, posse, potuT.
practice, consuetUdo, -dinis, f.
1. praise, verb, laudS, are, avi,
fttum. ', '
u «I *t<Q. praise, noun, laus, laudis, f.'
pray for, dSprecor, ari, atus
sum, w. ace.
private, prlvfttus, a, um.
proceed, pro-gredior, I, -gressus
BOm ; pro-c3dd, ere, -cesslj
•cessum. .' "^
prpceedings, —tMngs.
procure, paro, are, avi, atum ; <
comparo, are, ftyl, atum'. •
u- - produce, ef-ficio, ere, -fScI^ -fec-
tum.
project, form a, — cSnsilium (I,
N.) capio (ere, cSpI, captum)
or ineo (Ire, il, itum).
promise, malce a promise, pol-
liceor, eri, itus sum. ■,
prompt, hortor, arl, atus^sum ;
im-peilo, ere; -pull, -pulsum.
protect, mtlnioy Ire, Ivlj Itum.
projection, praesidium, I, N.
protract, . pro-dilc6, ,ere, -dttxl,
-ductum. .
provMo for, pr6-vide6, ^rO,
-vldi, -visum, 10. dat. or ace.
prove, probd, are, avi, atum. '
precedent, exemplum, l^ M. \.^
precedingr, superior, ius.
pry|er {ivith noiins), ante-pono, pro vl^p4 that^ dum.
«re, -posul, -positum ; {with province, prSvinoiai ae, F,
the irijlinitive) maid, malle, provisions, commeatus, tls, M.
I j i T. {iisTthesivufHlar).
jaiyj
r
■;-• — '- ■» • ^-^.l
'U
PART VI. — VOCABULARY.
649
mpard,
fttum.
, fttum.
, -jesse,
-tinul, _
sS, 8re,
[, pres-
[, itum. ^
M.
^ressus
-cessij
3.tum ;
n . •
3l» -fec-
ium (I,
aptum)
.pol-
io
s^um ;
ilsuni. '
turn. A
[, N. .-W
>daxi, ■
•r ace.
bum., '
•■;■' ■;^-. T " '""T
F,'
tlS, M. ,
A^^
- +
provoke to battle, proelio (a6?.)
Jacess-o, ere, -ivi, -Itum.
prowess, virtfls, -tfltis, F.
panigh, ulciscor, I, ultus sum.
panlshment, supplicium, i, n.
pnpii, discipulus, i, M.
!• purpose, res, rei, F.
2. purpose, for the— of, causa,
w. gen, preceding.
!• pursue, pro-sequor, I, -secii-
tus sum ; c^gequor, i, -secil-
tus sum ; |HPr>i', h secutus
sum. ^^
2. pursue a| march, iter faci5
(ere, feci, factum). *
push forward {or onward). Con-
ten-do, ere, -dl, -tum.
,1-. put, colloco, ate, ayl, atum ;
pono, ere, posul, positum.
2. |>ut (In chains), con-jicio; '
ere, -jeci, -^nctxxvci^ vnth in and
3. p ut to d eath, inter-ficio, ei-e,
-feci, -fectum.
4. put spurs to a horse, equum
H admitto, ere, -misi, -missum.
•f B. p ut an end to,-rflnem facio,
ere, feci, factum, w. gen.
rashness, temeritfts, -tatis, F. fc
rate, at any — , certe.
1. rather, pptius, magis.
2. rather, had — , nisUo, mS,lle,
mS,luI.
reach, per-venio, Ire, -v6nT,
-ventum, tcith ad or in and
age.
roadUy(==jgithontcanse%temere.
1. readw^K»^U8, ^r, um ; (for
or to, ^^^rtZZgf).
2. ready, make — , comparo, are,
avi, atum.
3. ready, get, — (of arms), expe-
^ dio, Ire, IvI, itum.; (of vessels),
paro, are, avI, atum.
rear, novissimumagmen (-minis),
N. ; In the rear, a tergo, or
aversuSj^a, um in agt cement i
to the rear, ad novissimos.
re ason , causa, ae, F. ; or use
claui
1. quarters* from all^ — , un-
' dique, arfu.
2. 'quarters, winter—, hlberna,
orum, N. plnr.
qneoji, reglna, ae, f. r^-
qu estio n, quaero, ere, quaesTvI,
qGaesitum. ,
qnlekly, celeriter. "^
quickness, celeritas, -tatis, f.
■ .< " ■ - ..." '"■,.- ■ ' '
raflre, the Ibattle rages, piigna*
* tur, impersonal passive. *
tAiae(— collect), comparo, are,
TtVi, atum.
ramparfi. vftMiim.
B> ■ W l
^ause with cur or quamobrem
rebuild, restit-u6, eye, -ul,
-iitum.
recall, reyoco, are, avI, atum.
1. receive, ac-cipio, ei^e, -cSpI,
. -ceptuiu.
2. receive orders — &eor(2ere(f.
r ecen t, rec6ns, -en^is.
recover (=win back), reciperfl,
are, avI, atum ; (=rega^i cour-
age), s§ re-cipio, ere, -cepi,
-ceptum.
'refrain, tempero, fire, avI,
._:. atum. ^-i -'■::/,:■■.'■'.■:_..<..,,, I, :■::..,
refuse (=ohjeet% rectisS, are,
avi, atum.
resralu, recipero, fire, avT, atum.
regard, habeo, ere, ul, itum.
reglflto, regio, -onis, f.
regular (Of troops), legiSnarius,
a, um.
reinforcements, subsidiuni, i, n.
relationship, cognatio, ronu, f.
reliance, place -on, con-fldfli,
ere, -fisus sum, w. dat.
*el«et»HceF- withr^ itty ltua» n,
um, adj. in agreeinett$.
rank, 6rd6, -dinis, M.
^ ' . ■ A* ■:- :■-•;..-■,/■:: ^.;SV'-^-. . • ^.::::--..v;,.'..
' ^ - -'■* . / ■■ ■' ■, ;•'■-;:■.::•■
' ^ ' . ' ■ ■ A'^ /■" ^::-:^',, ■:■'■■''.. "■'- ^ ;'-\ ■ ;. \
I ■• -,s -■■ ■- %: . ' ^ /-v--:. ; ■- ;-. • ,:■ , ■■-■..:■ /
.« . ' . ■■-■-. . ■ .. . • ■ , '
1 ■ ■ ,■"■■■.' .1 " .« ■ / :■■■"■■.
,- ■ . ^-. . •' , '■'■'-''-■'' ."■■'"■.*- "'■'-■■ ' ■■•-'".■ '" . '.'■""'--■"■'-
' - ' ' "^'~~-^ ■ "' ■ ■"■ ■ ■■ - '«'■"•■ ■■ ■ -' ,. •■•iaas-« ■
•■'■■■■■- .^ -.■.''-^■:V-\^^ , ■ .■.■■■ :•.•■■■- .; . ".'^ ;:aB|
, * ,.■ .\ ^-^^^ J \ 'fi-- ■ . • ' * ,'. . ■ . - . I^Mf
/:- "^7- ,--■■---':---■-■:::•.-:■■;:- ■■-^~--^-.^V^ •. r -•:.-^:' ---:■ -;:^..,-- ■ --■■;-. ^.; ;-- ^v V r M ".-V^vIF
-^■■v.-t-.. -(*■ s- -^- ■• » :\ ' ■ ■ . ■ ■ ■ ^ •' '"^;- -. i^,'
, , „ .. ^ _, . ,, ,._, ..^._^ ,. ..^,.,..,. .
' -^ "- *^ -■■"■" ^, ■■■/v.. 'V:- ■ __._„--.----Pv --—r"^ ^v:" "
1 ___- — "■ ' . ■ . • i^''!, ' -■--■ Vl-,
^ -^ ^ - ' '■_ :■ 1 - . ' - • ■ ■ ^ ■ . ' . ■ » . •
' — 1 « ' ■ : •'• ' " "' , -. ' - ' .. ' '. ." -'%(*•'''"'* '
'; .^' ; - '-^B^
'■ S ' . ■:.■,_, :; •.■ . .■ '■■-■.f.-.'f^, \ I
, ■ ■ - ■•■/■.■■■■ - ■■",. ^ .. ■ .:,-. ./ :-.-/■:.■%*'•■ :
.'■''„ ■: ■' ■ ■
/: ''"'[. ' ' :y- '■■ /",./- " "' '•'■:,:; ■ <■. ' , t '- ^.,' ./; ■ ;. ■; „; -^ ■■'■,:':,
. 'v //■^v' .'-■•. v|^;. ,,■-,- '-":.-■■ \ »V ,; -vt' •,.;.■■-;■. » ; '. ■ '_ , ■■■.■';' ^,; ,V"Vi';'/=* ■i'''' ■"!"' .^^'"'^
', •■;■■■■, V. ■.•''• si^; - ■. ', ". ■."".-- : ■' K ..;•.■* \ -f'/- ;■■",.;' :'. -^■-' . ■"- ' ..,/.;. .v ./:".,;:.,;':.:?/. ^ ;,, ,:■.''... - ' \ y- f-
.'.'■'''■, ■■■■-'"■/■■'■ ^ ..■'.•'■•' ■ ■■.,■■■-." ~:-:';...v.- ■ '. ■.'"■:..■ '.i- •,..:; -•* , ■■..,>,; c»^/ .■;.,.•';■'.;.•■ ." ,;■■. J^
■■■;;^:, ,. :;;.-;-;:v;;: ;;>.::.::^/^ .- V' .'• ■'■;■-■■ ■-\"--" ' -' , • ■ .-V ■:■;•«'■,. 1
^^^^^^^^^
■ .- „ ' ' ' ' . .,.' ■ •"' -,.,.. ■•. "^
^^^^^^^^^^^^
-:;',,:''''. 1 ."''^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^. ^
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^1
in
^^^F
/ '■ -1; -.V: -: ,;.■;:;,■•;■■:;;■ . ^■^;^■/-:-v:;v:■^,;■^'^^:■.• ■■'•■■i';: • ' '■' /.. -:/
■' •.•,'"
^^^^^^^^^^^^
^^^^^^^r-' "'
' ■ ' \^ '■ \ '■■ ■'-,:■*;;;■■ v.- .y. '■--. ^ .', A . ,■ ' ■ . ■ ' ' .'i'. :;''-^
^^^^^^^^^^^^^
1 ■. ■ ■ *'■ '
':-■'■ ^^ . ■ ' *'}" ' '
^^^^^^^^'
^^^^^^^^^r
■ "A. '■ ■', - -x T
• . "■" '
, 'I . '■.■■:
HPr ^ <*
'■z ■■ ,.•:.•■■ ■.:■ .. \i
|P^ .'■■*'■'.
■v, ., ' . ■< • ■ > . '•,■■.,
-% ■'
■•''■. . • ■ " . ■ ''*•■"
■ ■ ■ , - t' ■ . -* '■.'■'. ''■• ■'■'^- ■
■.",.■ --.l! ■ *" ' ' ' ■ " ... 1 ■ ■ ■ '
' ■ • . »
' , <, y ■ ' ' ' ^ ' '
'■ ' ■ ■ ' .
,■-':...:• v ■;^-'-" ■ • !',:' ■ -.■■ ' " - • , '■'■
■"l .'
■ ■ " •■.. "• ' i''■
. . % ■ , '
. , ■ ■■
. --.-■-- ■..-■■:■'■■-.■ ^-■.- ..■■i^ -■■ ^ . ,:.-::.-: .
. ,__ ' ■■
»v, .-■■; .-- .
.^^ '■-- .■'" *■■ ■■ . ■ ■'- ■■ . ■ ■ ' ■ ' ,
•■ . '„. i'
/^■•. ' '\ ^ ■ . >■•, ■' •■■■•. ■/ .
,"•'■"'
■■■■■ :" , . - ■ . , « " ' ' . ../' -, ■'! ■",
4 . f
'^; ■ '.1 ■ ' " ' . •, ■■ ."
' 9 «
, - * •
• ■;
^ » _ ■«■■-■..
{
--■ - ^ ■ ■ ^*?-^, ■■■ r - -' ■"'^^t-
>•:■■. ■ . ■ , ' ' . •''' ■^■■^..^'"■■■---. ■;■■""- ' ' '
■' - '• ,' '•■ ■■ ■ ■ ' > '
'r ■ ■ . . . ' '. T ■ , ■ '• ■ •.*;..••■.■ - :.-■ .
' ' - ' ■ " ■
• , '
• (r
■ ■ ^■-■.. ; . ' ,. ■■ '' J ' ," ' ■"•. " -■•• ■ ' ■■' " ■ ■"■■
V. ^ . ; .,, - ■•■■ ...■■- - V ,,! ■ . .■ . ■; ■ .■ ... • . ■■•■ ■ ■ .■-
.^ _ ,
.*.■.■.'■■-■ ■.■:■*■
.. \ . _;, -.' ^ .'■ ■ ■ .' . ,• .- - , . "".' ■ '.;- - .. '
: ■■ ■- ••■ ■■ " ' ■; ■ 1 ■ /'.r
■•■,■•■ ■'■■,'■■-■■',■■■,■ ' » '■'.■ ■ ■-■,.- ' :'i . '
■■ :'..\ :
■-:, -4 ■-..-■ ■ ■ .■ .^^jH" \Sf^
•■ ' . ' V ■ -. ' - -,■'■"- ■ .''
'■"''-■ -V ■ J^E'^^ '^^^'''*
• ' ./ •■, .■,''"■.'<; - " " ■ ..J,.' ?/'. ,■ . '■ "^ ,,, ■' '■
■ -^-^." > >;;■;,: ■:■^ ■■■ ".'■^■■^^■'^"' ■■'_■. :•* '^''^ ^
■'■.■■■■'■■■ " , ■ ■ . -^..■: ,' .■ '■ ' ' t
";^.■-■.■"^.■'■'■iV.'>■■ .:v^'.- '^ ,
**i?«i,
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)
V-
//
/-
.*- A
.-^
/► .•
Y^.
■%v
I.I
11.25
1.0 ^Bim
£ 1^ |2.0
1.4 ■i:fc
^^
..». v,
^'
-.■J •^.
"t^ences
Corpordtion
.i
99 wht mam itmit
WiMTH.N.Y. USM
(7J«)179.4S01
■ ' ^^ —
41
."' "H "
• ■
e ' . *
' '■ ■ , ' ' ■ ■ ' ' . "
K
' ■ ■ ■ ^
>^
- . ' ' : ■'■"■^6 . ' . . . " ' '^ . .
4?j
^Br
. ■ \ - ■ ■> ,'',.■ ■ •» ■ . ' .
^
*
y
' '
■ - . ■ ■■■•"•■ ' ■ , ■ ' ■ ■ ■ ,
.'■■■'
* ' ■",
' ■ ■ "• ■ ■ ' . .■ " ■,■■'■■" * "^ " . ■
:■ '
'/.;..,.' ' . ■ ' ■. " ' : . ' .;■ . , ' * ^ ■ .■■ . ,: .■ ,■ '"■ ■
■ #"
;/--. ^'y ; /" ,^ '■ : ■ ; , ■ r ^ ■ •- ' - , ' ■ , \\ -' .
■■■■■,■'• ' • ■ - ■ ' ■• .w
■ ■ '*'- ■
• : ■ ■ ' ■' . V ,
, » .... . . , - . -. . ■ " . «;
,
• * ^' - ' .•■'...■ ^. . . ..
'
„ -v . . • •
* . ., '
•■
- * « •% •^'■' ' - '
»
_ • ./'■'', /
, ' . . * .'■..' ' ' • ■ '■'^
1 .. . ■ ■
■
: ' ' .■'•/: i^ >■ - ■' 's'.; ' ■ ■ ^^- -. • .■•. '■ '
J^ - * ' . . -•.„■■'.
'
! ■ ' . . • ,..: •
-^ '^.
•*.' 1 ,•.'••'. ^ . ' •■
r
k\ .','%, ^ . . _ . ^ ._ ■ '
t
«, *
' r ■« ' . •■». > . ■' ' ■ ' ' . . "
*
•> ' , -
fc
■
r '^ \- ' '■ '" ^ ' ' ' "^s^
■'"">•>., < ^**^ • , . ■
*'
• ":■•'' ■- ' ■' ' ■ •
K ,■-■•
A. '
*■-....■■■.- . . . ■ 1
^^^
:i:::.r. _..,.... ._.:::::::..i::.i:i::::,,::,:.l,,* . ■.,:::,_:......*.:■■ : :_. ' ': . . "
?'^SSSS.
• '. - ^>* . ,'■--■•.
.\^N
■^<^'> . ,.
•, i ■ . ■ ■ . ■ ■ *
•
I'l . .'*'..'■ ■■■■■■ ^ ^ . ' -
' \-. .
*. • "^ S. vl
.,.♦..
«
... , , ^
f ■■ . ' .
i , • . .
-^^HB '''^ ^
, . . ■' ' ^ ^
• ■ . .1 '
550
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
relytny on, frStus, a, urn, w. ahl. res^gnd, Ire-spondeo, gre, -gpoii^
re ma in, re-mrtneo, ere, -man- di, -sponsum. , "
BlT -mfinsum ; nianep j per- 1. rest, verby pono^ eire, posul,
nianed. »1
remaining, reliquus, a, umT^
remember, memoriam re-tined,
fire, -tinul, -tentum, to. gen. ;
meminl, isse (imperative^ me-
men-t6, -t6te); reminiscor, I.
Benkl, R4ml, drum, m. plur.~
remind, commone-faoid, ere,
-fScI, -factum,
rehiotest, ultimus, a, um.
positum. " , V.
2. rest, itoun; use reliquus, a,
um, adj. .
restore,' red-dd, ere, -didi, -4i-
tum.
restrain, con-tineo, 5re, -tinul,
-tentum ; prohibeo, 6re, ul.
itum.
1. resnlt/ be the result, flo,
fieri, factus sum.
remove, re-move6, 6re, -movl, 2. reunlt in ( = be attended ivith\
-mStum. sum, esse,- f ul, vHth cum and
re|iew, renovS, are, avi, atum. oW.
renown, fama, ad, f. ; glOria, ae, retainer, olifins, -entis, m.
Frnaus, laudis, f. retire, sS re-cipio, er<, -cSpI,
repair, reficid, ere, -f6cl, fetitum.. -ceptum ; sS con-fero, -ferr«,
repljr, re-spondefi, Sre, -spondl,
H8p5nsuhi.
I» report, wrft, nOntid, are, avT^
ituripj ' renflntiS, are, avi,
contull, collatuAi.
1. retreat, verb^ pedem re ferfl
(-ferre, rettull, -latum) ; sd re-
cipiS, ere, -cSpI, -ceptum.
Itum ; re-fer6, ferre, rettull, 2. retreat, noun, receptua, tls,
relatum. m. ; f uga, ae, f.
«• report, noun, fama, ae, f. ^ retreat, beat a—, aS re-cipiO»
3. ^report, brlnif — , famam per- ere, -ofipl, -ceptum.
ferO, -ferre, -tyll, -latum, or 1.' return, verh, re-vertor, !,
• 14M nQntiS, '^annwinee. versus sum ; re-verto, • ere, '
'^Sr*»!^*' *^^'^'**®"^*' ^"^» '^®'*' ^®'"' redeO, -Ire, -il (-ivl),.
ul, hSnsuni. *-ituiii* «' ..
reptile, rfis pflblioa, rel pnbli- 2. return, roturntnt, H<*»in, re-
oae, F. • - . dituB, Qs, m., or utte claune toith
4* request, pet-O, ere, -Ivl, verb.
-Itum, tmth ab and abl.
2. request, ffaln— , obtain — , im-
petrO, are, avI, atum.
r^inlre, imperO, are, avI, fttum.
reserve, subsidium, I, n.
r«»slst, re-Buta, ere, -stitl, uifdat.
reslstanoe,, UM the wrb resists.
resiftlntlon, cflnsilium, I, n. ;
revenue, vectTgal, -RUs, v.
revolt, de-ficid, ere, -feci,
turn,
rownwl, praemium, I,»H.
BlTine, RhCnus, I, m.
R^one, RhodanuB, I, m.
rltfcTup, adequitO, a^^^
atum.
M--
•▼T,
form m resolution, cflnailium 1. rlffbt, noun, jds, jnri», w.
lii-eO, Ire, -il, -itum. - ~ ^ 2. rl^t^ oMij.i-dexter, tra, trum.
r«solve, OdnatituO, er«, ' -ul, rl|ie, niltarus, a, um.
•fltum. river, flAmen, -minis, W.
faonrces, Op8a. Um. F. pi
%
ur.
!Hi*
rnag. via, aft, F r it , er, itineriii, ml
f
'• I
, j-^
M
PART VL— VOCABULARY.
551
romm aboyt, vagor, ftrl, fttua
sum. . -
Boman, noun, RSmftnui, I, m.;
't^dj.) Bdmftnus, a, urn.
!• Rome (as aplaee), RSma^ ae,
F.; at Borne, Ramae.
-2. Rome(fl^ a nation), populus
(I, M.) Rdm&nus=^Ae Boman
people. •
8. Rome, of— ( = jiSomanX ^^-
i/m&nua, a, utn.
I* roat, nov/n, fuga, ae, f.
2. rout, verb, fug6, ftre, ftvl,
Slmh ; f undd, ere, f adi, f daum.
route» itef, itineris, n.
rojral power^ rSgnum, I, n.
ruEBiib, aggor, aggeris, u.
r ugge d, asjier, era, eruiu.
rflleTimperium, I, n.
run down, d6-curr<J, ere, -ourrt
W -cucurrl» -curaum.
!• rush to arms, con^ourro, ere,
-ourrt or -cucurrl, -curaum.
2. rush out, sS S-jicid, ere, JjScI,
-jeotum ; (of, ex w. oW.).
"i •.,.•,■*■
Sabla, Sabis, is/ M. V / •
•a$£fid, saoer, ora, orum.
safe, tatus, a, urn.
Mifeffufn-a. praesidium, I, n.
s«f<ty, salOs, -fltis, f. ; in Mfety,
UM incolumis, e, cidj., '=aafe.
•aU, nftvigfl, ftre, ftyl, fttum ;
Xior, in w. occ).
■atlor, nauta, ae, m.
■a]^, for the— of, oausft,- w. gen.
preceding. ^.
■alljr, 6rupti6, -Snis, f.
same. Idem, eadem, idem.
•atlBfaetion, give—, satis-faoid,
ere, -feci, -factum.
■aTe( "« retctie), 6-rh)i5,ere,-ripnI,
ir -reptum, with %x and aU.;
{" spare), cfinservS, ftre, ftvl,
itum.
foilowed by negative, use negji,
Are, ftvl, fttum, =cteni/,
■ci^reely, vix. ,' ;
scatter, dis-pcrgo, ere, -si, -sum.
soarglty, inopia, ae, F.
soont, expldrfttor, -dris, m.
1. sea, mare, maris, N.
2. sea, on the—, maritimus, a,
um, adj.
3. seajos^st, 5ra (ae, f.) mari-
tima.
•earqlijicr, quaerS, ere, quaesl-
vi, quaesltum,- to. ace,
1. second, secundus, a, um.
2. second, a-»-t||^e, iterum, adv.
secretly, clam^'J*.
seoiDure, liitlnii^ Ire, Ivt, Itum.
se^Tvidefi, Sre, vidi; visum.
seek, pet-q, ere, -IvI, -itum ;
TSppet.fl,'ere, -Ivf, -Itum.
seem, videor,- 6rl, vtous sum,
"passive. ,
seise ( = <aJfce possession of), oc-
Sup5, ftre, ftvl, fttum ; ('^with
■ impedimenta), potior, Iri, Itus
sum; {'^take prisoner), oom-
pre-hendo, ere, ^^eijdl, -h6n-
V sum.
select, d6-lig(S, evfi, -Up, -ISotum.
senate, senfttus, CLs, M.
1. send, mittd, we. misl, mis-
sulB. , ^ '
2. sepdlMMk, re-i^t^, ere, -mIsL
-missum.
-^^. Miid^orward, «end in ad-
vanee, prae-mittO, ero, -mlsI,
•missum.
sepacgte, dl-vidfi, ere, -visl,
-visum.
Sequanl, SfiquanI, drum, M. plur.
seriously, graviter.
1. servlee, offioium, I, H.
2. service, be of-, Usui esse.
!• set fire to, in-oendd, ere, cen-
dl, -cSnsum, w. ace.
2. set out, pro-flaiaoog, I, .Itttoi
■laMIMM
662
PRIMARY XATIN BOOK.
U. * >'
' ^' « «t f all, nflyes QolvS, ere,
soivl, aolatuxn, 'B'looae the 8hip$.
•etU'e (<pia/ce up p(mtion\ cGn-
eSdHf ere, -sfidl, -sessum ; ( » ^*
cide), odii8tit-u(J, ere, -ul,
Htum. " ,
•eir«u, 8eptem.
•efeath, Septimus,. a, um.
x" soTenty, septufigintA.
'^ «eyjral. oomplOres, -imn ; ali-
quot, tn<{emna62«.
•evere, gravis, e.
■hamefal, turpis, e. '
•hatter, af-fl4[<S, ere, -flixl,
-fliotum.
'1* shli», nftvis,, is, w.
.2. «Qp of wlir, n&vis longa.
. slioiS^ lltus, -ozis, N. '
1- sliort, brevis, e. \
.^' *• short, ^ a -time, brevL j
3. short, (for) a— time, paulis-
per. * '
shortly, brevi»
k should, —ougkiy use gerundive
■ ^ wUh sum ; for o^^er value» me
V. 144
sh523t| olftmor, -Oris, it.
sh^i oBten-d5, ere, -dl, •tiim or
ostSnsum. <'
■ shudder -at, hotreO, 6re, ul, w,
ace.
1. side, latus, -eris, N. | pars,
parCii, w. *
2. side, from all sides, undique,
adv.
3. side, on both sides, utrimque,
ckLv. - .
4. side, en this— of, ois w «itrft
• frtj^. w. ace.
6. -side, on the other— of, tr&ns,
prep. w. ace.
siffht, cOnspeotus, Us, KU.
signal, Blgnuin, I, N.
l.lSlent, taoitus, a, um.
8. sUent, he—, keep-, Ibaoed,
ere, ul, itum. -
six, sex ; six hundred, sescentl,
ae, a. ' '
sixteenth, sextus (a^ um) de-
-cimus (a, um).
sl3^ty> sex&^ntft.
slse, mftgmttldS, -dinis, v.; or
use clauae with quantus, a, um,
sklr ffl4 »h, proelium (l, v.) leve
or parvufum, = alight haitU,
•laughter, caedSs, is, F.
•l^re, servus, I, m. v
•laverjr, servittlfi, -tfltis, »:
•lay, inter-ficie, ere, -feci, -feo-
"Vim ; oc-oidd, ere, -titdl, -olsum.
•ling, funds, ae, F. ^
•ifn^er, funditor, -Oris, u.
•lo^&g, dSolIvis, e. ' ' <
•maOi; parvus, a, um. ' ^
•n^^er, min-or, -us. '
•natch ail'ay, 6-ripid, ere,-ripul,t
-reptum ; (from, uae doi).
■o, {=to ^um an extent)^ tarn ;
" ( = ther^ore), itaque ; so great,
tantus, a, um. ' / > i;
•ffldler, mll-es, -itis, M.
>1< some i=8ome or oi
quis (aliqul), -q
^ -quod; («a /et»;
'ae, a. o^
3« some. . ..othersr^I . . . alii.
3. some one, aliquis.
4. some day, ediquandO.
'son, fllius;4, H.
son-^|n-law,rgener, eri, K.
1. soon, mox,'brevI.
2. sooner, ("» rather), potiuSi^
•05^^, as-as, simul atque.
sorry, be — , paenitet, tmtMWsonoi.
1. sort, of what— , quAlis, e, adj.
2. sort, whst-of man, qul^s, e;
»=io/ whai sort.
sovereign power, imperium, I,
N., ; rfignum, I, n.
space, spatium, I, N.
spare, paroO, ere, peperol, par*
vL-daL \ ■• ■> -
.*(
( V
' > <j>
•Inee, cum.
•peak, dloO, ere, dbtl, didtum.^
.. I.!
PART yi.— VOCABULARY.
U
653
■pear, hasta, ae, F. >
■peoliied, certus, a, um. ,
•peotaT, «how— lndalg«nce =in-
dtdye epeciaUy.
•peolalljr, praeqipuS.
•peeoh,^ orfitiS, -finis, f.
speed, celeritfis, -tatis, f.; cur-
BUS, Us, M.
speedily, celerit^rj , -
speHT, cdn-stlm5, i6re, -sarapsi,
-stlmptum.
spirit, animus, I, M. ; virttts,
^tSfcis, F.
•P'iair, V6r, v6ris, k.
■£y» speculator, -Sris, m.
aqaadron, turma, ae, F.
•tain, In-ficio, ere, -fScI, -fectum.
stand one's arronnd, coh-siatS,
ere, -stitl.
!• standard, slgnum, I, n.
2. BtanSard bearer, —he who
bore the standard.
st^, 6-gredior, I, -gressus aum,
1. state, noiwt, clvit^ -tatis, F, ;
r6s pablica, rel pQblicae, f.
2. state, verb, dIo6, ere, .dixl,
dictum.
statement, v6x, v^is, F. ; or use
died = say. % ;
statton, colloc5, ftre, ftvl, fttum.
stayT moror, ftrf, atus sum.
steep, prae-ceps, -cipitisj »r-
duus, a, um.
stimulate, exoitS, ftre, ftvl, atum.
stir^ incitfl, ftre, ftvl, fttum.
■ton« (Jor 6titidt)wf),«8axum, I,
^ (/orhuriing),J&p-iB, -idis, m.
st£p, odn-sistfi, ere, -atitl.
1. storm, verb, exptlgnfi, ftre,
ftvl, fttum.
2. storm, fumn, tempeatfts, -tftr
tis, F.
3. storm, take by—, ofform,
. (verb). ,
stra^AKeni, cSnailium, I, n. '
stream, rivus, I, m. ; flOnittn,
■ minuty i»;
str^BSlth, ^rmittldO, -dinis; f.;
ortise cJaiMe with quot.
strengthen, firmo, ftre, ftvl,
fttum ; mflnio, ire, IvI, Ituni.
jtretoh, pertinefi, Sre, ul.
strive, conten-do, ere, -^, -tum ;
nltor, I, n!su8 sum.
stronflr» be — , valed, 6re, uL
1. stniflrKie, verby Iab$rd« ftre,
ftvl, fttum.
2. straggle, nmrn, certftmen,
, -minis, N. ; bellum, I, k.
snlijeotion, servitfls, -tfltis, r. -
submit, servio. Ire, IvI, Itum. *
successfully, bene ; fslloiter.
Recessive, continuus, a, um.
1. snob (ago 8rr«at), tantus, fL
um.
2. anoh, of— a oharaoter, tftlis, ©.
3. auoh . . . as, often qui w. »u6-
junctive.
!• sudden, k«pentlnus, a, um.
2* ■'^SHj?*»! make a -attack, use
BubiEo, adv., =s^iddenly.
suddenly, 8ubit5.
suT^or, pet-5, fere, -IvI, -Itum,
w. ace.
suffer (^receive), ao-cipi5, ere,
-cSpi, -ceptum; (=»<»«<m>), pa-
tior, I, paasus sum.
sulBcient, suffloiently, satis.
•nafffestlon, at tbe-of, use auc-
tor, -Sris,, M., 'Bisuggester^ in
(tbl. abaci.
sulteble, id5neus, a, um.
summer, aeatfts, -tfttJa^F.
summon {of several persona), con-
vo?Rr, ftre, ftvl, fttum ; (of one
person), vocfl, ftre, ftvi, atum.
superior, be — , prae-stfi, ftre,
-atW, -stfttum or -atitum.
1. suimliea, oommefttua, Oa, M.
2. sup^j^aofoom, rfia frOm^i-
tftna.
suppose, arbitror, ftri, fttua sum;
putg, ir^ ft vL fttum ; jfldi«wt^
■0
Wt*
««» *?!, ftt^T
554
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
N
raprenuB poWer, rSgnum, I, y.
" ^"'SSif^ prae-stQ, fire, -stitl,
seSCum or stitum, w. dot.; an-
te-cSd5, ere, -ceasl, -cessum.
• w, occ. *
1. sarrender, terh, transitive, dS-
d6, erBT-didl, -ditum; inimn*.
mw, s3d@dere.
2. snri^nder, rerft (o/ grtrtna ft»
ar»M),Tba.do, ere, -didi. -di-
turn. *
3> surrender, noun^ xlSditio
-6ni8,T: *
' >iirroand, . oiroum-venid, «fre
-ySrflT- ventum ; ( =put nmndi
circum-do, -dare, -dedl, -da-
turn; i^ovenohdm)^ ciieum-
fundO, ere, -fildt, -fOfium.
X. raapeot, fluspicor, firl, fitua
sum.
2. snapeoted, become—, in sus-
piciSnem venio, (ire, v6ni.
ventum). '
swamp, pal-tls, -ildis, ».
swarm around, circum-fundor,
I, -fOsus sum.
sWay, diciO, -flnis, w.
swiftness, celeritfis, -tfttis, f
•word, gladius, I, m. ; witli k^
And sword, f errO et ^nl.
Tarentnm, Tarentum, i, >.
1. take, capio, ere, c6pl, cap-
tum; {of taking a census), ha-
bed, ere, ul, itum.
2. takeaway, fcoUo, ere, sustull,
: sublfttum ; S-ripifi, ere, -ripul,
-reptum ; (from, eonweaa by
dat.). '^ ^
3- take np {^JUl up), oontineS,
ere, ul ; (o/ taking np arms),
capiS, ere, c5pl, captum.
4. take an a poaftlon, odn-s!d0, '
ere, -sSdl, -sessuni.
tanffht, be—, discfl, ere, didici,
= learn.
tax, tribfltum, I, n.
tear, lacrima, ae, F. '
teU* dlc5, erev dixi, dictum, w.
aat. of person. ' ^
tein£«8t, tempestfia, -tfttis, f.
teji, decem.
tenlth, decimus, a, linLr
teuns, condicio, -6^8, f. (me
sing.^ . ^
terrify, terreS, 6re, ul, itum.
territory, ager, a«^, m.j finSs.
'mm,fM. plur. 1
terct^, terror, -oi^, j^.j timor,
-oris, M. / -
teat, periclitor, an, fttus sum.
Thames, Tamesis, is, m.; (occ,
Tameeim). , - .
than, quam.
1. t&at, j^tronrnm, is, ea, id •
ewip^fw, ille, a, ud. ' *
2. that, conj., with <iumn clauses
untrandated; with claims of
purpose, ut, n6 ; with clauses
ofresidt, ut.
their, suus, a, um ; or eSrum.
thjen (^next), deinde. *^
tliwre (=m that place), ibi ;
(==to that place), eo ; (a* in-
troductory adverb), untrans-
*«*«»• ■ V ^^y
thei genp on, turn, „ (
they, ei, eae, eaj ':■
thjn^, res, rel, r.; or in nom. '■
and occ. use neuter of adj. or
pronoun.
tnink, exlstimfl, lire, ftvl, Atuiai
arbitror, ftrl, fttuB sum.
thlr^„ tertius, a, um.
thlrkW fcrtgintft. *
thla, hlo, haec, h5c.
tlEoaffh» '^although. «
thon^nd, mllle ; ji>lnr., mllli*.
, lum, N. *T^
threfi^n, minor, ftrf, fttus sum.
th^e, trSs, tria ; three liaii*
dred, treoenti, ae, a.
throjiyh, per, to. occ. . '
1»ART VI.— VOCABULABY. %'
656
id;
(•
*
ere, -egi. -Sctam ; con-jicio, trigjtri-plek, IpKck
. '^•^:^<^^!jSr^'^^"-^":^^^ *'^mmt.s,uS;.L;c5piae,
1^1' "•' fl'". -J^^^"^' throw tPa.t, <i6n-fld6, ere, -ftous Bum.
St^f ««I' l«to, ir-rumpS, ere, 1. tF^, cSnbr, in", fttus suTm™ a^
throw one's self In front of, verb. ^
86 offers, ferre, obfcull. obllL- 9 ♦ *^ * ^ -'
turn, «,. da*. ' ^- *'^i?;iV"."^"!r' *!'' *** ^*"
% 4 «-h.^ »u •• x ' ' overTsollicitS, fire, ftvl, atum.
-i?cT i^ILm' "^^-J^^^^ «*' 3.tryt^revent.prohilio.6re,
jeci, -jectum. tn pre*., twiper/, or/u*. W
th^s, itaque.
1. time,' tempus, -oris, n.
2. time, a seoondx-t iterum,
adv.
3. time, a short — ^ paulisper,
2. turn aside, ft-yert6, ere, -verti,
-versmir. i
twelve, duodecim. «^
twenty, viginti ; twenty.flfth,
vicgsimus (a, um) qulntuis (a,
um).
^ twice, bis.
adv.
4. time, «It that-, turn, adr.?%^^dUo, duae, duo ; two hun-
crlxterally. . ' ^ . — ^, ducenti, ae, i "^
o. Itlnie.one at a — , smgulfiris,
e, adj. ^ • '
to, |jrep, ad, to. ace.; in, to. oaJ. • '
to-day, hodiS, adv.
to-morrow, crfis, ndv.
tog, itse summus, a, um, ad^,
tortoise, testadS, -dinis, F.
towards, ad, w. ace.
tower, turrisj.is, f. f{ace. turrim).
town, oppidiim, I, n.
trjnAer, mercfttor, -oris, m.
l.-'*tfa|isport, vcr6, trftnsportd,
.fire, S?t, fitum.
unable, be — ,ii6ll possum, posse,
potuL ' -
uncertain, incertus, a, <ttm.
under, sub, prep. to. aW.
undertake, sus-oipid, ere, -cSpI,
-ceptum.
undertaklnfr, cdn&tus, fls, ir.
<tnder{tand, intel-lego, ere, -l6xl,
-ISctum.
nnexlu^sted, recSns, -entis.
2. transport, adj., onerftrius, a, unfaTorable, aliSnus, a, um ;
' "* inlquus, a um ; incommodus,
a, um.
unfrl^dly, inimlous, a, um. '
nnkn^n, ino<}gnitus, a, um.
unless, nisi.
unoocjipled, bo—, vacfl, &re,ftvl,
Atum. '
P»siicc essfu^r»5yer8\p, a, am.
2. nnBl, prep., ad to. ace.
um
traveller, vifttor, -5ris, m.
treacj^ery, perfidia, ae, F.
treat, ag6, ere, Sgl, Actum.
tr^, arbor, -oris, jj^
treiMh, fossa, ae, fI
tribe, nftti5, -onis, i.
trll^^e, tribOnus, I, m.
tglbtttai ^r^^
A
trick, artifioium, I, ir.
\-.^-1
. • II II ■a.pnmpiippii
jmm
mmmm
65^
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK;
nrne, hortor, firi, atus aum. , ll^^ee vTf
2. a.e.make-of, =««e. voluntarUy, ijltro.
3. ugetooome, ventito,are,ftvL ' • -fcr ^
Stum. - ** .
1- «niu- l.u-,>esa„,,a,am. , «rK"^'"''"'''^'"' '^
parative. \
utmost, sun^mus, a, um
"camp), vallum, I, n.
wander, ,vagor, ftrl, atus sum.
^' wA|)t, mopia, ae, f.
«. wantlnir. be — , dSsum, dees-
se, d^ul.
1- war, bellum, I, n, •
^. w galley, wkr «hip, navis
^, F.) longa.
waa», moneS, Sre, ul, itum.
1. warte, (=:lo8e% dl-mitt5,.ere,
-misi, -missum. ^
2. waste, lay-, vast<5, are, av!,
fitum ; populor, ftri; atua sum.
wateb, vigilil» ae, F. ^^
Talerlu», Valerius, I, m.
▼all^tly, fortiter.
validT perfectly-, justissimus,
a, um. . .
valley, vallSs, is, f.
▼a^, virtOs, -tatis, f.
v^ne, offfreat — , ma^. -;
vanish, dis-oSdo, ere, -cessT,
cessum. ^ , • .,.—
1, va„,aj.h, vi„c5, ere, vicl, ;:g^:5S^1e";
vje^m; supers. are,^avl, ZaryjSrLXu.
2. vanqatahed, viotus a nm ^«y- *" ««y— ^^^^ «odS.
vehemeX^s, f. ' ' ^"^' Z"-""' t^^^ "^"^^ ^' P^^r.
vengeiSee, suppUcmm, In ' 3!!£?":i«*S?™: ^' ^*
venture. aude§, Sre, ausus sum Z 2* ^^!^^'^^^ ^^* ^'^' **«"»•
very, aamodum; ^eTiZ f^*^*'' fl^^^f"**^' '^^'^^ '■
Vesontlo, VesontidT «^s!^.' 2 Z'^^^^^V.?^ ^^"'' A^*"»»-
ve..^, navis, is. f. i 17^*"«' ?^*^V«' ««. -•
viotoJty, «rpreiw 6y ,««„j, ab or a3 ' ^^*^*"^' *'^' *^''
ad, Mn<;i name» o/<OTwia. 2. w«i«h - ..
victorious, victor, -firis, jl «7« *S:1^*'*'*T!.."*'^* ***^^*»
victory, Victoria, 'ae. f.' ^^^' ^^*^""»' ^^
■^
^^*^
^iji^a^iit>.4i
1,1
- PART VI. — VOCABULARY.
567
wietgh down, op-primd, ere,
; -^pressl, -pressum.
^«Iiriit (=injhtence), auctoritfts,
-tStn, F. ; (^heaviness)^ onus,
oneris, N.
welfare, consult— of, c6n8ul-6,
ere, -ul, -turn, w. dab.
treU-merlted, ' meritissimus, a,
um. ' !.
,. west, sdlis occSsus, tls, h.«>
' w^t, quis, quae, quid.
1. whatever, {pron.\ qui, quae,
quod. ,
2. whatever, adv. {=at' oK),
omnlno.
#heii (rrfa*i»e), ubi, cum ; (tnfer-
. Togatim)^ quando.* .
wheq^^, unde.
whenever, cum.
, whei^s, cum.
whether, num ; whether ... or,
utrum ... an ; sive . . . sive.
1. which (oftwo% uter, tra, trum;
2. which, ftrbm— , undo.
while, dum ; or use pres. part.
who (rdative)^ qui, quae, quod ;
Jtnterrogative), quia, quae,
quid.
whole, totus, a, nnu
wliolly, omnlno; penltuB.
why, oQr; quftrS. ■!.
w^,^ l&tus, a, um; '
widely, Ifite. • . *
wl^, lfttitQd5, -dinis, f. '
wife, con-junx, -jugis, w.
win; against the — , tue invltus,
a, um, ad;. (=Mnt/)i«tngr).
2. wUllnff, be more—, mftlO,
' mftlle, m&lul.
!• win, v\j|p6, ere, vicl, victum.
2. win over, ooncilid,^ &re, fivl,
fttum. **
«. win, try to-^over, SoIlicitSj
ftre, ftvl, fitum.
wlBf, <t^i^|{(l,^ibipirr
1* winter, verbj Iiiemo, Sre, &vl,
fttum.
2. winter, nouny hi^s, hiemis,
F. "~- ■
3. winter, pass the — , hiemo,
ftre, a^l, fttum.
winter quarters, hibema, drum,
N. plur.
wlpeonf;, dSl-ed,€re, -§i^, -Stum.
wl^e, sapiens, -entis.
' 1. wish, vols, velle^jrolui.
2. wlsS", not to — ,^ld, n5lle,
nSluTT
wlt|i, cum, w. aU. ; or use aU.
alone; (=among), apud, w. ace.
!• withdraw, withdraw one's
self, s6 re-cipio, -ere, -c6pl, ,
-ceptum ; dis-cSdo, ere, -oesi^,
-cessutn ; (if from a rampart),
dS-cSd6, ere, -cessi, -cessum.
2. withdraw (=lead off), dS-
daca, ere, -daxi, -ductum. ^
1« wlt]^ (of place), intrft, prep,
w. ace.
2. within (of time), i«c oW.
3. within, be-a very little, mi-
nimum abesse.
1. without, sine, '^ cM.,
2. wltfiont, be— ^Ji^red, 5re, ul,
itum, w. aU. ^*« ' /
withstand, sus-tineo^ §re, -tinul, /
-tenfum ; (of storms), fero,
ferre, tull, Ifttum.
/oad, vitrum, I, n. /
woman, nyjlier, -eris, p. /
wont, be— to, i«e perfect tenses 0f
cdn-8ueBc5, ere, -suSvI. '■
wood, sil^va, ae. f.
wooded, silvestris, e.
1. word, hring — , nOntiO, &re,
ftvl, fttum. -^
2. word, brlngr back-:-, renfln-
tiC, ftre, ftvl,1ftum.
work, opus, -eris,. N. '
wor&man, faber, bri, m.
wortiiy, d^us, a, um,w. obL^
~l^v). qui a«M( Mtl^vneitve.
Hf^mmmmmm
558
• '^'^ ^" ■■■■■■
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
"^onlA thM^tmavcif w. aubjiine- . Y
Uve. • • , '
!• woniiJl, verb, vulnerS, Sre, ye^, annus, T, m.
avi, atom. yegterday, herl. \
A wound, noMn, vulnus, -eris, 1. yeJTtamen.
^* •. 2: yel, not— , n6ndum.
wretched, miser, era, erum. yon,*tfl, vos. ^
wron^, injOria, ae, p.; wrongs yonnarman, adulSscSns, -entifl,
I done to ... by ..., 7Me o&;ec- M. . : '^
-- Uve and infective genitive. • your, tuus, a, um ; vester, tea.
wrong-dplngT) injOria, M, v.* , &um.
■S-iAX..
■<f--'
^'■. ^ V-
sm, -^;
.\^^'''
■ ',"«;;
-•s^V ■.„ „
^
';■ . -^ ^' -.:'! -• ■
,"''•-, ■
■".,■, ■*■
■ "" ' "■. ■ .
1
V
- y-'"' '\
r'.
:.'.. * '■■■'"/.■■ -. '■'■•.
■/ V-
':'*.. "k-
.k'/ ''''%^ -:■. ■„■:■ i'v
1
*
■!■' ■,
..L-_'*^l...
'j!
" /
Wi
■J '
— TT^r^r . < ,.,,.
4n-H*fe^^-
PART VI.-r-INDEX,
669
in. INPEX.
(7%« r^ereneet 'are to the seetitms qf Part$
, « otlierwue speciJUd.
. '*
»»
except where
Cardinal numerata, list <rf. III. 15: de-
clension of, III. 16. -
Cases, use of, see under OenitiTe, Accusa-
tlve, etc ' ■* lu.
Causal cU^ses, V. 146-148, 171. ^
Cause, Ablative of, V. 96. "
Characteristic, abladve of, V. 106; geni-
^ tive of, V. 87 ; relative clause of, V^ 82.
CAtofmiw, V. 8, i,
*^^*JSS!Sl^aiiti^ot, III. 72, a;
_^55»l»wrHimru8e of, V. 22, iU.
CMrnate accusative, V. 72.
Collective noun with plural verb, V. 18,
Commands, how expressed, V. 182
Comparatives, declension of. III. 12 : for-
wiul^V^ia"' '^'"' ^'' <'<"«*™<="on
Comparison, ablative of, V. 98 ; expreswid
hyjuam, V. wC iU. ; standak «if com-
pariBonomitted,y.,98, vi. ; ofcadjectives,
III. 13; of adverbs. III. 17; conditional
clauses of, V. 68. ■ f
Complementary inflnitive, V. 19-22.
Concessive clauses, V. 66, 66 : 171
Concords, V. 10-13.
Conditional sentences, V. 68-64^ In indi-
rect narration, V. 192; conditional
clauses of comparison, V. 68.
ConluKation of verbs. III. 27-46. *
Conjunctions, V. 4, A.
■Connection of thought, how expressed
V . 3, 6 ; 202. '
Antec^enVpeQuUariViM of'"v. 173 • umH^ Consecutive clauses, V. 29-88.
. ment of prVm^oun with. V U ' ^^^ n^S?J!T "•'™«^« Pro^. V. 201-204.
Anticipation, accusative of. V. 194 fn Coordinatmir reUtive. V. 179 '
- Ablative absolute, V. 46-80 ; 104. -
Abtative case, various uses <rf, V. 92-108 :
46-60; 64, 66.
Accent, pi^e 8.
AccomiMniment, ablative <Sf, V. 103.
^^ ® *"** infinitive construcUon, V.
Accusative case, various uses of, V. «B-76.
Adjectives, declension of, HI. 10-12; 14 •
67-69; comparion of. III. 18; eo'
•«««raent of, V. n, 12, ft; ui^d m
subrtantives, y. 206. g ; used' in a par-
titive sense V. 86, iv. ft ; genitive with,
witS?V.1S?;iii''**''^-^«'"-^''>^«-
Advantage, dative of, V. 79.
Adverbial accusative, V. 72, i. ; adverbial
clauses, position of, V. 6.
Adverbs, formation from adjectives. III.
1/; comparison of. III. 17; 60:
position of. V. 4, d. ; '
Affent, ablative of, V. 97;. dslive of, V.
80, ««; the secondary agent, V. -99, i.
Agreement, forms of, V. 10-13.
Alp, conjugation of. III. 72, c.
allqalH, declension of, III. 26 ; uses of.
V. 167, a. '
allns, d^lension of. III. U mafia Axt, V.
168, a. ''^iWi
alter, declension of, III. 14^|ftSes of, V
Answers, yea or no, V. 39, Hi.
Apodosis, V. 68.
Apposition, V. 10.
Appositive noun clauses, V. 194-199.
Arranffeiitent>of words and clauses, V. 1-9,
Attraction, subjunctive by, V. 177. i.
Attributive words, agreement of, V. 11.
bdSf, declension of. III. 9.
€
-gyflndMr,
r»BomanT - paga464r
eaplOi conjugation of, m* 89.
Coordinating relative, V. 172,
bT^? V*'i74*'"*°'' '"• **• *• • "'"<*«"«'
cum (conjunction), uses of, V. 148-161
cum (prepoeitionX appended to pro-
nouns, Ilf. 62, ft : 64, ft ; with ablative
Of manner and accompaniment, V. 108,
lay Ha
D
Dates, how expressed, page 464.
DaUve case, various uses of, V. '76-81 •
08, 66. '
dfibed, use of, V. 140, 6.
Declension of nouns. III. 1-9 ; 48-66 ; of
«ijectives. III. 10-12 : .U : :j>7-«»^^-XL
•1^ III. 16, 16 ; 61. • ^^
^
n
5§P
PHIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
Defective noans, III. 68, 6i ; adjectives,
III. 69 ; compaiiipp, III. 18 ; .60 ; verbs,
III. 72. T^
Deflqition, grenitive of, V. 89.
Deliberative questions, V. 134, d.
Demonstrative' pronouns, declension of,
III. 28, 28 ; 68 ; peculiar forms of. III.
68; uses of, V. 168^168.
Dependeift questions, V. 86-87; clauses
in indirect narration, V, 176, 176 ; 186;^
187.
G
Deponent verbs. Hi. 68 : synopsis of con
luRaiion, III. 40 ; gerundive of. III. 68.
b ; peouliuities of. III. 68, d.
DenderaMve verbe,'III. 74, o.
Desire, subjundtive of, V. 136. . - "
- ddut» deolension of. III. 9.
Difference, ablative of measure of, v. 101.
Dir«!ct object, V. 69. '
Direct question, V. 84, 88.
Disjunctive questions, V. 88.
Gender, general rolfes for, III; 47 ; gender
ending^ an9 exceptions in the five de-
(«lensions. III. 48. e; 49, e; 60, c; 61, e-;
62, c. », ».■''.
Oenitive case, various uses of, V. 82-91 ;
68, 65. • •
aerund, forms of. III. 8&; uses of, Y. 118,
i 11*' 1 ' . ,»
^ytJerundlVe, fojmjs of. III. 84 ; uses of, V.
118-121. , „ , ^,
Greek pouns, 48, d; 49» d ; 60, (fj- Griek
• accusative, V. 78.
babed, with pertebd participSC V. 182,*^
e, ii.
Heteroclite nouns, III. 66i
Heterogeneous nouns, III. 66.
Blgr?'^=?3ro,:•v-m;,.H.^.. «r^^opr;.^^^^^^
ofVV. 101, i. . , „, „ ,
Distributive n^Anerals, III. 61, eH
domas, declension of, III. 9.
dam; uses of,„V. 67 ; 163-166.
Duration of time, V. 129. *
I>uty, how exprMsedii V. 140.
' Bffeoting, construction with verbs of, V. <
88 V.
Empiuwis, in relation to the oiider of woids,
V; 8, «t. ^^
EncUtic8,V. 84, i.,fn.
eo, ooigugation of. III. 46; 71. a; pas-
. «ive d{ III. 71, o ; compounds of, IIL
71, a. , ' o .. i "
Epistolary tenses, V. 178, ji., fn. • ^
EfhicAl dative, V. 80, c.
Ezclam4tions, accusative in, V. 74. ,
if, * n
f&rl, conjugation of. III. 72, e.
Fearing, construction with verba of, -v.
188.
fero, oonluiration ^, III. 44 ; -com-
pounds of, in. 71, 6. '
Final clauses, V. 28-28^
fid, conjugation of. III. 46 ; compounds
fmintroductoryi not translated in Latin,
V. 196, fn.
fore ut, -periphrasis with, V. 88, iv.
Frequentative verbs. III. 74, b ; tenses in
frequentative! clauses, V. 149.
fnX, faeram, faer5#) in Compound
tenses, V. 182, «,'f. . , .
Future infinitive, yiith verbe o! Afl|»»V,
nromMnff, etc., y. 17. t
Fiuure partid ple. V. 188. 124.1
Future partici ple. V. 188. im.
Futurii perfgcrtense, uiii df ,
Future tense, uwi pf , Y, 181.
forms of. III. 68, a ; usee of,\Y. 168.
Bindering. verbe of, V. 189. /
llistoriaJ infinitive, Y. 112. -
Historical present, V. 179, c ; sequence of
tenses with, Y. 28, iv. ,
Hortetor^ (or Hor}i»tive|, lubjunctiv*. Y.
184, o. , ^
■■ . '*■ <. ^* ■ '
'■ ■€■■
X-stems, declension of nouns, HI. 60, h. '
Idem, declension of, III. 28 ; followed
by qui or de, V. 174 ; uses of. V. 162. •
Idiom, differences between English and .
Latin,«Y. 208;206.
ille, declension df. III. 23; peculiar
forms of, in. 68 ; uses of, Y. 160.
Imperative mood, ijnfiection of , III. 87, .
- 88 ; uses of, V. 132, 138 ; in indirect
discourse turned by subjunctive, Y.
186,1., c. ' ■
, Imperfect tense, uses of, Y. 180.
Impersonal verbe. III. 78; impersonal WW- ,
' Mve, Y. 66, 67 ; impersonal verbs, with
ol»use or infinitive as subject, Y. 110, i.
• Inceptive or inchoative verbe, III. 74,*(».
Indeclinable nouns,' gender of,JII. 47. c ;
list of. III. 64, 6 ; indecUnable adjec-
tives. III. 69. „ , , ; „,
Indefinite pronouns, decysnsion of, HI.
26; usesof, Y. 166-169. ^ . „, ^
Indicative mood, inflections of. III. '87, ',
28 ; 64, e ; tenses of, V. 178-1^. ,
Indirect narration, Y. 186-198 ; principal
claused put in, V.^ 186, 1 : subordinate
clauses in, Y. 176 ; 1$6,2 ; virtual, V. 177 ;
tenses in, Y. 187 ; pifonouns in, Y. 188 ;
adverbs in, Y. 189 ; real or apparent ex-
ceptions to rules of, Y. 175, i. ; 190;
conditional sentences in, Y. 192. -y
Indirect object, V. 77, 78.
Indirect questions, Y. 86-89.
Indirect reflexive, Y. 194,1. _
infinitive, ioHM of, HI. 81, 82 ; <W M of, i
V
\
y,l(»-lW;M-18; 19.22} 196.
9'
•*,
.47; gender
the nVe de-.
60, c; 61, «1
f, V. 82-91 ;
«of.V*. lis,
; uses of J V.
9, iV Q>tMi
ip«f, V. 182,-^
; peculiar
t,vV.168.
sequence of
>Junc^vd, V.
III.50, &.
S; followed
of. V. 162.
English Mid ^
!3; peculiar
^ 160.
I of, lU. 37, .
in indirect
JuncaTe, V.
180.
renonalfMS- ,
verbs, .with
Bct.V. llO.i.
Kill. 74, a.
of, III. 47,0 ;
inable «djec:
ision of. III.
■ of. III. 27,
98 ; principal
; suDordinate
[rtu«l,V.177;
IS in, V. 188;
apparent ex-
17B, i. ; 190;
M92.V
\'\
\
PART VI.— Mrt)EX.
-Ij
' *•
561
*"7l'**'Si??f*'v*?«* ??»JS»»«<>°^i "I- .«food", "f Indicative, Subjwictlve. eta
-InIL1sJ^tlV.-«"i T^-^ot'.^ * ."*'?«°«J."'^t of, V. 126; motion /m
Instrumental al6lative, V.'os'; 9ft
Intensive^erb8,III.'74, ft.
Intvrest, oonstruotion ndth, V. 68, 6,1.,
( Interest, dative of, ^^, 8fr.
'PlfT^*,'^^* paTticle«C^n«, nflnn«, iMin,
jy. «4, i., 36, i., 89, iv. ; vArum . . .
-^ ^ an, Y. 88k J», U. ; omnfin, necne, V. 69, i.
*nw«*<«»tive prqpouns, declension of,
III. 26 : 64 ; uses of, V. 34; 86, 87.
'"""V!'"':* verbs, corresponding to
„ English transitive verbs, V. 61-66;
• used impersonally in the passive, y. 66-
67. " ^ , . I
v.iaa.
from,
Natural gencfer, rules for, HI, 47. '
-no (encUtic), V. 84. fn.; used in' ques-
tions, V. 84, J ; 86, i. • . ^ ,
ne, with negative purpose,^. 24, 28, 1 : ,
with verbs pf fearing; V. 188 ; with dwm ' e
in clauses of proviso, V. 67 ; with im-
perative or subjunctive to express pro-
hibitions, .etc., v. 182-185 ; with clauses
of concession, V. 184-
ne . . . qaide^, y. 4^/. * .
^ -'I', ir^y*^ «o-J-^'ition in. III. ^^^^^i.^'^ST}:::^*^
lpVdicie„siono^III.28;uses,f,y. Sl^J^^.In'd'Sl'Sfv.Vii ' "* ^'
lea ^^^
Irregular nouns, TRSIbnsion of, III. 9 ;
case-endings of nouns, III. 48, c ; 49, c ;
80, e ; 61, c ; 62, ,c ; ' c^ue-endings of
•^ adjectives of third declension. III. 68. 6 ;
verhU endings. III. 66.
Is, declension of, HI. 22 ; uaes'of, V. 169.
late, declension of. III. 23 ; uses of, V.
161. ^ ...
it, no eqiliv^lsnt in JLatin. when tised 'as xwumwuve cases, iii i m .
an impersonal or representative subject, non quod, ndn onto, with Mb*
V. i», in. Junctive. V. 147 iU- • '^ ^^
Iterative verbs, III. 74, 6. ^- nonne, force of V 84 i '^
"*in*iil*^ir'*''*' "^"^ *'^*'''* '*°*^'^ '^^ffV^' noatri, noatram, use of,
Neuter adieotives used substantively witfc
, the partitive genitive, V. 86; L ; as cog-
nate aocusatives, V. 72.
nisi, in conditional clauses, V. 64|ii|i. • '
ablativtfAbsolute, V. 60, iv. ; withKie
. words, y. 44, m. ^
noil Oaollte). with infinitive, to ez*
proM proUbitions, V. 188.
nolo, oonjugatimi of, III. O. "
Nominative cases. III. i., fn.
^
Jam, and its compounds, with pi
and imperfect, V. 179, e ; 180, e.
^ Jiipplter, declension of. III. J.
Ju«rur«kndam, declension of. III. 9. »
Jusnve subjunctiy e, V? 184, "ft.
.■ . , ' ■ ■ ■ «■■-■■'.■ •~ »
III. 62, a.
woun clauses, different forma of the. V.
194199.
Nouns, declension of, 111^1-9 ; 46-66. <.
,nttin, force of, V. 84, i. ; in dependent,
questions, /. 86, i. "^ .
Numeral adverbf. III, 61, d. ^
Numerals, III. 16, 16 ; 61 ; method of
. c<Hnbining, III. 61, a.
lloett'-use of, y. 148 ; as'ooncessive par-
ticle, y. 66, i. *^
Limit of motion, accusative of, y. 126.
Locfl^tive ablative, y. 92 ; 106.
Looative case.tiie. III. 48, e ; 49. e; 60, «. ; xM^ cases. III. 1. fn.
Object, direct, V. 69; indirect, y. 77, 78;
noun tilauses used as objects, y. 194-199.
Oyective genitive, y. 86 ; with adjectives,
S :
opoirtet, bses of, 140, 6]
Optative use of subjunctive, y. 136. *
drdti&obliqua, see Indirect narration.
Order of words, y. 1-4 J of clauses, y. 8-9 ;
Ordinal numerals! list of. III. 16; deolen-
slonof,III. 1«. . -
niAg^Sf comparison expressed by,, nt.
60,6. -
m&ld, conjugation of, III. 48.
Manner, ablative of ^ y. 103.
materfanilll&s, declension' of. III. 9.
m&xlme, comparison exprrabed by, III.
60, ft. ' • ' « ,
Means.ablative(rf, y. 99. . * • .^ * -♦ V *^ . "
mendnl, conjugation -of,^in. 72, 6; Participial phrases, value 'of, t. 48, 48;
TOnstructidnwith, y. 63,o. . • position of^ y. 7. ?"».».».«».
Sin^ 'iZni^''%'Z- ^*.- ' . trr .. ^ticiples. formation of. III, 38, 34 ; use
^!!: «/?fPi?*^* declension of, III. 16 ; of, yT 40-44 ; 46-60 ; 118-124 ; with force
use of, in. 61 . < ■ of B iib e tantiv e s. y. g 06. a : m
TonXhs, names of, page 464, fn. ^ present partioipleTlirsS. «•
562
PRIMAKY LATIN BOOk.
If
-( -V,
gMlitive srenitive, V. 86.
8?M^*l™r:.!:i5'^^^°" <>'• "I- 28. «>. 82,
' « *• ^J •'np«'w>nal use of. V. 66 H7 ^
J'erfect tenafff uses of Vi ih9 . ^JL^
^riodks'stnicture, V, 9 ; 204
^*iT2^£"*«<?"^"' «leclension of. IH. 18.
Pluperfeot tense, uses of, V. 188. •
g?-?,*'.<^'^'«"'io" of, III. 12.
Possesrion. dative of, V. 80. e.
Potie^ve genitive. V. 88.
*S*^''* pronouns (adjectives). Ill ^l •
<«, « ; uses of, V. lesr '
4^amqaain, In ooncesrire clauses. V
/ 66, a ; meaning and yet, V 66 ofrT
tei»^*?. with subJunctiCV •«„.
" joined with single word V «« « ' '
inindirect discourse, V. 168 f fit ^J
liberaUve quesUons. V 134^ -lH^t^S
cal question, V. 188 b. ' ' '^^"^'
S«K «ee Relative Pronoun. '
V ?67": '*««'^'^0'' o'. ni. 28 ; use. if,
qaIn>withwordsofdbuMMi0 nn>«^*,'^^
etc.. y. 139; in rel3K3££^C!
> octeristic, V. 83, ij. *»•«'■«■ oi cnar-
^^**:.'"**®^"i*®' declension of,' III. 26-
.64, c ; uses of, V. 166, a. '
o/.Tl665? ***^*'"^*"' «'• "I- 26 : uses -
^?mT'''* '''«'«'«•»0° <I"- 26 ; uses of, V.
qnd, with clauses of puroose V «« in
quod (conjunction),^". w^i^.i'Ji.
ducinsr noun oUus^i, V l" ' ^~
qnomliius, use of, V. i
^"Tv.l^S?"**''**" **'•'"•". 70;
Potentiai subjunctive, V. 186.
Predicate noun, V, 12, : adJectivA V i»
™K?*4.?"; ****> accusative. V 70-
*JS.*^>*tf ve, V. 108 ; construction wi?h
J|'^«»npo«n<i«i with prepositions, V
Present tense, uses of, V. 179.
Price, genitive of, V. 88; ablative of, V.
pS-?-°^-^^^^^^^^^
rroniMtlons, how expressed. V IM
Pronouns, see PersonVl, RelaWe,etdL
Pronunciation of LaUn pace 1
Protasis, V. 68. »**•*•
ftx)viso, clauses of, V. 87.
V^'m^k"^ ^y ">• «ubjunctive,
™«*i *®,i }'y •"?'"« «^ter verb oi
• , • ' "'^^^i «Utlve of, y. 81.
j^ * ' '^ ■
qaani, with superlative. V. 174 I •
■'%'
R^iprocal retation, how expttt^td^OL
RefeVenoe, dative of, V. 80, 6.
ntnt!^* construction with, V 68.
tS!.^.H* P/onoun. declension oUII 20 •
peculiar forms of , III 62 a 'iw fl«i'-„^*
second person. lil esrrfVSi^^f^V
^64 ; verbs. V. 69, vii. • «»«• "^ V.
K?V^'7^.' °' characteristic. V. 82 ; -
pJi!.*i ' *'^ ' concessive. V. I7i
Relative pronouns, declension of. I I 24«
rtapubll^i declension of. HL 9
Result, clauses of, V. 29-38.
•nfg and yntu, V. IM^
«•yiw. construction with verbs of, V,
18, 5/ »»*"on»"yin the passlv;,v:
■*enSrv.TA "1«'' = "- "'' ""•'•
Semi-deponents, III, 88, 0.
Sense construction, V. 18 11 a.
Separation, ablative of, V.W- dative with
vert» of, V. 80 o * ' "awve witn
' iSofl "'^T,"' ^•'"« «nd ways ol
tranHlating. V. 144. "j" «•
■I, with (onciitional clauses. V 68-88.
Source, ablative of, V. m ' '^' '*'*^* /
A.
S'
/
PART VI.— INDEX.
"s.
563
Specification, aocoaative of, V. 73 : abla-
tive of, V. 102. . '
Stem, nature of. III. 48ftn. 1.
Stems of the five declensionB, III. 48. a •
49, o; 60, a ; 61, o ; 62, a ; preaent, per-
fect and supme stems of. verbe, III. 66.
Stature of sentences in LaUn, V. 1-9;
Subject, ajrreement of verb with, V. 12
a ; subject ^f infinitive, V. 108 ; of his'
*0"«»> infinitive, V. 112 ; noun clauses
"»«»M«ubJects,V. 194-199.
Subjective genitive, V. 84.
Subjunctive mood, inflection of, III. 29.
SO ; m princip^ clauses, V. 134-136 : iii
V "^,o' ^"'5T' ^- 2*-27; ot resilt,
V. ^-32; in dependent question», V.
86 ; in conditional danses, V. 61. 63 : in
concessive cUuses, V. 66; in conciitional
clauses of comparison, V. «8: with
yettmpt fearing, V. 188; with ouinand
9U«wmt«. V. 139; witll ytiod,™. " -
with mim, y. 148, 161; with
flonee, qwad, V. 67 ; 166 ; with «i
9^m a,m\ priugqtidm; V. 166 : with
qui, V. 27 ; 32 ;7l71 ; 'in indl?e^t dS
course, V, 176 ; 186 ; of virtual Indirect
narration," V. 177 ;' b> "attli^tion," v!
Substahtival use of infinitive. V. 109-111
Substantive dauseiT. V. 27 ; 81 ; 194-199 '
■nm, conjugation of, III. 41 ; peculiar
forms of. in 70 ; compounds of. III. 70.
■^"1?*?*%*'^'> /*"«« 0' characteristic,
»• az. I. ; 167, a.
iV«"?u'°'™'"**'" 0'' ""f- 8« ; UK» of, V.
116-117. V
SylUbication.pjgii
Syncopated verbliiCl III. 66. a.
nlA,vrith perfect indicative, V. 162, b •
with aublunctive in relative clause of
purpose, V. 26. ^
"y^nii declension of, III. 14 ; uses of,
V. 166, ft.
Unas, declension of. III. 14. '
"1."^^*')» *° denote concession, V. 184 •
fh final clauses, V. 24, 27 ; in consecu-
t ve clauses, V. 29, 81 ; substiintive
clauses introduced by, V. 196, 197 : in
temporal clauser, V^ 162, b; omis^on
after certain verbs,^ Vl 28, vi. """•""
"^ W** declension of, III. 26 ; use of,
ntlnam, use of, V. 135.
utor, with ablative, V. 64 ; with two ab-
latives, y. 66, v.; gerundive of, used im-
perspnaUy, V. 67, fn.: gerundive of,
used personally, V. 119, ii.
atnuu....M|, V.8&
Temporal claules, V. 149-M(8.
♦K^, °i ui® indicative, >. 178184; of
^ H^ «nflnitiye, V. 16; no, ii. ; of par-
ticiples. V. 41 ; 123 ; of the subjunctive.
^ we under the various kinds of subjuno-
Wilf U , '"direct narration, V. 187.
Time, duration of, V. 129 ; time when, Y.
180 ; time withm which, V. isi.
ti^ns.conipounds of, with tw6 accuaa-
^*1W* *^*°'"^« o'» V. 88; ab|ativ*o«iV.
^tr^*7HV^ ** dfeMrontfl, construe-
Udta of, V. 14-18 ; personal construction
-.•n I»«ive, V. 18, vii.
^^^i^'^^^f-ifi^ genitive. V. 90, 1.;
Verbal nouns, infinitive, V. 109-112'
gerund, V. 113, IM; supine, V. 116-117.'^ T
Verbs, conjugation of, Ut. 27-46 ; princi«f^
Pjl parta of, III. 66 ; deponent, ifi. 40 r '
^t' ■«""■deponent, III. fe, e ; defective,
III. 72 ; impersonal, III. 78 ; irregular
forms. III. *B ; position of, V. 2, 8r4. n'
tenement of finite verb with subject.
Y,- ^2. a; genitive with, V. 68 : 91 ; da-
^«'ife*^®**'*» ▼«•tram, um of,
III. 0z, a. '
Tldeor, used personally, V. 18,' viL
Virtual indirect narration. V. 17^
vla,^ declension of. 111. 9g 4 ^ -
Vocative case, III. 1, fn
WIslv how expressed, V. 186.
)VmUd, different values and wano( tnu-
l»Ung, V. 187. , ^^'
■/-
i:<.:.
■f
"F
>
^